Telemecanique Power Control & Protection Components Technical

Power control and protection components technical catalogue
06
Power control and protection components technical catalogue
Power control
and protection
Power control
and
protection
Contents
Chapter 1: Technical and application guidance Chapter 2: Contactors and protection relays
SK mini: contactors K contactors and overload relays TeSys model d contactors and overload relays Auxiliary contact blocks, accessories and coils for model d contactors LT47 and LR97D over-current relays TeSys Model U motor starter controller F contactors Auxiliary contact blocks, coils and accessories for F contactors LR9F electronic overload relays LT6 electronic multifunction motor protection relays LT3 thermistor protection relays Special purpose contactors TeSys Quickfit installation system
Chapter 3: Circuitbreakers
GV2 thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers and magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers
Chapter 4: Motor starters

Open mounted starters GV2 combination starters Enclosed starters
Chapter 5: Switching and fused protection devices

Vario switch disconnectors LK3 switch disconnectors GS1 fuse combination switches Fuse carriers and fuses
Chapter 6: Control relays

SK mini control relays K control relays TeSys model d control relays
Chapter 7: Modular contactors and relays

GC modular contactors GF impulse relays
Chapter 8: Product reference index and Telemecanique authorised distributors
Technical
and application guidance
Technical
1/0
and
application guidance
Chapter 1
Technical and application guidance
Definitions and comments Protective treatment and degrees of protection
1/2 and 1/3 1/4 to 1/7
Standards and approvals
1/8 and 1/9
Duty conditions, voltage and full load currents
1/10 to 1/13
Contactor utilisation categories
AC1 contactor selection guide
1/14 and 1/15
AC3 contactor selection guide
1/16 to 1/19
AC2 and AC4 contactor selection guide
1/20 to 1/23
DC1 to DC5 contactor selection guide
1/24 to 1/27
Selection of contactors for rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
1/28 and 1/29
Contactors for lighting circuits
1/30 to 1/33
Contactors for heating circuits
1/34 and 1/35
Contactors for transformer primary switching
1/36
Contactors for capacitor switching
1/37
Motor starter co-ordination tables
1/38 to 1/47
Long distance remote control
1/48 to 1/51
Product packaging
1/52 and 1/53
1/1
Definitions and comments
Altitude
The rarefied atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor. It also reduces the cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor (unless the temperature drops at the same time). No derating is necessary up to 3000 m. Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage and current (a.c. supply) are as follows. Altitude Rated operational voltage Rated operational current 3500 m 0.90 0.92 4000 m 0.80 0.90 4500 m 0.70 0.88 5000 m 0.60 0.86
Ambient air temperature
The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The operating characteristics are given: - with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 C, - with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 C. This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and duty, utilisation category and ambient temperature around the device. The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a minimum of 8 hours without its temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards. The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a short time after a period of no load, without dangerous overheating. This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current, determines the use of the contactor or starter, and on which the corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits it is expressed as the voltage between phases. Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui. The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form (less than 5% total harmonic distortion). This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and referred to in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As the specifications are not identical for all standards, the rated value given for each of them is not necessarily the same. The peak value of a voltage surge which the device is able to withstand without breaking down. The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor, at the stated operational voltage. This is the current value which the contactor can break in accordance with the breaking conditions specified in the IEC standard. This is the current value which the contactor can make in accordance with the making conditions specified in the IEC standard. This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T) m= t T
Rated operational current (Ie) Rated conventional thermal current (Ith) (1) Permissible short time rating Rated operational voltage (Ue)
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational power (expressed in kW) Rated breaking capacity (2) Rated making capacity (2) On-load factor (m)
Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current Pole impedance The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components between the input terminal and the output terminal. The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component (X = L). The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally given for 50 Hz. This average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current. This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage. This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow through the main poles) which the contactor can perform without mechanical failure (1) Conventional thermal current, in free air, conforming to IEC standards. (2) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component. Note: These definitions are extracted from standard IEC/EN 60947-1.
Electrical durability
Mechanical durability
1/2
Definitions and comments
Contactor utilisation categories conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1
1
The standard utilisation categories define the current values which the contactor must be able to make or break. These values depend on: - the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors, - the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting or running, reversing, plugging. a.c. applications Category AC-1 This category applies to all types of a.c. load with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95 (cos 0.95). Application examples: heating, distribution. Category AC-2 This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors. On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated current of the motor. On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains supply voltage. This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking during normal running of the motor. On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated current of the motor. On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the contactor terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light. Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc. Categories AC-4 and AC-2 These categories cover applications with plugging and inching of squirrel cage and slip ring motors. The contactor closes at a current peak which may be as high as 5 or 7 times the rated motor current. On opening it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, cranes and hoists, metallurgy industry. d.c. applications Category DC-1 Category DC-3 This category applies to all types of d.c. load with a time constant (L/R) of less than or equal to 1 ms. This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of shunt motors. Time constant 2 ms. On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated motor current. On opening, the contactor must be able to break 2.5 times the starting current at a voltage which is less than or equal to the mains voltage. The slower the motor speed, and therefore the lower its back e.m.f., the higher this voltage. Breaking is difficult. This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of series wound motors. Time constant 7.5 ms. On closing, the contactor makes a starting current peak which may be as high as 2.5 times the rated motor current. On opening, the contactor breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Category AC-3
Category DC-5
Utilisation categories for auxiliary contacts & control relays conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
a.c. applications Category AC-14 This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA. Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays. Category AC-15 This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA. Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors. d.c. applications Category DC-13 This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time taken to reach 95% of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the power P drawn by the load (with P 50 W). Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors without economy resistor.
1/3
Protective treatment
according to climatic environment
Depending on the climatic and environmental conditions in which the equipment is placed, Schneider can offer specially adapted products to meet your requirements.
In order to make the correct choice of protective finish, two points should be remembered: i The prevailing climate of the country is never the only criterion. i Only the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the equipment need be considered.
All climates treatment TC

This is the standard treatment for Schneider equipment and is suitable for the vast majority of applications. It is the equivalent of treatments described as Klimafest, Climateproof, Total tropicalisation or Super tropicalisation and meets the same requirements, in particular : i Publication UTE C 63-100 (method l), successive cycles of humid heat at: + 40 C and 95 % relative humidity. i DIN 50016 - Variations of ambient conditions within a climatic chamber: + 23 C and 83 % relative humidity, + 40 C and 92 % relative humidity. It also meets the requirements of the following marine classification authorities: BV-LROS-GL-DNV-RINA. Characteristics i Steel components are usually treated with zinc chromate and, when they have a mechanical function, they may also be painted. i Insulating materials are selected for their high electrical, dielectric and mechanical characteristics. i Metal enclosures have a stoved paint finish, applied over a primary phosphate protective coat, or are galvanised (e.g. some prefabricated busbar trunking components). Limits for use of TC (All climates) treatment i TC treatment is suitable for the following temperatures and humidity: Temperature (C) Relative humidity (%) 20 95 40 80 50 50
i It may also be used where the above limits are only exceeded accidentally or for very short periods, or where temperature variations are not sufficient or fast enough to cause heavy condensation or dripping water on the equipment. TC treatment is therefore suitable for all latitudes, including tropical and equatorial regions, where the equipment is mounted in normal, ventilated industrial locations. Being sheltered from external climatic conditions, temperature variations are small, the risk of condensation is minimised and the risk of dripping water is virtually non-existent. Extension of use of TC (All climates) treatment In cases where the humidity around the equipment exceeds the conditions described above, where the equipment, in tropical regions, is mounted outdoors, or where it is placed in a very humid location (laundries, sugar refineries, steam rooms, etc.), TC treatment can still be used if the following precautions are taken: i The enclosure in which the equipment is mounted must be protected with a TH finish (see next page) and must be well ventilated to avoid condensation and dripping water (e.g. enclosure base plate mounted on spacers). i Components mounted inside the enclosure must have a TC finish. i If the equipment is to be switched off for long periods, a heater must be provided and switched on automatically when the equipment is turned off. This heater keeps the inside of the enclosure at a temperature slightly higher than the outside surrounding temperature, thereby avoiding any risk of condensation and dripping water (the heat produced by the equipment itself in normal running is sufficient to provide this temperature difference). i For pilot devices, the use of TC treatment can be extended to outdoor use provided the enclosure is made of light alloys, zinc alloys or plastic material. In this case, it is essential to ensure that the degree of protection against penetration of liquids and solid objects is suitable for the applications involved.
1/4
Protective treatment
according to climatic environment
TH treatment for hot and humid environments

This treatment is for hot and humid atmospheres where installations are subject to condensation, dripping water and the risk of fungi. Plastic insulating components are also resistant to attacks from insects such as termites and cockroaches. These properties have led to this treatment being described as Tropical Finish, but this does not mean that all equipment installed in tropical and equatorial regions must systematically have undergone TH treatment. On the other hand, certain operating conditions in temperate climates may well require the use of TH treated equipment (see limitations for use of TC treatment).
Special characteristics of TH treatment i All insulating components are made of materials which are either resistant to fungi or treated with a fungicide, and which have increased resistance to creepage (Standards IEC 112, NF C 26-220, DIN 5348). i Metal enclosures receive a top-coat of stoved, fungicidal paint, applied over a rust inhibiting undercoat. Components with TH treatment may be subject to a surcharge (1). Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (1) A large number of Telemecanique products are TH treated as standard and are, therefore, not subject to a surcharge.
Protective treatment selection guide

Location Environmental conditions Duty cycle Internal heating of enclosure when not in use Unnecessary Type of climate Unimportant Protective treatment of of components enclosure TC TC
Indoors
No dripping water or condensation Presence of dripping water or condensation
Unimportant
Frequent switching off for periods of more than 1 day Continuous
No Yes Unnecessary Unnecessary
Temperate Equatorial Unimportant Unimportant Temperate Equatorial Temperate Equatorial Unimportant
TC TH TC TC TC TH TC TH TC
TH TH TH TH TC TH TH TH TH
Outdoors (sheltered) Exposed outdoors or near the sea
No dripping water or dew Frequent and regular presence of dripping water or dew
Unimportant
Frequent switching off for periods of more than 1 day
No Yes
Continuous Unnecessary Unimportant TC TH These treatments cover, in particular, the applications defined by methods I and II of guide UTE C 63-100.
Special precautions for electronic equipment

Electronic products always meet the requirements of TC treatment. A number of them are TH treated as standard. Some electronic products (for example: programmable controllers, flush mountable controllers CCX and flush mountable operator terminals XBT) necessitate the use of an enclosure providing a degree of protection to at least IP 54, as defined by the standards IEC 664 and NF C 20 040, for use in industrial applications or in environmental conditions requiring a TH treatment. These electronic products, including flush mountable products, must have a degree of protection to at least IP 20 (either provided by the enclosure itself or following installation) for restricted access locations where the degree of pollution does not exceed 2 (a test booth not containing machinery or other dust producing activities, for example).
Special treatments
For highly corrosive industrial environments, Schneider is able to offer special protective treatments. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
1/5
Degrees of protection
provided by enclosure
Degrees of protection against the penetration of solid bodies, water and personnel access to live parts
The European standard IEC/EN 60529 dated October 1991, IEC publication 529 (2nd edition - November 1989), defines a coding system (IP code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against accidental direct contact with live parts and against the ingress of solid foreign objects or water. This standard does not apply to protection against the risk of explosion or conditions such as humidity, corrosive gasses, fungi or vermin. Certain equipment is designed to be mounted on an enclosure which will contribute towards achieving the required degree of protection (example: control devices mounted on an enclosure). Different parts of an equipment can have different degrees of protection (example: enclosure with an opening in the base). Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external factors. Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed.
IP iii code
The IP code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IP 55) and may include an additional letter when the actual protection of personnel against direct contact with live parts is better than that indicated by the first numeral (e.g. IP 20C). Any characteristic numeral which is unspecified is replaced by an X (e.g. IP XXB).
1st characteristic numeral: corresponds to protection of the equipment against penetration of solid objects and protection of personnel against direct contact with live parts. Protection of the equipment Protection of personnel Non-protected Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 50 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diame ter greater than or equal to 12.5 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 2.5 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter > 1 mm. Dust protected (no harmful deposits). Protected against direct contact with the back of the hand (accidental contacts).
2 nd characteristic numeral: corresponds to protection of the equipment against penetration of water with harmful effects.
0 1
Non-protected
50 mm
0 1
Non-protected Protected against vertical dripping water, (condensation).

1 5
2
Protected against direct finger contact.
12,5 mm
Protected against dripping water at an angle of up to 15.
3
Protected against direct contact with a 2.5 mm tool.
60
Protected against rain at an angle of up to 60. Protected against splashing water in all directions. Protected against water jets in all directions.
2,5 mm
5
Protected against direct contact with a 1 mm wire.
1 mm
6
Protected against direct contact with a 1 mm wire.
Protected against powerful jets of water and waves.
7 6
Dust tight. Protected against direct contact with a 1 mm wire.
1m
15 cm min.
Protected against the effects of temporary immersion. Protected against the effects of prolonged immersion under specified conditions.
8
m
1/6
Degrees of protection against mechanical impact
The European standard IEC/EN 50102 dated March 1995 defines a coding system (IK code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against external mechanical impact. Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external factors. Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed.
Additional letter: corresponds to protection of personnel against direct contact with live parts.
IK ii code
The IK code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IK 05).
2 characteristic numerals: corresponding to a value of impact energy.
A B C D
With the back of the hand.
h (cm)
Energy (J)
00
With the finger.
Non-protected 7.5
h
01
With a 2.5 mm tool.
0,2 kg
0.15 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.7
02 03 04 05
10 17.5 25 35
With a 1 mm wire.
06 07
0,5 kg h
20 40
1 2
08
1,7 kg h
30
09 10
5 kg h
20 40
10 20
1/7
Product standards and approvals
Standardisation
Conformity to standards The products manufactured by Telemecanique satisfy, in the majority of cases, national (for example: BS in Great Britain, NF in France, DIN in Germany), European (for example: EN) or international (IEC) standards. These product standards precisely define the performance of the designated products (such as IEC 60947 for low voltage equipment). When used correctly, as designated by the manufacturer and in accordance with the regulations and rules of the art, these products will allow assembled equipment, machine systems or installations to conform to their appropriate standards (for example: IEC 60204, relating to electrical equipment used on industrial machines). Telemecanique is able to provide proof of conformity of its production, in accordance with the standards selected by ourselves, due to our quality assurance system. On request, and depending on the situation, Telemecanique can provide the following: - a declaration of conformity, - a certificate of conformity (ASEFA/LOVAG), - an approval certificate or agreement, in the countries where this procedure is required or for particular specifications, such as those existing in the merchant marine. Code ANSI BS CEI DIN/VDE EN GOST IEC JIS NBN NEN NFC SAA UNE Standards body Name American National Standards Institute British Standards Institution Comitato Electtrotechnico Italiano Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker Comit Europen de Normalisation Electrotechnique Gosudarstvenne Komitet Standartov International Electrotechnical Commission Japanese Industrial Standard Institut Belge de Normalisation Nederlands Normalisatie Institut Union Technique de l'Electricit Standards Association of Australia Instituto Nacional de Racionalizacion y Normalizacion Country Abbreviation ANSI BSI CEI VDE CENELEC GOST IEC JISC IBN NNI UTE SAA IRANOR USA Great Britain Italy Germany Europe Russia Worldwide Japan Belgium Netherlands France Australia Spain
European EN standards This is a group of technical specifications established in conjunction with, and approval of, the relative bodies within the various CENELEC member countries (EEC and EFTA). Arrived at by the principal of consensus, the European standards are the result of a majority vote. Such adopted standards are then integrated into the national collection of standards, and contradictory national standards are withdrawn. The European standards are now incorporated within the French standards and carry the prefix NF EN. Under the Technical Union of Electricity (UTE), the French version of the corresponding European standard carries a double notation: European reference (NF EN ) and classification (C ). In addition, the standard NF EN 60947-4-1 relating to motor contactors and starters, effectively constitutes the French version of the European standard EN 60947-4-1 and carries the UTE classification C 63-110. This standard is identical to the British standard BS EN 60947-4-1 or the German standard DIN VDE 0660 Teil 102. Whenever reasonably practical, European standards reflect the international standards (IEC). For automation system components and distribution equipment, Telemecanique supplements the requirements of the French NF standards with those necessary for all other major industrial countries.
Regulations
European Directives The opening of the European market assumes a harmonisation of the regulations pertaining to each member country of the European Community. The purpose of the European Directive is the elimination of obstacles hindering the free circulation of goods within the European Community, and its application applies to each member country. Member countries are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and to simultaneously withdraw any contradictory regulation. The Directives, in particular those of a technical content concerning us here, only establish the objectives to be obtained and are referred to as essential requirements. The manufacturer is obliged to ensure that all measures are taken to provide conformity to the regulations of the particular Directive applicable to his product. As a general rule, the manufacturer certifies conformity to the essential requirements of the Directive(s) for his product by affixing a CE marking. Significance of the CE marking - The CE marking affixed to a product signifies that the manufacturer certifies that the product conforms to the relevant European Directive(s) and is obligatory for a product, subject to one or more of the European Directives, before it can be freely distributed within the European Community. - The CE marking is intended solely for national market control authorities. - The CE marking must not be confused with a conformity marking.
1/8
Product standards and approvals
European Directives (continued) For electrical equipment, only conformity to standards signifies that the product is suitable for its designated function, and only the guarantee of an established manufacturer can provide a high level of quality assurance. For Telemecanique labelled products, one or several Directives are liable to be applied, in particular: - the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by the Directive 93/68/EEC: the CE marking relating to this Directive, obligatory from 1st. January 1997. - the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by the Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC: the CE marking on products covered by this Directive, obligatory from 1st. January 1996. ASEFA-LOVAG certification The function of ASEFA (Association des Stations d'Essais Franaise d'Appareils lectriques - Association of French Testing Stations for Low Voltage Industrial Electrical Equipment) is to carry out tests for conformity to standards and to issue certificates and test reports. ASEFA laboratories are authorised by the National Testing Network (RNE). ASEFA is now effectively a member of the European accord group LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement Group). This means that any certificates issued by LOVAG/ASEFA are recognised by all the authorities forming the membership of the group and carry the same validity as those issued by any of the member authorities.
Quality labels
When components can be used in domestic and similar applications, it is sometimes necessary to obtain a Quality label which is a form of certification of conformity. Code Quality label Country CEBEC Comit Electrotechnique Belge Belgium KEMA-KEUR Keuring van Electrotechnische Materialen Netherlands NF-USE Union Technique de l'Electricit France VE sterreichischer Verband fr Electrotechnik Austria SEMKO Svenska Electriska Materiel Kontrollanatalten Sweden
Approvals
In some countries, the approval of certain electrical equipment is required by law. In this case, an approval certificate is issued by the official test authority. Each approved component must bear the relevant quality label when this is mandatory: Code Approval authority Country ASE Association Suisse des Electriciens Switzerland CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada DEMKO Danmarks Elektriske Materielkontrol Denmark FI Shktarkastuskeskus Elinspektions Centralen (SETI) Finland NEMKO Norges Elektriske Materiellkontroll Norway UL Underwriters Laboratories USA Note on approvals issued by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). There are two levels of approval: Recognized ( ) The component is fully approved for inclusion in equipment built in a workshop, where the operating limits are known by the equipment manufacturer and where its use within such limits is acceptable by the Underwriters Laboratories. The component is not approved as a Product for general use because its manufacturing characteristics are incomplete or its application possibilities are limited. A Recognized component does not necessarily carry the approval symbol. The component conforms to all the requirements of the classification applicable to it and may therefore be used both as a Product for general use and as a component in assembled equipment. A Listed component must carry the approval symbol.
Listed (UL)
Marine classification authorities

Prior approval by certain marine classification authorities is generally required for electrical equipment which is intended for use on board merchant vessels. Code Classification authority Country BV Bureau Veritas France DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway GL Germanischer Lloyd Russia LROS Lloyd's Register of Shipping Great Britain NKK Nippon Kaiji Kyoka Japan RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italy RRS Register of Shipping Russia
1/9
Standard motor duty conditions
General
The terms used below are based on the definitions given the standard "Rotating electrical machines - Ratings and performance" IEC/EN 60034-1. The function of motors is specified in accordance with conventional types of duty, covering one or more normal running states during specified periods, following a given sequence. The running state is understood to mean the whole of the electrical and mechanical forces controlling the operation of a machine at any given time. Thermal equilibrium is the state attained when temperatures taken on different parts of the motor vary by no more than 2K per hour. The load factor, expressed as a percentage, is the ratio between the on-load operating time, including starting and braking, and the total cycle time.
Duty types
S1 - Continuous duty: This is operation in a constant state for a time sufficient to achieve thermal equilibrium. The nominal power rating of the motor Pn applies to this duty. The different values given by the maker for other duties give the power rating Pe relating to a particular duty. S2 - Short time duty: This is operation in a constant state for a given time, less than that required to produce thermal equilibrium, followed by a break lasting long enough to restore the temperature to within approximately 2K of that of the cooling medium. This duty is defined by a time rating, being 10 - 30 - 60 - 90 or 120 minutes. S3 - Intermittent periodic duty: This consists of a sequence of identical cycles, each with a constant state operating time and a resting time. The heat generated during starting is negligible. The usual maximum is six cycles per hour. S4 - Intermittent periodic duty with starting: This consists of a sequence of identical cycles, each with a constant state operating time and a resting time, where the starting time is significant. To stop the operation, the motor is either allowed to slow down of its own accord after being switched off or stopped by a braking method such as a mechanical brake, which avoids further heating of the motor windings. An S4 duty rating is defined by the load factor for each cycle and the number of starting operations per given time (preferably 1 hour). It is necessary to state precisely the type of starting and its duration. S5 - Intermittent periodic duty with starting and electrical braking: This consists of a sequence of identical cycles, each with a starting time, a constant state running time, a short electrical braking time and a resting time. The S5 duty is defined like the S4, with the addition of precise information concerning the type of braking and its duration. The cycles can include inching, i.e. incomplete starting. S6 - Continuous-operation periodic duty: A sequence of identical duty cycles, each cycle consisting of a period of operation at constant load and a period of operation at no-load. There is no rest and de-energized period. S7 - Continuous-operation periodic duty with electric braking: A sequence of identical duty cycles, each cycle consisting of a period of starting, a period of operation at constant load and a period of electric braking. There is no rest and de-energized period.
Selection criteria
Motor manufacturers commonly list the kW ratings suitable for a standard S1 duty. Where a system requires a motor having a different duty type to be employed it is essential that a motor suitable for that duty be employed together with motor starter components suitably rated according to the duty as defined in the following pages. Thermal overload classes, 10A, 10, 20 and 30, are available for the protection of motors having differing starting time. Most motors and starters will employ a Class 10A or Class 10 overload. Where a long starting time is required, using a Class 20 or Class 30 overload, it is important to ensure that both motor and starter components are suitable for the motor duty envisaged.
1/10
Voltage ratings
Standard IEC/EN 60038

With the publication of the 1983 edition of this standard, voltage ratings in the field of low voltage products were redefined. The a.c. power supply mains ratings 220 V/380 V and 240 V/415 V have been replaced by a single rating of 230 V/400 V. For a 20-year transitional period until the year 2003, a + 6 %/- 10 % tolerance corresponding to 244 V and 207 V has been established for countries that used the voltage rating 220 V/380 V. For countries that used the voltage rating 240 V415 V, a + 10 %/- 6 % tolerance corresponding to 253 V and 216 V is applicable. Establishing mains tolerances until the year 2003 ensures that electronic equipment designed for the old voltages will function safety until the end of their service life. Starting in 2003, voltage ratings will be expanded to + 10 %/- 10 % in all countries. Phase to neutral voltage ratings and their tolerances for various low voltage mains supplies
Voltage (V)
255 253
244 242
220 V
220 V
230 V
240 V
240 V
230
226
216
207
198
Old mains supply Transitional period to the year 2003 for the old mains supply Application of standard IEC/EN 60038
1/11
Tests

Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming to IEC/EN 60947 based on rated operational current Ie and rated operational voltage Ue
Contactors
1
Making and breaking conditions (normal operation) a.c. supply Typical applications Resistors, non inductive or slightly inductive loads Motors Slip ring motors: starting, breaking. AC-2 2 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.65 2 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.65 4 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.65 4 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.65 Utilisation category AC-1 Making I U Ie 1.05 Ue Breaking I U Ie 1.05 Ue Making and breaking conditions (occasional operation) Making I U 1.5 Ie Breaking I U 1.5 Ie
cos 0.8
cos 0.8
cos
cos
1.05 Ue 0.8
1.05 Ue 0.8
Squirrel cage motors: AC-3 starting, breaking le 100 A whilst motor running. Ie > 100 A Squirrel cage or slip AC-4 ring motors: starting, le 100 A plugging, inching Ie > 100 A ` d.c. supply Typical applications Resistors, non inductive or slightly inductive loads
2 Ie 2 Ie 6 Ie 6 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35 0.45 0.35
2 Ie 2 Ie 6 Ie 6 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue 1.05Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35 0.45 0.35
10 Ie 10 Ie 12 Ie 12 Ie
1.05 Ue 0.45 1.05 Ue 0.35 1.05 Ue 0.35 1.05 Ue 0.35
8 Ie 8 Ie 10 Ie 10 Ie
1.05 Ue 0.45 1.05 Ue 0.35 1.05 Ue 0.35 1.05 Ue 0.35
Utilisation category DC-1
Making I U Ie Ue
Breaking L/R (ms) I U 1 Ie Ue
L/R (ms) 1
Making I U 1.5 Ie
L/R (ms)
Breaking I U 1.5 Ie
L/R (ms)
1.05 Ue 1
1.05 Ue 1
Shunt wound motors: DC-3 starting, counter-current braking, inching Series would motors: DC-5 starting, counter-current braking, inching
2.5 Ie 1.05 Ue
2.5 Ie
1.05 Ue
4 Ie
1.05 Ue 2.5
4 Ie
1.05 Ue 2.5
2.5 Ie 1.05 Ue
7.5
2.5 Ie
1.05 Ue
7.5
4 Ie
1.05 Ue 15
4 Ie
1.05 Ue 15
Auxiliary contacts and control relays

Making and breaking conditions (normal operation) a.c. supply Typical applications Electromagnets - < 72 VA - > 72 VA Utilisation category AC-14 AC-15 Making I U 6 Ie Ue 10 Ie Ue Breaking I U Ie Ie Ue Ue Making and breaking conditions (occasional operation) Making I U 6 Ie 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 1.1 Ue Breaking I U 6 Ie 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 1.1 Ue
cos 0.3 0.3
cos 0.3 0.3
cos 0.7 0.3
cos 0.7 0.3
d.c. supply Typical applications Electromagnets
Utilisation category DC-13
Making I U Ie Ue
Breaking L/R (ms) I U
L/R (ms)
Making I U
L/R (ms)
Breaking I U
L/R (ms)
6P Ie Ue 6P 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue 6 P Ie 1.1 Ue 6 P (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) The value 6 P (in watts) is based on practical observations and is considered to represent the majority of magnetic loads up to the maximum limit of P = 50 W i.e. 6 P = 300 ms = L/R. Above this, the loads are made up of smaller loads in parallel. The value 300 ms is therefore a maximum limit whatever the value of current drawn.
1/12
Full-load currents

Average full-load currents of 3-phase squirrel cage motors
3-phase 4-pole motors, 50/60 Hz

U V W
Power kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 HP 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 450 500 600
200/ 433/ 500/ 208 V 220 V 230 V 380 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 460 V 525 V 575 V 660 V 690 V 750 V 1000 V (1) (1) (1) A 2 3 3.8 5 6.8 9.6 12.6 16.2 22 28.8 36 42 57 70 84 114 138 162 200 270 330 400 480 520 560 680 770 850 A 1.8 2.75 3.5 4.4 6.1 8.7 11.5 14.5 20 27 32 39 52 64 75 103 126 150 182 240 295 356 425 472 520 626 700 800 A 2 2.8 3.6 5.2 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 600 720 840 1080 A 1.03 1.6 2 2.6 3.5 5 6.6 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.5 22 30 37 44 60 72 85 105 138 170 205 245 273 300 370 408 460 528 584 635 710 A 0.98 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.4 4.8 6.3 8.1 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 81 100 131 162 195 233 222 285 352 388 437 555 605 675 A 2 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14 17 21 28 35 40 55 66 80 100 135 165 200 240 260 280 340 385 425 535 580 650 820 920 A 0.99 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 236 256 321 353 401 505 549 611 780 870 A 1 1.4 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 300 360 420 540 600 720 A 1 1.21 1.5 2 2.6 3.8 5 6.5 9 12 13.9 18.4 23 28.5 33 45 55 65 80 105 129 156 187 207 220 281 310 360 445 500 540 680 760 850 960 A 0.8 1.1 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 240 288 336 432 480 576 A 0.6 0.9 1.1 1.5 2 2.8 3.8 4.9 6.6 6.9 10.6 14 17.3 21.9 25.4 54.6 42 49 61 82 98 118 140 152 170 200 215 235 274 337 370 410 515 575 645 725 830 925 A 3.5 4.9 6.7 9 10.5 12.1 16.5 20.2 24.2 33 40 46.8 58 75.7 94 113 135 165 203 224 253 321 350 390 494 549 605 694 790 880 A 11 15 18.5 22 30 36 42 52 69 85 103 123 136 150 185 204 230 292 318 356 450 500 550 630 A 0.4 0.6 0.75 1 1.3 1.9 2.5 3 3.3 4.5 6 7 9 12 14.5 17 23 28 33 40 53 65 78 90 100 115 138 150 160 200 220 239 250 262 273 288 320 350 380 425 480 550 610
1070 990
1150 1200 1250 1440 1570 1760 1980
900 855 1000 950
1100 1045 1020 1260 1200 1140
965 1075
800 1090 1450 1320 1250 900 1220 1610 1470 1390 (1) Values conforming to the NEC (National Electrical Code).
1100 1220
These values are given as a guide. They may vary depending on the type of motor and manufacturer.
1/13
Contactor selection

For utilisation category AC-1
Maximum operational current (open-mounted device)
Contactor size Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour Connections/ cabling conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Operational current in AC-1 in A, according to the ambient temperature, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Maximum operational power 60 C cable c.s.a. bar size 40 C 60 C 70 C 220/230 V 240 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V mm2 mm A A
LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1LP1- LP1LP1K09 K12 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40 DT20 DT25 DT32 DT40 DT60 600 4 20 20 600 4 20 20 (1) 8 8 14 14 15 17 22 600 4 25 25 17 9 9 15 17 18 20 27 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) 600 4 25 25 17 9 9 15 17 18 20 27 600 6 32 32 22 11 12 20 21 23 23 34 600 6 40 40 28 14 15 25 27 29 33 43 600 10 50 50 35 18 19 31 34 36 41 54 600 16 60 60 45 21 23 37 41 43 49 65 600 10 50 50 35 18 19 31 34 36 41 54 600 16 60 60 42 21 23 37 41 43 49 65 70
A (at Uc)(1)
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
8 8 14 14 15 17 22
1000 V kW (1) (1) Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Increase in operational current by parallelling of poles Apply the following multiplying factors to the current values given above. The factors take into account the often unbalanced current distribution between phases: - 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6 - 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 - 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.8
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-1 (Ue

LC1, LP1, LP4-K09 LC1, LP1, LP4-K12 LC1-D25 LC1-DT40 LC1-D32, LC1-D38 LC1-DT60 LC1, LP1-D40
440 V)
LC1-D50 LC1, LP1-D65 LC1, LP1-D80
LC1-D09 LC1-DT20 LC1-D12 LC1-DT25
LC1-D18 LC1-DT32
Millions of operating cycles
10 8 6 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 25 32 40 50 60 80 100 125 200 250 400 Current broken in A
Control of resistive circuits (cos 0.95). The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load. Example: Ue = 220 V - Ie = 50 A - 40 C - Ic = Ie = 50 A. 2 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: either LC1 or LP1-D50.
1/14
LC1-D115 LC1-D150
LC1-D95
LC1D50 600 25 80 80 56 29 31 50 54 58 65 86 85
LC1LP1D65 600 25 80 80 56 29 31 50 54 58 65 86 100
LC1LP1D80 600 50 125 125 80 45 49 78 85 90 102 135 120
LC1D95 600 50 125 125 80 45 49 78 85 90 102 135 120
LC1D115 600 120 250 200 160 80 83 135 140 150 170 235 345
LC1D150 600 120 250 200 160 80 83 135 140 150 170 235 345
LC1F185 600 150 275 275 180 90 100 165 170 180 200 280 410
LC1F225 600 185 315 280 200 100 110 175 185 200 220 300 450
LC1F265 600 185 350 300 250 120 125 210 220 230 270 370 540
LC1F330 600 240 400 360 290 145 160 250 260 290 320 400 640
LC1F400 600
LC1F500 600
LC1F630 600
LC1F780 600
LC1F800 600
LC1BL 120
LC1BM 120
LC1BP 120
LC1BR 120
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 100 x 5 60 x 5 50 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 10 500 430 340 170 180 300 310 330 380 530 760 700 580 500 240 255 430 445 470 660 740 950 1000 850 700 350 370 600 630 670 750 1000 1500 1600 1350 1100 550 570 950 1000 1050 1200 1650 2400 1000 850 700 350 370 600 630 670 750 1000 1500 800 700 600 300 330 500 525 550 600 800 1100 1250 1100 900 425 450 800 825 850 900 1100 1700 2000 1750 1500 700 800 1200 1250 1400 1500 1900 3000 2750 2400 2000 1000 1100 1600 1700 2000 2100 2700 4200
LC1-BL, BM
LC1-F330 LC1-F400
LC1-F500
LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265
LC1-F630 LC1-F800
LC1-F780
10 8 6 4
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
(1)
0,2
LC1-BR
LC1-BP
0,1 20 40 50 60 80 100 200 600 800 1000 300 350 275 315 400 500 700 1600 2000 4000
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1-F225 contactors.

Current broken in A
Example:
Ue = 220 V - Ie = 500 A - 40 C - Ic = Ie = 500 A. 2 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1-F780.
1/15
Contactor selection

Operational current and power conforming to IEC
( 60 C)
Contactor size Max. operational current in AC-3 Rated operational power P (standard motor power ratings) 440 V 220/240 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V A kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1LP1- LP1- LP1K06 K09 K12 K16 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40 6 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 3 3 9 2.2 4 4 4 4 4 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 4 4 16 3 7.5 7.5 7.5 5.5 4 9 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 38 9 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 40 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 22
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour (1) On-load Operational factor power 85% P 0.5 P 25 % P
LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40
1200 1200 1200 1200 1000 1000 1000 3000 3000 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 1800 1800 1800 1800 1200 1200 1200
Operational current and power conforming to UL, CSA ( 60 C)

Contactor size Max. operational current in AC-3 Rated operational power P (standard motor power ratings) 60 Hz 440 V 200/208 V 230/240 V 460/480 V 575/600 V A HP HP HP HP LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1LP1- LP1- LP1K06 K09 K12 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40 6 1.5 1.5 3 3 9 2 3 5 5 12 3 3 7.5 10 9 2 2 5 7.5 12 3 3 7.5 10 18 5 5 10 15 25 7.5 7.5 15 20 32 10 10 20 25 40 10 10 30 30
(1) Depending on the operational power and the on-load factor ( 60 C).
1/16
LC1D50 50 15 22 25 30 30 33 30
LC1D65 65 18.5 30 37 37 37 37 37
LC1D80 80 22 37 45 45 55 45 45
LC1D95 95 25 45 45 45 55 45 45
LC1D115 115 30 55 59 59 75 80 65
LC1D150 150 40 75 80 80 90 100 75
LC1F185 185 55 90 100 100 110 110 100
LC1F225 225 63 110 110 110 129 129 100
LC1F265 265 75 132 140 140 160 160 147
LC1F330 330 100 160 180 200 200 220 160
LC1F400 400 110 200 220 250 257 280 185
LC1F500 500 147 250 280 295 355 335 335
LC1F630 630 200 335 375 400 400 450 450
LC1F780 780 220 400 425 425 450 475 450
LC1F800 800 250 450 450 450 450 475 450
LC1BL 750 220 400 425 450 500 560 530
LC1BM 1000 280 500 530 560 600 670 530
LC1BP 1500 425 750 800 800 750 750 670
LC1BR 1800 500 900 900 900 900 900 750
LC1D50 1000 2500 1200
LC1D65 1000 2500 1200
LC1D80 750 2000 1200
LC1D95 750 2000 1200
LC1D115 750 2000 1200
LC1D150 750 1200 1200
LC1F185 750 2000 1200
LC1F225 750 2000 1200
LC1F265 750 2000 1200
LC1F330 750 2000 1200
LC1F400 500 1200 1200
LC1F500 500 1200 1200
LC1F630 500 1200 1200
LC1F780 500 1200 600
LC1F800 500 600 600
LC1BL 120 120 120
LC1BM 120 120 120
LC1BP 120 120 120
LC1BR 120 120 120
LC1D50 50 15 15 40 40
LC1D65 65 20 20 50 50
LC1D80 80 30 30 60 60
LC1D95 95 30 30 60 60
LC1D115 115 30 40 75 100
LC1D150 150 40 50 100 125
LC1F185 185 50 60 125 150
LC1F225 225 60 75 150 150
LC1F265 265 60 75 150 200
LC1F330 330 75 100 200 250
LC1F400 400 100 125 250 300
LC1F500 500 150 200 400 500
LC1F630 630 250 300 600 800
LC1F780 780 450 900
LC1F800 800 350 400 900 900
1/17
Contactor selection
according to required electrical durability

Use in category AC-3 (Ue 440 V)

LC1, LP1, LP4-K06 LC1, LP1, LP4-K09 LC1, LP1, LP4-K12 LC1-D12
LC1-D80 LC1-D95 LC1-D115
Control of 3-phase asynchronous motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
10 8 6 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 16 20 18 50 25 30 37 32 40 65 80 95 115 150 200 Current broken in A
LC1-D150
LC1-D09
LC1-D18
LC1-D25
LC1-D32 LC1-D38
LC1-D40
LC1-D50
LC1-D65
LC1-K16
0,55
0,75
1,5
18,5
2,2
5,5
7,5
11
15
22 25
30
230 V 0,75 5,5 18,5 1,5 2,2 7,5 22 15 30 37 11 45 55 75
kW
400 V 1,5 18,5 2,2 5,5 7,5 11 15 37 45 30 55 22 75
kW
440 V
kW
Operational power in kW-50 Hz Example Asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 400 V - Ie = 11 A - Ic = Ie = 11 A or asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 11 A - Ic = Ie = 11 A 3 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1-D18.
Use in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V) (1)

LC1-D80 LC1-D95 LC1-D115 LC1-D150 LC1-D32, LC1-D38 LC1-D09 LC1-D12 LC1-D18 LC1-D25 LC1-D40 LC1-D50 LC1-D65
10 8 Millions of operating cycles
6 4 3 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 6,6 9 11 15 17 20 22 50 60 33 40 35 42 48 80 90 100 200 Current broken in A
(1) For Ue = 1000 V use the 660/690 V curves, but do not exceed the operational current at the operational power indicated for 1000 V.
1/18
Contactor selection


LC1-BL, BM LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F800 LC1-F780 LC1-F630
1
LC1-BR LC1-BP
10 8 6 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 20 30 40 50 60 80 90

18,5 147 110 200 220
(1)
100
200
400
600
800
1000 2000 Current broken in A
5,5
7,5
15
40 45
11
22
25
30
55
75
220 V 230 V
18,5 110 132 200 400 500 750 250 160 90 335 11 15 22 45 30 37 55 75
kW
900
380 V 400 V
18,5 132 200 37 55 90 285 11 15 22 30 45 75
kW
440 V
kW
Operational power in kW-50 Hz Example Asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 245 A - Ic = Ie = 245 A or asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 240 A - Ic = Ie = 240 A 1.5 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1-F330. (1) The dotted lines are only applicable to contactors LC1-BL.
Use in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V)

LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-BL, BM LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500
LC1-F630
LC1-F780 LC1-F800
10 8 6 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 20 30 40 50 60 80 90 100 118 129 170 200 220 400 305 355 600 485 800 1000 2000 Current broken in A
(1)
475
129
220
560
670
LC1-BR 750
LC1-BP
160
335
110
355
900
660 V 690 V
kW
Example Asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 660 V - Ie = 140 A - Ic = Ie = 140 A 1.5 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1-F330. (1) The dotted lines are only applicable to contactors LC1-BL.
1/19
Contactor selection

For utilisation categories AC-2 or AC-4
Maximum breaking current
Category AC-2: slip ring motors - breaking the starting current Category AC-4: squirrel cage motors - breaking the starting current Contactor LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1size LP1- LP1- LP1K06 K09 K12 D09 In category AC-4 (Ie max) - Ue 440 V Ie max broken = 6 x I motor A 36 54 54 54 - 440 V < Ue 690 V Ie max broken = 6 x I motor A 26 40 40 40
LC1D12 72 50
LC1D18 108 70
LC1D25 150 90
LC1D32 192 105
LC1D38 192 105
LC1D40 240 150
Depending on the maximum operating rate (1) and the on-load factor, 60 C (2) From 150 & 15 % to 300 &10 % From 150 & 20 % to 600 &10 % From 150 & 30 % to 1200 & 10 % From 150 & 55 % to 2400 & 10 % A A A A 20 18 16 13 30 27 24 19 30 27 24 19 30 27 24 19 40 36 30 24 45 40 35 30 75 67 56 45 80 70 60 50 80 70 60 50 110 96 80 62
From 150 & 85 % to 3600 & 10 % A 10 16 16 16 21 25 40 45 45 53 (1) Do not exceed the maximum number of mechanical operating cycles. (2) For temperatures higher than 60 C, use an operating rate value equal to 80% of the actual value when selecting from Plugging The current varies from the maximum plug-braking current to the rated motor current. The making current must be compatible with the rated making and breaking capacities of the contactor. As breaking normally takes place at a current value at or near the locked rotor current, the contactor can be selected
Permissible AC-4 power rating for 200,000 operating cycles

Operational voltage LCpLPpK06 kW kW kW kW kW kW 0.75 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 LCpLPpK09 1.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 4 LCpLPpK12 1.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 4 LCpD09 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 4 LCpD12 1.5 3.7 3 3 4 5.5 LCpD18 2.2 4 3.7 3.7 5.5 7.5 LCpD25 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 LCpD32 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 11 LCpD38 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 11 LCpD40 4 9 9 11 11 15
220/230 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V
1/20
1
LC1D50 300 170 LC1D65 390 210 LC1D80 480 250 LC1D95 570 250 LC1D115 630 540 LC1D150 830 640 LC1F185 1020 708 LC1F225 1230 810 LC1F265 1470 1020 LC1F330 1800 1410 LC1F400 2220 1830 LC1F500 2760 2130 LC1F630 3360 2760 LC1F780 4260 2910 LC1F800 3690 2910 LC1BL 4320 4000 LC1BM 5000 4800 LC1BP 7500 5400 LC1BR 9000 6600
140 120 100 80 70
160 148 132 110 90
200 170 145 120 100
200 170 145 120 100
280 250 215 150 125
310 280 240 170 145
380 350 300 240 170
420 400 330 270 190
560 500 400 320 230
670 600 500 390 290
780 700 600 450 350
1100 950 750 600 500
1400 1250 950 720 660
1600 1400 1100 820 710
1600 1400 1100 820 710
2250 2000 1500 1000 750
3000 2400 2000 1500 1000
4500 3750 3000 2000 1500
5400 5000 3600 2500 1800
the above tables.
using the criteria for categories AC-2 and AC-4.
LCpD50 5.5 11 11 11 15 18.5
LCpD65 7.5 11 11 15 18.5 22
LCpD80 7.5 15 15 15 22 25
LCpD95 9 15 15 15 22 25
LC1D115 9 18.5 18.5 18.5 30 30
LC1D150 11 22 22 22 37 45
LC1F185 18.5 33 37 37 45 63
LC1F225 22 40 45 45 55 75
LC1F265 28 51 55 59 63 90
LC1F330 33 59 63 63 75 110
LC1F400 40 75 80 80 90 129
LC1F500 45 80 90 100 110 140
LC1F630 55 100 100 110 132 160
LC1F780 63 110 110 132 150 185
LC1F800 63 110 110 132 150 185
LC1BL 90 160 160 160 180 200
LC1BM 110 160 160 200 200 250
LC1BP 150 220 250 250 250 315
LC1BR 200 250 280 315 355 450
1/21
Contactor selection

Use in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue 440 V)
1
LC1, LP1, LP4-K09,K12 LC1, LP1, LP4-K06 LC1-D32, D38 LC1-D40 LC1-D50 LC1-D65 LC1-D80 LC1-D95 LC1-D115 LC1-D150 150 192 240 300 LC1-D09 LC1-D12 LC1-D18 LC1-D25
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor)
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
(1)
0,01 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 36 40 50 54 72 80 108
Example Asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 400 V - Ie = 11 A Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A or asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 11 A Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A 200,000 operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1-D25. (1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1, LP1-K12 contactors
390 480 570 630 828 1000 Current broken in A
Utilisation in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue 690 V)
LC1-D32, D38 LC1-D40 LC1-D50
LC1-D65 LC1-D80 LC1-D95 LC1-D115
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor)
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,07 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
0,01 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 70 90 105 150 170 210 250 300 400 500 540 640 800 1000 Current broken in A
1/22
LC1-D150
LC1-D09
LC1-D12
LC1-D18
LC1-D25
Contactor selection

Use in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue 440 V)
1
LC1-BL, BM LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630 LC1-F800 LC1-F780
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor)
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04
0,02
0,01 100 200 400 600 800 1020 1470 2220 3360 4260 5000 8000 20 000 6000 10 000 1230 1800 2760 3690 Current broken in A
Example Asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 170 A Ic = 6 x Ie = 1020 A or asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 165 A Ic = 6 x Ie = 990 A 60,000 operating cycles required The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1-F265.
Use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue 690 V)

LC1-F780, F800
LC1-BL, BM
LC1-F185
LC1-F225
LC1-F265
LC1-F330
LC1-F400 LC1-F500
LC1-F630
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled.. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor)
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04
0,02
0,01 100 200 400 600 800 1000 2000 8000 10 000 20 000
LC1-BR
LC1-BP
LC1-BR
LC1-BP
4000
Current broken in A
1/23
Selection guide

For utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-1, resistive loads:
Rated operational voltage Ue
Number of poles connected in series
Contactor rating (1) LC1- LC1- LC1D09
LC1-
LC1-
LC1-
LC1D38 30 32 32 25 30 32 7 25 27 1 7 22
D12 D18 D25 D32 DT20 DT25 DT32 DT40 15 18 20 20 12 17 20 20 4 12 15 20 1 4 10 20 12 15 18 20 20 12 17 20 20 4 12 15 20 1 4 10 20 12 15 18 20 12 17 25 4 12 15 1 4 10 30 32 32 32 25 30 32 32 7 25 27 30 1 7 22 25 25 30 32 32 25 30 32 7 25 27 1 7 22
LC1LP1D40 40 50 50 50 25 50 50 50 8 40 45 55 1 7 40 50 40
LC1D50 50 65 65 25 65 65 8 50 60 1 7 50
24 V
+ +
48/75 V
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 4 1 4 2 3 4
15 18 20 12 17 20 4 12 15 1 4 10
125 V
225 V
300 V 460 V 900 V 1200 V 1500 V
Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-2 to DC-5, inductive loads:
Rated operational voltage Ue Number of poles connected in series Contactor rating (1) LC1- LC1- LC1D09 24 V 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 4 1 4 2 3 4 12 15 18 8 12 15 2 8 12 0.5 1.5 6 LC1LC1LC1LC1D38 20 25 30 15 20 30 2.5 15 20 1 3 10 LC1LP1D40 25 30 45 50 15 25 40 50 2.5 20 30 40 1 4 20 25 20 LC1D50 35 45 55 15 40 50 2.5 25 35 1 5 25
D12 D18 D25 D32 DT20 DT25 DT32 DT40 12 15 18 20 8 12 15 15 2 8 12 12 0.5 1.5 6 8 6 12 15 18 20 8 12 15 15 2 8 12 12 0.5 1.5 6 8 6 12 15 18 8 12 15 2 8 12 0.5 1.5 6 20 25 30 30 15 20 30 30 2.5 15 20 25 1 3 10 15 10 20 25 30 15 20 30 2.5 15 20 1 3 10
+ +
48/75 V
125 V
225 V
300 V
460 V 900 V 1200 V 1500 V
(1) For rated operational currents of contactors LC1 and LP1-K: call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608.
1/24
time constant L 1 ms, ambient temperature 60 C (2) R
LC1LP1D65 50 65 65 65 25 65 65 65 7 60 65 65 1.5 7 50 60 60
LC1LP1D80 70 100 100 100 25 100 100 100 8 80 85 100 1.5 12 55 70 70
LC1D95 70 100 100 25 100 100 8 80 85 1.5 12 55
LC1D115 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 180 180 200 200 160 160 200 200 140 180 140
LC1D150 200 200 200 200 200 200 180 180 200 160 160 200 140
LC1F185 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 210 210 240 240 190 240 240 190 240 190
LC1F225 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 230 230 260 260 200 260 260 200 260 200
LC1F265 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 270 270 300 300 250 300 300 250 300 250
LC1F330 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 320 320 360 360 280 360 360 280 360 280
LC1F400 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 380 380 430 430 350 430 430 350 430 350
LC1F500 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 520 520 580 580 450 580 580 450 580 450
LC1F630 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 760 760 850 850 700 850 850 700 850 700
LC1F780 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1180 1180 1300 1300 1000 1300 1300 1000 1000 1000
LC1F800 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 760 760 850 850 700 850 850 700 850 700
LC1BL 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700
LC1BM 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100
LC1BP 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
LC1BR 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
time constant L 15 ms, ambient temperature 60 C (2) R
LC1LP1D65 35 45 55 60 15 40 50 60 2.5 25 35 50 1 4 25 30 25
LC1LP1D80 40 60 80 90 15 50 70 90 2.5 40 60 72 1 7 35 40 35
LC1D95 40 60 80 15 50 70 2.5 40 60 1 7 35
LC1D115 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100 140 200 200 100 120 140 180 100 180 100
LC1D150 200 200 200 200 200 200 100 140 200 100 120 140 100
LC1F185 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 160 240 240 140 160 240 140 240 140
LC1F225 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 180 240 240 160 180 260 160 260 160
LC1F265 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 250 280 280 220 250 300 220 300 220
LC1F330 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 300 310 310 280 300 360 280 360 280
LC1F400 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 350 350 350 310 350 430 310 430 310
LC1F500 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 500 550 550 480 500 580 480 580 480
LC1F630 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 700 850 850 680 700 850 680 850 680
LC1F780 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1000 1000 1000 900 1000 1300 900 1300 800
LC1F800 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 700 850 850 680 700 850 680 850 680
LC1BL 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700
LC1BM 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100
LC1BP 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
LC1BR 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
700 1100 1750 2400 700 1100 1750 2400 (2) Contactors LC1-F and LC1-B operating at an ambient temperature of 40 C, have higher operational currents: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
1/25
Selection according to Technical and application required electrical durability guidance

For utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
Use in categories DC-1 to DC-5
1
The criteria for contactor selection are: - the rated operational current Ie, - the rated operational voltage Ue, - the utilisation category and the time constant L/R, - the required electrical durability. Maximum operating rate (operating cycles) The following operating rate must not be exceeded: 120 operating cycles/hour at rated operational current Ie.
Electrical durability
LC1-D115, D150 LC1, LP1-D12 LC1, LP1-D25 LC1, LP1-D40 LC1, LP1-D65 LC1, LP1-D80 LC1-D95
LC1-D32, LC1-D38
LC1-D09
LC1-D18
10 8 6 4 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 16 20 24 40 50 60 70 90 100 30 80 32 36
Power broken per pole in kW
Example Series wound motor: P = 1.5 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 7.5 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching. Utilisation category = DC-5. - Select contactor LC1-D25 or LP1-D25 with 3 poles in series. - The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 7.5 = 3.75 kW. - The power broken per pole is: 1.25 kW. - The electrical durability read from the curve is 106 operating cycles. Use of poles in parallel Electrical durability can be increased by using poles connected in parallel. With N connected in parallel, the electrical durability becomes: electrical durability read from the curves x N x 0.7. Note 1 When the poles are connected in parallel, the maximum operational currents indicated on pages 1/24 and 1/25 must not be exceeded. Note 2 Ensure that the connections are made in such a way as to equalise the currents in each pole.
1/26
LC1-D50
Selection according to Technical and application required electrical durability guidance

For categories DC-1 to DC-5
Use in categories DC-1 to DC-5

Determining the electrical durability The electrical durability can be read directly from the curves below, having previously calculated the power broken as follows: P broken = U broken x l broken. The tables below give the values of Uc and Ic for the various utilisation categories. Power broken Utilisation category DC-1 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads DC-2 Shunt wound motors, breaking whilst motor running DC-3 Shunt wound motors, reversing, inching DC-4 Series wound motors, breaking whilst motor running DC-5 Series wound motors, reversing, inching Electrical durability
LC1-F185, F225 LC1-F630, F800
U broken Ue 0.1 Ue Ue 0.3 Ue Ue
I broken Ie Ie 2.5 Ie Ie 2.5 Ie
P broken Ue x Ie 0.1 Ue x Ie Ue x 2.5 Ie 0.3 Ue x Ie Ue x 2.5 Ie
LC1-F400 LC1-F500
LC1-F265
LC1-BL, BM
LC1-F330
LC1-F780
10 8 6 4 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 90 100 200 300 400 600 800 1000 500 700 900 4000 2000 3000 5000
LC1-BR
LC1-BP
Power broken per pole in kW
Example Series wound motor: P = 40 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 200 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching. Utilisation category = DC-5. - Select contactor LC1-F265 with 2 poles in series. - The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 200 = 100 kW. - The power broken per pole is: 50 kW. - The electrical durability read from the curve is 400,000 operating cycles.
1/27
Contactor operation

For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
Applications
These contactors are used to eliminate starting resistance in the rotor circuit of slip-ring motors. The most common application is for starters without jogging and without rotor speed adjustment: pumps, fans, conveyors, compressors, ... In the case of control by means of a manually operated master controller, the use of contactors with magnetic blow-out is recommended. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. For hoisting applications, contactor selection must take into account the type of motor duty , the operating rate, the rotor voltage and current, the type of connection, the ambient temperature, etc. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Operation
The rotor circuit contactors are interlocked with the stator contactor and therefore do not open until after the stator contactor has opened, when the rotor voltage has disappeared, or virtually disappeared. They make the current corresponding to the normal starting peak (1.5 to 2.5 times the rated rotor current) and open the circuit under no-load. Making and breaking are easy.
Different types of rotor connection
Star connection
Delta connection
'V' connection
'W' connection
1/28
Contactor selection

For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
Contactor selection according to the type of connection

Rotor current and voltage factors Multiplying factors to be applied to the operational current values shown in the table below. Type of connection Star Delta 'V' 'W' Factor I Rotor I Operational I 1 1.4 1 1.6 3-phase rotor Ue (1) Maximum LC1-F LC1-B 2000 V 1700 V 1700 V 1700 V 2000 V 1700 V 1700 V 1700 V With counter-current LC1-F LC1-B 1000 V 850 V 850 V 850 V 1000 V 850 V 850 V 850 V
Selection according to the operational current

The selection examples below take into account: - a ratio of 2 between the maximum operational rotor voltage (Uer) and the rated stator operational voltage (Ues); this ratio is given in standard IEC/EN 60947-4, - a guarantee of occasional duty (making and breaking capacities) specied in the above standards Time current owing Contactor rating LC1D115 D150 F185
F265
F400
F500
F630
F780
BL
BM
BP
BR
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles 30/h 10 s 30 s 60 s 350 A 220 A 170 A 450 A 280 A 220 A 550 A 400 A 300 A 800 A 550 A 400 A 1100 A 1500 A 2000 A 2500 A 2000 A 2400 A 3750 A 5000 A 730 A 1000 A 1500 A 2000 A 1200 A 1800 A 2600 A 3600 A 550 A 750 A 1200 A 1500 A 1000 A 1500 A 2200 A 3000 A
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles 60/h 5s 10 s 30 s 350 A 260 A 170 A 450 A 330 A 220 A 550 A 450 A 300 A 800 A 620 A 400 A 1100 A 1500 A 2000 A 2500 A 2000 A 2400 A 3750 A 5000 A 860 A 1250 A 1800 A 2300 A 1600 A 2200 A 3400 A 4500 A 550 A 750 A 1200 A 1500 A 1000 A 1500 A 2200 A 3000 A
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles 150/h for LC1-F and 120/h for LC1-B 5s 10 s 230 A 190 A 300 A 250 A 420 A 350 A 580 A 430 A 820 A 1150 A 1650 A 2200 A 1500 A 2100 A 3200 A 4200 A 600 A 850 A 1300 A 1600 A 1100 A 1600 A 2300 A 3200 A
Rotor short-circuit contactor and intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles > 150/h for LC1-F and 120/h for LC1-B 200 A Electrical durability For automatic starting, the electrical durability is in the region of 1 million operating cycles. (1) For use up to 3000 V, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. 270 A 350 A 500 A 700 A 1000 A 1600 A 800 A 1250 A 2000 A 2750 A
1/29
Contactor selection

For lighting circuits
General
1
Protection
The operating conditions of lighting circuits have the following characteristics: - continuous duty: the switching device can remain closed for several days or even months, - a dispersion factor of 1: all luminaires in the same group are switched on or off simultaneously, - a relatively high temperature around the device due to the enclosure, the presence of fuses, or an unventilated control panel location. This is why the operational current for lighting is lower than the value given for AC-1 duty. The continuous duty current drawn by a lighting circuit is constant. In effect: - it is unlikely that the number of lighting ttings of an existing circuit will be modied, - this type of circuit cannot create an overload of long duration. This is why only short-circuit protection is necessary for these circuits. It can be provided by: - gG type fuses, or - modular circuit-breakers. Nevertheless it is always possible and sometimes more economical (small cable size) to protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses. p Single-phase circuit, 220/240 V The tables on pages 1/31 to 1/33 are based on a single-phase 220/240 V circuit and can therefore be applied directly in this case. p 3-phase circuit, 380/415 V with neutral The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups, each connected between one phase and neutral. The contactor can then be selected from the 220/240 V singlephase table for a number of lamps equal to N
Distribution system
--3
p 3-phase circuit, 220/240 V The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups, each connected between 2 phases (L1-L2), (L2-L3), (L3-L1). The contactor can then be selected from the 220/240 V single-phase table for a number of lamps equal to N
-----3
Contactor selection tables
For the different types of lamps, the tables on pages 1/31 to 1/33 give the maximum number of lamps of unit power P (in Watts), which can be switched simultaneously for each size of contactor. They are based on: - a 220/240 V single-phase circuit, - an ambient temperature of 55 C (1), taking into account the operating conditions (see General paragraph). - an electrical life of more than 10 years (200 days' operation per year). They take into account: - the total current drawn (including ballast), - transient phenomena which occur at switch-on, - the starting currents and their duration, - the circulation of any harmonics which may be present. Lamps with compensating capacitor C (F) connected in parallel Parallel connected compensating capacitors C cause a current peak at the moment of switch-on. To ensure that the value of this current peak remains compatible with the making characteristics of the contactors, the unit value of the capacitance must not exceed the following: Switching LC1- LP1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1contactor size K09 K09 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 Maximum unit value C (F) of compensating capacitor 7 3 18 18 25 60 96 connected in parallel Switching LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1contactor size D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 Maximum unit value C (F) of compensating capacitor 300 360 800 1200 1700 2500 4000 connected in parallel This value is independent of the number of lamps switched by the contactor. (1) For an ambient temperature of 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2. LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1D38 D40 D50 D65 D80 D95 96 120 120 240 240 240
LC1- LC1- LC1F500 F630 F800 6000 9000 10 800
1/30
Contactor selection

Usual values
The tables show the following values: - IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated operational voltage, - C: unit capacitance for each lamp, corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers. These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number Iu by 1.2).
1
1000 4.60 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17 24 26 40 44 52 58 74 100 136 162 1000 4.5 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17 26 28 42 46 52 60 76 102 140 166 LC1K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40 D50, D65 D80, D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800 LC1K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40 D50, D65 D80, D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800 110 0.72 16 22 29 36 48 61 77 111 222 266 288 332 378 478 644 874
Incandescent and halogen lamps
P (W) IB (A)
60 0.27 35 Max. 59 no. 77 of 92 lamps 129 accor- 163 ding to 207 P (W) 296 430 466 710 770 888 1006 1274 1718 2328 2776 P (W) IB (A) 100 0.45 21 Max. 35 no. 46 of 55 lamps 77 accor- 97 ding to 124 P (W) 177 256 280 426 462 532 604 764 1030 1398 1666
75 0.34 28 47 61 73 103 129 164 235 340 370 564 610 704 800 1010 1364 1850 2204
100 0.45 21 35 46 55 77 97 124 177 256 280 426 462 532 604 764 1030 1396 1666 160 0.72 13 22 29 36 48 61 77 111 160 174 266 288 332 378 478 644 874 1040 65 0.70 13 22 30 37 50 62 80 114 228 274 296 342 388 490 662 698
150 0.68 14 23 30 36 51 64 82 117 170 184 282 304 352 400 504 682 924 1102
200 0.91 10 17 23 27 38 48 62 88 126 138 210 228 262 298 378 508 690 824 250 1.10 8 14 18 23 30 38 49 70 104 114 174 188 218 246 312 422 572 680
300 1.40 6 11 15 18 25 31 40 57 82 90 136 148 170 194 244 330 448 534
500 2.30 4 7 9 11 15 19 24 34 50 54 82 90 104 118 148 200 272 326 500 2.3 4 7 9 11 15 19 24 34 50 54 82 90 104 118 150 202 272 326
750 3.40 2 4 6 7 10 13 16 23 34 36 56 60 70 80 100 136 184 220
Mixed lighting lamps
Fluorescent lamps with starter Single tting
Non-corrected P (W) 20 40 IB (A) 0.39 0.45 C (F) 24 21 Max. 41 35 no. 53 46 of 66 57 lamps 89 77 accor- 112 97 ding to 143 124 P (W) 205 177 410 354 492 426 532 462 614 532 696 604 882 764 1190 1030 1612 1398
80 0.80 12 20 26 32 43 55 70 100 200 240 260 300 340 430 580 786
With parallel correction 110 20 40 1.2 0.17 0.26 5 5 8 56 36 13 94 61 17 123 80 21 152 100 29 205 134 36 258 169 46 329 215 66 470 367 132 940 614 160 1128 738 172 1224 800 200 1412 922 226 1600 1046 286 2024 1322 386 2728 1724 524 3700 2418
65 0.42 7 22 38 50 61 83 104 133 190 380 456 490 570 648 818 1104 1498
80 0.52 7 18 30 40 50 67 84 107 153 306 368 400 462 522 662 892 1210
LC1K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40 D50, D65 D80, D95 D115, D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630, F800
1/31
Contactor selection

For lighting circuits (continued)
Usual values
Fluorescent lamps with starter Twin tting
Fluorescent lamps without starter Single tting
Fluorescent lamps without starter Twin tting
Low pressure sodium vapour lamps-
See page opposite. Non-corrected P (W) 2x20 2x40 IB (A) 2x0.22 2x0.41 2x21 2x11 Max. 2x36 2x18 no. 2x46 2x24 of 2x58 2x30 lamps 2x78 2x42 accor- 2x100 2x52 ding to 2x126 2x68 P (W) 2x180 2x96 2x360 2x194 2x436 2x234 2x472 2x254 2x544 2x292 2x618 2x332 2x782 2x420 2x1054 2x566 2x1430 2x766 Non-corrected P (W) 20 40 IB (A) 0.43 0.55 C (F) 22 17 Max. 37 29 no. 48 38 of 60 47 lamps 97 63 accor- 102 80 ding to 130 101 P (W) 186 145 372 290 446 348 484 378 558 436 632 494 800 624 1078 844 1462 1144 Non-corrected P (W) 2x20 2x40 IB (A) 2x0.25 2x0.47 2x19 2x10 Max. 2x32 2x16 no. 2x42 2x22 of 2x52 2x26 lamps 2x70 2x36 accor- 2x88 2x46 ding to 2x112 2x58 P (W) 2x160 2x84 2x320 2x170 2x384 2x204 2x416 2x220 2x480 2x254 2x544 2x288 2x688 2x366 2x928 2x494 2x1258 2x668 Non-corrected P (W) 35 55 90 IB (A) 1.2 1.6 2.4 C (F) 6 5 3 Max. 10 7 5 no. 12 9 6 of 15 11 7 lamps 21 16 10 accor- 27 20 13 ding to 35 26 17 P (W) 50 37 25 100 75 50 140 104 70 152 114 76 174 130 88 198 148 98 250 188 124 338 254 168 496 372 248
2x65 2x0.67 2x7 2x10 2x14 2x18 2x26 2x32 2x40 2x58 2x118 2x142 2x154 2x178 2x202 2x256 2x346 2x468 65 0.8 12 20 26 32 43 55 70 100 200 240 260 300 340 430 580 786 2x65 2x0.76 2x6 2x10 2x12 2x16 2x22 2x28 2x36 2x52 2x104 2x126 2x136 2x158 2x178 2x226 2x304 2x414
2x80 2x0.82 2x5 2x8 2x12 2x14 2x20 2x26 2x34 2x48 2x96 2x116 2x126 2x146 2x166 2x210 2x282 2x384 80 0.95 10 16 22 27 36 46 58 84 168 202 218 252 286 362 488 662 2x80 2x0.93 2x5 2x8 2x10 2x12 2x18 2x22 2x30 2x42 2x86 2x102 2x112 2x128 2x146 2x184 2x248 2x338 180 3.3 2 3 4 5 7 10 12 18 36 50 54 64 72 90 122 180
2x110 2x1.1 2x4 2x6 2x8 2x10 2x14 2x18 2x24 2x36 2x72 2x86 2x94 2x108 2x124 2x156 2x210 2x286
110 1.4 6 11 15 18 25 31 40 57 114 136 148 170 194 246 330 448 2x110 2x1.3 2x3 2x6 2x8 2x10 2x12 2x16 2x20 2x30 2x60 2x74 2x80 2x92 2x104 2x132 2x178 2x242 200 3.4 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17 34 48 54 62 70 88 118 174
135 150 3.1 3.2 2 2 3 3 4 4 6 5 8 8 10 10 13 13 19 18 38 36 54 52 58 56 68 66 76 74 96 94 130 126 192 186
With series correction 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x80 2x0.13 2x0.24 2x0.39 2x0.48 2x36 2x20 2x12 2x10 2x60 2x32 2x20 2x16 2x80 2x42 2x26 2x20 2x100 2x54 2x32 2x26 2x134 2x72 2x44 2x36 2x168 2x90 2x56 2x44 2x214 2x116 2x70 2x58 2x306 2x166 2x102 2x82 2x614 2x332 2x204 2x166 2x738 2x400 2x246 2x200 2x800 2x432 2x266 2x216 2x922 2x500 2x308 2x250 2x1046 2x566 2x348 2x282 2x1322 2x716 2x440 2x358 2x1784 2x966 2x594 2x482 2x2418 2x1310 2x806 2x654 With parallel correction 20 40 65 80 0.19 0.29 0.46 0.57 5 5 7 7 50 33 20 16 84 55 34 28 110 72 45 36 136 89 56 45 184 101 76 61 231 151 95 77 294 193 121 98 421 275 173 140 842 550 346 280 1010 662 416 336 1094 716 452 364 1262 828 522 420 1432 938 590 476 1810 1186 748 604 2442 1600 1008 814 3310 2168 1366 1104 With series correction 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x80 2x0.14 2x0.26 2x0.43 2x0.53 2x34 2x18 2x11 2x9 2x56 2x30 2x18 2x14 2x74 2x40 2x24 2x18 2x92 2x50 2x30 2x24 2x124 2x66 2x40 2x32 2x156 2x84 2x50 2x40 2x200 2x106 2x64 2x52 2x234 2x152 2x92 2x74 2x570 2x306 2x186 2x150 2x686 2x368 2x222 2x180 2x742 2x400 2x242 2x196 2x856 2x462 2x278 2x226 2x970 2x522 2x316 2x256 2x1228 2x662 2x400 2x324 2x1656 2x892 2x540 2x438 2x2246 2x1210 2x730 2x592 With parallel correction 35 55 90 135 150 180 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 1 1.2 17 17 25 36 36 36 40 30 50 37 25 63 47 31 21 19 15 86 65 43 28 26 21 110 82 55 36 33 27 140 105 70 46 42 35 200 150 100 66 60 50 400 300 200 132 120 100 560 420 280 186 168 140 606 454 302 202 182 152 700 524 350 232 210 174 792 594 396 264 238 198 1002 752 502 334 300 250 1352 1014 676 450 406 338 1982 1488 992 660 594 496
2x110 2x0.65 2x7 2x12 2x16 2x20 2x26 2x32 2x42 2x60 2x122 2x148 2x160 2x184 2x208 2x264 2x356 2x484
110 0.79 16 20 26 32 44 55 70 101 202 242 262 304 344 434 586 796 2x110 2x0.72 2x6 2x10 2x14 2x18 2x24 2x30 2x38 2x54 2x110 2x132 2x144 2x166 2x188 2x238 2x322 2x436 200 1.3 36 14 20 25 32 46 92 128 140 162 182 252 312 458
LC1K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40 D50, D65 D80, D95 D115, D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630, F800 LC1K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40 D50, D65 D80, D95 D115, D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630, F800
1/32
Contactor selection

Usual values
The tables show the following values: - IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated operational voltage, - C: unit capacitance for each lamp, corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers. These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number Iu by 1.2). Non-corrected P (W) 150 250 IB (A) 1.9 3.2 C (F) 4 2 Max. 6 3 no. 7 4 of 10 5 lamps 13 8 accor- 17 10 ding to 22 13 P (W) 31 18 62 36 88 52 96 56 110 66 124 74 158 94 214 126 312 186 Non-corrected P (W) 50 80 125 IB (A) 0.54 0.81 1.20 C (F) 14 9 6 Max 22 14 9 no. 27 18 12 of 35 23 15 lamps 48 32 21 accor- 61 40 27 ding to 77 51 34 P (W) 111 74 49 222 148 100 310 206 140 336 224 152 388 258 174 440 294 198 556 372 250 752 500 338 1102 734 496 Non-corrected P (W) 250 400 IB (A) 2.5 3.6 C (F) 3 2 Max 4 3 no. 6 4 of 7 5 lamps 10 7 accor- 13 9 ding to 16 11 P (W) 24 16 48 32 66 46 72 50 84 58 94 66 120 84 162 112 238 164 With parallel correction 150 250 400 700 0.84 1.4 2.2 3.9 20 32 48 96 17 22 13 8 30 18 11 6 39 23 15 8 50 30 19 10 71 42 27 15 142 84 54 30 200 120 76 42 216 130 82 46 250 150 94 54 282 170 108 60 358 214 136 76 482 290 184 104 708 424 270 152 With parallel correction 50 80 125 250 400 700 0.3 0.45 0.67 1.3 2.3 3.8 10 10 10 18 25 40 40 26 17 9 50 33 22 11 6 63 42 28 14 8 5 86 57 38 20 11 6 110 73 49 25 14 8 140 93 62 32 18 11 200 133 89 46 26 15 400 266 178 92 52 30 560 372 250 128 72 44 606 404 272 140 78 48 700 466 312 162 90 54 792 528 354 182 102 62 1002 668 448 232 130 78 1352 902 606 312 176 106 1982 1322 888 458 258 156 With parallel correction 250 400 1000 2000 1.4 2 5.3 11.2 32 32 64 140 13 9 18 13 4 23 16 6 30 21 7 42 30 11 5 84 60 22 10 120 84 32 14 130 90 34 16 150 104 40 18 170 118 44 20 214 150 56 26 290 202 76 36 424 298 112 52
1
1000 5.5 120 6 7 10 20 30 32 38 42 54 74 108 1000 5.5 60 3 4 6 7 10 20 30 32 38 42 54 74 108
High pressure sodium vapour lamps
400 5 1 2 3 3 5 6 8 12 24 34 36 42 48 60 80 118 250 2.30 3 5 6 8 11 14 17 26 52 72 78 90 102 130 176 258 1000 9.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 18 20 22 24 32 42 62
700 8.8 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 18 20 24 26 34 46 68 400 4.10 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 14 28 40 44 50 58 72 98 144 700 6.80 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 16 24 26 30 34 44 60 88
1000 12.4 1 1 2 2 3 4 8 14 16 18 20 24 32 48
1000 9.9 1 1 1 2 3 4 6 12 17 18 20 24 30 40 60
High pressure mercury vapour lamps
Metal iodine vapour lamps
2000 20 1 1 2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 30
1/33
Selection

For heating circuits
General
1
Characteristics of heating element
A heating circuit is a power switching circuit supplying one or more resistive heating elements switched by a contactor. The same general rules apply as for motor circuits, except that heating circuits are not normally subjected to overload currents. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection. The examples below are based on resistive heating elements used for industrial furnaces or for the heating of buildings (infra-red or resistive radiant type, convector heaters, closed loop heating circuits, etc.). The variation in resistance values between hot and cold states causes a current peak at switch-on which never exceeds 2 to 3 times the rated operational current. This initial peak does not recur during normal operation where subsequent switching is thermostatically controlled. The rated power and current of a heater are given for the normal operating temperature. The steady state current drawn by a heating circuit is constant when the voltage is stable. In fact: - it is unlikely that the number of loads in an existing circuit will be modified; - this type of circuit cannot create overloads. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection. Select: - gG type fuses, or - modular circuit-breakers. Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses. A heating element or group of heating elements of a given power may be either single-phase or 3-phase and may be supplied from a 220/127 V or a 400/230 V distribution system. Excluding a single-phase 127 V system (which is no longer commonly used), the following 3 types of circuit arrangement are possible: 1 - Single-phase 2-pole switching Circuit controlled by 2 poles of the contactor.
Protection
Switching, control, protection
KM1
2 - Single-phase 4-pole switching
Circuit controlled by a 4-pole contactor with the poles parallel connected in pairs using appropriate connecting links. This solution enables the control of power values approximately equivalent to those controlled by the same contactor on 3-phase.
KM1
3 - 3-phase switching
Circuit controlled by 3 poles of the contactor.
U U U
KM1
1/34
Selection (continued)

For heating circuits
Component selection according to the power switched

The combinations suggested below are based on an ambient temperature of 55 C and for powers at the nominal voltage, but they also ensure switching in the event of prolonged overloads up to 1.05 Ue. Switching Single-phase 2-pole switching Scheme
U
Maximum power (kW) 220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V 1000 V 3.5 4.5 6 7 10 13 16.5 24 44 48 52 60 75 86 116 170 270 140 220 350 480 4.5 7 12 21 26 38 70 76 80 96 120 137 185 272 425 224 352 560 768
U
Contactor size LC1, LP1-K09 LC1-D12 LC1-D18 LC1-D25 LC1-D32, LC1-D38 LC1-D40 LC1, LP1-D65 LC1, LP1-D80 LC1-D115, LC1-D150 LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F4002 LC1-F5002 LC1-F6302, LC1-F800 LC1-F780 LC1-BL32 LC1-BM32 LC1-BP32 LC1-BR32 LC1, LP1-K09004 LC1-DT25 LC1-DT40 LC1-D40004 LC1, LP1-D65004 LC1, LP1-D80004 LC1-D115004 LC1-F1854 LC1-F2254 LC1-F2654 LC1-F3304 LC1-F4004 LC1-F5004 LC1-F6304 LC1-F7804 LC1-BL34 LC1-BM34 LC1-BP34 LC1-BR34 LC1, LP1-K09 LC1-D12 LC1-D18 LC1-D25 LC1-D32, LC1-D38 LC1-D40 LC1, LP1-D65 LC1, LP1-D80 LC1-D115, LC1-D150 LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630, LC1-F800 LC1-F780 LC1-BL33 LC1-BM33 LC1-BP33 LC1-BR33
KM1
6.5 8 10.5 13 18 22.5 28.5 42 76 83 90 104 130 145 200 290 460 242 380 605 830 8 13 21 36 45.5 66 121 132 142 166 205 236 320 470 735 387 608 968 1328 8 13 18 22.5 31 38 49 70.5 131 143 155 179 225 256 346 509 800 419 658 1047 1437
11 14 18.5 22.5 30.5 39.5 43.5 73 118 130 145 160 200 230 310 450 715 370 580 925 1270 13.5 22.5 36.5 63.5 79.5 117.5 190 202 230 253 320 363 490 718 1140 590 930 1478 2025 13.5 22.5 30.5 39.5 52.5 68 86 126 206 220 250 275 345 395 530 780 1235 640 1005 1600 2200
48 68 82.5 157 170 185 210 250 300 400 695 945 490 770 1225 1680 76.5 109 132 251 270 295 335 400 480 650 950 1520 785 1230 1960 2685 78 112.5 135.5 275 295 320 370 432 525 710 1030 1650 850 1350 2150 2950
Single-phase 4-pole switching
KM1
3-phase switching
U
KM1
4.5 7 10 13 18 22.5 28.5 40.5 76 82 90 103 130 149 200 294 463 242 380 606 830
Application example
For a 220 V, 50 Hz, single-phase circuit supplying a total heating load of 12.5 kW. Select: a 3-pole contactor LC1-D65 or LP1-D65.
(1) See complete contactor references on pages 2/74 to 2/77 or call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608.
1/35
Contactor selection

For switching the primaries of 3-phase LV/LV transformers
Operating conditions
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases, in a largely exponential manner, to quickly reach its steady state value. The value of this current depends on: - the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area of the core, rated inductance, number of turns, layout and size of the windings...), - the performance of the magnetic laminations used, - the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains voltage at the moment of switch-on. The inrush current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is independent of the no-load or on-load state of the transformer.
Contactor selection
The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given in the tables below. Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour Contactor LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1- LC1rating LP1- LP1K06 K09 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40 Maximum permissible closing peak current Maximum operational power (1) 220 V 240 V 380 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 690 V A 160 225 350 350 420 630 770 770 1100
LC1D50 1250
LC1D65 1400
LC1D80 1550
LC1D95 1650
LC1D115 1800
LC1D150 2000
kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA
2 3.5 4 5 6 LC1F185
2.5 5 5.5 7 8.5 LC1F225 3300
4 7 8 9 12 LC1F265 3800
4 7 8 9 12 LC1F330 5000
5 8 9 11 14 LC1F400 6300
7 12.5 14 16.5 21.5 LC1F500 7700
8.5 15 17 20 26.5 LC1F630 9000
8.5 15 17 20 26.5 LC1F780
14 24 28 32 42 60 LC1F800
16 27 32 36 48 70 LC1BL
18 31 36 40 53 80 LC1BM
19.5 34 39 45 59 85 LC1BP
19.5 34 39 45 59 95 LC1BR
25 50 55 65 80 100
25 50 55 65 80 100
1000 V kVA Contactor rating Maximum permissible closing peak current Maximum operational power (1) 220 V 240 V 380 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 690 V A
2900
12 000 11 000 18 000 18 000 24 000 30 000
kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA
40 75 80 95 120 150
45 80 90 100 130 170
50 90 100 110 140 200
65 120 130 140 170 225
75 130 140 170 200 250
100 170 190 225 270 375
120 200 220 260 350 470
175 280 310 350 400 650
145 245 270 315 425 550
230 400 450 480 600 700
230 400 450 480 600 700
300 530 560 600 800 1000
380 660 700 750 950 1200
1000 V kVA
(1) Maximum operational power, corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.
1/36
Contactor selection

For switching 3-phase capacitor banks used for power factor correction
Standard contactors
Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which can, at the moment of switch-on, give rise to high transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies (1 to 15 kHz). As a general rule, the peak current on energisation is lower when: - the mains inductances are high, - the line transformer ratings are low, - the transformer short-circuit voltage is high, - the ratio between the sum of the ratings of the capacitors already switched into the circuit and that of the capacitors to be switched in is small (for multiple step capacitor banks). In accordance with standards IEC 70, NF C 54-100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must be able to withstand a continuous current of 1.43 times the rated current of the capacitor bank step being switched. The rated operational powers given in the tables opposite take this overload into account. Short-circuit protection is normally provided by gI type HPC fuses rated at 1.7 to 2 In.
Capacitor applications
Operating conditions Capacitors are directly switched. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed the values indicated opposite. An inductor may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the peak current, if necessary. Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature. Power factor correction by a single-step capacitor bank The use of a choke inductor is unnecessary: the inductance of the mains supply is adequate to limit the peak to a value compatible with the contactor characteristics. Power factor correction by a multiple-step capacitor bank Select a special contactor as dened on page 2/92. If a standard contactor is used, it is essential to insert a choke inductor in each of the three phases of each step.
Maximum operational power of contactors

Standard contactors Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour. Electrical durability at maximum load: 100,000 operating cycles. With choke inductors connected, where necessary. Operational power at 50/60 Hz 40 C (1) 55 C (1) 220 V 400 V 600 V 220 V 400 V 240 V 440 V 690 V 240 V 440 V kVAR kVAR kVAR kVAR kVAR 6 11 15 6 11 9 15 20 9 15 11 20 25 11 20 14 25 30 14 25 17 30 37 17 30 22 40 50 22 40 22 40 50 22 40 35 60 75 35 60 50 90 125 38 75 60 110 135 40 85 70 125 160 50 100 80 140 190 60 110 90 160 225 75 125 100 190 275 85 140 125 220 300 100 160 180 300 400 125 220 250 400 600 190 350 250 400 600 190 350 200 350 500 180 350 300 550 650 250 500 500 850 950 400 750 600 1100 1300 500 1000 (1) Upper limit of temperature category conforming to IEC 70.
600 V 690 V kVAR 15 20 25 30 37 50 50 75 80 90 100 110 125 165 200 300 500 500 500 600 750 1000
Maximum peak current A 560 850 1600 1900 2160 2160 3040 3040 3100 3300 3500 4000 5000 6500 8000 10 000 12 000 14 200 25 000 25 000 25 000 25 000
Contactor size
LC1-D09, D12 LC1-D18 LC1-D25 LC1-D32, D38 LC1-D40 LC1-D50 LC1-D65 LC1-D80, D95 LC1-D115 LC1-D150 LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630 LC1-F800 LC1-BL LC1-BM LC1-BP LC1-BR
1/37
Motor starter coordination

Concepts
The need for coordination
All motor starters include devices which provide short-circuit protection, power switching and overload protection. The devices may be separate components, such as a set of fuses or an MCCB, a contactor, and a thermal overload relay. Alternatively, the functions may be combined in a single component - a fully integrated starter. Under overload conditions, the overload protection will trip the supply to the motor in a time which depends upon the current. The greater the current, the faster the overload will trip, but in the event of a short circuit, its response time is still not fast enough to prevent damage to the motor or starter. Separate protection against short circuits is, therefore, necessary. Motor starters may, however, be subjected to a whole range of fault conditions, from a minor overload to a high-current short circuit. If the devices making up the starter are not properly coordinated, certain levels of fault may not be correctly handled. Possible consequences include overheated cables and equipment, with an associated risk of fire; contact welding in the switching device, rendering it unfit for further service, and permanent degradation of the characteristics of the overload protection device, rendering it unreliable - or even unsafe - for future use.
Standards
Telemecanique have offered certified motor starters for a number of years. The original combinations were tested to IEC 292 providing Type c coordination. The current standards were introduced as the IEC 947 series for Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear in the early 1990s. These were then adopted by CENELEC in Europe and published as the EN 60947 series of standards. More recently the IEC has adopted the EN numbering system for standards, with many standards now being developed in parallel by the IEC and CENELEC and published at the same time. Thus IEC 60947-1 and EN 60947-1 are basically the same standard with possible minor differences in the text. CENELEC EN standards are published as an identical version by the Standards organisation of each European country using the prefix of that body. For example, in the United Kingdom EN 60947-1 has been published as BS EN 60947-1. All standards shown in the catalogue as IEC/EN can therefore be read as the equivalent BS EN standard.
Solutions
Three products Telemecanique model d and F contactors, used in conjunction with Merlin Gerin magnetic-only (MA) trip MCCBs or type T HRC fuses, and LRD bimetal thermal or LR9 electronic overload relays, offer an exceptional versatile choice of motor starting options. The range of options is increased still further by choosing an LT6 multifunction protection relay in place of standard overloads. Details of tested and proven three product combinations are provided in the tables on pages 1/42 and 1/43. Many users prefer the convenience of a resetable circuit breaker to the use of replaceable HRC fuses. In this situation, Telemecanique model d and F contactors, used in conjunction with GV2 or GV7 motor circuit breakers having a motor overload characteristic, provide an attractive solution. GV2 and GV7 motor circuit breakers are specifically designed for use in motor starter circuits, and combine overload and short-circuit protection in a single device. Full coordination is assured for the tested and proven two product combinations listed in the tables on pages 1/44 and 1/45. For the vast majority of straightforward motor starting requirements up to 30 kW, fully integrated single-component products in the Integral range are an ideal and economical choice. Integral Control and Protection Switching (CPS) devices offer a true black-box solution, with fitand-forget performance, even after being subjected to short circuit fault conditions. All products in the range are fully tested to IEC/EN 60947-6-2, and automatically offer total coordination under all operating conditions. Selection tables for CPS devices are provided on pages 1/46 and 1/47.
Two products
Single product
1/38

Fuse and MCCB Type 2 combinations
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
This standard covers both contactors and motor starters. Provisions relate specifically to motor starters assembled from separate components - typically a set of fuses or magnetic-only MCCB, a contactor, and a thermal overload relay. Starters comprising other combinations of components are, however, not excluded. This standard defines two levels of coordination: Type 1 providing complete protection for individuals in the case of a fault, but not directly limiting the amount of damage which may be caused to the starter, meaning costly downtime after a fault, together with the inconvenience and expense of having to replace damaged equipment. Type 2 coordination also offers complete protection for individuals against injury, in the event of a fault, but additionally offers an improved level of protection for the starter, potentially reducing plant downtime. The table below shows the tests which are required for Type 2 coordination but it's important to note that only the r test is compulsory. Manufacturers who have only carried out the r test can still claim Type 2 coordination - here is no obligation to carry out the subsequent making and breaking tests to ensure that the starter is fit for further service. Telemecanique, however, goes beyond the minimum requirements of IEC/EN 60947-4-1, and carries out all of the prescribed tests on every product combination for which Type 2 coordination is claimed. Users of Telemecanique products can not only rely on full coordination under all conditions, they can also be sure that, after a fault, their installation will remain fit for further service.
Test requirements
Test SCPD / Overload crossover Requirements Carried out to establish the cross over current, Ic, is close to its theoretical value. This test is not obligatory High current short circuit (q test) The overload relay is tested to show that the SCPD/contactor/ thermal overload association remains true to its characteristics O-CO tests Typically at 50 kA, 63 kA, 80 kA, depending on the size of the contactor and market requirements Low level short circuit ( r test ) O-CO tests At a short circuit current determined by the current rating of the starter, e.g. 1 kA for ratings up to 16 A and 42 kA for a 1000 A rating Contactor make and break Carried out at the discretion of the test engineer depending upon whether he judges the contactors to need verification that they are in a re-useable condition - 25 make / break cycles Dielectric test at 900 V for one minute to prove the integrity of the insulation Final calibration tests to prove the overload is still operating within its published characteristics
Dielectric insulation
Overload calibration
The following symbols are used in defining the operating sequences: O represents a breaking operation (Opening) represents a manual making operation (Closing) followed by a breaking operation (Opening). If the starter cannot be operated manually, the sequence rCO is used instead. t represents the time interval between two successive short-circuit operations. This is, in most cases, three minutes. represents a remote-controlled making operation (Closing) - by energising the control circuit - followed by a breaking operation (Opening).
CO
rCO
1/39
Motor starter coordination (continued)

Control and protective switching (CPS)
IEC/EN 60947-6-2
This standard relates specifically to control and protective switching (CPS) devices, which are more usually referred to as integrated starters. Because no welding of contacts is allowed under any short circuit fault condition, this standard does not usually cover starters made up of separate components, such as a motor protection circuit breaker and a contactor, mounted on a common baseplate, even though these are sometimes loosely described as "integrated starters". It only applies to starters which are designed, manufactured and marketed as a single, totally integrated unit meeting all the requirements of the test sequences specified. This distinction is important, as the standard demands higher levels of performance than those required by IEC/EN 60947-4-1 starters assembled from separate components. For example, IEC/EN 60947-6-2, in addition to a no contact welding requirement under short circuit conditions, provides guaranteed continuity of electrical life, even after a number of fault clearances. The standard ensures the highest level of coordination, with comprehensive protection for personnel and equipment. In addition, as the table below shows, comprehensive performance testing, involving thousands of making/breaking capacity operating cycles, both before and after short-circuit testing, closely resembling the normal operating conditions of a starter. Users selecting Tesys Model U products which conform with this standard can, therefore, be sure of blackbox convenience with fit-and-forget safe efficient performance with downtime and stoppages for maintenance reduced to a minimum.
Test requirements
Test SCPD - Overload crossover (Sequence I) Requirements Carried out to establish the cross over current, Ic, is close to its theoretical value. Similar to IEC/EN60947-4-1 tests but with tighter parameters. O-CO-CO tests At 50 kA with normal product operation before and after sequences No contact weld allowed. Low level short circuit ( Sequence III at Ics) O-CO-CO-O-rCO-rCO tests At a short circuit current determined by the current rating of the CPS starter, though, on average 20 - 30 times max. with catalogue values before and after operating sequences. No contact weld allowed. Ics 3000 make and break tests before and after the short circuit test sequence II Icu 1500 make and break tests before and after the short circuit test sequence III
High current short circuit (Sequence IV at Icu) operating
Contactor make and break
Dielectric insulation
Dielectric test at 1380 V for one minute to prove the integrity of the insulation Final calibration tests to prove the overload was still operating within its published characteristics
Calibration
The following symbols are used in defining the operating sequences: O CO represents a breaking operation (Opening) represents a manual making operation (Closing) followed by a breaking operation (Opening). If the starter cannot be operated manually, the sequence rCO is used instead. t rCO represents the time interval between two successive short-circuit operations. This is, in most cases, three minutes. represents a remote-controlled making operation (Closing) - by energising the control circuit - followed by a breaking operation (Opening).
1/40

Component selection criteria
Component coordination in motor starters

Selection of components for use in a motor starter combination should be based on the following criteria: Thermal overload selected to allow a current setting for the rated flc of the motor. SCPD (Fuse, circuit breaker or CPS device) selected to provide an overload/SCPD crossover current value which allows correct motor starting, protection of the overload and contactor under short circuit conditions, and is suitable for use at the prospective short circuit current. Contactor having a suitable AC3 rating with a breaking capacity greater than the SCPD/overload crossover current, and, when used with class 20 or class 30 overloads, an adequate time/current withstand capability.
IEC 61459 Technical report

This technical report, published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, provides guidance on the use of alternative Short Circuit Protective Devices (SCPDs) in motor starter combinations based on the information provided by a certified tested combination. The main criteria to be taken into account are: - The I2t let through energy of the alternative SCPD must be < that used in a tested combination - The IP current peak of the alternative SCPD must be < that used in a tested combination - The SCPD/overload crossover point must be suitable for the starting duty, plus overload and contactor protection.
Direct on line motor starters

Telemecanique offers a wide range of motor starters having certified Type 2 coordination, these being mainly for operation at 380/415 V. In the same way that IEC 61459 provides guidance on using SCPD's other than the certified combination, the same criteria can be used to determine combinations for use at other voltages. This is achieved by taking account of the let through energy and peak current values of the SCPD at the alternative voltage, used with a contactor suitable for use at that voltage, enabling a suitable contactor/overload combination to be selected.
Star-delta motor starters

The traditional position for the thermal overload in a star-delta starter is in the delta loop, with a current setting of 0.58 that of the motor full load current. Additionally the contactors are selected with an AC3 rating for this delta loop current. In order to achieve Type 2 coordination in accordance with the IEC 61459 recommendations it is necessary to base the component selection on the results of tested combinations. Where this combination has included a thermal overload, in which the impedance of the device has an influence on the energy let through under short circuit conditions, this must be taken into account when selecting components. With a starter based upon a traditional circuit the following points should be considered: The overload in the delta-loop, is only in series with one of the two contactors in circuit when the motor is running. The contactors will be of a smaller rating than those for a DOL starter having the same kW rating. In the case of an overload having directly connected bi-metallic elements, such as model 'd', it is necessary to simulate the conditions of a tested DOL combination. This is achieved by placing the thermal overload, fully rated for the motor flc, directly after the SCPD. The contactors must be of the same rating as that used with the overload in the DOL combination. The rating of the SCPD may be of a lower rating in the case of a fuse, but in the case of an MCCB will be of the same rating as for the DOL combination. Where the overload is of the CT operated bar primary type, such as the LR9-F type or the LT6 used with external CT's, the short circuit Type 2 tests will effectively be a SCPD/contactor combination. In this case a CT operated overload can be retained in the traditional delta-loop position. The contactors used in the combination may be of a smaller rating than those for the DOL combination, but must be suitable for use with the SCPD selected for starting duty of the starter.
1/41

Certified Type 2 DOL fused SCPD combinations
80 kA 0.55 kW to 45 kW Fuse + model d contactor + thermal overload
1
Q1
L1 1 2
L2 3 4
L3
1
5
2
GE Power Controls RED SPOT fuse to EN 60269-2
3
Contactor to EN 60947-4-1
4
Overload relay to EN 60947-4-1 Overload current setting range
5
Minimum electrical safety clearance to door
2
6
Standard motor ratings, category AC3 at 415 V
Crossover Current Current current r q
kW
1 KM1 2 1 F1 2 U 4 V 6 W 4 3 6 5 3 5
HP 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 5.5 7.5 10 12 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
A 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 80
Reference NIT6 NIT10 NIT16 NIT16 NIT16 NIT20 NIT20 NIT20M25 TIA32M35 TIA32M35 TIA32M50 TIA32M63 TIS63M80 TIS63M80 TIS63M100 TCP100M125 TCP100M125
Reference LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D18 LC1D18 LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D38 LC1D40 LC1D65 LC1D80 LC1D80
Reference LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD35 LRD3355 LRD3359 LRD3363 LRD3363
A 1-1.7 1.6-2.5 2.5-4 2.5-4 4-6 5.5-8 7-10 9-13 12-18 12-18 16-24 23-32 30-38 30-40 48-65 63-80 63-80
mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12
A 14 25.4 53 49 47 63 58 70 109 180 180 255 480 440 520 660 640
A 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 5 kA 5 kA 5 kA
A 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA
M
3
0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
80 kA 55 kW to 375 kW Fuse + model d/F contactor + electronic overload

1
For further details consult the GE Power Controls fuse catalogue.
2
3
4
5
3,4,5
For further details consult the appropriate page in this catalogue.
kW 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 270 375
HP 75 110 136 150 190 220 300 360 500
A 95 138 182 200 250 275 385 480 610
Reference TCP100M160 TF200M250 TF200M250 TF200M315 TKF315M355 TKF315M355 TMF400M450 TTM500 TTM630
Reference LC1D115 LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630
Reference LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7381
A 90-150 90-150 132-220 132-220 200-330 200-330 300-500 300-500 380-630
mm 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A 874 1600 1329 1840 2275 2173 3003 3174 3782
A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 18 kA 18 kA 18 kA
A 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA
Current corresponding to the crossover point of the time-current characteristics of the overload relay and fuse.
Current corresponding to the prospective short circuit current based on the AC3 rating.
80 kA 2.2 kW to 425 kW Fuse + model d/F contactor + electronic multi-function protection relay
1
2
3
4
5
Current based on the maximum conditional short circuit rating.
kW
HP
Reference
Reference
Reference
A 1-5 1-5 5-25 5-25 150-750
mm 10 10 10 10 0
A 49.5 49.5 185 185 5106
A 1 kA 1 kA 3 kA 3 kA 30 kA
A 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA
2.2 3 2.2 3 11 15 11 15 425 565 (1) Tested using
5 NIT16 LC1D09 LT6P0M005FM 5 NIT16 LC1D18 LT6P0M005FM 21 TIA32M50 LC1D25 LT6P0M025FM 21 TIA32M50 LC1D32 LT6P0M025FM 690 TLM710 LC1F780 LT6P0M005FM (1) 750/1 5P15 0.5 VA current transformers.
Untested intermediate combinations allowed under clause 8.3.4.2 A starter covering a range of motor ratings and equipped with interchangeable overload relays shall be tested with the overload relay with the highest impedance (0.55 kW) and the overload relay with the lowest impedance 4 kW, together with the corresponding SCPDs. Tested combinations where, for this motor kW rating, the thermal overload is adjusted to a lower full load motor current setting.
1/42

Certified Type 2 MCCB DOL combinations
70 kA 9 kW to 37 kW MCCB + model d contactor + thermal overload (1)

L1 1 L2 3 L3 5
1
2
Merlin Gerin MCCB to EN 60947-2
3
4
5
Q1
2
2 1 KM1 2 1 F1 2 U 4 V 6 W 4 3 6 5 4 3 6 5
kW
3
HP 12 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
A 18 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 80 100 135
Reference NS80HMA25 NS80HMA50 NS80HMA50 NS80HMA50 NS80HMA50 NS80HMA80 NS80HMA80 NS100HMA100 NS160HMA150 NS160HMA150
Reference LC1D40 LC1D40 LC1D40 LC1D50 LC1D50 LC1D65 LC1D80 LC1D115 LC1D115 LC1D150
Reference LRD3322 LRD3322 LRD3353 LRD3355 LRD3357 LRD3359 LRD3363 LR9D5367 LR9D5369 LR9D5369
A 17-25 17-25 23-32 30-40 37-50 48-65 63-80 60-100 90-150 90-150
mm 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
A 263 263 364 444 525 711 840 1300 1500 1950
A 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 5 kA 5 kA 10 kA 10 kA
A 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA
M
3
9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
70 kA 90 kW to 250 kW MCCB + model F contactor + electronic overload

1
1
2
Merlin Gerin MCCB to EN 60947-2
3
4
5
For further details consult the Merlin Gerin Compact NS MCCB catalogue .
kW 90 110 132 160 200 220 250
HP 136 150 190 220 300 360 500
A 160 200 230 270 361 380 430
Reference NS250HMA220 NS250HMA220 NS400HMA320 NS400HMA320 NS630HMA500 NS630HMA500 NS630HMA500
Reference LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F500
Reference LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7379
A 132-220 132-220 200-330 200-330 300-500 300-500 300-500
mm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A 2420 2860 3520 4000 5500 6300 6300
A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 18 kA 18 kA 18 kA
A 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA 70 kA
3,4,5
Current corresponding to the crossover point of the time-current characteristics of the overload relay and MCCB.
For information on further MCCB motor starter combinations refer to the Merlin Gerin publication Merlin Gerin Circuit Breaker application guide, publication number MGD 5032. To obtain a copy contact our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608. (1) u 45kw uses an electronic overload.
1/43

Certified Type 2 Thermal-magnetic Motor Circuit Breaker DOL combinations
130 kA/50 kA 0.06 kW to 15 kW GV2-ME Motor Circuit Breaker + contactor
1
Q1
L1 1
L2 3
L3 5
1
2
Motor Circuit Breaker to EN 60947-2 EN 60947-4-1
3
Overload current setting range Contactor to EN 60947-4-1
4
5
Crossover current
6
Current r
7
Current q
2
2 1 KM1 2 4 6 4 3 6 5
kW
3
HP 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.24 0.34 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 5.5 7.5 10 12 15 20
A 0.22 0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 1 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18 21 28.5
Reference GV2ME02 GV2ME03 GV2ME04 GV2ME04 GV2ME05 GV2ME05 GV2ME06 GV2ME07 GV2ME08 GV2ME08 GV2ME10 GV2ME14 GV2ME14 GV2ME16 GV2ME20 GV2ME21 GV2ME22 GV2ME32
A 0.16-0.25 0.25-0.40 0.25-0.40 0.40-0.63 0.40-0.63 0.63-1 1-1.6 1.6-2.5 2.5-4 2.5-4 4-6.3 6-10 6-10 9-14 13-18 17-23 20-25 24-32
Reference LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D32
mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
A 2.25 5 8 8 12.8 12.8 22.4 32.5 51 51 78 138 138 170 223 327 327 416
A 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA
M
3
0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
130kA/50kA 0.06 kW to 15 kW GV2-P Motor Circuit Breaker + contactor

2
For further details consult the appropriate page in this catalogue. For further details consult the appropriate page in this catalogue.
1
2
Motor Circuit Breaker to EN 60947-2 EN 60947-4-1
3
Overload current setting range Contactor to EN 60947-4-1
4
5
Crossover current
6
Current r
7
Current q
3,4
kW
HP 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.24 0.34 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 5.5 7.5 10 12 15 20
A 0.22 0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 1 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18 21 28.5
Reference GV2P02 GV2P03 GV2P04 GV2P04 GV2P05 GV2P05 GV2P06 GV2P07 GV2P08 GV2P08 GV2P10 GV2P14 GV2P14 GV2P16 GV2P20 GV2P21 GV2P22 GV2P32
A 0.16-0.25 0.25-0.40 0.25-0.40 0.40-0.63 0.40-0.63 0.63-1 1-1.6 1.6-2.5 2.5-4 2.5-4 4-6.3 6-10 6-10 9-14 13-18 17-23 20-25 24-32
Reference LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D32
mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
A 2.25 5 8 8 12.8 12.8 22.4 32.5 51 51 78 138 138 170 223 327 327 416
Current corresponding to the crossover point of the time-current characteristics of the overload relay and Motor circuit breaker.
0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
1/44

Certified Type 2 Magnetic only Circuit Breaker DOL combinations
130kA/50kA 0.06 kW to 15 kW GV2-L Circuit Breaker + contactor

L1 1 L2 3 L3 5
1
2
Motor Circuit Breaker to EN 60947-2
3
4
Overload relay to EN 60947-4-1 Overload setting range
5
Minimum electrical safety clearance
6
Crossover current
7
Current r
8
Current q
Q1
2
2 1 KM1 2 1 F1 2 U 4 V 6 W 4 3 6 5 4 3 6 5
kW
3
HP 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.24 0.34 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 5.5 7.5 10 12 15 20
A 0.22 0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 1 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18 21 28.5
Reference GV2L03 GV2L03 GV2L04 GV2L04 GV2L05 GV2L05 GV2L06 GV2L07 GV2L08 GV2L08 GV2L10 GV2L14 GV2L14 GV2L16 GV2L20 GV2L21 GV2L22 GV2L32
Reference LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D32 LRD02 LRD03 LRD04 LRD04 LRD05 LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LRD22 LRD32
A 0.16-0.25 0.25-0.4 0.4-0.63 0.4-0.63 0.63-1 0.63-1 1-1.7 1.6-2.5 2.5-4 2.5-4 4-6 5.5-8 7-10 9-13 12-18 16-24 16-24 23-32
A 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
A 2.25 5 8 8 12.8 12.8 22.4 32.5 51 51 78 138 138 170 223 327 327 416 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA
M
3
0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
130kA/50kA 0.06 kW to 15 kW GV2-LE Circuit Breaker + contactor

1
For further details consult the Merlin Gerin Compact NS MCCB catalogue .
2
Motor Circuit Breaker to EN 60947-2
3
4
Overload relay to EN 60947-4-1 Overload setting range
5
Minimum electrical safety clearance
6
Crossover current
7
Current r
8
Current q
3,4,5
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
HP 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.24 0.34 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 5.5 7.5 10 12 15 20
A 0.22 0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 1 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18 21 28.5
Reference GV2LE03 GV2LE03 GV2LE04 GV2LE04 GV2LE05 GV2LE05 GV2LE06 GV2LE07 GV2LE08 GV2LE08 GV2LE10 GV2LE14 GV2LE14 GV2LE16 GV2LE20 GV2LE21 GV2LE22 GV2LE32
Reference LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D32 LRD02 LRD03 LRD04 LRD04 LRD05 LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LRD22 LRD32
A 0.16-0.25 0.25-0.4 0.4-0.63 0.4-0.63 0.63-1 0.63-1 1-1.7 1.6-2.5 2.5-4 2.5-4 4-6 5.5-8 7-10 9-13 12-18 16-24 16-24 23-32
A 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
A 2.25 5 8 8 12.8 12.8 22.4 32.5 51 51 78 138 138 170 223 327 327 416 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 3 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 130 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA
Current corresponding to the crossover point of the time-current characteristics of the overload relay and MCCB.
1/45

Certified CPS Integral starter DOL combinations
50 kA 0.06 kW to 9 kW Integral 18 CPS
1
A1 A2 Q1
L1 1
L2 3
L3 5
1 kW
HP
2 Reference
3 Reference
A
Module Current setting range
4 mm
5 A
Current test sequence I
6 A
Current test sequence II
7 A
Current test sequence III
Integral 18 CPS Integral 18 CPS breaker protection breaker to EN 60947-6-2 module to EN 60947-6-2
2 3
2 4 6
M
3
0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9
0.08 0.12 0.16 0.24 0.34 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 5.5 7.5 10 12
0.22 0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 1 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18
LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U LDiLB030U
LB1LB03P01 LB1LB03P02 LB1LB03P03 LB1LB03P04 LB1LB03P04 LB1LB03P05 LB1LB03P06 LB1LB03P06 LB1LB03P07 LB1LB03P08 LB1LB03P08 LB1LB03P10 LB1LB03P13 LB1LB03P13 LB1LB03P17 LB1LB03P17 LB1LB03P21
0.1-0.16 0.16-0.25 0.25-0.40 0.40-0.63 0.40-0.63 0.63-1 1-1.6 1-1.6 1.6-2.5 2.5-4 2.5-4 4-6.3 6-10 6-10 9-14 13-18 17-23
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
2.4 3.75 6 9.45 9.45 15 24 24 37.5 60 60 90 150 150 240 240 270
540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A 540 A
50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA

1 kW HP A 2 Reference 3 Reference A
2,3,4
For further details consult the appropriate pages in this catalogue.
4 mm
5 A
6 A
7 A
Current corresponding to the crossover point of the time-current characteristics of the overload relay and magnetic trip settings within the Integral protection module.
0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
0.12 0.16 0.24 0.34 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 5.5 7.5 10 12 15 20
0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 1 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18 25 32
LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U LDiLC030U
LB1LC03M03 LB1LC03M04 LB1LC03M04 LB1LC03M05 LB1LC03M06 LB1LC03M06 LB1LC03M07 LB1LC03M08 LB1LC03M08 LB1LC03M10 LB1LC03M13 LB1LC03M13 LB1LC03M17 LB1LC03M17 LB1LC03M22 LB1LC03M22 LB1LC03M22
0.25-0.40 0.40-0.63 0.40-0.63 0.63-1 1-1.6 1-1.6 1.6-2.5 2.5-4 2.5-4 2.5-4 6.3-10 6.3-10 10-16 10-16 16-25 16-25 23-32
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
4.8 7.6 7.6 12 19 19 30 48 48 76 120 120 190 190 300 300 380
960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA
1/46

Certified CPS Integral starter DOL combinations

L1 1 A1 A2 L2 3 L3 5
1 kW
HP
2 Reference
3 Reference
A
4 mm
5 A
6 A
7 A
Q1
2 3
2 4 6
5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 25 33
7.5 10 12 15 20 30 33 44
11 14.8 18 25 32 40 50 63
LDiLD030U LDiLD030U LDiLD030U LDiLD030U LDiLD030U LDiLD030U LDiLD030U LDiLD030U
LB1LD03M16 LB1LD03M21 LB1LD03M22 LB1LD03M22 LB1LD03M53 LB1LD03M55 LB1LD03M57 LB1LD03M61
10-13 13-18 16-25 16-25 28-40 16-25 35-50 45-63
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
156 216 300 300 380 480 600 760
1575 A 1575 A 1575 A 1575 A 1575 A 1575 A 1575 A 1575 A
50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA
M
3
2,3,4
For further details consult the appropriate pages in this catalogue.
Current corresponding to the crossover point of the time-current characteristics of the overload relay and magnetic trip settings within the Integral protection module.
1/47
General

Long distance remote control of contactors
or
Voltage drop caused by the inrush current
When the operating coil of a contactor is energised, the inrush current produces a voltage drop in the control supply cable caused by the resistance of the conductors, which can adversely affect closing of the contactor. An excessive voltage drop in the control supply cables (both a.c. and d.c.) can lead to non closure of the contactor poles or even destruction of the coil due to overheating. This phenomenon is aggravated by: - a long cable run, - a low control circuit voltage, - a cable with a small c.s.a., - a high inrush power drawn by the coil. The maximum length of cable, depending on the control voltage, the inrush power and the conductor c.s.a. is indicated in the graphs below. Remedial action To reduce the voltage drop at switch-on: - increase the conductor c.s.a. - use a higher control circuit voltage - use an intermediate control relay. Selection of conductor c.s.a. These graphs are for a maximum line voltage drop of 5%. They give a direct indication of the copper conductor c.s.a. to be used for the control circuit cable, depending on its length, the inrush power drawn by the contactor coil and the control circuit voltage (see example on next page).
Total resistance of the 2 conductors of the control circuit in (1) 1000
1000
6
100
5 4
100
10
3 X 2 1
0,1 1 5 10 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 Inrush power drawn in VA
10
A C Y D E B
0,1 10 50 100 150
1 a 24 V 2 a 48 V
3 a 115 V 4 a 230 V
5 a 400 V 6 a 690 V
C.s.a. of copper cables A 0.75 mm2 C 1.5 mm2 B 1 mm2 D 2.5 mm2
500 1000 5000 10 000 Length of control cable in m (2)
E 4 mm2 F 6 mm2
1000
Total resistance of the 2 conductors of the control circuit in (1) 1000
100
100
10
10 10
A BC D E
8 7
0,1 1 5 10 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 Inrush power drawn in VA
0,1 10 50 100150 500 1000 500010 000 Length of control cable in m (2)
7 c 24 V 8 c 48 V
9 c 125 V 10 c 250 V
C.s.a. of copper cables A 0.75 mm2 C 1.5 mm2 B 1 mm2 D 2.5 mm2
E 4 mm2 F 6 mm2
(1) For 3-wire control, the current only ows in 2 of the conductors. (2) This is the length of the cable comprising 2 or 3 conductors (Distance between the contactor and the control device).
1/48
General

or
Voltage drop caused by the inrush current (continued)

What cable c.s.a. is required for the control circuit of an LC1-D40 115 V contactor, operated from a distance of 150 metres? - Contactor LC1-D40, voltage 115 V, 50 Hz: inrush power: 200 VA. On the left-hand graph on the page opposite, point X is at the intersection of the vertical line corresponding to 200 VA and the a 115 V voltage curve. On the right-hand graph on the page opposite, point Y is at the intersection of the vertical line corresponding to 150 m and the horizontal line passing through point X. Use the conductor c.s.a. indicated by the curve which passes through point Y, i.e. 1.5 mm2. If point Y lies between two c.s.a. curves, choose the larger of the c.s.a. values.
Calculating the maximum cable length The maximum permissible length for acceptable line voltage drop is calculated by the formula: U2 .s.K L = SA where: L: distance between the contactor and the control device in m, (length of the cable), U: supply voltage in V, SA: apparent inrush power drawn by the coil in VA, s: conductor c.s.a. in mm2, K: factor given in the table below.
a.c. supply
SA in VA K
20 1.38
40 1.5
100 1.8
150 2
200 2.15
d.c. supply
Irrespective of the inrush power SA, expressed in W K = 1.38
1/49
General (continued)

Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance
When the control contact of a contactor is opened the cable capacitance is effectively in series with the coil of the electromagnet. This capacitance can cause a residual current to be maintained in the coil, with the risk that the contactor will remain closed. This only applies to contactors operating on an a.c. supply. This phenomenon is aggravated by: - a long cable run between the coil control contact and the contactor, or between the coil control contact and the power supply, - a high control circuit voltage, - a low coil consumption, sealed, - a low value of contactor drop-out voltage. The maximum control cable length, according to the contactor coil supply voltage, is indicated in the graph on the page opposite.
Remedial action Various solutions can be adopted to avoid the risk of the contactor remaining closed due to cable capacitance: - use a d.c. control voltage, or, - add a rectier, connected as shown in the scheme below, but retaining an a.c. operating coil: in this way, rectied a.c. current ows in the control circuit cable. When calculating the maximum cable length, take the resistance of the conductors into account.
1 Supply 50 Hz/60 Hz 2
- Connect a resistor in parallel with the contactor coil (1). Value of the resistance: 1 R = 10-3 C (F) Power to be dissipated: U2 PW = R (1) To avoid increasing the voltage drop due to inrush current, this resistor must be brought into operation after the contactor has closed by using an N/O contact. (C capacitance of the control cable)
1/50
A2
A1
General

Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance (continued)

These graphs are for a capacitance, between conductors, of 0.2 F/km. They make it possible to determine whether there is a risk of the contactor remaining closed due to the power drawn by the coil when sealed and the control circuit voltage, according to the length of the control cable.
Cable capacitance in F 100 100
10
1 2
10
3
0,1
7 8
4 5
0,1
0,01 1 5 7 10
6
50 100 Power drawn, sealed in VA
0,01 100
300
500
1000
5000 10 000 Length of control cable in m
1 a 24 V 2 a 48 V 3 a 115 V
4 a 230 V 5 a 400 V 6 a 690 V
7 3-wire control 8 2-wire control
In the zones below the straight lines for 3-wire and 2-wire control respectively, there is a risk of the contactor remaining closed. Examples What is the maximum length for the control cable of an LC1-D12 contactor, operating on 230 V, with 2-wire control? - Contactor LC1-D12, voltage 230 V, 50 Hz: power sealed 7 VA. On the left-hand graph, point A is at the intersection of the vertical line for 7 VA with the a 230 V voltage curve. On the right-hand graph, point B is at the intersection of the horizontal line with the 2-wire control curve. The maximum cable length is therefore 300 m. In the same example, with a 600 m cable, the point lies in the risk zone. A resistor must therefore be connected in parallel with the contactor coil. Value of this resistance: 1 1 R = = = 8.3 k 103.C 103.0.12 Power to be dissipated:
2 U2 = (220) P = = 6 W R 8300
Alternative solution: use a d.c. control supply. Calculating the cable length The maximum permitted length of control cable to avoid the effects of capacitance is calculated using the formula: S L = 455. U2.Co L: distance between the contactor and the control device in km (length of the cable), S: apparent power, sealed, in VA, U: control voltage in V, Co: cable capacitance in F/km.
1/51
Product packaging
Caring for the environment
To reduce excessive consumption of packaging materials and make them easy to recycle are the common objectives of users, public authorities and manufacturers.
As a responsible manufacturer, Schneider Electric shares this desire to protect the environment and therefore supplies its customers with the most suitable packaging to meet the above objectives, whilst at the same time maintaining quality and adequate protection of its products during transport.
Transport packaging and sales packaging

Schneider Electric undertakes to supply packaging made from re-cyclable materials for: p transport packaging, which bears a symbol showing that it can be recycled, p outer wrapping and sales packs marked with the following symbols: For cardboard outer wrapping and packs
RECYCLABLE
For plastic outer wrapping and packs (standard DIN: 6120)

02
PE-HD (example) The majority of our packs are made from materials which have already been recycled.
Individual packs or bulk packaging

Most of our automation components are supplied singly, either by us or by our distributors. Our products are therefore usually supplied in individual packs, unless specically indicated in our catalogue. However, in order to meet the requirements of large consumers, to make it easier for them to handle our products and to reduce waste, we can supply certain products in bulk packs. The products available in bulk packs are listed on the next page. They are covered by a special ordering procedure. For delivery times, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. Comment For products which are dust sensitive and are produced in a clean room environment, additional protection is justied in order to ensure that their original quality is preserved right through to the moment they are put into use. These products, with such adequate protection, are then supplied in either individual or bulk packs.
1/52
Product packaging
Products available in bulk packs
Products in bulk packs are identified by the suffix TQ added to the reference of the unit product. Lot reference Qty. per lot 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 50 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 Weight Lot reference Qty. per lot 16 20 20 20 16 20 50 40 85 40 85 85 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 40 85 40 85 85 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 5 5 5 5 5 5 20 20 Weight Lot reference Qty. per lot 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Weight
CAD-32BDTQ CAD-32B7TQ CAD-32M7TQ CAD-32P7TQ CAD-50BDTQ CAD-50B7TQ CAD-50M7TQ CAD-50P7TQ GK2-AF01TQ GV-AE1TQ GV-AE11TQ GV-AE20TQ GV-AN11TQ GV-AN20TQ GV2-ME01AE1TQ GV2-ME01AE11TQ GV2-ME01AN11TQ GV2-ME01TQ GV2-ME02AE1TQ GV2-ME02AE11TQ GV2-ME02AN11TQ GV2-ME02TQ GV2-ME03AE1TQ GV2-ME03AE11TQ GV2-ME03AN11TQ GV2-ME03TQ GV2-ME04AE1TQ GV2-ME04AE11TQ GV2-ME04AN11TQ GV2-ME04TQ GV2-ME05AE1TQ GV2-ME05AE11TQ GV2-ME05AN11TQ GV2-ME05TQ GV2-ME06AE1TQ GV2-ME06AE11TQ GV2-ME06AN11TQ GV2-ME06TQ GV2-ME07AE1TQ GV2-ME07AE11TQ GV2-ME07AN11TQ GV2-ME07TQ GV2-ME08AE1TQ GV2-ME08AE11TQ GV2-ME08AN11TQ GV2-ME08TQ GV2-ME10AE1TQ GV2-ME10AE11TQ GV2-ME10AN11TQ GV2-ME10TQ GV2-ME14AE1TQ GV2-ME14AE11TQ GV2-ME14AN11TQ GV2-ME14TQ GV2-ME16AE1TQ GV2-ME16AE11TQ GV2-ME16AN11TQ GV2-ME16TQ GV2-ME20AE1TQ GV2-ME20AE11TQ GV2-ME20AN11TQ GV2-ME20TQ GV2-ME21AE1TQ GV2-ME21AE11TQ GV2-ME21AN11TQ GV2-ME21TQ GV2-ME22AE1TQ GV2-ME22AE11TQ
kg 16.000 16.000 16.000 16.000 16.000 16.000 16.000 16.000 6.000 0.300 0.400 0.400 1.000 1.000 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600
GV2-ME22AN11TQ GV2-ME22TQ GV2-ME32AE1TQ GV2-ME32AE11TQ GV2-ME32AN11TQ GV2-ME32TQ GV3-A01TQ LAD-C22TQ LAD-N02TQ LAD-N04TQ LAD-N11TQ LAD-N20TQ LAD-N22TQ LAD-N40TQ LAD-R0TQ LAD-R2TQ LAD-R4TQ LAD-T0TQ LAD-T2TQ LAD-T4TQ LA9-D92TQ LAD-C223TQ LAD-N023TQ LAD-N043TQ LAD-N113TD LAD-N203TQ LAD-N223TQ LAD-N403TQ LAD-R03TQ LAD-R23TQ LAD-R43TQ LAD-T03TQ LAD-T23TQ LAD-T43TQ LC1-D09BDTQ LC1-D09B7TQ LC1-D09M7TQ LC1-D09P7TQ LC1-D12BDTQ LC1-D12B7TQ LC1-D12M7TQ LC1-D12P7TQ LC1-D18BDTQ LC1-D18B7TQ LC1-D18M7TQ LC1-D18P7TQ LC1-D25BDTQ LC1-D25B7TQ LC1-D25M7TQ LC1-D25P7TQ LC1-D32BDTQ LC1-D32B7TQ LC1-D32M7TQ LC1-D32P7TQ LC1-D38BDTQ LC1-D38B7TQ LC1-D38M7TQ LC1-D38P7TQ LC1-D40B7TQ LC1-D40M7TQ LC1-D40P7TQ LC1-D50B7TQ LC1-D50M7TQ LC1-D50P7TQ LC1-D093BDTQ LC1-D093B7TQ
kg 4.960 5.200 5.500 5.600 4.960 5.200 3.000 2.000 2.550 2.000 2.550 2.550 2.000 2.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 1.800 3.000 3.000 0.100 2.000 2.550 2.000 2.550 2.550 2.000 2.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 1.800 3.000 3.000 6.400 6.400 6.400 6.400 6.500 6.500 6.500 6.500 6.600 6.600 6.600 6.600 5.550 5.550 5.550 5.550 5.630 5.630 5.630 5.630 5.700 5.700 5.700 5.700 7.000 7.000 7.000 7.000 7.000 7.000 6.400 6.400
LC1-D093M7TQ LC1-D093P7TQ LC1-D123BDTQ LC1-D123B7TQ LC1-D123M7TQ LC1-D123P7TQ LC1-D183BDTQ LC1-D183B7TQ LC1-D183M7TQ LC1-D183P7TQ LC1-D253BDTQ LC1-D253B7TQ LC1-D253M7TQ LC1-D253P7TQ LC1-D323BDTQ LC1-D323B7TQ LC1-D323M7TQ LC1-D323P7TQ LRD-01TQ LRD-02TQ LRD-03TQ LRD-04TQ LRD-05TQ LRD-06TQ LRD-07TQ LRD-08TQ LRD-10TQ LRD-12TQ LRD-14TQ LRD-16TQ LRD-21TQ LRD-22TQ LRD-32TQ LRD-35TQ
kg 6.400 6.400 6.500 6.500 6.500 6.500 6.600 6.600 6.600 6.600 5.500 5.500 5.500 5.500 5.630 5.630 5.630 5.630 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480 2.480
1/53
PCP 2006 Chap intros QK
17/5/06
10:50 am
Page 6
Contactors
and protection relays
Contactors
2/0
and
protection relays
Chapter 2
Contactors and protection relays
2.1
SK mini contactors Single-phase 3-phase 2/2 to 2/17
2.2
K contactors, accessories and overload relays AC-1 to 20 A AC-3 to12 A 2/18 to 2/61
2.3
TeSys model d contactors and overload relays AC-1 to 200 A AC-3 to 150 A Auxiliary contact blocks, coils and accessories for TeSys model d contactors and overload relays LT47 and LR97D over-current protection relays TeSys Model U motor starter controller 2/62 to 2/175
2.4
F contactors and overload relays AC-1 to 1600 A AC-3 to 780 A Auxiliary contact blocks, coils and accessories for F contactors LR9-F electronic overload relays to 630 A 2/176 to 2/233
2.5
LT6 electronic multifunction motor protection relays 0.2 A to 1600 A 2/234 to 2/251
2.6
LT3 thermistor protection relays 2/252 to 2/259
2.7
Special purpose contactors LC1-B bar and shaft to 2750 A CR1 magnetic latching to 1900 A 2/260 to 2/299
2.8
TeSys Quickfit installation system 2/300 to 2/319
2/1
Characteristics
Contactors
Mini-contactors types LC1-SK and LP1-SK
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, VDE 0110 gr C, CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508 V 690
Conforming to standards
IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, NF C 630110, VDE 0660 UL, CSA Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 (DIN 50015) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation C C m Horizontal axis TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct nger contact - 50+ 70 - 20+ 50 2000
2
2.1
Approvals Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device
Maximum operating altitude Operating position
Without derating Vertical axis
Without derating Cabling, screw clamp terminals Solid conductor
Without derating min mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 0.8 Conforming to standards EN 50005 max 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Terminal referencing Pozidriv n 1 head
References: pages 2/6 and 2/7 2/2
Dimensions: page 2/8
Schemes: page 2/9
Characteristics
Contactors
Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated operational frequency Frequency limits of the operational current Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity (for Ue 400 V) Short time rating I rms conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 (I rms) In free air for a time t from cold state ( 55 C) gG fuse U 440 V At Ith and 50 Hz for a temperature 55 C
AC-3 (1) (Ue 400 V) AC-1
For ambient temperature 55 C
A Hz Hz V A
12 50/60 Up to 400 690 66
2
2.1
A A
52 50
Short-circuit protection Average impedance per pole Maximum rated operational current
A m
16 4
A A A
6 12 20
Utilisation in category AC-1 resistive circuits, heating, lighting (Ue 440 V)
Increase in operational current by paralleling of poles
Auxiliary contact characteristics of add-on blocks

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency of operational current Short-circuit protection Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 To IEC/EN 60947-5-1 and VDE 0660, gG fuse Up to V 690 690 10 Up to 400 10 d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid up to 1200 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, V VDE 0110 group C, CSA C 22-2 n 14 For ambient temperature 55 C A Hz A
a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current (cos 0.4). 110/ 220/ 380/ V 24 48 127 230 400 440 VA VA VA 48 17 7 96 34 14 240 86 36 440 158 66 800 288 120 880 317 132
1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity
VA 1000 2050 5000 (1) For LC1 contactors
10000 14000 13000
References: pages 2/6 and 2/7
Schemes: page 2/9 2/3
Characteristics (continued)
Contactors
Control circuit characteristics

Contactor type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V LC1-SK06 a 24400 LP1-SK06 c 1272
2
2.1
Control voltage limits ( 55 C) single voltage coil
For operation For drop-out
0.851.1 Uc 0.20 Uc 16 VA 4.2 VA W 1.4
0.851.1 Uc 0.10 Uc 2.2 W 2.2 W 2.2
Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc
Inrush Sealed
Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil energisation and - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour 50/60 Hz coil c coil
ms ms
816 714
1018 812
ms ms
68 810 1200 10
46 68 1200 10
Schemes: page 2/9
Contactor selection
Contactors
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
2
2.1
2 1,5 1,2 1 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 2 220/380/415 V 500 V 220/230 V 380/400 V 415 V Current broken in A 2,5 2 1,1 1,1 3 2,5 3 1,1 1,5 1,5 2,2 2,2 4 5 4 6 5 1,5 3 3 7 6 8 9 7 A A
0,55 0,75
2,2 kW 4 kW 4 kW
only up to 415 V
Control of resistive circuits (cos 0.95). The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,15 0,1 2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 30 40 Current broken in A
References
Contactors
- Width of contactor 27 mm. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail. - Screw clamp terminals.
Mini-contactors for motor control (AC-3)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 (1) 220 V 230 V kW LC1-SK06 1.1 280 V 415 V kW 2.2 660 V 690 V kW 2.2 Rated operational voltage in AC-3 up to 400 V A 6 2 LC1-SK0600pp Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Weight
2
2.1
kg 0.132
Mini-contactors for use in category AC-1

Non inductive loads maximum current ( 55 C) utilisation category AC-1 A 12 a.c. 2 LC1-SK0600pp Control circuit supply Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Weight
kg 0.132
d.c.
LP1-SK0600pp
0.132
Add-on block with 1 power pole (for 3-phase circuits)

For use on contactor Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Reference Weight
kg LC1-SK06 clip-on front mounting 1 1 LA1-SK10 0.022
LA1-SK01
0.022
LA1-SK10 Note: Auxiliary contact blocks and coil suppressor module, see next page. (1) For use in AC-3 category and 3-phase circuits, an LA1-SKpp auxiliary contact block should be ordered separately for mounting on the contactor. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Mini-contactors LC1-SK Volts a 24 50/60 Hz Code B7 Mini-contactors LP1-SK Volts c Code 12 JD 24 BD 36 CD 48 ED 72 SD
48 E7
110 F7
120 G7
220 M7
230 P7
240 U7
380 Q7
400 V7
Characteristics: pages 2/2 to 2/5 2/6
Schemes: page 2/9
References
Contactors
Mini-contactors types LC1-SK and LP1-SK Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor modules
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

Clip-on front mounting For Maximum use on number of contactors blocks per contactor Composition Reference Weight
kg LC1-SK06 LA1-SK11 1 2 LA1-SK20 0.022
2
2.1
LA1-SK02
0.022
LA1-SK11
0.022
Coil suppressor module

Clip-on fixing and electrical connection on right-hand side, without use of tools For Type For Sold Unit in reference use on voltages lots of contactors LC1-SK06 and LP1-SK06 Varistor (1) a and c 24 V48 V
10
Weight kg 0.003
LA4-SKE1E
a and c 110 V250 V LA4-SKp1p Diode (2) c 24 V250 V
10
LA4-SKE1U
0.003
10
LA4-SKC1U
0.003
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
Characteristics: pages 2/2 to 2/5
Dimensions, mounting
Contactors
Dimensions Mini-contactors LC1, LP1-SK06
84,5 55,5 27
2
2.1
LA1-SK (1) LA4-SK 3,5 56
(1) Only on LC1-SK06 Mounting Mini-contactors LC1, LP1-SK06 on mounting rail AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200 (735 mm)
55,5
27
56
Schemes: page 2/9
Schemes
Contactors
2-pole mini-contactors LC1 and LP1-SK06

1/L1 3/L2
Add-on power pole block 1 pole + 1 N/O aux. LA1-SK10

13/NO 5/L3
1 pole + 1 N/C aux. LA1-SK01

21/NC 22 5/L3 T3/6
A2
A1
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
14
2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts 2 N/O LA1-SK20
33/NO 43/NO
2 N/C LA1-SK02
31/NC 41/NC
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-SK11

33/NO 41/NC
2.1
34
44
34
32
42
Dimensions: page 2/8 2/9
42
Characteristics
Contactors
Mini-contactors type LC1-SKGC for use in modular panels
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, VDE 0110 gr C, CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508 V 690
IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660 UL, CSA Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 (DIN 50015) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation C C m Horizontal axis TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct nger contact - 50+ 70 - 20+ 50 2000
2
2.1
Approvals Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device
Without derating Vertical axis
Without derating min mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 0.8 Conforming to standards EN 50005 max 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Terminal referencing Pozidriv n 1 head
Schemes: page 2/17
Characteristics
Contactors
Contactor type Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated operational frequency Frequency limits of the operational current Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity (for Ue 400 V) Short time rating I rms conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 (I rms) In free air for a time t from cold state ( 55 C) gG fuse U 440 V At Ith and 50 Hz for a temperature 55 C
AC-3 (Ue 400 V) AC-1
LC1-SKGC2 For ambient temperature 55 C A Hz Hz V A 12 50/60 Up to 400 690
LC1-SKGC3 and LC1-SKGC4 20
2
2.1
66
85
A A
52 50
68 60
Short-circuit protection Average impedance per pole Maximum rated operational current
A m
16 4
20 4
A A A
6 12 20
9 20 32
Utilisation in category AC-1 resistive circuits, heating, lighting (Ue 440 V)
Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini contactors

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency of operational current Short-circuit protection Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 To IEC/EN 60947-5-1 and VDE 0660, gG fuse Up to V 690 690 10 Up to 400 10
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, V VDE 0110 group C, CSA C 22-2 n 14 For ambient temperature 55 C A Hz A
a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current (cos 0.4). 110/ 220/ 380/ V 24 48 127 230 400 440 VA VA VA VA 48 17 7 1000 96 34 14 2050 240 86 36 5000 440 158 66 800 288 120 880 317 132
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid up to 1200 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230
10000 14000 13000
Contactors

Contactor type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V LC1-SKGC2 a 24400 LC1-SKGC3 and LC1-SKGC4
2
2.1
Control voltage limits ( 55 C) single voltage coil
0.851.1 Uc 0.20 Uc 16 VA 4.2 VA W 1.4 23 A 4.9 VA 1.5
Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc
Inrush Sealed
Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil energisation and - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour 50/60 Hz coil
ms ms
816 714
ms ms
68 810 1200 10
Schemes: page 2/17
Contactor selection
Contactors
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
2
1 2
2 1,5 1,2 1 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 2 220/380/415 V 500 V 220/230 V 380/400 V 415 V Current broken in A 2,5 2 1,1 1,1 3 2,5 3 1,1 1,5 1,5 2,2 2,2 4 5 4 6 5 1,5 3 3 7 6 8 9 7 A A
2.1
0,55 0,75
2,2 kW 4 kW 4 kW
1 LC1-SKGC2 2 LC1-SKGC3 and C4 only up to 415 V
Control of resistive circuits (cos 0.95). The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,15 0,1 2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 30 40
Current broken in A
References
Contactors
- Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or xing by two 4 screws, except for LC1-SKGC200, - connection by screw clamp terminals, - mini-contactor tted with transparent, sealable protective cover to prevent front face access.
Mini-contactors, width 27 mm
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 415 V 690 V kW kW kW LC1-SKGC200 Rated operational current in AC-3 up to 400 V A 5 Non inductive loads category AC-1 maximum current 50 C A 20 No. of poles Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (1)
Weight
2
2.1
kg 2
LC1-SKGC200pp
0.132
Mini-contactors, width 45 mm
1.1 4 4 9 20 3 1
LC1-SKGC310pp
0.175
LC1-SKGC301pp
0.175
LC1-SKGC400 4
LC1-SKGC400pp
0.175
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts a 24 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 400 50/60 Hz Code B7 E7 F7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7
Schemes: page 2/17
References
Contactors
Mini-contactors type LC1-SKGC Suppressor modules
Suppressor modules
Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor For use Type For Sold Unit on contactors voltages in reference lots of LA4-SKp1p LC1-SKGC Varistor (1) a and c 2448 V
10 LA4-SKE1E Weight
kg 0.003
2
2.1
a and c 110250 V
10
LA4-SKE1U
0.003
Diode (2)
c 24250 V
10
LA4-SKC1U
0.003
Contactors
Dimensions Mini-contactors LC1-SKGC2
Mounting on rail AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200 (7 35 mm)
55,5
27
55,5
27
2
LA4-SK 3,5
2.1
Dimensions Mini-contactors LC1-SKGC3 and SKGC4
56
Mounting on panel
on rail AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200 (7 35 mm)
56
45
56
56
45
48-50
58
LA4-SK
34-35
Schemes: page 2/17
58
Schemes
Contactors
2-pole mini-contactors LC1-SKGC2

1/L1 T1/2 3/L2 T2/4
A2
A1
2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13/NO
LC1-SKGC301
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21/NC
2.1
A1
A2
A1
A2
14
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 7/L4
A2
A1
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T3/6
T4/8
T3/6
22
Characteristics
Contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors types LCp-K and LPp-K
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Operating positions LCp and LPp-K06 to K12 Vertical axis Horizontal axis IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660 UL, CSA, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, FI
1 80
Without derating
Without derating
2.2
Cabling Screw clamp connections Solid conductor Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Spring terminal connections Faston connectors Solder pins for printed circuit board Tightening torque Terminal referencing Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Solid conductor Flexible conductor without cable end Clip With locating device between power and control circuits Philips head n 2 and 6 Conforming to standards EN 50005 and EN 50012 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C Conforming to NF C 20-040 Conforming to CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508 Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Vibration resistance 5 ... 300 Hz Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 68 (DIN 50016) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Without derating Contactor open Contactor closed Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to NF F 16-101 and 16-102 Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) Safe circuit separation Contactor open Contactor closed Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 536 C C m V V V V kV N.m mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm
Possible positions for LCp-K only. Contactor energisation voltage: 0.85 Uc Max to Min Max IEC/EN 60947 1 x 1.5 2x4 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.34 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.75 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35 4 mm x 35 microns 0.81.3 Up to 5 contacts 690 750 690 600 8 TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct nger contact - 50+ 80 - 25+ 50 2000 2 gn 4 gn Self-extinguishing materials V1 Conforming to requirement 2 10 g 15 g VLSV (Very Low Safety voltage), up to 400 V
Selection: pages 1/14 to 1/37 2/18
References: pages 2/22 to 2/35
Dimensions: pages 2/40 and 2/42
Schemes: pages 2/41 and 2/43
Characteristics
Contactors
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated operational frequency Frequency limits of operational current Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated making capacity I rms to NF C 63-110 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 LCp-K06, LPp-K06, LCp-K09, LPp-K09 LCp-K12, LPp-K12 For ambient temperature 50 C A Hz Hz V A A V I rms to NF C 63-110 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 LCp-K06, LPp-K06, LCp-K09, LPp-K09 LCp-K12, LPp-K12 Permissible short time rating In free air for a time t from cold state ( 50 C) LCp-K06, LPp-K06, LCp-K09, LPp-K09 LCp-K12, LPp-K12 gG fuse U 440 V (aM fuse, see page 2/46) At Ith and 50 Hz Maximum rated operational current for a temperature 50 C Maximum rated operational current for a temperature 70 C Rated operational current limits in relation to on-load factor and operating frequency A A 20 50/60 Up to 400 690 110 144 220/ 240 110 1s A A A m A A A 90 115 25 3 20 16 for Ue only On-load factor 90% 300 op. cycles/hour 120 op. cycles/hour 30 op. cycles/hour Increase in operational current by paralleling of poles 60 % 13 15 19 30 % 15 18 20 18 19 20 380/ 400 110 5s 85 105 415 110 10 s 80 100 440 110 110 30 s 60 75 500 80 80 660/ 690 70 70
Rated breaking capacity
2.2
20 25
1 min 3 min 15 min
45 55
40 50
Short-circuit protection Average impedance per pole Utilisation in category AC-1 resistive circuits, heating, lighting (Ue 440 V)
Apply the following coefcients to the current values above. These take into account the often unbalanced current distribution between poles 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.60 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.80
Utilisation in category AC-3 squirrel cage motors
Operational power according to the voltage
Voltage 50 or 60 Hz V
115 1-ph
220 1-ph 0.75 1.1
220/ 240 3-ph 1.5 2.2 3 600 100%
380/ 415 3-ph 2.2 4 5.5
440/ 480 3-ph 3 4
500/ 600 3-ph 3 4
660/ 690 3-ph 3 4 4 1200 50%
LCp-K06, LPp-K06 kW LCp-K09, LPp-K09 kW LCp-K12, LPp-K12 kW % utilisation of operational power in relation to the maximum operating rate
0.37 0.55
5.5/ 4 4 (480)
Op. cycles/hr Power
900 75%
Selection: pages 1/14 to 1/37
Schemes: pages 2/41 and 2/43 2/19
Contactors

Contactor type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( 50 C) single voltage coil Operation Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Inrush Sealed V LC1 LC2 LC7 LC8 LP1 LP2
a 12690 (1) 0.81.15 Uc 0.20 Uc 30 VA 4.5 VA
a 24240 0.851.1 Uc 0.10 Uc 3 VA 3 VA 3
c 12250 (1) 0.81.15 Uc 0.10 Uc 3W 3W 3
2.2
Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil energisation and: - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and: - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts Maximum immunity to micro-breaks Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour 50/60 Hz coil c coil
1.3
ms ms
515 1020
2535 3040
2535 3040
ms ms
1020 1525
30 40
10 15
ms
2 3600 10 5
2 3600 10 5
2 3600 10 5
(1) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4-KE1FC (50129 V) or LAF-KE1UG (130250 V), see page 2/38.
Characteristics
Contactors
Characteristics of contactor auxiliary contacts and instantaneous contact blocks

Number of auxiliary contacts On LCp-K or LPp-K On LA1-K Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 group C Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 Conventional thermal current (lth) Frequency of operational current Minimum switching capacity U min (DIN 19 240) I min Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Overload current Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 and VDE 0660, gG fuse Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Permissible for I rms 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap distance Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC/EN 60947 For ambient temperature 50 C V V V V A Hz V mA A A A A A M LA1-K: linked contacts to INRS, BIA and CNA specs. mm a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current (cos 0.4). V VA VA VA VA 24 48 17 7 1000 48 96 34 14 2050 110/ 127 240 86 36 5000 220/ 230 440 158 66 10 000 380/ 400 800 288 120 14 000 440 880 317 132 13 000 600/ 690 1200 500 200 9000 1 2 or 4 690 690 750 600 10 Up to 400 17 (2 < 10-3) 5 10 110 80 90 110 > 10
0.5 (see schemes, pages 2/41 and 2/43)
2.2
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid up to 1200 operating cycles per hour), on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230 600 50 25 6 200
Time constant in milliseconds
1 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: - maximum of 50 operating cycles at 10 s intervals (breaking current = making current x cos 0.7). 2 Electrical durability of contacts for: - 1 million operating cycles (2a) -3 million operating cycles (2b) -10 million operating cycles (2c). 3 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: - maximum of 20 operating cycles at 10 s intervals with current passing for 0.5 s per operating cycle. 4 Thermal limit.
Power broken in VA 16 000 10 000 8000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 800 600 500 400 300 200 100 80 60 40 24 48 110 120 220 380 500 440 690 V
Power broken in W
1000 700 500
3
300 200 100 80 60 50 40 30 20
250
200 140 100
2a 2b
2a
50
2c 2b 2c
20 12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V 10 8 6
References
Contactors
Contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A in utilisation category AC-3 Control circuit: a.c.
3-pole general purpose contactors

- Contactor selection according to the utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39.
2
LC1-K0610pp
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 440/500 V 240 V 415 V 660/690 V kW kW kW Screw clamp connections
Rated operational voltage in AC-3 up to 440 V A
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts
Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (1) (2)
Weight
N/O N/C
kg
2.2
1.5
2.2
1 1 1
LC1-K0610pp LC1-K0601pp LC1-K0910pp LC1-K0901pp LC1-K1210pp LC1-K1201pp
0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180
2.2
5.5
4 (> 440) 5.5 (440)
12
Spring terminal connections 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 LC1-K09103pp 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 1 1 1
0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Contactors LC1K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts a 12 20 24(3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/ 220/ 230 230/ 256 277 380/ 400 50/60 Hz 208 230 240 400 Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 UE7 Q7 V7 Volts a 400/ 440 480 500 575 600 660/ 50/60 Hz 415 690 Code N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 (2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4-KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4-KE1UG (130250 V), see page 2/38.
Schemes: page 2/41
References
Contactors
3-pole general purpose contactors

- Contactor selection according to the utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk - Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 LC1-K06107pp 220 V 380 V 440/500 V 240 V 415 V 660/690 V kW kW kW Rated operational voltage in AC-3 up to 440 V A
Weight
N/O N/C
kg
Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 LC1-K06105pp 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 1 1 4 4 9 1 1
1 1 1
0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180
2.2
0.210 0.210 0.210 0.210 0.210 0.210
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Contactors LC1K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts a 12 20 24(3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/ 220/ 230 230/ 256 277 380/ 400 50/60 Hz 208 230 240 400 Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 UE7 Q7 V7 Volts a 400/ 440 480 500 575 600 660/ 50/60 Hz 415 690 Code N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 (2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4-KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4-KE1UG (130250 V), see page 2/38.
References (continued)
Contactors
3-pole contactors for use in sensitive environments

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc. - Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Coil with rectier incorporated, suppressor tted as standard. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Standard power ratings Rated Instantaneous Basic reference. Weight of 3-phase motors operaauxiliary Complete with code 50/60 Hz in category tional contacts indicating control AC-3 current circuit voltage (1) (2) in AC-3 220 V 380 V 440/500 V up to 240 V 415 V 660/690 V 440 V kW kW kW A N/O N/C kg Screw clamp connections 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 1 1
LC7-K06105pp LC7-K06015pp LC7-K09105pp LC7-K09015pp LC7-K12105pp
2
LC7-K06105pp
2.2
1 1 1
0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225
1 1 1
0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225
0.255 0.255 0.255 0.255 0.255
LC7-K12015pp 0.255 1 (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Contactors LC7-K (0.851.1 Uc) Volts a 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/ 50/60 Hz 240 Code B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4-KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4-KE1UG (130250 V), see page 2/38.
Schemes: page 2/41
References
Contactors
Contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A in utilisation category AC-3 Control circuit: d.c.
3-pole contactors
- Contactor selection according to the utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Standard power ratings Rated Instantaneous Basic reference. Weight of 3-phase motors operational auxiliary Complete with code 50/60 Hz in category voltage contacts indicating control AC-3 in AC-3 circuit voltage (1) up to 220 V 380 V 440/500 V 440 V 240 V 415 V 660/690 V kW kW kW A N/O N/C kg Screw clamp connections 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440 V) 5.5 (440 V) 12 1 Spring terminal connections 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 LP1-K06107pp 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440 V) 5.5 (440 V) 12 1 Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440 V) 5.5 (440 V) 12 1 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440 V) 5.5 (440 V) 12 1 1 1
LP1-K06105pp LP1-K06015pp LP1-K09105pp LP1-K09015pp LP1-K12105pp
LP1-K0610pp
1 1 1
LP1-K0610pp LP1-K0601pp LP1-K0910pp LP1-K0901pp LP1-K1210pp LP1-K1201pp
0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225
2.2
1 1 1
0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225
1 1 1
0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225
0.255 0.255 0.255 0.255 0.255
1 LP1-K12015pp 0.255 (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Contactors LP1-K (0.81.15 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24(2) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD MPD MUD UD Coil with suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3. (2) When connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the coil of the contactor, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
References
Contactors
K 3 and 4-pole contactors for control in utilisation category AC-1 Control circuit: a.c.
General purpose contactors

- Mounting on 35 mm " rail or by 4 screws. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Non inductive Type of Number Instantaneous loads connection of auxiliary Category poles contacts AC-1 Maximum current at 50 C A 20 Screw clamp (2) 3 3 2 2 2 N/O N/C 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC1-K0910ii LC1-K0901ii LC1-K09004ii LC1-K09008ii LC1-K09107ii LC1-K09017ii LC1-K090047ii LC1-K090087ii LC1-K09105ii LC1-K09015ii LC1-K090045ii LC1-K090085ii
2
LC1-K09004ii
Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (1)
Weight
kg 0.225 0.225 0.180 0.180 0.225 0.225 0.180 0.180 0.255 0.255 0.210 0.210
2.2
Faston connectors 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
4 2 3 3 4 2 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 3 3 4 2
LC7-K090047ii
Contactors for use in sensitive environments

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc. - Coil with rectifier incorporated, suppressor fitted as standard. - Mounting on 35 mm " rail or 4 screw fixing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. 20 Screw clamp (2) 3 3 4 2 Faston connectors 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 3 3 4 2 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 3 3 4 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC7-K0910ii LC7-K0901ii LC7-K09004ii LC7-K09008ii LC7-K09107ii LC7-K09017ii LC7-K090047ii LC7-K090087ii LC7-K09105ii LC7-K09015ii LC7-K090045ii 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.255 0.255 0.255 0.255
2 2 LC7-K090085ii (1) Standard control circuit voltages, see page opposite. (2) To order a spring terminal version, add 3 immediately before the coil code. Example: LC1-K09103ii.
Selection: pages 1/14 and 1/15 2/26
Schemes: page 2/41
References
Contactors
K 3 and 4-pole contactors for control in utilisation category AC-1 Control circuit: d.c.
3 and 4-pole contactors

- Mounting on 35 mm " rail or by 4 screws. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Non inductive Type of Number Instantaneous loads connection of auxiliary Category poles contacts AC-1 Maximum current at 50 C A N/O N/C 20 Screw clamp (2) 3 3 4 2 Faston connectors 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 3 3 4 2 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Weight
2
kg 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.255 0.255 0.255 0.255
LP1-K09004ii
LP1-K0910ii LP1-K0901ii LP1-K09004ii LP1-K09008ii LP1-K09107ii LP1-K09017ii LP1-K090047ii LP1-K090087ii LP1-K09105ii LP1-K09015ii LP1-K090045ii LP1-K090085ii
2.2
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Contactors LC1-K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 36 42 48 110 120 127 200/ 220/ 230 230/ 256 277 380/ 400 50/60 Hz 208 230 240 400 Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 UE7 Q7 V7 Volts c 400/ 440 500 575 600 660/ 50/60 Hz 415 690 Code N7 R7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 Contactors LC7-K (0.851.1 Uc) Volts c 24 42 48 110 50/60 Hz Code B7 D7 E7 F7 220 M7 230/ 240 U7 220 MD 230 240 250 MPD MUD UD
Contactors LP1-K (0.81.15 Uc) Volts a 12 20 24 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3
(2) To order a spring terminal version, add 3 immediately before the coil code. Example: LP1-K09103ii.
Selection: pages 1/14 and 1/15
References
Contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control 6 to 12 A in utilisation category AC-3 Control circuit: a.c.
3-pole general purpose reversing contactors

- Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. - Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Standard power ratings Rated Instantan. Basic reference. Weight of 3-phase motors operational auxiliary Complete with code 50/60 Hz in category current contacts indicating control AC-3 in AC-3 circuit voltage (1) (2) up to 220 V 380 V 440/500 V 400 V 240 V 415 V 660/690 V kW kW kW A N/O N/C kg Screw clamp connections 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 Spring terminal connections 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 1 1 1
2
LC2-K0610pp
2.2
1 1 1
0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390
0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Reversing contactors LC2-K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts a 12 20 24 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/ 220/ 230 230/ 256 277 380/ 400 50/60 Hz 208 230 240 400 Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 UE7 Q7 V7 Volts a 400/ 440 480 500 575 600 660/ 50/60 Hz 415 690 Code N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 (2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4-KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4-KE1UG (130250 V), see page 2/38.
Schemes: page 2/43
References
Contactors
3-pole general purpose reversing contactors

- Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. - Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Standard power ratings Rated Instantan. Basic reference. Weight of 3-phase motors operational auxiliary Complete with code 50/60 Hz in category current contacts indicating control AC-3 in AC-3 circuit voltage (1) (2) up to 220 V 380 V 440/500 V 400 V 240 V 415 V 660/690 V kW kW kW A N/O N/C kg Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 1 1 1
LC2-K06107pp
2.2
1 1 1
0.370 0.370 0.370 0.370 0.370 0.370
0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Reversing contactors LC2-K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts a 12 20 24 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/ 220/ 230 230/ 256 277 380/ 400 50/60 Hz 208 230 240 400 Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 UE7 Q7 V7 Volts a 400/ 440 480 500 575 600 660/ 50/60 Hz 415 690 Code N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 (2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4-KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4-KE1UG (130250 V), see page 2/38.
Contactors
3-pole reversing contactors for use in sensitive environments

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc. - Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Coil with rectier incorporated, suppressor tted as standard. - Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. - Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions. - Mounting on 7 35 mm rail or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open, ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Standard power ratings Rated Instantan. Basic reference. Weight of 3-phase motors operational auxiliary Complete with code 50/60 Hz in category current contacts indicating control AC-3 in AC-3 circuit voltage (1) (2) up to 220 V 380 V 440/500 V 400 V 240 V 415 V 660/690 V kW kW kW A N/O N/C kg Screw clamp connections 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440 12 1 Faston connectors 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 1.5 2.2 3 6 1 2.2 4 4 9 1 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 12 1 1 1
LC8-K06105pp LC8-K06015pp LC8-K09105pp LC8-K09015pp LC8-K12105pp
2
LC8-K06105pp
2.2
1 1 1
0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480
1 1 1
0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460
0.520 0.520 0.520 0.520 0.520
LC8-K12015pp 0.520 1 (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Reversing contactors LC8-K (0.851.1 Uc) Volts a 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/ 50/60 Hz 240 Code B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4-KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4-KE1UG (130250 V), see page 2/38.
Schemes: page 2/43
References
Contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control 6 to 12 A in utilisation category AC-3 Control circuit: d.c.
3-pole reversing contactors

- Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. - Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Standard power ratings Rated Instantan. Basic reference. of 3-phase motors operational auxiliary Complete with code 50/60 Hz in category current contacts indicating control AC-3 in AC-3 circuit voltage (1) (2) up to 220 V 380 V 440/500 V 400 V 240 V 415 V 660/690 V kW kW kW A N/O N/C Screw clamp connections 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 6 9 12 1 1 1 1 1 1
Weight
LP2-K0610pp
kg
2.2
0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480
Spring terminal connections LP2-K06107pp 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 6 9 12 1 1 1 1 1 1
0.520 0.520 0.520 0.520 0.520 0.520
Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 6 9 12 1 1 1 1 1 1
0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460
Solder pins for printed circuit boards 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 6 9 1 1 1 1
LP2-K06105pp LP2-K06015pp LP2-K09105pp LP2-K09015pp
0.520 0.520 0.520 0.520
4 (> 440) 12 1 LP2-K12105pp 0.520 LP2-K12015pp 0.520 5.5 (440) 1 (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Reversing contactors LP2-K (0.81.15 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD MPD MUD UD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3. (2) When connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the coil of the contactor, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
References
Contactors
Reversing contactors for control in utilisation category AC-1, 20 A Control circuit: a.c.
3 or 4-pole general purpose reversing contactors (1)

- Warning: reversing contactors LC2-K0910pp and LC2-K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard. - Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Non inductive loads category AC-1 Maximum current at 50 C A LC2-K0910pp Screw clamp connections 20 3 1
LC2-K0910pp
Number of poles
Instantan. auxiliary contacts
Weight
2.2
N/O N/C
kg
0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.380 0.380
or LC2-K1210pp 3 1
LC2-K0901pp
or LC2-K1201pp 4
LC2-K09004pp
or LC2-K12004pp Spring terminal connections 20 3 1

LC2-K09103pp
0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.380 0.380
or LC2-K12103pp 3 1
LC2-K09013pp
or LC2-K12013pp 4
LC2-K090043pp
or LC2-K120043pp
(1) Choice between 9 and 12 A depends on number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Reversing contactors LC2-K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts a 12 20 24(3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/ 220/ 230 230/ 256 277 380/ 400 50/60 Hz 208 230 240 400 Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 UE7 Q7 V7 Volts a 400/ 440 480 500 575 600 660/ 50/60 Hz 415 690 Code N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 (3) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4-KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4-KE1UG (130250 V), see page 2/38.
Schemes: page 2/43
References
Contactors
3 or 4-pole general purpose reversing contactors (1)

- Warning: reversing contactors LC2-K0910pp and LC2-K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard. - Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Non inductive loads category AC-1 Maximum current at 50 C A Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 20 3 1
LC2-K09107pp
LC2-K090045pp
Number of poles
Weight
N/O N/C
kg
2.2
0.370 0.370 0.370 0.370 0.370 0.370
or LC2-K12107pp 3 1
LC2-K09017pp
or LC2-K12017pp 4
LC2-K090047pp
or LC2-K120047pp Solder pins for printed circuit boards 20 3 1

LC2-K09105pp
0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430
or LC2-K12105pp 3 1
LC2-K09015pp
or LC2-K12015pp 4
LC2-K090045pp
or LC2-K120045pp
(1) Choice between 9 and 12 A depends on number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Reversing contactors LC2-K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts a 12 20 24(3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/ 220/ 230 230/ 256 277 380/ 400 50/60 Hz 208 230 240 400 Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 UE7 Q7 V7 Volts a 400/ 440 480 500 575 600 660/ 50/60 Hz 415 690 Code N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 (3) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4-KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4-KE1UG (130250 V), see page 2/38.
Contactors
3 or 4-pole reversing contactors for use in sensitive environments (1)

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc. - Warning: reversing contactors LC2-K0910pp and LC2-K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard. - Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Non inductive loads category AC-1 Maximum current at 50 C A Screw clamp connections 20 3 1
LC8-K0910pp
2
LC8-K09105pp
Number of poles
Weight
2.2
N/O N/C
kg
0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.470 0.470
or LC8-K1210pp 3 1
LC8-K0901pp
or LC8-K1201pp 4
LC8-K09004pp
or LC8-K12004pp Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 20 3 1

LC8-K09107pp
0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460
or LC8-K12107pp 3 1
LC8-K09017pp
or LC8-K12017pp 4
LC8-K090047pp
or LC8-K120047pp Solder pins for printed circuit boards 20 3 1

LC8-K09105pp
0.520 0.520 0.520 0.520 0.520
or LC8-K12105pp 3 1
LC8-K09015pp
or LC8-K12015pp 4
LC8-K090045pp
or LC8-K120045pp 0.520 (1) Choice between 9 and 12 A depends on number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Reversing contactors LC8-K (0.851.1 Uc): coil with integral rectifier and suppression device as standard. Volts a 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/ 50/60 Hz 240 Code B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (3) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4-KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4-KE1UG (130250 V), see page 2/38.
Schemes: page 2/43
References
Contactors
Reversing contactors for control in utilisation category AC-1, 20 A Control circuit: d.c.
3 or 4-pole reversing contactors (1)

- Warning: reversing contactors LC2-K0910pp and LC2-K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard. - Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/36 to 2/39. Non inductive loads category AC-1 Maximum current at 50 C A Screw clamp connections 20 3 3 4 Spring terminal connections 20 3 3 4 Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 20 3 3 4 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 20 3 3 4 1 1
LP2-K09105pp or LP2-K12105pp LP2-K09015pp or LP2-K12015pp
LP2-K090045pp
Number of poles
Weight
N/O N/C
kg
2.2
LP2-K0910pp or LP2-K1210pp LP2-K0901pp or LP2-K1201pp LP2-K09004pp or LP2-K12004pp
0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480
0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480
0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460
0.520 0.520 0.520 0.520
LP2-K090045pp 0.520 0.520 or LP2-K120045pp (1) Choice between 9 and 12 A depends on number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Reversing contactors LP2-K (0.81.15 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24(3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD MPD MUD UD Coil with suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3 (3) When connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the coil of the contactor, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) in order to compensate for the incurred voltage drop
2
LC1, LC7, LP1-K
2.2
LC1, LC7, LP1-K
LC1, LP1-K
LC1, LC7, LP1-K
2/36
References
Contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors, types LCp-K and LPp-K Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contacts

Recommended for standard applications. Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor Type of connection For use with Composition Reference contactors Weight
N/O N/C Screw clamp LC1, LC2 LC7, LC8 LP1, LP2 3 or 4-pole 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4
LA1-KN20 LA1-KN02 LA1-KN11 LA1-KN40 LA1-KN31 LA1-KN22 LA1-KN13 LA1-KN04 LA1-KN203 LA1-KN023 LA1-KN113 LA1-KN403 LA1-KN313 LA1-KN223 LA1-KN133 LA1-KN043 LA1-KN207 LA1-KN027 LA1-KN117 LA1-KN407 LA1-KN317 LA1-KN227 LA1-KN137 LA1-KN047
kg 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0,045 0,045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Spring terminal
LC1, LC2, LP1, LP2 3 or 4-pole
2.2
Faston 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
LC1, LC2 LC7, LC8 LP1, LP2 3 or 4-pole
With terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012. Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor Screw clamp with terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 LC1, LC2 LC7, LC8 LP1, LP2 3-pole + N/O LC1, LC2 LC7, LC8 LP1, LP2 4-pole 1 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
LA1-KN02M LA1-KN11M LA1-KN31M LA1-KN22M LA1-KN13M LA1-KN11P LA1-KN22P
0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Electronic time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Relay output, with common point changeover contact,a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum. Control voltage: 0.851.1 Uc. Maximum switching capacity: 250 VA or 150 W. Operating temperature: -10+ 60 C. Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period, 0.5 s after the time delay period.
Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor Voltage Type Timing range
Composition
Reference
Weight
V a or c 2448 On-delay
s 130
C/O 1
LA2-KT2E
kg 0.040
a 110240
On-delay
130
LA2-KT2U
0.040
References
Contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors, types LCp-K and LPp-K Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator
Mounting and connection Clip-on xing on the front of contactors LC1 and LP1, with locating device. No tools required.
Type Varistor (1)
For voltages: a and c 1224 V
Sold in lots of 5
Unit reference
LA4-KE1B
Weight kg 0.010
a and c 3248 V
LA4-KE1E
0.010
LA4-Kppp
a and c 50129 V
LA4-KE1FC
0.010
2.2
a and c 201250 V
LA4-KE1UG
0.010
Diode + c Zener diode (2) 1224 V
LA4-KC1B
0.010
c 3248 V
LA4-KC1E
0.010
RC (3)
a 220250 V
LA4-KA1U
0.010
(1) Protection by limitation of the transient voltage up to 2 Uc maximum. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight time delay on drop-out (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillation frequency. Polarised component. Slight time delay on drop-out (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (3) Protection by limitation of the transient voltage up to 3 Uc maximum and limitation of the oscillation frequency. Slight time delay on drop-out (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
References
Contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors, types LCp-K and LPp-K Accessories
Mounting and marking accessories

Description Mounting plates (1) Application For xing on 1 4 rail Clip-on
Sold in lots of 1
Unit reference
LA9-D973
Weight kg 0.025
2
For xing on 2 4 rails 110/120 mm xing centres
1 DX1-AP25
0.065
Marker holder
Clip-on
Onto front of contactor
100
LA9-D90
0.001
2.2
DX1-AP25
Clip-in markers
4 maximum per contactor
Strips of 10 identical numbers 09
25
AB1-Rp (2)
0.002
Strips of 10 identical capital letters AZ
25
AB1-Gp (2)
0.002
Cabling accessories
Description Paralleling links Application For 2 poles With screw clamp terminals
Sold in lots of 4
Unit reference
LA9-E01
Weight kg 0.010
For 4 poles
With screw clamp terminals
LA9-E02
0.015
Set of 6 power connections LA9-E01
For 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control
For contactors with screw clamp terminals
100
LA9-K0969
0.010
Set of 4 power connections
For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
100
LA9-K0970
0.010
(1) Order 1 mounting plate for xing a contactor and 2 mounting plates for xing a reversing contactor. (2) Complete the reference by replacing the p with the required character.
Contactors
Contactors, types LCp-K and LP1-K
Contactors LC1-K, LC7-K, LP1-K On panel

LA1-K =
On mounting rail AM1-DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
58
50
2
35 57 = 35 45 = =
58
57
45
On one asymmetrical rail DZ5-MB with clip-on mounting plate LA9-D973
DX1-AP25
DZ5-ME5
2.2
5
120
50
57
21
35 45
57
27
45
On printed circuit board

8,65 = = = A1
58
50
1,9
45
A2
Electronic time delay auxiliary contact blocks LA2-KT On contactor

LA2-KT
53
27
38
38 38 57
Suppressor modules LA4-Kp
On contactor
25
22
6 22 57
Schemes: page 2/41
58
58
110
Schemes
Contactors
Contactors, types LCp-K and LPp-K
3-pole contactors LC1-K, LC7-K, LP1-K 3 P + N/O

3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 13/NO
Integral suppression device LC7-K 3 P + N/C

3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 21/NC A1 22 A2
A1
A2
14
A2
A1
T1/2
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T2/4
T3/6
4-pole contactors, 9 A LC1-K, LC7-K, LP1-K 4P

3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 7/L4 A1
Integral coil suppression device LC7-K 2 P N/O + 2 P N/C

R1 R3 1 A1 3 A1
A2
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T4/8
A2
R2
R4
2.2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1-K For contactors LCp-K and LPp-K 2 N/O 2 N/C LA1-KN20 LA1-KN02 LA1-KN207 LA1-KN027
51/NC 53/NO 63/NO 61/NC
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN11 LA1-KN117

53/NO 61/NC
52
54
64
62
4 N/O LA1-KN40 LA1-KN407

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
3 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN31 LA1-KN317

53/NO 73/NO 83/NO 61/NC
54
2 N/O + 2 N/C LA1-KN22 LA1-KN227

53/NO 83/NO 61/NC 71/NC
62
1 N/O + 3 N/C LA1-KN13 LA1-KN137

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
A2
4 N/C LA1-KN04 LA1-KN047

51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 72 42 41/NC 81/NC 54 53/NO 82
54
62
72
54
62
72
54
64
74
84
84
82
52 21/NC 22
54
62
74
Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 For 3-pole contactors 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN02M LA1-KN11M
21/NC 31/NC 33/NO 21/NC
84
3 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN31M

33/NO 43/NO 53/NO 21/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C LA1-KN22M

43/NO 53/NO 21/NC 31/NC
1 N/O + 3 N/C LA1-KN13M

31/NC 32
22
32
22
34
22
32
44
22
32
42
For 4-pole contactors 1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN11P

13/NO 21/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C LA1-KN22P

13/NO 43/NO 21/NC 31/NC
14
22
14
22
32
Electronic time delay auxiliary contact blocks LA2-KT For contactors LCp-K and LPp-K 1 C/O
Suppressor modules LA4-KC
44
54
LA4-KE
A1
16
A2
15
18
+
Selection: pages 1/12 to 1/35 Characteristics: pages 2/18 to 2/21
54
62
Contactors
Reversing contactors, types LCp-K and LP2-K
Reversing contactors LC2-K, LC8-K, LP2-K On panel

LA1-K =
On mounting rail AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200 ( 7 35 mm)
58
50
35
57
80 90
58
57
90
On one asymmetrical rail DZ5-MB with 2 clip-on mounting plates LA9-D973 or on 2 mounting plates DX1-AP25. 2 x LA9-D973 2 x DX1-AP25
DZ5-ME5 5 50
2.2
57
21
35 90
57
27
120
90
On printed circuit board for reversing contactors or 2 contactors mounted side by side
8,65
===
===
8,65
A1 58 A2
A1 50 A2 53
45
45
Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2-KT On reversing contactors

LA2-KT
38
38 38 57
Suppressor modules LA4-Kp
27
On reversing contactors
25
22
6 22 57
Schemes: page 2/43
58
58
110
Schemes
Contactors
3 and 4-pole reversing contactors, types LCp-K and LPp-K
3-pole reversing contactors LC2-K, LC8-K, LP2-K With screw clamp terminals 3 P + N/O
Integral suppression device LC8-K 3 P + N/C

A1 3/L2 5/L3 3/L2 1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
13/NO
1/L1
5/L3
13/NO
21/NC
1/L1
5/L3
A1
21/NC 22
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
14
14
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T2/4
T3/6
A2
22
A1
With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed circuit board) 3 P+ N/O 3 P + N/C
5/L3 3/L2 3/L2 3/L2 5/L3 5/L3 3/L2 1/L1 1/L1 1/L1 13/NO 13/NO 21/NC 1/L1 5/L3 21/NC
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
14
22
A1
A2
T3/6
T3/6
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
4-pole reversing contactors LC2-K, LC8-K, LP2-K With screw clamp terminals 4P
1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 1N 2N
T2/4
T3/6
2.2
Integral suppression device LC8-K
14
With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed circuit board) 4P

A1 A1 3 5 7 3 5 1 A1 1 7 A2 A2 8 6 6 2 4 2 4 8 A2 A1
A2
A1
22
L1
L2
L3
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks LA1-K For contactors LCp-K and LP2-K 2 N/O 2 N/C LA1-KN20 LA1-KN02 LA1-KN207 LA1-KN027
53/NO 63/NO 51/NC 61/NC
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN11 LA1-KN117

53/NO 61/NC
Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN11P
54
64
52
62
For contactors LCp-K, LP2-K 4 N/O 3 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN40 LA1-KN31 LA1-KN407 LA1-KN317
53/NO 73/NO 53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO 83/NO 61/NC
54
2 N/O + 2 N/C LA1-KN22 LA1-KN227

53/NO 83/NO 61/NC 71/NC
62
1 N/O + 3 N/C LA1-KN13 LA1-KN137

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
A2

51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 72 81/NC 82
62
54
74
54
64
74
84
84
54
62
72
84
52
54
62
72
Auxiliary contacts with terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 see page 2/41 Electronic time delay contact blocks Suppressor modules LA2-KT LA4-KC For contactors LCp-K and LPp-K 1 C/O
A1
16 18
LA4-KE
A2
15
+
Selection: pages 1/14 to 1/37 Characteristics: pages 2/18 to 2/21
82
62
Characteristics
Protection relays
K thermal overload relays, adjustable from 0.11 to 16 A
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Pending Conforming to IEC 68 (DIN 50016) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage For normal operation (IEC 947) Operating limit Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Without derating Vertical axis C C C m IEC/EN 60947-4-1, NF C 63-650, VDE 0660 UL, CSA TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct nger contact - 40...+ 70 - 20...+ 55 (without derating) - 30...+ 60 (with derating) (1) 2000 Horizontal axis
Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device
2.2
Without derating Flame resistance Shock resistance, hot state (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) Vibration resistance, hot state 5 to 300 Hz Safe separation of circuits Cabling Screw clamp terminals Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to NF F 16-101 and 16-102 Conforming to IEC 68, N/C contact Conforming to IEC 68, N/O contact Conforming to IEC 68, N/C contact Conforming to IEC 68, N/O contact Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 536 Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Philips head n 2 - 6
With derating (1) Self-extinguishing material V1 Conforming to requirement 2 10 gn 10 gn 2 gn 2 gn VLSV (2), up to 400 V Minimum mm2 1 x 1.5 mm2 1 x 0.75 mm2 1 x 0.34 N.m 0.8 Directly under the contactor or reversing contactor Maximum 2x4 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 Maximum to IEC 947 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
Tightening torque Mounting Connections
Made automatically when mounted under the contactor, as follows: - contactor terminal A2 connected to overload relay terminal 96 on all products, - contactor terminal 14 connected to overload relay terminal 95 on products with 3 P + N/O. When using 3 P + N/C, or 4 P contactors, or the N/O auxiliary contact marked 13-14, at a voltage other than the coil voltage, break off the link marked 14. (1) Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (2) Very low safety voltage.
Auxiliary contact characteristics

Number of contacts Conventional thermal current Short-circuit protection Maximum power of the controlled contactor coils (sealed) (Occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Conforming to IEC 947, VDE 0660. gG fuse or circuit-breaker GB2-CBpp a.c. A A V VA d.c. V W Maximum operational voltage a.c., category AC-15 d.c., category DC-13 V V 1 N/C + 1 N/O 6 6 max. 24 100 24 100 690 250 48 200 48 100 110 400 110 50 220/230 600 220 45 400 600 250 35 415/440 600/690 600 600
References: page 2/46 2/44
Schemes: page 2/47
Characteristics
Protection relays
Electrical characteristics of the power circuit

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 group C Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 V V V V kV Hz W 690 690 750 600 6 Up to 400 2
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits of the operational current Power dissipated per pole
Operating characteristics
Sensitivity to phase failure Reset Signalling Reset-Stop function Conforming to IEC 947 Manual or automatic On front of relay Yes Selected by means of a lockable and sealable switch on the front of the relay Trip indicator Pressing the Reset-Stop button: - actuates the N/C contact - has no effect on the N/O contact By pushbutton Pressing the Test button enables: - checking of the control circuit wiring - simulation of overload tripping (actuation of both N/C and N/O contacts, and of the trip indicator) See page 2/46
2.2
Test function
Short-circuit protection Tripping curves Average operating time related to multiples of the current setting Class 10 A
Time 2h 1h 20 min 1h 40 min 20 min 10 min 6 min 4 min 2 min 1 min 40 s 20 s 10 s 6s 4s 2s 1s 1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 x setting current (Ir) Class 10 A
Time
2h 1h 20 min 1h 40 min 20 min 10 min 6 min 4 min 2 min 1 min 40 s 20 s 10 s 6s 4s 2s 1s
Class 10 A
1 2
1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 x setting current (Ir)
Balanced 3-phase operation, from cold state
Balanced operation with 2 phases only, from cold state

1 Setting: at lower end of scale 2 Setting: at upper end of scale
References: page 2/46
References
Protection relays
3-pole relays with screw clamp terminals

These overload relays are designed for the protection of motors. They are compensated and phase failure sensitive. Resetting can either be manual or automatic. Direct mounting: under the contactor for versions with screw clamp terminals only; pre-wired terminals, see pages 2/44 and 2/47. Separate mounting: using terminal block LA7-K0064 (see below). On the front face of the overload relay: - selection of reset mode: Manual (marked H) or Automatic (marked A), - red pushbutton: Trip Test function, - blue pushbutton: Stop and manual Reset, - yellow trip ag indicator: overload relay tripped. Protection by fuses or by magnetic circuit-breaker type GV2-LE, see page 3/41. Relay Fuses to be used with selected relay Reference Weight setting Maximum rating range Type aM gG BS88 A A A A kg Class 10 A (the standard species a tripping time of between 2 and 10 seconds at 7.2 In) 0.110.16 0.160.23 0.230.36 LR2-K0301 0.360.54 0.540.8 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.82.6 LA7-K0064 2.63.7 3.75.5 5.58 811.5 1014 1216 4 6 8 10 16 20 16 16 20 25 32 40 16 16 20 20 25 32
LR2-K0310 LR2-K0312 LR2-K0314 LR2-K0316 LR2-K0321 LR2-K0322
2.2
0.25 0.25 0.5 1 1 2 2 4
2 2 2 4 4 6 6 10
2 2 2 4 4 6 6 10
LR2-K0301 LR2-K0302 LR2-K0303 LR2-K0304 LR2-K0305 LR2-K0306 LR2-K0307 LR2-K0308
0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145
Overload relays for unbalanced loads

Class 10 A: To order, replace the prex LR2 by LR7 in the references selected from above (only applicable to overload relays LR2-K0305 to LR2-K0322). Example: LR7-K0308.
Accessory
Description Terminal block for separate clip-on mounting of the overload relay on 35 mm 7 rail Type of connection Screw clamp Reference
LA7-K0064 Weight kg
0.100
Characteristics: pages 2/44 and 2/45 2/46
Schemes: page 2/47
Dimensions, mounting, schemes
Protection relays
LR2-K Direct mounting beneath the contactor
Separate mounting with terminal block LA7-K0064 on 35 mm 7 rail (AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200)

= = 35 = 38 50 80
116
2
45
58
75 c
65
45
LR2-K
LR2-K + LCp-K Pre-wiring scheme

A1 13 1 3 5
AM1DP200 DE200
c 78.5 86
2.2
13
KM1
14
A H A2 2 4 6 14 1 3 5
95
95
97
96
95
96
98
96
97
95
98
96
KM1 A1
Test Reset/stop 2 4 6
Note: If pre-wiring is not required, break off the 2 links located on the thermal overload relay.
Characteristics: pages 2/44 and 2/45
A2
Characteristics
Contactors
Low consumption contactors and reversing contactors type LPp-K
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Operating positions LPp-K06, LPp-K09, LPp-K12 Vertical axis Horizontal axis IEC/EN 60947-4-1, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660 UL, CSA
2
1 80
Without derating Cabling Screw clamp connections Solid conductor Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Spring terminal connections Solid conductor
Without derating mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm
2.2
Contactor energising voltage at 0.85 Uc Max to Min Max IEC/EN 60947 1 x 1.5 2x4 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.34 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.75 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Flexible conductorwithout cable end Faston connectors Solder pins for printed circuit board Tightening torque Terminal referencing Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Clip With locating device between power and control circuits Philips head n 2 and 6 Conforming to standards EN 50005 and EN 50012 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C Conforming to NF C 20-040 Conforming to CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508 Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Vibration resistance 5...300 Hz Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 68 (DIN 50016) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Without derating Contactor open Contactor closed Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to NF F 16-101 and 16-102 Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) Safe circuit separation Contactor open Contactor closed Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 536
2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35 4 mm x 35 microns
N.m
0.81.3 Up to 3 contacts
V V V V kV
690 750 690 600 8 TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct nger contact
C C m
- 50+ 80 - 25+ 50 2000 2 gn 4 gn Self-extinguishing materials V1 Conforming to requirement 2 10 gn 15 gn VLSV (Very Low Safety Voltage), up to 400 V
References: pages 2/52 to 2/57 2/48
Dimensions, mounting: pages 2/58 and 2/59
Characteristics
Contactors
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated operational frequency Frequency limits of operational current Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated making capacity I rms conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 LPp-K06, LPp-K09 LPp-K12 Rated breaking capacity I rms conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 LPp-K06, LPp-K09 LPp-K12 Permissible short time rating In free air for a time t from cold state ( 50 C) LPp-K06, LPp-K09 LPp-K12 Short-circuit protection Average impedance per pole Utilisation in category AC-1 resistive circuits, heating, lighting (Ue 440 V) (see curve page 1/14) gG fuse U 440 V (aM fuse, see page 2/46) At Ith and 50 Hz Maximum rated operational current for a temperature 50 C Rated operational current limits in relation to the on-load factor and operating frequency A A m A A For ambient temperature 50 C A Hz 20 50/60
Hz V
Up to 400 690
A A V A A
110 144 220/ 240 110 1s 90 115 25 3 20 On-load factor 300 op. cycles/hour 120 op. cycles/hour 30 op. cycles/hour 90 % 13 15 19 60 % 15 18 20 30 % 18 19 20 380/ 400 110 5s 85 105 415 110 10 s 80 100 440 110 120 30 s 60 75 500 80 80 660/ 690 70 70
2.2
1 min 3 min 15 min 45 55 40 50 20 25
Apply the following coefcients to the current values given above. These take into account the often unbalanced current distribution between poles 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.60 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.80
Utilisation in category AC-3 Squirrel cage motors (see curve page 1/18)
Operational power according to the voltage
Voltage 50 or 60 Hz
115 1-ph
220 1-ph 0.75 1.1
220/ 240 3-ph 1.5 2.2 3 600 100 %
380/ 415 3-ph 2.2 4 5.5
440/ 480 3-ph 3 4
500/ 600 3-ph 3 4
660/ 690 3-ph 3 4 4 1200 50 %
LPp-K06 LPp-K09 LPp-K12 % utilisation of operational power in relation to the maximum operating rate
kW kW kW
0.37 0.55
5.5 4 4 (480) 900 75 %
Op. cycles/h Power
Contactors

Type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V LP4 c 12120 LP5
Control voltage limits ( 50 C) single-voltage coil
0.71.30 Uc 0.10 Uc W W W 1.8 1.8 1.8
Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc
Inrush Sealed
2.2
Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil energisation and: - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and: - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts Maximum immunity to microbreaks Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour Wide range, low consumption c coil
ms ms
2535 3040
ms ms
1020 1525
ms
2 3600 30 5
Characteristics
Contactors
Auxiliary contact characteristics of contactors and instantaneous contact blocks

Number of contacts On LP4, LP5-K On LA1-K Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 group C Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14
Conventional rated thermal current (lth) For ambient temperature 50 C
1 2 max. V V V V A Hz 690 690 750 600 10 Up to 400 17 5 10 110 80 90 110 > 10 0.5 (see schemes, pages 2/60 and 2/61) d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid up to 1200 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230 600 50 25 6 200
Frequency of operational current Minimum switching capacity U min (DIN 19 240) I min Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Overload current Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 and VDE 0660, gG fuse Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Permissible for I rms 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap distance Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC/EN 60947
V mA A A A A A M
2.2
LA1-K: linked contacts to INRS, BIA and CNA specs. mm a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current (cos 0.4).
1 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: - maximum of 50 operating cycles at 10 s intervals (breaking current = making current x cos 0.7). 2 Electrical durability of contacts for: - 1 million operating cycles (2a) - 3 million operating cycles (2b) - 10 million operating cycles (2c). 3 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: - maximum of 20 operating cycles at 10 s intervals with current passing for 0.5 s per operating cycle. 4 Thermal limit.
V VA VA VA VA
24 48 17 7 1000
48 96 34 14 2050
110/ 127 240 86 36 5000
220/ 230 440 158 66 10 000
380/ 400 440 800 880 288 317 120 132 14 000 13 000
600/ 690 1200 500 200 9000
Power broken in VA 16 000
Power broken in W
Time constant in ms
10 000 8000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 800 600 500 400 300 200 100 80 60 40 24 48
1000 700 500
3
300 200 100 80 60 50 40 30 20
250
200 140 100
2a 2b
2a
50
2c 2b 2c
20 110 120 220 380 500 440 690 V 12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V 10 8 6
References
Contactors
Low consumption contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A in utilisation categories AC-3 and AC-4 Control circuit: d.c.
3-pole contactors
- Contactor selection according to the utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Compatible with programmable controller outputs. - LED indicator incorporated (except models LP4-KppppFW3 and LP4-KppppGW3). - Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor tted as standard, consumption 1.8 W. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/56 and 2/57. Motor control Number Basic reference. in category AC-3 of Complete with code Maximum Standard auxiliary indicating control operapower ratings contacts circuit voltage (1) tional of 3-phase current motors 440 V 220 V 380 V 440/500 V 240 V 415 V 660/690 V A kW kW kW N/O N/C Screw clamp connections 6 1.5 2.2 3 1 9 2.2 4 4 1 12 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 1 Spring terminal connections 6 1.5 2.2 3 1 9 2.2 4 4 1 12 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 1 Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 6 1.5 2.2 3 1 9 2.2 4 4 1 12 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 1 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 6 1.5 2.2 3 1 9 2.2 4 4 1 12 3 5.5 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 1 1 1 LP4-K06105ppp LP4-K06015ppp LP4-K09105ppp LP4-K09015ppp LP4-K12105ppp 0.265 0.265 0.265 0.265 0.265 1 1 1 LP4-K06107ppp LP4-K06017ppp LP4-K09107ppp LP4-K09017ppp LP4-K12107ppp LP4-K12017ppp 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 1 1 1 LP4-K06103ppp LP4-K06013ppp LP4-K09103ppp LP4-K09013ppp LP4-K12103ppp LP4-K12013ppp 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 1 1 1 LP4-K0610ppp LP4-K0601ppp LP4-K0910ppp LP4-K0901ppp LP4-K1210ppp LP4-K1201ppp 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235
2
LP4-K06105ppp
Weight
kg
2.2
0.265 1 LP4-K12015ppp (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3
References
Contactors
Low consumption contactors for control in utilisation category AC-1, 20 A Control circuit: d.c.
3 or 4-pole contactors (1)

- Contactor selection according to the utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Compatible with programmable controller outputs. - LED indicator incorporated (except models LP4-KppppFW3 and LP4-KppppGW3). - Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor tted as standard, consumption 1.8 W. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/56 and 2/57. Non inductive loads Cat. AC-1 e ) 50 C Maximum current A Screw clamp connections 20 3 1 4 2 Spring terminal connections 20 3 1 4 2 Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 20 3 1 4 2 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 20 3 1 4 1 LP4-K09105ppp or LP4-K12105ppp LP4-K09015ppp or LP4-K12015ppp LP4-K090045ppp or LP4-K120045ppp 0.265 0.235 0.265 0.235 0.265 0.235 2 1 LP4-K09107ppp or LP4-K12107ppp LP4-K09017ppp or LP4-K12017ppp LP4-K090047ppp or LP4-K120047ppp LP4-K090087ppp 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 2 1 LP4-K09103ppp or LP4-K12103ppp LP4-K09013ppp or LP4-K12013ppp LP4-K090043ppp or LP4-K120043ppp LP4-K090083ppp 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 2 1 LP4-K0910ppp or LP4-K1210ppp LP4-K0901ppp or LP4-K1201ppp LP4-K09004ppp or LP4-K12004ppp LP4-K09008ppp 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference. complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Weight
LP4-K090047ppp
N/O N/C
kg
2.2
2 2 LP4-K090085ppp 0.265 (1) Selection to be made according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3
References
Contactors
Low consumption reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A in utilisation categories AC-3 and AC-4 Control circuit: d.c.
3-pole reversing contactors

- Contactor selection according to the utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Compatible with programmable controller outputs. - LED indicator incorporated (except models LP5-KppppFW3 and LP5-KppppGW3). - Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor tted as standard, consumption 1.8 W. - Mechanical interlock incorporated. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. - Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/56 and 2/57. Motor control Number Basic reference. Weight in category AC-3 of Complete with code Maximum Standard auxiliary indicating control operapower ratings contacts circuit voltage (1) tional of 3-phase current motors 440 V 220 V 380 V 440/500 V 240 V 415 V 660/690 V A kW kW kW N/O N/C kg Screw clamp connections 6 9 12 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 1 1 1 1 1 1 LP5-K0610ppp LP5-K0601ppp LP5-K0910ppp LP5-K0901ppp LP5-K1210ppp LP5-K1201ppp 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490
2
LP5-K06105ppp
2.2
Spring terminal connections 6 9 12 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 1 1 1 1 1 1 LP5-K06103ppp LP5-K06013ppp LP5-K09103ppp LP5-K09013ppp LP5-K12103ppp LP5-K12013ppp 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490
Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 6 9 12 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 1 1 1 1 1 1 LP5-K06107ppp LP5-K06017ppp LP5-K09107ppp LP5-K09017ppp LP5-K12107ppp LP5-K12017ppp 0.470 0.470 0.470 0.470 0.470 0.470
Solder pins for printed circuit boards 6 9 12 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 1 1 1 1 LP5-K06105ppp LP5-K06015ppp LP5-K09105ppp LP5-K09015ppp 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530
4 (> 440) 1 LP5-K12105ppp 0.530 LP5-K12015ppp 0.530 5.5 (440) 1 (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3

2/54
References
Contactors
Low consumption reversing contactors for control in utilisation category AC-1, 20 A Control circuit: d.c.
3 or 4-pole reversing contactors (1)

- Warning: reversing contactors LP5-K0910pp and LP5-K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation - Reversing contactor selection according to the utilisation category, see the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. - Compatible with programmable controller outputs. - LED indicator incorporated (except models LP5-KppppFW3 and LP5-KppppGW3). - Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor tted as standard, consumption 1.8 W. - Mechanical interlock incorporated. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. - Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 mm screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. - Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 2/56 and 2/57. Non inductive loads Cat. AC-1 50 C Maximum current A Screw clamp connections 20 3 3 4 Spring terminal connections 20 3 3 4 Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 20 3 3 4 Solder pins for printed circuit boards 20 3 3 4 1 1 LP5-K09105ppp or LP5-K12105ppp LP5-K09015ppp or LP5-K12015ppp 0.530 0.490 0.530 0.490 1 1 LP5-K09107ppp or LP5-K12107ppp LP5-K09017ppp or LP5-K12017ppp LP5-K090047ppp or LP5-K120047ppp 0.470 0.490 0.470 0.490 0.470 0.490 1 1 LP5-K09103ppp or LP5-K12103ppp LP5-K09013ppp or LP5-K12013ppp LP5-K090043ppp or LP5-K120043ppp 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 1 1 LP5-K0910ppp or LP5-K1210ppp LP5-K0901ppp or LP5-K1201ppp LP5-K09004ppp or LP5-K12004ppp 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.49 0.490 0.490 Type of connection Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Weight
LP5-K0910ppp
2.2
N/O N/C kg
LP5-K090045ppp 0.530 0.490 or LP5-K120045ppp (1) Selection to be made according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3
References
Contactors
Low consumption contactors and reversing contactors type LPp-K Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contacts

Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor Type of Type of connection contactor Composition Reference Weight
LA1-KN20 Screw clamp 3 or 4-pole
N/O N/C 2 1 Spring terminal 3 or 4-pole 2 1 Faston connectors 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 3 or 4-pole 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 LA1-KN20 LA1-KN02 LA1-KN11 LA1-KN203 LA1-KN023 LA1-KN113 LA1-KN207 LA1-KN027 LA1-KN117
kg 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
2.2
LA1-KN113
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (with terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012)

Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor Screw clamp with terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 3-pole. 6 or 9 A 1 4-pole, 9 A 1 2 1 1
LA1-KN02M LA1-KN11M LA1-KN11P
0.045 0.045 0.045
Electronic time delay auxiliary contact blocks

LA2-KT2p Relay output, with common point changeover contact, a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum. Control voltage: 0.851.1 Uc. Maximum switching capacity: 250 VA or 150 W. Operating temperature: -10+ 60 C. Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period, 0.5 s after the time delay period.
Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor Voltage Type Timing range
Composition
Reference
Weight
V a or c 2448 On-delay
s 130
C/O 1
LA2-KT2E
kg 0.040
a 110240
On-delay
130
LA2-KT2U
0.040
References
Contactors
Low consumption contactors and reversing contactors type LPp-K Mounting, marking and cabling accessories
Mounting and marking accessories

Description Mounting plates (1) Application For xing on 1 4 rail Clip-on
Sold in lots of 1
Unit reference LA9-D973
Weight kg 0.025
For xing on 2 4 rails
110/120 mm xing centres
10
DX1-AP25
0.065
Marker holder
Clip-on
Onto front of contactor
100
LA9-D90
0.001
2.2
Clip-in markers DX1-AP25 Strips of 10 identical capital letters AZ
25
4 maximum per contactor
Strips of 10 identical numbers 09
25
AB1-Rp (2)
0.002
AB1-Gp (2)
0.002
Cabling accessories
Description Paralleling links Application For 2 poles With screw clamp terminals
Sold in lots of 4
Unit reference LA9-E01
Weight kg 0.010
For 4 poles
With screw clamp terminals
LA9-E02
0.015
For 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
100
LA9-K0969
0.010
100
LA9-K0970
0.010
LA9-E01
(1) Order 1 mounting plate for xing a contactor and 2 mounting plates for xing a reversing contactor. (2) Complete the reference by replacing the p with the required character.
Contactors
Contactors LP4-K On panel

LA1-K =
On mounting rail AM1-DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
58
50
2
35 57 = 35 45 = =
58
57
45
On one asymmetrical rail DZ5-MB with clip-on mounting plate LA9-D973
DX1-AP25
DZ5-ME5
2.2
5
120
57
21
35 45
57
27
45

8,65 = = = A1
58
50
45
A2
(Pin 1.55) Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2-KT On contactor

LA2-KT
53
27
38
38 38 57
58
110
50
Contactors
Reversing contactors LP5-K On panel

LA1-K
=
On mounting rail AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200 ( 7 35 mm)
58
50
58
2
35 57 = 80 90 =
=
57 90
On one asymmetrical rail DZ5-MB with 2 clip-on mounting plates LA9-D973 or two mounting plates DX1-AP25. 2 x LA9-D973 2 x DX1-AP25
DZ5-ME5 5
2.2
50
57
21
35 90
57
27
120
90
On printed circuit board for reversing contactors or 2 contactors mounted side by side
8,65 === === 8,65
A1 58 A2
A1 50 A2 53
45
45
(Pin 1.55) Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2-KT On reversing contactors
LA2-KT
27
38
38 38 57
58
110
Schemes
Contactors
3/L2
1/L1
5/L3
13/NO
3/L2
1/L1
5/L3
A2
14
A2
A1
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
22
21/NC
A1
3-pole reversing contactors LP5-K With screw clamp terminals 3-pole + N/O 3-pole + N/C
Integral suppression device LP5-K
3/L2
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
13/NO
1/L1
5/L3
13/NO
3/L2
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
21/NC
1/L1
5/L3
2.2
A1
21/NC
A1
A1
A2
A2
14
14
A2
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
A2
22
22
A1
With Faston connectors or solder pins for printed circuit boards 3-pole + N/O 3-pole + N/C
3/L2 5/L3 3/L2 1/L1 21/NC 1/L1 5/L3 13/NO 13/NO 21/NC 3/L2 5/L3 3/L2 1/L1 1/L1 5/L3
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
14
14
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks LA1-K For 3-pole contactors LPp-K 2 N/O 2 N/C LA1-KN20 LA1-KN02 LA1-KN207 LA1-KN027
53/NO 63/NO 51/NC 61/NC
T2/4
T3/6
T2/4
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN11 LA1-KN117

53/NO 61/NC
T3/6
Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN02M LA1-KN11M
33/NO 34 21/NC 31/NC 21/NC 22
22
54
64
52
62
Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2-KT For 3-pole contactors LPp-K 1 C/O
A1
16 18
A2
15
54
62
32
A2
22
22
A1
A2
+A1
A2
+A1
3-pole contactors LP4-K 3-pole + N/O
Integral suppression device LP4-K 3-pole + N/C
Schemes
Contactors
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
7/L4
R1
R3
A1
A2
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T4/8
A2
A1
R2
R4
A2
+A1
4-pole contactors LP4-K 4P
Integral suppression device LP4-K 2 P N/O + 2 P N/C
4-pole reversing contactors LP5-K With screw clamp connections 4P

1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 1N 2N
Integral suppression device LP5-K With Faston connectors or solder pins for printed circuit board 4P
2.2
5 3 7 3 5 1 A1 1 7 A1 A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
L1
L2
L3
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks LA1-K For 4-pole contactors LPp-K 2 N/O 2 N/C LA1-KN20 LA1-KN02 LA1-KN207 LA1-KN027
53/NO 63/NO 51/NC 61/NC
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN11 LA1-KN117

53/NO 61/NC
Terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012 1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN11P

13/NO 21/NC
54
64
52
62
Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2-KT For 4-pole contactors LPp-K 1 C/O
A1
16 18
A2
15
54
Dimensions, mounting: pages 2/58 and 2/59 2/61
62
14
22
A2
+A1
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Model d
Type of contactor
LC1LC1LC1D09D18 D25D38 D40 DT20 & DT25 DT32 & DT40
LC1D50D95
LC1-D115 & LC1-D150
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC EN 947-4-1, overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 Conforming to UL, CSA Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Conforming to IEC 947 V 690 1000
V kV
600 6 8
NFC 63-110, VDE 0660, JEM 1038, EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1. GL, DNV, PTB, RINA, LROS UL, CSA Complies with SNCF, Sichere Trennung recommendations Conforming to VDE 0106 parts 101 and A1 (project 2/89) Conforming to VDE 0106 Power connection Coil connection Protection against direct nger contact IP 2X
Protection against direct nger contact IP 2X (except LC1-D40D80)
Product certications
2.3
Separation insulation V 400
Degree of protection (1) (front face only)
Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device
Conforming to IEC 68 Storage Operation Permissible C C C m
TH - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70, for operation at Uc 3000 30 possible, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane V1 C 960 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 4 gn 4 gn 3 gn 4 gn 8 gn 15 gn 8 gn 10 gn 8 gn 10 gn 6 gn 15 gn
Maximum operating altitude Operating position Flame resistance
Without derating Without derating Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC 695-2-1
Shock resistance (2) 1/2 sine wave = 11ms
Contactor open Contactor closed
Vibration resistance (2) 5300 Hz
Contactor open Contactor closed
(1) Protection ensured for the connection cross-sections shown on the next page and for connection via cable. (2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil supplied at Ue).
Dimensions: pages 2/94 to 2/97
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Model d Connections for power and control circuits
Type of contactor
LC1-
D09 & D12 D18 DT20 & (3P) DT25
D25
D32 D38 D18 & D25 (4P) DT32 & DT40
D40
D50 & D65
D80 & D95
D115 & D150
Power circuit connections

Connection via cable Tightening (3) Flexible cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 Screw clamps 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 N.m mm2 mm2 1.7 1.56 1.510 2.510 1.56 1.56 2.510 16 14 16 14 110 1.56 2-input connector 2.510 2.510 2.510 2.510 2.516 2.516 N 2 6 1.8 10 Screw clamps 2.525 2.516 2.525 2.510 2.525 2.516 1-input connector 2-input connector 2.525 450 2.516 425 2.525 450 2.510 416 2.525 450 2.516 425 10120 10120 + 1050 10120 10120 + 1050 10120 10120 + 1050
Solid cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Screwdriver 6 sided key Tightening torque Connection via spring terminals (2) 1 conductor Flexible cable without cable end 2 conductors Connection via bars or lugs Bar cross-section Lug external of screw Screwdriver Phillips head at screwdriver Phillips head at screwdriver
1.56 1.56 1.510 1.56 1.56 2.510 N 2 6 1.7 N 2 6 2.5 4 4 N 2 6 2.5 4 4
6 8 6 8 6 8 5 5 4 9 4 12
2.3
2.5 4 (4: DT25) 2.5 (except 4 DT25: )
mm mm 8 M3.5 N 2 6 N.m 1.7
8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7
10 M4 N 2 6 2.5
10 M4 N 2 6 2.5
8 (1) M3.5 N 2 6 1.8
13 M5 N 2 8 5
16 M6 N 3 8 5
3 x 16 17 M6 8 10 9
5 x 25 25 M8 13 12
Key for hexagonal headed screw Tightening torque
Control circuit connections

Connection via cable (tightening via screw clamps) Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque Connection via spring terminals (2) Flexible cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Connection via bars or lugs Lug external of screw Screwdriver Tightening torque mm mm N 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 N6 N.m 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 (1) To connect cables with a c.s.a. > 4mm2 and up to 10 mm2, it is essential to use special connectors, sold in bags of 100 (reference: LAD-96180). (2) If cable ends are used, choose the next size down (example: for 2.5 mm2, use 1.5 mm2) and square crimp the cable ends using a special tool. (3) We recommend the use of cable ends. If no cable end is used, then periodic maintenance to tighten terminals is required. mm2 mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors Phillips head at screwdriver mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 12.5 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.2 14 14 12.5 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.2 14 14 12.5 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.2 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 N 2 6 1.2
Phillips head at screwdriver
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Model d
Type of contactor
LC1-
D09 (3P)
DT20 D098
D12 (3P)
DT25 D128
D18 (3P)
DT32 D188
D25 (3P)
DT40 D258
Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue 440 V) In AC-3, 60 C In AC-1, 60 C Up to Of the operating current 60 C Conforming to IEC 947 Conforming to IEC 947 For 1 s For 10 s For 1 min For 10 min Without thermal overload relay, fuse gG With thermal overload relay Average impedance per pole Power dissipation per pole for the above operating currents At Ith and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1 type 1 type 2 A A A A A A A m W W A A V Hz A 9 25 (1) 690 25400 25 (1) 250 250 210 105 61 30 25 20 20 20 12 25 (1) 690 25400 25 (1) 250 250 210 105 61 30 40 25 25 25 18 32 (1) 690 25400 32 (1) 300 300 240 145 84 40 50 35 32 32 25 40 (1) 690 25400 40 (1) 450 450 380 240 120 50 63 40 40 40
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated making capacity (440 V) Rated breaking capacity (440 V) Permissible short-time rating No current owing for preceding 15 minutes at 40 C Protection by fuse against short-circuits (U 690 V)
2.3
See pages 2/112 and 2/113, for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated thermal overload relay 2.5 0.20 1.56 2.5 0.36 1.56 2.5 0.8 2.5 2 1.25 3.2
a.c. control circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits 50 or 60 Hz coils 50/60 Hz coils 50/60 Hz V 12690
Operational Drop-out Operational Drop-out
0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C 0.30.6 Uc at 60 C 50 Hz coil Cos 50/60 Hz coil 50 Hz coil Cos 50/60 Hz coil 60 Hz coil Cos 50/60 Hz coil 60 Hz coil Cos 50/60 Hz coil VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA W 0.75 70 0.3 7 0.75 70 0.3 7.5 23 1222 419 15
a 50 Hz Inrush Sealed a 60 Hz Inrush Sealed
Heat dissipation Operating time (2) Mechanical life in millions of operating cycles
50/60 Hz Closing C Opening O 50 or 60 Hz coil 50/60 Hz coil on 50 Hz
ms ms
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 3600 at ambient temperature 60 C (1) Versions with spring terminal connections : 20 A for LC1-D093 and LC1-D123, 25 A for LC1-D183 to LC1-D323, 32 A for LC1-D183 connected with 2 x 4mm2 cables in parallel, 40 A for LC1-D253 and LC1-D323 connected with 2 x 4mm2 cables in parallel. (2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
D32
D38
D40
D50
D65
D80
D95
D115
D150
32 50 (1) 690 25400 50 550 550 430 260 138 60 63 63
38 50 690 25400 50 550 550 430 310 150 60 63 63
40 60 1000 25400 60 800 800 720 320 165 72 80 80
50 80 1000 25400 80 900 900 810 400 208 84 100 100
65 80 1000 25400 80 1000 1000 900 520 260 110 160 125
80 125 1000 25400 125 1100 1100 990 640 320 135 200 160
95 125 1000 25400 125 1100 1100 1100 800 400 135 200 160
115 200 1000 25400 200 1260 1100 1100 950 550 250 250 200
150 200 1000 25400 200 1660 1400 1400 1200 580 250 315 250
2.3
See pages 2/112 and 2/113, for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated thermal overload relay 2 2 5 2 3 5 1.5 2.4 5.4 1.5 3.7 9.6 1 4.2 6.4 0.8 5.1 12.5 0.8 7.2 12.5 0.6 7.9 24 0.6 13.5 24
12690
24660
24500
0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C 0.30.6 Uc at 60 C 0.75 70 0.3 7 0.75 70 0.3 7.5 23 1222 419 15 3600
0.851.1 Uc at 55 C 0.30.6 Uc at 55 C 0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 55 C 0.30.6 Uc at 55 C 200 0.75 245 20 0.3 26 220 0.75 245 22 0.3 26 610 2026 812 16 6 3600 2026 812 16 6 3600 2026 812 16 6 3600 2035 620 10 4 3600 2035 620 10 4 3600
0.851.1 Uc at 55 C 0.30.5 Uc at 55 C 0.81.15 Uc on 50/60 Hz at 55 C 0.30.5 Uc at 55 C 300 0.8 280350 22 0.3 218 300 0.8 280350 22 0.3 218 38 2050 620 8 8 2400 0.9 280350 0.9 218 0.9 280350 0.9 218 34.5 2035 4075 8 1200
(1) Versions with spring terminal connections : 20 A for LC1-D093 and LC1-D123, 25 A for LC1-D183 to LC1-D323, 32 A for LC1-D183 connected with 2 x 4mm2 cables in parallel, 40 A for LC1-D253 and LC1-D323 connected with 2 x 4mm2 cables in parallel.
TeSys contactors
Model d
d.c. control circuit characteristics

Type of contactor LC1D09D38 DT20DT40 c Conforming to IEC 947-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Control voltage limits Operational Standard coil Wide range coil Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc c Inrush Sealed Average operating time (1) at Uc Closing C W W ms V V V 12440 690 600
0.71.25 Uc at 60 C 0.851.1 Uc at 55 C 0.751.2 Uc at 55 C 0.751.2 Uc at 55 C LC1- or LP1D40D65
LC1 or LP1-D80/95
LC1-D115 & LC1-D150 24440
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
12440
Rated insulation voltage
0.10.25 Uc at 60 C 5.4 5.4 55
0.150.4 Uc at 55 C 270 to 365 2.45.1 2035
0.10.3 Uc at 55 C 22 22 85110 22 22 95130
2.3
Opening O ms 20 2035 2035 4075 Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. Time constant (L/R) Mechanical life at Uc Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature 60 C In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour ms 28 30 3600 65 20 3600 75 20 3600 25 8 1200
Low consumption control circuit characteristics

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 947-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Maximum voltage Average consumption d.c. at 20 C and at Uc Operating time (1) at Uc and at 20 C Voltage limits ( 60 C) of the control circuit Of the control circuit on c V V 690 600 250
Wide range coil (0.71.25 Uc) Closing Opening Operational Drop-out
Inrush Sealed C O
W W ms ms
2.4 2.4 70 25 0.7 to 1.25 Uc 0.10.3 Uc
Time constant (L/R) Mechanical life In millions of operating cycles
ms
40 30
Maximum operating rate At ambient temperature 60 C ops/h 3600 (1) Operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
TeSys contactors
Model d
Contactor integral auxiliary contact characteristics

Linked contacts conforming to draft standard IEC 947-4-5 Mirror contact Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Each contactor has 2 N/O and N/C contacts mechanically linked on the same movable contact holder The N/C contact on each contactor represents the state of the power contacts and can be connected to a PREVENTA safety module Up to Conforming to IEC 947-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Conventional thermal current (Ith) Operating current frequency Minimum switching capacity = 108 Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating U min. I min. Conforming to IEC EN947-5-1 Conforming to IEC EN947-5-1, I rms Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms A A A A M Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts a.c. supply categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical life (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making power (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4). V VA VA VA 24 60 16 4 48 120 32 8 115 280 80 20 230 560 160 40 400 960 280 70 440 1050 300 80 DC-13
Millions of operating cycles 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V
V V V A Hz V mA
690 690 600 10 25400 17 5 gG fuse: 10 A a: 140, c: 250 100 120 140 > 10 1.5 on energisation and on de-energisation
2.3
Insulation resistance Non-overlap time
ms
Contact operating power conforming to IEC 947-5-1
d.c. supply category DC-13 Electrical life (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W 24 96 48 14 48 76 38 12 125 76 38 12 250 76 32 440 44
1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles AC-15
Millions of operating cycles 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
600 1440 420 100
24 V 48 V 125 V
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
440 V
0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A 4
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks without dust and damp protected contacts for model d contactors
Contact block type
LAD-N or C LAD-T & S
LAD-R
LAD-8
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certications IEC EN 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, UL, CSA Conforming to IEC 68 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc Maximum operating altitude Cabling Without derating Phillips N 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end Flexible or solid cable without cable end C C C m mm2 mm2 TH Protection against direct nger contact IP 2X - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70 3000 Min.: 1 x 1; max.: 2 x 2.5 Max.: 2 x 2.5
Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device
2.3
Connection by spring terminals
Instantaneous and time delay contact characteristics

Number of contacts Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency of operational current Minimum switching capacity U min. I min. Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating For ambient temperature 60 C V V V A Hz V mA 1, 2 or 4 690 690 600 10 25400 17 5 10 a: 140; c: 250 100 120 140 > 10 1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation) 1.5 30 - 40+ 70 2% + 15 % - 40+ 70 2% + 15 % 2 2 2
Conforming to IECEN60947-5-1 & VDE0660.gG fuse A Conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1, I rms Permissible for: 1s 500 ms 100 ms A A A A M Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Guaranteed between N/C and N/O on LAD-C22 Ambient air temperature for operation Repeat accuracy Drift up to 0.5 million operating cycles Drift depending on ambient air temperature ms ms C
Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Overlap time Time delay (LAD-T, R and S contact blocks) Accuracy only valid for setting range indicated on the front face
0.25 % per C 0.25 % per C
Mechanical durability Operational power of contacts
In millions of operating cycles
30
See page 2/70
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts for model d contactors
Contact block type
LA1-DX
LA1-DZ protected
LA1-DY non protected
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Cabling Conforming to IEC 68 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage and operation Phillips N 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end C IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct nger contact IP 2X - 25+ 70
mm2
Min.: 1 x 1 Max.: 2 x 2.5 2 2 2 2
Number of contacts
2.3
Contact characteristics
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Conventional thermal current (Ith) Maximum operational current (Ie) Frequency of operational current Minimum switching capacity U min. I min. Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating Conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1. gG fuse Conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1, I rms Permissible for: 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Mechanical durability Materials and technology used for dust and damp protected contacts In millions of operating cycles For ambient temperature 40 C V V V A mA Hz V mA A A A A A M 50 250 500 17 4 > 10 5 Silver - Single break 50 250 500 17 4 > 10 5 Silver - Single break 690 690 600 10 25400 17 5 10 a: 140; c: 250 100 120 140 > 10 30 24 250 50 3 0.3 > 10 5 Gold - Single break with crossed bars
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts for model d contactors
Operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 947-5-1)

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making power (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4).
1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles

V VA VA VA
24 60 16 4
48 120 32 8
115 280 80 20
230 560 160 40
400 960 280 70
440 1050 300 80
600 1440 420 100
1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
2.3
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the power. V W W W 24 120 70 25 48 90 50 18 125 75 38 14 250 68 33 12 440 61 28 10

1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V
24 V 48 V 125 V
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
440 V
0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 4 6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Control modules, coil suppressor modules and mechanical latch blocks for model d contactors
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to IEC 68 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc C C C IEC 947-5-1 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct nger contact IP 2X - 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 - 25+ 70
Auto - Man - Stop control modules

Recommendation Rated insulation voltage Rated operational voltage Protection Built-in protection Indication Electrical durability The Auto - Man selector switch must only be operated with the Start - Stop (O I) switch in position O Conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1 Conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1 Against electric shocks Contactor coil suppression By integral LED In operating cycles V V kV 250 250 2 By varistor Illuminates when the contactor coil is energised 20,000
2.3
Coil suppressor modules

Module type Type of protection LA4-DA LAD-4RC RC circuit LA4-DB LAD-4T Bidirectional peak limiting diode a or c 2472 2 Uc LA4-DC Diode LA4-DE LAD-4V Varistor
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Maximum peak voltage Natural RC frequency 24/48 V 50/127 V 110/240 V 380/415 V
a 24415 3 Uc
c 12250 Uc
a or c 24250 2 Uc
Hz Hz Hz Hz
400 200 100 150
Mechanical latch blocks (1)

Mechanical latch block type For mounting on contactor LA6-DK10 LC1D40D65, LP1-D65 UL, CSA Conforming to IEC EN 609 a 50/60 Hz and c (0.85 - 1.1 Uc) For unlatching In operating cycles/hour a c 47-5-1 V V VA W 690 12 - 500V 25 30 LAD-6K10 LC1-D09D38, DT20DT40 LA6-DK20 LC1-D80D150 LP1-D80 and LC1-D115 UL, CSA 690 24415 25 30
Certication Rated insulation voltage Rated control circuit voltage Power required Maximum operating rate On-load factor Mechanical durability at Uc
1200 1200 10 % 10 % In millions of operating cycles 0.5 0.5 (1) Unlatching can be manually operated or electrically controlled (pulsed or maintained). The LA6-DK or LAD-6K latch coil and the LC1-D operating coil must not be energised simultaneously. The duration of the LA6-DK or LAD-6K and LC1-D control signals must be 100 ms for ac and 250 ms for dc.
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Electronic serial timer modules for model d contactors
Module type
LA4-DT (On-delay)
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certications Protective treatment Degree of protection IEC 255-5 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct nger contact IP 2X C C C V - 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 - 25+ 70 250
Conforming to IEC 68 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation For operation at Uc Conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1 Phillips N 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end
Ambient air temperature around the device Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Cabling
mm2 Min.: 1 x 1 Max.: 2 x 2.5
Control circuit characteristics 2.3

Built-in protection Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Permissible variation Type of control On input Suppression of contactor V By varistor By varistor a or c 24250 0.81.1 Uc By mechanical contact only
Time delay characteristics

Timing ranges Repeat accuracy Reset time Immunity to micro-breaks Minimum control pulse duration Indication of time delay By LED 040 C During the time delay period After the time delay period During the time delay period After the time delay period ms ms ms ms ms s 0.12; 1.530; 25500 3 % (10 ms minimum) 150 50 10 2 Illuminates during time delay period
Switching characteristics (solid state type)

Maximum power dissipated Leakage current Residual voltage Overvoltage protection Electrical durability In millions of operating cycles W mA V 2 <5 3.3 3 kV; 0.5 joule 30
Operating diagram
LA4-DT On-delay electronic timers
U supply (A1-A2) Time delay output Contactor coil Red LED
1 0 1 0 t
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Interface modules for model d contactors
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to IEC 68 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc C C C IEC 255-5 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct nger contact IP 2X - 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 - 25+ 70
Other characteristics
Module type LA4DFBQ With relay LA4DFB With relay LA4DFE With relay LA4LA4DLB DLE With relay + override LA4DWB Solid state
Rated insulation voltage Rated operational voltage Indication of input state Input signals
Conforming to IEC EN V 5 250 60947-5-1 Conforming to IEC EN V 415 250 60947-5-1 By integral LED which illuminates when the contactor coil is energised Control voltage (E1-E2) Permissible variation Current consumption at 20 C State 0 guaranteed for U I State 1 guaranteed for U V V mA V mA V c 24 1730 25 < 2.4 <2 17 By diode By diode 3 ms At 20 C With coil: a 24250 V a 100250 V a 380415 V W 4 0.6 10 4 0.6 10 4 0.6 3 4 0.6 3 4 0.6 20 1 0.4 LC1-D40D115 LC1-D09D38, DT20DT40 c 24 c 48 c 24 c 48 c 24
2.3
1730 3360 1730 3360 530 25 < 2.4 <2 17 15 < 4.8 < 1.3 33 25 < 2.4 <2 17 15 < 4.8 < 1.3 33
8.5 for 5 V 15 for 24 V
< 2.4 <2 5
Built-in protection Electrical durability at 220/240 V Maximum immunity time to micro-breaks Power dissipated Direct mounting without contactor
Against reverse polarity Of the input In millions of operating cycles
LC1-D40D150
LC1-D40D150 LC1-D09D38, DT20DT40 LC1-D09D38, DT20DT40
Mounting with cabling adaptor LAD-4BB
With coil:
a 24250 V a 380415 V
Total operating time at Uc (of the contactor)
Operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate. LC1-D09D38, DT20DT40 2030 1624 Min.: 1 x 1 Min.: 2 x 2.5
LC1-D40D65 LC1-D80 and D95
With LA4-DF, DL Cabling Phillips N 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end
N/O ms N/C ms mm2 mm2
2834 2024
2843 1832
References
TeSys contactors
For motor control up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption
3-pole contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

810356
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 ( 60 C)
Rated operational current in AC-3 220V 380V 660V 440 V 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V up to kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 4 5.5 9 11 15 4 5.5 9 11 15 5.5 7.5 10 15 5.5 7.5 10 15 22 30 37 45 45 75 90 9 12 18 25 32 38 40 50 65 80 95 115 150
Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Fixing (1)
Weight (4)
kg 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LC1-D09pp LC1-D12pp LC1-D18pp LC1-D25pp LC1-D32pp LC1-D38pp LC1-D40pp LC1-D50pp LC1-D65pp LC1-D80pp LC1-D95pp LC1-D115pp LC1-D150pp
LC1-D09pp
0.320 0.325 0.330 0.370 0.375 0.380 1.400 1.400 1.400 1.590 1.610 2.500 2.500
3 4
810353
5.5 7.5 9 11
18.5 18.5
18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 22 25 37 45 45 59 80 22 30 37 45 45 59 80 22 30 37 55 55 75 90 30 33 37 45 45 80 100
2.3
LC1-D25pp
15
18.5 30 22 25 30
810352
37 45 55 75
40
3-pole contactors for connection by lugs or bars

Insert the digit 6 before the voltage code in the references selected above. Example: LC1-D09pp becomes LC1-D096pp.
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 2/84 to 2/91. LC1-D95pp (1) LC1-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1-DP or screw xing. LC1-D40 to D95 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm or 75 mm 5 rail AM1-DL or screw xing. LC1-D40 to D95 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1-DL or screw xing. LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1-DP or screw xing. (2) Standard control circuit voltages. a.c. supply Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500 LC1-D09...D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LC1-D40...D115 50 Hz B5 D5 E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5 R5 S5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 R6 d.c. supply Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC1-D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD LC1-D40...D95 U 0.851.1 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD U 0.751.2 Uc JW BW CW EW SW FW MW LC1-D115 and D150 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.751.2 Uc BD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD Low consumption Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250 LC1-D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 2/102 to 1/107. (3) LC: low consumption. (4) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg for contactors LC1-D09 to D38, 0.785 kg for contactors LC1-D40 to D65 and 1 kg for contactors LC1-D80 and D95. NB. Overloads to suit contactors are on page 2/112.
105517
LC1-D115pp
References
TeSys contactors
For motor control up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption
3-pole contactors for connection by spring terminals

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 ( 60 C) 220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V kW kW kW kW kW kW 2.2 3 4 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 4 5.5 9 11 15 4 5.5 9 11 15 5.5 7.5 10 15 5.5 7.5 10 15 Rated operational current in AC-3 440 V up to A 9 12 18 25 32 (5) Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Fixing (1)
Weight (4)
810358
kg 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LC1-D093pp LC1-D123pp LC1-D183pp LC1-D253pp LC1-D323pp
0.320 0.325 0.330 0.370 0.375
LC1-D123pp
5.5 7.5
18.5 18.5
3-pole contactors for connection by Faston connectors

810359
These contactors are tted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil and auxiliary terminals. It is possible to make 2 x 6.35 mm connections to the coil terminals by using a double Faston connector, reference: LA9-6180, to be ordered separately (sold in lots of 100). For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the digit 3 with a 9 in the references selected above. Example: LC1-D093pp becomes LC1-D099pp.
2.3
Accessories
LC1-D129pp
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 2/84 to 2/91. (1) LC1-D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1-DP or screw xing. (2) Standard control circuit voltages.
a.c. supply Volts LC1-D09...D32 50/60 Hz
24 B7
42 D7
48 E7
110 F7
115 FE7
220 M7
230 P7
240 U7 125 GD
380 Q7 220 MD
400 V7 250 UD
415 N7 440 RD
440 R7
d.c. supply Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 LC1-D09...D32 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD
Low consumption Volts c 5 12 24 48 LC1-D09...D32 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL JL BL EL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 2/102 to 1/107. (3) LC: low consumption. (4) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg for contactors LC1-D09 to D32. (5) Must be wired with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel on the upstream side. On the downstream side, outgoing terminal block LAD-331 may be used (Quickt technology, see page 2/305).
References
TeSys contactors
For control in utilisation category AC-1, 25 to 200 A Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption
3-pole contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors (1)

Non inductive loads maximum current ( 60 C) utilisation category AC-1 A 25 32 40 50 60 80 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LC1-D09pp (5) or LC1-D12pp (5) (6) LC1-D18pp (5) LC1-D25pp (5) LC1-D32pp (5) or LC1-D38pp (5) (6) LC1-D40pp (5) LC1-D50pp (5) or LC1-D65pp (6) LC1-D80pp or LC1-D95pp (6) LC1-D115pp or LC1-D150pp (6)
Number of poles
Weight (4)
810366
2
LC1-D129pp
kg 0.320 0.325 0.330 0.370 0.375 0.380 1.400 1.400 1.400 1.590 1.610 2.500 2.500
2.3
125 200
3-pole contactors for connection by lugs or bars (1)

810367
Insert the digit 6 before the voltage code in the references selected above. Example: LC1-D09pp becomes LC1-D096pp.
3-pole contactors for connection by Faston connectors (1)

These contactors are tted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil terminals. For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, insert the digit 9 before the voltage code in the references selected above. Example: LC1-D09pp becomes LC1-D099pp.
3-pole contactors for connection by spring terminals (1)

LC1-D123pp 20 25/32 3 3 1 1 1 1
LC1-D093pp (5) or LC1-D123pp (5) (6) LC1-D183pp (5)
0.320 0.325 0.335
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 2/84 to 2/91. (1) 3-pole contactors LC1-D09 to D95 can be supplied without safety cover. To order, insert the digit 5 before the voltage code in the references selected above. Examples: LC1-D09pp becomes LC1-D095pp LC1-D096pp becomes LC1-D0965pp LC1-D099pp becomes LC1-D0995pp LC1-D093pp becomes LC1-D0935pp (2) See note (2) page 2/77. (3) LC1-D09 to D38 and LC1-DT20 to DT40: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1-DP or screw xing. LC1-D40 to D95 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm or 75 mm 5 rail AM1-DL or screw xing. LC1 or LP1-D40 to D95 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1-DL or screw xing. LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1-DP or screw xing. (4) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg for contactors LC1-D09 to D38, 0.785 kg for contactors LC1-D40 to D65 and 1 kg for contactors LC1-D80 and D95. (5) For purchase in bulk packs, call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608. (6) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in the Technical & Application guide available at www.schneider.co.uk.
References
TeSys contactors
For control in utilisation category AC-1, 20 to 200 A Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption
4-pole contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

Non inductive loads maximum current ( 60 C) utilisation category AC-1 A 20 25 LC1-DT20 32 40 60 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 80 4 2 125 4 2 200 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 or 1 or or or or or
LC1-DT20pp LC1-D098pp LC1-DT25pp LC1-D128pp LC1-DT32pp LC1-D188pp LC1-DT40pp LC1-D258pp LC1-D40004 LP1-D40004 LC1-D40008 LP1-D40008 LC1-D65004pp LP1-D65004pp LC1-D65008pp LP1-D65008pp LC1-D80004pp LP1-D80004pp LC1-D80008pp LP1-D80008pp LC1-D115004pp
105700_1
Number of poles
Weight (3)
kg 0.365 0.365 0.365 0.365 0.425 0.425 0.425 0.425 1.44 2.20 1.45 2.20 1.440 2.210 1.450 2.220 1.760 2.685 1.840 2.910 2.860
2.3
4-pole contactors for connection by lugs or bars

Insert the digit 6 before the voltage code in the references selected above. Example: LC1-DT20pp becomes LC1-DT206pp.
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 2/84 to 2/91. (1) See note (1) page 2/76. (2) Control circuit voltages. a.c. supply Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500 LC1-D09...D150 and LC1-DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 d.c. supply Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC1-D09...D38 and LC1-DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD LC1 or LP1-D40...D80 U 0.851.1 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD U 0.751.2 Uc JW BW CW EW SW FW MW LC1-D115 (coil with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.751.2 Uc BD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD Low consumption Volts c 5 24 48 72 LC1-D09...D38 and LC1-DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL BL EL SL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 2/102 to 2/107. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.165 kg and for contactors LC1-D80, 1 kg.
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control up to 75 kW on 400 V in category AC-3, horizontally mounted, pre-assembled Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

Pre-wired power connections Mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Standard power ratings Rated Instantaneous of 3-phase motors operaauxiliary 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 tional contacts per contactor current in AC-3 ( 60C) 220 V 380 V 660 V 440 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V up to kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 4 5.5 9 11 15 4 5.5 9 11 15 5.5 7.5 10 15 5.5 7.5 10 15 75 90 9 12 18 25 32 38 40 50 65 80 95 115 150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Contactors supplied with coil Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Fixing (1)
Weight (3)
LC2-D12pp
kg LC2-D09pp (4) LC2-D12pp (4) LC2-D18pp (4) LC2-D25pp (4) LC2-D32pp (4) LC2-D38pp (4) LC2-D40pp LC2-D50pp LC2-D65pp LC2-D80pp LC2-D95pp LC2-D115pp LC2-D150pp 0.687 0.697 0.707 0.787 0.797 0.807 2.400 2.400 2.400 3.200 3.200 6.350 6.400
18.5 18.5
2.3
9 11 15
18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 22 25 37 45 45 59 80 22 30 37 45 45 59 80 22 30 37 55 55 75 90 30 33 37 45 45 80 100
18.5 30 22 LC2-D50pp 25 30 40 37 45 55 75
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by lugs or bars

For reversing contactors LC2-D09 to LC2-D38, LC2-D115 and LC2-D150, insert the digit 6 before the voltage code in the references selected above. Example: LC2-D09pp becomes LC2-D096pp.
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 2/84 to 2/91. (1) LC2-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1-DP or screw xing. LC2-D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm or 75 mm 5 rail AM1-DL or screw xing. LC2-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1-DP or screw xing. (2) Control circuit voltages. a.c. supply Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500 LC2-D09...D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 d.c. supply Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC2-D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD Low consumption Volts c 5 24 48 72 LC2-D09D38 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL BL EL SL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 2/102 to 2/107. (3) The weights indicated are for reversing contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.330 kg. (4) For reversing contactors with electrical interlocking pre-wired at the factory, add sufx V to the references selected above. Example: LC2-D09P7 becomes LC2-D09P7V.
Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/100 and 2/101
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control up to 15 kW on 400 V in category AC-3, horizontally mounted, pre-assembled Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by spring terminals

810372
Pre-wired power connections Mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Standard power ratings Rated Instantaneous of 3-phase motors operaauxiliary 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 tional contacts current per in AC-3 contactor ( 60C) LC2-D123pp
220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW kW
Contactors supplied with coil Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Fixing (1)
Weight (3)
2
kg LC2-D093pp LC2-D123pp LC2-D183pp LC2-D253pp LC2-D323pp (4) 0.687 0.697 0.707 0.787 0.797
440 V up to A 9 12 18 25 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
4 5.5 7.5 11 15
4 5.5 9 11 15
4 5.5 9 11 15
5.5 7.5 10 15
5.5 7.5 10 15
18.5 18.5
2.3
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by Faston connectors

These contactors are tted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm or 2 x 2.8 mm on the coil and auxiliary terminals. For reversing contactors LC2-D09 and LC2-D12 only, replace the digit 3 with a 9 in the references selected above. Example: LC2-D093pp becomes LC2-D099pp.
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 2/84 to 2/91. (1) LC2-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1-DP or screw xing. (2) Control circuit voltages. a.c. supply Volts LC2-D09...D32 50/60 Hz 24 B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 115 FE7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7 220 MD 415 N7 250 UD 440 R7 440 RD
d.c. supply Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 LC2-D09...D32 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD
Low consumption Volts c 5 24 48 72 LC2-D09...D32 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL BL EL SL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 2/102 to 2/107. (3) The weights indicated are for reversing contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.330 kg. (4) For use with power connection module LAD-341 or Quickt technology outgoing terminal block LAD-331, see page 2/305.
Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/100 and 2/101 2/79
References
TeSys contactors
Changeover contactor pairs for control in utilisation category AC-1, 20 to 200 A, horizontally mounted, pre-assembled Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
105702_1
Pre-wired power connections LC2-DT20 to LC2-DT60 mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. LC2-D65 and LC2-D80: Order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD-Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors (see page 2/85). For electrical interlocking incorporated in the mechanical interlock, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. LC2-D115 mechanical interlock with integral, pre-wired electrical interlocking. Utilisation category AC-1 Non inductive loads Maximum rated operational current ( < 60 C) Instantaneous auxiliary contacts per contactor Contactors supplied with coils Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Fixing (1)
Weight
2
LC2-DT20
A 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC2-DT20pp LC2-DT25pp LC2-DT32pp LC2-DT40pp LC2-D40004 (3) LC2-D65004pp LC2-D80004pp LC2-D115004pp
kg 0.730 0.730 0.850 0.850 2.400 3.200 3.200 7.400
2.3
25 32 40 60 80 125 200
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection by lugs or bars

20 25 32 40 1 1 1 1 80 125 200 1 1 1 1 LC2-DT206pp LC2-DT256pp LC2-DT326pp LC2-DT406pp LC2-D400046 (3) LC2-D650046pp LC2-D800046pp LC2-D1150046pp 0.730 0.730 0.850 0.850 2.400 3.200 3.200 7.400
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 2/84 to 2/91. (1) LC2-DT20 to DT60: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail or screw xing. LC2-D65 and D80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm or 75 mm 5 rail AM1-DL or screw xing. LC2-D115: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1-DP or screw xing. (2) See note (2) on previous page. (3) For replacement in existing equipment.
References
TeSys contactors
Changeover contactor pairs for control in utilisation category AC-1, 20 and 25 A, horizontally mounted, pre-assembled Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection by spring terminals

Pre-wired power connections With mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Utilisation category AC-1 Instantaneous Non inductive loads auxiliary Maximum rated contacts operational current per ( < 60 C) contactor
Contactors supplied with coils Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Fixing (1)
Weight
2
kg
A 20 1 1 LC2-DT203pp
0.760
25
LC2-DT253pp
0.760
2.3 Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 2/84 to 2/91. (1) Clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1-DP or screw xing. (2) Control circuit voltages. a.c. supply Volts LC2-DT20DT60 50/60 Hz 24 B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 115 FE7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 220 MD 400 V7 250 UD 415 N7 440 RD 440 R7 500
d.c. supply Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 LC2-DT20DT60 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD Low consumption Volts c 5 24 48 72 LC2-DT20...DT60 (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL BL EL SL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 2/102 to 2/107.
election: pages 1/14 to 1/37
References
TeSys contactors
Component parts for assembling reversing contactors for motor control or low speed - high speed starters
For 3-pole motor reversing contactors

Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer Using 2 identical contactors (1)
Reference
810373
Weight kg
Mechanical interlock and power connections - with an electrical interlocking kit LC1-D09D38
LAD-9R1V
2
810377
0.045
Mechanical interlock and power connections - without electrical interlock LC1-D09D38 Mechanical interlock only LC1-D09D38 LAD-9R1 Mechanical interlock with integral electrical interlocking Using 2 identical Set of contactors (1) power connections Reference LC1-D40D65 LA9-D6569 Mechanical interlock Reference of kit
LA9-D4002 LAD-9V2 LAD-9R1
0.045
0.010
2.3
Weight kg 0.290
Weight kg
810376
0.170
LC1-D80 and D95 (a)
LA9-D8069
0.290
LA9-D4002
0.170
LC1-D80 and D95 (c) LA9-D4002

810374
LA9-D8069
0.490
LA9-D8002
0.170
LC1-D115 and D150
LA9-D11569
1.450
LA9-D11502
0.290
Mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking LC1-D40D65 LA9-D6569 LC1-D80 and D95 (a)
LA9-D8069 LA9-D6569
0.290
LA9-D50978
0.170
0.490
LA9-D50978
0.170
810375
LC1-D80 and D95 (c)
LA9-D8069
0.490
LA9-D80978
0.170
For low speed - high speed starter LC1-D38

Description LA9-D8069 Connection kit enabling reversing of slow and high speed directions, using a reversing contactor and a 2N/O + 2N/C main pole contactor For contactors with connections Screw clamps or connectors Reference LAD-9PVGV
Weight kg
0.016
Spring terminals
LAD-3PVGV
0.068
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 2/74 and 2/75.
References
TeSys contactors
Component parts for assembling changeover contactor pairs for distribution
For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (3-phase distribution + neutral)

Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer Using Set of 2 identical power connections contactors (1) Reference
810384
Weight kg
Mechanical interlock Reference of kit
Weight kg
Mechanical interlock and an electrical interlocking kit for the contactors LC1-DT20DT40
LAD-T9R1V (2)
0.040
LA9-D4002
Mechanical interlock with integral electrical interlocking LC1-D65004 and LC1-D40004 LC1-D80004
LA9-D6570
0.150
LA9-D4002
0.170
810383
LA9-D8070
0.280
LA9-D4002
0.170
2.3
LP1-D80004
LA9-D8070
0.280
LA9-D8002
0.170
LC1-D115004
LA9-D11570
1.100
LA9-D11502
0.280
LA9-D50978
Mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking (3) LC1-DT20DT32

LAD-T9R1 (2)
0.035
810379
LC1-DT40
LAD-T9R2 (2)
0.040
LA9-D6570
LC1 or LP1-D65004 and LC1 or LP1-D40004 LC1-D80004
LA9-D6570
0.150
LA9-D50978
0.155
LA9-D8070
0.280
LA9-D50978
0.155
810380
LP1-D80004
LA9-D8070
0.280
LA9-D80978
0.180
For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs

LA9-D8070 Mechanical interlock with integral electrical interlocking LC1-D115 and D150 LA9-D11571 0.960
LA9-D11502
0.280
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 2/77 and 2/78. (2) Including mechanical interlock. (3) Order 2 contact blocks LAD-Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the contactors, see page 2/85.
810436
2
LC1 LAD-8N LAD-N10, N01
LA6-DK or LAD-6K
LAD-N
2.3
LAD-N LAD-C
LAD-T LAD-S2
LAD-R
See page opposite for mounting possibilities according to the contactor type and rating.
LA1-DX, DY, DZ
2/84
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors, model d Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals

For use in normal operating environments Clip-on mounting (1) Front Number of contacts per block 1 Composition Reference
Weight
Side
2 4 4 incl. 1 N/O & 1 N/C make before break 2
1 1 2 2 1 4 3 2 1 2
1 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
LAD-N10 (4) LAD-N01 (4) LAD-N11 LAD-N20 LAD-N02 LAD-N22 LAD-N13 LAD-N40 LAD-N04 LAD-N31 LAD-C22 LAD-8N11 LAD-8N20 LAD-8N02
kg 0.020 0.020 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.030 0.030 0.030
For terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 Front, on 3P contactors & 2 4P contactors 20 to 60A 4 Front, on 4P contactors 2 80 to 200A 4
2.3
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
LAD-N11G LAD-N22G LAD-N11P LAD-N22P
0.030 0.050 0.030 0.050 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.050 0.060
With dust and damp protected terminals, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments LA1-DX20 Front 2 2 LA1-DX11 1 1 LA1-DX02 2 LA1-DY20 (2) 2 2 LA1-DZ40 4 2 2 LA1-DZ31 2 1 1
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs

This type of connection is not possible for blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the digit 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD-N10 becomes LAD-N106.
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

This type of connection is not possible for LAD-8, LAD-N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the digit 3 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD-N11 becomes LAD-N113.
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors

This type of connection is not possible for LAD-8, LAD-N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the digit 9 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD-N11 becomes LAD-N119. (1) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be tted Contactors Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks Time delay Side Front mounted Front Type Number of poles and size mounted 1 contact 2 contacts 4 contacts mounted a 3P LC1-D09D38 1 on left-hand side & 1 or 1 or 1 LC1-D40D95 (50/60 Hz) 1 on each side or 2 and 1 or 1 or 1 LC1-D40D95 (50 or 60 Hz) 1 on each side & 2 and 1 or 1 or 1 LC1-D115 and D150 1 on left-hand side & 1 or 1 or 1 4P LC1-DT20DT40 1 on left-hand side & 1 or 1 or 1 LC1-D65 and D80 1 on each side or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 LC1-D115 1 on each side & 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 c 3P LC1-D09D38 1 or 1 or 1 LC1-D40D95 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 LC1-D115 and D150 1 on left-hand side & 1 or 1 or 1 4P LC1-DT20DT40 1 or 1 or 1 LP1-D65 and D80 and D40 2 and 1 or 1 or 1 LC1-D115 1 on each side and 1 or 1 or 1 LC (3) 3P LC1-D09D38 1 4P LC1-DT20DT40 1 (2) Device tted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals. (3) LC: low consumption. (4) D40 - D95 only.
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors, model d Time-delay auxiliary contact blocks Mechanical latch blocks
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals
810438
2
LAD-T
Maximum number of auxiliary contact blocks that can be tted per contactor, see page 2/85. Sealing cover to be ordered separately, see page 2/91. LAD-T0 and LAD-R0: with extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. LAD-S2: with switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact. Clip-on Number Time delay Reference Weight mounting of Type Setting contacts range kg Front 1 N/O + 1 N/C Ondelay 0.13 s 0.130 s 10180 s 130 s Offdelay 0.13 s 0.130 s 10180 s LA6-DK
LAD-T0 LAD-T2 LAD-T4 LAD-S2 LAD-R0 LAD-R2 LAD-R4
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
2.3
810439
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs

Add the digit 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD-T0 becomes LAD-T06.
810441
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors

Add the digit 9 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD-T0 becomes LAD-T09. LAD-Tp3

Clip-on mounting
810440
Unlatching control
For use on contactor
Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control voltage (2)

LA6-DK10p
Weight
kg 0.070
Front
Manual or electric
LC1-D40D65 3P a or c LC1-D65 4P a LP1-D65 4P c LC1-D80D150 3P a LC1-D80 and D115 3P c LP1-D80 and LC1-D115 4P c LC1-D09D38 a or c LC1-DT20DT40 a or c
LA6-DK20p
0.090
LA6-DK
LAD-6K10p
0.070
(1) The mechanical latching block must not be powered up at the same time as the contactor. The duration of the control signal for the mechanical latching block and the contactor should be: 100 ms for a contactor operating on an a.c. supply 250 ms for a contactor operating on a d.c. supply. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 50/60 Hz, c 24 32/36 42/48 60/72 100 110/127 220/240 256/277 380/415 Code B C E EN K F M U Q
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors, model d Coil suppressor modules
RC circuits (resistor-capacitor)
p Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. For use only in cases where the voltage is virtually sinusoidal, i.e. less than 5 % total harmonic distortion. p Voltage limited to 3 Uc maximum and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz maximum. p Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time). Mounting For use with contactor (1) Rating Type Va D09D38 (3P) DT20DT40 D40D150 (3P) and D65D115 (4P) 2448 110240 2448 50127 110240 380415 Reference Vc
LAD-4RCE LAD-4RCU LA4-DA2E LA4-DA2G LA4-DA2U LA4-DA2N Weight
810442
kg 0.012 0.012 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018
Clip-on (3) Screw xing (4) LAD-4
Varistors (peak limiting)

p Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. p Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. p Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). Clip-on (3) D09D38 (3P) (2) DT20DT40 D40D115 (3P) and D65D115 (4P) D40D95 (3P) and D40D80 (4P) 2448 50127 110250 2448 50127 110250 2448 50127 110250
LAD-4VE LAD-4VG LAD-4VU LA4-DE2E LA4-DE2G LA4-DE2U LA4-DE3E LA4-DE3G LA4-DE3U
2.3
0.012 0.012 0.012 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018
810443
Screw mounting (4)
Flywheel diodes
LA4-D p No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. p Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time). p Polarised component. Clip-on (5) Screw xing (4) D09...D38 (3P) DT20...DT40 D40D95 (3P) D65 and D80 (4P) 24...250 24250 LAD-4DDL r
LA4-DC3U
0.012 0.018
Bidirectional peak limiting diode

p Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. p Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Clip-on (3) (5) D09D38 (3P) (2) DT20DT40 24 72 24 72 24 72 125 250 600
LAD-4TB LAD-4TBDL r LAD-4TS LAD-4TSDL r LAD-4TGDL r LAD-4TUDL r LAD-4TXDL r LA4-DB2B LA4-DB2S
0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0,012 0.012 0.012 0.018 0.018
Screw mounting (4)
D40D95 (3P) D65 and D80 (4P)
r Available 2nd quarter 2005
D40D95 (3P) 24 LA4-DB3B 0.018 LA4-DB3S 0.018 D65 and D80 (4P) 72 (1) For satisfactory protection, a suppressor module must be tted across the coil of each contactor. (2) From LC1-D09 to D38 and LC1-DT20 to DT40, d.c. and low consumption 3-pole contactors are tted with built-in suppression as standard. (3) Clipping-on makes the electrical connection. The overall size of the contactor remains unchanged. (4) Mounting at the top of the contactor on coil terminals A1 and A2. (5) In order to install these accessories, the existing suppression device must rst be removed.
510176
LA4-DT
LA4-DW
LA4-DF
LA4-DL
LA4-DM
2.3
LAD-4BB
LC1-D09 D38
LC1-D40D150
3-pole LC1-D09D38 4-pole LC1-DT20DT40
See page opposite for mounting possibilities according to the contactor type and rating.
2/88
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors, model d Add-on blocks
Electronic serial timer modules (1)
p 3-pole contactors LC1-D09 to D38 and 4-pole contactors LC1-DT20 to DT40: mounted using adaptor LAD-4BB, to be ordered separately, see page 2/91. p 3-pole contactors LC1-D40 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1-D65 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of contactor (screw xing). On-delay type Operational voltage a 24250 V LC1D09D38 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P)
Time 100250 V LC1D40D150 (3P) 0.12 s 1.530 s 25500 s
Reference
Weight
kg LA4-DT0U LA4-DT2U LA4-DT4U 0.040 0.040 0.040
Interface modules
p 3-pole contactors LC1-D09 to D38 and 4-pole contactors LC1-DT20 to DT40: mounted using adaptor LAD-4BB, to be ordered separately, see page 2/91. p 3-pole contactors LC1-D40 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1-D65 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of contactor (screw xing). Relay interface Operational voltage a 24250 V LC1-D09D150 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P)
2.3
380415 V LC1-D09D150 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P) Supply voltage E1-E2 (c) 24 V 24 V 48 V Reference
Weight
kg LA4-DFBQ LA4-DFB LA4-DFE Reference 0.055 0.050 0.050

Weight
Relay interface with manual override switch (output forced ON) Operational voltage Supply a voltage 24250 V 100250 V E1-E2 (c) LC1-D09D150 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P) Solid state interface LC1-D09D38 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P) LC1-D40D115 (3P) 24 V 24 V 48 V
kg LA4-DLB LA4-DLE 0.045 0.045
LA4-DWB
0.045
Auto-Man-Stop control modules

For local override operation tests with 2-position Auto-Man switch and O-I switch p 3-pole contactors LC1-D09 to D38 and 4-pole contactors LC1-DT20 to DT40: mounted using adaptor LAD-4BB, to be ordered separately, see page 2/91. p 3-pole contactors LC1-D40 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1-D65 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of contactor (screw xing). Operational voltage Reference Weight a 24100 V 100250 V kg LC1-D09D150 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P) LC1-D40D150 (3P) LA4-DMK LA4-DMU 0.040 0.040
(1) For 24 V operation, the contactor must be tted with a 21 V coil (code Z). See pages 2/102 to 2/107.
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors, model d Accessories
810445
Accessories for main pole and control connections

Description For use on contactors a 4-pole 10 mm2 3-pole 25 mm2 DT20, DT25 D09D38 c DT20, DT25 D09D38 D115, D150 D115 D115, D150 D115 D115, D150 D115, D150 D09D38
Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10
Unit reference
LA-D92560 LA9-D3260 LA9-D115603B LA9-D115604 LA9-D115503B LA9-D115504
Weight
kg 0.030 0.040 0.560 0.740 0.300 0.360 0.250 0.300 0.060 0.012 0.060 0.021 0.060 0.005 0.080 0.024 0.070 0.100 0.006 0.010 0.010 0.180
2
810446
LA9-D3260
Connectors for cable, sizes (1 connector) Connectors for cable, sizes (2 connectors) Connector for lug type terminals (2 connectors) Protective covers for lug type terminals
3-pole D115, D150 120 mm2 4-pole D115 120 mm2 3-pole 4-pole D115, D150 D115
LA9-D11550p
810447
2.3
3-pole (1) D115, D150 4-pole (1) D115, D150 2 poles D09D38
LA9-D115703
LA9-D115704 LA9-D2561 LA9-D1261 LA-D96061 LA9-D40961 LA9-D80961 LAD-9P3 (2) LA9-D80962 LA9-D1263 LA9-D40963 LA9-D80963 LA9-D09966 LA9-D6567 LA9-D8067
Links for parallel connection of
DT20 & DT25 (4P) DT20 & DT25 (4P) 10 DT32 & DT40 (4P) DT32 & DT40 (4P) 10 LA9-D11560p
810450
D40D65 D80, D95 D09D38 3 poles (star connection) D80, D95 4 poles DT206 & DT406 D40D65
D40D65 D80 D09D38 D80 DT206 & DT406 D40D65 D80 D40D80 D40D65 D80
2 2 10 1 2 2 2 10 10 10
LA9-D11570p
810448
D80, D95 Staggered coil connection Control circuit take-off from main pole LA9-D80962 D40D65 D80, D95
3 GV7-AC03 Spreaders D115, D115, for increasing the D150 D150 pole pitch to 45 mm (1) For 3-pole contactors: 1 set of 6 covers, for 4-pole contactors: 1 set of 8 covers. (2) Separate connecting bar for connecting 2 poles in parallel.
810449
LA9-D6567
Dimensions: pages 2/94 to 2/97 2/90
TeSys contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors, model d Accessories
Sets of contacts and arc chambers

810452
Description Set of contacts Arc chambers GV2-G245
For use on contactors 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole LC1-D115 LC1-D150 LC1-D115004 LC1-D115 LC1-D150 LC1-D115004
Reference
LA5-D1158031 LA5-D150803 LA5-D115804 LA5-D11550 LA5-D15050B LA5-D115450B
Weight kg
0.260 0.260 0.330 0.395 0.395 0.470
Cabling accessories
810453
For adapting existing wiring to a new product
LC1-D09D38 Without coil suppression LC1With coil a 2448 V DT20DT40 suppress- a 50127 V ion a 110250 V 2 contactors LC1-D09D18 or D25D38 4 contactors LC1-D09D18 or D25D38 One or more GV2-G busbar sets
LAD-4BB LAD-4BBVE LAD-4BBVG LAD-4BBVU GV2-G245 GV2-G445 GV1-G09
0.019 0.014 0.014 0.014 0.036 0.077 0.040
Set of 63 A busbars for parallelling of contactors Terminal block for supply to: GV1-G09
Protection accessories
Description Miniature circuit-breaker Sealing cover Safety cover preventing access to the moving contact carrier Application 5 x 20 with 4 A-250 V fuse For LAD-T, LAD-R LC1-D09D38 and DT20DT40 LC1-D40D65 LC1-D80 and D95 LC1-D115 and D150
Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1
2.3
Unit reference
LA9-D941 LA9-D901 LAD-9ET1 LAD-9ET2 LAD-9ET3 LAD-9ET4 Weight kg
810451
0.025 0.005 0.026 0.012 0.004 0.004
Marking accessories
LA9-D941 Description Sheet of 64 blank legends self-adhesive, 8 x 33 mm (1) Sheet of 112 blank legends self-adhesive, 8 x 12 mm (1) Sheet of 64 blank legends for marking using plotter or 8 x 33 mm engraver Sheet of 112 blank legends for marking using plotter or 8 x 12 mm engraver Legend holder snap-in, 8 x 22 mm Legend holder snap-in, 8 x 18 mm Application Contactors (excluding 4-pole LC1-D65D115) LAD-N (4 contacts), LA6-DK LAD-N (2 contacts), LAD-T, LAD-R, LRD Contactors (excluding 4-pole LC1-D65D115) LAD (4 contacts), LA6-DK All products 4-pole contactors LC1-D40 and D80, LA6-DK LC1-D09...38 LC1-DT20...40 LAD-N (4 contacts) LAD-T, LAD-R On holder LA9-D92 Multi-language version (EN, FR, DE, SP, 1T)
Sold in lots of 10 10 10 35 100 100
Unit reference LAD-21

LAD-22 LAD-23 LAD-24 LA9-D92 LAD-90
Weight kg 0.020
810454
0.020 0.050 0.200 0.001 0.001
LAD-9ETp
810455
Bag of 300 blank legends self-adhesive, 7 x 21 mm SIS Label label creation software
1 1
LA9-D93 XBY-2U
0.001 0.060
Mounting accessories
Mounting plate For replacement of LC1-F115 1 LA9-D730 or F150 by LC1-D115 or D150 (1) These legends are for sticking onto the safety cover of the contactors or add-on block, if tted. 0.360
XBY-2U
2/91
References
TeSys contactors
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks, used for power factor correction Direct connection without choke inductors
Special contactors
Special contactors LC1-DpK are designed for switching 3-phase, single or multiple-step capacitor banks; they conform to standards IEC 70 and 831, NFC 54-100, VDE 0560, UL and CSA.
Contactor applications
Specification Contactors tted with a block of early make poles and damping resistors, limiting the value of the current on closing to 60 In max. This current limitation increases the life of all the components of the installation, in particular that of the fuses and capacitors. The patented design of the add-on block (n 90 119-20) ensures safety and long life of the installation. Operating conditions LC1-DFK11pp There is no need to use choke inductors for either single or multiple-step capacitor banks. Short-circuit protection must be provided by gI type fuses rated at 1.72 In. Maximum operational power
2.3
The power values given in the selection table below are for the following operating conditions. Prospective peak current at switch-on Maximum operating rate Electrical durability at nominal load Operational power at 50/60 Hz (1) 55 C (3) LC1-DpK LC1-DFK, DGK, DLK, DMK, DPK LC1-DTK, DWK All contactor ratings Instantaneous auxiliary contacts 200 In 240 operating cycles/hour 100 operating cycles/hour
400 V 300 000 operating cycles 690 V 200 000 operating cycles Tightening Basic reference. torque Complete with code on cable indicating control end circuit voltage (2)
Weight
220 V 240 V kVAR 6.7
400 V 440 V kVAR 12.5
660 V 690 V kVAR 18
N/O 1
N/C N.m 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1.2 1.2 1.7 1.7 1.9 1.9 2.5 2.5 5 5 9
LC1-DFK11pp LC1-DFK02pp LC1-DGK11pp LC1-DGK02pp LC1-DLK11pp LC1-DLK02pp LC1-DMK11pp LC1-DMK02pp LC1-DPK12pp LC1-DTK12pp LC1-DWK12pp
kg 0.430 0.430 0.450 0.450 0.600 0.600 0.630 0.630 1.300 1.300 1.650
LC1-DPK12pp
8.5
16.7
24
10
20
30
15
25
36
20 25 40
33.3 40 60
48 58 92
1 1 1
Switching of multiple step capacitor banks (with equal or different power ratings). The correct contactor for each step is selected from the above table, according to the power rating of the step to be switched. Example: 50 kVAR 3-step capacitor bank. Temperature 50 C and U = 400 V or 440 V. One 25 kVAR step: contactor LC1-DMK, one 15 kVAR step: contactor LC1-DGK and one 10 kVAR step: contactor LC1-DFK. (1) Operational power of the contactor according to the scheme on the page opposite. (2) Control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 For other voltages between 24 and 440 V, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (3) The average temperature over a 24-hour period, in accordance with standards IEC 70 and 831 is 45 C.
Dimensions, schemes: page 2/93 2/92
Dimensions, schemes
TeSys contactors
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks, used for power factor correction
Dimensions LC1-DFK, DGK
LC1-DPK, DTK
130
180
127
74
45 150 75
LC1DFK DGK
c 117 122
Type of xing LC1-D12 LC1-D18 LC1-DWK
See pages 2/96 and 2/97 See pages 2/96 and 2/97
LC1DPK DTK
Type of xing LC1-D40 LC1-D50
LC1-DLK, DMK
2.3
140
200
56 157 85
LC1DLK DMK Schemes LC1-DpK
c 117 122
Type of xing LC1-D25 LC1-D32
LC1DWK
Type of xing LC1-D80
See pages 2/96 and 2/97
1/L1
A2
A1
3/L2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
5/L3
R = Pre-wired resistor connections.
Cabling (maximum permissible c.s.a.) Contactor type LC1Number of conductors Flexible cable with cable end (mm2) Solid cable without cable end (mm2) DFK 1 2.5 4 2 1.5 4 DGK 1 4 6 2 2.5 6 DLK 1 4 10 2 4 6 DMK 1 6 16 2 4 10 DPK, DTK 1 2 16 6 25 16 DWK 1 50 50 2 25 35
127
84
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Model d contactors Control circuit: a.c.
LC1-D09D18 (3-pole)
44
Minimum electrical clearance
LC1-D25D38 (3-pole) LC1-DT20DT40 (4-pole) Minimum electrical clearance
44 LA4 b1
LA4 b1
10 c1 c2 c3
LC1-
12,5 (LAD-8)
45
12,5 (LAD-8) (1)
10 c1 c2 c3
D099 D129 80 95.5 111.5 (1) 120.5 (1) 127.5 (1) 84 86 117 129 137 141
12,5 (LAD-8)
45
12,5 (LAD-8) (1)
2.3
b without add-on blocks b1 with LAD-4BB with LA4-Dp2 with LA4-DF, DT with LA4-DW, DL c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD-N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6-DK10, LAD-6K10 c3 with LAD-T, R, S with LAD-T, R, S and sealing cover (1) Including LAD-4BB LC1-D40D65 (3-pole) LC1-D65004, D40008 and D65008 (4-pole) Minimum electrical clearance
D09 D18 77 94 110 (1) 119 (1) 126 (1) 84 86 117 129 137 141
32 44 LA4
D093 D123 99 107 123 (1) 132 (1) 139 (1) 84 86 117 129 137 141
D25 D38 85 98 114 (1) 123 (1) 130 (1) 90 92 123 135 143 147
D183 D323 99 107 123 (1) 132 (1) 139 (1) 90 92 123 135 143 147
DT20 & DT25 85 98 114 129 190 97 99 123 135 143 147
DT203 & DT253 99 97 99 123 135 143 147

32
DT32 & DT40 91 105 107 131 143 151 155

44 LA4
DT323 & DT403 105 105 107 131 143 151 155
LC1-D80 and D95 (3-pole) LC1-D80004 and D80008 (4-pole) Minimum electrical clearance
b1
127
12 c1 c2 c3
12,5 (LAD-8)
12,5 (LAD-8)
12 c1 c2 c3
127
12,5 (LAD-8)
12,5 (LAD-8)
LC1a b1 with LA4-Dp2 with LA4-DB3 with LA4-DF, DT with LA4-DM, DW, DL c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD-N (1 contact) with LAD-N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6-DK c3 with LAD-T, R, S with LAD-T, R, S and sealing cover LC1-D115 and D150 (3-pole) LC1-D115004 (4-pole) LC1a b1 with LA4-DA2 with LA4-DF, DT with LA4-DM, DL with LA4-DW c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD-N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6-DK20 c3 with LAD-T, R, S with LAD-T, R, S and sealing cover
D40D65 75 135 142 150 114 119 139 147 159 167 171
D40008 85 135 142 150 125 139 147 159 167 171
D80 D65004 85 135 135 142 150 125 130 150 158 170 178 182
D95 D65008 85 135 142 150 125 130 150 158 170 178 182
D80004 96 135 142 150 125 150 158 170 178 182
D80008
96 135 142 150 140 150 158 170 178 182
Minimum electrical clearance

D115 D150 120 174 185 188 188 132 136 150 155 168 172 D115004 D115006 D150006 D1150046
LAD-8
LA4
150 174 185 188 188 132 150 155 168 172
120 174 185 188 188 115 150 155 168 172
120 174 185 188 115 150 155 168 172
155 174 185 188 188 115 150 155 168 172
10 158 b1 a
c c1 c2 c3
b1
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Model d contactors Control circuit: d.c. or low consumption
LC1-D09D18 (3-pole) Minimum electrical clearance
LC1-D25D38 (3-pole) Minimum electrical clearance
10 c1 c2 c3
45
10 c1 c2 c3
45
2
D099D129 80 93 95 126 138 146 150 D25D38 85 99 101 132 144 152 156 D183D323 99 99 101 132 144 152 156
LC1b c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD-N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6-DK10 c3 with LAD-T, R, S with LAD-T, R, S and sealing cover LC1-DT20 to DT40 (4-pole) Minimum electrical clearance
D09D18 77 93 95 126 138 146 150
D093D123 99 93 95 126 138 146 150
2.3
10 c1 c2 c3
LC1b c c1 c2 c3
45
with cover with LAD-N or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6-DK10 with LAD-T, R, S with LAD-T, R, S and sealing cover
DT20 & DT25 D098 & D128 85 101 123 135 143 147
DT203 & DT253 D0983 & D1283 99 101 123 135 143 147
DT32 & DT40 D188D258 91 109 131 143 151 155
DT323 & DT403 D1883 & D2583 105 109 131 143 151 155
LC1-D40D65 (3-pole) LP1-D65004, LP1-D40008D65008 (4-pole) Minimum electrical clearance
LC1-D80 and D95 (3-pole) LP1-D80004, LP1-D80008 (4-pole) Minimum electrical clearance
12 c1 c2 c3
127
85
12 c1 c2 c3
LC1D40D65 171 176 196 202 213 221 225 LP1-D65004 171 196 202 213 221 225
127
96
without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD-N (1 contact) with LAD-N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6-DK10 c3 with LAD-T, R, S with LAD-T, R, S and sealing cover LC1-D115004: see page 2/94.
LP1-D40008 & D65008 182 196 202 213 221 225
LC1D80 & D95 181 186 204 210 221 229 233
LP1D80004 181 204 210 221 229 233
LP1D80008 196 204 210 221 229 233
Mounting
TeSys contactors
Model d contactors
On mounting rail AM1-DP200, DR200 or AM1-DE200 (width 35 mm) LC1-D09D38, DT20DT40
On mounting rail AM1-DL200 or DL201 (width 75 mm) On mounting rail AM1-EDppp or AM1-DE200 (width 35 mm) LC1-D40 to D95, LP1-D40 to D80
=
=
c c
LC1b c (AM1-DP200 or DR200) (1) c (AM1-DE200) (1) d.c. control circuit
D09D18 D25D38 DT20 & DT25 77 85 85 88 94 94 96 102 102
DT32 & DT40 100 109 117
a.c. control circuit LC1c (AM1-DL200) (1) c (AM1-DL201) (1) c (AM1-EDppp or DE200) (1) d.c. control circuit LC1c (AM1-DL200) (1) c (AM1-DL201) (1) LP1c (AM1-DL200) c (AM1-DL201)
127
D40D65 136 126 126
D80 & D95 147 137 137
2.3
b c (AM1-DP200 or DR200) (1) c (AM1-DE200) (1)
77 97 105
85 103 110
94 103 111
109 118 1236
D40D65 193 183 D40 188 178 D65 188 178
D80 & D95 203 203 D80 198 198
(1) with safety cover On 2 mounting rails DZ5-MB at 120 mm centres LC1-D115, D150
=
(1) with safety cover
100
158
a.c. or d.c. control circuit LC1c (AM1-DP200 or DR200) c (AM1-DE200 or EDppp)
D115 & D150 134.5 142.5
D1156 & D1506 117.5 125.5
On 2 mounting rails DZ5-MB at 120 mm centres LC1-D40D95, LP1-D40D80 DZ5-ME5
120
15
40
a.c. control circuit LC1c with cover d.c. control circuit LC1c with cover LP1c
D40D65 119 D40D65 176 D40 & D65 171
D80 & D95 130 D80 & D95 186 D80 181
110
Mounting
TeSys contactors
Model d contactors
LC1-D09 to D38 and LC1-DT20DT40 On 2 mounting rails DZ5-MB
DZ5-ME8
Control circuit: LC1c with cover G H H1 4-pole contactors LC1c G H H1
a.c. D09D18 86 35 60 70 DT20 & DT25 92 35 60 70
D25D38 92 35 60 70 DT32 & DT40 100 35 60 70
d.c. D09D18 95 35 70 70 DT20 & DT25 101 35 70 70
D25D38 101 35 70 70 DT32 & DT40 109 35 70 70
H1
15
LC1-D09D38 and LC1-DT20DT40 On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA, PB, PC
LC1-D40D95, LP1-D40D80 On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA, PB, PC
110
AF1-EA4
2.3
c 40 AF1-EA6
Control circuit: LC1c with cover G H 4-pole contactors LC1c with cover G H LC1-D09D38 Panel mounted
a.c. D09D18 86 35 60/70 DT20 & DT25 80 35 60
D25D38 92 35 60/70 DT32 & DT40 93 35 60
d.c. D09D18 95 35 70 DT20 & DT25 118 35 60
D25D38 101 35 70 DT32 & DT40 132 35 60 Control circuit: LC1c with cover LP1c without cover a.c. D40D65 119
D80 & D95 130
d.c. D40D65 176 D40 & D65 171
D80 & D95 186 D80 181
LC1-D40D95, LP1-D40 to D80 Panel mounted

= =
35
35
=
c
100/110
=
40
60/70
50
=
=
2xM4
2xM4 2x4,5
3x6,5
Control circuit: LC1c with cover 4-pole contactors LC1c with cover LC1-D115, D150 Panel mounted
a.c. D09D18 86 DT20 & DT25 90
D25D38 92 DT32 & DT40 98
d.c. D09D18 95 DT20 & DT25 90
D25D38 101 DT32 & DT40 98
Control circuit: LC1c with cover LP1c without cover
a.c. D40D65 119
D80 & D95 130
d.c. D4D65 176 D40 & D65 171
D80 & D95 186 D80 181
130 158
LC1c G (3-pole) G (4-pole)
D115 132 96/110 130/144
D1156 115 96/110 130/144
D150 132 96/110
D1506 115 96/110

2/97
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Model d contactors
3-pole contactors (References: pages 2/74 to 2/77) LC1-D09 to D150

3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 13/NO 14 21/NC 22
A2
A1
T1/2
4-pole contactors (References: pages 2/76 and 2/77) LC1 and LP1LC1 and LP1D12004 to D80004 D12008 to D25008 LC1-D115004
3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 7/L4 R1 R3
T2/4
T3/6
LC1 and LP1D40008 to D80008
R1
A1
A1
A2
A2
T4/8
R4
A2
A1
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
R2
R2
2.3
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 2/85) 1 N/O LAD-N10 (1) 1 N/C LAD-N01 (1)
41/NC (92) 43 NO 43/NO
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-N11

53/NO 61/NC
R4
R3
2 N/O LAD-N20
53/NO 63/NO 63/NO 64 73/NO 74 73/NO 74 32 31/NC
(94)
42 (91)
62
44 (93)
2 N/C LAD-N02
51/NC 61/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD-N22

53/NO 61/NC 83/NO 71/NC
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD-N13

53/NO 81/NC 61/NC 71/NC
54
4 N/O LAD-N40
53/NO 83/NO 44 43/NO 84 83/NO 84
52
54
62
72
82
62
54 53/NO 54 13/NO 14
54 53/NO 63/NO 54
62
54
72
4 N/C LAD-N04
51/NC 71/NC 61/NC 81/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LAD-C22

53/NO 87/NO 61/NC 75/NC
84
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-N31

61/NC 22 21/NC 62
54
62
76
52
72
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 2/85) 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-N11G 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-N11P 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD-N22G
43/NO 13/NO 31/NC 31/NC 21/NC 41/NC
62
82
88
2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD-N22P
42
(1) Items in brackets are for blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.
32
44
14
22
32
64
64
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Model d contactors
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 2/85) 2 N/O (24-50 V) 2 N/C (24-50 V) 2 N/O (5-24 V) LA1-DX20 LA1-DX02 LA1-DY20
51/NC
53/NO 63/NO
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) 2 N/O standard LA1-DZ40

53/NO 83/NO 63/NO 73/NO
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard LA1-DZ31

53/NO 73/NO 74 61/NC 83/NO 84
61/NC
53/NO
63/NO
64
74
52
62
54
54
64
54
64
84
54
62
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Time-delay auxiliary contacts (References: page 2/86) On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-T LAD-R
67/NO 57/NO 55/NC 65/NC
On-delay N/C with 1 N/O break before make LAD-S

67/NO 68 55/NC 56
56
68
58
Mechanical latch blocks (References: page 2/86) LA6-DK10 and LA6-DK20

A1 E1
66
2.3
A2
Side mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 2/85) 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-8N11 (1) 2 N/O LAD-8N20 (1)
153/NO 161/NC (172) 153/NO (184) 163/NO (174) (184)
E2
2 N/C LAD-8N02 (1)

151/NC (182) 152 (181) 161/NC (172) 162 (171)
154 (183)
162 (171)
154 (183)
(1) Items in brackets are for blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor. Electronic serial timer modules Off-delay LA4-DRpU On-delay LA4-DTpU
B2
A2
164 (173)
Auto-Man-Stop modules LA4-DMp

A1
A1
A2
A1
Auto /Man I/O
A1
B1
(1)
A1
A1
A2
A2
(1) PLC Interface modules Relay interface LA4-DFp

E2 E1 +
LA4-DFBQ
E2 E2 E1 E1+ +
Relay interface with override switch LA4-DLp

E2 E1 +
A2
A2
Solid state LA4-DWBp

E2 E1 + A2 A1
A1
A2
A1 A1
A2 A2
A1
K K
(Reference: page 2/89)
A2
2/99
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Model d reversing contactors
LC2-D09 to D38 2 x LC1-D09 to D38

e1 = 2xM4
LC2-DT20 to DT40 2 x LC1-DT20 to DT40

= =
G 80 80
2xM4
60/70
e2
e2
G a
60/70 =
2.3
LC2- or 2 x LC1a b c (1) D09 to D18 a 90 77 86 D093 to D183 a 90 99 86 D09 to D18 c 90 77 95 D093 to D183 c 90 99 95 D12004 74 80 D25 to D38 a 90 85 92 D253 to D383 a 90 99 92 D25 to D32 c 90 85 101 D253 to D383 c 90 99 101 D25004 84 93 e1 and e2: including cabling. (1) With safety cover, without add-on block. LC2-D40 to D65 2 x LC1-D40 to D65 6x6,5
e1 = G1
e1 4 4 9 9
e2 1.5 1.5 6 5 5 7
G 80 80 80 80 95 80 80 80 80 111
LC2- or 2 x LC1- a DT20 and DT25 90 DT32DT40 90 c, e: including cabling. 2 x LP1-D40 and D65
b 85 91
c 90 98
= 8
e1
6x6,5 G1
= 8
100/110
13
e2
e2
40
G a
40 =
40
G a
40
LC2- or 2 x LC1a D40 to D65 165 D40004 182 D65004 182 D80 and D95 182 D80004 207 c, e1 and e2: including cabling. LC2-D115 and D150 2 x LC1-D115 and D150
e1
b 127 127 127 127 127
c 142 133 133 158 158
e1 5 13
e2 11 11 20
G 50 57 57 57 71
G1 90 97 97 96 111
LC2- or 2 x LC1- a b D40 to D65 182 127 D80 and D95 207 127 c, e1 and e2: including cabling.
c 190 215
e1 5 13
e2 11 20
G 57 96
13
G1 97 111
158
e2
G a
LC2- or 2 x LC1D115, D150 D115004 c, e1 and e2: including cabling.
a 266 334
c 148 148
e1 56
e2 18 60
G 242/256 310/324
Schemes: page 2/101
130
100/110
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Model d reversing contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control, horizontally mounted LC2-D09D150
Reversing contactors for motor control with integral electrical interlocking (LAD-9R1V)
L1 L2 L3
L1
L2
L3
13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
21/NC
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
A1
A1
A1
21/NC
A1
A2
A2
A2
22
14
14
22
22
14
Changeover contactor pairs, horizontally mounted LC2-DT20DT40

1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 1N 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 2N
A1
A1
14
22
A2
A2
L1
L2
L3
Electrical interlocking of reversing contactors tted with: mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts LA9-Dppp02
A2
2.3
mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts LA9-Dppp78, LAD-9R1
A1
A2
A1
A2
02
01
02
KM2 01
KM1
01 KM1 02
A1 A1
KM2
A1 A1 KM2 A2 A2
02
01
KM1
KM2 A2 A2
KM1
A2
Low speed - High speed cabling kit

L1 L2 L3
A2
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
A1
21/NC
A2
14
22
LAD- LS/HS
R1 1 R3 A1 3
A2
14
R2
Low speed
R4
High speed
22
A2
A1
References
TeSys contactors
a.c. coils for 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1-D
Control circuit voltage Uc V
Average resistance at 20 C 10 %
Inductance of closed circuit H
Reference (1)
Weight kg
For 3-pole contactors LC1-D09...D38 and LC1-DT20DT40

Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos = 0.75) 70 VA, - sealed (cos = 0.3) 50 Hz: 7 VA, 60 Hz: 7.5 VA. Operating range ( 60 C): 50 Hz: 0.81.1 Uc, 60 Hz: 0.851.1 Uc.
50/60 Hz
810391
12 21 (2) 24
LXD-1pp
6.3 5.6 6.19 12.3 19.15 25 130 159 192.5 417 539 595 645 781 1580 1810 1938 2242 2300 2499 3432 3600
0.26 0.24 0.26 0.48 0.77 1 5.5 6.7 7.5 16 22 21 25 30 60 64 74 79 85 119 135
LXD-1J7 LXD-1Z7 LXD-1B7 LXD-1C7 LXD-1CC7 LXD-1D7 LXD-1E7 LXD-1EE7 LXD-1K7 LXD-1F7 LXD-1FE7 LXD-1G7 LXD-1FC7 LXD-1L7 LXD-1LE7 LXD-1M7 LXD-1P7 LXD-1U7 LXD-1W7 LXD-1Q7 LXD-1V7 LXD-1N7 LXD-1R7 LXD-1T7 LXD-1S7 LXD-1SC7 LXD-1X7
0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
32 36
2.3
42 48 60 100 110 115 120 127 200 208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 480 500 575 600
690 5600 190 LXD-1Y7 (1) The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code. (2) Voltage for special coils tted in contactors with serial timer modules, with 24 V supply.
2/102
TeSys contactors
InducReference (1) tance of closed circuit H
Reference (1)
Weight
kg
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1-D40, D50, D65, D80, D95

Specifications
810394
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos = 0.75) 50 Hz: 200 VA, 60 Hz: 220 VA, - sealed (cos = 0.3) 50 Hz: 20 VA, 60 Hz: 22 VA. Operating range ( 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc.
50 Hz 60 Hz 1.05 4.2 22 28 86 98 120 157 300 392 480 675 775 0.06 0.23 1.2 1.5 4.3 4.8 5.7 8 14 19 23 33 36 LX1-D6B6 LX1-D6E6 LX1-D6F6 LX1-D6G6 LX1-D6L6 LX1-D6M6 LX1-D6U6 LX1-D6W6 LX1-D6Q6 LX1-D6R6 LX1-D6T6 LX1-D6S6 LX1-D6X6
LX1-D6pp
24 32 42 48 110 115 120 127 208 220 220/230 230 240 256 277 380 380/400 400 415 440 480 500 575 600 660
1.4 2.6 4.4 5.5 31 31 41 127 133 152 166 381 411 463 513 668 1220
0.09 0.16 0.27 0.35 1.9 1.9 2.4 7.5 8.1 8.7 10 22 25 26 30 38 67
LX1-D6B5 LX1-D6C5 LX1-D6D5 LX1-D6E5 LX1-D6F5 LX1-D6FE5 LX1-D6G5 LX1-D6M5 LX1-D6P5 LX1-D6U5 LX1-D6W5 LX1-D6Q5 LX1-D6V5 LX1-D6N5 LX1-D6R5 LX1-D6S5 LX1-D6Y5
0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280
2.3
Specications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 245 VA at 50 Hz, - sealed (cos = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 26 VA at 50 Hz. Operating range ( 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc.
50/60 Hz
24 1.22 0.08 LX1-D6B7 0.280 42 3.5 0.25 LX1-D6D7 0.280 48 5 0.32 LX1-D6E7 0.280 110 26 1.7 LX1-D6F7 0.280 115 LX1-D6FE7 0.280 120 32 2 LX1-D6G7 0.280 220/230 (2) 102 6.7 LX1-D6M7 0.280 230 115 7.7 LX1-D6P7 0.280 230/240 (3) 131 8.3 LX1-D6U7 0.280 380/400 (4) 310 20 LX1-D6Q7 0.280 400 349 23 LX1-D6V7 0.280 415 390 24 LX1-D6N7 0.280 440 410 27 LX1-D6R7 0.280 (1) The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code. (2) For use on 230 V 50 Hz, apply a coefcient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see pages 2/64 and 2/65). This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz. (3) This coil can be used on 220/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz. (4) For use on 400 V 50 Hz, apply a coefcient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see pages 2/64 and 2/65).
2/103
TeSys contactors
Weight
kg
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1-D115

810395
Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos = 0.8) - 50 or 60 Hz: 300 VA, - sealed (cos = 0.3) - 50 or 60 Hz: 22 VA. Operating range ( 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc. 50 Hz 24 32 42 48 110 115 120 127 208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 480 500
1.24 2.14 3.91 4.51 26.53 26.53 32.75 104.77 104.77 125.25 338.51 368.43 368.43 441.56 566.62 0.09 0.17 0.28 0.36 2.00 2.00 2.44 7.65 8.29 8.89 22.26 25.55 27.65 30.34 38.12 LX1-D8B5 LX1-D8C5 LX1-D8D5 LX1-D8E5 LX1-D8F5 LX1-D8FE5 LX1-D8FC5 LX1-D8M5 LX1-D8P5 LX1-D8U5 LX1-D8Q5 LX1-D8V5 LX1-D8N5 LX1-D8R5 LX1-D8S5 0.87 3.91 19.97 24.02 67.92 79.61 97.04 125.75 243.07 338.51 368.43 0.07 0.28 1.45 1.70 5.06 5.69 6.75 8.89 17.04 22.26 25.55
60 Hz
LX1-D8B6 LX1-D8E6 LX1-D8F6 LX1-D8G6 LX1-D8L6 LX1-D8M6 LX1-D8U6 LX1-D8W6 LX1-D8Q6 LX1-D8R6 LX1-D8T6
2.3
LX1-D8pp
0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1-D115, D150

Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush: cos = 0.9 - 280 to 350 VA, - sealed: cos = 0.9 - 2 to 18 VA. Operating range ( 55 C): 0.81.15 Uc. Coils with integral suppression device tted as standard, class B.
50/60 Hz 24 147 301 32 498 42 1061 48 4377 110 4377 115 4377 120 6586 127 10 895 208 9895 220 9895 230 9895 240 21 988 277 21 011 380 21 011 400 21 011 415 21 501 440 32 249 480 32 249 500 (1) The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
3.03 8.28 13.32 24.19 109.69 109.69 109.69 152.65 260.15 210.72 210.72 210.72 533.17 482.42 482.42 482.42 507.47 938.41 938.41 LX1-D8B7 LX1-D8C7 LX1-D8D7 LX1-D8E7 LX1-D8F7 LX1-D8FE7 LX1-D8G7 LX1-D8FC7 LX1-D8LE7 LX1-D8M7 LX1-D8P7 LX1-D8U7 LX1-D8UE7 LX1-D8Q7 LX1-D8V7 LX1-D8N7 LX1-D8R7 LX1-D8T7 LX1-D8S7
0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290
2/104
References
TeSys contactors
d.c. coils for 3 or 4-pole contactors Lp1-D
Reference (1)
Weight
kg
For 3-pole contactors LC1-D40D65 or 4-pole contactors LP1-D40D65

Specifications Average consumption: 22 W. Operating range: 0.851.1 Uc.
810398
2
0.44 1.69 3.55 6.86 10.9 14.7 35.28 45.2 142 185 572 LX4-D6JD LX4-D6BD LX4-D6CD LX4-D6ED LX4-D6ND LX4-D6SD LX4-D6FD LX4-D6GD LX4-D6MD LX4-D6UD LX4-D6RD
12 24 36 48 60 72 110 LX4-D6pp 125 220 250 440
7.1 26.8 58 109 173 234 560 717 2255 2940 9080
0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415
2.3
For 3-pole contactors LC1-D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1-D80

Specifications Average consumption: 22 W. Operating range: 0.851.1 Uc.
810398
12 24 36 48 60 72 110 LX4-D7pp 125 220 250
6.6 27 57 107 170 230 564 718 2215 2850
0.46 1.89 4 7.5 11.9 16.1 39.5 50.3 155 200
LX4-D7JD LX4-D7BD LX4-D7CD LX4-D7ED LX4-D7ND LX4-D7SD LX4-D7FD LX4-D7GD LX4-D7MD LX4-D7UD LX4-D7RD
0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680
440 9195 640 (1) The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
2/105
TeSys contactors
d.c. coils for 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1-D
Reference (1)
Weight
kg
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1-D115, D150

Specifications
810399
Consumption: inrush 270 to 365 W, sealed 2.4 to 5.1 W. Operating range: 0.71.2 Uc. Coils with integral suppression device tted as standard, class B. 24
147 3.03 LX4-D8BD
0.300
48
1061
24.19
LX4-D8ED
0.300
2.3
60
LX4-D8pD
1673 38.44 LX4-D8ND
0.300
72
2500
56.27
LX4-D8SD
0.300
110
4377
109.69
LX4-D8FD
0.300
125
6586
152.65
LX4-D8GD
0.300
220
9895
210.72
LX4-D8MD
0.300
250
18 022
345.40
LX4-D8UD
0.300
440
21 501
684.66
LX4-D8RD
0.300
(1) The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
2/106
References
TeSys contactors
Wide range d.c. coils (for specic applications) for 3 or 4-pole contactors Lp1-D
Reference (1)
Weight
kg
For 3-pole contactors LC1-D40D65 or 4-pole contactors LP1-D65

Specifications Average consumption: 22 W. Operating range: 0.751.2 Uc. Coils with "TH" treatment as standard. 12 24 36 48 LX4-D6pp 72 110 220
215 580 2120 14.2 38.3 140 LX4-D6SW LX4-D6FW LX4-D6MW 6.8 30 53 110 0.45 1.9 3.5 7.2 LX4-D6JW LX4-D6BW LX4-D6CW LX4-D6EW
810400
2
0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415
2.3
0.415 0.415 0.415
For 3-pole contactors LC1-D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1-D80

Specifications Average consumption: 23 W. Operating range: 0.75 to 1.2 Uc. Coils with "TH" treatment as standard. 12 24 36 48 72 110 220
6.2 23.5 51.9 94.2 204 483 1922 0.49 1.75 4.18 7 15.7 36 144 LX4-D7JW LX4-D7BW LX4-D7CW LX4-D7EW LX4-D7SW LX4-D7FW LX4-D7MW
0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680
(1) The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
2/107
Description, characteristics
TeSys protection components

3-pole thermal overload relays, model d
Description
Model d 3-pole thermal overload relays are designed to protect a.c. circuits and motors against overloads, phase failure, long starting times and prolonged stalling of the motor. LRD-0135 LRD-33224369, LR2-D
1 6
1 5
A
2
3 5 4 3,5 0 1
RESET
2&5 4
2 6
37
41
STOP
3 7
TEST
R A E S E T
3 4
NO 98 97 95
2.3
1 Adjustment dial Ir 2 Test button Operation of the Test button allows: - checking of control circuit wiring, - simulation of relay tripping (actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts). 3 Stop button. Actuates the N/C contact; does not affect the N/O contact. 4 Reset button 5 Trip indicator 6 Setting locked by sealing the cover. 7 Selector for manual or automatic reset. Relays LRD-01 to 35 are supplied with the selector in the manual position, protected by a cover. Deliberate action is required to move it to the automatic position.
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Operating positions without derating Shock resistance Vibration resistance Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Impulse withstand voltage Conforming to VDE 0106 Conforming to IEC 68 Storage Normal operation, without derating (IEC 947-4-1) Minimum and maximum operating temperatures (with derating) In relation to normal, vertical mounting plane Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 68-2-7 Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 68-2-6 Conforming to IEC 255-5 Conforming to IEC 801-5 C C C EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, NF C 63-650, VDE 0660 CSA, UL, Sichere Trennung, PTB except LAD-4: UL, CSA. Protection against direct nger contact IP 2X TH - 60+ 70 - 20+ 60 - 40+ 70 Any position 15 gn - 11 ms 6 gn 6 6
kV kV

Conventional thermal current Maximum consumption of operating coils of controlled contactors (Occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Short-circuit protection a.c. supply d.c. supply By gG or BS fuse. Max. rating or by GB2 circuit-breaker A V VA V W A mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm2 mm2 5 24 100 24 100 5 Min/max c.s.a. 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1.7 Min/max c.s.a. 1/2.5 1/2.5 48 200 48 100 110 400 110 50 220 600 220 45 380 600 440 25 600 600
Connection to screw clamp terminals Flexible cable without cable end 1 or 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors Flexible cable with cable end 1 or 2 conductors Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque
Connection to spring terminals Flexible cable without cable end Solid cable without cable end
1 or 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors
Schemes: page 2/119
50
46
NC 96
Characteristics

Electrical characteristics of power circuit

Relay type LRD01 to 16 LR3D01 to D16 Tripping class Rated insulation voltage (Ui) To UL 508, EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to EN 60947-4-1 V Conforming to UL, CSA Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits Setting range
Connection to screw clamp terminals Flexible cable without cable end
LR2D15pp
LRD21 to 35 LR3D21 to D35
LR2D25pp
LRDLR23322 to D35pp 33696 LR3D3322 to D33696 10 A 1000 600 6 0400 1710 4 4/35 4/35 4/35 9 20
LRD4365 to 4369
10 A 690 600 6 0400 0.113
20
10 A 690 600 6 0400 1238
20
10 A 1000
600 except LRD-4369
V kV
6 0400 80140
Of the operational current Depending on model
Hz A
1 conductor 1 conductor 1 conductor
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Min/max c.s.a. 1.5/10 1/4 1/6 1.7 1.85
1.5/10
1/6 except LRD-21: 1/4 1.5/10 except LRD-21: 1/6
4/50 4/35 4/50 9
2.3
Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque Connection to spring terminals Flexible cable without cable end Solid cable without cable end
2.5 1.5/4 1.5/4
1 conductor 1 conductor
mm2 mm2
Min/max c.s.a. 1.5/4 1.5/4
Temperature compensation Tripping threshold Sensitivity to phase failure Tripping curves Average operating time related to multiples of the current setting C Conforming to EN 60947-4-1 A Conforming to EN 60947-4-1
Time Hours 2 1 40 20 Minutes 10 4 2 1 40 20 Seconds 10 4 2 1 0,8 0,8 1 2 4 Seconds Minutes
- 20+ 60
- 30+ 60-
- 30+ 60
- 20+ 60
1.14 0.06 In Tripping current 30 % of In on one phase, the others at In

class 10 A Hours Time 2 1 40 20 10 4 2 1 40 20 10 4 2 1 0,8 0,8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20 x current setting (Ir) class 20
1 2 3
6 10 17 20 x current setting (Ir)
1 2 3
1 Balanced operation, 3-phase, from cold state. 2 Balanced operation, 2-phase, from cold state. 3 Balanced operation, 3-phase, after a long period at the set current (hot state).
Description, characteristics

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays LR9-D
Description
LR9-D electronic thermal overload relays are designed for use with contactors LC1-D115 and D150. In addition to the protection provided by model d thermal overload relays (see page 2/108) they offer the following special features: p Protection against phase imbalance. p Choice of starting class. p Protection of unbalanced circuits. p Protection of single-phase circuits. p Alarm function to avoid tripping by load shedding. LR9-D5367D5569
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2
Setting dial Ir Test button Stop button Reset button Trip indication Setting locked by sealing the cover Class 10/class 20 selector Selector for balanced load / unbalanced load
LR9-D67 and D69
1 2 5 4 3
98 NO 97 95 NC 96
Class Ir(A) 20 107 127 + 90 150 10
24 V - / 103 104
7 8 2 5 4 3
Alarm 98 NO 97 95 NC 96
Load
107
Ir(A) 127
90
150
1 6 6
2.3 Environment
Conforming to standards Product certications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device (conforming to IEC 255-8) Maximum operating altitude Operating positions without derating Shock resistance Vibration resistance Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Impulse withstand voltage
Resistance to electrostatic discharge Conforming to IEC 529 and VDE 0106
EN 60947-4-1, 255-8, 255-17, VDE 0660 UL 508 , CSA 22-2 IP 20 on front face with protective covers LA9-D11570p or D11560p "TH" C C m - 40+ 85 - 20+ 55 (1) 2000 Any position 13 gn - 11 ms 2 gn - 5 to 300 Hz kV kV kV V/m kV 6 6 8 10 2 Meets requirements
Standard version Storage Normal operation Without derating In relation to normal, vertical mounting plane Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 68-2-27 Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 68-2-6 Conforming to IEC 255-5 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-3 and NF C 46-022
Resistance to radio-frequency conducted disturbances
Resistance to fast transient currents Conforming to IEC 1000-4-4 Electromagnetic compatibility

Draft EN 50081-1 and 2, EN 50082-2
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Conventional thermal current Maximum consumption of operating coils of controlled contactors (Occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Short-circuit protection Cabling Flexible cable without cable end a.c. supply d.c. supply By gG or BS fuse or by GB2 circuit-breaker A V VA V W A 5 24 100 24 100 5 48 200 48 100 110 400 110 50 220 600 220 45 380 600 440 25 600 600
1 or 2 conductors mm2 Minimum c.s.a.: 1/maximum c.s.a.: 2.5 Tightening torque N.m 1.2 (1) For operation at 70 C, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Schemes: page 2/119
Characteristics

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays LR9-D

Relay type Tripping class Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits Setting range Power circuit connections Of the operational current Depending on model Width of terminal lug Clamping screw Tightening torque
Conforming to UL 508, EN 60947-4-1
LR9-D 10 A or 20 V V kV Hz A mm N.m 1000 600 8

5060. For other frequencies, call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608 (1)
Conforming to EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to UL, CSA
60150 20 M8 18
Temperature compensation Tripping thresholds Sensitivity to phase failure To EN 60947-4-1 Alarm Tripping C A A - 20+ 70 1.05 0.06 In 1.12 0.06 In Tripping in 4 s 20 % in the event of phase failure
2.3
Conforming to EN 60947-4-1
Alarm circuit characteristics

Rated supply voltage Supply voltage limits Current consumption Switching capacity Protection Voltage drop Cabling Tightening torque Tripping curve LR9-D Average operating time related to multiples of the current setting No load Short-circuit and overload Closed state Flexible cable without cable end
Tripping time in seconds
1000
d.c. supply
V V mA mA V mm2 N.m
24 1732 5 0150 Self-protected 2.5 0.51.5 0.45
100
1 2
10
1 0
1 1,12 2
1 Cold state curve 2 Hot state curve

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
x the current setting (Ir)
(1) For use of these relays with soft start units or variable speed controllers, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Schemes: page 2/119

2/111
References

Differential thermal overload relays for use with fuses. Class 10 A tripping
p Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset, p with relay trip indicator, p for a.c. or d.c. Relay Fuses to be used with selected relay setting range aM gG BS88 A A A A
For use with contactor LC1-
Reference
Weight kg
2
LRD-08
LRD-21
2.3
LRD-33pp
Class 10 A (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals 0.100.16 0.25 2 D09D38 0.160.25 0.5 2 D09D38 0.250.40 1 2 D09D38 0.400.63 1 2 D09D38 0.631 2 4 D09D38 11.7 2 4 6 D09D38 1.62.5 4 6 10 D09D38 2.54 6 10 16 D09D38 46 8 16 16 D09D38 5.58 12 20 20 D09D38 710 12 20 20 D09D38 913 16 25 25 D12D38 1218 20 35 32 D18D38 1624 25 50 50 D25D38 2332 40 63 63 D25D38 3038 50 80 80 D32 and D38 1725 25 50 50 D40D95 2332 40 63 63 D40D95 3040 40 100 80 D40D95 3750 63 100 100 D40D95 4865 63 100 100 D50D95 5570 80 125 125 D50D95 6380 80 125 125 D65 and D95 80104 100 160 160 D80 and D95 80104 125 200 160 D115 and D150 95120 125 200 200 D115 and D150 110140 160 250 200 D150 80104 100 160 160 (2) 95120 125 200 200 (2) 110140 160 250 200 (2)
LRD-01 LRD-02 LRD-03 LRD-04 LRD-05 LRD-06 LRD-07 LRD-08 LRD-10 LRD-12 LRD-14 LRD-16 LRD-21 LRD-22 LRD-32 LRD-35 LRD-3322 LRD-3353 LRD-3355 LRD-3357 LRD-3359 LRD-3361 LRD-3363 LRD-3365 LRD-4365 LRD-4367 LRD-4369 LRD-33656 LRD-33676 LRD-33696
0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.900 0.900 0.900 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
LRD-083
Class 10 A (1) with spring terminal connections (for direct mounting on the contactor only) LRD-013 0.100.16 0.25 2 D09D38 LRD-023 0.160.25 0.5 2 D09D38 LRD-033 0.250.40 1 2 D09D38 LRD-043 0.400.63 1 2 D09D38 LRD-053 0.631 2 4 D09D38 LRD-063 11.6 2 4 6 D09D38 LRD-073 1.62.5 4 6 10 D09D38 LRD-083 2.54 6 10 16 D09D38 LRD-103 46 8 16 16 D09D38 LRD-123 5.58 12 20 20 D09D38 LRD-143 710 12 20 20 D09D38 LRD-163 913 16 25 25 D12D38 LRD-213 1218 20 35 32 D18D38 LRD-223 1624 25 50 50 D25D38
Class 10 A (1) with connection by lug-clamps Select the appropriate overload relay with screw clamp terminals from the table above and add 6 to the end of the reference. Example: LRD-01 becomes LRD-016.
Thermal overload relays for use with unbalanced loads

Class 10 A (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals Change the prefix in the references above from LRD (except LRD-4ppp) to LR3-D. Example: LRD-01 becomes LR3-D01.
Thermal overload relays for use on 1000 V supplies

Class 10 A (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals For relays LRD-01 to LRD-35 only, for an operating voltage of 1000 V, and only for independent mounting, the reference becomes LRD-33ppA66. Example: LRD-12 becomes LRD-3312A66. Order an LA7-D3064 terminal block separately, see page 2/115. (1) Standard IEC 947-4-1 species a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR: class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds. (2) Independent mounting.
Schemes: page 2/119
References

Differential thermal overload relays for use with fuses. Class 20 tripping
p p p p Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset, with relay trip indicator, for a.c. or d.c. LR2-D1508 to 2553: independent mounting - either by ordering a terminal block LA7-D1064 or LA7-D2064, see page 2/115, - or by ordering the the relay pre-assembled; in this case add the sufx LA7 to the reference. Example: LR2-D1508 becomes LR2-D1508LA7. Reference Relay Fuses to be used For use setting with the selected relay with contactor range aM gG BS88 LC1 A A A A Class 20 (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1725 23...28 25...32 2332 1725 2332 3040 3750 4865 5570 6380 6 8 12 16 16 25 32 40 40 40 32 40 50 63 80 100 100 10 16 20 20 25 35 50 63 63 63 50 63 100 100 125 125 160 16 16 20 25 25 40 50 63 63 63 50 63 80 100 100 125 125 D09D32 D09D32 D09D32 D09D32 D12D32 D18D32 D25 and D32 D25 and D32 D25 and D32 D25 and D32 D40D95 D40D95 D40D95 D50D95 D50D95 D65D95 D80 and D95
LR-D1508 LR-D1510 LR-D1512 LR-D1514 LR-D1516 LR-D1521 LR-D1522 LR-D1530 LR-D1532 LR2-D2553 LR2-D3522 LR2-D3553 LR2-D3555 LR2-D3557 LR2-D3559 LR2-D3561 LR2-D3563
Weight kg
LR-D15pp
0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.220 0.230 0.345 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535
2.3
Electronic differential thermal overload relays for use with fuses. Class 10 A or 20
p Compensated relays, p with relay trip indicator, p for a.c. or d.c., p for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (2). Relay Fuses to be used For direct mounting setting with selected relay beneath contactor range aM gG LC1 A A A Class 10 or 10A (1) with connection using bars or connectors 60100 90150 100 160 160 250 D115 and D150 D115 and D150
LR9-D5367 LR9-D5369
LR2-D25pp
Reference
Weight kg
0.885 0.885
Class 20 (1) with connection using bars or connectors 60100 90150 125 200 160 250 D115 and D150 D115 and D150
LR9-D5567 LR9-D5569
0.885 0.885
Electronic thermal overload relays for use with balanced or unbalanced loads
LR2-D35pp p Compensated relays, p with separate outputs for alarm and tripping. Relay Fuses to be used For direct mounting setting with the selected relay beneath contactor range aM gG LC1 A A A Class 10 A or 20 (1) selectable with connection using bars or connectors
LR9-D67 0.900 60100 100 160 D115 and D150 LR9-D69 0.900 90150 160 250 D115 and D150 (1) Standard IEC 947-4-1 species a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds, class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds, class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds. (2) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 2/90).
Reference
Weight kg
Other versions
Thermal overload relays for resistive circuits in category AC-1. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
2.3
2/114
References

Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description Pre-wiring kit allowing direct connection of the N/C contact of relay LRD-0135 or LR3-D01D35 to the contactor Terminal blocks (1) for clip-on mounting on 35 mm rail (AM1-DP200) or screw xing; for xing centres, see pages 2/116 to 2/118 Terminal block adapter for mounting a relay beneath an LC1-D115 or D150 contactor Mounting plates (3) for screw xing on 110 mm centres For use on LC1-D09D18 LC1-D25D38 LRD - class 20 LRD-0135 and LR3-D01D35 LR2-D15pp LR2-D25pp LRD-3ppp, LR3-D3ppp, LR2-D35pp LRD-3ppp, LR3-D3ppp, LRD-35pp
Sold in lots of 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 Unit reference LAD-7C1 LAD-7C2 LAD-7B105 LAD-7B106 LA7-D1064 LA7-D2064 LA7-D3064 (2) LA7-D3058
Weight kg 0.002 0.003 0.100 0.100 0.120 0.370 0.080
LRD-0135, LR3-D01D35. LR2-D15pp LR2-D25pp LRD-3ppp, LR3-D3ppp LR2-D35pp All relays except LRD-0135 and LR3-D01D35 (4) All relays except LRD-0135. LR3-D01D35 and LR9-D LRD-0135 and LR3-D01D35 All relays except LRD-0135 and LR3-D01D35 LR9-D
10 10 1 100 1 10 1 1 2
DX1-AP25 DX1-AP26 LA7-D902 LA7-D903 LA9-D91 LA7-D901 LAD-703p (6) LA7-D03p(6) LA9-F103
0.065 0.082 0.130 0.001 0.001 0.005 0.090 0.090 0.560
2.3
LAD-7Cp
Marker holder snap in Bag of 400 labels (blank, self-adhesive, 7 x 16 mm) Stop button locking device Remote stop or electrical reset device (5) Remote tripping or electrical reset device (5) Block of insulated terminals
Remote control
Reset function By exible cable (length = 0.5 m) Stop and/or Reset functions The terminal protection shroud must be removed and the following 3 products must be ordered separately. Adapter for door interlock mechanism All relays except LRD-0135 and LR3-D01D35
1 LA7-D1020
LRD-0135 and LR3-D01D35 All relays except LRD-0135 and LR3-D01D35
1 1
LAD-7305 LA7-D305
0.075 0.075
LAD-7B106
0.005
1 XB5-AL84101 0.027 Operating head Stop All relays 1 XB5-AA86102 0.027 for spring return pushbutton Reset All relays (1) Terminal blocks are supplied with terminals protected against direct nger contact and screws in the open, readyto-tighten position. (2) To order a terminal block for connection by lugs, the reference becomes LA7-D30646. (3) Do not forget to order the terminal block corresponding to the type of relay. (4) For LRD-0135, see page 2/91. (5) The time for which the coil of remote tripping or electrical resetting device LA7-D03 or LAD-703 can remain energised depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest time; 10 s pulse duration with 90 s rest time; maximum pulse duration of 20 s with a rest time of 300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms. (6) Reference to be completed by adding the code indicating control circuit voltage. Control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 12 24 48 96 110 220/230 380/400 415/440 50/60 Hz B E F M Q N Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA c J B E DD F M Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W.
Illustrations: page 2/114
Dimensions

Model d thermal overload relays
LRD-01...35 Direct mounting beneath contactors with screw clamp connections

c
LRD-013...353 Direct mounting beneath contactors with spring terminal connections

c
2
70
45
66
45
LC1b c
D09...D18 D25...D38 123 137 see pages 2/94 and 2/95
LC1b c
D093...D383 168 see pages 2/94 and 2/95
2.3
LRD-3ppp Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1-D40 to D95 and LP1-D40 to D80 AM1d DL201 7 DL200 17 b Control circuit: a.c. LC1-D40 LC1-D50 LC1-D65 LC1-D80 LC1-D95
21 d 70 30 g
c 119 119 119 124 124 176 176 176 179.4
e 72.4 72.4 72.4 76.9 76.9 72.4 72.4 72.4 76.9
g (3P) 4.5 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 9.5
g (4P) 13 13 22 13 13 22
111 111 111 115.5 115.5 111 111 111 115.5
54
109 4 c
Control circuit: d.c. LC1-D40, LP1-D40 LC1-D50 LC1-D65, LP1-D65 LC1-D80, D95, LP1-D80
LRD-4ppp Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1-D115 and D150
LR9-D Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1-D115 and D150
267
255
150
132
189
174
136
120
132
120
AM1-DL200 and DR200 AM1-DE200 and EDppp 2.5 10.5
AM1-DP200 and DR200 AM1-DE200 and EDppp 2.5 10.5
Schemes: page 2/119
Mounting

LRD-01...35 Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1-DP200 or DE200
Independent mounting on 110 mm centres

46 LAD-7B106 = =
=
LAD-7B106
35
10 15
37,5
80
45
50
85
125
90
DX1-AP25
2x6,5
Remote tripping or electrical reset

LAD-703 (1)
110
2.3
32
(1) Can only be mounted on RH side of relay LRD-01...35 LR2-D15pp Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1-DP200 or DE200
45 LA7-D1064 = 35 =
Remote tripping or electrical reset
LA7-D03(1)
43,5
79
50/65
96 2x4,5 8 17
34
98
AM1-DP200 2
AM1-DE200 9.5
LR2-D25pp Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1-DP200 or DE200

55 LA7-D2064 = 40 =
(1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LR2-D15pp Remote tripping or electrical reset
LA7-D03(1)
43,5
50/60
90
98
2x4,5
13 22
96
29
AM1-DP200 2
AM1-DE200 9.5
(1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LR2-D25pp
Mounting (continued)

LRD-3ppp and LR2-D35pp Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on mounting rail AM1-DP200 or DE200
75 LA7-D3064 = 50 =
LRD-3ppp, LR2-D35pp and LR9-D Remote tripping or electrical reset
LA7-D03 (1)
51,5
75/87
100
2
121 d
119 2x4,5 32 23,5
21
AM1-DP200 2
AM1-DE200 9.5
2.3
LR2-D and LRD-3ppp Adapter for door interlock mechanism LA7-D1020

c 10
(1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relays LRD-3ppp, LR2-D35pp or LR9-D
Stop
Reset
LA7-D1020
c: adjustable from 17 to 120 mm
LRD, LR2-D and LR9-D Reset by flexible cable LA7-D305 and LAD-7305 Mounting with cable straight
Mounting with cable bent
c e M10x1
c: up to 550 mm e: up to 20 mm
e: up to 20 mm
Schemes

LRD, LR2-D and LR3-D
Pre-cabling kit LAD-7C1, LAD-7C2

A1
95 97
Reset
1 3 5
Auto Man. _ KM
Test Stop
96
98
A2
95 96 _ LRD
LR9-D5ppp
L1 L2 3 L3 5 _ KM1 2 4 6
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
(3)
(4) (2)
Test Stop Reset man.
(3)
2.3
95 97 96
_A
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
M 3
_M A1
_ KM 14
_ KM N A2
13
(1)
98
(1) Tripped (2) Overload (3) Setting current (4) Specialised circuit
LR9-D67 and LR9-D69

L1 L2 L3
0V
_ KM1
(5)
5/L3
103
1/L1
3/L2
(3)
(4) (5)
104
(3)
(2)
95 97
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
96
A
_ KM
M 3
_M
A1
14
13
98
_ KM
(1)
A2
(1) Tripped (2) Overload (3) Setting current (4) Specialised circuit (5) Alarm
2/119
Presentation, description

Electronic over current relays
Presentation
LR97 D and LT47 electronic over current relays have been developed to satisfy machine protection requirements. These relays have definite time characteristics: current threshold and time based function. They are particularly recommended for providing mechanical protection on machines with high resistive torque, high inertia and with strong probability of jamming under steady state conditions. They can be used for motor protection in the case of long starting times or frequent starting. The LR97 D relay also incorporates two fixed time protection functions, one of 0.5 seconds against locked rotor and one of 3 seconds against phase failure. LR97 D and LT47 can be used to provide mechanical shock protection. In this case, setting the O-Time potentiometer to minimum will ensure tripping in 0.3 seconds.
109487
Applications
LR97 D and LT47 relays are particularly suitable for the following machines: b Monitoring function for excessively long starting time on machines with a risk of difcult starting: v Machines with high resistive torque, high inertia machines. b Monitoring of machines during steady state operation: overtorque detection function v Machines with strong risk of jamming, machines with torque build-up over time, v Mechanical failure monitoring, v Faster detection of malfunctioning on machines where the motor is oversized in relation to its thermal protection I2t. b Motor protection for specic applications: v Machines with long starting times, v Machines with high on-load factor: more than 30 to 50 starts/hour, v Machine with uctuating load from a steady state, where the thermal image of a thermal overload relay (thermal memory) is unsuitable in relation to actual overheating of the motor. Examples of machines: v Conveyors, crushers and mixers, v Fans, pumps and compressors, v Centrifuges and spin-dryers, v Presses, shearing machines, saws, broaching machines, sanders and lifting hoists.
LR97 Dppppp
2.3
109502
Operation
Because of their two separate time settings, LR97 D and LT47 relays can be combined with the motor-starter function: D-Time: starting time, O-Time: trip time during steady state. The D-Time function is only available during the motor starting phase. During this phase the overload detection function is inhibited in order to allow starting. Under steady state conditions, when the motor current is greater than the setting current due to an overload or single-phasing, the red LED lights up and the internal relay switches its contact after a time preset by the O-Time potentiometer. The red LED stays on, indicating that the relay has tripped. The relays are simple to set, in 5 easy steps: - Adjust the 3 potentiometers to maximum (Load, D-Time and O-Time), - Adjust the D-Time potentiometer to the value corresponding to the motor starting time. - When the motor reaches steady state, adjust the Load potentiometer (turn the potentiometer counter-clockwise until the red LED starts to flicker). - Slowly turn the Load potentiometer clockwise until the LED goes out. - Set the required tripping time, using the O-Time potentiometer.
LT47 ppp
Description
Description
LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp
Status signalling
LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp To assist fast diagnostics, two LEDs (one green and one red) allow signalling of the operating status:
LED signal Green LED On Off Red LED LED signal Green LED On Off Red LED
RESET
3 4 9 1 8 2
3 4 2
TEST RESET
Status Voltage Starting Steady state On On Off Off L1 Off L2 Off
Condition Voltage Starting
TEST/STOP
A1
A2
98
95
96
2T1
4T2
6T3
Off
Steady state Overload
On On Off
Off
5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 RESET button TEST/STOP button Ready/Run Indicator Relay tripped indicator Current setting Adjustment of starting time
10
Overload OverTrip current Rotor locked Phase failure
7 Adjustment of tripping time 8 Manual/Auto adjustment 9 Single-phase/3-phase adjustment 10 Retractable fixing lugs
On
Trip
On
L3 Off
Curves: pages 2/121 and 2/122
Dimensions, mounting: page 2/125
Schemes: page 2/125
2/120
Curves

LR97D
Overload protection Protection against locked rotor and mechanical jamming under steady state conditions
U power supply A1-A2 Starting Locked rotor on starting Mechanical jamming during steady state operation Overload Brief overload
3 x I setting
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time 0,5 s O-Time O-Time Reset: Manual (1) or electric (3) Tripping due to locked rotor or mechanical jamming during 95 steady state operation Tripping on overload 95 98 Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3) 96 98 96 t
2.3
Overload protection Protection against phase failure during starting and during steady state operation
U power supply A1-A2 Starting Phase failure Missing phase Overload Brief overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time <3s Tripping due to 95 phase failure Tripping on overload 95 98 Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3) 96 98 96 <3s O-Time O-Time Reset: Manual (1) or electric (3) t
Mechanical shock protection

U power supply A1-A2 Starting Overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time O-Time set to minimum (02-03 s) Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3) t
Tripping to due mechanical shock 95
96 98
(1) By Reset button. (2) Fixed time of 120 s. Selectable by dip switch. Function not available in the event of tripping due to locked rotor/mechanical jamming (I> 3 x I setting) or phase failure. (3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.
Presentation, description: page 2/120
Schemes: page 2/125
2/121
Curves (continued), characteristics

Curves
LT47 Overload protection
U power supply A1-A2 Starting Brief overload Overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time O-Time O-Time Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3) t
Trip on overload
95 97
96 98
Mechanical shock protection

U power supply A1-A2
2.3
Starting
Overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time O-Time set to minimum (02-03 s) Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3) t
Tripping due to 95 mechanical shock 97
96 98
(1) By Reset button. (2) Only available on version with automatic reset (LT47 ppppA). Time adjustable from 1 to 120 s with the R-Time potentiometer. (3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.
Characteristics
Environment
Relay type Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection LR97 Dppppp IEC 60255-6, IEC 60947 UL, CSA (pending) IP 20 (front face) TH - 30+ 80 - 25+ 60 2000 Any position 15 gn - 11 ms 4 gn 2 6 8 (level 3) 6 (level 3) 10 (level 3) 2 Class A 10 LT47 ppppp IEC 60255-6, IEC 60947 UL, CSA (pending) IP 20 (front face) TH - 30+ 80 - 25+ 60 2000 Any position 15 gn - 11 ms 4 gn 2 6 8 (level 3) 6 (level 3) 10 (level 3) 2 Class A 10
Conforming to IEC 60529 and VDE 0106 Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068 C Ambient air temperature Storage around the device Normal operation without derating C (IEC 60947-4-1) Maximum operating altitude m Operating positions In relation to normal without derating vertical mounting plane Shock resistance Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-7 Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Conforming to IEC 60255-5 kV kV Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV Resistance to In open air electrostatic discharge kV In direct mode V/m Immunity to radiated radio-frequency disturbance kV Immunity to fast transient currents Conducted emissions Conforming to EN 55011 V Conducted HF disturbance Conforming to EN 61000-4-6
Schemes: page 2/125
2/122

Characteristics
Relay type Contact type Conventional thermal current Maximum hold consumption of controlled contactor coils (occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Short-circuit protection LR97 Dppppp 1 NO/NC 3 a 24 a 48 70 140 c 24 c 48 55 55 3 LT47 ppppp 1 N/O + 1N/C 3 a 24 a 48 70 140 c 24 c 48 55 55 3
Conforming to IEC 947
By gG, BS fuses. Maximum rating or GB2 circuit-breaker Connection by cable or lug-clamps Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors Min. without cable end Max. Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors Min. with cable end Max. External of lugs of screw Tightening torque
A V VA V W A
a 110 360 c 110 28
a 220 360 c 220 28
a 110 360 c 110 28
a 220 360 c 220 28
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm mm N.m
1 x 0.75 2 x 2.5 1 x 0.34 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 7 M3 0.61.2
1x1 2 x 2.5 1x1 2 x 2.5 7 M3.5 0.8...1.7

Relay type Setting range Tripping class Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Depending on model Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to UL, CSA A V V kV Hz mm2 mm2 mm mm N.m LR97 D015pp to LR97 D25pp 0.538 Adjustable 690 600 6 5060 1.5 10 1 4 10 M4 2 2.5 10 1 6 12 M4 2 LR97 D38pp LT47 ppppp 0.360 Adjustable 690 600 6 5060
2.3
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits Of the operating current Connection by cable or lug-clamps Flexible cable 1 conductor Min. without cable end Max. Flexible cable 1 conductor Min. with cable end Max. External of lugs of screw Tightening torque
Relay type Adjustment Current Time A s s s LR97 Dppppp "Load" potentiometer 0.530 0.2/0.310 Reset button 120 s fixed By interruption of power supply (minimum 0.1 s) On starting Steady state Inhibited After O-time during D-time After D-time < 0.5 s LT47 ppppS "Load" potentiometer 0.530 0.2/0.310 Reset button By interruption of power supply (minimum 0.1 s) On starting Steady state Inhibited After O-time during D-time Inhibited After O-time during D-time Inhibited After O-time during D-time 2 LEDs No load Under load Yes LT47 ppppA "Load" potentiometer 0.2/0.330 1120 Reset button R-time pot.: 1-120 s By interruption of power supply (minimum 0.1 s) After O-time
D-time pot. O-time pot. R-time pot.
Reset
Manual Automatic Electrical
Protection functions Overload Imax > Isetting Tripping
Locked rotor, mechanical jamming I > 3 x Isetting
Tripping
After O-time
Sensitivity to phase failure Tripping
<3s
<3s
After O-time
Status and fault signalling (see table page 2/120) TEST/STOP function Sealing
2 LEDs Test Stop No load Under load Yes
2 LEDs No load Under load Yes
Schemes: page 2/125
2/123
References

109487
LR97 D electronic over current relays

Relay setting range A 0.31.5 Usable range (1) A 0.31.3 For use with contactor Relay supply voltage Reference Weight
kg LC1 D09D38 a 220 V a 110 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 220 V a 110 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 220 V a 110 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 220 V a 110 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V LR97 D015M7 LR97 D015F7 LR97 D015B LR97 D015E LR97 D07M7 LR97 D07F7 LR97 D07B LR97 D07E LR97 D25M7 LR97 D25F7 LR97 D25B LR97 D25E LR97 D38M7 LR97 D38F7 LR97 D38B LR97 D38E 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172
Manual or automatic reset
2
LR97 Dppppp
1.27
1.26
LC1 D09D38
525
521
LC1 D09D38
2038
2034
LC1 D25D38
2.3
109502
LT47 electronic over current relays

Relay setting range A 0.56 Usable range (1) A 0.55 Relay supply voltage Reference (2) Weight
kg a 220 V a 110 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 220 V a 110 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 220 V a 110 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 220 V a 110 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 220 V a 110 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 220 V a 110 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V For use with Sold in lots of LT47 06M7S LT47 06F7S LT47 06BS LT47 06ES LT47 30M7S LT47 30F7S LT47 30BS LT47 30ES LT47 60M7S LT47 60F7S LT47 60BS LT47 60ES LT47 06M7A LT47 06F7A LT47 06BA LT47 06EA LT47 30M7A LT47 30F7A LT47 30BA LT47 30EA LT47 60M7A LT47 60F7A LT47 60BA LT47 60EA Unit reference 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0,192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 Weight
LT47 relay with manual/electric reset
330 LT47 60ppp 560
325
550
LT47 relay with automatic reset

0.56 0.55
330
325
560
550

Description kg Pre-wiring kits allowing LC1 D09D18 10 LAD 7C1 0.002 connection of the LR97 D LC1 D25D38 10 LAD 7C2 0.003 relay N/C contact directly to the contactor Terminal block for clip-on LR97 D 1 LAD 7B106 0.100 mounting on 35 mm rail (AM1 DP200) (1) To allow adjustment of the tripping sensitivity, see adjustment method (page 2/120). (2) If a pre-wiring kit is used, it is no longer possible to electrically wire signalling of tripped status.
Schemes: page 2/125
2/124
Dimensions, mounting, schemes

Dimensions
LR97 Dpppp LT47 pppp 62,2 13 10 63 51 19,5 12
51,5
4 67,5 45 77,2 56 71
50,8
70,3
2
4
Mounting
LR97 Dpppp Direct mounting beneath the contactor c LT47 pppp
20,4
2.3
67,5 LC1b c D09D18 D25D38 123 137 See pages 2/94 and 2/95
45 Note: Can be mounted on 5 rail.
Schemes
LR97 Dpppp
L1 L2 L3
LT47 pppp
L1 L2 L3 MCBB
MCBB
Stop Stop 13 13 KM1 KM1 Test/Stop Reset 14 Start Start
KM1 Test/Stop Reset 14

A1 KM1
L1
L2
LR 97D
L3
A1 A2 98 95 96
T1
T2
T3
KM1 A2
M3
a M3
LT47
A1 A2 97 98 95 96
A1 A2 98 95 96
A1
A2
2/125
Presentation
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Presentation
521288
2
2
The TeSys model U starter-controller is a D.O.L. starter (1) which performs the following functions : b protection and control of single-phase or 3-phase motors: v breaking function, v overload and short-circuit protection, v thermal overload protection, v power switching, b control of the application: v protection function alarms, v application monitoring (running time, number of faults, motor current values, ...), v logs (last 5 faults saved, together with motor parameter values). These functions can be added by selecting control units and function modules which simply clip into the power base The product can therefore be customised at the last moment. Setting-up accessories simplify or completely eliminate wiring between components.
Basic starter-controller
Consists of a power base and a control unit. Power base 1 Is independent of the control voltage and of the motor power. It incorporates the breaking function with a breaking capacity of 50 kA at 400 V, total coordination (continuity of service) and the switching function. b 2 ratings are available: 012 A and 032 A. b Non-reversing (LUB) and reversing (LU2B). Control units 2 These must be selected according to the control voltage, the power of the motor to be protected and the type of protection required. b Standard control unit (LUCA): satises the basic protection requirements for motor starters: thermal overload and short-circuit (for details see page 2/127). b Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC or LUCD): allows additional advanced functions such as alarm, fault differentiation, (for details see page 2/128). b Multifunction control unit (LUCM): suitable for the most sophisticated control and protection requirements (for details see page 2/129). The control units are interchangeable without rewiring and without using tools. They have a wide range of adjustment (0.25 - 1.0 x In) and low heat dissipation.
1 3
2.3
4
Control options
Function modules can be used to increase the functions of the starter-controller. Function modules 3 Must be used with advanced control units. 4 types are available: b thermal overload alarm (LUF W10), b fault differentiation and manual reset (LUF DH11), b fault differentiation and automatic or remote reset (LUF DA10 + LUF DA01), b indication of motor load (LUF V), which can also be used with the multifunction control unit. All information processed by these modules is available on digital contacts. Communication modules 3 The information processed is exchanged: b via a parallel bus: v parallel wiring module (LUF C00), b via a serial bus: v AS-Interface module (ASILUF C5), v Modbus module (LUL C033). They must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit and require a c 24 V control voltage. Connection to other protocols such as FIPIO, Profibus-DP and DeviceNet is possible via gateway modules (LUFP). Auxiliary contact modules (LUFN) 3 3 possible configurations 2 N/O, 1 N/O + 1 N/C or 2 N/C. Add-on contact blocks 4 Indicate the following status of power base : ready, fault and pole status.
Power options
Reverser block 5 Allows a non-reversing power base to be converted to reversing operation. The reverser block (LU2M) is mounted directly beneath the power base without modifying the width of the product (45 mm). The reverser block LU6M is mounted separately from the power base when the height available is limited. Limiter-disconnector LUA LB 6 This unit is mounted directly on the power base. It allows the breaking capacity to be increased up to 130 kA at 400 V.
Setting-up accessories
Plug-in terminal blocks 7 The control terminal blocks are of the plug-in type, so allowing wiring to be prepared away from the machine or the replacement of products without rewiring. Control circuit wiring system 8 Numerous pre-wired accessories provide simple, clip-in connections (e.g. connection of reverser control terminals, ... (1) For use with resistive and inductive loads. Control of d.c. or capacitive loads is not possible.
2/126
Presentation
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers with standard control unit
b Protection against overloads and short-circuits b Protection against phase failure and phase imbalance b Manual reset
520726
3-phase motor Class 10
2.3
Power base LUB or LU2B Standard control unit LUCA
Status
Status and commands transmitted by the bus Parallel bus Serial bus
Blanking cover LU9C 1
Auxiliary contact module LUF N
Parallel wiring module LUF C00
AS-Interface communication module ASILUF C5
Modbus communication module LUL C033
Status
Add-on contact blocks LUA1
2/127
Presentation
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers with advanced control unit
b Protection against overloads and short-circuits b Protection against phase failure and phase imbalance b Manual reset (remote or automatic with a function module)
2
520727
Single-phase motor Class 10
2.3
Power base LUB or LU2B Advanced control unit LUCB Advanced control unit LUCD Advanced control unit LUCC
Status
Fault differentiation and manual reset
Fault differentiation and automatic reset
Alarm
Indication of motor load (analogue)
b Fault differentiation and manual, remote or automatic reset b Alarm b Indication of motor load
Function module LUF DH11
Function module LUF DA10 + LUF DA01
Function module LUF W
Function module LUF V
Status
2/128
Presentation
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers with multifunction control unit
b Protection against overloads and short-circuits b Protection against phase failure and phase imbalance b Protection against insulation breaks (equipment protection only) b Reset parameters can be set to manual or automatic b Protection function alarm b Indication on front panel or on remote terminal via Modbus RS 485 port b "Log" function b "Monitoring" function, indication of main motor parameters on front panel of the control unit or via a remote terminal b Fault differentiation b Overtorque, no-load running
520728
Single-phase or 3-phase motors Class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
2.3
Power base LUB or LU2B
Multifunction control unit LUCM
Status
Indication of motor load (analogue)
Remote programming and monitoring of all functions
Function module LUF V
Status
2/129
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Non-reversing power bases
520739
561330
Two versions of control connection are available: b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block, b without connection. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of control connection prewiring accessories) or when a reverser block is to be mounted by the customer.
520740
Power bases for non-reversing D.O.L. starting (1)

Connection Power Control Item (2) Rating 440 V 500 V A A Reference 690 V A Weight kg
These bases have 2 auxiliary contacts: 1 N/O (13-14) and 1 N/C (21-22) which indicate the closed or open position of the power poles.
LUB p2 LUB p20
They must be used in conjunction with a control unit, see pages 2/134 to 2/136.
Screw terminals Screw terminals 1 + 2 + 3 12 +4 32 12 32 1 2 12 23 12 23 9 21 9 21 LUB 12 LUB 32 LUB 120 LUB 320 0.900 0.900 0.865 0.865
Without 1+2 connections
2.3
Terminal blocks for power bases without connections

Connection Screw terminals For base LUB 120 or 320 Item (2) 3+4 Reference LU9B N11 Weight kg 0.045
4 3
(1) Rated breaking capacity for operation on short-circuit (Ics), see table below. For higher values, use current limiters, see page 2/133. Volts 230 440 500 690 (3) kA 50 50 10 4 (2) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown in the illustration. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
Other versions
LUB p2
Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device (short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate fuses). Please call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Schemes: pages 2/166 to 2/170
2/130
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Reversing power bases
561270
Two versions of control connection are available: b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block, b without connection. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and is recommended when a communication module is required, allowing the use of control connection pre-wiring accessories.
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting, pre-assembled

Connection Power Control Item (1) Rating 440 V 500 V A A 690 V A Reference to be completed (2) Weight kg
These bases have two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate nonreversing and reversing operating status.
Screw terminals Screw terminals 1 + 2 + 3 12 + 4 + 5 32 Without 1 + 2 + 3 12 connections + 5 32 12 23 12 23 9 21 9 21 LU2B 12pp LU2B 32pp LU2B A0pp LU2B B0pp 1.270 1.270 1.270 1.250
520741
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting, mounted by the customer

LU2B p2
A reverser block should preferably be combined with a non-reversing power base without connections to create a reversing starter-controller. The built-in N/O (13-14) and N/C (21-22) contacts are used for electrical interlocking between the reverser block and the base; they are therefore no longer available as output contacts. The reverser block has a C/O common point contact (81-82-84) which indicates non-reversing and reversing operating status.
Connection Power For mounting directly Screw beneath the power base terminals For mounting separately Screw from the base terminals (screw or rail fixing) 32 A reverser block Item (1) Control Without 3 connections Without 6 connections Reference to be completed (2) LU2M B0pp LU6M B0pp Weight kg 0.400 0.425
2.3
Accessories
Description Item Application Reference Control block 4 Non-reversing power base LU9 M1 without connections LU2B A0pp or B0pp Reverser block LU2M B0pp for direct LU9 M1 mounting beneath power base Reverser block LU6M B0pp for mounting LU9 M1 separately from power base Reverser block LU6M B0pp for mounting LU9M R1 separately from power base Item 5 Reference LU9M R1C Weight kg 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.030
3 5 7
Control circuit pre-wiring components

520826
Description 4 Pre-wired connector (3)
Weight kg 0.035
LU2B p2
(1) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown in the illustration. (2) Select the same control voltage as that of the control unit. Standard control circuit voltages: Volts 24 4872 110240 c BL a B c or a ES (4) FU (5) (3) For control connection between a power base and a reverser block, for direct mounting. (4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V. (5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V. 7
Other versions
Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device (short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate fuses). Please call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608.
LU6M + LU9 M1 + LU9M R1
2/131
Presentation, references
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules
Contact states
Product status Position of control handle or Indication on front panel N/O pole contact N/C pole contact N/O contact any fault LUA1 C20 97-98 N/C contact any fault N//O contact product ready LUA1 C20 17-18 LUA1 C200 no terminal block LUA1 C11 17-18 LUA1 C110 no terminal block
References of add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules Terminal referencing
or
or
LUF N20 33-34 43-44 LUF N11 43-44 LU9B N11 13-14
LUF N11 31-32 LUF N02 31-32 41-42 LU9B N11 21-22
LUA1 C11 95-96 LUA1 C110 no terminal block
or Off
0
OFF
Ready to operate Running
0 1 I>> 0 0 0 N/O contact N/C contact in closed position in open position
2.3
Tripped on short-circuit Tripped on thermal overload Manual reset mode Automatic reset on thermal overload mode Remote reset mode
TRIP
TRIP
References
Add-on contact blocks
Signalling and composition 1 N/C fault signalling contact (95-96) and 1 N/O contact (17-18) indicating control handle in ready position 1 N/O fault signalling contact (97-98) and 1 N/O contact (17-18) indicating control handle in ready position Connection Screw terminals Without connections Screw terminals Without connections Item 1+2 1 Reference LUA1 C11 LUA1 C110 Weight kg 0.030 0.012
1+2 1
LUA1 C20 LUA1 C200
0.030 0.012
Auxiliary contact modules for connection by screw clamp terminals Module with 2 contacts indicating the state of the starter-controller power poles Application: a or c 24250 V, Ith: 5 A
Composition 2 NO contacts (33-34 and 43-44) 1 NC contact (31-32) and 1 NO contact (43-44) 2 NC contacts (31-32 and 41-42) Item 3 3 3 Item 2 2 Reference LUF N20 LUF N11 LUF N02 Reference LU9B C11 LU9B C20 LU9C 1 LU9C 2 LUA8 E20 Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 Weight kg 0.022 0.022 0.020 0.010 0.010
2
5
Accessories
Description For use on
LUB + LUA1 + LUF N
Screw clamp LUA1 C110 terminal blocks LUA1 C200
Blanking covers Location for auxiliary contact, 4 communication or function module Location for add-on contact blocks 5 6 Side mounted LUBpp auxiliary contacts (2 N/O)(1) (1) For disconnection of motor control circuits Characteristics: page 2/152 Schemes: page 2/166
2/132
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks and accessories
533843
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 63 A

Description 8 4 1 2 Sets of 3-pole 63 A busbars 3 2 tap-offs 3 tap-offs 4 tap-offs Application Pitch mm 45 54 45 54 45 54 54 Item 2 1 4 3 Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 Unit reference GV2 G245 GV2 G254 GV2 G345 GV2 G354 GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G554 GV1 G10 GV1 G09 Weight kg 0.036 0.038 0.058 0.060 0.077 0.085 0.100 0.005 0.040
533844
Protective end cover Terminal block for supply to one or more busbar sets
5 tap-offs For unused busbar outlets Connection from the top
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 160 A

The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support. Set of 4-pole busbars: 3-phase + neutral or 3-phase + common
Number of Item tap-offs at 18 mm intervals 18 5 Number of points Thermal used on the current busbar system 2 16 32 Length mm 452 Item For mounting in enclosure width mm 800 Cable lengths 200 250 1000 Reference Weight kg 0.900
AK5 JB144
Removable 3-phase power sockets

Sold in Unit lots of reference 6 6 6 AK5 PC13 (1) AK5 PC33 (1) AK5 PC33L (1) Unit reference Weight kg 0.040 0.045 0.060 Weight
2.3
6 6
Limiter blocks and accessories

Application Item Breaking Mounting capacity Iq 440 V 690 V kA kA 130 70 Direct on power base 100 130 35 70 Separate
10 8
Limiterdisconnector (3) (6) Current limiters (3) Limiter cartridge Clip-in marker holder
7 + 10
LUA LB1 (2)
kg 0.310
533845
8 10
LA9 LB920
0.320 0.135 0.001
Limiter-disconnector LUA LF1 On power base, LAD 90 (4) on reverser block, on parallel link splitter box
Phase barrier
Phase barrier LU9 SP0 must be used: b To build a UL 508 type E certied starter (Self Protected Starter). Without the phase barrier, the starter-controller is certified UL 508. b If the starter-controller is to be used on an operational voltage of 690 V.
Description Phase barrier Item 9 Application LUB or LU2B 12 or 120 LUB or LU2B 32 or 320 LUA LB1 Mounting Reference Direct on LU9 SP0 terminals L1, L2, L3 Item Reference Weight kg 0.030
561524
Door interlock mechanisms

561425
Description 11
12
13
Fixing kit (5) (7) 11 + 12 LU9 AP00 Door-mounted black handle/blue front plate, IP54 13 LU9 AP11 Door-mounted red handle/yellow front plate, IP54 13 LU9 AP12 (1) The maximum permissible peak current for power sockets AK5 PCpp is 6 kA. When used in association with power bases LUBpp, the prospective short-circuit current must not exceed 7 kA (2) Supplied with limiter cartridge. (3) These devices make it possible to increase the breaking capacity of the power base. (4) Sold in lots of 100. (5) The fixing kit includes a shaft extension (maximum depth 508 mm). (6) The limiter must be mounted on an LUB or LU2B power base. The limiter can therefore not be common to several motor starters. (7) To use the fixing kit with a D.O.L. reversing power base, only reverser block LU6 M must be used.
Weight kg 0.490 0.150 0.150
2/133
Selection guide
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Control units
Function characteristics
Control units Thermal overload protection Overcurrent protection Short-circuit protection Protection against phase loss Standard LUCA Advanced LUCB LUCC LUCD Multifunction LUCM 3 to 17 x the setting current
14.2 x the setting current 14.2 x the max. current
Protection against phase imbalance Earth fault detection (equipment protection only) Tripping class Motor type Thermal overload test function Overtorque No-load running Long starting times Reset mode Manual Automatic or remote
10 3-phase
10 20 Single-phase 3-phase
530 Single-phase and 3-phase
2.3
Parameters can be set With function module or parameters can Parameters can be set be set via the bus with a communication module, see chart below. Parameters can be set via the bus with a communication module (see below). Thermal overload alarm only with function module or communication module, see below.l Possible for each type of fault. Indication on front panel of the control unit, via remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1). With communication modules to make use of these alarms via a bus, see below. Log of the last 5 trips. Number of starts, number of trips, number of operating hours.
Alarm
"Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Indication on front panel of the control unit via remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1).
With function modules (2)

Thermal overload alarm Fault differentiation and manual reset Fault differentiation and automatic reset Indication of motor load (analogue) With module LUF W With module LUF DH20 With module LUF DA10 With module LUF V
With communication module or via Modbus port on control unit LUCM (2)
Starter status (ready, running, fault) Reset mode Alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions "Log" function "Monitoring" function Built-in function (1) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant. (2) Mounting possibilities: 1 function module or 1 communication module. Function provided with accessory With any communication module Parameters can be set via the bus With module Modbus LUL C033 (thermal overload alarm only). With Modbus module LUL C033 and Modbus port on the control unit (alarm possible for all types of fault).
With Modbus module LUL C033 and Modbus port on the control unit.
2/134
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Standard and advanced control units
530655
Description
1 5 2
1 2 3 4 5
Extraction and locking handle Test button (on advanced control unit only) Ir adjustment dial Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover Sealing of locking handle
Setting range Clip-in mounting on power base Rating A 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 Reference to be Weight completed by adding the voltage code (1) LUCA X6pp LUCA 1Xpp LUCA 05pp LUCA 12pp LUCA 18pp LUCA 32pp kg 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135
Standard control units

Maximum power ratings of standard 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 400/ 415 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW 0.09 0.25 1.5 2.2 3 5.5 5.5 9 7.5 9 15 15 15 18.5
LUCA pppp LUCB pppp

520735
A 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832
Advanced control units

Pressing the Test button on the front panel simulates tripping on thermal overload. Class 10 for 3-phase motors
0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15 2.2 5.5 9 15 3 9 15 18.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCB X6pp LUCB 1Xpp LUCB 05pp LUCB 12pp LUCB 18pp LUCB 32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
2.3
Class 10 for single-phase motors

0.09 0.55 2.2 4 7.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCC X6pp LUCC 1Xpp LUCC 05pp LUCC 12pp LUCC 18pp LUCC 32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
LUB p2 + LUCA pppp
520736
Class 20 for 3-phase motors

0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15 2.2 5.5 9 15 3 9 15 18.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCD X6pp LUCD 1Xpp LUCD 05pp LUCD 12pp LUCD 18pp LUCD 32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
(1) Standard control circuit voltages: Volts 24 4872 110240 c BL (2), (3) a B c or a ES (4) FU (5) (2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module. (3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V. (5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V. LUB p2 + LUCB pppp
2/135
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Multifunction control units
530656
Description
6 1 2 3
2
LUCM ppBL
520737
1 Extraction and locking handle 2 Built-in display window (2 lines, 12 characters) 3 4-button keypad 4 c 24 V auxiliary power supply 5 Modbus RS485 communication port. Connection by RJ45 connector. 6 Sealing of locking handle The display window 2 and keypad 3 allow: b in conguration mode: local conguration of protection functions and alarms, b in run mode: display of parameter values and events. The Modbus communication port 5 is used to connect: b an operator terminal, b a PC, b a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA).
Multifunction control units

Parameter entry, monitoring of parameter values and consultation of logs are carried out: b either on the front panel, using the built-in display window/keypad, b or via an operator terminal, b or via a PC or a PDA with PowerSuite software, b or remotely, via a Modbus communication bus. Programming of the product via the keypad requires a c 24 V auxiliary power supply.
Maximum power ratings of standard 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 400/ 415 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW 0.09 0.25 1.5 2.2 3 5.5 7.5 15 5.5 9 15 9 15 18.5 Setting range Clip-in mounting on power base Rating A 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 Reference (1) Weight
2.3
A 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832
LUCM X6BL LUCM 1XBL LUCM 05BL LUCM 12BL LUCM 18BL LUCM 32BL
kg 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175
LUB p2 + LUCM ppBL
TeSys model U user's manual (2)

Application On CD-Rom Language Multi-language (3) Reference LU9 CD1 Weight kg 0.022
Operator terminal
This compact Magelis terminal enables the parameters of multifunction control unit LUCM to be read and modified. It is supplied pre-configured to provide dialogue with 8 model U starter-controllers (Modbus protocol, application pages and alarm pages loaded). Starter-controller alarm and fault management takes priority.
Language Multi-language (3) XBT NU400 Display window Supply voltage Reference XBT NU400 Weight kg 0.150
521335
4 lines of 20 characters c 24 V
Connecting cable (4)

Function Length Type Reference Connects terminal XBT NU400 2.5 m SUB-D 25-way XBT Z938 to a multifunction control unit. female - RJ45 (1) Input voltage c 24 V with maximum ripple of 10 %. (2) The CD-Rom contains user's manuals for the AS-i and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish (4) If a terminal is used with several control units, this cable can be connected to a Modbus hub or to T-junctions (see page 2/147). Weight kg 0.200
2/136
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Function modules
Function modules
Output Item Application Reference Weight kg
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset Module LUF DH11 makes it possible to differentiate thermal overload and shortcircuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks LUA1 C). The module includes two contacts for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED on the front panel. To reset the motor starter, the operator must use the rotary knob on the power base. The module can only be used with an advanced control unit and requires an a/c 24240 V external power supply.
533846
1 N/O + 1 N/C
a or c 24250 V
LUF DH11
0.060
Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset These modules make it possible to differentiate thermal overload and short-circuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks LUA1 C). The modules include one contact for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED on the front panel. A second contact (terminals Z1-Z2) must be wired in series with terminal A1 of the motor starter. In the event of a thermal overload fault, this wiring allows motor control to be switched off. The rotary knob on the power base will then stay in the "ready position" . Resetting of the motor starter is automatic after the required motor cooling time if terminals X1-X2 are linked by a strap, or remote by pulsed closing of a volt-free contact connected to terminals X1-X2. These modules can only be used with an advanced control unit and require an a/c 24240 V external power supply.
2.3
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp + LUFW 10 or LUF Vp
Note : Terminals X1-X2 are not isolated from the signalling module power supply. 1 N/C 4 a or c 24250 V LUF DA01 1 NO 4 a or c 24250 V LUF DA10
0.055 0.055
% 200
Thermal overload alarm Through load shedding, this module makes it possible to avoid stoppages in operation due to overload tripping. Imminent thermal overload tripping is displayed as soon as the thermal state exceeds the threshold of 105 % (hysteresis = 5 %). Signalling is possible via an LED on the front panel of the module and externally by an N/O relay output. It can only be used with an advanced control unit, from which it takes its power.
1 2 3
1 N/O
1 2.2 kW 2 4 kW 3 7.5 kW
12 mA 20 mA
510445
100
a or c 24250 V
LUF W10
0.055
Indication of motor load This module provides a signal which is representative of the motor load status (I average/Ir). b I average = average value of the rms currents in the 3 phases, b Ir = value of the setting current. The value of the signal (4-20 mA) corresponds to a load status of 0 to 200 % (0 to 300 % for a single-phase load). It can be used with an advanced or multifunction control unit. Module LUF V2 requires a c 24 V external power supply.
4 - 20 mA 2 LUF V2 0.050
2/137
Presentation
TeSys Model U
PowerSuite software workshop advanced dialogue solutions
531819
Presentation
The PowerSuite software workshop, for PC or Pocket PC, is designed for setting up Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives. This single program is an easy-to-use interface for configuring Altistart and Tesys model U starters as well as all Altivar drives in a Microsoft Windows environment, in five languages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish).
Functions The PowerSuite software workshop can be used for preparing, programming, setting up and maintaining Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives. The PowerSuite software workshop can be used: b stand alone to prepare and store starter or drive conguration les, b connected to the starter or drive to: v congure, v adjust, v monitor (except for Altivar 11 drives), v control (except for Altivar 11 drives), v transfer and compare conguration les between PowerSuite and the starter or drive. The configuration files generated by the PowerSuite software workshop can be: b saved to hard disk, CD-Rom, oppy disk, etc... b printed, b exported to ofce automation software applications, b exchanged between a PC and a Pocket PC using standard synchronization software. PowerSuite PC and Pocket PC conguration les have the same format, b they are password protected. The software associated with the Altivar 31 has been enhanced to include: oscilloscope function, parameter name customisation, creation of a user menu, creation of monitoring screens, searching and sorting on different parameters. The PowerSuite software workshop has on-line contextual help. Connections b The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the terminal port on the starter or variable speed drives, via the serial port on the PC or Pocket PC. Two types of connection are possible: - either with a single starter or drive (point to point connection) - or with a group of starters or drives (multi-point connection). b The PowerSuite software workshop for PC can be connected to an Ethernet network. In this case the starters and drives can be accessed using: - either an Ethernet-Modbus 174 bridge CEV 300 20, - or a communication option card VW3 A58310 (for Altivar 38, 58 and 58F drives only). Hardware and software environment b The PowerSuite for PC software workshop can operate in the following PC environments and congurations: v Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2, Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Microsoft Windows NT4 X SP5, Microsoft Windows Me, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows XP, v Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 Mb available, 128 Mb RAM, v SVGA or higher denition monitor
PowerSuite with Pocket PC screen
PowerSuite with PC screen Installation management
2.3
531820
PowerSuite with PC screen Monitoring screen
531440
b The PowerSuite for Pocket PC software workshop, version V2.0.0, is compatible with Pocket PCs equipped with Windows for Pocket PC 2002 or 2003 operating system and an ARM or XSCALE processor. Performance tests for version V2.00 of the PowerSuite software workshop have been carried out on the following Pocket PCs: v Hewlett Packard IPAQ 2210, v Compaq IPAQ series 3800 and 3900, v Hewlett Packard Jornada series 560.
2/138
References, compatibility
TeSys Model U
PowerSuite software workshop advanced dialogue solutions
References
PowerSuite software workshop for PC or Pocket PC (1)
Description PowerSuite for PC kit Composition b 1 PowerSuite CD-Rom b 1 PC connection kit. b 1 PowerSuite CD-Rom, b 1 Pocket PC connection kit. b Software for PC and Pocket PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish, b technical documentation and ABC congurator program. b Software for PC and Pocket PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish, b technical documentation and ABC congurator program. Reference VW3 A8101 Weight kg 0.400
PowerSuite for Pocket PC kit (2)

563019
VW3 A8102
0.400
PowerSuite CD-Rom
VW3 A8104
0.100
VW3 A8101
PowerSuite upgrade CD
VW3 A8105
0.100
PC connection kit
b 2 x 3 m connection cables with 2 x RJ 45 connectors, VW3 A8106 b 1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adapter for connecting ATV 58/58F/38 drives, b 1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adapter for connecting ATV 68 drives, b 1 converter marked RS 232/RS 485 PC with one 9-way female SUB-D connector and one RJ 45 connector, b 1 converter for ATV 11 drives, with one 4-way male connector and one RJ 45 connector. b 2 x 0.6 m connection cables with 2 x RJ 45 connectors, VW3 A8111 b 1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adapter for connecting ATV 58/58F/38 drives, b 1 converter marked RS 232/RS 485 PPC with one 9-way male SUB-D connector and one RJ 45 connector, b 1 converter for ATV 11 drives, with one 4-way male connector and one RJ 45 connector.
0.350
2.3
0.300
563020
Pocket PC connection kit (2)
VW3 A8102
(1) To find out about the latest available version, please call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608. (2) These kits connect to the synchronization cable, which must be ordered separately from your Pocket PC supplier.
Compatibility
Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshop with starters and variable speed drives Startercontroller TeSys model U Soft start/ soft stop unit ATS 48 Variable speed drives
ATV 11
ATV 28
ATV 31
ATV 38
ATV 58 ATV 58F u V 1.0
ATV 68
PowerSuite software workshop with serial link for PC

Kit and CD-Rom VW3 A8101 VW3 A8104 VW3 A8105 u V 1.40 u V 1.30 u V 1.40 u V 1.0 u V 2.0.0 u V 1.40 u V 1.50
PowerSuite software workshop with Ethernet link for PC

Kit and CD-Rom VW3 A8101 VW3 A8104 VW3 A8105 u V 1.50 and EthernetModbus bridge u V 1.30 u V 1.50 and EthernetModbus bridge u V 1.20 u V 2.0.0 and EthernetModbus bridge u V 2.0.0 u V 1.50 and Ethernet V2 communication card or bridge
PowerSuite software workshop for Pocket PC

Kit and CD-Rom VW3 A8102 VW3 A8104 VW3 A8105 u V 1.50 u V 1.40 u V 1.40 u V 1.20
Compatible products and software versions. Non compatible products. Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshops with Pocket PCs Operating system Performance tests carried out on models Windows for Pocket PC 2003 Windows for Pocket PC 2002 Windows for Pocket PC 2000 Windows CE Hewlett Packard IPAQ 2210 Compaq IPAQ series 3800, 3900 Hewlett Packard Jornada series 560 Hewlett Packard Jornada series 525 Hewlett Packard Jornada 420
PowerSuite software version V 1.30 V 1.40 V 1.50 no no no no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no
V 2.0.0 yes yes yes no no
2/139
Presentation, combinations
TeSys Model U
Controllers
Presentation
The TeSys model U starter-controller provides Total Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 under overcurrent conditions up to 50kA at 400V for motor loads up to 32A. This standard provides for continuity of service with no welding of the main poles being permitted under short circuit conditions. Above 32 A, the model U controller provides a motor starter management solution identical to that provided by TeSys model U starter-controllers. Used in conjunction with a short-circuit protection device and a contactor, it provides a motor starter whose functions are the same as those of a TeSys model U starter-controller and, in particular, provides motor starter overload protection and control functions. The following starter combinations provide Type 2 Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 under overcurrent conditions up to 50kA at 400V. This standard provides for continuity of service where only light tack welding of the contactor poles (easily broken) is permitted under short circuit conditions.
Composition
A TeSys model U controller consists of a control unit whose adjustment range is compatible with the secondary of current transformers, plus a control base which also allows fitment of a function module or a communication module. It requires a c 24 V external power supply.
2.3
Combinations providing Type 2 Coordination at 50kA

With circuit-breaker
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz Category AC-3 400/415 V P Ie kW A 18,5 35 22 42 30 57 37 69 45 81 55 100 75 135 90 165 110 200 132 240 160 285 200 352 220 388 250 437 Circuit-breaker (1) Contactor Model U controller Current transformers
Reference NS80H MA50 NS80H MA50 NS80H MA80 NS80H MA80 NS100H MA100 NS160H MA150 NS160H MA150 NS250H MA220 NS250H MA220 NS400H MA320 NS400H MA320 NS630H MA500 NS630H MA500 NS630H MA500
Rating A 50 50 80 80 100 150 150 220 220 320 320 500 500 500
Irm (2) A 500 650 880 1040 1300 1350 1800 2200 2640 3200 4160 5000 5500 6000
Reference (3) LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500
Reference LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp
Reference 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C8001
With fuses
Standard power ratings of Switch disconnector- gG fuses 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz fuse GE Power Controls Category AC-3 400/415 V RED SPOT P Ie Reference Size Reference kW A A 18,5 35 GS1 GB30 A3 TIS63M80 22 42 GS1 GB30 A3 TIS63M80 30 57 GS1 GB30 A3 TIS63M100 37 69 GS1 LLB30 A4 TCP100M125 45 81 GS1 LLB30 A4 TCP100M125 55 100 GS1 LLB30 A4 TCP100M160 75 135 GS1 LB30 B2 TF200M250 90 165 GS1 MMB30 B2 TF200M250 110 200 GS1 MMB30 B2 TF200M315 132 240 GS1 NB30 B3 TKF315M355 160 285 GS1 PPB30 B3 TKF315M355 200 352 GS1 QQB30 B4 TMF400M450 220 388 GS1 QQB30 B4 TMF400M450 250 437 GS1 SB30 C2 TTM500 315 555 GS1 SB30 C2 TTM500 (1) Product marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. (2) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (3) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. Contactor Model U controller Current transformers
Reference (3) LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630
Reference LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp
Reference 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C8001 3 x LUT C8001
Schemes: page 2/141
2/140
References, dimensions, mounting, schemes

532083
TeSys Model U
Controllers
References
Control bases (control circuit voltage c 24 V)
Connection Current transformers Screw Control Screw For use with contactor LC1 Dpp LC1 Fppp Reference Weight kg 0.800 0.800
LUT M10BL LUT M20BL
Control units
Description Class Advanced 10 20 Multifunction 5 to 30 For motor Setting range type 3-phase 0.351.05 3-phase 3-phase 0.351.05 0.351.05 Reference LUCB T1BL LUCD T1BL LUCM T1BL Weight kg 0.140 0.140 0.175
Current transformers
Operating current Primary Secondary 30 1 50 100 200 400 800 1 1 1 1 1 Reference LUT C0301 LUT C0501 LUT C1001 LUT C2001 LUT C4001 LUT C8001 Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.430 0.600
LUT M + LUCM T1BL
2.3
Function modules and communication modules The TeSys model U controller is fully compatible with the modules listed below. b Thermal overload alarm module LUF W10, see page 2/137.(2) b Motor load indication module LUF V2, see page 2/137. b Modbus communication module LUL C033, see page 2/146.
Dimensions Mounting
163
173
73
110
45
110
30
Schemes
LUTM S2 S1 L1 L2 L3 I1 I2 I3 I4 LUTM LUTM
+
I5 I6 I7
172
24 V Aux. I10 I8 I9
LUTM
13/NO
23/NO
96/NO
97/NC
95
98
(1) The contacts are represented with controller powered up and not in a fault condition. (2) Module LUF W10 is only compatible with control units LUCB T1BL and LUCD T1BL.
05
(1)
(1)
06/NC
2/141
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components
Parallel type connection

Architecture
1 Parallel wiring module
LUF C00
4 2 Pre-wired coil connection
LU9B N11C
3 Connection cable LU9 Rp with
2
2 1
To PLC
2 1
520836
one RJ45 connector at each end 4 Splitter box LU9 G02 for 8 motor starters with channel connections on the PLC side by 2 HE 10 connectors and on the starter-controller side by 8 RJ45 connectors. 5 Connection cable TSX CDPppp with one HE 10 connector at each end.
Parallel wiring module

The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect starter-controllers to the PLC I/O modules quickly and without any need for tools. It replaces traditional screw terminal and single wire connections. It is used with the Telefast pre-wired system. The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each starter-controller. It must be used with a c 24 V control unit, LUCp ppBL. Splitter box LUF GO2 distributes information from the PLC I/O modules to each of the starter-controllers connected to it. This splitter box is optimised for use with card TSX DMZ28DTK. When used in conjunction with the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution, the model U starter-controller is ideal in decentralised automation architecture (1). The use of dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 allows remote connection of 4 starter-controllers. Each of the dedicated modules 4 channels has: b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running, b 3 inputs: position of the knob, fault indication and position of the poles. Connection to the dedicated module is by means of the following cables: b RJ45 LU9Rpp, for lengths less than 3 metres, b 490 NTW 000pp, for lengths greater than 3 metres 10 9
Description Parallel wiring module Item 1 Reference LUF C00 Weight kg 0.045
2.3
6 6 7
Outputs for starter commands RJ45 connector for connecting to splitter box
531810
11 12 12
(1) Please consult our "Distributed I/O Advantys STB, the open device integration I/O system" catalogue
Dedicated parallel interface module (STB EPI 2145) 9 Power base 10 c 24 V control unit (LUC B/D/C/M pp BL) 11 Parallel wiring module (LUF C00) 12 Options: add-on contact blocks, reverser blocks
8
2/142
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components
520813
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.
Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired connections is recommended.
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUB pp LU2B pp 1 Item 2 8 Reference LU9B N11C LU9M RC Weight kg 0.045 0.030
2 LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B N11C
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired connector LU9M RC may be used.
Connection of parallel wiring module to the PLC

No tools are required to connect the parallel wiring module to the PLC. Connection is via a splitter box which allows up to 8 starter-controllers to be connected; a maximum of 4 reversing starters per splitter box is allowed. The splitter box requires a c 24 V power supply. Splitter box
Connectors PLC side (16I/12O) 2 x HE 10 20-way Connectors 2 x RJ45 connectors 1 8 Item Starter-controller side 8 x RJ45 4 LU9 G02 (1) Reference Weight kg 0.260
561420
2.3
Connection cables to the splitter box

Item 3 Length m 0.3 1 3 Reference LU9 R03 LU9 R10 LU9 R30 Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125
Connection cables from splitter box to PLC

Type of connection Gauge PLC side Splitter box side AWG HE 10 HE 10 22 20-way 20-way C.s.a. Length Reference Weight
mm2 0.324
LU2B + LUFC00 + LU9MRC 28 0.080
m 0.5 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 3 5
TSX CDP 053 TSX CDP 103 TSX CDP 203 TSX CDP 303 TSX CDP 503 ABF H20 H100 ABF H20 H200 ABF H20 H300 TSX CDP 301 TSX CDP 501
kg 0.085 0.150 0.280 0.410 0.670 0.080 0.140 0.210 0.400 0.660
Bare wires
HE 10 20-way
22
0.324
(1) Allows "run" and "fault" status of each starter-controller to be fed back to the PLC and transmits commands.
2/143
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
AS-Interface cabling system
Series type connection

Architecture Communication module ASILUF C5 Tap-off XZ CG0142 3 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
1 2
2
3 1
2 c 24 V AS-i
2.3
531118
Information transmitted by the AS-Interface system

AS-Interface profile Data bits (command) Bit value Command D0 (O) Command D1 (O) Command D2 (O) Command D3 (O) Bit value Status D0 (I) Status D1 (I) Status D2 (I) Status D3 (I) 7.D.F.0 =0 Stop forward Stop reverse Not used Not used =0 Not ready or fault Stopped Not used Not used =1 Forward running Reverse running Not used Not used =1 Ready Running Not used Not used
Data bits (status)
5 1 2 3 4 5
AS-Interface communication module

The AS-Interface communication module makes it easy to connect starter-controllers to the AS-Interface cabling system, and therefore allows remote control and command of these starter-controllers. The various operating states of the module (AS-Interface voltage present, communication fault, addressing fault,) are indicated on the front panel by 2 LEDs (green and red). Operation of the module is continuously monitored by auto-testing, in a way that is totally transparent to the user. The incorporation of AS-Interface V.2.1 functions allows diagnostics to be performed on the module, either remotely via the bus or locally via the ASI TERV2 addressing terminal. The communication module must be connected to a c 24 V auxiliary power supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCp ppBL. The product is supplied with a yellow connector 6 for connection to the AS-Interface system, a black connector 7 for connection to the c 24 V auxiliary supply and a black connector 8 for connection of the outputs.
Description Communication module Item 1 Reference ASILUF C5 Weight kg 0.065
Green LED: AS-Interface voltage present Red LED: AS-Interface or module fault Yellow connector for connection to the AS-Interface system Black connector for connection to a c 24 V auxiliary power supply Outputs for starter commands
2/144
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
AS-Interface cabling system
510300

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
1 For use with power base Pre-wired coil connection LUB pp 3 LU2B pp Description Item 3 5 Reference LU9B N11C LU9M RC Weight kg 0.045 0.030
LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B

520799
b Wire link Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired connector LU9M RC may be used.
2.3
Connection of the communication module on the serial bus (1)

Achieved by using a tap-off for connection to 2 ribbon cables: b 1 for AS-Interface (yellow). b 1 for separate c 24 V supply (black).
1 5 Description Tap-off Length m 2 Reference XZ CG0142 Weight kg 0.265
Consoles and cable adaptors

Description Reference Addressing console XZ MC11 Battery operated. Battery charger supplied AS-Interface V.1 and V.2.1 compatible Adjustment and diagnostics console ASI TERV2 Runs on LR6 batteries Allows addressing of AS-Interface V.2.1interfaces and diagnostics Cable adaptor XZ MG12 For console XZ MC11 Weight kg 0.550
LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M

520898 520899
0.500
0.070
Software set-up
AS-Interface configuration is carried out using PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. From the module declaration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices corresponding to all the AS-Interface I/O. Configuration is carried out by following the instructions on the screen.
XZ MC11
561421
ASI TERV2

Application On CD-Rom Language Reference Multi-language LU9 CD1 (3) (1) Degree of protection IP 54. Connection by 4 x 0.34 mm2 wires. Black wire: +24 V. White wire: 0 V. Blue wire: AS-Interface (). Brown wire: AS-Interface (+). (2) The CD-Rom contains user's manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish Weight kg 0.022
Configuration example with Premium TSX SAY 100/1000 module
2/145
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Modbus communication module and pre-wired coil connection components
Series type connection

Architecture b Star topology
1 4 6 3 2
2
2 1 2 1 4 6 3
To PLC
Communication module LUL C033 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C Connection cable with one RJ45 connector at each end VW3 A8 306 Rpp Modbus hub LU9 GC3 with channel connections to PLC and to starter-controller with RJ45 connectors Line terminator VW3 A8 306 RC
b Bus topology Communication module LUL C033 2 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C 5 T-junction VW3 A8 306 TFpp 6 Line terminator VW3 A8 306 RC
1
2.3
2 1
2 1
5 6
Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit Starter status (ready, running, fault) Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions "Log" function "Monitoring" function Start and Stop commands Functions performed Standard Advanced Multifunction
510377
For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual LU9 CD1, see page opposite.
Modbus communication module

1 2 3 4 5 6
Module status signalling LED c 24 V supply connection RJ45 connector RS485 for Modbus link 2 digital inputs 1 digital output Outputs for starter commands
Communication module LUL C033 enables the model U starter-controller to be connected to the Modbus network. It must have a c 24 V supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCp ppBL. It incorporates a 0.5 A, c 24 V digital output for local command requirements and two configurable digital inputs.
Description Communication module Item 1 Reference LUL C033 Weight kg 0.080
2/146
References
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Modbus communication module and pre-wired coil connection components
520810

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
1 Description Pre-wired coil connection 2 LUB + LUL C033 + LU9B For use with power base LUB pp LU2B pp Item 2 7 Reference LU9B N11C LU9M RC Weight kg 0.045 0.030
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired connector LU9M RC may be used.
520811
2.3
Connection of the communication module on the serial bus

Achieved either by means of a Modbus hub or using T-junctions.
Description Modbus hub 8 slaves Cables fitted with two RJ45 connectors Length m 0.3 1 3 7 LU2B + LUL C033 + LU9M RS 485 line terminator T-junctions (1) 0.3 1 Item 4 3 3 3 5 5 6 Reference LU9 GC3 VW3 A8 306 R03 VW3 A8 306 R10 VW3 A8 306 R30 VW3 A8 306 TF03 VW3 A8 306 TF10 VW3 A8 306 RC Weight kg 0.260 0.045 0.065 0.125 0.032 0.032 0.012

Application On CD-Rom Language Multi-language (3) Reference LU9 CD1 Weight kg 0.022
(1) Fitted with 2 RJ45 female connectors (bus side) and a 0.3 m or 1 m length cable supplied with an RJ45 male connector (station side). (2) The CD-Rom contains user's manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish.
2/147
Presentation, description, setting-up
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
0 0
Starters, drives and communication Communication gateways LUF P
Presentation
Communication gateways LUF P allow connection between Modbus and field buses such as Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet. After configuration, these gateways manage information which can be accessed by the Modbus bus and make this information available for read/write functions (command, monitoring, configuration and adjustment) on the field buses.
An LUF P communication gateway consists of a box which can be clipped onto a 35 mm omega rail, allowing connection of up to 8 Slaves connected on the Modbus bus. Example of architecture
Configuration of gateway by PC
Model U starter-controllers
LUF P
2.3
Fipio Profibus DP DeviceNet
(1)
Modbus
561511
1
(1) Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop.
ATS 48 ATV 31
Description
Front panel of the product 1 LED indicating : - communication status of the Modbus buses, - gateway status, - communication status of the Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet bus. 2 Connectors for connection to Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet buses.
561512
Underside of product 3 RJ45 connector for connection on the Modbus bus 4 RJ45 connector for link to a PC 5 c 24 V power supply 3 4
Software set-up
For the Fipio bus, software set-up of the gateway is performed using either PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software or ABC Configurator software. For the Profibus DP and DeviceNet buses, software set-up is performed using ABC Configurator. This software is included: b in the PowerSuite software workshop for PC (see page 2/139), b in the TeSys model U user's manual .
Characteristics, references: page 2/149
2/148
Characteristics, references, dimensions
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
0 0
Starters, drives and communication Communication gateways LUF P
Characteristics
Bus type Environment Ambient air temperature Degree of protection Electromagnetic compatibility Conforming to IEC 664 Around the device Fipio Profibus DP DeviceNet Degree of pollution: 2 C + 5+ 50 IP 20 Conforming to IEC 50081-2: 1993 Conforming to IEC 61000-6-2: 1999 y8 By RJ45 connector conforming to Schneider Electric RS485 standard By RJ45 connector, with PowerSuite connection kit By SUB D9 female By SUB D9 female By 5-way removable connector connector screw connector V External supply, c 24 10 % mA 280 mA 100 By LED on front panel FED C32 or FED C32P 26 configurable words (1) 122 configurable words 256 configurable words 26 configurable words (1) 122 configurable words 256 configurable words By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW) (1) If the gateway is configured using PL7 and not ABC Configurator, the I/O capacity is limited to a total of 26 words. For use with TeSys Model U starter-controllers, Altistart 48, Altivar 28, 38, 58 and 58F With bus type Fipio/Modbus Profibus DP/Modbus DeviceNet/Modbus Connectors 1 RJ45 type connector and one end with stripped wires 2 RJ45 type connectors 2 RJ45 type connectors 2 RJ45 type connectors 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 1 SUB-D 9 male connector Reference LUF P1 LUF P7 LUF P9 Reference Weight kg 0.245 0.245 0.245
Emission Immunity Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected Connection Modbus To a PC Field bus Supply Consumption Indication/diagnostics Services
Max. Typical Profile Command Monitoring Configuration and adjustment
References
Description Communication gateways
2.3
Connection accessories
822631
Description Connection cables TSX FP ACC 12
For use with Modbus
Length m 3 0.3 1 3
Weight kg VW3 A8 306 D30 0.150 0.050 0.050 0.150 0.040
822713
Connectors
Fipio Profibus mid line Profibus line end
VW3 A8 306 R03 VW3 A8 306 R10 VW3 A8 306 R30 TSX FP ACC12 490 NAD 911 04 490 NAD 911 03
490 NAD 911 03
Documentation
Description User's manual for TeSys model U range (2) Medium CD-Rom Language Reference Weight kg 0.022
Multilingual: English, French, German, Italian, LU9 CD1 Spanish (2) This CD-Rom contains user's manuals for AS-i and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software, ABC Configurator.
Dimensions
= 75 = 120
27
Setting-up: page 2/148
2/149
Characteristics
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Environment
Approvals UL, CSA Pending: BV, GL, LROS, DNV, PTB IEC/EN 60947-6-2, CSA C22-2 N14, Type E UL 508 type E: with phase barrier LU9 SP0 690
Conforming to standards Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, V overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 To UL508, CSA C22-2 n14 V Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 kV Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 appendix N V
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Safety separation of circuits SELV
600 6 Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400 Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 400 IP 40 IP 20 IP 20
Degree of protection Front panel outside connection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone (protection against direct finger Front panel and wired terminals contact) Other faces Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 Storage Operation
2.3
Ambient air temperature around the device
TH Cycles 12 h 48 C - 40+ 85 C Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70. (At temperatures above 60C and up to 70C, for Ie = 32 A, leave a minimum gap 9 mm between products). Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60. (At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products. At temperatures above 55 C up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between products.) m 2000
30
90 90
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
30
Flame resistance
Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 C C
V2 960 (parts supporting live components) 650 Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable Power poles open: 10 gn Power poles closed: 15 gn Power poles open: 2 gn Power poles closed: 4 gn
Environmental restrictions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated highfrequency disturbance Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock waves
Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 kV kV V/m kV kV
In open air: 8 - Level 3 On contact: 8 - Level 4 10 - Level 3 All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4 Serial link: 2 - Level 3
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4
Conforming to 60947-6-2 Common mode Serial mode kV 2 1 Uc a 110...240 V c110...220 V Uc < 100 V Not applicable: for use on a protected supply 10 Immunity to conducted high- Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V frequency disturbance (1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
2/150
Characteristics
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Power bases and control units
Power base and control unit type
LUB 12 + LUCA or LUCB or LUCC or LUCD
LUB 32 + LUCA LUB 12 + or LUCB or LUCC LUCM or LUCD
LUB 32 + LUCM
LU2M LU6M
Power circuit connection characteristics

Connection to 4 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 2.510 2.510 1.56 1.56 16 16 16 16 110 110 16 16 Phillips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 6 mm 1.92.5 1.92.5 2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5 2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5 2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5
Control circuit connection characteristics

Connection to 3 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m a 50/60 Hz c c 24 V (1) a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V V V V V V V V V V V mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA W ms ms ms 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 Phillips n 1 or flat screwdriver: 5 mm 0.81.2 0.81.2 24240 24240 24240 24240 2027 2027 2026.5 2026.5 a 38.572, c 38.593 a and c 88264 a and c 88264 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 29 29 55 55 130 220 140 220 280 280 280 280 55 70 70 90 35 45 30 20 2 3 24 V: 70/ 48 V 60; 72 V: 50 35 35 3 3 At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms 15 3600 15 3600 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 24 2028 14.5 150 70 1.7 75 35 3 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 24 2028 14.5 200 75 1.8 65 35 3 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 120 2360 2050 840 120 (2) (2) (2)
2.3

Rated voltage of control circuit Voltage limits Operation
Drop-out
Typical consumption I max while closing
I rms sealed
Heat dissipation Operating time
Closing Opening Resistance to micro-breaks Resistance to voltage EC/EN 61000-4-11 drops Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour
15 3600 3 Yes
15 3600 3 Yes
Main pole characteristics

Number of poles Isolation function To IEC/EN 60947-1 Possible Padlocking In cat. AC-41 In cat. AC-43 3 3 Yes Yes 1 padlock with 7 mm shank A 12 32 70C: 12A 70C: 32A 70C: 12A 70C: 32A V 690 (3) 690 (3) Hz 4060 4060 A 3 6 9 12 18 25 32 W 0.1 0.3 0.6 1.1 2.4 4.6 7.5 V 230 440 500 690 kA 50 50 10 4 ms 2 2 2 kA2s 90 120 (1) Voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0. 12 32 55C: 12A 55C: 32A 55C: 12A 55C: 32A 690 (3) 690 (3) 4060 4060 90 120
Rated thermal current Rated operating current To IEC/ (Ue 440V) EN 60947-6-2
Rated operating voltage Frequency limits Of the operating current Power dissipated in Operating current the power circuits Power dissipated in all three poles Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit Total breaking time Thermal stress limit
With Isc max on 440 V
2/151
Characteristics
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Reversing power bases and auxiliary contacts
Specific characteristics of power bases LU2B and reverser blocks LU2M or LU6M
Duration of inrush phase Maximum operating time a 50/60 Hz c Without change of direction With change of direction ms ms ms ms A Hz V mA A A A A m ms 25 15 75 150 5 Up to 400 17 5 gL fuse: 4 30 40 50 10 2 (on energisation and on de-energisation)
General characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Conventional rated For ambient temperature < 70 C thermal current (Ith) Frequency of the operating current U min Minimum switching capacity = 10-8 I min Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Short-time rating Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Linked contacts Mirror contact Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to draft standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Rated operating voltage (Ue) Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA
Specific characteristics of auxiliary contact built-into the power base

Each power base has 1 N/O contact and 1 N/C contact which are mechanically linked The N/C contact fitted in each power base reliably represents the state of the power contacts (safety scheme) Up to a 690; c 250 690 600
2.3
V V V
Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts in modules LUF N, of auxiliary contacts LUA1 and of reverser blocks LU2M and LU6M
Rated operating voltage (Ue) Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA Operational power of contacts Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical durability (up to 3600 operating cycles/hour on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making power (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos = 0.4) V VA VA VA 24 60 16 4 48 120 32 8 115 280 80 20 230 560 160 40 400 960 280 70 440 600 1050 1440 300 80 420 100 d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W 24 120 70 25 48 90 50 18 125 75 38 14 250 68 33 12 V V V Up to a 250; c 250 250 250

1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V
24 V 48 V 125 V
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,2
0,3 0,4
0,6 0,8 1 0,5 0,7 0,9
0,1 0,1
0,2
0,3 0,4
0,6 0,8 1 0,5 0,7 0,9
2/152
Characteristics
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Control units
Characteristics of standard control units LUCA

Protection Overload protection Motor type Conforming to standard Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operating current Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping threshold Tripping tolerance 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 10 Hz C 4060 - 25+ 70 With 14.2 x the setting current 20 %
Short-circuit protection
2
LUCC Single-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 10 4060 - 25+ 55 14.2 x the setting current 20 % LUCD 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 20 4060 - 25+ 70 With 14.2 x the setting current 20 %
Characteristics of advanced control units LUCB, LUCC and LUCD

Control unit type Protection Motor type Conforming to standard Overload protection Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operating current Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping threshold Tripping tolerance LUCB 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 10 Hz C 4060 - 25+ 70 With 14.2 x the setting current 20 %
Short-circuit protection
2.3
Characteristics of multifunction control units LUCM

Protection Overload protection Motor type Conforming to standard Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operating current Temperature compensation Physical interface Connector Protocol Maximum transmission speed Maximum return time Type Language version Accuracy Resolution External type Heat dissipation Selectable: single-phase or 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 (selectable) Hz C 4060 - 25+ 55 RS 485 multi-drop RJ45 on front panel Modbus RTU 19 200 (self-configuration up to this value) 200 LCD, 2 lines of 12 characters Multilanguage (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish) 5% 1 % of Ir c 24, with maximum ripple of 10 %. 0.8
Communication interface for terminal on enclosure door
bit/s ms
Display
Auxiliary supply
V W
Configuration table for protection devices and alarms on multifunction control units LUCM
Adjustment of tripping threshold Factory setting Factory setting Range Default value Activated (1) 317 Ir 14.2 Activated (1) Activated 0.1532 A (2) Ir min Tripping Alarm Adjustment of time before tripping Range Default value Class: 530 5 Adjustment of alarm threshold Range Default value 10100 % of 85 % the thermal state 0.25 Ir min 0.3 Ir min 1030 % 10 % 18 Ir 2 Ir 0.31 Ir 0.5 Ir 18 Ir Ir
Overcurrent Overload
Earth fault Phase imbalance Torque limitation No-load running Long starting times
Activated Activated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Factory setting Manual 120 s 3-phase motor Self-cooled English Average current
Activated Activated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
0.25 Ir min 1030 % 18 Ir 0.31 Ir 18 Ir
0.3 Ir min 10 % 2 Ir 0.5 Ir Ir
0.11.2 s 0.220 s 130 s 1200 s 1200 s
0.1 s 5s 5s 10 s 10 s
Configuration of additional functions on multifunction control units LUCM

Reset Time before reset Type of load Language Display Setting range Manual, automatic or remote 11000 s 3-phase motor, single-phase motor Self-cooled, force cooled English, French, German, Italian, Spanish Average current, thermal state of motor, current in phase 1 / 2 / 3, earth leakage current, phase imbalance, cause of last 5 faults
(1) This function cannot be deactivated. (2) The setting range depends on the rating of the control unit used.
2/153
Characteristics
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Limiter-disconnectors, current limiter, thermal overload alarm function module and thermal overload fault signalling modules
Characteristics of limiter-disconnector LUA LB1

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Conventional thermal current (Ith) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Operating threshold Breaking capacity Mounting Connection Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque V A I rms kA V kA 690 32 50 440 690 130 70 Directly on the upstream terminals of the starter-controller
1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
1.510 1.5...6 110 16 1...6 1...6 Phillips n2 or flat screwdriver 6 mm 1.92.5
Characteristics of current limiter LA9 LB920
2.3
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Conventional thermal current (Ith) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Operating threshold Breaking capacity Mounting Connection Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque
V A I rms A V kA
690 63 1000 440 100 Separate 1.525 1.5...10 1.525 2.510 1.516 1.54 Phillips n2 or flat screwdriver 6 mm 2.2
690 35
1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors
Characteristics of thermal overload alarm function module LUF W10

Activation threshold Hysteresis between activation and switching off Indication Supply Discrete output characteristics Type AC-15 DC-13 A Conventional thermal current For ambient (Ith) temperature < 70 C Short-circuit protection Conforming to A IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Module type Fault signalling External power supply Module consumption Discrete outputs Type AC-15 DC-13 For ambient temperature < 70 C Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Conductor c.s.a. Length A A mm2 m Fixed at 88% of the thermal tripping state 5% By LED on front panel Powered by the control unit N/O contact 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles 2 gG fuse: 2
Characteristics of thermal overload fault signalling and reset modules

V mA LUF DH11 LUF DA01 By LED on front panel a/c 24240 7 at c 24 1.1 at a 240 1 N/C + 1 N/O 1 N/C 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles 2 gG fuse: 2 0.2 min 500 (R = 50 , L = 52.8 mH, Cp = 93 pF) LUF DA10
1 N/O
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Short-circuit protection Reset input
References: page 2/133 and 2/137
2/154
Characteristics
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Function modules and communication modules
Characteristics of motor load indication function module LUF V2

Analogue output Signal delivered Load impedance Minimum Maximum Typical Precision Precision Resolution k 4 - 20 mA Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 2 for LUCB and LUCD Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 3 for LUCC 500 100 6% 10 % 1 % of Ir External c 24 V AS-Interface V2.1 n 52901 7.D.F.0 Operation - 25+ 70 29.5...31.5 Normal operation: 25 Fault condition: 30 c 24 30 % 200 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation 0.5 A/24 V (outputs protected against short-circuits) By 2 LEDs on front panel
Signal characteristics with advanced control unit Signal characteristics with multifunction control unit Supply
Characteristics of AS-Interface communication module ASILUF C5

Product certification AS-Interface profile Ambient air temperature AS-Interface supply Current consumption By the AS-Interface system Auxiliary supply Current consumption On 24 V supply for the outputs Number of outputs Switching capacity of the solid state outputs Indication/diagnostics Module type Physical interface Connector Protocol Maximum transmission speed Maximum return time Addressing Ambient air temperature Logic inputs C V mA mA V mA
2.3
Characteristics of Modbus communication modules LUL C033

RS 485 multi-drop RJ45 on front panel Modbus RTU 19 200 (self-configuration up to this value) 30 By switches: from 0...31 Operation - 25+55 2 (to be assigned according to configuration) c 24 7 c 24 (positive logic) 7 10 ( 30 %) 10 ( 30 %) Resistive 3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation c 24 500 1 200 0.5 A/24 V By 3 LEDs on front panel LUF W10, LUF V2 DH11, DA01 and DA10 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 5.08 0.21.5 0.21 0.251.5 0.251 0.251.5 0.51 0.21.5 0.21 AWG 24 to AWG 16 0.50.6 3.5 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG 26 to AWG 16 0.220.25 2.5 ASILUF C5 Inputs and 24 V auxiliary 5.08 0.21.5 0.21 0.251.5 0.251 0.251.5 0.51 0.21.5 0.21 AWG 24 to AWG 16 0.50.6 3.5 LUL C033 Outputs 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG 26 to AWG 16 0.220.25 2.5 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG 26 to AWG 16 0.220.25 2.5 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG 26 to AWG 16 0.220.25 2.5 LUFC 00
bit/s ms C Number Supply Input current Voltage Current Change to state 1 Change to state 0
Nominal input values Response time Input type Solid state outputs
mA V mA ms ms
Number Supply Max. current Protection gI fuse Current consumption On 24 V supply for the outputs Switching capacity of the solid state outputs Indication/diagnostics
V mA A mA
Connection characteristics
Module type
Connectors Pitch Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Flexible cable Without 1 conductor with cable end insulated ferrule 2 identical conductors With 1 conductor insulated ferrule 2 identical conductors (1) Solid cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Conductor size 1 conductor Tightening torque Flat screwdriver (1) Use a double cable end. References: pages 2/137 to 2/144 Dimensions: pages 2/164 to 2/165
N.m mm
2/155
Characteristics
TeSys Model U
Controllers
Control bases and control units
Environment
Control base and control unit type Product certifications Conforming to standards Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, V of the outputs overvoltage category III, (Ui) degree of pollution: 3 Conforming to UL508, CSA C22-2 V n14 Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 kV voltage of the outputs (Uimp) Degree of protection Front panel (outside connection zone) To IEC/EN 60947-1 Front panel and wired terminals (protection against Other faces direct finger contact) Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 Cycles h C C m LUT M + LUCB T1BL or LUCD T1BL LUT M + LUCM T1BL or LUL C without LUL C UL, CSA Pending: BV, GL, LROS, DNV, PTB IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 N14 250
250 4
IP 40 IP 20 IP 20 TH 12 48 - 40+ 85 - 25+ 70 2000

30
2.3
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 Ambient air temperature Storage around the device Operation Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
- 25+ 60
90
90
30
Flame resistance
Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12
C C
V2 960 (parts supporting live components) 650 15 gn 4 gn
Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated fields Immunity to fast transient currents
Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2
kV kV V/m kV kV V
In open air: 8 - Level 3 On contact: 6 - Level 3 10 - Level 3 CT outputs and inputs: 4 - Level 4 Inputs and supply: 2 - Level 3 10
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4
Immunity to radio Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 electrical fields Control base and control unit relays Immunity to dissipated Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 shock waves Output relays / power line Inputs Serial communication
Common mode kV kV kV 4 2 2
Serial mode 2 1
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
Schemes: page 2/141
2/156
TeSys Model U
Controllers
Control bases and control units
Control supply characteristics

Operating voltage Power consumption Associated protection Connection Connectors Flexible cable without cable end V W A c 20.428.8 2 max gG fuse, 0.5
Pitch 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor 2 identical conductors (1) 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor
mm mm2 mm2
5 0.22.5 0.21.5
Flexible cable with cable end Without insulated ferrule
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
0.252.5 0.251 0.252.5 0.51.5 0.22.5 0.21 AWG 24 to AWG 12 0.50.6 3
With insulated ferrule
Solid cable without cable end
Conductor size Tightening torque Flat screwdriver
N.m mm
2.3
Input characteristics
Operating voltage Logic inputs V c 24 Logic state 1: I u 6 mA - 16 V Logic state 0: I y 1.5 mA - 5 V LUT M10BL Single break volt-free contacts a.c. supply d.c. supply For 500 000 operating cycles For 500 000 operating cycles VA W C 300 24 V/5 A 180 30 LUT M20BL
Discrete output characteristics

Control base type Type Load
B 300 24 V/5 A 500 30
Permissible power in cat. AC-15 Permissible power in cat. DC-13
Associated protection For use in association with contactor (2)
gG fuse, 4 Control voltage c 24 V: LP1K, LC1 D09D95. Control voltage c 24240 V: LC1K, LC1D.
gG fuse, 4 Control voltage a 100240 V: LC1K, LC1D, LC1 F185F500
Characteristics of external current transformers

Precision Precision limit factor Maximum operating temperature Transformer ratio Hole diameter Maximum wire c.s.a. Class 5P 10 70
30/1 50/1 100/1 200/1 400/1 800/1 mm 28 22 35 32 mm2 30 x 10 30 x 10 40 x 10 65 x 32 38 x 127 53 x 127 (1) Use a double cable end. (2) For other combinations, use an intermediate relay between the output of controller LUTM and the contactor coil.
Schemes: page 2/141
2/157
Curves
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Tripping curves for control units LUCA, LUCB, LUCD

Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance: 20 %.
Time (s) 1000
100
3
10
2.3
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 20 30 x the setting current (Ir)
1 LUCD, 3 poles from cold state, class 20. 2 LUCA, LUCB, 3 poles from cold state, class 10. 3 LUCA, LUCB, LUCD, 3 poles from hot state.
Tripping curves for control units LUCC

Time (s) 1000
100
2
10
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 20 30 x the setting current (Ir)
1 LUCC, single-phase, cold state. 2 LUCC, single-phase, hot state.
2/158
Curves (continued)
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Cold state curves
Time (s)
10000
1000
100
10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5
2.3
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 30 14 16 18 20 15 17 19 x the setting current (Ir)
2/159
Curves (continued)
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Hot state curves
Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance: 20 %
Time (s)
10000
1000
100
2.3
10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 30 14 16 18 20 15 17 19 x the setting current (Ir)
2/160
Curves (continued)
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Current limitation on short-circuit

Ue = 460 V
Maximum peak current (kA) 100
10
2 3
2.3
0,1 1 2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
1 Maximum peak current 2 32 A power base 3 12 A power base
Thermal limit on short-circuit

Ue = 460 V
Sum of I2dt (A2s) 103 1000
1
100
10
1 1 2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
1 32 A power base 2 12 A power base
2/161
Selection guide
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Use in category AC-41

LUB 12 LUB 32
10 8 6 5 4 3 2
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 Current broken in A
2.3

Ue 440 V
LUB 12 LUB 32
Ue = 690 V
LUB 12 LUB 32
10 8 6 5 4 3 2

6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 Current broken in A
5,5 7,5
10 8 6 5 4 3 2
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 21 Current broken in A
0,55
0,75
1,5
2,2
230 V
0,55 0,75 1,5 2,2 5,5 7,5
kW
11
15 15
400 V
0,55 0,75 2,2 5,5 1,5 7,5
kW
11
440 V
kW
2/162
Selection guide
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers

Ue 440 V
LUB 12 LUB 32
Ue = 690 V
LUB 12 LUB 32 1 0,8 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
1 0,8
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
0,01 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 40 50 66 100 200 60 80 170 Current broken in A
0,01 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 200 50 60 100 40 54 80 126 Current broken in A
2.3
2/163
Dimensions
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Starter-controllers
Non-reversing 126 X2 73 154 163 Rail mounting 126 Screw fixing 30 4 Reversing Rail mounting Screw fixing 29 4
X1
224
2
X1 135 (1) 45 X2 135 (1) Minimum electrical clearance: X1 = 50 mm for Ue = 440 V and 70 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V, X2 = 0 (1) Maximum depth (with Modbus communication module) 45
Reverser block for mounting separately from power base

Rail mounting Screw fixing
2.3
115 104
113
45
113
36
Sets of busbars and plug-in power sockets

GV2 G445 and GV2 G454 GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09 GV2 G245 and G254
18
a l
p
GV1 G09
95
30
120/125
233 I 89 98 I 134 152
GV2 G245 (2 x 45) GV2 G254 (2 x 54) I 179 206 P 45 54 GV2 G554 260 GV2 G345 and G354 l
GV2 G445 (2 x 45) GV2 G454 (2 x 54)
Number of tap-offs GV2 G445 (2 x 45) GV2 G454 (2 x 54)
a 5 224 260
6 269 314
7 314 368
8 359 422
GV2 G345 (2 x 45) GV2 G354 (2 x 54)
AK5 JB144
AK5 PC13, PC33, PC33L 45,5
82
79
81
438 452
2/164
45
30
38
35,5
Dimensions
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB1 Disconnector LUA LB10
Current limiter LA9 LB920
93
2M4
146
103
115
154
135 (1)
45
6 53,5
51
(1) Maximum depth (with Modbus communication module).
Current limiter GV1 L3

40 154
2.3
135 (1)
45
(1) Maximum depth (with Modbus communication module).
Door interlock mechanisms

LU9 AP00
55
Door cut-out
= = 54
162
508
11,5
Addressing consoles
XZ MC11 ASI TERV2
209
230
80
30
84
195
= = 54
35
Modbus splitter box LU9 CG3 Splitter box LU9 G02
154
128
45
128
30
163
2/165
Schemes
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Starter-controllers, 12 or 32 A
With standard, advanced or multifunction control unit
Non-reversing
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Reversing
1/L1 3/L2
4/T2
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
Control Unit
22/NC
2
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 A1 A2
Control Unit
2/T1
6/T3
5/L3
Pre-wired
With control unit LUCC or LUCM

Connection of a single-phase motor
1 L1 5 L2
Reverser
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
81
84
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
22/NC
Control Unit
Control terminal block
U 2
V 6
A1
A2
LU2B
Reverser Motor Controller
A3
B3
A1
B1
Reverser blocks
LU2M
S1 S2 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 S3
LU6M
Control terminal blocks
S1 S2 S3
LU6M
Reverser Block
A3
B3
A1
B1
Reverser
With pre-wired connector LU9M RC

S1 S2 S3
LU6M 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil 81 84 A3 B3 A1 B1 A2 82
Reverser Block
Basic scheme
13 A2 21
A1
A2
A2
LU2M
14
22
S2
S1
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
S3
LU6M
(1)
B3 Reverse B1 Forward A3Reverse A1 Forward
S1 Start next stage S2 Electrical interlocking S3 Maintaining contact B1 Maintain forward running B3 Maintain reverse running A1 Pulse forward running A2 Common A3 Pulse reverse running (1) Electronically operated bistable electromagnet.
Add-on contact blocks

LUA1 C11
17/NO 95/NC 18/NO 96/NC
Add-on contact modules

LUFN 20
33/NO 43/NO 34/NO 44/NO
LUA1 C20
17/NO 97/NO 18/NO 98/NO
LUFN 11
43/NO 31/NC 44/NO 32/NC
A2
LUFN 02
31/NC 41/NC 32/NC 42/NC
2/166
82
2.3
Schemes (continued)
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Control units
Standard control unit LUCA
Basic scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6 LUCA Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3 Supply and Detection of start sequence Thermal overload memory Power Base Interface Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3 Supply and Detection of start sequence Thermal overload Test A1 A1 A2 A2 Interface module 7 8 9 10 11 12 Power Bas Interface
Advanced control unit LUCB, LUCC, LUCD

Basic scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6 LUCp
Control A.S.I.C.
tr
Control A.S.I.C.
2
tr
1 and 2Trips 3 and 4Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C
1 and 2Trips 3 and 4Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C 7 Load 8 Thermal status/Set 9 Reset mode/Reset 10 (lm/Ir) 11 Vc2 12 Vc1
2.3
Multifunction control unit LUCM

LUCM 24 V Aux
Multifunction Control Unit D(B) D(A) +5V 0V 4 5 7 6 8
Basic scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6
LUCM
Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3 Supply and detection of start sequence Thermal overload memory Power Base Interface Display and Parameter Entry
ESC ENT
Control A.S.I.C.
RS485
D(B) D(A) +5V 0V
4 5 RJ45 7 8
Supply 24 V Aux
A1
A2
Interface module
9 10 11 12
1 and 2Trips 3 and 4Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C 7 Load 8 N/C 9 Load 10 (lm/Ir) 11 Rx/Tx 12 Vc1
2/167
Schemes (continued)
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Function modules
Alarm LUF W10
LUFW 10 07 08
Alarms Module
2
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit
LUFW 10 Input interface LED Supply
Bistable Relay
2.3
07 08
Indication of motor load LUFV 2

4-20 mA output
LUFV 2 4...20 mA 24 V Aux
Analogue output Module 24 V Aux NC
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit
LUFV 2 Input interface P - Analogue/Digital converter Insulation Digital/Analogue converter Voltage/Current converter Supply
4...20 mA 100 < load < 500
c 24 V c 30 V max and 40 mA min
2/168
Schemes (continued)
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Communication modules
Communication module ASILUF C5
Without pre-wired coil connection
Modbus communication module LULC

Without pre-wired coil connection
ASILUF C5
AS-Interface Module
LUL C033
Modbus Module
OA1
Com
OA3
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
LI1
LI2
AS-i
COM
D(B) D(A) 0V
6 4 5 8
24 V
24 V Aux
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
ASILUF C5
LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil
AS-Interface Module
LUL C033
Modbus Module
LO1
AS-i
LI1
LU9B N11C Pre wired coil
LI2
COM
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
D(B) D(A) 0V
4 5 6 8
24 V
24 V Aux
2.3
ASILUF C5 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil AS-Interface Module AS-i
LUL C033
Modbus Module
LO1
LI1
LU9M RC Pre wired coil
LI2
COM
Basic scheme
ASILUF C5
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller
x6
Ready-Fault-Pole
LULC 033
LED
Control unit interface
Controller interface Ready-Fault-Pole

D(B)
LED
Address
RS485
D(A)
4 5 Modbus RJ45 0V 8
AL1
A2SI
Output Interface
Output Interface
Com OA1 OA3 LO1
Supply
I/O Interface
24 V
LI1 LI2
AL2
Com
OA1
Parallel wiring module

Without pre-wired coil connection With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
OA3
c 24 V
AS-i
24 V Aux
COM
LUF C00
Parallel bus Module
LUF C00 LU9M RC Pre wired coil
Parallel bus Module Liaison // RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Com
OA1
OA3
Liaison // RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Basic scheme
LUF C00
LUF C00 LU9B N11C Pre wired coil
Parallel bus Module Liaison // RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ReadyFault-Pole
RJ45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Forward running Reverse running Output common Position button Pole state Reserved Fault Input common
Com
OA3
OA1
D(B) D(A) 0V
4 5 8
24 V
24 V Aux
2/169
Schemes (continued)
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Communication modules (continued)

Wiring hub and splitter box
Modbus hub LU9 GC3
X1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LU9 GC3 Forward running Reverse running Output common N/C Pole state N/C Fault Input common
Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G02

X1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LU9 G02
RJ 45
X2 X9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RJ 45 NC NC NC D (B) RJ 45 D (A) + NC NC 0V
X2
RJ 45
X3
X3
(1)
RJ 45
RJ 45
X4
X4
2.3
RJ 45
RJ 45
X5 Forward running N/C Output common N/C Pole state N/C Fault Input common
X5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 X10 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Forward running X1 Forward running X2 Forward running X3 Forward running X4 Forward running X5 Forward running X6 Forward running X7 Forward running X8 Reverse running X1 Reverse running X2 Reverse running X3 Reverse running X4 N/C N/C N/C N/C + c 24 V - c 24 V + c 24 V - c 24 V
RJ 45
X10
RJ 45
X6
RJ 45
RJ 45
X6
X7
RJ 45
(2)
RJ 45 Shielding
X7
X8
RJ 45
RJ 45
X8
RJ 45
Shielding
Shielding
c 24 V Outputs Com 0V
24 V Aux Inputs Com
D (B)
D (A) +
0V
(1) 20-way HE 10 input connector. (2) 20-way HE 10 output connector. (3) Corresponding to colour of the HE 10 connector pin wires.
Gateways
LUF P1 LUF P7 LUF P9
LUF P1 24 V Aux X2 Fip I/O
Gateway Fip I/O - Modbus D(B) D(A) 0V X1
LUF P7 24 V Aux
Gateway Profibus - Modbus D(B) D(A) 0v X2 Profibus 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ 45
X9 Fault X1 Fault X2 Fault X3 Fault X4 Fault X5 Fault X6 Fault X7 Fault X8 Pole state X1 Pole state X2 Pole state X3 Pole state X4 Pole state X5 Pole state X6 Pole state X7 Pole state X8 + 24 V Aux - 24 V Aux + 24 V Aux - 24 V Aux
Colours of TSX CDPppp connection cable wires (3)

1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Grey 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red 9 Black 10 Violet 11 Grey-pink 12 Red-blue 13 White-green 14 Brown-green 15 White-yellow 16 Yellow-brown 17 White-grey 18 Grey-brown 19 White-pink 20 Pink-brown
LUF P9 24 V Aux
Gateway DeviceNet - Modbus X2 DeviceNet 1 2 3 4 5 X1 D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 5 8
4 5 8
2/170
Control unit information
TeSys Model U
Starter-controllers
Data profile under AS-Interface

Control unit present in the product Status Commands Standard D0 D1 D0 D1 Ready (available) Poles closed (running) Forward running Reverse running Advanced Multifunction
Register addresses accessible under Modbus

Control unit present in the product Identification Register 0Register 99 WordsBits Commercial reference, serial number, software version Log Register 100Register 450 WordsBits Fault log, Operating log, Log of last 5 trips Register 451Register 464 WordsBits Alarm signalling (bits), Fault signalling (bits) Register 465Register 473 Words Irms phase 1, phase 2, phase 3. Motor load, thermal status Earth leakage current. Phase imbalance and phase failure Register 474Register 599 WordsBits Reserved Configuration Register 600Register 699 WordsBits Protection and alarm thresholds, fallback mode and reset mode Commands Register 700Register 714 WordsBits Commands Status and values Register 452 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 3 Word Word Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Value 0 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Commands Register 700 Register 704 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 615 Short-circuit fault Overcurrent fault Thermal overload fault Ready (available) Poles closed Fault Alarms Tripped (TRIP position) Fault acknowledgement allowed Reserved Motor running Motor current % (bit 0) Motor current % (bit 1) Motor current % (bit 2) Motor current % (bit 3) Motor current % (bit 4) Motor current % (bit 5) Reserved Motor starting Thermal overload alarm Thermal status value Motor load value (Im/Ir) Manual reset on thermal overload fault Remote reset on thermal overload fault Automatic reset on thermal overload fault Fallback mode validation Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged Outputs OA1 and OA3 forced to 0 Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged, signalling existence of communication failure Outputs OA1 forced to 1 and OA3 unchanged Outputs OA3 forced to 1 and OA1 unchanged LO1 output command OA1 output command OA3 output command Reserved Fault acknowledgement Reserved Trip test Reserved Status Values Standard Advanced Multifunction
2.3
Register 455
Register 461 Register 465 Register 466 Configuration Register 602
Register 682
Data accessible
2/171
Recommended application TeSys Model U Starter-controllers schemes

Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter-controllers LUB

1/L1 3/L2 4/T2 V1 M 3 5/L3 W1 6/T3
2
Control Unit
2.3
2-wire control via 2-position switch 3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact
U1
2/T1
A1
A2
A1
A2
Running Stop
13 14
Connection of a motor load indicator module LUFV 2
LUFV 2 4...20 mA 24 V Aux
Analogue output Module 24 V Aux NC
Connection of thermal overload fault signalling modules LUF DA10

Automatic reset
V1
Remote reset
V1
07
08
07 Automatic or remote reset
LUF DA10 X1 Z1 Z2
08
LUF DA10 X1 Z1 Z2
Automatic or remote reset
X2
24230 V /
24230 V /
A2
A1
X2
A2
A1
S2
QF1
QF1
S1
S1
2/172
Recommended application TeSys Model U Starter-controllers schemes (continued)

Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter controllers LUB (continued)

Control via communication module ASIL UFC5
Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection With local control
ASILUF C5 Com OA1 OA3
AS-Interface Module AS-Interface
Adjustment
A2
A1
Bus AS-Interface Normal
Bus AS-Interface
A2
A1
2.3
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C Without pre-wired coil connection With local control
ASILUF C5 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil
Bus AS-Interface
A2 A1
Bus AS-Interface
Adjustment
Control via Modbus communication module LULC 033

Without pre-wired coil connection With multifunction control unit LUCM Without pre-wired coil connection
LULC 033
Normal
Modbus Module 24 V Aux
OA1
Com
OA3
LO1
LI1
LI2
S1
S2 Modbus
A2
A1
Bus AS-Interface
A2 A1
LUCM 24 V Aux
Multifunction Control Unit D(B) D(A) GND RJ45
Emergency Stop
4 5 8 6 Bus Modbus RS 485
D(B) D(A) GND

6 4 5 8
2/173

Reversing
Reversing starter-controllers LUB

2-wire control via 3-position switch
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact
LU2B
Reverser Motor Controller A3 B3 A1 B1 A2
LU2B
Reverser Motor Controller A3 B3 A1 B1 B1 A2

D(B) D(A) GND
2
Control Unit Stop forward running and reverse running Stop forward running 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 forward running Stop reverse running
Start forward running
Start reverse running
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
M 3
2.3
Control via communication module ASIL UFC5
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC With multifunction control unit LUCM
W1 6/T3
Stop reverse running
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact and limit switches
ASILUF C5 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil
LU2B
A3
B3
A1
Bus AS-Interface
Stop Limit switch forward running forward running
LUCM 24 V Aux
Multifunction Control Unit D(B) D(A) GND
Stop forward running and reverse running
Stop Limit switch reverse running reverse running
4 5 8 6 Bus Modbus RS 485
Control via communication module ASILUF C5

Without pre-wired coil connection With running direction pilot lights and limit switches
Control via Modbus communication module LULC 033

Without pre-wired coil connection With local control
LU2B A3 B3
OA1
Com
OA3
Com
LO1
OA1
OA3
A1
B1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
LI1
LI2
ASILUF C5
LU2B
LULC 033
Modbus Module 24 V Aux
6 4 5 8
Bus AS-Interface
Modbus
Adjustment
53
54
81
84 82
Emergency Stop
2/174
Normal
A2

Reversing
Reversing starter-controllers LUB + LU6M

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Control Unit
2/T1
4/T2
1/L1
3/L2
4/T2 V1 M 3
U1 2/T1
W1 6/T3
5/L3
6/T3
2.3
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact
A1 13 14
A2
21
22
S1
S2 B3
LU6M
A3
A1
S3 Reverser Block B1 A2
Stop forward running and reverse running S5
Stop forward running S6
Start forward running S8
Stop reverse running S7
Start reverse running S9
2-wire control via 3-position switch
A1
A2
21
22
S1
S2 B3
LU6M
A3
A1
S3 Reverser Block B1 A2
forward running Stop reverse running
2/175
Characteristics
Contactors
Type LC1-F (185 to 800 A) Control circuit: a.c. or d.c. supply
Type
LC1-F185
LC1-F225
LC1-F265
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V V kV 1000 1500 8 1000 1500 8 1000 1500 8
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certications Degree of protection
Coil not connected to the power circuit
IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1 JEM 1038 CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMR0S Conforming to IEC/EN 60529 Conforming to VDE 0106 IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9-F Protection against direct nger contact with shrouds LA9-F TH C C C m - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 40+ 70 3000
Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device
Standard version Storage Operation Permissible at Uc (1)
2.4
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions
Without derating Without derating
With derating Apply the following derating coefcients: 0.75 on the pull-in voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1. Apply the following derating coefcients: 1.15 on the pull-in voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1. In either case, neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and mechanical durabilities can be assured. Forbidden
Shock resistance (2) 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance (2) 5300 Hz
Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open
gn gn gn
7 15 2
7 15 2
6 15 2
Contactor closed gn 5 5 5 (1) In these conditions, it is recommended that LX9-F coils be used for contactor sizes F185 to F225. (2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). For conditions requiring a much higher value resistance to mechanical shock, the use of our shock-proof contactors is recommended. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Schemes: page 2/215
LC1-F330
LC1-F400
LC1-F500
LC1-F630
LC1-F780
LC1-F800
1000 1500 8
1000 1500 8
1000 1500 8
1000 1500 8
1000 1500 8
1000 1500 8
IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1 JEM 1038 CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMR0S IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9-F Protection against direct nger contact with shrouds LA9-F TH - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 40+ 70 3000 - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 5+ 55 UL, CSA
2.4
Apply the following derating coefcients: 0.75 on the pull-in voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1.
Apply the following derating coefcients: 1.15 on the pull-in voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1. In either case, neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and mechanical durabilities can be assured.
6 15 2
6 15 1.5
9 15 2
6 15 2
5 15 2.5
6 15 2
5 5 4 4 5.5 4 (1) In these conditions, it is recommended that LX9-F coils be used for contactor sizes F185 to F225. (2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). For conditions requiring a much higher value resistance to mechanical shock, the use of our shock-proof contactors is recommended. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
2/177
Contactors
Type LC1-F (185 to 800 A) Control circuit: a.c. or d.c. supply
Type
LC1-F185
LC1-F225
LC1-F265
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue 440 V) In AC-3, 55 C In AC-1, 40 C Up to Of the operational current (1) 40 C A A V Hz A 3 or 4 185 275 1000 162/3200 275 3 or 4 225 315 1000 162/3200 315 3 or 4 265 350 1000 162/3200 350
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits Conventional rated thermal current Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity Permissible short time rating From cold state, no current owing for preceding 60 minutes 40 C
I rms conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 A I rms conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 A For 10 s For 30 s For 1 min For 3 min A A A A A A A A m W W
Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4 Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4 1500 920 740 500 400 200 315 315 0.33 12 25 Maximum c.s.a. 2 25 x 3 150 150 8 1800 1000 850 560 440 250 315 315 0.32 16 32 2 32 x 4 185 185 10 2200 1230 950 620 480 315 500 400 0.3 21 37 2 32 x 3 240 240 10
2.4
Short-circuit protection by fuses U 440 V
For 10 min Motor circuit (type aM) With thermal overload relay (type gG) gG fuses Average impedance per pole Power dissipation per pole for the above operational currents Connections/cabling Bar Cable with lug Cable with connector Bolt diameter Tightening torque At Ith and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1 Number of bars Bar size
mm mm2 mm2 mm
Power circuit connections N.m 18 35 35 (1) Sine wave without interference. Above these values, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Schemes: page 2/215
LC1-F330
LC1-F400
LC1-F500
LC1-F630
LC1-F780
LC1-F800
3 or 4 330 400 1000 162/3200 400
2, 3 or 4 400 500 1000 162/3200 500
2, 3 or 4 500 700 1000 162/3200 700
2, 3 or 4 630 1000 1000 162/3200 1000
3 or 4 780 1600 1000 162/3200 1600
3 800 1000 1000 162/3200 1000
Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4 Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4 2650 1800 1300 900 750 400 500 500 0.28 31 44 Maximum c.s.a. 2 30 x 5 240 10 3600 2400 1700 1200 1000 400 630 500 0.26 42 65 2 30 x 5 2 x 150 10 4200 3200 2400 1500 1200 500 800 800 0.18 45 88 2 40 x 5 2 x 240 10 5050 4400 3400 2200 1600 630 800 1000 0.12 48 120 2 60 x 5 12 6250 5600 4600 3000 2200 800 1000 2 x 800 (2) 0.10 60 250 2 100 x 5 2 x 12 5500 4600 3600 2600 1700 800 1000 1000 0.12 77 120 2 60 x 5 12 58
2.4
35 35 35 58 58 (2) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturer's recommendations.
2/179
Contactors
Type LC1-F (185 to 800 A) Control circuit: a.c. supply
Type
LC1-F185
LC1-F225
LC1-F265
Control circuit characteristics with LX1 coil (1)

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( 55 C) 50 or 60 Hz coils 50 or 60 Hz V 241000
Operational Drop-out
0.851.1 Uc 0.350.55 Uc
0.851.1 Uc 0.350.55 Uc
40400 Hz coils
Operational Drop-out
a 50 Hz Inrush
50 Hz coil 40400 Hz coil Cos
VA VA
805 0.3
805 0.3 55 0.3 970 0.3 66 0.3 18 24 2035 715 10 2400
650 0.9 10 0.9 650 0.9 10 0.9 8 4065 100170 10 2400
2.4
Sealed
VA VA
55 0.3
a 60 Hz Inrush
VA VA
970 0.3
Sealed
VA VA
66 0.3
Heat dissipation Operating time (2) Closing C Opening O Mechanical durability at Uc Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature 55 C Cabling Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour
W ms ms
1824 2035 715 10 2400 Min./max. c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1 or 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque Mechanical latching
1 or 2 conductors
Due to their rating, LC1-F contactors cannot be tted with LA6-DK add-on mechanical latch blocks. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1-F. See pages 2/282 to 2/290. (1) LX4 coil with DR5-TE rectier for LC1-F800 (2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
Schemes: page 2/215
LC1-F330
LC1-F400
LC1-F500
LC1-F630
LC1-F780
LC1-F800
24...1000
481000
481000
110 500
110 400
0.851.1 Uc 0.350.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.4 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc
650 0.9 10 0.9 650 0.9 10 0.9 8 4065 100170 10 2400 Min./max. c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1075 0.9 15 0.9 1075 0.9 15 0.9 14 4075 100170 10 2400
1100 0.9 18 0.9 1100 0.9 18 0.9 18 4075 100170 10 2400
1650 0.9 22 0.9 1650 0.9 22 0.9 20 4080 100200 5 1200
2100 0.9 50 0.9 2100 0.9 50 0.9 2 x 22 4080 130230 5 600
1900 15 1900 15 25 6080 150250 5 600
2.4
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
Due to their rating, LC1-F contactors cannot be tted with LA6-DK add-on mechanical latch blocks. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1-F. See pages 2/282 to 2/290.
2/181
Contactors
Type LC1-F (185 to 800 A) Control circuit: d.c. supply
Type
LC1-F185
LC1-F225
LC1-F265
Control circuit characteristics with LX4 coil

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) c Operational Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc c Inrush Sealed Average operating time at Uc (1) Closing C Opening O W W ms ms V 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 800 5 3040 3050 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 800 5 3040 3050 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 750 5 4050 4065
Control voltage limits ( 55 C)
2.4
Mechanical durability at Uc Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature 55 C
Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour 10 2400 Min./max. c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2 10 2400 10 2400
Cabling Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductors 2 conductors Flexible cable with cable end 1 con ductor 2 conductors Solid cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors Tightening torque Mechanical latching
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
Due to their rating, LC1-F contactors cannot be tted with LA6-DK add-on mechanical latch blocks. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1-F. See pages 2/282 to 2/290. (1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
Schemes: page 2/215
LC1-F330
LC1-F400
LC1-F500
LC1-F630
LC1-F780
LC1-F800
24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 750 5 4050 4065
48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 1000 6 5060 4560
48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 1100 6 5060 4560
48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 1600 9 6070 4050
110440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.4 Uc 2 x 1000 2 x 21 7080 100130
110400 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 1900 15 6080 4050
Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
2.4
10 2400 Min./max. c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2 10 2400 10 2400 5 1200 5 600 5 600
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
Due to their rating, LC1-F contactors cannot be tted with LA6-DK add-on mechanical latch blocks. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1-F. See pages 2/282 to 2/290. (1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
2/183
References
Contactors
Contactors for motor control in utilisation category AC-3 (185 to 800 A) Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
a or c
Weight (with coil tted)
3-pole contactors
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW kW kW kW kW kW kW Rated operational current in AC-3 440 V up to A 185 Basic reference. Coil to be ordered separately (2) Screw xing, cabling (1) LC1-F185
kg 4.650
2
LC1-F225
55
90
100
100
110
110
100
63
110
110
110
129
129
100
225
LC1-F225
4.750
75
132
140
140
160
160
147
265
LC1-F265
7.440
100
160
180
200
200
220
160
330
LC1-F330
8.600
2.4
110
200
220
250
257
280
185
400
LC1-F400
9.100
147 LC1-F630
250
280
295
355
335
335
500
LC1-F500
11.350
200
335
375
400
400
450
450
630
LC1-F630
18.600
220
400
425
425
450
475
450
780
LC1-F780
39.500
250
450
450
450
450
475
450
800
LC1-F800
18.750
Note: auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 2/192 to 2/197. (1) Power terminal protection shrouds available separately for contactors LC1-F185 to LC1-F630 (see page 2/196). (2) Coil to be ordered separately. For standard control circuit voltages see pages 2/198 to 2/207. (For other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608).
Schemes: page 2/115
References
Contactors
Contactors for control in utilisation category AC-1 (275 to 1600 A) Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
a or c
Weight (with coil tted)
2, 3 and 4-pole contactors

Maximum current in AC-1 ( 40 C) A 275 LC1-F1854 3 4 315 3 4 350 3 4 400 3 4 500 2 3 4 LC1-F4004 700 2 3 4 1000 2 3 LC1-F5002 LC1-F500 LC1-F5004 LC1-F6302 LC1-F630 or LC1-F800 4 1250 2 3 4 LC1-F6304 1600 3 4 LC1-F6304 LC1-F6302S011 LC1-F630S011 LC1-F6304S011 LC1-F780 LC1-F7804 9.750
11.350 12.950 15.500 18.600 18.750 21.500 15.500 18.600 21.500 39.500 48.000
Number of poles
Basic reference. Coil to be ordered separately (2) Screw xing, cabling (1) LC1-F185 LC1-F1854 LC1-F225 LC1-F2254 LC1-F265 LC1-F2654 LC1-F330 LC1-F3304 LC1-F4002 LC1-F400 LC1-F4004
kg 4.650 5.450 4.750 5.550 7.440 8.540 8.600 9.500 8.000 9.100
10.200
2.4
Note: auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 2/192 to 2/197. (1) Power terminal protection shrouds available separately for contactors LC1-F185 to LC1-F630 (see page 2/196). (2) Coil to be ordered separately. Standard control circuit voltages, see previous page.
References
Contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control in utilisation category AC-3 (185 to 265 A) pre-assembled Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
a or c
3-pole reversing contactors (horizontally mounted) (1)

Pre-wired power connections Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors. 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 LC2-F185 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW kW kW kW kW kW kW 55 90 100 100 110 110 100 Operational, current in AC-3 440 V up to A 185 Maximum operational voltage Contactors supplied without coil (2) Complete reference Fixing, cabling (3) Weight
V 1000
LC2-F185
kg
10.100
63
110
110
110
129
129
100
225
1000
LC2-F225
14.200
75
132
140
140
160
160
147
265
1000
LC2-F265
16.480
2.4

Description Power terminal protection shrouds For reversing contactors LC2-F185 Quantity required 2 Reference
LA9-F702
Weight kg 0.250
LC2-F225, F265
LA9-F703
0.250
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules
See pages 2/192 to 2/197
(1) Fitted with mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LA1DNp1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 2/193. For the accessories, see pages 2/194 to 2/197. (2) Coils to be ordered separately: - a.c. supply, see pages 2/198 and 2/199. - d.c. supply, see page 2/201. (3) Screw xing Power terminals can be protected against direct nger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately, see above.
Schemes: page 2/219
References
Contactors
Changeover contactor pairs for control in utilisation category AC-1 (275 to 350 A) pre-assembled Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
a or c
4-pole changeover contactor pairs (horizontally mounted) (1)

Pre-wired power connections Utilisation category AC-1 Non inductive loads Maximum operational current < 40 C A 275 Maximum operational voltage V 1000
LC2-F1854
Contactors supplied without coil (2) Complete reference Fixing, cabling (3)
Weight
LC2-F1854
kg
12.100
315
1000
LC2-F2254
15.200
350
1000
LC2-F2654
19.480

Description Power terminal protection shrouds For changeover pairs LC2-F1854 Quantity required 2 Reference
LA9-F707
Weight kg 0.250
2.4
LC2-F2254, F2654
LA9-F708
0.250
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules
See pages 2/192 to 2/197
(1) Fitted with mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LA1DNp1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 2/193. For the accessories, see pages 2/194 to 2/197. (2) Coils to be ordered separately: - a.c. supply, see pages 2/198 and 2/199. - d.c. supply, see page 2/201. (3) Screw xing. Power terminals can be protected against direct nger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately, see above.
Combinations
Contactors
Reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs LC2-F Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Horizontally mounted
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630 LC1-F800
Mechanical interlocks
LA9-Fp970 (2)
Sets of power connections

Reversing contactors LA9-Fppp76 (2)
L1 L2 L3
3-pole changeover contactor pairs (1) LA9-Fppp82 (2)

1 1/L3 3 1/L2 5 1/L1 1 2/L1 3 2/L2 5 2/L3 L3 6
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
L1
Vertically mounted 2.4

Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630 LC1-F800 Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings, see page 2/190
LA9-FG4G LA9-FH4H LA9-FJ4J LA9-FK4K LA9-FL4L
LC1-F780
LA9-FX970
(1) For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 2/190 and 2/191. (2) Complete references: see page 2/189.
2/188
L2
A2
A1
References
Contactors
Reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs LC2-F Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating
Contactor type (1) Set of power connections Reference Weight kg Mechanical interlock Kit reference
a c
or
Weight kg
For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control Horizontally mounted
LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630 or F800 LA9-FG976 LA9-F22576 LA9-FH976 LA9-FJ976 LA9-FJ976 LA9-FK976 LA9-FL976
0.780 1.500 1.500 2.100 2.100 2.350 3.800
LA9-FG970 LA9-FG970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FL970
0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150
Vertically mounted
LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 or F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630 or F800 LC1-F780
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (3)
LA9-FG4G LA9-FG4G LA9-FH4H LA9-FJ4J LA9-FK4K LA9-FL4L LA9-FX970 (3)
0.350 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220 6.100
For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs (4) Horizontally mounted

LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630 or F800 LA9-FG982 LA9-F22582 LA9-FH982 LA9-FJ982 LA9-FJ982 LA9-FK982 LA9-FL982
2.4
0.610 1.200 1.200 1.800 1.800 2.300 3.400
0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150
Vertically mounted
LC1-F185 (2) LA9-FG4G 0.350 LC1-F225 (2) LA9-FG4G 0.350 LC1-F265 or F330 (2) LA9-FH4H 1.060 LC1-F400 (2) LA9-FJ4J 1.200 LC1-F500 (2) LA9-FK4K 1.200 LC1-F630 or F800 (2) LA9-FL4L 1.220 LC1-F780 (5) LA9-FX970 (5) 7.800 (1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 2/184 and 2/185. Order 2 contact blocks LA1-DNp1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors: see page 2/193. To order accessories, see pages 2/194 to 2/197. (2) With the exception of contactors LC1-F780, all power connections are to be made by the customer. (3) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 3 power connecting links. (4) For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 2/190 and 2/191. (5) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 4 power connecting links.
Combinations
Contactors
Changeover contactor pairs LC2-F Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: LC1-F1854 LC1-F2254 LC1-F2654 LC1-F3304 LC1-F4004 LC1-F5004 LC1-F6304
LA9-Fp970
Set of power connections

4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1) LA9-Fppp77
1N
3 1/L3
5 1/L2
7 1/L1
1 2/L1
3 2/L2
5 2/L3
A1
7 N 8
2N A2 A1
A2
4 L2
L1
Vertically mounted
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: LC1-F1854 LC1-F2254 LC1-F2654 LC1-F3304 LC1-F4004 LC1-F5004 LC1-F6304
Assembly A LA9-FG4G Assembly B LA9-FH4H LA9-FJ4J LA9-FK4K LA9-FL4L Assembly C LA9-FX971
2.4
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings, type: LC1-F185 or F1854 LC1-F225 or F2254 LC1-F265 or F2654 LC1-F330 or F3304 LC1-F400 or F4004 LC1-F500 or F5004 LC1-F630 or F6304 LC1-F800
Assembly B LA9-FH4F, LA9-FH4G LA9-FJ4F, LA9-FJ4G LA9-FK4F, LA9-FK4G LA9-FL4F, LA9-FL4G
Assembly C LA9-FJ4H LA9-FK4H, LA9-FK4J LA9-FL4H, LA9-FL4J and LA9-FL4K
Contactor pairs assembled using 3 contactors of identical or different ratings, type: (2) LC1-F185 or F1854 LC1-F225 or F2254 LC1-F265 or F2654 LC1-F330 or F3304 LC1-F400 or F4004 LC1-F500 or F5004 LC1-F630 or F6304 LC1-F800
LA9-Fp4p4p: Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Important: the contactor ratings must be in decreasing size from top to bottom. (1) For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 2/188 and 2/189. (2) NB. Closing of one of the contactors prevents closing of the other two.
2/190
L3
References
Contactors
Changeover contactor pairs LC2-F Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
a or c
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating

For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (2) Contactor Set of power connections type Reference Weight (1) kg Horizontally mounted
LC1-F1854 LC1-F2254 LC1-F2654 LC1-F3304 LC1-F4004 LC1-F5004 LC1-F6304 LA9-FG977 LA9-F22577 LA9-FH977 LA9-FJ977 LA9-FJ977 LA9-FK977 LA9-FL977
Mechanical interlock Kit reference
Weight kg
0.610 1.200 1.200 1.800 1.800 2.300 3.400
0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150
Vertically mounted
LC1-F1854 LC1-F2254 LC1-F2654 or F3304 LC1-F4004 LC1-F5004 LC1-F6304 LC1-F7804
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (4)
LA9-FG4G LA9-FG4G LA9-FH4H LA9-FJ4J LA9-FK4K LA9-FL4L LA9-FX971 (4)
0.350 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220 7.800
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings 2.4

For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs Contactor type (1) At bottom At top Vertically mounted
LC1-F185 or F1854 or LC1-F225 or F2254 LC1-F265 or F2654 LC1-F330 or F3304 LC1-F400 or F4004 LC1-F500 or F5004 LC1-F630, F6304 or F800 LC1-F400 or F4004 LC1-F500 or F5004 LC1-F630, F6304 or F800 LC1-F500 or F5004 LC1-F630, F6304 or F800 LC1-F630, F6304 or F800 LA9-FH4G LA9-FH4G LA9-FJ4G LA9-FK4G LA9-FL4G LA9-FJ4H LA9-FK4H LA9-FL4H LA9-FK4J LA9-FL4J LA9-FL4K
Mechanical interlock Kit reference
Weight kg
0.860 0.860 0.940 0.940 0.950 1.130 1.130 1.140 1.200 1.210 1.210
LC1-F265 or F2654 or LC1-F330 or F3304 LC1-F400 or F4004 LC1-F500 or F5004
For assembly of reversers using 3 contactors, vertically mounted Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 2/184 and 2/185. Order 2 contact blocks LA1-DNp1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 2/193. To order accessories, see pages 2/194 to 2/197. (2) For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 2/188 and 2/189. (3) All power connections are to be made by the customer. (4) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 4 power connecting links.
LAD-N10, N01
LAD-N, C LA1-DN10, DN01 LC1-F
2.4
LAD-T, S
LAD-R
LA1-DX, DY, DZ
2/192
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F Auxiliary contact blocks

For use in normal operating environments Number Max. number of blocks per contactor of Side clip-on mounting contacts Composition Reference Weight
kg 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 (1)
LAD-N10 LAD-N01 LAD-N11 LAD-N20 LAD-N02 LAD-N22 LAD-N13 LAD-N40 LAD-N04 LAD-N31 LAD-C22
0.020 0.020 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050
With terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 2 4 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2

LAD-N11P LAD-N11G LAD-N22P LAD-N22G
0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050
2.4
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts
For use in harsh industrial environments Number Max. number of blocks per contactor of Side clip-on mounting contacts Composition Reference Weight
kg 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (2) 2 1 1
LA1-DX20 LA1-DY20 LA1-DZ40 LA1-DZ31
0.040 0.040 0.050 0.050
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Number of contacts 1 N/O + 1 N/C Max. number of blocks per contactor Side clip-on mounting 2 Time delay Type Range (s) On-delay 0.13 (3) 0.130 10180 130 (4) Reference
Weight
kg
LAD-T0 LAD-T2 LAD-T4 LAD-S2
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
Off-delay 0.13 (3) LAD-R0 0.130 LAD-R2 10180 LAD-R4 (1) Including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break. (2) Device tted with 4 terminals for earth screen continuity. (3) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. (4) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F Accessories
Suppressor blocks
Operating limit: 220 V-50/60 Hz Description Application Block only For coils LX1-FG, FH For coils LX1-FJ, FK, FL, FX LX9-FF, FG, FH LA9-D09981 LA9-F980 Suppressor block bracket
LA9-D09981
Reference
LA9-F980 LA9-D09980
Weight kg 0.030 0.030 0.010
Cabling accessories
Links for parallel connection of poles (in pairs) For use on 4-pole contactors LC1-F1854 LC1-F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004 Set of 4 links Set reference
LA9-FG602 LA9-FH602 LA9-FK602 LA9-FL602
Weight kg 0.350 1.000 1.750 3.000
2.4
LC1-F5004 LC1-F6304 Links for star connection of 3 poles LC1-F185 LC1-F225, F265, F330, F400 LC1-F500 LA9-Fp601 LC1-F630, F800 Control circuit voltage take-off from power terminals Sold in For use Mounted on lots of on contactors bolt size LC1-F185 LC1-F225F500 LC1-F630, F800 M8 M10 M12
10 10 10
LA9-Fp602
LA9-FG601 LA9-FH601 LA9-FK601 LA9-FL601
0.050 0.120 0.180 0.550
Unit reference DZ3-GA3 DZ3-HA3 DZ3-JA3
Weight kg 0.004 0.006 0.009
DZ3-FA3
Dimensions: pages 2/212 and 2/213 2/194
References
Contactors
Right-angled connectors
For contactors or thermal overload relays For use on Connector Contactors Thermal Width Type overload relays (1) LC1-F185 LR9-F5p69, F5p71 LR9-F69, F71 20 mm Rear Side Large surface area LC1-F225, F265, F330, F400 LR9-F7p75 LR9-F75 25 mm Rear Side Large surface area LC1-F500 LA9-Fp979 LR9-F7p79, F7p81 LR9-F79, F81 30 mm Rear Side Large surface area LC1-F630, F800 LR9-F7p81 40 mm Rear Side Large surface area Set of 3 connectors Set reference
LA9-FG981 LA9-FG979 LA9-FG980 LA9-FJ981 LA9-FJ979 LA9-FJ980 LA9-FK981 LA9-FK979 LA9-FK980 LA9-FL981 LA9-FL979 LA9-FL980
LA9-Fp981
Weight kg 0.080 0.350 0.200 0.430 0.750 0.490 0.480 0.920 0.800 1.210 2.570 3.190
2.4
For reversing contactors or star-delta contactors combined with a thermal overload relay For use on Width of Set of 3 busbars Contactors Thermal connector Set reference overload relays (1) plates LA9-Fp980 LC1-F185 LR9-F5p57, F5p63 LR9-F5p71 LR9-F71 LC1-F225 and F265 LR9-F5p71 LR9-F71 LR9-F7p75, F7p79 LR9-F75, F79 LC1-F330 and F400 LR9-F7p75, F7p79 LR9-F75, F79 LC1-F400 LR9-F7p81 LR9-F81 LR9-F7p75, F7p79, LR9-F7p81 LR9-F75, F79; F81 20 mm 25 mm 25 mm 25 mm 25 mm
LA7-F402 LA7-F407 LA7-F403 LA7-F404 LA7-F404
Weight kg 0.110 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.160
25 mm
LA7-F404
0.160
LC1-F500
30 mm
LA7-F405
0.270
LC1-F630 and F800 LR9-F7p81 LR9-F81
40 mm
LA7-F406
0.600
(1) For protection relays, class 10, replace the dot with a 3 and for class 20, replace the dot with a 5.
2/195
Contactors
Insulated terminal blocks

For use on 3-pole contactors LC1-F185 LA9-F103 Cabling Tightening Set of 2 blocks Set reference
LA9-F103
Weight kg 0.560
1 x 16150 mm2 or 2 x 1695 mm2
4 mm hexagonal socket key
Power terminal protection shrouds

For use with 2, 3 and 4-pole contactors LC1-F185 Number of shrouds per set 6 Set reference
Weight kg
LA9-F702
0.250
LA9-F702 LC1-F225, F265, F330, F400 and F4002, F500 and F5002 6
LA9-F703
0.250
2.4
LC1-F630, F6302 and F800 6
LA9-F704
0.250
LC1-F1854
LA9-F707
0.300
LC1-F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004, F5004
LA9-F708
0.300
LC1-F6304
LA9-F709
0.300
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F Spare parts
Main contact sets

Per pole: 2 xed contacts and 1 moving contact, 2 deectors, 1 backplate, xing screws and washers For Type Replacement Reference contactor for 2-pole LC1-F4002 LC1-F5002 LC1-F6302 LC1-F6302S011 LC1-F185, F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330, F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630 LC1-F780 LC1-F800 LC1-F630S011 4-pole LC1-F1854, F2254 LC1-F2654 LC1-F3304, F4004 LC1-F5004 LC1-F6304 LC1-F7804 LC1-F6304S011 2 poles 2 poles 2 poles 2 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 1 pole 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 1 pole 4 poles 4 poles
LA5-F400802 LA5-F500802 LA5-F630802 LA5-F630802S011 LA5-FG431 LA5-FH431 LA5-F400803 LA5-F500803 LA5-F630803 LA5-F780801 (1) LA5-F780803 LA5-F800803 LA5-F630803S011 LA5-FG441 LA5-FH441 LA5-F400804 LA5-F500804 LA5-F630804 LA5-F780801 (1) LA5-F780804 LA5-F630804S011
Weight kg 1.350 1.950 4.700 4.800 0.350 0.660 2.000 2.950 6.100 4.700 13.200 6.100 6.200 0.465 0.880 2.700 3.900 8.150 4.700 17.300 8.400
LA5-FG431
3-pole
2.4
Arc chambers
For contactor 2-pole LA5-F40050 Type LC1-F4002 LC1-F5002 LC1-F6302 LC1-F6302S011 LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630 LC1-F780 LC1-F800 LC1-F630S011 Replacement for 2 poles 2 poles 2 poles 2 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 1 pole 3 poles 3 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 1 pole 4 poles Reference
LA5-F400250 LA5-F500250 LA5-F630250 LA5-F630250 LA5-F18550 LA5-F22550 LA5-F26550 LA5-F33050 LA5-F40050 LA5-F50050 LA5-F63050 LA5-F780150 (1) LA5-F80050 LA5-F63050 LA5-F185450 LA5-F225450 LA5-F265450 LA5-F330450 LA5-F400450 LA5-F500450 LA5-F630450 LA5-F780150 LA5-F630450
Weight kg 0.870 1.250 2.100 2.100 0.670 0.670 0.920 1.300 1.300 1.850 3.150 2.100 3.150 3.150 0.910 1.000 1.220 1.740 1.740 2.500 4.200 2.100 4.200
3-pole
4-pole
LC1-F1854 LC1-F2254 LC1-F2654 LC1-F3304 LC1-F4004 LC1-F5004 LC1-F6304 LC1-F7804 LC1-F6304S011 Comprising 2 identical items per pole. (1) Comprising two 2-pole arc chambers. (2) Comprising single-pole arc chambers.
(2) (2) (3) (1)
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F a.c. 50/60 Hz supply coils
a
Weight
Maximum ambient air temperature: 55 C. Above this, use an LX9-F coil, see page 2/203. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): 2400. Control circuit Average Inductance Voltage Reference voltage resistance of closed code Uc Uc at 20 C circuit 50 Hz 60 Hz 10 % V V H
kg
For contactors LC1-F115 and LC1-F150 (spares only)
LX1-FFppp
2.4
24 42 48 110 115 127/132 220 230 240 380 400 415 500 660/690 1000
48 110 120 200/208 220 240 265/277 380 440 460/480 660 1000
0.27 0.94 0.78 1.17 4.55 4.77 6.38 6.38 9.14 14.5 18.4 18.9 28.1 28.1 31.1 57.2 72.6 86.9 86.9 95.1 141 172 254 414 610
0.04 0.13 0.11 0.16 0.59 0.64 0.86 0.86 1.15 1.87 2.38 2.5 3.44 3.44 4.1 7.05 9.21 10.3 10.3 12 17 20.3 28.9 48.9 68.5
B5 D5 E6 E5 F6 G6 F5 FE5 G5 L6 M6 U6 M5 P5 U5 Q6 R6 Q5 V5 N5 S5 Y6 Y5
LX1-FF024 LX1-FF042 LX1-FF040 LX1-FF048 LX1-FF092 LX1-FF095 LX1-FF110 LX1-FF110 LX1-FF127 LX1-FF162 LX1-FF184 LX1-FF187 LX1-FF220 LX1-FF220 LX1-FF240 LX1-FF316 LX1-FF360 LX1-FF380 LX1-FF380 LX1-FF415 LX1-FF500 LX1-FF550 LX1-FF660 LX1-FF850 LX1-FF1000
0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430
Specications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush 50 Hz: 550 VA; 60 Hz: 660 VA, - sealed 50 Hz: 45 VA; 60 Hz: 55 VA, cos = 0.3. Heat dissipation: 1216 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 2335 ms, opening = 515 ms.
For contactors LC1-F185 and LC1-F225

24 42 48 110 115 127/132 220 230 240 380 400 415 500 660/690 1000 48 110 115/120 200/208 220 240 265/277 380 440 460/480 660 1000 0.18 0.57 0.47 0.71 2.74 2.87 4.18 4.18 5.35 8.8 11.1 11.4 16.5 16.5 20.1 34 43.5 51.3 51.3 62.3 82.7 103 154 249 370 0.03 0.09 0.08 0.12 0.44 0.49 0.65 0.65 0.86 1.41 1.8 1.87 2.59 2.59 3.09 5.32 6.94 7.75 7.75 9.06 12.8 15.3 21.8 36.6 51.6 B5 E6 E5 F6 G6 F5 FE5 G5 L6 M6 U6 M5 P5 U5 Q6 R6 Q5 V5 N5 S5 Y6 Y5
LX1-FG024 LX1-FG042 LX1-FG040 LX1-FG048 LX1-FG092 LX1-FG095 LX1-FG110 LX1-FG110 LX1-FG127 LX1-FG162 LX1-FG184 LX1-FG187 LX1-FG220 LX1-FG220 LX1-FG240 LX1-FG316 LX1-FG360 LX1-FG380 LX1-FG380 LX1-FG415 LX1-FG500 LX1-FG550 LX1-FG660 LX1-FG850 LX1-FG1000
LX1-FGppp
0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550
Specications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush 50 Hz: 805 VA; 60 Hz: 970 VA, - sealed 50 Hz: 55 VA; 60 Hz: 66 VA, cos = 0.3. Heat dissipation: 1824 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 2035 ms, opening = 715 ms.
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F a.c. 50/60 Hz supply coils
a
Reference Weight kg
Low sealed consumption. Operate on networks with harmonic numbers 7. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): 2400. Control circuit Average resistance Inductance voltage at 20 C 10 % of closed Uc Inrush Sealed circuit V H
Voltage code

24 48 110 115 120/127 200/208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 480/500 600/660 1000 Specications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos = 0.9: - inrush: 600700 VA, - sealed: 810 VA. Heat dissipation: 8 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4065 ms, opening = 100170 ms. 0.8 2.96 18.7 18.7 22.9 58.4 70.6 70.6 87.94 113 217 217 217 265 329 296 696 20 67 440 440 536 1366 1578 1578 1968 2444 4631 4631 4631 6731 8543 10,245 25,880 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) B7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 X7
LX1-FH0242 LX1-FH0482 LX1-FH1102 LX1-FH1102 LX1-FH1272 LX1-FH2002 LX1-FH2202 LX1-FH2202 LX1-FH2402 LX1-FH2772 LX1-FH3802 LX1-FH3802 LX1-FH3802 LX1-FH4402 LX1-FH5002 LX1-FH6002 LX1-FH10002
LX1-FHppp2
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750
2.4
For contactor LC1-F400

48 110/120 115 120/127 200/208 220 230 240 265/277 380 400 415 440 500 550/600 1000 Specications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos = 0.9: - inrush: 10001150 VA, - sealed: 1218 VA. Heat dissipation: 14 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170 ms. (1) Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. 1.6 9.8 9.8 12.8 30 37 37 47.5 61 120 120 145 145 190 243 720 29.5 230 230 280 815 1030 1030 1320 1700 3310 3310 4070 4070 4980 6310 19,420 0.18 1.35 1.35 1.75 4.1 5.1 5.1 6.4 8.1 15.8 15.8 19.4 19.4 25.5 27.4 84.6 E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 X7
LX1-FJ048 LX1-FJ110 LX1-FJ110 LX1-FJ127 LX1-FJ200 LX1-FJ220 LX1-FJ220 LX1-FJ240 LX1-FJ280 LX1-FJ380 LX1-FJ380 LX1-FJ415 LX1-FJ415 LX1-FJ500 LX1-FJ600 LX1-FJ1000
LX1-FJppp
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils
a
Reference Weight kg
Low sealed consumption. Operate on networks with harmonic numbers 7. Control circuit Average resistance Inductance voltage at 20 C 10 % of closed Uc Inrush Sealed circuit V H
Voltage code
LX1-FKppp
48 110/120 115 120/127 200/208 220 230 240 265/277 380 400 415 440 500 550/600 1000 Specications
1.9 9.55 9.55 11.5 29 35.5 35.5 44.5 56.5 112 112 143 143 172 232 679
33.5 260 260 315 735 915 915 1160 1490 2980 2980 3730 3730 4590 5660 16,960
0.19 1.25 1.25 1.5 3.75 4.55 4.55 5.75 7.3 14.7 14.7 18.4 18.4 22.8 23.9 72
E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 X7
LX1-FK048 LX1-FK110 LX1-FK110 LX1-FK127 LX1-FK200 LX1-FK220 LX1-FK220 LX1-FK240 LX1-FK280 LX1-FK380 LX1-FK380 LX1-FK415 LX1-FK415 LX1-FK500 LX1-FK600 LX1-FK1000
1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150
2.4
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos = 0.9: - inrush: 10001150 VA, - sealed: 1620 VA. Operating cycles/hour ( 55C): 2400. Heat dissipation: 18 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170 ms.

48 110/120 115 127 200/208 220 230 240 265/277 380 400 415 440 500 550/600 1000 Specications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos = 0.9: - inrush: 15001730 VA, - sealed: 2025 VA. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): 1200. Heat dissipation: 20 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4080 ms, opening = 100200 ms. 1.1 6.45 6.45 8.1 20.5 25.5 25.5 25.5 31 78 78 96 96 120 155 474 17.1 165 165 205 605 730 730 730 900 2360 2360 2960 2960 3660 4560 12,880 0.09 1.85 1.85 1.05 2.65 3.35 3.35 3.35 4.1 10.5 10.5 13 13 16.5 19.5 56.2 E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 X7
LX1-FL048 LX1-FL110 LX1-FL110 LX1-FL127 LX1-FL200 LX1-FL220 LX1-FL220 LX1-FL220 LX1-FL260 LX1-FL380 LX1-FL380 LX1-FL415 LX1-FL415 LX1-FL500 LX1-FL600 LX1-FL1000
LX1-FLppp
1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils
a
Reference Weight kg
Low sealed consumption. Operate on networks with harmonic numbers 7. Control circuit Average resistance Inductance voltage at 20 C 10 % of closed Uc Inrush Sealed circuit V H
Voltage code

110/120 115 127 200/208 220 230 240 265/277 380 400 415/480 440 500 Specications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos = 0.9: - inrush: 19002300 VA, - sealed: 4455 VA. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): 600. Heat dissipation: 2 x 22 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4080 ms, opening = 130230 ms. 4.95 (2) 4.95 (2) 6.1 (2) 15.5 (2) 19.5 (2) 19.5 (2) 19.5 (2) 29.8 (2) 60.9 (2) 60.9 (2) 74.3 (2) 74.3 (2) 92 (2) 230 (2) 230 (2) 280 (2) 750 (2) 920 (2) 920 (2) 920 (2) 1330 (2) 2780 (2) 2780 (2) 3340 (2) 3340 (2) 4180 (2) 0.21 0.21 0.26 0.66 0.82 0.82 0.82 1.25 2.3 2.3 2.8 2.8 3.5 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7
LX1-FX110 LX1-FX110 LX1-FX127 LX1-FX200 LX1-FX220 LX1-FX220 LX1-FX220 LX1-FX280 LX1-FX380 LX1-FX380 LX1-FX415 LX1-FX415 LX1-FX500 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000
2.4

Control circuit voltage Uc V 110/120 220/240 380/400 Specications Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): 600. Heat dissipation: 25 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 6080 ms, opening: 150250 ms (a side), opening 4050 ms (c side). (1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series. (2) Value for the 2 coils in series. (3) Rectier to be ordered separately (weight = 0.100 kg). Rectier Reference (3) DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4S Voltage code Reference Weight kg FW MW QW
LX4-F8FW LX4-F8MW LX4-F8QW
1.650 1.650 1.650
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils for specic applications (1)
a
Weight kg
Low sealed consumption. High tolerance to inrush voltage drops. Immune to micro-breaks (mains supply or contact chain). Operate on networks with harmonic numbers 7. Control circuit Average resistance Inductance voltage at 20 C 10 % of closed Uc Inrush Sealed circuit V H
Voltage code
Reference
LX9-FFppp
48 110 115 120/127 208 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500 Specications
3.03 14.8 14.8 19 45 59.4 59.4 73.5 173 173 218 218 262
80.2 579 579 746 1788 2190 2190 2750 6540 6540 8460 8460 10,300
0.3 2.08 2.08 2.65 5.95 7.7 7.7 9.68 23 23 30 30 36
E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7
LX9-FF048 LX9-FF110 LX9-FF110 LX9-FF127 LX9-FF200 LX9-FF220 LX9-FF220 LX9-FF240 LX9-FF380 LX9-FF380 LX9-FF415 LX9-FF415 LX9-FF500
0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430
2.4
Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 690855 VA, sealed: 6.68.1 VA. Heat dissipation: 5.97.2 W. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): < 2400. Operating time at Uc: closing = 35 ms; opening = 130 ms.

48 110 115 120/127 208 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500 Specications Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 9501180 VA, sealed: 8.910.9 VA. Heat dissipation: 89.8 W. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): < 2400. Operating time at Uc: closing = 35 ms; opening = 130 ms. 2.2 10.4 10.4 13 33 42.1 42.1 50.6 128 128 157 157 194 60 411 411 520 1339 1680 1680 2060 4730 4730 5930 5930 7550 0.23 1.46 1.46 1.85 4.9 5.84 5.84 7.22 16.4 16.4 20.6 20.6 26.3 E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7
LX9-FG048 LX9-FG110 LX9-FG110 LX9-FG127 LX9-FG200 LX9-FG220 LX9-FG220 LX9-FG240 LX9-FG380 LX9-FG380 LX9-FG415 LX9-FG415 LX9-FG500
LX9-FGppp
0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550

48 110/115 120/127 220/230 240 380/415 500 Specications Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 560660 VA, sealed: 810 VA. Heat dissipation: 8.410.4 W. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): < 3600. Operating time at Uc: closing = 45 ms; opening = 25 ms. (1) Application examples: hoisting (inching, high operating rates), Main-Standby (unstable mains supplies). These coils are particularly suited for use at higher operating temperatures (mounting in non-ventilated compartments, enclosures, etc.). (2) Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. 2.96 18.7 22.9 71.6 88 222 345 72 415 156 1621 1968 5075 7990 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
LX9-FH0482 LX9-FH1102 LX9-FH1272 LX9-FH2202 LX9-FH2402 LX9-FH3802 LX9-FH5002
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils for specic applications
Coils with short operating times (at Uc): - Closing: 60 ms. - Opening: 50 ms (a side); 20 ms (c side). Coils for high operating rates ( 70 C): - 3600 operating cycles/hour, - 1800 for LC1-F630. Coils with low inrush consumption Control Average resistance circuit at 20 C 10 % voltage Uc Inrush Sealed V
Inductance Rectier of closed Reference circuit (1) H
Coil Reference
Weight kg
LX9-FJppp

48 110 127 220/230 380/415 440 500 Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 500 VA, - sealed: 23 VA. Heat dissipation: 11.413.9 W. 4.03 25.7 32.3 99.5 311 386 478 43 246 302 919 3011 3690 4380 0.22 1.3 1.7 5 15 19 23
DR5-TF4V DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4S DR5-TE4S DR5-TE4S LX9-FJ917 LX9-FJ925 LX9-FJ926 LX9-FJ931 LX9-FJ936 LX9-FJ937 LX9-FJ938
0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970
2.4

LX9-FKppp 48 110 127 220/230 380/415 440 500 Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 550 VA, - sealed: 31 VA. Heat dissipation: 1518.3 W. 3.73 24 29.8 89.9 274 361 448 30.7 204 250 770 2075 3060 3750 0.18 1.1 1.4 4 12 16 19
DR5-TF4V DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4S DR5-TE4S DR5-TE4S LX9-FK917 LX9-FK925 LX9-FK926 LX9-FK931 LX9-FK936 LX9-FK937 LX9-FK938
1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080

48 110 127 220 220/240 380/400 415/440 500 Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 830 VA, - sealed: 47 VA. Heat dissipation: 22.827.8 W. (1) Rectier to be ordered separately (weight = 0.100 kg). 2.81 13.5 20.8 52 64.5 163 204 312 20.8 114 167 425 518 1360 1670 2510 0.17 0.77 1.2 2.9 3.6 8.8 11 17
DR5-TF4V DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4U DR5-TE4S DR5-TE4S DR5-TE4S LX9-FL917 LX9-FL924 LX9-FL926 LX9-FL930 LX9-FL931 LX9-FL935 LX9-FL936 LX9-FL938
LX9-FLppp
1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F d.c. supply coils
c
Inductance of closed circuit H Voltage code Reference Weight kg
Low sealed consumption. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): 2400. Control circuit Average resistance voltage at 20 C 10 % Uc Inrush Sealed V
24 48 110 125 220/230 250 440/460 Specications LX4-FFppp
1.12 4.52 21.7 26.8 84 105 301
177 715 2940 3560 11,100 13,000 48,200
11 42.7 179 223 704 868 4000
BD ED FD GD MD UD RD
LX4-FF024 LX4-FF048 LX4-FF110 LX4-FF125 LX4-FF220 LX4-FF250 LX4-FF440
0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430
Average consumption: - inrush: 543665 W, - sealed: 3.944.83 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 3040 ms, opening = 3050 ms.

24 48 110 125 220/230 250 440/460 Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 737902 W, - sealed: 4.135.07 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 3040 ms, opening = 3050 ms. 0.79 3.2 14.9 19. 57.7 76. 223 169 662 2810 3320 10,200 12,400 39,700 14.9 55.3 241 289 890 1140 4210 BD ED FD GD MD UD RD
LX4-FG024 LX4-FG048 LX4-FG110 LX4-FG125 LX4-FG220 LX4-FG250 LX4-FG440
2.4
0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550

24 48 110 125 220/230 250 440/460 LX4-FHppp Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 655803 W, - sealed: 3.684.53 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4050 ms, opening = 4065 ms. 0.9 3.49 16.8 20.8 65.7 84 255 192 707 3180 3840 11,500 13,900 44,000 26.3 92.9 424 530 1590 1910 7570 BD ED FD GD MD UD RD
LX4-FH024 LX4-FH048 LX4-FH110 LX4-FH125 LX4-FH220 LX4-FH250 LX4-FH440
0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740

48 110 125 220 250 440 Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 9201140 W, - sealed: 47.5 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 5060 ms, opening = 4560 ms. 2.5 12.7 15.8 47 61 236 558 2660 3130 8820 10 500 33 750 56 270 330 910 1200 4435 ED FD GD MD UD RD
LX4-FJ048 LX4-FJ110 LX4-FJ125 LX4-FJ220 LX4-FJ250 LX4-FJ440
0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F d.c. supply coils
c
Voltage code Reference Weight kg
Low sealed consumption. Control circuit Average resistance voltage at 20 C 10 % Uc Inrush Sealed V

48 110 125 220 250 440 Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 9901220 W, - sealed: 4.58 W. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): 2400. Operating time at Uc: closing = 5060 ms, opening = 4560 ms. 2.35 11.5 15 44 56 225 515 2450 2930 8150 9650 31,300 67 280 400 1080 1350 5270 ED FD GD MD UD RD
LX4-FK048 LX4-FK110 LX4-FK125 LX4-FK220 LX4-FK250 LX4-FK440
1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080
LX4-FKppp

48 110 125 220 250 440 Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 14201920 W, - sealed: 6.512.5 W. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): 1200. Operating time at Uc: closing = 6070 ms, opening = 4050 ms. 1.7 8.1 10 31 38 152 353 1680 2110 5160 6080 23,120 40.5 180 230 650 815 2910 ED FD GD MD UD RD
LX4-FL048 LX4-FL110 LX4-FL125 LX4-FL220 LX4-FL250 LX4-FL440
1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450
2.4

110 125 220 250 440 Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 19602420 W, - sealed: 4252 W. Operating cycles/hour ( 55 C): 600. Operating time at Uc: closing = 7080 ms, opening = 100130 ms. 6.1 (2) 7.7 (2) 24.6 (2) 29.8 (2) 92 (2) 280 (2) 410 (2) 1100 (2) 1330 (2) 4180 (2) 0.26 0.33 1 1.25 3.5 FD GD MD UD RD
LX4-FX110 LX4-FX125 LX4-FX220 LX4-FX250 LX4-FX440 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000

110/120 220/240 380/400 Specications Heat dissipation: 25 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 6080 ms, opening = 4050 ms. (1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series. (2) Value for the 2 coils in series. FW MW QW
LX4-F8FW LX4-F8MW LX4-F8QW
1.650 1.650 1.650
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F d.c. supply coils for specic applications
Coils with short operating time (at Uc): - Closing: 60 ms. - Opening: 20 ms. Coils for high operating rates ( 70 C): - 3600 operating cycles/hour, - 1800 for LC1-F630. Coils with low inrush consumption Control Average resistance circuit at 20 C 10 % voltage Uc Inrush Sealed V Inductance Resistor (1) of closed No. Reference circuit reqd. H Coil Reference
2
LX9-FJppp
Weight kg

48 110 125 220 440/460 5.11 32.3 39.4 123 478 99 632 760 2320 9080 0.27 1.7 2 6.1 23 1 1 1 1 1
DR2-SC0047 DR2-SC0330 DR2-SC0390 DR2-SC1200 DR2-SC4700 LX9-FJ918 LX9-FJ926 LX9-FJ927 LX9-FJ932 LX9-FJ938
0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970
Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 430 W, - sealed: 22 W.
2.4

48 110 125 220 440/460 4.67 29.8 37.4 115 448 76.7 470 637 1935 7050 0.22 1.4 1.7 5.1 19 1 1 1 1 1
DR2-SC0039 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0330 DR2-SC1000 DR2-SC3300 LX9-FK918 LX9-FK926 LX9-FK927 LX9-FK932 LX9-FK938
LX9-FKppp
1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080
Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 470 W, - sealed: 29 W.

48 110 125 220 440/460 3.43 17.2 20.8 64.5 260 52.9 272 333 1018 4010 0.20 0.98 1.2 3.6 14 2 2 2 2 2
DR2-SC0047 DR2-SC0270 DR2-SC0330 DR2-SC1000 DR2-SC3900 LX9-FL918 LX9-FL925 LX9-FL926 LX9-FL931 LX9-FL937
1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450
Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 733 W, - sealed: 48 W. (1) Resistor to be ordered separately (weight = 0.030 kg). LX9-FLppp
References
Contactors
Type LC1-F d.c. supply coils for specic applications
c
Reference Weight
Wide range coils: 0.71.25 Uc. Operating cycles/hour: 60 (1). Ambient temperature (operation): - 55 to + 70 C. Control circuit voltage Uc V Average resistance at 20 C 10 % Inrush Sealed Inductance of closed circuit H
kg

24 48 72 110 125 LX4-FFppp Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 4151300 W, - Sealed: 39 W. 0.71 2.86 7.05 13.2 16.9 120 392 1055 1970 2340 7.4 27 66 121 149
LX4-FF020 LX4-FF040 LX4-FF060 LX4-FF090 LX4-FF100
2
0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430

24 48 72 110 125 Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 5801820 W, - Sealed: 3.19.5 W. 0.52 2 5.07 9.66 12 112 359 984 1840 2230 9.3 34.4 85 157 196
LX4-FG020 LX4-FG040 LX4-FG060 LX4-FG090 LX4-FG100
0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550
2.4

24 48 72 110 125 Specications LX4-FHppp Average consumption: - inrush: 5151600 W, - Sealed: 2.78.5 W. Operating voltage V Average resistance at 20 C 10 % Inductance Coil of closed circuit Reference H Reduction of consumption Resistors in // No. Reference Reference of set (2) Weight 0.58 2.19 5.58 11 13.8 129 400 1110 2120 2520 17.3 59.5 149 287 353
LX4-FH020 LX4-FH040 LX4-FH060 LX4-FH090 LX4-FH100
0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740
kg

24 48 72 1.05 4.8 9.6 0.049 0.22 0.44 LX2-FJW11 LX2-FJW18 LX2-FJW21 3 3 3 56 DR2-SC0056 LX5-FJW11 220 DR2-SC0220 LX5-FJW18 470 DR2-SC0470 LX5-FJW21 0.970 0.970 0.970
Specications Average consumption: - inrush: 290860 W, - Sealed: 1647 W. (1)The mechanical durability of the contactor is limited to 1 million operating cycles. (2)Set comprises: 1 x LX2-FJ coil, 3 x DR2-SC resistors.
References
Contactors
Capacitive delayed opening devices for contactors LC1-F
These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt drop or momentary supply failure.
Control circuit: d.c. supply (1)

For use with contactor Type (2) With coil Corresponding delayed opening device Supply NonReference voltage adjustable 50/60 Hz delay time (Td) V s 110 127 220 240 380415 440 110 127 220 240 380415 110 127 220 240 380 110 127 220 240 380 110 127 220 240 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M Weight kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215
LC1-F185 or LC1-F225
LX4-FG110 LX4-FG125 LX4-FG220 LX4-FG250
LA9-Z90F LX4-FG375 LX4-FG440 LC1-F265 or LC1-F330 LX4-FH110 LX4-FH125 LX4-FG220 LX4-FH250
2.4
LC1-F400
LX4-FH375 LX4-FJ110 LX4-FJ125 LX4-FJ220 LX4-FJ250 LA9-Z90M LX4-FJ375 LC1-F500 LX4-FK110 LX4-FK125 LX4-FK220 LX4-FK250 LX4-FK375 LC1-F630 LX4-FL110 LX4-FL125 LX4-FL220 LX4-FL250
LX4-FL375 380 12 LAZ R90Q (1) See next page for dimensions and schemes. (2) Ensure that contactors are fitted with the correct coil for this application.
2/208
References, dimensions, schemes
Contactors
Capacitive delayed opening devices for contactors LC1-F

Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices Application For use with Operational delayed voltage opening device V To double the delay time LA9-Z90F 110127 Nonadjustable delay time s Td x 2 Reference Weight kg LAZ-R91F 0.165
LA9-Z90M
220240
Td x 2
LAZ-R91M
0.165
LA9-Z91M LA9-Z90Q 380440 Td x 2 LAZ-R91Q 0.165
Dimensions LAZ-R9ii LA
Scheme LAZ-R9i i + LC1 D

L+ (LAZ R)
LAZ-R9i i + LC1 FLLAZX

D+ (LAZ R)
F1
F1
2.4
0 1
77
114
A2
L (LAZ R)
L (LAZ R)
Other versions
Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor. Please call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608.
2/209
A2
108
55
A1
A1
Dimensions
Contactors
Type LC1-F
LC1-F185 to F330
S (1) = S1 F115 M6x25 F150 M8x25 F185 M8x25 F225 M10x35 F265 M10x35 F330 M10x35 = b2 b1
J1
2
X1
X1
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity LC1200...500 V 600...1000 V
= G1 G = Y Z
L c
P a
Q1 f
F185 F225, F265 F330
10 10 10
15 15 15
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 2/196)
LC1F185
2.4
F225 F265 F330
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
a 168.5 208.5 168.5 208.5 201.5 244.5 213 261
b 174 174 197 197 203 203 206 206
b1 137 137 137 137 145 145 145 145
b2 305 305 364 364 375 375 375 375
c 181 181 181 181 213 213 219 219
f 130 130 130 130 147 147 147 147
G 111 151 111 151 142 190 154.5 202.5
G1 80 80 80 80 96 96 96 96
J 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106
J1 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
L 113.5 113.5 113.5 113.5 141 141 145 145
M 154 154 172 172 178 178 181 181
P 40 40 48 48 48 48 48 48
Q 29 29 21 17 39 34 43 43
Q1 59.5 59.5 51.5 47.5 66.5 66.5 74 74
S 20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25
S1 34 34 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5
Y 44 44 44 44 38 38 38 38
Z 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 21.5 21.5 20.5 20.5
f = minimum distance required for coil removal LC1-F400 and F500

56 (1) = S 44,5 6xM10x35
X1
209
120 = G 23,5 G1 J
= b2 M b X1 =
180
L c
P a
Q1 f
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity LC1200...500 V 600...1000 V F400 F500 15 15 20 20
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 2/196) LC1F400 F500 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P a 213 213 261 233 233 288 b 206 206 206 238 238 238 b2 375 375 375 400 400 400 c 219 219 219 232 232 232 f 119 119 119 141 141 141
G* 80 80 80 80 80 140 G min. 66 66 66 66 66 66 G max. 102 102 150 120 120 175 G1 * 170 170 170 170 170 230 G1 min. 156 156 156 156 156 156 G1 max. 192 192 240 210 210 265 J 19.5 19.5 67.5 39.5 39.5 34.5
L 145 145 145 146 146 146
M 181 181 181 208 208 208
P 48 48 48 55 55 55
Q 69 43 43 76 46 46
Q1 96 74 74 102 77 77
S 25 25 25 30 30 30
* supplied f = minimum distance required for coil removal
Schemes: page 2/215
Dimensions
Contactors
Type LC1-F
LC1-F630 and F800

72 (1) = 40 64 6xM12x45
X1
280
304
464
264
X1
60,5 Q 80 a 80 Q1 181 (2)
J1
155 197 255
LC1F630 F630, F800 F630 * supplied LC1-F780
2P 3P 4P
a 309 309 389
G* 180 180 240
G min. 100 100 150
G max. 195 195 275
J1 68.5 68.5 68.5
Q 102 60 60
Q1 127 89 89
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity Voltage 200...500 V 690...1000 V 200...690 V 1000 V LC1-F630 20 30 LC1-F800 10 20 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 2/196) (2) Minimum distance required for coil removal
180
2.4
60 12xM12x45 = 26 = 26 =
X1
22
348 191 160 160 191 3P=702, 4P=862 127
280
X1
165 255 183 (1)
434
183 (1)
(1) Minimum distance required for removal of each coil Fixing centres of LC1-F7804
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity voltage 200...500 V 690...1000 V X1 (mm) 30 35 Fixing centres of LC1-F780
400
180
127
90
240
190
240
102
90
240
240
132
127
180
127
Dimensions
Contactors
Right-angled connectors LA9-Fp981 (set of 3) for rear connection LA9a b b1 c G H FG981 20 23 3 45 26 13 9 FJ981 25 29 4 55 32.5 16.5 11 FK981 30 35 5 52 26 20 11 FL981 40 48 8 86 45 28 13
b1
H a c G b
Right-angled connectors LA9-Fp979 (set of 3) for side connection LA9a b b1 c G G1 H FG979 20 58 5 92 28 22 39 9 FJ979 25 63.5 6 120 37 29 41 11 FK979 30 68 6 120 37 29 42 11 FL979 40 117 10 130 37.5 35 76 13
b1
H a a = G = H1 G1 G G b
2.4
c
Right-angled connectors LA9-Fp980, with large surface area (set of 3)

c c1
(1)
LA9a b b1 c c1 G H H1 H2 (1)
FG980 40 82.5 45 29 3 20 20 12 72.5 9 9 x 12
FJ980 50 98.5 55 33 5 25 22 14 84.5 11 11 x 14
FK980 60 114 65 33 5 29 26 17 97 11 12.5 x 15
FL980 100 154 85 43 10 53 40 20 132 13 12.5 x 15
b1 H2
Dimensions
Contactors
Paralleling links (set of 4) LA9-FF602, FG602, FH602 a c = =

H1 b1
LA9a b b1 c G H H1 H2 1 2
FG602 30 55 35 5 45 15 9 11
FH602 40 60 40 8 52.5 15 11 13
FK602 50 85 55 10 22 70 14 22 11 11
FL602 60 100 65 10 26 85 17 26 13 14
LA9-FK602, FL602
a c = G = H2 H1 b
b1
2.4
Links for 3-pole star connection LA9-Fi601
c a = = b
LA9a b c
FG601 100 20 3 8.5 x 10.5
FH601 121 20 5 10.5 x 13
FK601 140 30 5 11
FL601 200 40 8 13
Mounting
Contactors
Type LC1-F
LC1-F185 to F330 On panel
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA, PB, PC
On rails DZ5-MB on 120 mm centres
(1) =
DZ5-MF5
2
= J c G =
110
AF1-EA6
110
120
J1 c c 15
LC1c (3)3P 4P G 3P 4P J 3P 4P J1 3P 4P
2.4
F185 F225 181 181 80 80 29 49 59.5 79.5
F265 213 213 96 96 44.5 68.5 61.5 85.5
F330 219 219 96 96 44,5 68,5 61,5 85,5
LC1c (3)3P 4P G 3P 4P
F185 F225 181 181 80 80
F265 213 213 96 96
F330 219 219 96 96
LC1c (3)3P 4P G 3P 4P
F185 F225 181 181 80 80
F265 213 213 96 96
F330 219 219 96 96
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 2/196) LC1-F On 2 notched rails AM1-ECppp
LC1-F185 to F330
(3) See X1 (minimum electrical clearance) pages 2/210 and 2/211 LC1-F400 to F800
AM1-EC200
AF1-CD081 + AF1-VC820 (2) AF1-CD101+ AF1-VC10
(1)
AF1-CD061+ AF1-VA618 AF1-VA618 M6
AF1-CD061
AF1-VA618 M6 LA9-F100
AF1-CD081+ AF1-VC820
110
120
25
G AM1-EC200
35
G AM1-EC200 G3
G1 G2
LC1c
3P 4P G (M6) 3P 4P G1 ( 8.5) 3P 4P G2 ( 10.5) 3P 4P
F185, F225 176 176 80 80
F265 207 207 96 96
F330 213 213 96 96
F400 219 219 80 80
F500 232 232 80 140
F630 255 255 180 240
F780 255 255 See page 2/211
(1) AF1-CDppp and AF1-VAppp (2) This AM1-EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). (3) + 6 mm with timer block on LC1-F.
Schemes: page 2/215
180
M6
F800 255 2/211
110
Schemes
Contactors
Type LC1-F
2, 3 and 4-pole contactors LC1-F185 to F630 (coil LX1-F a)

3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 7/L4
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
7/L4
3/L2
LC1-F185 to F630 (coil LX4-F c) LC1-F185 to F265 (coil LX9-F a) LC1-F800 (coil LX8-F a/ c)
A2
LC1-F780 a or c LC1-F800 a or c
A2 1/L1 5/L3 T3/6 7/L4 T4/8
A2
03
A1
04
A1
T3/6
T1/2
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T4/8
T2/4
T4/8
T1/2
Front-mounting contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts 1 N/O LA1-DN10 (1) 1 N/C LA1-DN01 (1)
43/NO 41/NC (92)
T2/4
A1
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-DN112 N/O LA1-DN20

53/NO 53/NO 63/NO 61/NC
2 N/C LA1-DN02
51/NC 61/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C LA1-DN22

53/NO 83/NO 51/NC 71/NC
44 (93)
(94)
42 (91)
54
54
62
64
54
62
52
1 N/O + 3 N/C LA1-DN134 N/O LA1-DN40

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO 53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
4 N/C LA1-DN04
51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C (2) LA1-DC22

53/NO 87/NO 61/NC 75/NC
62
3 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-DN31

53/NO 73/NO 74 61/NC 83/NO 84
54
64
74
84
54
62
54
62
72
82
62
52
72
82
76
88
54
(1) Items in brackets are for blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor. (2) 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break Front-mounting contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts with terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: pages 2/192 and 2/193) 1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C LA1-DN11P LA1-DN11G LA1-DN11M LA1-DN22P LA1-DN22G LA1-DN22M
13/NO 43/NO 43/NO 13/NO 43/NO 53/NO 63/NO 21/NC 33/NO 31/NC 31/NC 21/NC 41/NC 53/NO 21/NC 31/NC 21/NC 31/NC
62
72
84
2.4
14
32
44
32
44
22
14
22
32
44
32
42
54
22
Front-mounting contact blocks Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts 2 N/O (24-50 V) 2 N/O (5-24 V) 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 2 N/O standard LA1-DX20 LA1-DY20 LA1-DZ40
53/NO 53/NO 63/NO 53/NO 63/NO 83/NO 63/NO 73/NO
34
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard LA1-DZ31

53/NO 73/NO 61/NC 83/NO
64
74
62
54
54
64
54
64
84
54
74
67/NO
57/NO
55/NC
65/NC
Front-mounting contact blocks Time delay auxiliary contacts On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LA2-DTp
Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LA3-DRp
On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LA2-DSp

67/NO 55/NC
58
56
68
66
56
Standard a coils LX1-FG, FJFL LX1-FH0422FH3802

03 A1 A2
LX1-FH0202FH0362 LX1-FX LX1-FH4402FH10002 Rectier supplied and xed on the contactor

A1 A2
LX4-F8p
Standard c coils LX4-FG, FH, FJ, FK, FL, FX (1)
A1
68
A2
+
A1 A2 A1 A2
A2 A1 A2
+
A1
A2
A1 A2
A1
(1) 2 coils in series Special a coils LX9-FG

A1 A2
LX9-FHppp2
A1 B1 A2/B2
LX9-FJ, FK, FL
(1)
A1
A2
01
A1
A2
(2)
+
(1) Breaking on side Drop-out time 50 ms (2) Breaking on c side Drop-out time 20 ms
84
64
22
54
Dimensions
Contactors
Reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs LC2-F horizontally mounted
Pre-assembled LC2-F185 to F265 (reverser supplied on 2 bars which can be used for fixing the device)
S (1) 3x6,5
=
S1 3x6,5 3x6,5
=
3x6,5
X1
=
=
= G1 J a2
= G1
= J1
J1 Q1 f P P P1 a P P Q1 f
L c1 c
f - Minimum distance required for coil removal.
2.4
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity LC1200500 V 6601000 V F185 10 15 F225, F265 10 15
Bar xing centres: vertical: 120 mm. horizontal: a2 (see table)
a a2 3P 357 326 4P 437 390 F225 3P 357 326 4P 437 390 F265 3P 425 386 4P 521 464 (1) Power terminal protection shroud.
LC2F185
b 174 174 197 197 203 203
b1 137 137 137 137 145 145
c 181 181 181 181 213 213
G1 80 80 80 80 96 96
J 78 118 78 118 109 157
J1 59.5 79.5 59.5 79.5 61.5 85.5
L 113.5 113.5 113.5 113.5 141 141
M 154 154 172 172 178 178
P 40 40 48 48 48 48
P1 78 78 62 54 100 100
Q1 59.5 59.5 51.5 47.5 66.5 66.5
S 20 20 25 25 25 25
f 130 130 130 130 147 147
M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M10
Schemes: page 2/219
110/120
2
120 b1 b2 M b
X1
Dimensions
Contactors
Reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs LC2-F horizontally mounted
For customer assembly, fixing recommended on AM1-ECppp uprights, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. 2 x LC1-F185 to F330
P1 P1 X1 = = 110/120 b1 120 (2) b b = 180
2 x LC1-F400, F500, F630, F800
X1
= L c J1 = G1 = J a = G1 = J1 J1 J3 G G1 J J2 a G G1 J1 J3
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity LC1200500 V 6601000 V 200690 V 1000 V F185 10 15 F225, F265 10 15 F330 10 15 F400 15 20 F500 15 20 F630 20 30 F800 10 20
2.4
2 x LC1F185 3P 4P F225 3P 4P F265 3P 4P F330 3P 4P F400 3P 4P F500 3P 4P F630 3P 4P F800 3P
a 357 437 357 437 425 521 447 543 446 542 485 595 636 796 636
b 174 174 197 197 203 203 206 206 206 206 238 238 304 304 304
b1 137 137 137 137 145 145 145 145 209 209 209 209 280 280 280
c 181 181 181 181 213 213 219 219 219 219 232 232 255 255 255
G 80 80 80 140 180 240 180
G1 80 80 80 80 96 96 96 96 170 170 170 230 --
J 78 118 78 118 109 157 124 172 157 157 156 156 139 139 139
J1 59.5 79.5 59.5 79.5 61.5 85.5 65.5 89.5 64.5 112.5 84.5 79.5 68.5 88.5 68.5
J2 67 67 66 66 -
J3 19.5 67.5 39.5 34.5
L 113.5 113.5 113.5 113.5 141 141 145 145 145 145 146 146 155 155 155
P1 78 78 62 54 100 100 107 107 107 107 112 112 137 137 137
(1) Except LC1-F630 and F800: 4 x 10.5. (2) Except LC1-F630 and F800. For other dimensions, see pages 2/210 and 2/211.
Dimensions
Contactors
Reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs LC2-F vertically mounted
For customer assembly, with mechanical interlock (MI) LA9-Fppp, fixing recommended on AM1-ECppp uprights, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. 2 x LC1 identical or different ratings (LC1-F185 to F630 and F800). See pages 2/188 to 2/191. Assembly A Assembly B Assembly C
J3 (1) (3) = = H 80 12,5 (5) (1) G5 G1 12,5 (5) (1) F330 } 120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630 F800 G5 G1
(6) 120 = = (4) H
(6)
2
G3 (2)
H1
J1
9 H1 G3(2) J1
120
120
(1)
(3) =
(1) (5)
(6) = = (4)
J4
80 J2
J4
80 J2
9 12,5
G4
G2 J2
2.4
(1) Mechanical interlock shaft. (2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only. Assembly A (1) MI G3 reference 3P LA9-FG4G 0 J2 3P LA9-FG4G 139.5
(3) 4 x 6.5 for LC1-F185 to F225. (4) 4 x 6.5 for LC1-F265. (5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket.
(6) 4 x 8.5 for LC1-F400, F500 or 4 x 10.5 for LC1-F630 and F800. G5 3P 60 83 83 74 J2 3P 139.5 139.5 139.5 139.5
H 4P min. 0 220 J3 4P 3P 159.5 53
H1 max. min. 310 100 J4 4P 3P 73 53
J1 max. 3P 4P 190 139.5 159.5
4P 73
For customer assembly, xing recommended on AM1-ECppp uprights, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. 2 x LC1-F780
Assembly B (1) MI G1 reference 3P LA9-FH4G 96 LA9-FJ4G 80 LA9-FK4G 80 LA9-FL4G 180 H1 min. LA9-FH4G 120 LA9-FJ4G 90 LA9-FK4G 110 LA9-FL4G 150
Assembly C (1) MI G1 reference 3P LA9-FH4H 96 LA9-FJ4H 80 LA9-FK4H 80 LA9-FL4H 180 LA9-FJ4J 80 LA9-FK4J 80 LA9-FL4J 180 LA9-FK4K 80 LA9-FL4K 180 LA9-FL4L 180 H min. LA9-FH4H 250 LA9-FJ4H 260 LA9-FK4H 280 LA9-FL4H 330 LA9-FJ4J 260 LA9-FK4J 280 LA9-FL4J 325 LA9-FK4K 300 LA9-FL4K 345 LA9-FL4L 380
4P 96 80 140 240 max. 250 220 220 220
G3 3P 19 42 42 33 J1 3P 157.5 144.5 164.5 248.5 G2 3P 96 96 96 96 80 80 80 80 80 180 H1 min. 130 110 130 170 60 100 140 120 160 200
4P 23 22 22 13 4P 181.5 192.5 219.5 328.5
4P 83 83 83 74 4P 159.5 159.5 159.5 159.5
H min. 250 250 270 310 J4 3P 53 53 53 53

G4 3P 60 60 60 60 83 83 83 83 83 74 J2 3P 157.5 157.5 157.5 157.5 144.5 144.5 144.5 164.5 164.5 248.5
max. 380 380 380 380 4P 73 73 73 73

G5 3P 60 83 83 74 83 83 74 83 74 74
X1
4P 96 80 140 240 80 140 240 140 240 240 max. 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
4P 96 96 96 96 80 80 80 140 140 240
250
191
160
160
191
702(LC1-F780), 862(LC1-F7804)
G3 3P 0 23 23 14 0 0 9 (8) 0 9 (8) 0 J1 max. 3P 260 157.5 230 144.5 230 164.5 220 248.5 200 144.5 200 164.5 195 248.5 200 164.5 195 248.5 200 248.5
4P 0 0 0 9 (8) 0 0 9 (8) 0 9 (8) 0 4P 181.5 192.5 219.5 328.5 192.5 219.5 329.5 329.5 328.5 328.5
4P 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 74 4P 181.5 181.5 181.5 181.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 219.5 219.5 328.5
180
X1
180
1034
420
X1 and xings, see page 2/211.
(1) Only 3P for F800. (8) In this case, G4 is greater than G5.
Schemes: page 2/219
2/218
F330 } 120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630 F800
(1)
(3)
H1
G3(2)
J1
F330 } 120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630 F800
4P 83 83 83 74 83 83 74 83 74 74
Schemes
Contactors
Reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs LC2-F
Reversing contactors for motor control, horizontally mounted LC2-F 2 x LC1-F

L1 L2 L3
Reversing contactors for motor control, vertically mounted 2 x LC1-F

1/L1 1/L2 3 4 1/L3 6 5
A2
A1
A2
A2
L3 L2 L1
3 A1 1 5
A1
A1
A2
2/L1
2/L2 1/L2
Changeover contactor pairs for distribution, horizontally mounted LC2-F 2 x LC1-F
Changeover contactor pairs for distribution, vertically mounted 2 x LC1-F

1/L1 1/L3 5 1N 7
1/L1
2/L1
2/L2
1/L3
1/L2
2/L3
1N
2N
A2
A1
2/L3
A2
A2
N L3 L2 L1 3 5 A1 1 7
2.4
A1
A1
A2
6 2/L3
2/L1
2/L2
L1
L2
L3
Electrical interlocking of reversers tted with: mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts LA9-Fppp
KM2 A1
KM1 A1
KM1 A2 A2
KM2
2N
General
Protection components
Motor protection
Operating conditions
There are many possible causes of electric motor failure. One of the most common, and which is often accidental, is the utilisation of motors beyond the operating limits defined by the manufacturer or in abnormal ambient conditions. A statistical survey carried out in Britain, covering 9000 incidents of motor failure, gave the following results:
Overloads Pollution (example: corrosive atmosphere) Phase failure Bearing failure Ageing (example: ambient temperature too high) Rotor faults Miscellaneous
30 % 19 % 14 % 13 % 10 % 5% 9%
2.4
These faults are related to motors with a power rating of 37 kW or more. An examination of the above results shows that, in more than 50 % of cases, the fault is due to the effects of heating. Leaving aside the replacement of wearing parts, such as bearings, slip rings, brushes, etc., the life of a rotating machine is linked to that of its insulation. Provided that the temperature rise limit is not exceeded, the life expectancy of insulating materials is extremely long. It is decreased by approximately one half for an excess temperature rise of 10 C. The operating temperature limit TL of an insulating material depends on the type of material and is the sum of the ambient air temperature AT (cooling air), the temperature rise limit TRL and an additional temperature rise value ATR considered necessary because the measurement of winding resistance variation does not determine the temperature of the hottest part of the motor winding, but only gives an average value for temperature rise. The diagram below defines the standardised limits for different classes of insulation. In all cases, the normal ambient cooling air temperature is fixed at 40 C.
C 180
ATR
165 155 140 130 125 120 115 100
TRL TL
80 60
40
20
AT
Insulation classes
2/220
General
Motor protection
The rated power of a motor corresponds to its temperature rise limit for an ambient temperature of 40 C. The temperature rise limits for the different parts of a machine are given in the following table, which is an extract from IEC publication 34-1. Temperature rise limit Insulation class B Insulated winding (measurement by resistance) Commutators and slip-rings Bearings C C C 80 80 60 F 100 90 (1) 60 (2) H 125 100 (1) 60 (2)
When a motor is used at an ambient air temperature other than the normal value, its temperature rise limit should be modified in order to maintain the same maximum temperature limit. The result is that the motor operational power is no longer the same as its rated power. Also, the altitude of the installation, if this is above 1000 m, affects the cooling and increases the temperature rise. The following table gives the ratio between operational power and rated power, according to the operating conditions, for a given ambient temperature. It corresponds to insulation class B. Operational power / Rated power in watts Altitude m 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Ambient air temperature (AT) 30 C 1.07 1.04 1.01 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.83 35 C 1.04 1.01 0.98 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.81 40 C 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.87 0.83 0.78 45 C 0.96 0.93 0.90 0.87 0.84 0.80 0.75 50 C 0.92 0.89 0.86 0.84 0.80 0.76 0.72 55 C 0.87 0.84 0.82 0.79 0.76 0.72 0.68 60 C 0.82 0.79 0.77 0.75 0.71 0.68 0.64
2.4
The values shown in the above table are for guidance only. In effect, the derating of a motor depends on its size, insulation class, method of construction (self-ventilated or forced ventilation, degree of protection IP 23, IP 44, etc.), and varies according to the manufacturer. Also, in addition to the normal ambient conditions, the rated power of a motor is defined by the manufacturer for continuous duty S1. This covers continuous operation of sufficient duration to enable the motor to reach a steady temperature. It is this value of rated power that is normally shown on the motor plate. There are other standardised types of duty, such as temporary duty S2, or intermittent periodic duty type S3, S4 and S5, for which the motor manufacturer defines an operational power appropriate to each and different from the rated power. (1) For temperature rise limits of 90 C and 100 C the brushes must be selected with the agreement of the motor manufacturer. (2) These limit values may be exceeded depending on the quality of the grease used and the applied loads.
2/221
General (continued)
Motor protection
Selection of thermal protection

To optimise the life of a motor, it is important to select the appropriate thermal protection which will prevent operation under abnormal heating conditions, whilst ensuring maximum continuity in the operation of the driven machine or associated plant by avoiding unnecessary stoppages. It is essential to know the real operating conditions: - ambient temperature, - operating altitude, - type of standard duty, to determine the operational values for the motor (power, current) and to be able to select an efficient thermal protection. These operational values are given by the motor manufacturer. Various types of motor protection devices are available: - thermal overload relays or thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers, - thermistor protection relays, - electronic multifunction relays.
Protection by thermal overload relay

A conventional thermal overload relay protects the motor in the two following cases: i overload, by monitoring the current taken by each phase, i phase failure, by its differential mechanism.
2.4
It therefore covers 44 % of the cases of motor failure. This type of protection relay is widely used, is extremely reliable and is a relatively low cost device. It is particularly recommended if there is a risk of rotor stalling. Nevertheless, it has the disadvantage of not taking into account, with sufficient accuracy, the thermal state of the motor. The operating principle of this type of device is, in fact, based on the bending of bimetal strips caused by the current drawn by the motor. As the thermal inertias of the overload relay and motor are different, in some cases it may be possible to restart the motor following an overload trip even though its temperature is still too high.
Protection by PTC thermistor relay

Better monitoring of the internal motor temperature can be provided by PTC thermistor probes, embedded in the motor windings during manufacture, associated with a thermistor protection relay (type LT3-S).
Resistance (ohms) 4000
PTC probes are resistors with a positive temperature coefficient. Their resistance value increases very rapidly when their temperature reaches the Nominal Operating Temperature threshold, indicated by NOT on the graph opposite. Their small size means that they have a low thermal inertia and can rapidly follow the temperature variations of their surroundings. This is the only solution for motor protection in applications involving severe starting/stopping (duties S3, S4, S5) and likewise, for applications where the motor could be inadvertently overcooled.
1330
550 250
100 50
NOT -20 NOT -5 NOT NOT +5
-20
NOT +15
Temperature (C)
Markings complied with by universal probes Mark A (standard IEC 34-11-1A)
Problems other than those due to thermal effect can also arise: earth fault, abnormal overheating of bearings, etc. More comprehensive protection can either be obtained by: i associating several types of protection device (example: thermal overload relay + thermistor protection relay + earth fault relay), i or using a multifunction protection relay type LT6.
2/222
General
Motor protection
Protection relays
Type of relay Causes of fault Slight overload Thermal overload (1) LR2-D, LR9-F For use with PTC probes Multifunction protection LT3 LT6
2
Stalled rotor Underload Supply phase failure Ventilation fault Abnormal rise in ambient temperature Shaft bearing friction Insulation fault Protracted starting time Severe duty Phase imbalance Earth fault Power factor (cos ) Phase rotation Undervoltage Overvoltage Ideally suited Possible solution Not suited (no protection) (1) Or motor circuit breaker, type GV2-M for example. With voltage TX With voltage TX With EF toroid With voltage TX With PTC probes With PTC probes With PTC probes With PTC probes
2.4
2/223
General, presentation
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, type LR9-F
General
LR9-F electronic protection relays are especially suited to the operating conditions of motors. They provide protection against: - thermal overload of 3-phase or single-phase balanced or unbalanced circuits;
- phase failure and large phase imbalance, - protracted starting times, - prolonged stalled rotor condition. LR9-F electronic protection relays are mounted directly below an LC1-F type contactor. They cover a range from 30 to 630 A, in eight ratings. The settings can be locked by sealing the transparent protective cover. A reset button is mounted on the front of the relay. Two versions are available: - simplied version: class 10: LR9-Fp3pp, class 20: LR9-Fp5pp, - complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1: LR9-Fpp. This latter version includes an alarm function which makes it possible to forestall tripping by load shedding.
2.4 Presentation
Simplied version: class 10 or 20
2 5 4 3
98 NO 97 95 NC 96
107
Ir(A) 127
90
150
Complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, and alarm circuit
7 8 2
Class Ir(A) 20 107 127 + 90 150 10
24 V - / 103 104
Load
5 4 3
Alarm 98 NO 97 95 NC 96
9 1 6
Ir adjustment dial Test button Stop button Reset button Trip indicator Locking by sealing transparent cover Class 10/class 20 selector switch Selector switch for balanced load / unbalanced load 9 Alarm circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60255-8, IEC/EN 60255-17 and VDE 0660 UL 508, CSA 22-2 Conforming to VDE 0106 Conforming to IEC/EN 60529 IP 20 IP 20 on front of relay with accessories LA9-F103 or LA7-F70p, see page 2/231 "TH" C C m - 40+ 85 - 20+ 55 (1) 2000 All positions
Product approvals Degree of protection
Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device (conforming to IEC 255-8)
Standard version Storage Normal operation
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions without derating Shock resistance
Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-7 Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC/EN 60255-5 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2
2.4
13 g - 11 ms
Vibration resistance
2 g - 5 to 300 Hz
Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Impulse withstand voltage Resistance to electrostatic discharges Resistance to radio-frequency conducted disturbances Resistance to fast transient currents Electromagnetic compatibility
kV kV kV
6 4 8 (in air) 6 (in indirect mode) 10
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 and NF C 46-022 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4
V/m
kV
IEC/EN 50081-1 & 2, IEC/EN 50082-2
Meets test requirements
(1) For operating temperatures up to 70 C, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
General, presentation: page 2/224
Power circuit electrical characteristics

Relay type LR9F5p57 F57 F5p63, F63 F5p67, F67 F5p69, F69 F5p71, F71 F7p75, F75 F7p79, F79 F7p81, F81
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 V Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 kV
1000 1000 8
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational current (Ie) Short-circuit protection and coordination Frequency limits Power circuit connections
30 to 630 See pages: 1/42 to 1/47
Of the operating current Width of terminal lug
Hz mm
5060. For other frequencies, please call 0870 608 8 608 (1) 20 25 25
30 LR9-F7p75 40 and LR9-F75 40 LR9-F7p79 and LR9-F79
2.4
Clamping screw Tightening torque N.m M6 10 M8 18 M10 35
M10 35
M12 58
Auxiliary contact electrical characteristics

Conventional thermal current Short-circuit protection A By gG or BS fuses or A by circuit-breaker GB2-CD10 Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors Solid cable 1 conductor 2 conductors Tightening torque Maximum sealed current consumption of the coils of associated contactors (occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) a.c. control N.m V VA d.c. control V W mm2 5 5
Control circuit connections
Minimum 1 x 0.75 2x1
Maximum 1 x 2.5 2 x 1.5
mm2 1 x 0.75 2x1 mm2 1 x 0.75 2x1 1.2 24 100 24 100 48 200 48 100 110 400 110 50 220 600 220 45 380 600 440 25 600 600 1 x 2.5 1x4 2 x 2.5
(1) For applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft starters or variable speed drives, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
General, presentation: page 2/224 2/226
Characteristics
Tripping class Temperature compensation Reset Fault indication Test function Stop function Tripping thresholds Conforming to Alarm IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Trip Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 A A Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 C 10, 10 A and 20 - 20+ 70 Manual on front of relay On front of relay On front of relay Actuation of N/C, without affecting N/O contact 1.05 0.06 In 1.12 0.06 In Tripping in 4 s 20 % in the event of phase failure Setting dial on front of relay Yes
Sensitivity to phase failure Setting (nominal motor current) Sealing
Alarm circuit characteristics

Rated supply voltage Supply voltage limits Current consumption Switching current Protection Voltage drop Connection Tightening torque LR9-F tripping curve Average operating times depending on multiples of the current setting Class 10 and 10 A
Tripping time in seconds 1000
d.c.
V V
24 1732 5 0150 Auto-protected
2.4
No load
mA mA
Short-circuit and overload Closed state Flexible cable without cable end V mm2 N.m
2.5 0.51.5 0.45
Class 20
Tripping time in seconds 1000
100
100
1 2
10 10
1 2
1 0 1 1,12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 x current setting
1 0 1 1,12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x current setting (Ir)
1 Cold state curve 2 Hot state curve
References
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, type LR9-F for motor protection
Temperature compensated overload relays with differential protection

Thermal overload relays: - temperature compensated and differential protection, - with relay trip indicator, - for a.c., - for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1).
Relay setting range A Class 10 and 10 A (2) 3050 4880 LR9-F53pp 60100 90150 132220
Fuses to be used with selected relay aM gG A A
For direct mounting beneath contactor LC1
Reference
Weight kg
50 80 100 160 250 400 500 630
80 125 200 250 315 500 800 800
F185 F185 F185 F185 F225F400 F225F500 F225F500 F400F630 and F800
LR9-F5357 LR9-F5363 LR9-F5367 LR9-F5369 LR9-F5371 (3) LR9-F7375 LR9-F7379 LR9-F7381
0.885 0.900 0.900 0.885 0.950 2.320 2.320 4.160
2.4
200330 300500 380630
Class 20 (2) 3050 4880 60100 90150 132220 200330 LR9-F73pp 300500 380630 50 80 100 160 250 355 500 630 80 125 200 250 315 400 800 800 F185 F185 F185 F185 F185F400 F225F500 F225F500 F400F630 and F800
LR9-F5557 LR9-F5563 LR9-F5567 LR9-F5569 LR9-F5571 LR9-F7575 LR9-F7579 LR9-F7581
0.885 0.900 0.900 0.885 0.950 2.320 2.320 4.160
(1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9-F5371 directly beneath the contactor they should be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 2/231). Above this size it is always necessary to use the mounting plate. Power terminals can be protected against direct nger contact by the addition of shrouds and/or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 2/231). (2) Standard IEC/EN 60947-4-1 species a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current In: - Class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds, - Class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds, - Class 20: 6 to 20 seconds. (3) To directly connect LR9-F5371 to contactor LC1-F185 use LA7-F407 busbar kit.
References
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, type LR9-F for motor protection
Temperature compensated overload relays, class 10 or 20 with alarm

Thermal overload relays: - temperature compensated, - with relay trip indicator, - for a.c., - for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1), - class 10 or 20 by selector switch, - protection of 3-phase or single-phase circuits by selector switch, - with alarm function that enables tripping to be forestalled. Relay setting range A 3050 Fuses to be used with selected relay aM gG A A 50 80 For direct mounting beneath contactor LC1F185 Reference Weight kg
LR9-F57
0.885
LR9-F57
4880
80
125
F185
LR9-F63
0.900
2.4
60100 100 200 F185
LR9-F67
0.900
90150
160
250
F185
LR9-F69
0.885
132220
250
315
F185F400
LR9-F71
0.950
200330
400
500
F225F500
LR9-F75
2.320
300500
500
800
F225F500
LR9-F79
2.320
380630
630
800
F400F630 and F800
LR9-F81
4.160
(1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9-F5371 directly beneath the contactor they should be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 2/231). Above this size it is always necessary to use the mounting plate. Power terminals can be protected against direct nger contact by the addition of shrouds and/or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 2/231).
References
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, type LR9-F Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Control accessories
Description Remote electrical reset device (1) LA7-D03p Remote reset function control by exible cable (length = 0.5 m)
1 LA7-D305 Sold in lots of 1
Unit reference
LA7-D03p (2)
Weight kg 0.090
0.075
Remote Stop and/or Reset function control
Adaptor for door mounted operator
LA7-D1020
0.005
Rod (snap-off end to obtain required length, between 17 and 120 mm) Operating head for spring return pushbutton
10
ZA2-BZ13
0.100
ZA2-Bpppp (3)
0.012
2.4
R
For mounting an LR9-F5p71 thermal overload relay together with an LC1-F185 contactor Description Reference LA7-D305 Set of 3 busbars
LA7-F407
Weight kg 0.160 Weight kg 0.110 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.270
For mounting a thermal overload relay beneath a reversing contactor or star-delta contactors Application Wide range Set of 3 busbars For relays For contactor terminals Reference LR9-F5p57, F5p63, F5p69 LR9-F5p71 LR9-F71 LR9-F5p71 LR9-F71 LR9-F7p79 LR9-F75, F79 LR9-F7p81 LR9-F81 LR9-F7p75, F7p79, F7p81 LR9-F75, F79, F81 LC1-F185 LC1-F185 20 mm 25 mm
LA7-F402 LA7-F407 LA7-F403 LA7-F404 LA7-F404 LA7-F405
LC1-F225 and F265 25 mm LC1-F225...F400 LC1-F400 LC1-F500 25 mm 25 mm 30 mm
LA7-F406 0.600 LR9-F7p81 LC1-F630 and F800 40 mm LR9-F81 (1) The time for which the coil of remote electrical reset device LA7-D03 can remain energised depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest time; 10 s pulse duration with 90 s rest time. Maximum pulse duration of 20 s with rest time of 300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 12 24 48 96 110 220/230 380/400 415/440 a 50/60 Hz B E F M Q N Consumption inrush and sealed: < 100 VA c J B E DD F M Consumption inrush and sealed: < 100 W. (3) Stop: ZA2-BL432 or Reset: ZA2-BL639.
References
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, type LR9-F Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Mounting plate for overload relay

For use with relays LR9-F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 and F5p71 LR9-F57, F63, F67, F69 and F71 LR9-F7p75, F7p79 and F7p81 LR9-F75, F79 and F81 Reference
LA7-F901 LA7-F902
Weight kg 0.100 0.100
Set of power terminal protection shrouds, single-pole

LA7-F90p For use with relays LR9-F5p57 LR9-F57 LR9-F5p63, F5p67 and F5p69 LR9-F63, F67 and F69 LR9-F5p71 LR9-F71 LR9-F7p75, F7p79 and F7p81 LR9-F75, F79 and F81 LA9-F70p Number of shrouds per set 6 6 6 6 Set of shrouds Reference
LA9-F701 LA9-F702 LA9-F705 LA9-F703
2
Weight kg 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
Power terminal protection shrouds, 3-pole

For use with relays LR9-F5p57, F5p63, F5p67 and F5p69 LR9-F57, F63, F67 and F69 LR9-F5p71 LR9-F71 LR9-F7p75, F7p79 and F7p81 LR9-F75, F79 and F81 Reference
LA7-F701 LA7-F702 LA7-F703
Weight kg 0.030 0.030 0.030
2.4
LA7-F70p
Insulated terminal blocks

For use with relays LR9-F5p57, F5p63, F5p67 and F5p69 LR9-F57, F63, F67 and F69 Set of 2 blocks Reference
LA9-F103
Weight kg 0.560
Marking accessories
LA9-F103 Description Clip-in marker holder Bag of 400 blank self-adhesive legends 7 x 16 mm
Sold in lots of 100 1
Unit reference
LA7-D903 LA9-D91
Weight kg 0.001 0.001
Dimensions
Common side view

(1) 123,5 3 56,8
LR9-F5p71 LR9-F71
48 25 5,5 48 50 120 50
LR9-F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 LR9-F57, F63, F67, F69 50 50 (2) 40 40

5,5 96 76 60 20 115 40 40
44,8
101
76
60
2
3 46,8
115
14 22,1
(1) Terminal shroud LA9-F70p (2) 6,5 x 13,5 for LR9-F5p57 and F57 8.5 x 13.5 for LR9-F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F63, F67, F69 LR9-F7p81 (for mounting beneath LC1-F630 and F800) Common side view LR9-F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LR9-F75, F79, F81 P1 P2 127,6 LR9-F81 200 42,2 30 (1) 80 80
20
6 82 136,8
108,8 70
44,8
228,8
2.4
6
25 51,5 66 150 51,5 66
P1 48 LR9-F7p75 and F75 55 LR9-F7p79, F7p81, F79 and F81 (1) Terminal shroud LA9-F70p Direct mounting beneath: contactor LC1-F
P2 48 55
188,8
62,1
71
76,5 193
76,5
reversing contactors LC2-F or star-delta contactors LC3-F Mounting plate for LR9-F
H3
H3
71
H1
G
H1
LA7-F4
H2
H2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
LA7- G F901 145 F902 190 b 285 319 360 332 363 364 364 390 509
H1 60 80 100 90 100 100 100 110 120 H2 50 50 58 50 58 58 58 58 58 H3 120 120 120 120 120 120 180 180 180
Contactors LC1- With LR9-relays b F185 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 250 F57, F63, F67, F69 273 F225 F5p71, F71 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 308 F265 F5p71, F71 279 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 314 F330 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 317 F400 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 317 F500 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 346 F630, F800 F7p81, F81 510 (1) Relay mounting plate LA7-F90p, see page 2/231 (2) AM1-EC or AM1-DF for LC1-F115 to F630 and F800 (3) DZ5-MB for LC1-F115 to F400
H1 30 40 50 40 60 60 60 70 110
H2 H3 50 120 50 58 50 58 58 58 58 58 120 120 120 120 120 180 180 180
Contactors LC1- With LR9-relays F185 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 F57, F63, F67, F69 F225 F5p71, F71 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 F265 F5p71, F71 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 F330 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 F400 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 F500 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 F630, F800 F7p81, F81
Schemes: page 2/233
H2
Scheme, setting-up
Scheme LR9-F5p57 to LR9-F7p81

L1 L2 L3
LR9-F57 to F81 (with alarm)

L1 L2 L3 0V
KM1 2 4 6 2 4 6
(2)
KM1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
5/L3
103
1/L1
3/L2
(3)
104
(3) (1)
112 %
2
(1)
(4)
(4)
(2)
Test
95 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 97 96 98
Stop Reset man.
95 97 96 98
KM A1 14 13
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A M 3 13 M 3
A KM A1 14
(1) Tripped on thermal overload (2) Overheating alarm (3) Setting current (4) Specialised circuit
KM A2 N
(1)
N
KM A2
(1)
2.4
Setting-up the special functions of LR9-F thermal overload relays

Setting the relay p Lift the transparent cover 7 to gain access to the various settings and controls. p Adjustment is achieved by turning dial 1 which is graduated directly in amperes. p The setting can be locked by sealing the cover 7. 2
LR9 F5369
Ir(A) TEST
TRIPPED STOP RESET
1 7
105
125
6 5 4 3
90
150
protection lectronique moteur ELECTRONIC MOTOR PROTECTION
98
NO
97
95
NC
96
Stop function 3
Test function 2
PED RESE STOP T
TRIPP TEST
ED STOP RESE T TRIPP TEST
ED STOP RE
Stop p The Stop function is obtained by pressing the red STOP button 3. p Pressing the STOP button: - actuates the N/C contact. - has no effect on the N/O contact. p The STOP button can be locked by fitting a U clip (reference: LA7-D901).
Test
Trip indicator
p The Test function is obtained by pressing the red TEST button 2 with a screwdriver. p Operation of the TEST button simulates tripping of the relay and: - actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts, - actuates the trip indicator 5. NOTE: If external injection testing is to be carried out it is essential that a three phase injection test set is used.
Functions
Multifunction protection relays LT6-P
LT6 is a protection relay designed for motor control.
Functions not using serial link communication

The LT6 protects against: - thermal overloads, by monitoring the machine currents, - machine overheating (using PTC probes), - phase imbalance and phase failure, - earth fault. It provides: - fault signalling via an output relay and a 7 segment display, - the control of motors (D.O.L., reversing, star-delta).
Functions using serial link communication

LT6-P0M005FM The LT6 may be set to protect against: - thermal overloads, by monitoring the machine currents, - machine overheating (using PTC probes), - phase imbalance and phase failure, - earth fault, - underload, - protracted starting time, - overtorque and stalled rotor, - reversal of phase rotation, - excessively low power factor (cos ). It provides: - fault and alarm signalling, using remote display, - fault signalling via an output relay and a 7 segment display, - voltage limitation by monitoring voltage between phases, - signalling in the event of exceeding the short-circuit current, - thermal alarm, - the control of motors (independent, reversing and 2-stage control). Bus communication: p For receiving conguration parameters for the LT6 (protection, motor control). p For information exchange with the LT6: - instantaneous values (voltage, current per phase, frequency, cos , thermal state), - data log of 5 previous trip incidents (causes and remedies), - maintenance statistics, cause of trip statistics, - operating and alarm states.
2.5
Description
On the front face of the relay: p 7 segment display unit for fault indication. p Test button to open the control contacts, which in turn closes the fault signalling contacts, for verication of correct operation p Trip Reset button. p DIP switch for selection of: - bus communication address, - communication protocol (Uni-Telway or Jbus/Modbus), - manual or automatic reset following a thermal fault, - thermal overload parameter settings from the front face or by serial link communication (line adjust or local adjust). p A serial interface (9-pin SUB-D) enables RS 232 or RS 485 connection, depending on the cabling, to be used. - Using RS 232 connection, kit reference LA9-P620 enables communication (parameters and indication) between the relay and a PC microcomputer running under Microsoft Windows version 3.1 or 95. - Using RS 485 connection enables the relay to be connected to UNI-TELWAY bus or Jbus/Modbus. - Using RS 232 connection enables the relay status to be read at the remote display XB4-H41pp.
Characteristics, curves: pages 2/236 to 2/241 2/234
Application schemes: pages 2/246 to 2/251
Functions
Configuration table of LT6

Function Description Factory activated Parameters and settings Activated/ Description deactivated by serial link communication Ir (% rating) Class Overload alarm Initial values Adjustment range accessible via serial link communication 20109 % (1) 530 (1) 0100 %
Thermal overload: thermal protection of motor by monitoring current consumption Overheating (PTC): thermal monitoring of motor using built-in PTC probes
20 % 5 100 %
Phase imbalance and phase failure: monitoring symmetry of rms current values Earth fault (DDR): monitoring for insulation faults using toroid
Id (% I rms average (2)) Time before tripping IDR Time before tripping
30 % I average 0.7 s (starting) 5 s (running) 30 A 5s
1030 % 010 s 010 s 0.330 A 05 s
Protracted starting time: tripping of LT6 if both Isd and preset time exceeded Underload: tripping of LT6 if both Iv and preset time exceeded
ISD (% Ir) Starting time
150 % Ir 10 s
100500 % Ir 030 s
Iv (% Ir) Time before tripping
30 % Ir 10 s
3090 % Ir 030 s
2.5
Torque limitation: tripping of LT6 if both ILC and preset time exceeded. Function inactive during starting
ILC (% Ir) Time before tripping
200 % Ir 10 s
150800 % Ir 030 s
Cos : monitoring of phase shift between motor current and voltage Phase rotation direction monitoring
Cos Time before tripping
0.1 10 s inhibited
-11 010 s
Voltage shedding: opening channels A and B of LT6 if voltage drops below preset value Short-circuit detection: signals short-circuit condition via the serial interface Reset: effective after programmable time or when the thermal state drops below a programmable value Motor control
Shedding Time before shedding Re-establishment Time before re-establishment Isc
70 % Un 10 000 s 90 % Un 10 000 s 15 x lr peak
68120 % Un 0100 000 s 68120 % Un 0100 000 s
Time before reset C (iron) before reset
0s 100 % n
01000 s 40100 % n
Control of outputs A and B
Reversing
Reversing Independent 2-stage Self-cooled or auto-cooled
Self-cooled/Auto-cooled
Self-cooled
(1) These values can be activated and adjusted from the front face of the relay when set to Local adjust. (2) The average rms current is equal to the average current value of the 3 phases. Factory activated functions or functions activated/deactivated by serial link communication.
Characteristics, curves: pages 2/236 to 2/241
Application schemes: pages 2/246 to 2/251 2/235
Characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60034-11, IEC/EN 60755, VDE 0106, VDE 0660 Meets the essential requirements of the Low Voltage equipment (LV) & Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) European Community Directives. UL 508, CSA TH Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Storage Operation Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 m In relation to normal vertical mounting plane C C IP 20 (1) 15 gn, 11 ms 2 gn (3 to 100 Hz) - 35+ 85 - 20+ 70 V0 2000
e Marking
Product certications Protective treatment Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Ambient air temperature around the device
2.5
90
Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to electromagnetic interference Resistance to fast transient currents Resistance to conducted radio-frequency disturbances Rated undissipated pulse withstand (U imp) Rated dissipated pulse withstand Supply harmonics
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 level 3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 level 3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 level 4
kV
V/m
10
kV
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 level 3
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
kV
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5 level 3
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Appendix F Clause F4.1 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-11 (1) Only applicable when power cabling to relay exceeds the following sizes: 1.5 mm2 tted with cable end or 2.5 mm2 not tted with cable end.
Resistance to micro-breaks
Functions: pages 2/234 and 2/235 2/236
90
Characteristics
Power circuit characteristics

Relay type Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operating frequency Rated operational current Input impedance Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Terminal tightening torque Associated protection By circuit-breaker Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 V Hz A LT6-P0M005FM a 690 50/60 1 or 5 (1) < 0.1 LT6-P0M025FM a 690 50/60 25 < 0.1
1 or 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
1.56 1.56 1.54 1.7
Operational current 25 A Operational current > 25 A (using current transformers)
GV2-L05 (1 A relay rating) GV2-L10 (5 A relay rating) Compact NSppppMA (Merlin Gerin) A 2 aM, 4 gG (1 A relay rating) 6 aM, 16 gG (5 A relay rating) 32 (aM), 63 (gG, gM)
GV2-L22
By fuses
Operational current 25 A Operational current > 25 A (using current transformers)
25 (aM), 50 (gG, gM)
2.5
Control circuit supply characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operating voltage Power consumption 50/60 Hz c Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Plug-in connector 1 or 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors Terminal tightening torque Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 V V VA W mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m a 380 c or a 50/60 Hz: 90276 15 7 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.50.75 0.7
Discrete input characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operating voltage Current consumption Power consumption Input impedance Minimum transient value Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 V V mA W a 250 c 90...150, a 90276 1 (changing from 0 to 1 state in t 4 ms) 0.5
k 56 (1) Using external current transformer for operating currents exceeding 25 A: see page 2/242.
Functions: pages 2/234 and 2/235
Communication interface characteristics

Physical interface RS 232: connection to PC or XBT-H RS 485: connection to programmable controller SUB-D 9-pin male bit/s ms 9600 100
Connector on LT6
Maximum transmission speed Minimum time between 2 requests
Discrete output characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Type of output Associated fuse protection a.c. loads Rated voltage Permissible power for category AC-15 Associated with contactor d.c. loads Rated voltage Permissible power for category DC-15 Associated with contactor V W V VA Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Relay Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 A V a 380 1 N/O per channel 6 (type gG)
a 250 500 (Ie = 0.5 A, Ue = a 250 V, Ith = 5 A, cos = 0.4, for 100,000 operations) LC1-K, LC2-K, LC7-K, LC8-K LC1-D09 to D150 c 30 50 (Ie = 0.5 A, Ue = c 30 V, Ith = 5 A, L/R 25 ms for 100,000 operations) LP1-K, LP2-K, LP1-D09 and D12 LP1-D18 to D32 (with LA4-DC1U or DC2U) LP1-D40 to D80 (with LA4-DC3U)
2.5
Signalling output characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Type of output Associated fuse protection Current limit a.c. loads Rated voltage Permissible power for category AC-15 Associated with contactor d.c. loads Rated voltage Permissible power for category DC-15 Associated with contactor V W V VA Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Relay Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 At U = c 5 V A mA V a 380 1 N/O per channel 2 (type gG) 10
a 250 250 (Ie = 0.2 A, Ue = a 250 V, Ith = 2 A, 300,000 operations for resistive load) LC1-K, LC2-K, LC7-K, LC8-K with suppressor block LA4-KE
c 30 50 (Ie = 0.2 A, Ue = c 30 V, Ith = 2 A, 300,000 operations for resistive load) LP1-K, LP2-K with suppressor block LA4-KC
Characteristics
LT6-CTpppp external current transformer characteristics

Conforming to standards Precision Precision limiting factor Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Maximum operating temperature Transformation ratio Diameter of conductor passageway Maximum c.s.a. of connections V C A mm mm2 IEC/EN 60185, BS 7626 Class 5P 15 690 50 100/1 35 300 400/1 35 300 800/1 10 Incorporated (1)
XBT-H41101p display module characteristics

Supply Display Type Capacity Input keys Indicators Operating temperature Storage temperature Humidity (without condensation) Protection Front face Rear face Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to electromagnetic interference Resistance to electrical interference Resistance to mechanical shock Resistance to vibration Communication with LT6 Software Modbus protocol IEC/EN 61000-4-2 IEC/EN 61000-4-3 IEC/EN 61000-4-4 IEC/EN 60068-2-27 IEC/EN 60068-2-6 V/m C C % V V c 24 LCD, 9 mm 2 lines of 20 characters 2 LED, communication LED, acknowledgement of input key operation 0+ 50 - 20+ 70 085 IP 65 (IEC/EN 60529, NF C 20-010, UL) IP 20 Level 3 10 Level 3 30 gn, 11 ms, 1/2 sine wave 0.075 mm at 2 to 57 Hz 1 gn at 57 to 150 Hz Serial link type using specic cable (XBT-Z9701) length 5 m (see page 2/242) Loaded as standard and available in 3 languages
2.5
(1) Electrical connection to be made using M10 bolt.
Probe type
DA1-TTppp
Probe characteristics
Conforming to standards Resistance Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Insulation Cable lengths Between probes Between probe and motor terminal block mm m At 25 C Per probe V kV IEC/EN 60034-11 mark A 3 x 250 in series c 2.5 max. 2.5 Reinforced 250 1
Guaranteed operating zones: example with 3 probes type DA1-TTppp (250 at 25 C) connected in series, conforming to IEC/EN 60034-11, mark A.
Resistance (ohms)
10 000
2.5
4000
Trip zone
1650 1500 1000 750
Reset zone
100
20 10
Trip zone on short-circuit probes
NOT
-20
Temperature (C)
NOT
3 probes type DA1-TTppp (250 at 25 C) in series.
NOT nominal operating temperature. Trip control device. Reset control device.
NOT NOT
NOT
Tripping curves
Cold state curves (1)

t (s) 10 000
1000
100
10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5 (10 A)
1 1 1,12 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I/Ir
2.5
Hot state curves (1)

t (s) 10 000
1000
100
10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5 (10 A)
1 1 1,12 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I/Ir
(1) Tripping time accuracy: 8 % at 7.2 x I/Ir.
References
3-phase multifunction protection relays

Operational current (1) A 0.21 15 525 Reference LT6-P0M005FM
Weight kg
1.030
2
LT6-P0M005FM
LT6-P0M025FM
1.030
Configuration software
Description Kit comprising: - 3" 1/2 diskette. - 2 m connection cable tted either end with 9-pin SUB-D connector (female-female) Update diskette Languages English, French, German, Italian, Spanish For use with All ratings of relay Reference
LA9-P620 Weight kg
0.550
English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
All ratings of relay
LA9-P621
0.200
Current transformers 2.5

Operational current Primary A 100 Reference Secondary A 1
LT6-CT1001 Weight
kg 0.550
400
LT6-CT4001
0.550
800 LT6-CT4001
LT6-CT8001
0.680
Display module
Language English Supply voltage V c 24 Reference
XBT-H411013 Weight kg
0.620
French
c 24
XBT-H411011
0.620
Spanish
c 24
XBT-H411014
0.620
Connection cable
Function Ensures connection link between LT6 and display module XBT-H (cable length = 5 m) Reference
XBT-Z9701 Weight kg
0.200
(1) For operational currents greater than 25 A, use an external current transformer with a 1 A or 5 A secondary.
References
Earth fault toroids

Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand name Sensitivity internal of toroid mm 0.330 A 30 50 80 120 200 300 46 Type Reference
Weight
kg
TA30 PA50 IA80 MA120 SA200 GA300 POA 50437 50438 50439 50440 50441 50442 50485
0.120 0.200 0.420 0.530 1.320 2.230 1.300
110
GOA
50486
3.200
PTC thermistor probes

Description Nominal operating temperature (NOT) C 90 110 120 130 140 DA1-TTppp 150 160 170
10 10 10 DA1-TT150 DA1-TT160 DA1-TT170 Sold in lots of
2.5
Unit reference
Weight
kg
10 10 10 10 10 DA1-TT090 DA1-TT110 DA1-TT120 DA1-TT130 DA1-TT140
Triple probes
0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Marking accessories (to be ordered separately)

Clip-in markers (maximum of 5 markers per relay) Strips of 10 identical numbers (0 to 9)
25 AB1-Rp (1)
0.002
Strips of 10 identical capital letters (A to Z)
25
AB1-Gp (1)
0.002
(1) When ordering, complete the reference with the number or letter required.
Protection relays LT6-P LT6-P0MpppFM On 35 mm 7 mounting rail
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA

AF1EA4
118
131
90 54
Current transformer LT6-CT
Display module XBT-H41101p

6,2
35 107
42
30
2.5
5 25 a 95 25 5
6,2
202
89,6
102
120 12,35 2,5 183,8 5,85
10 10
20
42,5
42,5
LT6CT1001 CT4001 CT8001
a 35 35 10
Display module XBT-H41101p Panel cut-out
(1)
E 90
184
Support panel thickness E = 1.56 mm. (1) R: 3.5 max./ 2 min.
2,5
50
110
Earth fault toroids TA30, PA50
IA80, MA120, SA200
c2 8
21 4 16
b1
b2
b1
29 c1 J c1 a G a1
Type TA30 PA50
b 83 109
b1 53 66
c 30 50
c1 60 87
c2 31 45
H 50 60
Type IA80 MA120 SA200
a 26.5 26.5 29
a1 44 44 46
b 122 164 256
b1 80 80 120
b2 55 55 90
c 80 120 196
c1 150 190 274
G 35 35 37
H 65 65 104
J 126 166 254
K 40 40 60
GA300
POA, GOA
2.5
344
a G
299
29
Type POA GOA
a 72 78
b 148 224
c 46 110
G 57 76
Application schemes
Motor control: D.O.L. starting (channels A and B set for reversing or independent control)
Control from front face of relay
KM1
Control via discrete inputs of relay

Motor stop
D1 D2 D3 D4
Reserved
Channel A
D1 D2 D3 D4
95 96
Motor start
95
Channel A
KM1
KM1
Reserved
96
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Channel B
I8 O1 O2 I7 I6 I5 97
Fault signalling
O1 O2
Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A
Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A Fault signalling
I4 I3 I2
97 98
98
Local or serial communication control of A and B Reset Alarm
93 I1 94
Local or serial communication control of A and B Reset Alarm
93 94
C1 Common 1 () C2 Common 2 ()
Control supply (1)
400 V KM1
C1 Common 1 ()
PTC probes
A2 () A1 (+)
T1 T2 NC H1 Earth fault toroid H2 2T1 4T2 6T3

M 3
C2 Common 2 ()
Control supply (1)
400 V KM1
A2 A1
() (+)
T1 PTC probes T2 NC H1 Earth fault toroid H2 2T1 4T2 6T3
L11 L21
L11 L21 L31
2.5
L31
(2) Control via serial link communication (UNI-TELWAY, Jbus/Modbus)
(2)
D1 D2 D3 D4
95
Channel A
KM1
Reserved
96
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
O1 O2
Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A Fault signalling
97 98
Local or serial communication control of A and B Alarm Reset
93 94
Control supply (1)
400 V KM1
PTC probes
A2
()
A1 (+) L11 L21 L31
T1 T2 NC H1 Earth fault toroid H2 2T1 4T2 6T3

M 3
(2)
(1) For d.c. supplies the inputs I1 to I8 must be connected to the positive line. (2) Terminal numbers for incoming power connections for LT6-P0M005FM02-1A.
Application schemes
Motor control: D.O.L. starting

Control via serial link communication with signalling, earth fault toroid, PTC probes, state of power components Channels A and B set for reversing or independent control Possible to control the motor via discrete input (local position) or by serial link communication
D1 D2 D3 D4
95
Channel A
KM1
Reserved
96
I8
Q1 KM1 Motor stop
I7 I6
O1 O2
I5 Stop channels A and B I4 Start channel B

Motor start Fault signalling
97 98
Tripped
I3 Start channel A I2
Local or serial communication control of A and B Alarm
Line Local
93
Overload
I1 Reset C1 Common 1 () C2 Common 2 ()
94
PTC probes
Q1
Control supply (1) KM1
A2 () A1 (+)
T1 T2 NC Earth fault H1 toroid H2

U V
L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3
400 V
M 3
2.5
(2)
(1) For d.c. control supplies the inputs I1 to I8 must be connected to the positive line. (2) Terminal numbers for incoming power connections for LT6-P0M005FM02-1A.
Application schemes
(continued)
Motor control: reverser starting

Control via serial link communication Channels A and B set for reversing control Control via discrete inputs of relay Channels A and B set for reversing control
D1 D2 D3 D4
Reserved
Channel A
KM2 KM1
D1 D2 D3 D4
95 96 I8 O1
Channel B
KM1 KM2
95
Channel A
KM2 KM1
Reserved Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A
96
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A Fault signalling
I7 I6
Motor stop Reverse start Forward start
O1
Channel B
KM1 KM2
O2 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 94 C1
O2
97 98
Fault signalling
97 98
Local or serial communication control of A and B Alarm Reset
93
Control supply (1)
400 V KM1
Local or serial communication control of A and B 93 Alarm Reset 94 Common 1 () Common 2 ()
A2 () A1 (+) L11 L21
T1 PTC probes T2 NC Earth fault H1 toroid H2

400 V
C2
Control supply (1)
KM1
A2 () A1 (+) L11 L21
T1 PTC probes T2 NC Earth fault H1 toroid H2
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2.5
KM2
L31
KM2
L31
(2) Control from front face of relay Channels A and B set for independent control
(2)
D1 D2 D3 D4
Reserved
Channel A
95 96
Motor stop
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A Fault signalling Channel B
O1 Forward start O2
KM2
KM1
Reverse start
KM1 KM2
KM2
97 98
KM1
Local or serial communication 93 control of A and B Alarm Reset 94
Control supply (1)
400 V KM1
PTC probes
A2 A1
() (+)
T1 T2 NC Earth fault H1 toroid H2
L11 L21
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3
KM2
L31
(2)
Application schemes
Motor control: reverser starting with measurement of cos and voltage

Control via serial link communication Channels A and B set for reversing control
D1 D2 D3 D4 95
Reserved
230 V From voltage measuring transformer 0 V
Channel A
KM2
KM1
96
C2 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 C1
Common 2 () Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A and B Start channel B Fault 97 Start channel A signalling 98 Local or serial communication control of A & B Reset 93 Common 1 () Alarm 94 () (+)
T1 PTC probes T2 NC Earth fault H1 toroid H2 O1
Channel B
O2
KM1
KM2
Voltage and cos measuring transformer 400 V 230 V

0V
400 V
Control supply (1)
A2 A1
0V
KM1
To discrete input E (I8) and Common 2 (C2)

L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3
(2)
2.5
KM2
(1) For d.c. control supplies the inputs I1 to I7 must be connected to the positive line. (2) Terminal numbers for incoming power connections for LT6-P0M005FM02-1A. LT6-P0M005FM connections with current transformers LT6-P0M0p5FM connections with display module LT6-CTpppp XBT-H41101p
D1 D2 D3 D4
D1 D2 D3 D4
95 96 C2 I8 O1 O2 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 C1 A2 A1
Channel A
95 96
Reserved Common 2 () Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A and B Start channel B Fault Start channel A signalling Local or serial communication control of A & B Reset Common 1 () () (+) PTC probes Earth fault toroid L11 L21 L31 Alarm
Channel A I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 Discrete input E Discrete input D Channel Discrete input C B Stop channels A and B Start channel B
O1 Channel B O2
Fault 97 Start channel A signalling 98 Local or serial communI2 ication control of A & B I1 Reset 93 C1 Common 1 () Alarm C2 Common 2 () 94 A2 () I3 A1 (+) PTC probes Earth fault toroid L11 T1 T2 NC H1 H2 2T1 4T2 6T3
97 98
Ph1
Ph2
Ph3
93 94
Relay setting: e.g. For 132kW 415V motor flc 240A - CT 400/1 Setting = 240 x 100 = 60% 400
P1 P2
T1 T2 NC H1 H2 2T1 4T2 6T3
S1 S2 P1 P2 S1 S2 P1 P2 S1 S2
LT6-P0M005FM
L21 L31
(2)
XBT-Z9701
M 3
Application schemes
(continued)
Motor control: star-delta starting (channels A and B set for 2-stage control)
Control via discrete inputs of relay
D1 D2 D3 D4
Channel A
95
- KM3 - KM1 - KM3
I8
Reserved Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A & B Start channel B Start channel A Channel B
96
- KM1 - KM2
I7 I6
Motor stop Motor start
O1
- KM1 - KM3
I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 C1 C2
O2
Local or serial communication control of A and B Fault 97 Reset signalling Common 1 () Common 2 () () (+) Alarm
98 93 94
1 - KM1 2 3 5 4 6 U1 V1 3 5 6 W1 W2 M U2 V2
Control supply (1)
A2 A1
T1 PTC probes T2 NC H1 Earth fault H2 toroid 2T1 4T2 6T3
400 V
L11 L21 L31
1 - KM2 2 3 4
(2)
2.5
1 - KM3 2 3 5 4 6
Control via serial link communication

D1 D2 D3 D4
Channel A
95
KM3 KM1 KM3 KM1 KM2
Reserved
96
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 C1 C2
Control supply (1)
Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A & B Start channel B Start channel A Local or serial communication control of A and B Fault Reset signalling Common 1 () Common 2 () () (+) PTC probes Earth fault toroid Alarm
O1
Channel B
KM1 KM3
O2
97 98 93 94 T1 T2 NC H1 H2 1 KM1 2 3 5 4 6 U1 V1 W1 M 3 U2 V2 W2
A2 A1
400 V
L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3
1 KM2 2 3 5 4 6
(2)
1 KM3 2 3 5 4 6
Application schemes
Motor control: star-delta starting with adjustable time delay

Control via serial link communication Channels A and B set for 2-stage control
D1 D2 D3 D4
95 Channel A 96 - KM1 O1 Channel B O2 -KM1 - KM3 -KM2 - KM3 - KM1 - KM3
Reserved 0V From voltage measuring transformer 230 V C2 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 C1 Control supply (1) A2 A1 Common 2 () Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A and B
Start channel B Fault 97 Start channel A signalling Local or serial commun98 ication control of A & B Reset Common 1 () () (+) T1 PTC probes T2 NC Earth fault H1 toroid H2 1 k 1 - KM1 2 3 5 4 6 U1 V1 W1 M 3 U2 V2 W2 93 Alarm 94
Voltage and cos measuring transformer (2) To discrete input E (I8) and Common 2 (C2) 230 V 0V 400 V 0V 400 V
L11 L21 L31 (3)
2T1 4T2 6T3
1 - KM2 2 3 5 4 6
1 - KM3 2 3 5 4 6
2.5
(1) For d.c. control supplies the inputs I1 to I7 must be connected to the positive line. (2) The instrument transformer must have a primary voltage corresponding to the supply with a secondary voltage of 230V. (3) Terminal numbers for incoming power connections for LT6P0M005FM 0.2-1A. For LT6P0M005FM 1-5A use terminal numbers L15, L25, L35. For LT6P0M025FM 5-25A use terminal numbers 1L1, 3L2, 5L3.
D1 D2 D3 D4
95 Channel A 96
Reserved C2 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 C1 A2 A1 Common 2 () Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A and B
O1 Channel B O2
Start channel B Fault 97 Start channel A signalling Local or serial commun98 ication control of A & B Reset Common 1 () () (+) T1 PTC probes T2 NC Earth fault H1 toroid H2 93 Alarm 94
Relay setting: e.g. For 132kW 415V motor flc 240A - CT 400/1 Setting = 240 x 100 = 60% 400
L11 L21 L31

Ph1 Ph2 Ph3
LT6-P0M005FM
1 - KM1 2
2T1
3 4 6 U1 V1 W1 M 3 U2 V2 W2
4T2
5
6T3
S1 S2 P1 P2 S1 S2 P1 P2 S1 S2 P1 P2
1 - KM2 2 3 5 4 6
1 - KM3 2 3 5 4 6
General
Thermistor protection units for use with PTC thermistor probes (positive temperature coefficient)
Application
LT3-Si thermistor protection units continuously monitor the temperature of the machines to be protected (motors, generators, etc.) by means of PTC thermistor probes embedded in the machine windings. If the nominal operating temperature of the probes is reached, they convert the rapid increase in resistance into a switching function which can be used to switch off the machine or signal a fault (see paragraph relating to thermistor probes below).
Accidental breaks in the supply circuits of the thermistors are also detected.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility to EN 50082-2 Resistance to electrostatic discharge (conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2) Resistance to fast transients (conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4) Susceptibility to electromagnetic fields (conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3) Surge resistance 1.2/50 - 8/20 (conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5) Immunity to microbreaks and voltage drops (IEC/EN 61000-4-11) Suitable for use with variable speed controllers Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 4
Thermistor probes
Range of most commonly used PTC thermistor probes: from 90 to 160 C, in steps of 10 C. Curve R = f (), characteristic of a PTC thermistor probe is defined by standard IEC/EN 60034-11. The choice of PTC thermistor probe to be incorporated in the motor winding depends on the insulation class, the type of motor and the most suitable location for the probe. This choice is usually made by the motor manufacturer or the motor rewinder, who have all the necessary information Application example Insulation class of rotating machines conforming to IEC/EN 60034-11-2 (S1 duty) A B E F H
2.6
NOT Nominal operating temperature C 100 110 120 140 160
Temperature at which rapid increase in resistance occurs Probes used for Alarm Fault C C 100 110 120 140 160 110 120 130 150 170
Characteristics
Type Reset method Fault indication
LT3-SE Automatic
LT3-SA Automatic On front face of unit and remote
LT3-SM Manual/Automatic On front face of unit and remote By pushbutton on front face of unit Label Mark A to IEC 60034-11-2
Fault test
Interchangeability
Label Mark A to IEC 60034-11-2
Label Mark A to IEC 60034-11-2
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Degree of protection marking IEC 60034-11-2 VDE 0660 CSA, UL (pending) IEC 60034-11-2 VDE 0660 IEC 60034-11-2 VDE 0660
CSA, UL, PTB, RINA, BV, GL, DNV, LROS (pending)
IP 20 conforming to IEC/EN 60529, VDE 0106 LT3-Si protection units have been designed to comply with the essential recommendations of European directives relating to low voltage and EMC. Therefore, LT3-Si products bear the European Community mark. Storage To IEC/EN 60068-2-1 and 60068-2-2 Operation
Ambient air temperature around the device
C C
m
- 40+ 85 - 25+ 60 1500 Up to 3000 m, the maximum permissible ambient air temperature for operation (60 C) must be reduced by 5 C per additional 500 m above 1500 m 2.5 gn (225 Hz) 1 gn (25150 Hz) 5 gn (11 ms) Any
2.6
Maximum operating altitude
Without derating With derating
Vibration resistance
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6
Shock resistance Operating positions without derating
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 In relation to normal vertical mounting position
Power supply circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) c 50/60 Hz 0.851.1 Uc c 50/60 Hz 0.851.1 Uc a 0.8...1.25 Uc 0.8...1.25 Uc Average consumption Sealed Single voltage Dual voltage Multi-voltage Single voltage Dual voltage Multi-voltage c a V V V V VA W 115 or 230 24 < 2.5 <1 115/230 24230 24/48 24...230 < 2.5 <1 400 115/230, 24/48 24230 24/48 24...230 < 2.5 (except 400V: 2.7) <1

Type Resistance Tripping Reset LT3-SE LT3-SA 27003100 15001650 6 < 2.5 < 7.5 < 20 400 1 500 1.5 LT3-SM 27003100 15001650 6 < 2.5 < 7.5 < 20 1000 (2) 2.5
27003100 15001650 6
Maximum number of probes fitted in series (1) Voltage at terminals in the thermistor circuit
Probes 250 to 25 Normal operation (R=1500) V
< 2.5 < 7.5 300 0.75
Conforming to IEC/EN 60034-11-2 (R=4000 ) V Short-circuit detection Connection of probes to the LT3 Operating threshold Distance Minimum c.s.a. of conductors
m mm2
Electrical characteristics of the output relay contacts

Contact type Single voltage or dual voltage Multi-voltage Rated insulation voltage Maximum operational voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp V V kV A At 220 V in AC-16 120 V 250 V in DC-13 Cabling (cage type connector) for flexible or solid cable Tightening torque 24 V Without cable end With cable end VA A A A mm2 mm2 N.m 1 N/C c 500 c 250 (c 400 V for LT3-SM00V) 2.5 5 100 for 0.5 million operating cycles 6 3 2 2 x 1...1 x 2.5 1 x 0.75...2 x 2.2 0.8 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 C/O 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 C/O
2.6
Conventional thermal current Operational power Breaking capacity
Thermistor probe characteristics

Type Conforming to standards Resistance Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Insulation Length of connecting cables Between probes mm At 25 C Per probe DA1-TTiii IEC/EN 60034-11-2 Mark A DA1-TSiii
V kV
3 x 250 in series a 2.5 V max 2.5 Reinforced 250
250 a 2.5 V max 1 Reinforced
Between probes and m 1 1 motor terminal plate (1) Provided that the total resistance of the probe circuit is less than 1500 at 20 C. (2) For distances greater than 500 m take cabling precautions (twisted shielded pairs).
Characteristics
LT3-S protection unit/thermistor probe combination

Guaranteed operating zones: examples with 3 probes type DA1-TTiii (250 to 25 C) in series, conforming to IEC/EN 60034-11-2, mark A. LT3-SE, LT3-SA, LT3-SM protection units
Resistance (ohms)
10 000
3100 2700 1650 1500 1000 750
Trip zone Reset zone
100
20
Trip zone on probe short-circuit
10
2.6
NOT - 20 C NOT - 5 C TNF NOT + 5 C -20 0 NOT + 15 C
Temperature (C)
3 probes type DA1-TTiii (250 at 25 C) in series
NOT: Nominal operating temperature Protection unit tripped Protection unit set
References
Protection units (without fault memory)

Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection Connection Voltage Output contact Cage connectors c 50/60 Hz 115 V N/C Reference LT3-SE00F Weight kg 0.220
2
230 V N/C LT3-SE00M 0.220
a LT3-SE00M
24 V
N/C
LT3-SE00BD
0.220
Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection On front face: fault and voltage signalling indicator. Connection Cage connectors Voltage c 50/60 Hz 115/230 V Output contact N/C + N/O Reference LT3-SA00M Weight kg 0.220
24/48 V
N/C + N/O
LT3-SA00ED
0.220
2.6
LT3-SA00M
c 50/60 Hz or a
24230 V
2 C/O
LT3-SA00MW
0.220
Protection units (with fault memory)

Units with manual reset with thermistor short-circuit detection. On front face: - fault and voltage signalling LED, - Test and Reset button. Connection Cage connectors Voltage c 50/60 Hz 400 V Output contact N/C + N/O Reference LT3-SM00V Weight kg 0.220
24/48 V
N/C + N/O
LT3-SM00E
0.220
LT3-SM00M 115/230 V N/C + N/O LT3-SM00M 0.220
24/48 V
N/C + N/O
LT3-SM00ED
0.220
c 50/60 Hz or a
24230 V
2 C/O
LT3-SM00MW
0.220
References
PTC thermistor probes

Description Nominal operating temperature (NOT) C 90 110 120 130 140 DA1-TTiii 150 160 170 Surface probes 60 70 80 90 100 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
kg 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 DA1-TT090 DA1-TT110 DA1-TT120 DA1-TT130 DA1-TT140 DA1-TT150 DA1-TT160 DA1-TT170 DA1-TS060 DA1-TS070 DA1-TS080 DA1-TS090 DA1-TS100 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005
Integrated triple probes
2.6

Mounting accessories Description Adaptor Application For fixing on ' rail DZ5-MB Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference RHZ-66 Weight kg 0.005
DA1-TSiii
Marking accessories Clip-in markers (maximum of 5 per device) Strips of 10 identical numbers (0 to 9) 25 AB1-Ri (1) 0.002
Strips of 10 identical capital letters (A to Z)
25
AB1-Gi (1)
0.002
(1) Replace the i in the reference with the required number or letter.
Dimensions, schemes, setting-up
Dimensions LT3-SE, SA, SM Mounting on rail AM1-DP200
Mounting on one ' rail (with mounting plate RHZ-66)

115
100
98,4
100
50
50
RHZ-66
22,5
Schemes for no fault operation LT3-SE Without fault memory LT3-SA dual voltage LT3-SA multi-voltage
A1 ou B1
A1
A1
96
95
T1
(1)
96
T1
Ue
(1)
98 97 95
T1
Ue
(1)
05 08
T2
95
T2
Fault
T2
Fault
06 98
A2
A2
A2
96
Stop
Stop Start K K
Stop Start
K K H
Start
K
LT3-SM dual voltage and 400 V (without B1)
LT3-SM multi-voltage
LT3-Si dual voltage
2.6
A1 ou B1
96
A1
95
T1
Ue
(1)
98 97 95
T1
Ue
(1)
05 08
T2 Y1 Reset Y2
Fault Test Reset
T2
Fault
06 98 96
Stop
A2
Y2
Stop Start K K H
A2
Reset
Y1 Test Reset
Note: Dual voltage units Supply must be connected as follows: Lower of the two specified voltages -B1 + A2 Higher of the two specified voltages -A1 + A2
Start
K
1) Contacts shown with relay energised Setting-up Cabling It is inadvisable to use the same multi-core cable for the thermistor probe circuit and the power circuit. This is especially important for long cable runs. If it is impossible to comply with the above recommendation, a pair of twisted conductors must be used for the thermistor probe circuit. Testing the insulation of the line connecting the thermistors to the LT3-S unit Before carrying out this test, short-circuit all the terminals of the LT3-S protection unit. Measure the insulation value between these terminals and earth using a megger or a flash tester, progressively increasing the voltage to the value defined by the standards. Checking the PTC thermistor probes for correct operation With the machine stopped, in the cold state and after having taken all the necessary safety precautions: i disconnect the line linking the thermistors to the LT3-S protection unit, at the terminals of the machine being protected: motor, etc., i using an ohmmeter with a voltage rating less than or equal to 2.5 V, measure the resistance of the probe circuit at the machine terminals, i depending on the number and type of thermistors connected in series, check that their resistance value at 25 C is correct. Example: motor fitted with 3 PTC thermistor probes with a resistance 250 at 25 C. Any value higher than 250 x 3 = 750 indicates a problem.
Operation
LT3-SA protection units

L1
A1 or B1
L2 L3 N T2 T1
96 98 97 Ko 95
Ue
Starting The LT3-SA is normally energised and its internal relay is in the pre-energised position. The motor is started by operating pushbutton Start automatically held in by K (3-wire control circuit). Thermal fault The strong increase in resistance of the PTC probes at the moment their temperature reaches the nominal operating temperature (NOT) is detected by the LT3-SA unit and causes the relay to drop out; indicator H comes on, as does the built-in indicator on unit LT3-SA. Contactor K drops out and pressing button Start has no effect. Reset As the motor cools, it reaches the reset threshold , 2 to 3 C below the nominal operating temperature. The relay resets and the motor can be started by pressing button Start
Fault
A2
Stop Start
Operating temperature NOT, Tripping threshold Reset threshold Relay Ko Fault indicator Contactor K Pushbutton M
LT3-SM protection units 2.6

L1 L2 L3 N T2 T1
A1 or B1
96 98 97 Ko 95
Operation is very similar to that described above, except for the following: Reset After tripping on thermal fault and cooling to the reset threshold, the Test/RESET button on the unit (R1) or a remote reset button (Reset) must be pressed to energise the relay. The fault is therefore memorised, even though the temperature of the probes has dropped to well below the reset threshold.
K H
Ue
Fault
R1 K
A2
Stop
Reset
Start
Signalling circuit As the relay is fitted with 2 separate contacts, the signalling voltage may be different from the contactor control voltage.
Operating temperature NOT, Tripping threshold Reset threshold Test/RESET button Reset Rd Relay Ko Fault indicator Contactor K Pushbutton M
Test Pressing the Test/RESET button simulates a fault and causes the relay to drop out: the FAULT indicator comes on, as does the remote signalling indicator. The unit is reset by pressing the Test/RESET button again.
Characteristics
Contactors
Contactors type LC1-B
Contactor type
LC1-BL
LC1-BM
LC1-BP
LC1-BR
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V V 1000 1500 1000 1500 1000 1500 1000 1500
Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Standard version Special version Ambient air temperature around the device (for operation at Uc) Storage Operation Permissible Maximum operating altitude Operating position Without derating Without derating C C C m
IEC/EN 60947-4-1 pending, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660 CSA, BV, RINA TC TH - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 50+ 60 3000 30 occasional, in relation to the normal vertical mounting position
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits (sine wave) Maximum thermal current Ith Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity In AC-3, 55 C In AC-1, 40 C Up to Without derating Derating coefcient A A V Hz 1, 2, 3 or 4 750 800 1000 50/60 100 Hz: 0.9 - 150 Hz: 0.8 - 250 Hz: 0.7 - 400 Hz: 0.5 A 800 10,000 10,000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 7000 4800 3500 2100 1200 800 1000 800 0.18 88 115 2 mm mm 50 x 5 48 1250 10,000 10,000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 8000 5200 3800 2400 1800 1200 1500 1200 0.18 180 280 2 80 x 5 4 10 2000 15,000 15,000 12,000 9000 5000 12,000 12,000 9600 6400 5200 3600 2800 2 x 800 (1) 2 x 1000 (1) 2 x 1000 (1) 0.13 290 520 3 100 x5 4 10 35 2750 18,000 18,000 15,000 11,000 6000 15,000 15,000 12,000 8000 6300 4400 3600 2 x 1000 (1) 2 x 1200 (1) 2 x 1200 (1) 0.09 360 680 4 100 x 5 4 10 35 1, 2, 3 or 4 1000 1250 1, 2, 3 or 4 1500 2000 1, 2, 3 or 4 1800 2750
2.7
40 C
I rms conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 A I rms conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 For 1 s For 5 s For 10 s For 30 s For 1 min. For 3 min. For 10 min. Motor circuit (aM type ) With thermal overload relay (type gG) gl fuses At Ith and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1 up to 440 V 500 V 660-690 V 1000 V A A A A A A A A A A A A A A m W W
Permissible short time rating From cold state, with no current owing for previous 60 minutes at 40 C
Short-circuit protection by fuses U 440 V Average impedance per pole Power dissipated per pole for the above operational currents Cabling
Number of bars Bar
Bolt diameter Tightening torque
Power circuit connections N.m 21 35 (1) Fuses must not be connected in parallel unless specied by the manufacturer.
Characteristics
Contactors
Contactor type
LC1-BL
LC1-BM
LC1-BP
LC1-BR

Rated control voltage 50/60 Hz c 1, 2 or 3 pole contactors c 4 pole contactors Voltage limits Operating Drop out Maximum consumption (coil + economy resistor) a Number of poles: 1 Number of poles: 2 Number of poles: 3 Number of poles: 4 c (1) Number of poles: 1 Number of poles: 2 Number of poles: 3 Number of poles: 4 Operating time (2) average at Uc (in milliseconds) C O breaking on a side O breaking on c side V V V V V VA VA VA VA W W W W ms ms ms 110500 48500 48500 0.851.1 Uc 0.300.50 Uc 110500 48500 48500 0.851.1 Uc 0.300.50 Uc 110500 48500 48500 0.851.1 Uc 0.350.50 Uc 110500 48500 60500 0.851.1 Uc 0.400.50 Uc
Inrush: 620 - sealed: 10 Inrush: 1000 - sealed: 20 Inrush: 1300 - sealed: 31 Inrush: 1600 - sealed: 47 Inrush: 520 - sealed: 10 Inrush: 800 - sealed: 20 Inrush: 1100 - sealed: 31 Inrush: 1400 - sealed: 47 100150 50100 2040 100150 50100 2040 100150 50100 2040 100150 50100 2040
Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. Mechanical durability (at Uc) Maximum operating rate in mechanical operating cycles In millions of operating cycles Ambient temperature 55 C 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
op. 120 120 120 120 cycs/h (1) The inrush and sealed power values of d.c. electromagnets often require the use of an intermediate relay for control. (2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
2.7
Characteristics of instantaneous auxiliary contacts ZC4-GMp

Rated thermal current Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Conforming to VDE, group C Short-circuit protection gG type cartridge fuses Operational power V 1 million operating cycles Making and breaking capacity Cabling With cable end Without cable end VA/W VA/W mm2 mm2 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 and VDE 0660 A V V A 20 660 750 20 a supply 110/ 127 220 2000 4000 c supply 380 4000 415/ 440 4000 3500 110 250 220 250 800 440 230 400 500 200 360
14,000 23,000 35,000 45,000 35,000 1600 1 or 2 x 4 mm2 conductors 1 or 2 x 6 mm2 conductors
References
Contactors
Contactors type LC1-B, 750 to 1800 A for motor control in utilisation category AC-3
a or c
Weight
3-pole contactors
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW kW kW kW kW kW kW Rated Instantan. operational auxiliary current contacts in AC-3 440 V up to A 750 2 3 1 4 280 500 530 560 600 670 530 1000 2 3 1 4 425 750 800 800 700 750 670 1500 2 3 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (1)
kg
LC1-BL33p22 LC1-BL33p31 LC1-BL33p13 LC1-BL33p40 LC1-BM33p22 LC1-BM33p31 LC1-BM33p13 LC1-BM33p40 LC1-BP33p22 LC1-BP33p31 LC1-BP33p13 LC1-BP33p40 LC1-BR33p22 LC1-BR33p31 LC1-BR33p13 LC1-BR33p40 58.000 58.000 58.000 58.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 129.000 129.000 129.000 129.000
220
400
425
450
500
560
530
LC1-BP33
2.7
500 900 900 900 900 900 750 1800
4 2 3 1 4
(1) Standard control circuit voltages Volts 48 110 125 127 220 230 240 380 400 415 a 50400 Hz F G M P U Q V N c ED FD GD MD For voltages other than those indicated above, clearly note down the operational voltage (3 gures) current (2 letters : AC or DC). Example : 82 V d.c. : the reference becomes LC1-BP33082DC22. For coil characteristics, see pages 2/268 to 2/271.
440 500 R S RD and the type of
References
Contactors
Contactors type LC1-B, 800 to 2750 A for control in utilisation category AC-1
a or c
Weight
Single, 2, 3 and 4-pole contactors

Maximum operational current in AC-1 ( 40 C) A 800 1 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3
LC1-BL31p22 LC1-BL31p31 LC1-BL31p13 LC1-BL31p40 LC1-BL32p22 LC1-BL32p31 LC1-BL32p13 LC1-BL32p40 LC1-BL33p22 LC1-BL33p31 LC1-BL33p13 LC1-BL33p40 LC1-BL34p22 LC1-BL34p31 LC1-BL34p13 LC1-BL34p40
Number of poles
kg
32.000 32.000 32.000 32.000 45.000 45.000 45.000 45.000 58.000 58.000 58.000 58.000 72.000 72.000 72.000 72.000 31.000 31.000 31.000 31.000 44.000 44.000 44.000 44.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 71.000 71.000 71.000 71.000 41.000 41.000 41.000 41.000 65.000 65.000 65.000 65.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 120.000 120.000 120.000 120.000 52.000 52.000 52.000 52.000 85.000 85.000 85.000 85.000 129.000 129.000 129.000 129.000 160.000 160.000 160.000 160.000
2 LC1-BP33 3
1250
LC1-BM31p22 LC1-BM31p31 LC1-BM31p13 LC1-BM31p40 LC1-BM32p22 LC1-BM32p31 LC1-BM32p13 LC1-BM32p40 LC1-BM33p22 LC1-BM33p31 LC1-BM33p13 LC1-BM33p40 LC1-BM34p22 LC1-BM34p31 LC1-BM34p13 LC1-BM34p40 LC1-BP31p22 LC1-BP31p31 LC1-BP31p13 LC1-BP31p40 LC1-BP32p22 LC1-BP32p31 LC1-BP32p13 LC1-BP32p40 LC1-BP33p22 LC1-BP33p31 LC1-BP33p13 LC1-BP33p40 LC1-BP34p22 LC1-BP34p31 LC1-BP34p13 LC1-BP34p40 LC1-BR31p22 LC1-BR31p31 LC1-BR31p13 LC1-BR31p40 LC1-BR32p22 LC1-BR32p31 LC1-BR32p13 LC1-BR32p40 LC1-BR33p22 LC1-BR33p31 LC1-BR33p13 LC1-BR33p40 LC1-BR34p22 LC1-BR34p31 LC1-BR34p13 LC1-BR34p40
2.7
2000
2750
(1) See previous page.
References
Contactors
Contactors type LC1-B Accessories and spare parts
Accessories and spare parts

Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks Description ZC4-GM1 For contactor LC1-B Composition 1 N/O 1 N/C Reference ZC4-GM1 ZC4-GM2 Set reference Weight kg 0.030 0.030 Weight kg PA1-LB80 PA1-LB80 PA1-LB80 PA1-LB80 Reference PA1-LB75 PA1-LB76 PA1-LB89 PA1-LB50 PA1-LB50 PA1-PB50 PA1-RB50 0.420 0.420 0.420 0.420 Weight kg 0.220 0.200 0.120 3.700 3.700 6.200 8.500
For contactor
Number of sets required per contactor pole 1 1 2 3
Set of contacts (1 moving contact, 1 xed contact)
LC1-BL LC1-BM LC1-BP LC1-BR
PA1-LB89 PA1-LB80 (PA1-LB76 + PA1-LB75)
Description Moving contact only (for 1 finger) Fixed contact only (for 1 nger) Blow-out horn only (for 1 nger) Arc chamber (for 1 contactor pole)
For contactor LC1-B LC1-B LC1-B LC1-BL LC1-BM LC1-BP LC1-BR
2.7
PA1-LB50
Description Bar support bracket for mounting on 120 or 150 mm centres For contactor LC1-BL to BR
Sold in lots of 2
Unit reference LA9-B103
Weight kg 1.620
Assembly of two vertically mounted contacts by the customer Description For contactor Mechanical interlock and locking device components Specications LC1-B
Reference EZ2-LB0601
Weight kg 1.280
- Positive mechanical interlock between two vertically mounted contactors of the same or different ratings. - Connecting rod with cranks mounted on the right-hand, pole side. - Vertical xing centres of the two contactors: 600 mm. Description Specication Height mm Notched mounting rail used as uprights and as equipment support 2 mm steel, with zinc chromate treatment M8 M8 x 18 1650 1850 2000 1/4 turn sliding clip nut and corresponding screw for assembly of rails AM1-EC
Sold in lots of 4 4 4 10 10
Unit reference AM1-EC165 AM1-EC185 AM1-EC200 AF1-CD081 AF1-VC820
Weight kg 2.460 2.760 2.980 0.020 0.024
EZ2-LB0601
Adjustment characteristics
Contactors
Electromagnet
Electromagnet EB5-KB50 Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel Moving circuit
E e
2
Coil Moving circuit
Return spring
Poles
Complete pole N/C pole Fixed contact Moving contact
Opening gap adjustment
Pole spring
Adjustment of application force
2.7
d.c. or a.c. supply adjustment characteristics with economy resistor (and rectier on a.c. supply)
Contactor type Electromagnet Pick-up travel (E) Pull-in travel (e) Coil Pull-in voltage Drop-out voltage N/O pole Adjustment of application force (F) on the contact per pole according to contactor composition 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole daN daN daN 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 (1) 30 (1) 30 (1) 30 (1) 30 (2) 30 (2) 30 (2) 30 (2) V V mm mm LC1-BL EB5-KB50 30 10 WB1-KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc LC1-BM EB5-KB50 30 10 WB1-KBppp 0.75 UC 0.30.5 Uc LC1-BP EB5-KB50 30 10 WB1-KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc LC1-BR EB5-KB50 30 10 WB1-KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc
4-pole daN 30 30 (1) Each pole has 2 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts. (2) Each pole has 3 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
Dimensions
Contactors
Common side view

185 R 290
Single-pole, 2-pole or 3-pole contactors LC1-Bp31, 32 or 33
4-pole contactors LC1-Bp34
330
15
330
c 85 b c
260
365
15
15
44 30 15
P M L
Q1 30 30
P M1
51 M2 L
Q1 30
12 fixing screw
S T
Number of poles a b c L M M1 M2 N P Q1 R S T
LC1-BL 1 2 50 50 59 59 16 16 345 445 285 385 121 121 100 100 100 100 122 122 10 10 30 30 9 9
3 50 59 16 540 480 121 100 100 122 10 30 9
4 50 59 16 760 308 392 121 100 100 122 10 30 9
LC1-BM 1 2 63 63 55 55 20 20 345 445 285 385 125 125 100 100 100 100 157 157 17 17 30 30 11 11
3 63 55 20 540 480 125 100 100 157 17 30 11
4 63 55 20 760 308 392 125 100 100 157 17 30 11
LC1-BP 1 2 100 100 55 55 20 20 385 540 325 480 125 125 150 150 110 110 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11
3 100 55 20 760 700 125 150 110 173 20 60 11
4 100 55 20 1065 455 550 125 150 110 173 20 60 11
LC1-BR 1 2 125 125 50 50 25 25 445 635 385 575 130 130 195 195 130 130 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11
3 125 50 25 885 825 130 195 130 173 20 60 11
4 125 50 25 1065 455 550 130 195 130 173 20 60 11
Electrical safety clearance Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (a 3-phase supply).
X2
2.7
a 3-phase voltage 380/440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V

X1
LC1-BL X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250
LC1-BM 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250
LC1-BP 150 200 150 220 200 250 200 250
LC1-BR 200 250 200 250 200 250 250 300
Mechanical interlock for assembling vertically mounted reversing contactors EZ2-LB0601
A = (E112) 488
E = 600
Schemes: page 2/267
Schemes
Contactors
Contactors type LC1-B type LC1-Bp31p22

A1
LC1-Bp31p31
A1
LC1-Bp31p13
A1
LC1-Bp31p40
A1
A2
A2
A2
type LC1-Bp32p22
A1
LC1-Bp32p31
A1
LC1-Bp32p13
A1
LC1-Bp32p40
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
type LC1-Bp33p22
A1
LC1-Bp33p31
A1
LC1-Bp33p13
A1
LC1-Bp33p40
A1
A2
A2
A2
type LC1-Bp34p22
A1
LC1-Bp34p31
A1
LC1-Bp34p13
A1
LC1-Bp34p40
A1
A2
A2
A2
a.c. control circuit
S3
S1
KM 2-wire control
S2 3-wire control
KM
+
KM
A2
A2
A2
2.7
Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items. d.c. control circuit
S3
S1 KA KM S2 3-wire control
S3
S1
KM 2-wire control
S2 3-wire control
KM R
2-wire control
KM R
KM
KM
KA
It is essential to check that the control circuit contacts have ratings compatible with the voltage and power consumption of the operating coil of the contactor. If not, an intermediate KA relay must be fitted and wired as shown. Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items.
References
Contactors
Contactors type LC1-B Replacement coils and accessories for single-pole contactors
The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply. For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: p 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor). For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: p 1 individual rectier (to be wired). p 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) ZC4-GM2 or 1 contactor LP1-D123) wired into the rectied current side.
2
WB1-KBppp
Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. V 47-51 52-56 57-64 65-68 69-79 80-87 88-94 95-108 V 110-125
Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 19.7 25.2 32.5 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 257 408 507
Economy resistor I inrush Resistors Contact 10 % at Un Unit Total max reference resistance Reference A 10.3 9.5 8.9 7.1 6.9 5.3 4.7 4.3 4.2 3 2.7 2.4 2.3 1.9 1.7 1.6 1.6 DR2-SC0270 270 DR2-SC0330 330 DR2-SC0390 390 DR2-SC0560 560 DR2-SC0680 680 DR2-SC0820 820 DR2-SC1000 1000 DR2-SC1200 1200 DR2-SC1800 1800 DR2-SC2700 2700 DR2-SC3300 3300 DR2-SC3900 3900 DR2-SC4700 4700 DR2-SC6800 6800 DR2-SC8200 8200 DR2-SC1001 10,000 DR2-SC1201 12,000 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2
Rectier (for a only) Reference
Coil (2)
Weight
Reference kg WB1-KB155 1.120 WB1-KB132 1.120 WB1-KB123 1.120 WB1-KB133 1.120 WB1-KB121 1.120 WB1-KB130 1.120 WB1-KB140 1.120
DR5-TE1U WB1-KB134 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB124 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB122 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB135 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB136 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB139 1.120
109-136 126-155 137-151 156-173 152-166 174-191 167-189 192-216 190-221 217-256
2.7
222-243 257-280 244-267 281-307 268-318 308-365 319-405 366-463 406-446 464-500 447-500 Specications
1 x LC1-DT25LD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB125 1.120

1 x LC1-DT25UD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB137 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25UD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB126 1.120
1 x LC1-DT25TD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB138 1.120
1.1 (3) DR2-SC1001 2 x 10,000 1 x LC1-DT25VD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB127 1.120 1 (4) DR2-SC1201 2 x 12,000 1 x LC1-DT25RD WB1-KB128 1.120
p Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 380520 W, sealed 0.150.20 W - a.c. (with rectier): inrush 450620 VA, sealed 0.150.20 VA p Time constant when sealed 25 ms p Economy resistor consumption: 710 W p Operating cycles/hour at 55 C: 120 p Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles. p With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current. (2) Standard coils: TC treatment. For hot and humid atmospheres TH treatment is available; add the sufx TH to the coil reference: Eg.: WB1-KB135 becomes WB1-KB135TH. (3) 2 resistors in series: 2 x 10,000 . (4) 2 resistors in series: 2 x 12,000 .
2/268
References
Contactors
Contactors type LC1-B Replacement coils and accessories for 2-pole contactors
The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply. For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: p 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor). For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: p 1 individual rectier (to be wired). p 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectied current side. Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. WB1-KBppp V 48-51 52-56 57-62 63-68 69-79 80-85 86-98 99-108 V 99-113 114-125 Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % 3.22 4.04 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 19.7 25.2 32.5 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 257 Economy resistor I inrush Resistors (2 in series) Contact 10 % at Un Unit Total max reference resistance Reference A 15.8 13.8 12.5 11.6 11 8.8 8.6 6.6 6 5.4 5.3 3.8 3.4 3 3 2.4 2.1 2 1.9
DR2-SC0068 DR2-SC0082 DR2-SC0100 DR2-SC0100 DR2-SC0120 DR2-SC0120 DR2-SC0150 DR2-SC0180 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0270 DR2-SC0330 DR2-SC0390 DR2-SC0470 DR2-SC0680 DR2-SC1000 DR2-SC1200 DR2-SC1500 DR2-SC1800 DR2-SC1800 DR2-SC2200 DR2-SC2700
Coil (2)
Weight
Reference kg
WB1-KB141 1.120 WB1-KB142 1.120 WB1-KB155 1.120 WB1-KB132 1.120 WB1-KB123 1.120 WB1-KB133 1.120 WB1-KB121 1.120
2 x 68 82 + 100 100 + 120 2 x 120 2 x 150 180 + 220 220 + 270 2 x 330 2 x 390 2 x 470 2 x 680 2 x 1000 2 x 1200 1500 + 1800 1800 + 2200 2 x 2700
1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2
DR5-TE1U WB1-KB130 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB140 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB134 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB124 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB122 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB135 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB136 1.120
109-119 126-136 120-136 137-156 137-173 157-196 174-191 197-216 192-210 217-238 211-238 239-272 239-279 273-318 280-310 319-359 311-341 360-387 342-399 388-452 400-500 453-500 Specications
2.7
1 x LC1-DT25UD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB139 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25UD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB125 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25TD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB137 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25VD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB126 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25VD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB138 1.120
DR2-SC3300 2 x 3300
DR2-SC3900 DR2-SC4700 DR2-SC5600
2 x 3900 4700 + 5600
p Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 600800 W, sealed 0.350.5 W - a.c. (with rectier): inrush 7201000 VA, sealed 0.350.5 VA p Time constant when sealed 25 ms p Economy resistor consumption: 1520 W p Operating cycles/hour at 55 C: 120 p Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles. p With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current. (2) Standard coils: TC treatment. For hot and humid atmospheres TH treatment is available; add the sufx TH to the coil reference: Eg.: WB1-KB135 becomes WB1-KB135TH.
2/269
References
Contactors
The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply. For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: p 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) ZC4-GM2 or 1 contactor LP1-D123). For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: p 1 individual rectier (to be wired). p 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectied current side.
2
WB1-KBppp
Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. V 47-50 51-55 56-60 61-66 67-72 73-79 80-92 93-98 99-114 V 108-113 114-132
Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % 1.85 2.35 3.22 4.04 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 11.7 25.2 32.2 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 257
I inrush 10 % at Un max A
Economy resistor Resistors Contact (2 in parallel or 2 in series) Unit Total reference resistance Reference
DR2-SC0150 DR2-SC0180 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0270 DR2-SC0330 DR2-SC0100 DR2-SC0120 DR2-SC0150 DR2-SC0180 DR2-SC0180 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0270 DR2-SC0330 DR2-SC0390 DR2-SC0470 DR2-SC0560 DR2-SC0820 DR2-SC1000 DR2-SC1200 DR2-SC1500 DR2-SC2200 DR2-SC2700 DR2-SC3300 DR2-SC3900 150//150 180//180 220//220 270//270 330//330 2 x 100 2 x 120 150 + 180 180 + 220 2 x 270 2 x 330 390 + 470 2 x 560 2 x 820 2 x 1000 2 x 1200 2 x 1500 2 x 2200 2 x 2700 2 x 3300 2 x 3900 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2
Rectier (for a only)
Coil (2)
Weight
Reference Reference kg
WB1-KB154 1.120 WB1-KB153 1.120 WB1-KB141 1.120 WB1-KB142 1.120 WB1-KB155 1.120 WB1-KB132 1.120 WB1-KB123 1.120
27 23.5 18.5 16 14.5 13.5 12.8 10.2 10 7.7 7 6.3 6.2 4.5 4 3.6 3.5 2.8 2.5 2.4 1.9
DR5-TE1U WB1-KB133 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB121 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB130 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB140 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB134 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB124 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB122 1.120
115-126 133-145 127-139 146-160 140-159 161-181
2.7
160-201 182-228 202-222 229-255 223-246 256-282 247-277 283-316 278-327 317-372 328-360 373-408 361-399 409-452 400-469 453-500 470-500 Specications
1 x LC1-DT25LD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB135 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25UD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB136 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25UD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB139 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25TD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB125 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25VD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB137 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25VD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB126 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25RD WB1-KB138 1.120
p Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 9001100 W, sealed 0.71 W - a.c. (with rectier): inrush 11001300 VA, sealed 0.71 VA p Time constant when sealed 25 ms p Economy resistor consumption: 2430 W p Operating cycles/hour at 55 C: 120 p Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles. p With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current. (2) Standard coils: TC treatment. For hot and humid atmospheres TH treatment is available; add the sufx TH to the coil reference: Eg.: WB1-KB135 becomes WB1-KB135TH.
2/270
References
Contactors
The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply. For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: p 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor). For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: p 1 individual rectier (to be wired). p 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectied current side. Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. WB1-KBppp V 57-61 62-67 68-73 74-81 82-89 90-102 V 105-119 Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % 2.35 3.22 4.04 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 25.2 32.5 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 Economy resistor I inrush Resistors (3 in series) Contact 10 % at Un Unit Total max reference resistance Reference A 26 21 18 16.3 15 14 11.5 11.3 8.7 7.1 6.9 5 4.5 4 3.9 3.2 2.8 2.5
DR2-SC0027 DR2-SC0033 DR2-SC0039 DR2-SC0047 DR2-SC0056 DR2-SC0068 DR2-SC0100 DR2-SC0100 DR2-SC0150 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0330 DR2-SC0470 DR2-SC0560 DR2-SC0680 DR2-SC0820 DR2-SC1200 DR2-SC1500 DR2-SC1800 3 x 27 3 x 33 3 x 39 3 x 47 3 x 56 3 x 68 3 x 100 3 x 100 3 x 150 3 x 220 3 x 330 3 x 470 3 x 560 3 x 680 3 x 820 3 x 1200 3 x 1500 3 x 1800 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 1 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2 2 x ZC4-GM2

Coil (2)
Weight
Reference kg
WB1-KB153 1.120 WB1-KB141 1.120 WB1-KB142 1.120 WB1-KB155 1.120 WB1-KB132 1.120
DR5-TE1U WB1-KB123 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB133 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB121 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB130 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB134 1.120 DR5-TE1U WB1-KB124 1.120
103-111 120-128 112-129 129-148 130-143 149-163 158-180 180-204 181-226 205-259 227-251 260-288 252-278 289-317 279-313 318-356 314-368 357-418 369-408 419-462 409-448 463-500 449-500 Specications
1 x LC1-DT25LD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB122 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25UD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB135 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25UD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB136 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25TD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB139 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25VD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB125 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25VD DR5-TE1S WB1-KB137 1.120 1 x LC1-DT25RD WB1-KB126 1.120
2.7
p Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 11001400W, sealed 1.21.6 W - a.c. (with rectier): inrush 13001600 VA, sealed 1.21.6 VA p Time constant when sealed 25 ms p Economy resistor consumption: 3545 W p Operating cycles/hour at 55 C: 120 p Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles. p With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current. (2) Standard coils: TC treatment. For hot and humid atmospheres TH treatment is available; add the sufx TH to the coil reference: Eg.: WB1-KB135 becomes WB1-KB135TH.
2/271
General
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors

Magnetic latching contactors of both block and bar mounted types are fitted with a special electromagnet which enables them to remain in the on position when the coil is no longer energised. Applications
The special properties of magnetic latching contactors make them suitable for a large number of applications: Properties i Retention of the sequence memory in automatic control equipment in the event of a control circuit failure. i Energy saving, since the source of supply to the coil does not need to supply current when the contactor is latched in the closed state. i Change of state from Closed to Open by current signal through the coil. i Unaffected by mains interference. i Utilisation of contactors beyond their breaking capacity as operations are performed off-load. i Contactors are silent in the latched position. Operation of the electromagnet CR1-F block contactors CR1-F magnetic latching contactors are fitted with a double coil with 3 terminals comprising a latching winding and an unlatching winding. The 2 windings have a common point which can necessitate special wiring precautions when the latching supply is separate from the unlatching supply. The power supplies may be a.c. or d.c. For d.c. operation, the polarities indicated must be complied with. Applications i Refineries, power stations, excitation circuits. i Contactors remaining in the closed state for long periods. Example: refineries, power supplies, low voltage distribution. i Selective opening control. i No unwanted opening and closing of the main power poles. i Current carrying at voltages up to 1000 Volts.
2.7
Operating precautions: - the 2 windings must not be supplied simultaneously, - a winding must not be supplied continuously, - supply to the coils must be via pulsed contacts. Manual opening: If the control voltage is not present, the contactor can be unlatched manually. CR1-B bar mounted contactors CR1-B magnetic latching contactors are fitted with a single coil, supplied with d.c. or a.c. through a rectifier. Latching is obtained by direct supply of the coil in one direction of current flow. Unlatching is obtained by a reverse current, adjusted by resistors.
Mechanical latching contactors

LC1-D block contactors For applications using smaller contactor sizes than those described in the following pages, it is possible to obtain the same function by the addition of a mechanical latching block type LAD-6K10i and LA6-DK, which can be mounted on LC1-D contactors (see page 2/86).
Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/292 to 2/299
Selection
for DOL starting of squirrel cage motors
Contactors
Continuous or intermittent duty up to 30 operating cycles/hour Motor (1) 3-pole 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V contactor 230 V 400 V Reference P In P In P In P In (2) kW HP A kW HP A kW HP A kW HP A 45 51 55 59 63 75
3-pole differential thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A LR9-F5369 LR9-F5371 LR9-F5371 90150
3 fuses Type aM BS-88 Rating A A 160 200 250 315
60 70 75 80 85
150 80 170 182 90
110 147 80
110 138 90
125 146
CR1-F185 CR1-F185 CR1-F265
90 125 165 125 170 100 136 182 100 136 162
132220 200 132220 250
195 100 138 188 110 150 178 203 110 150 205 110 150 200 129 175 209
100 240 129 175 242 129 175 230 132 180 215 132 180 245 132 180 240
140 190 250 140 190 227 140 190 260 147 200 260 147 200 236 147 200 273 150 205 270 150 205 246 110 260 150 205 280 160 220 280 160 220 256
CR1-F265 CR1-F265
LR9-F7375 LR9-F7375
200330 250 200330 315
315 400
80 90
CR1-F400 CR1-F400 CR1-F400 CR1-F400 CR1-F500 CR1-F500 CR1-F500 CR1-F630 CR1-F630 CR1-F630 CR1-F630
LR9-F7375 LR9-F7375 LR9-F7379 LR9-F7379 LR9-F7379 LR9-F7381 LR9-F7381 LR9-F7381 LR9-F7381 LR9-F7381 LR9-F7381
200330 315 200330 315 300500 400 300500 400 300500 500 380630 500 380630 500 380630 500 380630 630 380630 630 380630 800
400 400 500 500 630 630 630 630 800 800 1000
125 295 160 220 300 245 250 270 300
180 245 289 185 250 295 320 200 270 321 325 220 300 353 340 385 250 340 401 257 350 412
100 136 325 180 245 333 180 110 150 356 185 250 342 185 200 200 270 370 220 129 175 420 220 300 408
132 180 425 250 340 425 140 190 450 250 340 460 257 350 450 280 380 450 147 200 472 295 400 473 280 380 475 257 350 475 295 400 500 300 410 481 150 205 483 280 380 510 300 410 510 315 430 505 160 220 520 295 400 546 315 430 535 335 450 518 180 245 578 300 410 565 335 450 550 355 480 549 185 250 595 315 430 584 355 480 580 375 500 575 200 270 626 335 450 620 375 400 355 d 635 425 375 d 670 445 220 d 700 400 d 710 450 250 d 257 280 295 300 315 d d d d d 800 425 d 826 900 948 980 990 445 450 475 500 530 d d d d d
2.7
500 d d d d
610 650 690 730 740
400 425 445 450 475
454 d d d d
611 650 680 690 730 780 825 870 920 965
CR1-BL33 CR1-BM33
LT6-P0M005FM 500800 800 (3) LT6-P0M005FM 500800 800 (3)
1000 1000
760 475 d 790 800 850 900 950 500 530 560 600 d d d d
780 500 d 820 870 920 978 530 560 600 630 d d d d
LT6-P0M005FM 63010001000 1250 (3) (1) The ratings are for standard 220, 380, 415 or 440 V motors. The overload relays should preferably be set to the motor full-load current shown on the motor rating plate. For other power ratings, select the overload relay with the appropriate range; the associated contactor and fuses must have ratings equal to or immediately greater than In. (2) Reference to be completed, see page 2/282. d There are no standard power ratings for these motors. (3) Used with CT's 1000/1 or 1000/5 Class 5P15 0.5 VA (not supplied).
CR1-BM33
Selection
for utilisation category AC-3
Contactors
Contactor size
CR1F185
CR1F265
CR1F400
CR1F500
CR1F630
CR1BL
CR1BM
CR1BP
CR1BR
Rated operational current in AC-3 ( 55 C)

440 V 500 V A A A A 185 175 140 73 265 245 230 95 400 385 365 135 500 500 435 270 630 540 470 330 750 750 700 400 1000 900 800 400 1500 1200 900 500 1800 1500 1100 600
660/690 V 1000 V
Rated operational power (standard motor power ratings)

220240 V kW 55 75 110 147 200 220 280 425 500
HP
380400 V kW
75
90
100
132
150
200
200
250
270
335
300
400
380
500
580
750
680
900
HP
415 V kW
185
100
180
140
270
220
340
280
450
375
545
425
680
530
1000
800
1220
900
HP
440 V kW
136
100
180
140
300
250
380
295
500
400
580
450
720
560
1100
800
1220
900
HP
136
110
190
160
340
257
400
355
545
400
610
500
760
600
1100
750
1220
900
2.7
500 V kW
HP
660/690 V kW
150
110
220
160
350
280
480
335
545
450
680
560
810
670
1000
750
1220
900
HP
1000 V kW
100
147
185
335
610
450
760
530
910
530
1000
670
1220
750
HP
136
200
250
610
720
720
910
1000
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour, at rated operational power with an on-load factor 85%: 750 for CR1-F185 to F265, 500 for CR1-F400 to F630 and 120 for CR1-B.
Selection
Contactors
Use in category AC-3 (Ue 440 V) (1) ( 55 C)

The current (Ic) in AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
CR1-BL, BM
CR1-F185
CR1-F265
CR1-F400
CR1-F500
CR1-F630
Millions of operating cycles 1 0,8
CR1-BR
CR1-BP
0,6 0,4
0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02
0,01 0,008 0,006

Current breaking limits
0,004
0,002
In categories
AC3
AC2 AC4
0,001 0,008 20 30 40 50 60 70 8090 100 150 200 300 400 600 800 1000 500 1500 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 10 000 Current broken in A
Example: Asynchronous motor with P = 50 kW, Ue = 380 V, Ie = 100 A, Ic = Ie = 100 A or asynchronous motor with P = 55 kW, Ue = 415 V, Ie = 100 A, Ic = Ie = 100 A 600,000 operating cycles required The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: CR1-F185. (1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.
2.7
Selection
for utilisation category AC-1 and according to required electrical durability
Contactors
Maximum operational current (on-load factor 0.95)

Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour Contactor size CR1CR1CR1F185 F265 F400 Cable c.s.a. mm2 150 mm 40 C A 55 C A 70 C A 275 275 180 185 350 300 250 2 30 x 5 500 430 340 CR1F500 2 40 x 5 700 580 500 CR1F630 2 60 x 5 1000 850 700 CR1BL 2 50 x 5 800 700 600 CR1BM 2 80 x 5 1250 1100 900 CR1BP 3 CR1BR 4
Number of bars Bar c.s.a. Operational current in category AC-1 at ambient temperature
100 x 5 100 x 5 2000 1750 1500 2750 2400 2000
Increase in operational current by paralleling of poles Apply the following multiplying factors to the current values given above; these factors take into account the often unbalanced current distribution between poles: - 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6 - 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 - 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.8
Electrical durability (Ue 440 V) (1)

Millions of operating cycles 1 0,8
CR1-BL, BM CR1-F185 CR1-F265 CR1-F400 CR1-F500 CR1-F630 CR1-BR CR1-BP
0,6
2.7
0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04
0,02
0,01
60
80
100
250 275 350
400 500
600 700
800
1000 1250
2000
4000 2750 Current broken in A
Example: Ue = 220 V - Ie = 200 A - = 40 C - Ic = Ie = 200 A 600,000 operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: CR1-F400. (1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.
Selection
for switching primaries of 3-phase transformers
Contactors
Operating conditions Maximum ambient temperature Maximum operational voltage : 55 C : 1000 V. 5060 Hz
When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner to quickly reach its steady state value. The value of this current depends on: - the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area of the core, rated inductance, number of turns, size of the windings ...), - the performance of the magnetic laminations used (residual induction and saturation inductance), - the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains voltage at the moment of switch-on. The inrush current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is independent of the no-load or on-load state of the transformer (The tables are based on 30 In). The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given in the tables below.
Contactor selection
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles /hour Contactor size Maximum permissible closing current peak Maximum operational power in kVA (1) A CR1-F185 2800 CR1-F265 3500 CR1-F400 5500 CR1-F500 6800 CR1-F630 9000
220230 V 380400 V 415440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V
40 75 80 95 120 150 CR1-BL
50 90 100 110 140 200 CR1-BM 18,000
75 130 140 170 200 250 CR1-BP 24,000
100 170 190 225 270 375 CR1-BR 30,000
140 225 250 280
2.7
315 470
Contactor size Maximum permissible closing current peak Maximum operational power in kVA (1) A
18,000
220230 V 380400 V 415440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V
230 400 450 480 600 700
230 400 450 480 600 700
300 530 560 600 800 1000
380 660 700 750 950 1200
(1) Maximum operational power corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.
Characteristics
Contactors
Contactor type
CR1-F185
CR1-F265
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V V 1000 1500 TH 1000 1500
Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating positions
Standard version Special version Storage For operation at Uc Without derating Without derating
C C
m
- 60+ 80 - 15+ 70 3000 5
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue 440 V) AC-3, 40 C AC-1, 40 C AC-4, 40 C Rated operational current (Ue) Frequency limits (sine wave) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity Up to of the operational current I rms I rms A A A V Hz A 220440 V A 500 V 660/690 V A A A A A A A A A A A A m W W mm2 mm2 mm N.m 3 or 4 185 275 170 1000 25200 2100 1800 1600 1200 600 1500 1500 1500 920 740 500 400 200 315 0.36 12 26 1 150 150 2 25 x 3 8 18 3 or 4 265 350 245 1000 25200 2940 2450 2200 1700 800 2200 2200 2200 1230 950 620 480 315 400 0.32 22 39 1 240 240 2 32 x 4 10 35
2.7
Permissible short time rating from cold state, no current flowing for preceding 60 minutes at 40 C For 1 s For 5 s For 10 s For 30 s For 1 min For 3 min For 10 min Short-circuit protection by fuses 440 V Average impedance per pole Power dissipated per pole for the above operational currents Cabling
1000 V
Motor circuit AC-3 (type aM) AC-1 circuit (type gG) At Ith and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1 Number of conductors Cable with lug Cable with connector Number of bars Bar c.s.a. Bolt diameter Tightening torque
CR1-F400
CR1-F500
CR1-F630
CR1-BL
CR1-BM
CR1-BP
CR1-BR
1000 1500 TH - 60+ 80 - 15+ 70 3000
1000 1500
1000 1500
1000 1500 TC TH - 60+ 80 - 15+ 60 3000
1000 1500
1000 1500
1000 1500
5 in relation to normal vertical mounting position
30 in relation to normal vertical mounting position
3 or 4 400 500 370 1000 25200 4500 4000 3500 3000 1200 3600 3600 3600 2400 1700 1200 1000 400 500 0.28 45 70 2 150 2 30 x 5 10 35 (1) Paralleling of poles
3 or 4 500 700 460 1000 25200 5500 5000 4500 3560 2500 4200 4200 4200 3200 2400 1500 1200 500 800 0.18 45 88 2 240
3 or 4 630 1000 560 1000 25200 6740 6300 5400 4600 3200 5050 5050 5050 4400 3400 2200 1600 630 1000 0.12 48 120
1, 2, 3 or 4 750 800 700 1000 5060 10,000 10,000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 7000 4800 3500 2100 1200 800 800 0.18 88 115
1, 2, 3 or 4 1000 1250 800 1000 5060 10,000 10,000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 8000 5200 3800 2400 1800 1200 1200 0.18 180 280
1, 2, 3 or 4 1500 2000 1250 1000 5060 15,000 15,000 12,000 9000 5000 12,000 12,000 9600 6400 5200 3600 2800 800 x 2 (1) 1000 x 2 (1) 0.13 290 520 3 100 x 5 4 x 10 35
1, 2, 3 or 4 1800 2750 1500 1000 5060 18,000 18,000 15,000 11,000 6000 15,000 15,000 12,000 8000 6300 4400 3600 1000 x 2 (1) 1200 x 2 (1) 0.09 360 680 4 100 x 10 4 x 10 35
2.7
2 2 40 x 5 60 x 5 10 12 35 58 must be carried out only in accordance with
2 2 50 x 5 80 x 5 4x8 4 x 10 21 35 the fuse manufacturer's recommendations.
2/279
Contactors
Contactor type
CR1-F185
CR1-F265

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) c 50 or 60 Hz c 400 Hz a a low consumption Energisation De-energisation Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature 40 C Mechanical durability Average consumption 50/60 Hz In operating cycles/hour In millions of operating cycles Energisation 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3/4-pole 3/4-pole VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA W W ms V V V V 48415 48220 48220 48220 0.851.1 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 600 1 1600 1600 8 8 1750 1750 11 11 500 20 3540 1650 1650 9 9 1800 1800 12 12 500 40 4550
Control voltage limits c and a
De-energisation
400 Hz and a
Energisation
De-energisation
a low consumption
Energisation De-energisation
2.7
Average operating time at Uc (1)
Energisation
De-energisation ms 50100 50100 (1) The closing time is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate. Note: the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For normal 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.

Type Conventional rated thermal current Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60337-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C Cabling Operational power of contacts LA1-D for contactors CR1-F Flexible or solid conductor with or without cable end V mm2 A LA1-D for contactors CR1-F 10 V 750 1 x 1 min/2 x 2.5 max d.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/h) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W 48 90 700 110 75 400 220 68 260 440 61 220 600 58 170 660
1 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity
a.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 2400 operating cycles/h) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet (cos = 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current (cos = 0.4). 110/ 220/ 380/ 600 V 48 127 230 400 VA 300 400 480 500 500 VA 2600 7000 13 000 15 000 9000
CR1-F400
CR1-F500
CR1-F630
CR1-BL
CR1-BM
CR1-BP
CR1-BR
48415 48220 48220 48220 0.851.1 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 600 1 1450 1450 12 12 1600 1600 16 16 500 70 4075 1650 1650 9.5 9.5 1800 1800 13 13 550 60 4080 2100 2100 8 8 2300 2300 11 11 620 45 4080
110500 110500 110500 0.851.1 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 120 1 650 1100 1650 1850 110 125 165 175 600 1000 1500 1700 100 115 150 160 100150 650 1100 1650 1850 110 125 165 175 600 1000 1500 1700 100 115 150 160 100150 650 1100 1650 1850 110 125 165 175 600 1000 1500 1700 100 115 150 160 100150 650 1100 1650 1850 110 125 165 175 600 1000 1500 1700 100 115 150 160 100150
2.7
50100 50100 50100 2040 2040 2040 2040 The closing time is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate. Note: the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For normal 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
LA1-D for contactors CR1-F 10 660 750 1 x 1 min/2 x 2.5 max Operational power of contacts ZC4-GM for contactors CR1-B
ZC4-GM for contactors CR1-B 20 660 750 2 min/4 max a.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 2400 operating cycles/h) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet (cos j = 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current (cos j = 0.4). 110 415 V 127 220 380 440 500 VA 2000 4000 4000 4000 3500 VA 14 000 23 000 35 000 45 000 35 000 d.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/h) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W 110 250 1600 120 250 800 440 230 400 500 200 360
1 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity
2/281
References
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors Control circuit: a.c. or d.c. supply
c or a
Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (1) Weight
Maximum thermal current in category AC-1 A 275
Rated operational current in category AC-3 (440 V max) A 185 265 400 500 630 750
Number of poles
kg 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 CR1-F185i CR1-F1854i CR1-F265i CR1-F2654i CR1-F400i CR1-F4004i CR1-F500i CR1-F5004i CR1-FL630i CR1-FL6304i CR1-BL31i12 CR1-BL31i21 CR1-BL31i30 CR1-BL32i12 CR1-BL32i21 CR1-BL32i30 CR1-BL33i12 CR1-BL33i21 CR1-BL33i30 CR1-BL34i12 CR1-BL34i21 CR1-BL34i30 CR1-BM31i12 CR1-BM31i21 CR1-BM31i30 CR1-BM32i12 CR1-BM32i21 CR1-BM32i30 CR1-BM33i12 CR1-BM33i21 CR1-BM33i30 CR1-BM34i12 CR1-BM34i21 CR1-BM34i30 CR1-BP31i12 CR1-BP31i21 CR1-BP31i30 CR1-BP32i12 CR1-BP32i21 CR1-BP32i30 CR1-BP33i12 CR1-BP33i21 CR1-BP33i30 CR1-BP34i12 CR1-BP34i21 CR1-BP34i30 CR1-BR31i12 CR1-BR31i21 CR1-BR31i30 CR1-BR32i12 CR1-BR32i21 CR1-BR32i30 CR1-BR33i12 CR1-BR33i21 CR1-BR33i30 CR1-BR34i12 CR1-BR34i21 CR1-BR34i30 4.600 5.400 7.400 8.500 9.100 10.200 11.300 12.900 18.600 21.500 32.000 32.000 32.000 45.000 45.000 45.000 58.000 58.000 58.000 72.000 72.000 72.000 31.000 31.000 31.000 44.000 44.000 44.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 71.000 71.000 71.000 41.000 41.000 41.000 65.000 65.000 65.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 120.000 120.000 120.000 52.000 52.000 52.000 85.000 85.000 85.000 129.000 129.000 129.000 160.000 160.000 160.000
2
CR1-F1854i
350 500 700 1000 800
CR1-F500 1250 1000 1 2 3 4
2.7
2000
1500
1 2 3 4
CR1-BP33
2750
1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 (1) Standard control circuit voltages: see page opposite.
1800
References
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors Accessories
For contactors CR1-F

Description Number of contacts or shrouds 1 to 9 2 to 4 Set of 2 blocks For use on CR1-F CR1-F CR1-F185 Reference Weight kg LAD-Nii (1) LAD-ii (1) LA9-F103 0.580 0.580 0.300
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Time delay auxiliary contacts Contact blocks with protected terminals for 3-pole contactors (for mounting on contactors with closed arc chamber) LA9-F103 Power terminal protection shrouds
Set of 6 shrouds for 3-pole contactors
CR1-F185
LA9-F702
0.250 0.250 0.250 0.300 0.300 0.300
CR1-F265 to F500 LA9-F703 CR1-F630 LA9-F704 LA9-F707 LA9-F708 LA9-F709 Reference See pages 2/284 and 2/285
LA9-F70i
Set of 8 shrouds for 4-pole contactors
CR1-F1854 CR1-F2654 to F5004 CR1-F6304
Description Mechanical interlock and power connections
Application For assembly of reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs
For contactors CR1-B

Description Mechanical interlock with mounting accessories (3) Kit containing 2 bar mounting brackets Application For vertical assembly of reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs For mounting on 120 or 150 mm centres Reference EZ2-LB0601 Weight kg 1.560
2.7
LA9-B103
1.620
(1) See page 2/85. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 48 110 125 127 220 230 240 250 380 400 415 440 500
For contactors CR1-F c 50/60 Hz E7 F7 c 400 Hz E7 F7 a E7 F7 a low EZ FZ7 consumption EZ2-LB0601
G7 G7 G7 GZ
M7 M7 M7 MZ
M7 M7 M7
U7
Q7
Q7
N7
For contactors CR1-B c 50...400 Hz F G M M U Q V N R S a FD GD MD UD UCD RD SD (3) Positive mechanical interlocking between two vertically mounted contactors with identical or different ratings. Connecting rods and cranks assembled on right-hand side, crank pins on the pole side. Vertical fixing centre distance between the two contactors: 600 mm.
References
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors Components for assembling reversing and changeover contactor pairs CR1-F Horizontally or vertically mounted
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: CR1-F185 CR1-F265 CR1-F400 CR1-F500 CR1-F630
LA9-Fi970
Sets of power connections

Reversing contactors LA9-Fi976
L1 L2 L3
3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs LA9-Fi977 or LA9Fi982

7 1/L1 1 2/L1 3 2/L2 5 1/L2 5 2/L3 3 1/L3 1N 2N 7 N 8 A2 E1 A1
A1
A1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A1
4 L2
L1
Vertically mounted
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: CR1-F185 CR1-F265 CR1-F400 CR1-F500 CR1-F630
LA9-FG4G Assembly A LA9-FH4H LA9-FJ4J LA9-FK4K LA9-FL4L Assembly C
2.7
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings, type: CR1-F185 CR1-F265 CR1-F400 CR1-F500 CR1-F630
LA9-FH4G LA9-FJ4G LA9-FK4G LA9-FL4G
Assembly B
LA9-FK4H LA9-FL4H LA9-FK4J LA9-FL4J LA9-FK4K
Assembly C
Reversers assembled using 3 contactors of identical or different ratings
LA9-Fi4i4i
CR1-F500
F185 F265 F400 F500 F630

F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630
Warning: the contactor ratings must be in descending order from top to bottom.
CR1-F265
CR1-F185
2/284
L3
References
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors Components for assembling reversing and changeover contactor pairs CR1-F
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating

Contactor type For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control (1) Horizontally mounted CR1-F185 CR1-F265 CR1-F400 CR1-F500 CR1-F630 Vertically mounted CR1-F185 CR1-F265 CR1-F400 CR1-F500 CR1-F630 Horizontally mounted CR1-F1854 CR1-F2654 CR1-F4004 CR1-F5004 CR1-F6304 Vertically mounted CR1-F1854 CR1-F2654 CR1-F4004 CR1-F5004 CR1-F6304 Set of power connections 3-pole 4-pole Reference LA9-FG976 LA9-FH976 LA9-FJ976 LA9-FK976 LA9-FL976 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) LA9-FG982 LA9-FH982 LA9-FJ982 LA9-FK982 LA9-FL982 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) Reference LA9-FG977 LA9-FH977 LA9-FJ977 LA9-FK977 LA9-FL977 Weight kg 0.780 1.500 2.100 2.350 3.800 0.610 1.200 1.800 2.300 3.400 LA9-FG970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FL970 LA9-FG4G LA9-FH4H LA9-FJ4J LA9-FK4K LA9-FL4L LA9-FG970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FL970 LA9-FG4G LA9-FH4H LA9-FJ4J LA9-FK4K LA9-FL4L Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220
For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs for distribution
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings

For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs for distribution Contactor type At bottom Vertically mounted (3) CR1-F185 or F1854 CR1-F265 CR1-F400 CR1-F500 CR1-F630 or or or or F2654 F4004 F5004 F6304 LA9-FH4G LA9-FJ4G LA9-FK4G LA9-FL4G LA9-FJ4H LA9-FK4H LA9-FL4H LA9-FK4J LA9-FL4J LA9-FL4K Mechanical interlock Kit reference (4) At top Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg 0.860 0.940 0.940 0.950 1.130 1.130 1.140 1.200 1.210 1.210
2.7
CR1-F265 or F2654
CR1-F400 or F4004 CR1-F500 or F5004 CR1-F630 or F6304 CR1-F500 or F5004 CR1-F630 or F6304 CR1-F630 or F6304
CR1-F400 or F4004 CR1-F500 or F5004 For assembly of 3 or 4-pole reversing contactors
Using 3 contactors (vertically mounted) of identical or different ratings
The contactor ratings must be in descending order from top to bottom LA9-Fi4i4i (1) A 3-pole reversing contactor for motor control can be converted into a 3-pole changeover contactor pair by removing the upper connecting links. (2) All power connections to be made by the customer. (3) With identical or different number of poles. All power connections to be made by the customer. (4) Complete the reference by replacing the first dot with the code for the upper contactor, the second dot with the code for the middle contactor and the third dot with the code for the lower contactor. Contactors CR1CR1CR1CR1CR1F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 Code G H J K L Example: mechanical interlock for reversing contactor made up of 3 different contactors, CR1-F500 top, CR1-F265 middle and CR1-F185 bottom: LA9-FK4H4G.
References
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors Coils for contactors CR1-F
Standard coils
Usual voltages 50...400 Hz or a V 50 Hz, 60 Hz V Resistance of winding at = 20 C Latching Unlatching Reference Voltage code Weight
kg
For contactors CR1-F150 (spares only)
48 110 127 220/230
240 380/400 415
1.98 9.35 11.61 37.55 45.16 114.10 139.50
230.8 1453 1788 5139 6544 12 447 16 717
LX0-FF005 LX0-FF006 LX0-FF007 LX0-FF008 LX0-FF009 LX0-FF010 LX0-FF011
E F G M U Q N
0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440
For contactors CR1-F185 LX0-FF009 48 110 127 220/230 240 380/400 415 1.42 6.92 8.45 26.27 32.95 82.29 102.30 220 1339 1676 4729 4729 11 885 14 305 LX0-FG005 LX0-FG006 LX0-FG007 LX0-FG008 LX0-FG009 LX0-FG010 LX0-FG011 E F G M U Q N 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560
For contactors CR1-F265 48 110 127 220/230 240 380/400 415 1.34 6.90 8.56 25.77 33.03 78.39 102.9 183.4 1031 1325 4090 5002 11 803 15 006 LX0-FH005 LX0-FH006 LX0-FH007 LX0-FH008 LX0-FH009 LX0-FH010 LX0-FH011 E F G M U Q N 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
LX0-FH009
For contactors CR1-F400 48 110 127 220/230 240 380/400 415 1.32 8.09 9.79 30.14 37.02 94.80 121.10 90.5 813 1027 3309 4074 9380 11 763 LX0-FJ005 LX0-FJ006 LX0-FJ007 LX0-FJ008 LX0-FJ009 LX0-FJ010 LX0-FJ011 E F G M U Q N 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
2.7
For contactors CR1-F500 48 110 127 220/230 240 380/400 415 1.57 7.53 9.56 28.81 35.67 89.56 112.06 166 916 1159 3733 4595 10 570 13 256 LX0-FK005 LX0-FK006 LX0-FK007 LX0-FK008 LX0-FK009 LX0-FK010 LX0-FK011 E F G M U Q N 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220
For contactors CR1-F630 48 110 127 220/230 240 380/400 415 0.87 5.20 6.45 25.36 25.36 60.95 77.97 204 1423 1830 4603 5658 10 676 13 003 LX0-FL005 LX0-FL006 LX0-FL007 LX0-FL008 LX0-FL009 LX0-FL010 LX0-FL011 E F G M U Q N 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460
2/286
References
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors Coils for contactors CR1-F
Special coils
Coils with two windings with common point, allowing the use of two separate power sources for latching and unlatching. For contactors Coil voltages at 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 400 Hz or a Latching Unlatching V V 110 110 110 110 110 110 220 220 220 220 220 220 Resistance of winding at = 20 C Latching Unlatching 9.35 6.92 6.90 8.09 7.53 5.20 5139 4729 4090 3309 3732 4603 Reference Weight kg LX0-FF020 LX0-FG020 LX0-FH020 LX0-FJ020 LX0-FK020 LX0-FL020 0.440 0.560 0.780 1.120 1.220 1.460
CR1-F150 (1) CR1-F185 CR1-F265 CR1-F400 LX0-FF020 CR1-F500 CR1-F630
Coils with low inrush consumption

Usual voltages a V For contactors CR1-F150 (1) 48 110 127 220 For contactors CR1-F185 48 110 127 220 For contactors CR1-F265 48 110 127 220 For contactors CR1-F400 48 110 127 220 For contactors CR1-F500 48 110 127 220 For contactors CR1-F630 48 110 127 220 (1) Spares only. 3.94 19.36 25.39 74.44 59.17 365.33 452.27 1071.43 LX0-FL055 LX0-FL056 LX0-FL057 LX0-FL058 EZ FZ GZ MZ 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 4.42 22.74 28.25 85.12 41 193.36 313.60 918.68 LX0-FK055 LX0-FK056 LX0-FK057 LX0-FK058 EZ FZ GZ MZ 1.270 1.270 1.270 1.270 5.05 25.39 31.86 98.19 36.36 171.49 221.20 648.79 LX0-FJ055 LX0-FJ056 LX0-FJ057 LX0-FJ058 EZ FZ GZ MZ 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 5.19 25 30.98 97.89 74.26 364.61 458.45 1344.46 LX0-FH055 LX0-FH056 LX0-FH057 LX0-FH058 EZ FZ GZ MZ 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800 5.19 25.50 32.75 102.44 106.54 536.26 732.64 2378.62 LX0-FG055 LX0-FG056 LX0-FG057 LX0-FG058 EZ FZ GZ MZ 0.570 0.570 0.570 0.570 4.56 22.37 35.54 89.85 140.56 706.44 1086.36 3342.51 LX0-FF055 LX0-FF056 LX0-FF057 LX0-FF058 EZ FZ GZ MZ 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 Resistance of winding at = 20 C Latching Unlatching Reference Voltage code Weight kg
2.7
2/287
References
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors Coils for contactors CR1-B
Coils with TC treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite).

Usual voltages a V c 50400 Hz V Resistance at = 20 C Reference Weight kg
For contactors CR1-Bi31
110125 220 250
110120 220240 380400 415440
19.7 25.2 77.2 94 128 197 257
WB1-KB140 WB1-KB134 WB1-KB136 WB1-KB139 WB1-KB125 WB1-KB126 WB1-KB138
1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
For contactors CR1-Bi32 WB1-KBiii 110 125 220 250 110 120127 220/230 240 380400 415440 9.6 11.4 19.7 32.5 49.7 77.2 128 160 WB1-KB133 WB1-KB121 WB1-KB140 WB1-KB124 WB1-KB122 WB1-KB136 WB1-KB125 WB1-KB137 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
For contactors CR1-Bi33 110 125 220 250 110 120127 240 380415 440 7.2 9.6 11.4 32.5 61 94 128 WB1-KB123 WB1-KB133 WB1-KB121 WB1-KB124 WB1-KB135 WB1-KB139 WB1-KB125 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
For contactors CR1-Bi34 110 125 250 110 120127 220/230 240 380 400440 5.8 7.2 11.4 25.2 32.5 49.7 77.2 94 WB1-KB132 WB1-KB123 WB1-KB121 WB1-KB134 WB1-KB124 WB1-KB122 WB1-KB136 WB1-KB139 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
2.7
Coils with TH treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite).

Add suffix TH to the above references. Example: WB1-KB140TH.
2/288
References
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors Coils for contactors CR1-B
Accessories for use with coils (1)

Coils (TC or TH) Additional resistors (2) R1 Coil cut-out contact (3) R2 Reference No. Reference Rectifier (4) Reference Reference
For contactors CR1-Bi31 WB1-KB140 WB1-KB134 WB1-KB136 DR2-SC0220 WB1-KB139 WB1-KB125 WB1-KB126 WB1-KB138 68 68 220 270 330 470 1000 DR2-SC0068 DR2-SC0068 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0270 DR2-SC0330 DR2-SC0470 DR2-SC1000 47 68 180 220 270 470 470 DR2-SC0047 DR2-SC0068 DR2-SC0180 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0270 DR2-SC0470 DR2-SC0470 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 ZC4-GM2 or ZC4-GM8 ZC4-GM2 or ZC4-GM8 ZC4-GM2 or ZC4-GM8 ZC4-GM2 or ZC4-GM8 ZC4-GM2 or ZC4-GM8 ZC4-GM2 or ZC4-GM8 ZC4-GM2 or ZC4-GM8 DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1S DR5-TE1S
For contactors CR1-Bi32 WB1-KB133 ZC4-GM2 WB1-KB121 WB1-KB140 WB1-KB124 WB1-KB122 WB1-KB136 WB1-KB125 WB1-KB137 10 47 100 120 220 330 470 680 DR2-SC0010 DR2-SC0047 DR2-SC0100 DR2-SC0120 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0330 DR2-SC0470 DR2-SC0680 33 39 47 120 150 220 470 560 DR2-SC0033 DR2-SC0039 DR2-SC0047 DR2-SC0120 DR2-SC0150 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0470 DR2-SC0560 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PR4-FB0011 PR4-FB0010 PR4-FB0009 PR4-FB0007 PR4-FB0007 PR4-FB0006 PR4-FB0005 PR4-FB0004 DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1S DR5-TE1S
For contactors CR1-Bi33 WB1-KB123 WB1-KB133 WB1-KB121 WB1-KB124 WB1-KB135 WB1-KB139 WB1-KB125 39 47 56 180 270 470 680 DR2-SC0039 DR2-SC0047 DR2-SC0056 DR2-SC0180 DR2-SC0270 DR2-SC0470 DR2-SC0680 27 39 47 120 270 390 470 DR2-SC0027 DR2-SC0039 DR2-SC0047 DR2-SC0120 DR2-SC0270 DR2-SC0390 DR2-SC0470 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PR4-FB0012 PR4-FB0011 PR4-FB0010 PR4-FB0008 PR4-FB0006 PR4-FB0005 PR4-FB0004 DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1S DR5-TE1S
2.7
For contactors CR1-Bi34 PR4-FB0014 WB1-KB132 WB1-KB123 WB1-KB121 WB1-KB134 WB1-KB124 WB1-KB122 WB1-KB136 DR5-TE1U 33 47 56 150 180 270 390 DR2-SC0033 DR2-SC0047 DR2-SC0056 DR2-SC0150 DR2-SC0180 DR2-SC0270 DR2-SC0390 27 33 56 120 150 220 390 DR2-SC0027 DR2-SC0033 DR2-SC0056 DR2-SC0120 DR2-SC0150 DR2-SC0220 DR2-SC0390 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PR4-FB0014 PR4-FB0012 PR4-FB0010 PR4-FB0008 PR4-FB0007 PR4-FB0007 PR4-FB0006 DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1U DR5-TE1S DR5-TE1S
WB1-KB139 560 DR2-SC0560 470 DR2-SC0470 1 PR4-FB0005 (1) For connections, see page 2/299. (2) Weight of resistors DR2-SCiiii: 0.030 kg. (3) Weight of automatic coil cut-out contacts: ZC4-GMi: 0.030 kg and PR4-FB00ii: 0.600 kg. (4) Weight of rectifier DR5-TE1i: 0.100 kg. The rectifier is for use on a.c. only.
2/289
References
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1-F
Description Sets of contacts for 3 or 4 poles (1)
For contactors 3-pole CR1-F150 CR1-F185 CR1-F265
Reference LA5-FF431 LA5-FG431 LA5-FH431 LA5-F400803 LA5-F500803 LA5-F630803 LA5-FF441 LA5-FG441 LA5-FH441 LA5-F400804 LA5-F500804 LA5-F630804 LA5-F15050 LA5-F18550 LA5-F26550 LA5-F40050 LA5-F50050 LA5-F63050 LA5-F150450 LA5-F185450 LA5-F265450 LA5-F400450 LA5-F500450 LA5-F630450
Weight kg 0.270 0.350 0.660 0.660 0.660 0.660 0.360 0.465 0.880 0.465 0.465 0.465 0.490 0.670 0.920 1.300 1.850 3.150 0.660 0.910 1.220 1.740 2.500 4.200
CR1-F400 CR1-F500 CR1-F630 4-pole CR1-F1504 CR1-F1854 CR1-F2654 CR1-F4004 CR1-F5004 CR1-F6304 Arc chambers 3-pole CR1-F150 CR1-F185
LA5-FG431
2.7
CR1-F265 CR1-F400 CR1-F500 CR1-F630 4-pole CR1-F1504 CR1-F1854 CR1-F2654 CR1-F4004 CR1-F5004 CR1-F6304
LA5-F40050
(1) Set containing the following (per pole): 2 fixed contacts, 1 moving contact, 2 deflectors, 1 back-plate, clamping screws and washers.
2/290
References
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1-B
Description
For contactors
Number of sets required per pole 1 1 2 3 Composition 1 N/O contact normal 1 N/C contact normal 1 N/O contact gold flashed 1 N/C contact gold flashed No. of parts required 1 2 1 per pole 1 per pole
Unit reference of set PA1-LB80 PA1-LB80 PA1-LB80 PA1-LB80 Reference PA1-LB75 PA1-LB76 PA1-LB89 PA1-LB50 PA1-LB50 PA1-PB50 PA1-RB50 ZC4-GM1 ZC4-GM2 ZC4-GM9 ZC4-GM8 PR4-FB00ii (1) PV1-FA80 PN1-FB50 ET1-KB50 Reference DV1-RT292 DV1-RT292 DV1-RC201 DV1-RC155
Weight kg 0.420 0.420 0.420 0.420 Weight kg 0.220 0.200 0.120 3.700 3.700 6.200 8.500 0.030 0.030
Set of contacts (1 moving contact, 1 fixed contact)
CR1-BL CR1-BM CR1-BP CR1-BR
PA1-LB80 (PA1-LB76 + PA1-LB75)
Description Moving contact only (for one finger) Fixed contact only (for one finger) ZC4-GM1 PA1-LB89 Blow-out horn only (for one finger) Arc chambers (for one finger)
For contactors All ratings All ratings All ratings CR1-BL CR1-BM CR1-BP CR1-BR
Auxiliary contact blocks
All ratings All ratings All ratings All ratings
2.7
0.030 0.030 0.600 0.035 0.220 10.600 Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.020 0.020
PA1-LB50
N/C pole for automatic cut-out coil
All ratings
Set of moving and fixed contacts All ratings for N/C pole Arc chamber for N/C pole Electromagnet Description Return springs for moving part of electromagnet All ratings All ratings For contactors CR1-B (1 pole) CR1-B (2, 3 or 4 poles) N/O pole springs CR1-BL, BM or BP CR1-BR PR4-FB00ii (1) Reference to be completed, see page 2/289.
2/291
Dimensions
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors type CR1-F
CR1-F185 to F500 Common side view

(1)
CR1-F185, F265
S S1 F185 M8x25 F265 M10x35 3x6.5
CR1-F400, F500
S 44.5 6xM10x35 8x8.5
X1
b2
b1
J1
2
b X1
120 =
G 23.5 G1 J
G1 G
= Y
Q P P a Q1 f
Z Q P a P Q1 f
L c
CR1-
2.7
F185 F265 3P 4P 3P 4P a 168.5 208.5 201.5 244.5 b 174 174 203 203 b1 137 137 145 145 b2 305 305 370 370 c 181 181 213 213 f 130 130 147 147 G 111 151 142 190 G1 80 80 96 96 J 106 106 106 106 J1 120 120 120 120 L 113.5 113.5 141 141 M 154 154 178 178 P 40 40 48 48 Q 29 29 34 34 Q1 54 46 58 49 S 20 20 25 25 S1 34 34 38 38 Y 38.5 30.5 30.5 21.5 Z 13.5 13.5 15.5 15.5 f = minimum distance required for coil removal X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity Voltage in V 200500 6601000 CR1-F185 10 15 CR1-F265 10 15 (1) Power terminal protection shroud. CR1-F630 72 (1) 40 64
CR1a b b2 c f G supplied G min G max G1 supplied G1 min G1 max J1 L M P Q Q1 S
F400 3P 213 206 375 219 119 80 66 102 170 156 192 12 145 181 48 36 66 25
4P 261 206 375 219 119 80 66 150 170 156 240 60 145 181 48 36 66 25
F500 3P 283 238 400 232 141 80 66 120 170 156 210 32 146 208 55 39 69 30
4P 288 238 400 232 141 140 66 175 230 156 265 27 146 208 55 39 69 30
f = minimum distance required for coil removal X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity Voltage in V 200500 6601000 CR1-F400 15 20 CR1-F500 15 20
6xM12x45
X1
4x10.5
X1
155 197 255
60.5 Q 80 a 80 Q1 181 (2)
J1
(1) Power terminal protection shroud. (2) = minimum distance required for coil removal.
CR1-F630 3P 4P a 293 373 G supplied 180 240 G min 100 150 G max 195 275 J1 61 81 Q 51 51 Q1 82 82 X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity Voltage in V X1 200500 20 6901000 30
280
304
464
264
180
180
Mounting
Contactors
CR1-F185F265 On panel
(1) 3x6,5
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA, PB, PC
On rails DZ5-MB at 120 mm fixing centres
DZ5-MF5
110
110
120
110
AF1-EA6
= J c G
= J1
15
CR1F185 F265 c 3P 181 213 4P 181 213 G 3P 80 96 4P 80 96 J 3P 29 44.5 4P 49 68.5 J1 3P 59.5 61.5 4P 79.5 85.5 (1) Power terminal protection shroud. CR1-F185F650 On 2 notched uprights AM1-ECiii
CR1c 3P 4P G 3P 4P
F185 181 181 80 80
F265 213 213 96 96
CR1c 3P 4P G 3P 4P
F185 181 181 80 80
F265 213 213 96 96
AM1-EC200
AF1-CD081 + AF1-VC820 (2) AF1-CD101+ AF1-VC10
(1)
AF1-CD061+ AF1-VA618 AF1-VA618 M6
AF1-CD061
AF1-VA618 M6 LA9-F100
AF1-CD081+ AF1-VC820
2.7
110
120
10,5
25
G AM1-EC200
G AM1-EC200 G3
35
G1 G2
CR1c
3P 4P G (M6) 3P 4P G1 ( 8.5) 3P 4P G2 ( 10.5) 3P 4P
F185 181 181 80 80
F265 213 213 96 96
F400 213 213 80 80
F500 226 226 80 140
F630 250 250 180 240
(1) AF1-CDiii or AF1-VAiii (2) This upright AM1-EC200 is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (see our Control and Connection Components catalogue)
180
M6
8,5
Mounting (continued)
Contactors
Reversing contactors 2 x CR1-F185 and F265 Horizontally mounted 3x6.5 P1 3x6.5
Reversing contactors 2 x CR1-F400F630 8x8.5 (1) P1 8x8.5 (1)
110/120
120 (2) =
J1 G G1 J J2 a G G1 J1 J3 J3 J1 59.5 79.5 61.5 85.5 P1 78 78 100 100 2 x CR1a F400 3P 446 4P 542 F500 3P 485 4P 595 F630 3P 636 4P 796 (1) Except F630: 4 x (2) Except F630. b 206 206 238 238 304 304 10.5. G 80 80 80 140 180 240 G1 170 170 170 230
=
b
180 =
= b
J1 64.5 112.5 84.5 79.5 68.5 88.5 J2 67 67 66 66
2
= J1 G1 = J a = G1 = J1
2 x CR1F185 3P 4P F265 3P 4P
a 357 437 425 521
b 174 174 203 203
G 80 80 96 96
=
J 78 118 109 157
J 157 157 156 156 139 139
J3 19.5 67.5 39.5 34.5
P1 107 107 112 112 137 137
2.7
Mounting
Contactors
Changeover contactor pairs Vertically mounted with mechanical interlock LA9-Fiii 2 contactors CR1-F of identical or different ratings (CR1-F185F630), see pages 2/282 and 2/283 Assembly A Assembly B
J3 (1) (3) = = 80 12.5 (5) (1) G5 G1
Assembly C
12.5 (5) (1) G5 G1
F330 }120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630
F330 120 F265 } F400 F500 180 F630
(6)
(6)
120
= = (4)
120
(5)
= = (4)
J4
80 J2
J4
80 J2
9 12.5
G4
G2 J2
(1) Mechanical interlock shaft. (2) For assembly of contactors with different ratings only. (3) 3 x 6.5 mm for CR1-F185F265. (4) 3 x 6.5 mm for CR1-F265. (5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket. (6) 4 x 8.5 mm for CR1-F400, F500 or 4 x 10.5 mm. Assembly type LA9G1 3P 4P G2 3P 4P G3 3P 4P G4 3P 4P G5 3P 4P H min max H1 min max J1 3P 4P J2 3P 4P J3 3P 4P J4 3P 4P A FG4G 0 0 220 310 100 190 134 146 134 146 53 73 53 73 B FH4G 96 96 19 23 60 83 250 380 120 250 149.5 164.5 134 146 53 73 FJ4G 80 80 42 22 83 83 250 380 90 220 137 185 134 146 53 73 FK4G 80 140 42 22 83 83 270 380 110 220 157 212 134 146 53 73 FL4G 180 240 33 13 74 74 310 380 150 220 241 321 134 146 53 73 C FH4H 96 96 96 96 0 0 60 83 60 83 250 380 130 260 149.5 164.5 142.5 164.5 FJ4H 80 80 96 96 23 0 60 83 83 83 260 380 110 230 137 185 149.5 164.5 FK4H 80 140 96 96 23 0 60 83 83 83 280 380 130 230 157 212 149.5 164.5 FL4H 180 240 96 96 14 9 (7) 60 83 74 74 330 380 170 220 24 321 149.5 164.5 FJ4J 80 80 80 80 0 0 83 83 83 83 260 380 60 200 137 185 137 185 FK4J 80 140 80 80 0 0 83 83 83 83 280 380 100 200 157 212 137 185 FL4J 180 240 80 80 9 (7) 9 (7) 83 83 74 74 325 380 140 195 241 321 137 185 FK4K 80 140 80 140 0 0 83 83 83 83 300 380 120 200 157 212 157 212 FL4K 180 240 80 140 9 (7) 9 (7) 83 83 74 74 345 380 160 195 244 321 157 212 FL4L 180 240 180 240 0 0 74 74 74 74 380 380 200 200 241 321 241 312
180
(1)
(3) =
(1)
(6)
F330 120 F265 } F400 F500 180 F630
(1)
(3)
H1
H1
G3 (2)
H1
J1
9 G3(2) J1
G3(2)
J1
2.7
(7) In this case G4 is larger than G5.
Dimensions
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors type CR1-B
Common side view
185 R
290
Single-pole, 2-pole or 3-pole contactors
4-pole contactors
350
15
260 365
350
15
15
c 85 b c
44 30 15
P M L
Q1 30 30
P M1
51 M2 L
Q1 30
a CR1-BL 1 2 50 50 59 59 16 16 345 445 285 385 121 121 100 100 100 100 122 122 10 10 30 30 9 9
Number of poles a b c L M M1 M2 N P Q1 R S T
3 50 59 16 540 480 121 100 100 122 10 30 9
4 50 59 16 760 308 392 121 100 100 122 10 30 9
CR1-BM 1 2 63 63 55 55 20 20 345 445 285 385 125 125 100 100 100 100 157 157 17 17 30 30 11 11
3 63 55 20 540 480 125 100 100 157 17 30 11
4 63 55 20 760 308 392 125 100 100 157 17 30 11
CR1-BP 1 2 100 100 55 55 20 20 385 540 325 480 125 125 150 150 110 110 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11
3 100 55 20 760 700 125 150 110 173 20 60 11
4 100 55 20 1065 455 550 125 150 110 173 20 60 11
CR1-BR 1 2 125 125 50 50 25 25 445 635 385 575 130 130 195 195 123 123 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11
3 125 50 25 885 825 130 195 123 173 20 60 11
4 125 50 25 1065 455 550 130 195 123 173 20 60 11
Electrical safety clearance Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (3-phase c current)
X2
2.7
CR1-BL 3-phase c voltage 380-415-440 V 500 V 600 V 1000 V X1 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250
CR1-BM 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250
CR1-BP 150 200 150 220 200 250 200 250
CR1-BR 200 250 200 250 200 250 250 300
Mechanical interlock for assembly of vertically mounted reversing contactors EZ2-LB0601
A = (E112) 488
E = 600
Adjustment characteristics
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors type CR1-B
Complete pole
Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel Fixed circuit

E e
Coil Moving circuit
Return spring N/O power pole adjustment Fixed contact Moving contact N/C automatic coil cut-out pole adjustment 1 Fixed contact
F
F
Pull-in gap adjustment
2 Moving contact
Pole spring
Adjustment of application force
3 4
Opening gap adjustment Adjustment of application force
5 Pole spring
a.c. or d.c. supply with economy resistor (and rectifier on c

Type Electromagnet (ET1-KB50) Pick-up travel (E) Pull-in travel (e) Coil WB1-KB Latching voltage Unlatching voltage N/O power pole (PA1) Application force to (F) contact per pole Application force (F) Opening gap (b) with electromagnet closed mm mm V V daN
supply) CR1-BM 30 10 0.75 Uc 0.75 Uc 30 CR1-BP 30 10 0.75 Uc 0.75 Uc 30 (1) CR1-BR 30 10 0.75 Uc 0.75 Uc 30 (2)
CR1-BL 30 10 0.75 Uc 0.75 Uc 30
2.7
N/C automatic coil cut-out pole (PR4)
daN mm
0.9 3.5 0.5
0.9 3.5 0.5
0.9 3.5 0.5
0.9 3.5 0.5
(1) Each pole has 2 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts. (2) Each pole has 3 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
Schemes
Contactors
Contactors type CR1-F
3/L2
5/L3 T3/6
3/L2
1/L1
5/L3
A1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A1
1/L1
T1/2
T1/2
Front mounting add-on contact blocks - Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 2/85) 1 N/O LAD-N10 (1) 1 N/C LAD-N01 (1) 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-N11 2 N/O LAD-N20 2 N/C LAD-N02
61/NC 53/NO
53/NO
43 NO 43/NO
T2/4
T3/6
T2/4
T4/8
7/L4
3-pole CR1-Fii33
4-pole CR1-Fii34
2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD-N22

53/NO 61/NC 83/NO 71/NC 72 73/NO 74
63/NO
51/NC
41/NC (92)
62
61/NC
(94)
54
54
62
44 (93)
54
64
52
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD-N13

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
4 N/O LAD-N40
53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
42 (91)
4 N/C LAD-N04
51/NC 71/NC 81/NC 61/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C of which 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break contact LAD-C22
53/NO 87/NO 61/NC 75/NC
62
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-N31

53/NO 83/NO 61/NC
62
54
72
82
52
72
62
82
54
62
76
88
54
62
54
64
74
(1) Items in brackets refer to block mounted on right-hand side of contactor. Front mounting add-on contact blocks - Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to EN 50012 (References: page 2/85) 1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD-N11P LAD-N11G LAD-N11M LAD-N22P LAD-N22G
13/NO 43/NO
53/NO 63/NO
84
2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD-N22M

43/NO 44 53/NO 54 21/NC 31/NC
21/NC
31/NC
31/NC
13/NO
43/NO
33/NO
21/NC
31/NC
21/NC
22
32
41/NC
14
32
44
42
54
64
22
22
14
32
44
22
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
83/NO
53/NO
63/NO
73/NO
64
74
62
54
64
54
64
54
84
54
74
73/NO
61/NC
67/NO
57/NO
67/NO
65/NC
55/NC
55/NC
56
68
58
56
66
68
56
3-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1-F185F630

L1 L2 L3
4-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1-F1854F6304

1/L3 1/L2 1/L1 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 1N 2N
68
67/NO
55/NC
2.7
Front mounting add-on contact blocks - Time delay auxiliary contacts (References: page 2/86) On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-Ti Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-Ri
N/C on-delay + LAD-Si break before make N/O contact
84
83/NO
Front mounting add-on contact blocks - Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 2/85) 2 N/O (24-50 V) 2 N/O (5-24 V) 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) 2 N/O standard 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard LA1-DX20 LA1-DY20 LA1-DZ40 LA1-DZ31
34
A1
A1
A1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A2 E1
L1
L2
L3
Vertically mounted contactors using 2 contactors of identical or different rating

1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 1N
A1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A1
L3 L2 L1
3 3 5 1 A1 A1 1 5 7
N L3 L2 L1
A2 E1
A2 E1
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2N
A2 E1
A1
32
84
84
Schemes
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors types CR1-B and CR1-F
Contactors type CR1-B CR1-Bi31i12

A1
CR1-Bi31i21
A1
CR1-Bi31i30
A1 A2
A2
CR1-Bi32i12
A1
CR1-Bi32i21
A1
A2
CR1-Bi32i30
A2
CR1-Bi33i12
A1
CR1-Bi33i21
A1
A2
A2
CR1-Bi34i12
A1
CR1-Bi34i21
A1
A2
A2
Wiring schemes Contactors CR1-F and CR1-B with thermal overload relay
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
A2
Contactors CR1-F
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
CR1-Bi33i30
CR1-Bi34i30
Contactors CR1-B
KM1:1
KM1:5
KM1
a
2 4 6
97 95
13
21
F1
S2
F1
97
95 2
F1
96 98
S2
14
KM1
(1)
KM1:5
14
14
R1
KM1
A2
KM1:1
(1): automatic coil cut-out contact ZC4-GM or PR4-FB00ii S1: latching pushbutton S2: unlatching pushbutton Coils for contactors CR1-F Pushbutton control Scheme of internal circuit for CR1-F coil
CR1
A2 E1
A1
S1
14
M 3c
S1
R2
KM1
13 A2
A1 E1
14
13
S1
KM1
A1 96
2.7
13
13
22
98
a()/c
S2
a(+)/c
Latching winding
A1
Switch control
A1
A2
Latch
CR1
A2 E1
Unlatching winding
CR1
Unlatch
E1
a()/c
a(+)/c
Warning: terminal A2 is common to both windings in all cases.
Presentation
TeSys installation system

Tego Power for motor power-starter components
General presentation
Tego Power is a modular system which standardises and simplies the implementation of motor power-starters with its prewired control and power circuits. Hence, installation of a motor power-starter is quick, simple, safe and exible with no wires needed for connection. In addition, this system enables the motor power-starter to be customised at a later date. The system reduces maintenance time and optimises panel space, by reducing the number of terminals, the amount of ducting and intermediate interfaces. Quickt technology for TeSys motor power-starter components with spring terminals: model d contactors (9 to 25 A) and the GV2-ME motor circuit-breaker.
System for Quickt technology TeSys motor powerstarters with spring terminals The motor power-starters concerned are those formed by combining: - GV2-M circuit-breakers - with 9 to 25 A model d (LC1) contactors. Consisting of simple parts, Tego Power Quickt technology is used to create motor starter assemblies up to 15 kW/ 400 V. The main components which make up this range are: p For the power circuit - a power kit comprising, for each starter, a plate 1 for mounting the contactor and the circuit-breaker, and the two power connection modules 2 - a power splitter box 5 for 2 or 4 starters - an upstream terminal block 6 for a power supply up to 63 A (16 mm2), - a downstream terminal block 7 for connecting the motor power supply cables and the earth cables (6 mm2). p For the control circuit - a control splitter box 3 for 2 or 4 starters, with control-command data on HE 10 connector. The data on 4 to 8 starters can be fed back directly to the PLC via an 8I/8O or 16I/8O Telefast cable or to a eldbus module (AS-i, FIP , CAN Open, Device Net, Interbus, Probus) (see opposite page). - a control circuit connection module 4 which plugs directly into the contactor and the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module concentrates the motor starter control-command data. It integrates the circuitbreaker status data in the prewiring of the contactor control circuit.
5 4 2
2.8
Selection: page 2/304 2/300
Specifications: page 2/310
Presentation (continued)

Communication modules
General Communication modules are used to send I/O data from a Tego Power motor power-starter conguration to the PLC. The communication modules is selected according to the type of connection required (see page 2/306): - in parallel mode (modules, terminal blocks or HE 10) - or in serial mode on the bus (AS-i bus, Interbus S, Probus DP, CAN Open or Device Net modules). The communication modules are the same, whether the TeSys motor power-starter system uses spring or screw terminals.
Modules in a TeSys motor power-starter system with spring terminals

1 2 3
Motor power-starters can be connected to a PLC or a bus in two ways: - by direct connection from the control circuit splitter box 3 with 4 starters, with an HE 10 connector (8I/8O) or two HE 10 connectors (16 I and 8 O) - by a Tego Power module 1 using an APP-2CX adaptor plate 2.
2.8
Selection: page 2/304
Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/314 to 2/319 2/301
Description

Tego Power for motor power-starter components Components with spring terminals, using Quickfit technology
Tego Power for components with spring terminals

The motor power-starters concerned are those created by combining: - Telemecanique GV2 circuit-breakers (mainly GV2-ME) with an operating limit of 80% of maximum current at 60C ambient temperature, up to 690 V (see page 2/311) - with 9 to 25 A Telemecanique model d contactors (LC1). The main components which make up this range are: p For the power part - power kits, - power splitter boxes, - upstream and downstream terminal blocks. p For the control-command part - power and control splitter boxes, - control connection modules. Used with communication modules (see pages 2/301 and 2/306), these motor power-starters exchange controlcommand data with PLCs or a bus. They can also communicate directly with PLCs via a Telefast HE 10 cable.
Power components p Power kits LAD-3p Each motor power-starter requires a power kit which consists of a plate 1 and 2 Quickt technology power connection modules 2 . The plate is used for mounting TeSys model d contactors 3, with spring terminals, direct or reversing, equipped with an a.c. or d.c. coil, 9 to 25 A, and the GV2-ME 4 circuit-breaker only. This plate is mounted on a 35 mm omega rail or screwed onto a base plate. The two power connection modules 2a and 2b are identical whatever the rating of the contactor, up to 25 A. The lower power connection module 2b connects the power between the contactor and the circuit-breaker. The upper power connection module 2a connects the power between the splitter box and the circuit-breaker.
4 p Splitter box LAD-32p Splitter boxes 5 are available for 2 or 4 starters. They can be combined to create motor power-starters up to 63 A per power supply. 2a A reversing starter occupies a width equivalent to that of 2 direct starters. Direct supply of power to the splitter boxes is possible up to 25 A (4 mm2).
2.8
2b p Upstream terminal block LAD-3B1 The upstream terminal block 6 performs two functions : - power supply up to 63 A (16 mm2), 3 - power supply between two connected splitter boxes. The upstream terminal block plugs into the splitter box using Quickt technology. It is positioned on the splitter box or straddling the two splitter boxes, and takes up a 7 width equivalent to two motor power-starters.
p Downstream terminal block LAD-331 The downstream terminal block 7 performs two functions : - connects motor power supply cables up to 6 mm2, - connects the motor earth cables. In addition, the terminal block enables quick connection and disconnection for maintenance, avoiding the risk of phase reversal. The downstream terminal block plugs into the downstream spring terminals on the contactor using Quickt technology.
Selection: page 2/304 2/302
Description (continued)

Components for control-command p Power and control splitter boxes APP-2R p p

1b 1a 2
These have the same specications as the power splitter box 1b described on the opposite page. They are used to gather control-command data from the motor powerstarters. Power and control splitter boxes 1 for 2, 3 or 4 starters can be combined to create up to 8 starters. A reversing starter takes up the space of two direct starters. The mechanical assembly of 2 splitter boxes connects the control-command data and the power supply to the coil control. The coil control can be a.c. or d.c., up to 250 V. Three types of splitter box are available: - APP-2RpE with one 30-way HE 10 connector for connection to the APP-1Cp Tego Power communication module, using the APP-2CX adaptor plate (these splitter boxes are also available for 2 or 4 starters). This reference is used to extend the number of starters in the rack from 4 up to a maximum of 8. - APP-2R4H1 with one HE 10 connector with 8I/8O, for direct connection to the PLC via a Telefast cable : the data communicated to the PLC for each starter is the coil control (1 output) and the contactor status (1 input), for up to 8 starters (supply for I/O via Telefast cable). - APP-2R4H2 with two HE 10 connectors (one for 16 inputs, the other for 8 outputs) for direct connection to the PLC via a Telefast cable: the data communicated to the PLC for each starter is the coil control (1 output), the contactor status (1 input) and the circuit-breaker status (1 input), for up to 8 starters (requires additional 24V d.c. supply for the control of the contactor coils). p Control circuit connection modules APP-2D p p The control circuit connection module 2 plugs directly into the control terminals on the GV2 circuit-breaker and the contactor, using Quickt technology. It connects to the control splitter box 1a via its upper part. Mechanical locking ensures good quality connections and a rm hold. It is compatible with all contactor ratings up to 25 A. These modules are available in 4 versions: with or without contactor coil control relay, and direct or reversing starter. The version without relay is designed to control the contactor coils with no interface, generally at 24 V d.c. The connection module integrates, in its lower part, the external shunt 3 for connecting an external contact in series with the contactor coil or forced local control (according to the scheme on page 2/316). The second item of contactor status data is available on a connector 4 which is left to the choice of the user.
2.8
Selection

Selection of a power and control splitter box

Three types of splitter box are available, depending on the required connection to the PLC: p Direct connection to the PLC via HE 10 connector and Telefast cable. p Connection to the control system via Tego module. p Connection to the control system via AS-i bus. Direct connection via 8I/8O HE 10 connector An HE 10 connector, on the top of the APP-2R4H1 control splitter box 1, provides the contactor status (1 input) and the coil control (1 output) for each starter. This HE 10 connector can feed data back to up to 8 starters. The Telefast cable 3 is chosen according to the PLC environment (see pages 2/308 and 2/309).
8E/8S 3 HE10 1 8E/8S 3 APE1R1628 3 16E 16S 3 API API
2
3
TSX DMZ16DTK
or
ABE-1ACC02
TSX DMZ64DTK
Direct connection via 16I/8O HE 10 connectors Two HE 10 connectors, on the top of the APP-2R4H2 control splitter box 2, provide the circuit-breaker status (1 input), the contactor status (1 input) and the coil control (1 output) for each starter. These HE 10 connectors can feed data back to up to 8 starters. The Telefast cables 3 are chosen according to the PLC environment (see pages 2/308 and 2/309). (1) Requires additional 24V d.c. supply for control of the contactor coils.
16E 3 API
2
2
HE10 HE10 8S 3 ABE7ACC02 16 S 3 API
2.8
Connection via Tego module APP-1Cppp The APP-2RpE control splitter boxes 1 (2, 3 or 4 starters) are connected to the PLC via a Tego module APP-1Cppp 2. An APP-2CX adaptor 3 must be used to connect the module to the control splitter box. These modules can feed data back to up to 8 starters. The module is selected according to the type of connection required: terminal block, HE 10 connector or bus (see page 2/306). The advantages of using Tego modules are: - the ability to use terminal block connection, - when connecting using an APP-1CH HE 10 connector and APP-1CAS2 AS-i connector, it is possible to choose, for each starter, feedback of the status either of the contactor, or the circuit-breaker, and to use the available I/O for external data, if there are fewer than 8 starters, or to access the Interbus S, Probus DP, CAN Open, Device Net buses.
Description: pages 2/302 and 2/303 2/304
References:
page 2/307
References

Splitter boxes
Description Type of control-cmd No. of I/O Extension connection on per by control sys. side starter 1 x HE10 8I/8O 1 x HE10 16I and 1 x HE10 8O Via module APP-1Cppp (2) LAD-32p No. of starters 2 4 4 4 2 4 Reference
Weight
kg
LAD-322 LAD-324 APP-2R4H1 APP-2R4H2 APP-2R2E APP-2R4E
63 A power splitter box 63 A power and control splitter box
0.120 0.240 0.348 0.358 0.178 0.348
1I/1O (1) APP-2RpE up to 8 starters 2I/1O (1) APP-2RpE up to 8 starters APP-2RpE up to 8 starters
APP-2R4H1
Power connection components for one starter

Description Assembly and power connection kits Reverser busbars
(to be used in conjunction with LAD341 + LAD331 + LAD9V2).
Composition of kit 1 LAD-31 plate for GV2-ME and 2 LAD-341 power connection modules 1 LAD-311 plate for GV2-ME and 2 LAD-341 power connection modules Line side Load side
Reference
LAD-351 LAD-352 LAD-9V10 (6) LAD-9V11 (6)
Weight kg
0.125 0.240 0.025 0.025
Power connection accessories for one starter

LAD-351 Description Upstream term. block Downstream term. block LAD-331 Max. connection Use cross-section 16 mm2 6 mm2 Power supply of 1 or 2 power splitter boxes or power control splitter box Connection of motor cables Reference
LAD-3B1 Weight kg
0.212 0.050
Sold in LAD-331 lots of 10
Control connection module for one starter

Description Control connection module (integrating contact block GV-AE20) Model d coil voltage a 12... 240 V or c 24...125 V c 24...48 V Type of coil control relay Electromechanical (4) Without relay (5) Type of starter Reference
Weight kg
Direct APP-2D1 Reversing APP-2D2 APP-2D1D Direct Reversing APP-2D2D
0.120 0.230 0.110 0.220
2.8
Spare or replacement parts

Description Type of control-cmd No. of I/O connection on per control sys. side starter
GV2-ME only GV2-ME + contactor
No. of Sold in starters lots of 1 1 1 4 4 2 4

10 10 10 1 1 1 1
Unit reference
LAD-31 LAD-311 LAD-341 APP-2R4H3 APP-2R4H4 APP-2R2C APP-2R4C
Weight
kg 0.042 0.110 0.018 0.108 0.118 0.058 0.108
Mounting plates Power connection module Control-command splitter box (single, for mounting on a power splitter box)
1 x HE10 8I/8O 1 x HE10 16I and 1 x HE10 8O Per module APP-1Cppp(2)
1I/1O 2I/1O
APP-2D1p
Replacement electromechanical relay 1 10 APP-2ER 0.010 (for control connection module) (1) Cables with 20-way Telefast HE10 connector, in accordance with selection table on page 2/309. (2) Connection to an APP-1Cppp module via APP-2CX adaptor (see page 2/307). May also be used as extension for appplications of 5 to 8 starters. (3) To create a model d reverser, use 2 LC1-D contactors, 1 assembly and power connection kit and 1 reversing kit. (4) Relay supplied mounted on the front panel of the control connection. (5) The use of model d low consumption contactors is recommended. (6) For conventional wiring methods replace LAD-9V10 and LAD-9V11 with LAD-9V12 + LAD-9V13.
Presentation, description: pages 2/300 to 2/303
Selection

Tego Power for motor power-starter components Communication modules
Selecting Tego Power communication modules

Selection of the communication modules depends on the type of connection required: - by removable screw or spring terminal blocks - parallel via HE 10 connector and Telefast cable - serial via bus (AS-i bus, Interbus S and S optical, Probus DP and DP optical, CAN Open or Device Net modules). In the Quickt version (spring terminals), connecting a module to the APP-2R power and control splitter box requires the tting of an APP-2CX adaptor. p Terminal block connection APP-1CV and APP-1CE modules are 16 input/8 output - screw or spring - removable terminal block modules which can be used for wire-to-wire connection of data from the circuit-breaker and contactor contacts as well as the coil control outputs of each motor starter. The removable terminal blocks are supplied with the modules. p Parallel connection via HE 10 connector The APP-1CH 1 module is an 8 input/8 output module, tted with an HE 10 connector for fast connection to PLCs using a prefabricated Telefast cable (see selection guide, page 2/308). Connection to a TSX Micro PLC is direct, using the TSX DMZ16DTK 8I/8O module 2 and the ABF-H20Hpp0 or TSX CDPpp3 Telefast cable 3. p Serial connection via bus The APP-1CAS2 AS-i module is an 8 input/8 output module on AS-i bus (2 addresses). The APP-1CIB0 Interbus S and APP-1CIB3 Interbus S bre optic modules, APP-1CPF0 Probus DP and APP-1CPF3 Probus DP bre optic modules, APP-1CCO0 CAN Open and APP-1CDN0 Device Net modules are 16 input/8 output modules for connecting APP-1Bp sub-bases. The APP-1CIB2 Interbus S and APP-1CIB5 Interbus S bre optic, APP-1CPF2 Probus DP and APP-1CPF5 Probus DP bre optic, and APP-1CCO2 CAN Open and APP-1CDN2 Device Net modules are 32I/24O modules in total, ie. : - 16 inputs/8 outputs for connecting APP-1Bp sub-bases with up to 8 starters - an additional 2 x 8I/8O available on 2 HE 10 connectors 4 compatible with the Telefast cables, and therefore with the APP-1CH HE 10 module 1 and with the ABE-7H16CMp1 or ABE-7p16M111 Telefast 8I/8O sub-base or the APE-1B24M Tego Dial sub-base.
4 1 1
ABE-7ppp or APE-1B24M 8 starters 8 starters 8 starters
3 3
2.8
p Notes on 8 input/8 output modules The APP-1CH (HE 10 connector) and APP-1CAS2 (AS-i 8I/8O) modules are tted with a 4-switch system for making the following selections: - switches C and D: option to feed back to the PLC either data from the circuit-breaker contact, or from the contactor on each of the 8 starters - switch E: an external input can be selected for each of the 4 end starters (nos 5 to 8) if the starter is not being used - switch F: an external output can be selected for each of the 4 end starters (nos 5 to 8) if the starter is not being used The position of switches C, D, E, F can be dened using Tego Power Design software. Number of Number of Reference HE 10 I/O module connectors (1) per HE 10 APP-1CH APP-1CV APP-1CE APP-1CAS2 2 8I/8O APP-1CIB2 2 8I/8O APP-1CIB5 0 APP-1CPF0 2 8I/8O APP-1CPF5 0 APP-1CCO0 2 8I/8O APP-1CCO2 Device Net bus 16I/8O 0 APP-1CDN0 2 8I/8O APP-1CDN2 (1) HE 10 connector for connecting either the APP-1CH module, an ABE-7H16CMp1 or ABE-7p16M111 Telefast sub-base, or the APE-1B24M Tego Dial Dialbase interface. Communication module selection table Type of connection Number of I/O available for APP-1Bp sub-base HE 10 connector 8I/8O Removable screw terminal block 16I/8O Removable spring terminal block 16I/8O AS-i bus 8I/8O Interbus S bus 16I/8O Interbus S optical bus 16I/8O Probus DP bus 16I/8O 16I/8O CAN Open bus 16I/8O
APP-1CIB2

2/306
Specifications: pages 2/312 and 2/313
References

Communication modules (1)

Description Communication modules with terminal block Communication modules with connector Communication modules via bus Type of connection or bus Screw Spring HE 10 No. of HE 10 connectors (2) Reference
APP-1CV APP-1CE APP-1CH
Weight kg 0.390 0.356 0.343
AS-i Interbus S
APP-1CAS2 APP-1CIB0 APP-1CIB2 APP-1CIB5 APP-1CPF0 APP-1CPF5 APP-1CCO0 APP-1CCO2 APP-1CDN0 APP-1CDN2 APP-1CFI
0.416 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530
APP-1CH
Interbus S optical Probus DP Probus DP optical CAN Open
2 2 2
Device Net FIP I/O
Accessories for communication module

Description Adaptor Specications For APP-1Cp communication modules 24 V Ue/30 V max. Output type: 2.6 W tungsten lament lamp 16 channels (2 x 8)
Order in Unit multiples of reference 1 APP-2CX
Weight kg 0.130
HE10 intelligent splitter box 16 I/16 O (2 x 8 I/8 O) Splitter sub-base
APE-1R1628
0.130
ABE-7ACC02
0.075
2.8
APE-1R1628
Self-stripping connector (for external I/O on APP-1CH and APP-1CAS2 modules) Connector with vampire clip for AS-i bus
2 pin, 5 mm intervals Wire cross-section: 0.75 mm2 Yellow
16
APE-1PAD21
0.020
LA9-Z32825
0.100
(1) Use adaptor APP-2CX for connecting a Quickt version module (spring terminals). (2) For connecting additional external I/O.
ABE-7ACC02
APE-1PAD21
Choice of connection
between the APP-1CH communication module and the PLC

PLC Brand/ Type

Connection PLC modularity terminal blocks
Components necessary for connecting the PLC Compatible PLC cards Communication module or control splitter box with 81/80 APP-1CH or APP-2R4H1/H3 1 1 1 1 1 Control Telefast splitter box cables 16 I/8 O APP2RH2/H4 Splitter box Splitter box 16 In + 16 Out 16 (2x8) (2 x 8l+80) p0 APE-1R1628 ABF-H20Hpp TSX CDPpp3 (1) 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ABE-7ACC02 (2)
Telemecanique Micro
8 In + 8 Out
16 In + 16 Out
TSXDMZ16DTK TSXDMZ64DTK TSXDEY32D2K/64D2K, TSXDSY32T2K/64T2K, TSXDEY16FK
Telemecanique Premium Telemecanique TSX 47-107 Modicon Compact 984/ A120 Modicon Quantum
16 In + 16 Out
16 In + 16 Out 16 In + 16 Out
TSXBLK71 + TSXDET32pp, 1 TSXBLK91 + TSXDST3292 DA0216, DAP216/217, DE0216, DEP217/220, DEP216 DDI353/853, DD0353 IDB3224, QDB3205, QPA3205 1
1 1
32 In + 32 Out 32 In + 32 Out
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2.8
April Siemens 95U/100U
8 In + 8 Out (included in 4218MA12/4318MA11 Telefast cable) 4418MA11/4518MA11

16 In + 16 Out 6EP5ppppAA00
4828MA13
Siemens 115U 135/155U Siemens S7-300 S7-400 Allen Bradley SLC500
8 In + 8 Out 6EP4207LA11, 4307LA12, 16 In + 8 Out 5pppp1AA00 4417LA11, 4517LA11/21 8In + 8 Out 6EP4204UA14, 4304UA14, 16 In + 8 Out 5pppp1AA00 4414UA14, 451-UA14 8 In + 8 Out 6ES79213A- 3211Bp0p-0AA0, 16 In + 16 Out B000AA0 3221Bp0p-0AA0 8 In + 8 Out 6ES79213A- 4211Bp0p-0AA0 16 In + 16 Out B000AA0 4221Bp0p-0AA0
16 In + 16 Out 32 In + 32 Out
1746OB16/1746IB16
1 1
1 1
1746IB32, 1746OV32, 1 1 1 1746OB32 1 1 1 (1) 8 inputs + 8 outputs remain available. To connect a second APP1CH module or APP2ppp 8 input + 8 output control splitter box, use an additional ABFH20Hpp0 or TSXCDPpp4 cable. (2) 8 outputs remain available on ABE7ACC02. To connect them to a second AAP2ppp 16 input/8 output control splitter box, use an additional ABF-H20pp0 or TSXCDPpp3 cable.
2/308
Telefast cables for connection to the PLC ABFABFABFABFABFABFABFABFABFABFABFABFH20Hpp0 H20Hpp1 H28Hpp0 H14Hpp0 S16ppH0 H40Hpp0 H40Hpp1 R16Hpp0 R16Hpp1 M16Hpp0 M16Hpp1 H32Hpp0 H16Hpp0 M32Hpp0 A32Hpp0 or TSXCDPppp
2 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
2.8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2/309
Specifications

Type of sub-base and splitter box
APP-1B2, APP-1B4
APP-2Rpp, LAD-32p
General environment
Standard Product certications IEC 439-1 UL, CSA Conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 695-2-1 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27 Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 and BV/LR Conforming to IEC 1000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-3 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-4 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-6 Operation in oor-standing enclosure Operation in wall-mounted enclosure Storage Kv V C C C V/m gn C IP 20 960 11 ms and 15 gn (half sinewave) 5300 Hz: 4 and 3100 Hz: 0.7 Level 3 10 (261000 MHz) Level 3 2 in common mode, 0.6 in differential mode 10 (0.15...80 MHz) - 5+ 60 - 5+ 40 - 40+ 70 > 30 3 4 x 5 mm screws per sub-base 35 mm rail or 2 x 5.5 mm or APP-1YF2 mounting clips screws per plate for GV2-ME 3 Nm mm2 mm2 mm2 2.2 16 25 25 2 Nm mm2 mm2 mm2 Nm Nm 0.8 1.5 2.5 2.5 1.7 1.2 Wave form: 1.2/50 s - 8/20 s UL, CSA (pending) IP 40 (mounted assembly)
Degree of protection Resistance to incandescent wire Shock resistance Vibration resistance Withstand to electrostatic discharges Withstand to radiated elds Immunity to rapid transients Surge withstand Immunity to radio electrical elds Ambient air temperature Space required around mounted assembly Degree of pollution Fixing of the assembly Suitable wire cross-sections Voltage supply for power
For inserting cables and heat dissipation mm
Number of wires Tightening torque Flexible cable with end Flexible cable without end Solid cable
2.8
Voltage supply for contactor coil control
Number of wires Tightening torque Flexible cable with end (maximum) Flexible cable without end (maximum)
Connection of pins to the circuitbreaker or contactor terminals
Solid cable (maximum) Tightening torque power control
3-phase power circuit specifications

Maximum current per power supply per sub-base GV2 operating limit Maximum current per starter Insulation voltage Operating voltage U imp Rated frequency Conditional rated short-circuit current Isc at 415 V Permissible rated short time current Icw Conforming to IEC 439-1 Conforming to IEC 439-1 A A A V V kV Hz Conforming to IEC 439-1 Conforming to IEC 439-1 kA kA 63 (single power supply to one or more sub-bases or splitter boxes) 32 63 80% of Imax at 60 C ambient temp. (see table on opposite page) 18 32 750 690 6 50-60 50 9.1 (for 70 ms)
Control circuit specifications

Contactor coil control voltage V V a 5250 c 5250
Presentation, description: pages 2/300 to 2/303 2/310
Specifications (continued)

Table of GV2 circuit-breaker current limitation at 60C ambient temperature with Tego Power
Circuit-breaker reference GV2-ME06 GV2-ME07 GV2-ME08 GV2-ME10 GV2-ME14 GV2-ME16 GV2-ME20 GV2-ME21 (1) Thermal release adjustment range. GV2 rating (1) 1 - 1.6 A 1.6 - 2.5 A 2.5 - 4 A 4 - 6.3 A 6 - 10 A 9 - 14 A 13 - 18 A 17 - 23 A Maximum current of GV2 with Tego Power 1.28 A 2A 3.2 A 5A 8A 11.2 A 14.4 A 18 A
Electromechanical relay specifications

Type of connection block APP1D1A, 1D2A, 1K1B, 1K2B, 1ER, 2D1, 2D2, 2ER
Specifications of the electromechanical relay control circuit (PLC end)

Rated voltage at Us Energisation threshold at 40 C Drop-out voltage at 20 C Maximum operating voltage Maximum current at Us Drop-out current at 20 C Maximum power dissipated at Us Disappearance of voltage V V V V mA mA W ms c 24 c 19.2 c 2.4 c 30 15 1 0.36 5
Specifications of the electromechanical relay output circuit

Type of contact Maximum switching voltage V V Operating current frequency Maximum current of the contact Hz A 1F a 250 c 250 50/60 4
2.8
Other specifications of the electromechanical relay

Maximum operating time at Us (including bounce) Between coil energisation and closing of the contact Between coil de-energisation and opening of the contact Maximum switching frequency Mechanical durability Dielectric strength Rated impulse withstand voltage Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage Maximum current for 500 000 operations 24 V - DC13 230 V - AC15 At no-load At Ie In millions of operating cycles V kV V A A ms 10
ms Hz Hz
5 10 0.5 20 1000 (50/60 Hz) - 1 min 2.5 300 0.6 0.9

Specifications of parallel link communication modules and control splitter boxes

Type of module Number of channels Inputs 16 8 By LED 8 8 By LED 8 8 16 8 APP-1CV, APP-1CE APP-1CH APP-2R4H1/H3 APP-2R4H2/H4
Outputs Display of supply voltages (V In, V Out) Input specications Supply voltage
Max. current per channel
V mA mA
c 24 20 320
c 24 20 160
c 24 20 160
c 24 20 320
Total max. current Output specications Operating voltage

Max. current per channel
V mA A
c 24 500 1
c 24 100 1
c 24 500 2 1 (8I/8O)
c 24 500 2 1 (16I) and 1 (8O)
Total max. current Connection to the sub-base No. of 20-way HE 10 connectors per Telefast cable Connection of the 24 V supply
By 30-way, HE 10 connector 1 (8I/8O)
By removable connector at intervals of 5.08 mm, provided. Wire cross-section: 2.5 mm2 without end, 1.5 mm2 with end Tightening torque: 0.8 Nm By removable connector at intervals of 5.08 mm, not provided. Wire cross-section: 2.5 mm2 without end, 1.5 mm2 with end. Tightening torque: 0.8 Nm
Connection of external I/O
2.8

Specifications of communication via bus modules

Type of module Ambient air temperature Number of channels Inputs Outputs Power supply Display Current drawn on the bus Inputs mA V mA Outputs V mA AS-i prole Connection to the sub-base Connection of external I/O 8 8 Via the AS-i bus By LED (I/O and power supply) < 280 x 2 24 5 per input 24 50 per output (relay compulsory) S7.0 x 2 By 30-way HE 10 connector 500 per output By 30-way HE 10 connector By 2 x 20-way HE 10 connectors 2 shielded SUB-D 9 connectors: - male for signal input - female for signal output Shielded SUB-D 9 connector 5-way connector at intervals of 5.08 mm. F-SMA bre optic connector HP-SIMPLEX bre optic connector 16 8 16 + (2 x 8 external on HE10) = 32 8 + (2 x 8 external on HE10) = 24 C APP-1CAS2 0 to + 55 APP-1CIB0, APP-1CCO0 APP-1CPF0, APP-1CDN0 0 to + 55 APP-1CIB5, APP-1CCO2 APP-1CPF5, APP-1CDN2 0 to + 55
External by removable connector at intervals of 5.08 mm By LED (I/O communication and faults)
Connection to the bus
By 2-way removable connector, at intervals of 5.08 mm
APP-1CIB0, AAP-1CIB2: APP-1CPF0, AAP-1CPF2: APP-1CC0p, AAP-1CDNp: AAP-1CIB5: AAP-1CPF5:
2.8
Specifications of the connection kit

Type of kit Commoning link for the power Operating voltage Ue Max. current per phase Commoning link for the coil control Operating voltage Ue Commoning link for the I/O control Operating voltage V c 24 V 250 V A 690 32 APP-1EL
Dimensions

Communication module APP-1Cp
Adaptor APP-2CX
Splitter sub-base ABE-ACC02
58
102,7
35
15
50
2
8 254
48 57
254
50
Intelligent splitter box APE-1R1628

22
35 90
15 48
88
128,7
57
APP-1YM1
147
APP1CH 1CV 1CE 1CAS2 1CIBp 1CPFp 1CC0p 1CDNp
a 35 35 35 35 45 45 45 45
100
30
70
17,75
12
12 52
35 51
89
65,5
2.8
Dimensions

Mounted assembly (Tego Power for components with spring terminals, using Quickfit technology)
5 4 3 2
2
1
247
278
229
6 2 150
318
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 91,5 113 147
35
16 b1
Circuit-breaker support plate Power connection module Power splitter box Control splitter box Upstream terminal block Control connection module Downstream terminal block b b1 2 starters 90 141 4 starters 180 231 8 starters 360 411
35
2.8
Schemes

Control-command circuit diagrams for a direct starter created using components with spring terminals (conforming to standards "Low voltage installation regulations" C 15-100 and "Machine safety" NF EN 60205-1) Direct starter with relay Direct starter without relay
U1 Sx Km1 R Sx
(1) (3)
21 13 0V E1 x
R C
(3)
E1 x 21 13
C KM1
(4)
(5)
KM1 13 14 22
(4)
13 14
22
(2)
23
+ VIn
Q1
(2)
23
+ VIn
Q1
24
14
24
E2 x B U2 A B
14
E2 x 0V
Direct starter with relay and forced local control

U1
(6)
2 1
Sx R Km1
(7)
(3)
C 21 13
(1)
0V E1 x
KM1 13 14 22
(4) (5)
(2)
23
+ VIn
Q1
24
14
E2 x B U2 A
2.8
A Control splitter box. B Control connection module. Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker. (1) Interface relay (version with relay). (2) Contactor coil. (3) External shunt on the lower part of the control connection module. (4) To HE10 connector on control splitter box for connecting PLC: - Sx: contactor coil control, - E1x: contactor status, - E2x: circuit-breaker status. (5) Control voltage of coils supplied by 2-pin connector on splitter box. (6) Control unit for forced local control (option). (7) Auto/manu selection (option).
Schemes

Tego Power for motor power-starter components Components with screw terminals
Control-command circuit diagrams for a direct starter created using components with screw terminals (conforming to standards "Low voltage installation regulations" C 15-100 and "Machine safety" NF EN 60205-1) 1 - Direct starter with relay and with front-mounted auxiliary contact GV-AE20. 2 - Direct starter without relay, with front-mounted auxiliary contact GV-AE20.
U1
U1
(4)
Km1 X1 24 V KM1 14
(4)
X1
(1)
(3)
13 KM1
+ VIn
13 23 X4 Q1 14 24
24 V
14
(2)
(5)
KM1
13
(3) (2)
13
KM1
2
(5)
+ VIn
23 Q1 14 24
(4)
U2 B
X4
(4)
U2
3 - With forced local control, wired on shunt (3) - (APP-1ppppD connection blocks not used. GV-AE20 used). A shunt for forced local control can also be wired with APP-1ppppD connection blocks .
U1
(6)
Km1 X1 24 V
(4) (7)
13
KM1
(1) (3)
KM1
14
(2)
13
X4
(5)
+ VIn
23
Q1
14
24
(4)
U2
A B X1, X4 Q1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Tego Power sub-base. Communication module. HE10 connector, removable terminal block (See below). Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker. Km1: APP-1ER interface relay. KM1: contactor coil. External shunt on lower connection block. It can be used to connect an external input. To communication module. Control voltage of contactor coils. Control unit (optional) for forced local control. 2-position auto/manu selector switch (optional). Intelligent splitter box APE-1R1628
24 V OUT 24 V IN 0 V OUT 0 V IN
2.8
Accessories for communication modules Splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02
16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
X1
X2
X3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 16 17 18 19 20
X4
8 9
16 17 18 19 20
Specifications: pages 2/310 to 2/313
16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16 17 18 19 20
Schemes

APP-1CE and APP-1CV communication modules
KM1
KM8
Km1
KmO.1
KMI.1
KMI.8
2
B
KmO.8
QI.1
QI.8
Km8
Q1
Q8
X1
X2
X3
X4
A B X1 X2 X3 X4
Tego Power sub-base. Communication module. Removable terminal block for connecting circuit-breaker contacts 1 to 8 (terminals QI.1 to QI.8). Removable terminal block for connecting contactor contacts 1 to 8 (terminals KMI.1 to KMI.8). Removable terminal block for connecting interface relays 1 to 8 (terminals KmO.1 to KmO.8). Removable terminal block for I/O 24 V power supply.
24 V power supply: VIn: inputs VOut: outputs
Can Open APP-1CCO2 and Device Net APP-1CDN2 communication modules
Q1
Q4
Q5
KM1
KM4
KM5
KM8
Q8
+ +
V In V Out KA1
KA4
KA5
KA8
0 V COM
8 inputs
8 inputs
8 outputs
address
24 V OUT
24 V OUT
24 V OUT 19
0 V COM
0 V COM
0 V COM
0 V COM
0 V COM
24 V IN
24 V IN
(1)
18
20
18
20
24 V IN
18
17
19
17
19
16
2.8
B
X1
X2
X3
X4
16
X5
(1) Can Open or Device Net bus A Tego Power sub-base. 8 inputs 8 outputs 8 inputs 8 outputs B Communication module. X1 Removable terminal block, 5 pins, for connecting the bus. X2, Address switch. X3, X4 20-way HE 10 connectors for connecting 8 external inputs and 8 external outputs. X5 Removable terminal block, 4 pins, at intervals of 5.08 mm, for connecting the 24 V IN and 24 V OUT module power supplies. Interbus S, APP-1CIB2 communication module With the exception of X1 and X2, the scheme is identical to that shown above. Probus DP, APP-1CPF2 communication module With the exception of X1 and X2 the scheme is identical to that shown above.
8 inputs
8 inputs address
X1 B
X2 B
OUT
IN
X1
X2
X1 X2
Male SUB-D connector for the Interbus S input. Female SUB-D connector for the Interbus S output.
X1 X2
Female SUB-D connector for the Probus DP connection. Address switches.
17
20
0 V COM
24 V IN
Schemes

APP-1CH communication module, scheme and operating principle Switches C and D are used to select feedback from the contactor or circuit-breaker contact (pins 1 to 8 on the HE10 connector) for each starter. In addition, on the last 4 starters, it is possible to choose between feedback from the contactor or circuit-breaker contacts and an external input (switch E and pins 5 to 8 on the HE10 connector). External inputs are connected to terminals I.4 to I.7. Interface relays are connected to pins 9 to 16 on the HE10 connector. For the last 4 starters, it is possible to choose either coil control (Km5 to Km8) or connection of local external outputs (terminals Q.4 to Q.7) using switch F.
KM1
KM4
KM5
KM8
Q1
Q4
Q5
Q8
Km1
Km5
Km4
Km8
E 24 V OUT 0 V OUT 24 V IN 0 V IN
Q.4
Q.7
13
16
17
18
19
20
I.4
12
I.7
X1 B
+ +
X2
X3
X4 VIn
Local inputs
Local outputs
24 V power supply: VIn: inputs VOut: outputs
Option of connecting 4 local external inputs and 4 local external outputs: selection via switches F and E. APP-1CAS2, communication module, scheme and operating principle Same operating principle as the APP-1CH module: switches E and F are used to select the local I/O and switches C and D are used to select the contactor or circuit-breaker contact. With this module, the data is fed back to the PLC via the AS-i bus.
KM1
KM4
KM5
KM8
Km1
Km5
Km4
Km8
Q1
Q4
Q5
Q8
+ +
VOut
2.8
C D F
E1
E4
E5
E8
S1
S4
S5
S8
AS-i
AS-i
AS-i +
Bus AS-i B
AS-i + AS-i
X2
X3
X4
A B X1 X2, X3 X4 C, D E F
Local inputs Local outputs Tego Power sub-base. Option of connecting 4 local external inputs and 4 Communication module. local external outputs: selection via switches F and E 20-way HE10 connector. Removable terminal blocks, 8 pins, at intervals of 5.08 mm, for connecting 4 external inputs and 4 external outputs. Removable terminal blocks, 4 pins, at intervals of 5.08 mm, for the I/O 24 V power supply (APP-1CH) or for the AS-i bus (APP-1CAS2). Switches for selecting between feedback to the PLC from the circuit-breaker or contactor status contact for each of the 8 starters. Switch for each of the last 4 starters (5 to 8), for selecting between feedback to the PLC of the circuit-breaker or contactor status (result of switch D) or an external input (if the starter is not used). Switch for each of the last 4 starters (5 to 8), for selecting between controlling the contactor coil or an external output (if the starter is not used).
AS-i +
O.5
O.8
I.5
I.8
Circuit
breakers
Circuit
3/0
breakers
Chapter 3
Circuit-breakers
3.1
GV2 thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 - L GV2 - LE GV2 - ME GV2 - P GV2 - RT (also suitable for transformer protection) 3/2 to 3/51
3.2
GV3 thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 3/52 to 3/62
3.3
GV7 thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 3/63 to 3/81
3.4
GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers 3/82 to 3/87
3/1
3
3.1
Presentation
TeSys circuit-breakers
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2, GV3 and GV7
GV2-ME, GV2-P, GV3-ME and GV7-R motor circuit-breakers are 3-pole thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers specically designed for the control and protection of motors, conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-2 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 .
Connection
These circuit-breakers are designed for connection by screw clamp terminals. Circuit-breaker GV2-ME can be supplied with spring terminal connections. These ensure secure, permanent and durable clamping that is resistant to harsh environments, vibration and impact and is even more effective when conductors without cable ends are used. Each connection can take two independent conductors.
GV2-ME with screw clamp connections
Operation
1 O I 1 O 2 4 I 1 2 4 3 2 4 O 2 3 1
3
3.1
GV7-R
GV2-ME with spring terminal connections
GV2-ME
GV3-ME
GV2-P
GV2-ME and GV3-ME: Pushbutton control. Energisation is controlled manually by operating the Start button I 1. De-energisation is controlled manually by operating the Stop button O 2, or automatically by the thermal-magnetic protection elements or by a voltage trip attachment.
GV2-P: control by rotary knob. GV7-R: control by rocker lever. Energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position I 1. De-energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position O 2. De-energisation due to a fault automatically places the knob or rocker lever in the Trip position 3. Re-energisation is possible only after having returned the knob or rocker switch to position O. Control is manual and local when the motor circuit-breaker is used on its own. Control is automatic and remote when it is associated with a contactor.
GV2-P
Protection of motors and personnel

Motor protection is provided by the thermal-magnetic protection elements incorporated in the motor circuit-breaker. The magnetic elements (short-circuit protection) have a non-adjustable tripping threshold, which is equal to about 13 times the maximum setting current of the thermal trips. The thermal elements (overload protection) include automatic compensation for ambient temperature variations. The rated operational current of the motor is displayed by means of a graduated knob 4. Personnel protection is also provided. All live parts are protected against direct nger contact. The addition of an undervoltage trip allows the circuit-breaker to be de-energised in the event of an undervoltage condition. The user is therefore protected against sudden starting of the machine when normal voltage is restored, since the Start button I has to be pressed to restart the motor. With the addition of a shunt trip, de-energisation of the unit can be remotely controlled.
GV3-ME
The operators on both open-mounted and enclosed motor circuit-breakers can be locked in the Stop position O by up to 3 padlocks. Because they are suitable for isolation, these circuit-breakers, in the open position, provide an adequate isolation distance and indicate the actual position of the moving contacts by the position of the operators.
Special features
These motor circuit-breakers are easily installed in any conguration thanks to their universal xing arrangement: screw xing or clip-on mounting on symmetrical, asymmetrical or combination rails.
GV7-R
Characteristics: pages 3/5 to 3/7 & 3/25 to 3/30
Schemes: pages 3/49 to 3/51 3/3
Definitions, comments
Coordination (according to standard IEC/EN 60947-4-1)

The standard defines the degree of acceptable damage to the equipment following a short-circuit. Standard IEC/EN 60947-4-1 (motor-starters) defines 2 types Type 1 coordination Type 2 coordination Damage to motor-starter components is accepted. Welding of the contactor or motor-starter contacts is accepted providing they can be easily separated. The fault current has been successfully interrupted. No damage has been caused to persons or to installations.
Coordination table for GV2 + contactors: see the Technical & Application guide at www.schneider.co.uk. Iq = rated conditional short-circuit current (kA) - that the circuit-breaker can interrupt - that the associated motor-starter components can withstand without damage.
3
3.1
Suitability for isolation
According to standard IEC/EN 60947-1, sub-clause 7-1-6 (additional safety requirements for equipment suitable for isolation): Equipment suitable for isolation shall provide in the open position and isolating distance in accordance with the requirements necessary to satisfy the isolating function and shall be fitted with an indicating device indicating the position of the moving contacts. This position indicator shall be connected to the moving contacts in a reliable way; the handle may form such an indicator, providing it cannot indicate the open position when released unless all the moving contacts are in the open position.
Breaking capacity (according to standard IEC/EN 60947-2)

Icu: Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Breaking capacity for which the prescribed conditions according to a specified test sequence do not include the capability of the circuit-breaker to carry its rated current continuously following the sequence of operations )O-t-CO. Ics: Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Breaking capacity for which the prescribed conditions according to a specified test sequence include the capability of the circuit-breaker to carry its rated current continuously following the sequence of operations O-t-CO-t-CO. It is expressed as a percentage of Icu (25, 50, 75 or 100%). In operational conditions , the short-circuit currents normally encountered rarely exceed 25 to 50% of the prospective short-circuit current at the point of installation of the circuit-breaker.
Other definitions
Discrimination (selectivity) Discrimination of protective devices requires that protection against a fault arising at any point of the network is effected by the nearest device on the supply side of the fault. Discrimination may be total or partial. In the latter case the overcurrent limit must be defined. See pages 3/20 to 3/24. Cascading Where two separate protective devices in series operate at the same time under short circuit fault conditions, the breaking capacity lcu of the downstream device is increased. See page 3/20. Current limiting By the use of additional poles operating in series with the main poles, the overall breaking capacity lcu of a motor circuitbreaker is substantially increased. A single current limiting block may be used in conjunction with a number of motor circuit-breakers up to the 63 A thermal limit. See page 3/6. Sensitivity to phase loss (according to standard IEC/EN 60947-4-1, sub-clause 7.2.1.5.2) Limits of operation of 3-pole thermal overload relays energised on two poles: With the overload relay energised on two poles at 1.0 times the current setting (Ir) and on one pole at 0.9 Ir, tripping shall not occur in less than 2 hours starting from the cold state at 20 o C. When the value Ir flowing in two poles is increased to 1.15 Ir and the third pole is de-energised, tripping shall occur in less than 2 hours. See curves, pages 3/8 to 3/10.
3/4
Characteristics
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2-ME and GV2-P (Also applies to GV2-RT. Use GV2-ME table eg: for GV2-RT14 use GV2-ME14 data)
Breaking capacity of GV2-ME and GV2-P

Circuit-breaker type GV2ME01 ME07 ME08 ME10 ME14 ME16 ME20 ME21 ME32 to and ME06 ME22 0.1 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 32 to and 1.6 25 g g kA g g kA g g kA g g kA g g g g g g g g g g 3 75 g g g g g g g g 3 75 g g g g 50 100 50 100 3 75 g g g g 15 100 10 100 3 75 g g 15 50 8 50 6 75 3 75 g g 15 50 8 50 6 75 3 75 50 100 15 40 6 50 4 75 3 75 50 100 10 50 6 50 4 75 3 75 GV2P01 P07 to P06 0.1 2.5 to 1.6 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 8 100
P08 P10 P14 P16 P20 P21 P32 and P22 23 32 and 25
Rating
6.3
10
14
18
Breaking capacity conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2
230/ Icu 240 V Ics % (1) 400/ Icu 415 V Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g g g g g g g 8 100
g g g g g g g g 6 100
g g g g g g 50 100 6 100
g g g g 50 75 42 75 6 100
g g 50 50 20 75 10 75 4 100
g g 50 50 20 75 10 75 4 100
g g 50 50 20 75 10 75 4 100
3
3.1
Associated fuses (if required) if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to 230/ aM 240 V IEC/EN 60947-2 gG 400/ aM 415 V gG 440 V aM gG 500 V aM gG 690 V aM gG
A A A A A A A A A A
g g g g g g g g g g
g g g g g g g g 16 20
g g g g g g g g 25 32
g g g g 50 63 50 63 32 40
g g g g 50 63 50 63 32 40
g g 63 80 50 63 50 63 40 50
g g 63 80 50 63 50 63 40 50
80 100 80 100 63 80 50 63 40 50
80 100 80 100 63 80 50 63 40 50
g g g g g g g g g g
g g g g g g g g 20 25
g g g g g g g g 25 32
g g g g g g g g 40 50
g g g g g g 50 63 40 50
g g g g 50 63 50 63 50 63
g g 100 125 63 80 50 63 50 63
g g 100 125 80 100 50 63 50 63
g g 100 125 80 100 50 63 50 63
g > 100 kA. (1) As % of Icu.
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2-ME and GV2-P (Also applies to GV2-RT. Use GV2-ME table eg: for GV2-RT14 use GV2-ME14 data)
Breaking capacity of GV2-ME and GV2-P (used in association with current limiter GV1-L3)
Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 230/ Icu 240 V Ics % (1) 400/ Icu 415 V Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 230/ Icu 240 V Ics % (1) 400/ Icu 415 V Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu=Ics kA (3) Circuit-breaker type GV2A kA kA kA GV2A kA kA kA kA GV2A kA ME01 to ME06 0.11.6 g g g g g g g g P01 to P06 0.11.6 g g g g g g g g g ME01 to ME06 0.11.6 ME07 2.5 g g g g g g g g P07 2.5 g g g g g g g g 50 ME07 2.5 ME08 4 g g g g g g g g P08 4 g g g g g g g g 50 ME08 4 ME10 6.3 g g g g g g g g P10 6.3 g g g g g g g g 50 ME10 6.3 ME14 10 g g g g g g 50 100 P14 10 g g g g g g 100 50 50 ME14 10 ME16 14 g g 100 50 50 75 42 100 P16 14 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50 ME16 14 ME20 18 g g 100 50 20 75 10 75 P20 18 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50 ME20 18 ME21 23 g g 100 40 20 75 10 75 P21 23 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50 ME21 23 ME22 25 g g 100 40 20 75 10 75 P22 25 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50 ME22 25 ME32 32 g g 100 40 20 75 10 75 P32 32 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50 ME32 32
3
3.1
Rating Cable protection against thermal stress in the event of short-circuit (PVC insulated copper cables) Minimum 1 mm2 c.s.a. protected 1.5 mm2 at 40 C at Isc max. 2.5 mm2 46 mm2
p p p p g > 100 kA. (1) As % of Icu.
p p p p
p p p p
10 kA 20 kA
6 kA 10 kA
(2) (2) p
(2) (2) p
(2) (2) p
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2)
(2)
p p p p p p Cable c.s.a. protected. (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected. (3) With limiter LA9-LB920.
Characteristics
Magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2-LE and GV2-L
Breaking capacity of GV2-LE and GV2-L

Type GV2LE03 LE07 LE08 LE10 LE14 LE16 LE20 LE22 LE32 to LE06 0.4 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 25 32 to 1.6 g g kA g g kA g g kA g g kA g g g g g g g g g g 3 75 g g g g g g g g 3 75 g g g g 50 100 50 100 3 75 g g g g 15 100 10 100 3 75 g g 15 50 8 50 6 75 3 75 g g 15 50 8 50 6 75 3 75 50 100 15 40 6 50 4 75 3 75 50 100 10 50 6 50 4 75 3 75 GV2L03 L07 to L06 0.4 2.5 to 1 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 4 100 L08 4 L10 6.3 L14 10 L16 14 L20 18 L22 25 L32 32
Rating
Breaking capacity to IEC/EN 60947-2
230/ Icu 240 V Ics % (1) 400/ Icu 415 V Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g g g g g g g 4 100
g g g g g g g g 4 100
g g g g 20 75 10 100 4 100
g g 50 50 20 75 10 75 4 100
g g 50 50 20 75 10 75 4 100
50 100 50 50 20 75 10 75 4 100
50 100 50 50 20 75 10 75 4 100
3
3.1
Associated fuses (if required) If Isc > breaking capacity Icu to IEC/EN 60947-2 230/ aM 240 V gG 400/ 415 V 440 V aM gG aM gG 500 V aM gG 690 V aM gG Cable protection against thermal stress in the event of short-circuit (PVC insulated copper cables) Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 C and at Isc max 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 46 mm2
A A A A A A A A A A
g g g g g g g g g g
g g g g g g g g 16 20
g g g g g g g g 25 32
g g g g 50 63 50 63 32 40
g g g g 50 63 50 63 32 40
g g 63 80 50 63 50 63 40 50
g g 63 80 50 63 50 63 40 50
80 100 80 100 63 80 50 63 40 50
80 100 80 100 63 80 50 63 40 50
g g g g g g g g g g
g g g g g g g g 20 25
g g g g g g g g 25 32
g g g g g g g g 40 50
g g g g 50 63 50 63 40 50
g g 80 100 63 80 50 63 50 63
g g 100 125 80 100 50 63 50 63
100 125 100 125 80 100 50 63 50 63
100 125 100 125 80 100 50 63 50 63
kA kA
p p p
p p p
p p p
10 6
(2)
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2) (2) p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
10 6
(2)
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2) (2) p
20 10 (2) p p p p p
20 10 (2) p p p p p p
p p p p g > 100 kA (1) As % of Icu (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected p Cable c.s.a. protected
Curves

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2-ME and GV2-P
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2-ME and GV2-P

Average operating time at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current
Time (s) 10 000
1000
3
100
3.1
1
10
2 3
0,1
0,01
0,001 1 1,5 10 100 x setting current (Ir)
1 2 3
3 poles from cold state 2 poles from cold state 3 poles from hot state
Curves

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV2-RT
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2-RT

Time (s)
10 000
1000
3
100
2 1
10
3.1
0,1
0,01
0,001 1 10 100 x setting current (Ir)
1 2 3
Curves

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2-L and GV2-LE
Tripping curves for GV2-L or LE combined with thermal overload relay LRD or LR2-K
Average operating time at 20C according to multiples of the setting current
Time (s)
10 000
1000
3
100
3.1
1 2 3
10
0,1
0,01
0,001 1 10 100
x setting current (Ir)
1 2 3
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2-ME and GV2-P

3-phase 400/415 V Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Limited peak current (kA)

100
3
2 3 4
0.
0.2
3.1
0.
5 6
10
=
8
0.
7 8
0.
0.
9
0. co s = 95
10
11
0,1 0,1
10
15 (12)
100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1 2 3 4 5 6
Maximum peak current 24-32 A 20-25 A 17-23 A 13-18 A 9-14 A
7 8 9 10 11 12
6-10 A 4-6.3 A 2.5-4 A 1.6-2.5 A 1-1.6 A Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2-ME (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings)
Curves (continued)


For GV2-L and GV2-LE only 3-phase 400/415 V Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Limited peak current (kA) 100
0. 25
= 0. 3
3
3.1
3 4
5 =
5 6
10
0.
0.
0.
7 8 9
0,1 0,1
co
0.
95
0.
10
10
15
100 Prospective Isc (kA)
11
1 2 3 4 5
Maximum peak current 32 A 25 A 18 A 14 A
6 7 8 9 10 11
10 A. 6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2-LE (14, 18 and 25 A ratings)
Curves (continued)


For GV2-L and GV2-LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2-K 3-phase 400/415 V Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
3
2 3
0.
0.2
3.1
4 5
10
=
8
0.
0.
6 7
0.
0.
8
0. co s = 95
10
0,1 0,1
10
15
11
1 2 3 4 5
Maximum peak current 32 A 25 A 18 A 14 A
6 7 8 9 10 11
10 A 6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2-LE (14, 18 and 25 A ratings)
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2-ME

Thermal limit in KA2 s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
2
Sum of I dt (kA s) 100
3
3.1
10
2 3 4 5 6 7
10
0,1
0,01 0,1 1 10 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
1 2 3 4 5
24-32 A 20-25 A 17-23 A 13-18 A 9-14 A
6 7 8 9 10
6-10 A 4-6.3 A 2.5-4 A 1.6-2.5 A 1-1.6 A
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2-P

Thermal limit in kA s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
2 2
Sum of I dt (kA s) 100
1 2 3 4
3
3.1
5 6
10
0,1
1 2 3 4 5
24-32 A 20-25 A 17-23 A 13-18 A 9-14 A
6 7 8 9 10
6-10 A 4-6.3 A 2.5-4 A 1.6-2.5 A 1-1.6 A
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2-L only

Thermal limit in kA2 s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2 s) 100
3
3.1
10
1 2 3 4 5 6
0,1
1 2 3 4
25 A and 32 A 18 A 14 A 10 A
5 6 7 8
6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2-LE only

Thermal limit in kA2 s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2 s)

100
2 3 4 5 6
3
3.1
10
8
1
0,1
1 2 3 4 5
32 A 25 A 18 A 14 A 10 A
6 7 8 9
6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A
Curves (continued)


For GV2-L and GV2-LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2-K Thermal limit in kA2 s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2 s) 100
3
3.1
10
1 3 4
5 6
0,1
10
0,01 0,1 1 10 15 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
1 2 3 4 5 6
32 A (GV2-LE32) 25 A and 32 A (GV2-L32) 18 A 14 A 10 A 6.3 A
7 8 9 10
4A 2.5 A 1.6 A Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2-LE (14, 18 and 25 A ratings)
Earth loop impedance
Maximum Earth Fault Loop Impedance ZS for 0.4s disconnection time with U0 230V (1)
Reference GV2-ME01 GV2-ME02 GV2-ME03 GV2-ME04 GV2-ME05 GV2-ME06 GV2-ME07 GV2-ME08 GV2-ME10 GV2-ME14 GV2-ME16 GV2-ME20 GV2-ME21 GV2-ME22 GV2-ME32 GV2-P01 GV2-P02 GV2-P03 GV2-P04 GV2-P05 GV2-P06 GV2-P07 GV2-P08 GV2-P10 GV2-P14 GV2-P16 GV2-P20 GV2-P21 GV2-P22 GV2-L03 GVL-L04 GV2-L05 GV2-L06 GV2-L07 GV2-L08 GV2-L10 GV2-L14 GV2-L16 GV2-L20 GV2-L22 GV2-LE03 GVL-LE04 GV2-LE05 GV2-LE06 GV2-LE07 GV2-LE08 GV2-LE10 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE16 GV2-LE20 GV2-LE22 GV2-LE32 Thermal Adjustment Range In (A) 0.1...0.16 0.16...0.25 0.25...0.4 0.4...0.63 0.63...1 1...1.6 1.6...2.5 2.5...4 4...6.3 6...10 9...14 13...18 17...23 20...25 24...32 0.1...0.16 0.16...0.25 0.25...0.4 0.4...0.63 0.63...1 1...1.6 1.6...2.5 2.5...4 4...6.3 6...10 9...14 13...18 17...23 20...25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 25 32 Magnetic Tripping Current Im (A) 1.50 2.40 5.00 8.00 13.00 22.50 33.50 51.00 78.00 138.00 170.00 223.00 327.00 327.00 416.00 1.50 2.40 5.00 8.00 13.00 22.50 33.50 51.00 78.00 138.00 170.00 223.00 327.00 327.00 5.00 8.00 13.00 22.50 33.50 51.00 78.00 138.00 170.00 223.00 327.00 5.00 8.00 13.00 22.50 33.50 51.00 78.00 138.00 170.00 223.00 327.00 416.00 Tolerance Im+20% (A) 1.80 2.88 6.00 9.60 15.60 27.00 40.20 61.20 93.60 165.60 204.00 267.60 392.40 392.40 499.20 1.80 2.88 6.00 9.60 15.60 27.00 40.20 61.20 93.60 165.60 204.00 267.60 392.40 392.40 6.00 9.60 15.60 27.00 40.20 61.20 93.60 165.60 204.00 267.60 392.40 6.00 9.60 15.60 27.00 40.20 61.20 93.60 165.60 204.00 267.60 392.40 499.20 Maximum Loop Impedance Zs ( ) 127.78 79.86 38.33 23.96 14.74 8.52 5.72 3.76 2.46 1.39 1.13 0.86 0.59 0.59 0.46 127.78 79.86 38.33 23.96 14.74 8.52 5.72 3.76 2.46 1.39 1.13 0.86 0.59 0.59 38.33 23.96 14.74 8.52 5.72 3.76 2.46 1.39 1.13 0.86 0.59 38.33 23.96 14.74 8.52 5.72 3.76 2.46 1.39 1.13 0.86 0.59 0.46
3
3.1
GV2-RT03 0.25...0.4 8.00 9.60 23.96 GV2-RT04 0.4...0.63 13.00 15.60 14.74 GV2-RT05 0.63...1 22.00 26.40 8.71 GV2-RT06 1...1.6 33.00 39.60 5.81 GV2-RT07 1.6...2.5 51.00 61.20 3.76 GV2-RT08 2.5...4 78.00 93.60 2.46 GV2-RT10 4...6.3 138.00 165.60 1.39 GV2-RT14 6...10 200.00 240.00 0.96 GV2-RT16 9...14 280.00 336.00 0.68 GV2-RT20 13...18 400.00 480.00 0.48 GV2-RT21 17...23 400.00 480.00 0.48 (1) Whilst the IEE Regulations provide for a disconnection time of 5s for fixed equipment, the value of impedance obtained will limit the current to a level which may affect the starting characteristics of the motor.
Dimensions, mounting: pages 3/43 to 3/48
Discrimination
Cascading
Upstream circuit-breaker Breaking capacity kA rms Downstream circuit-breaker GV2-ME 14 A GV2-L 18 A GV2-P 18 A NSC100N NS100N 18 25 Breaking capacity (kA rms) 18 25 NS100H 70 50 70 70 NS100L 150 50 150 150
GV2-L or GV2-LE upstream circuit-breaker

Upstream circuit-breaker trip unit Rating (A) Downstream circuit-breaker GV2-ME01 GV2-ME02 GV2-ME03 GV2-ME04 GV2-ME05 GV2-ME06 GV2-ME07 GV2-ME08 GV2-ME10 GV2-ME14 GV2-ME16 GV2-ME20 GV2-ME21 GV2-ME22 GV2-ME32 GV2-P01 GV2-P02 GV2-P03 GV2-P04 GV2-P05 GV2-P06 GV2-P07 GV2-P08 GV2-P10 GV2-P14 GV2-P16 GV2-P20 GV2-P21 GV2-P22 GV2-L03 GV2-L04 GV2-L05 GV2-L06 GV2-L07 GV2-L08 GV2-L10 GV2-L14 GV2-L16 GV2-L20 GV2-L22 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE04 GV2-LE05 GV2-LE06 GV2-LE07 GV2-LE08 GV2-LE10 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE16 GV2-LE20 GV2-LE22 GV2-LE32 150 L14 L16 LE14 LE16 10 14 Discrimination (A) L20 LE20 18 L22 LE22 25
3
3.1
Rating (A) 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 32 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 25 32
10000 150 100
300 150
400 200 150
900 400 200
10000 150 100
300 150
400 200 150
900 400 200
10000 150 100
300 150
400 200 150
900 400 200
10000 150 100
300 150
400 200 150
900 400 200
Total discrimination zone Partial discrimination limited to 150 kA No discrimination
Discrimination
Compact NS100 or NS160N/H/L upstream circuit-breaker with TM-D trip unit

Upstream circuit-breaker Trip unit Rating (A) Downstream Thermal circuit-breaker overload relay GV2-ME01 Built-in GV2-ME02 Built-in GV2-ME03 Built-in GV2-ME04 Built-in GV2-ME05 Built-in GV2-ME06 Built-in GV2-ME07 Built-in GV2-ME08 Built-in GV2-ME10 Built-in GV2-ME14 Built-in GV2-ME16 Built-in GV2-ME20 Built-in GV2-ME21 Built-in GV2-ME22 Built-in GV2-ME32 Built-in GV2-P01 GV2-P02 GV2-P03 GV2-P04 GV2-P05 GV2-P06 GV2-P07 GV2-P08 GV2-P10 GV2-P14 GV2-P16 GV2-P20 GV2-P21 GV2-P22 GV2-L03 GV2-L04 GV2-L05 GV2-L06 GV2-L07 GV2-L08 GV2-L10 GV2-L14 GV2-L16 GV2-L20 GV2-L22 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE04 GV2-LE04 GV2-LE05 GV2-LE05 GV2-LE06 GV2-LE06 GV2-LE07 GV2-LE07 GV2-LE08 GV2-LE08 GV2-LE10 GV2-LE10 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE16 GV2-LE20 GV2-LE22 GV2-LE32 6 Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in LRD03 LRD04 LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LR2-K0302 LR2-K0303 LR2-K0304 LR2-K0304 LR2-K0305 LR2-K0305 LR2-K0306 LR2-K0306 LR2-K0307 LR2-K0307 LR2-K0308 LR2-K0310 LR2-K0312 LR2-K0312 LR2-K0314 LR2-K0314 LR2-K0316 LR2-D1314 LR2-D1316 LR2-D1321 LR2-D1322 LR2-D2353 Total discrimination Partial discrimination limited to 6 kA No discrimination Rating (A) 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 913 1218 1725 0.160.23 0.230.36 0.360.54 0.360.54 0.540.80 0.540.80 0.81.2 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 5.58 811.5 710 913 1218 1725 2332 NS100N/H/L TM-D 16 25 40 63 NS160N/H/L TM-D 80 100
Discrimination (kA)
2 1
2 2 1
10 2 1 1 10 5 4 3 10 6 6 5
3
3.1
2 1
10 2 1
10 2 1 1 1
10 5 4
10 6
2 1
10 2 1 1
10 2 1 1 1
10 4
2 2
2 2 1 1
10 10 2 2 1 1 1 1
10 10 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
10 4 3
6 5
Discrimination (continued)
Compact NS160 or 250N/H/L upstream circuit-breaker with TM-D trip unit

Upstream circuit-breaker Trip unit Rating (A) Downstream Thermal circuit-breaker overload relay GV2-ME01 Built-in GV2-ME02 Built-in GV2-ME03 Built-in GV2-ME04 Built-in GV2-ME05 Built-in GV2-ME06 Built-in GV2-ME07 Built-in GV2-ME08 Built-in GV2-ME10 Built-in GV2-ME14 Built-in GV2-ME16 Built-in GV2-ME20 Built-in GV2-ME21 Built-in GV2-ME22 Built-in GV2-ME32 Built-in GV2-P01 GV2-P02 GV2-P03 GV2-P04 GV2-P05 GV2-P06 GV2-P07 GV2-P08 GV2-P10 GV2-P14 GV2-P16 GV2-P20 GV2-P21 GV2-P22 GV2-L03 GV2-L04 GV2-L05 GV2-L06 GV2-L07 GV2-L08 GV2-L10 GV2-L14 GV2-L16 GV2-L20 GV2-L22 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE04 GV2-LE04 GV2-LE05 GV2-LE05 GV2-LE06 GV2-LE06 GV2-LE07 GV2-LE07 GV2-LE08 GV2-LE08 GV2-LE10 GV2-LE10 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE16 GV2-LE20 GV2-LE22 GV2-LE32 6 Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in LRD03 LRD04 LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LR2-K0302 LR2-K0303 LR2-K0304 LR2-K0304 LR2-K0305 LR2-K0305 LR2-K0306 LR2-K0306 LR2-K0307 LR2-K0307 LR2-K0308 LR2-K0310 LR2-K0312 LR2-K0312 LR2-K0314 LR2-K0314 LR2-K0316 LR2-D1314 LR2-D1316 LR2-D1321 LR2-D1322 LR2-D2353 Total discrimination Partial discrimination limited to 6 kA No discrimination Rating (A) 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 913 1218 1725 0.160.23 0.230.36 0.360.54 0.360.54 0.540.80 0.540.80 0.81.2 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 5.58 811.5 710 913 1218 1725 2332 NS160N/H/L TM-D 125 160 Discrimination (kA) NS250N/H/L TM-D 160 200 250
3
3.1
Discrimination
Compact NS100N/H/L upstream circuit-breaker with STR22SE trip unit

Upstream circuit-breaker Trip unit Rating (A) Downstream Thermal circuit-breaker overload relay GV2-ME01 Built-in GV2-ME02 Built-in GV2-ME03 Built-in GV2-ME04 Built-in GV2-ME05 Built-in GV2-ME06 Built-in GV2-ME07 Built-in GV2-ME08 Built-in GV2-ME10 Built-in GV2-ME14 Built-in GV2-ME16 Built-in GV2-ME20 Built-in GV2-ME21 Built-in GV2-ME22 Built-in GV2-ME32 Built-in GV2-P01 GV2-P02 GV2-P03 GV2-P04 GV2-P05 GV2-P06 GV2-P07 GV2-P08 GV2-P10 GV2-P14 GV2-P16 GV2-P20 GV2-P21 GV2-P22 GV2-L03 GV2-L04 GV2-L05 GV2-L06 GV2-L07 GV2-L08 GV2-L10 GV2-L14 GV2-L16 GV2-L20 GV2-L22 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE04 GV2-LE04 GV2-LE05 GV2-LE05 GV2-LE06 GV2-LE06 GV2-LE07 GV2-LE07 GV2-LE08 GV2-LE08 GV2-LE10 GV2-LE10 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE16 GV2-LE20 GV2-LE22 GV2-LE32 6 Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in LRD03 LRD04 LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LR2-K0302 LR2-K0303 LR2-K0304 LR2-K0304 LR2-K0305 LR2-K0305 LR2-K0306 LR2-K0306 LR2-K0307 LR2-K0307 LR2-K0308 LR2-K0310 LR2-K0312 LR2-K0312 LR2-K0314 LR2-K0314 LR2-K0316 LR2-D1314 LR2-D1316 LR2-D1321 LR2-D1322 LR2-D2353 Total discrimination Partial discrimination limited to 6 kA No discrimination Rating (A) 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 913 1218 1725 0.160.23 0.230.36 0.360.54 0.360.54 0.540.80 0.540.80 0.81.2 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 5.58 811.5 710 913 1218 1725 2332 NS100N/H/L STR22SE 25 40 Discrimination (kA) 63 100
1 0.5 0.5
1 0.5 0.5 0.5
5 2 1.2 1.2
5 2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
3
3.1
1 0.5 0.5
1 0.5 0.5 0.5
10 2 1.2 1.2 1.2
10 2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
1 0.5 0.5
1 0.5 0.5 0.5
10 2 1.2 1.2 1.2
10 2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
1 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
1 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
10 10 2 2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
10 10 2 2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Discrimination (continued)
Compact NS160630N/H/L upstream circuit-breaker with STRE trip unit

Upstream circuit-breaker Trip unit Rating (A) Downstream Thermal circuit-breaker overload relay GV2-ME01 Built-in GV2-ME02 Built-in GV2-ME03 Built-in GV2-ME04 Built-in GV2-ME05 Built-in GV2-ME06 Built-in GV2-ME07 Built-in GV2-ME08 Built-in GV2-ME10 Built-in GV2-ME14 Built-in GV2-ME16 Built-in GV2-ME20 Built-in GV2-ME21 Built-in GV2-ME22 Built-in GV2-ME32 Built-in GV2-P01 GV2-P02 GV2-P03 GV2-P04 GV2-P05 GV2-P06 GV2-P07 GV2-P08 GV2-P10 GV2-P14 GV2-P16 GV2-P20 GV2-P21 GV2-P22 GV2-L03 GV2-L04 GV2-L05 GV2-L06 GV2-L07 GV2-L08 GV2-L10 GV2-L14 GV2-L16 GV2-L20 GV2-L22 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE03 GV2-LE04 GV2-LE04 GV2-LE05 GV2-LE05 GV2-LE06 GV2-LE06 GV2-LE07 GV2-LE07 GV2-LE08 GV2-LE08 GV2-LE10 GV2-LE10 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE14 GV2-LE16 GV2-LE20 GV2-LE22 GV2-LE32 6 Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in LRD03 LRD04 LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LR2-K0302 LR2-K0303 LR2-K0304 LR2-K0304 LR2-K0305 LR2-K0305 LR2-K0306 LR2-K0306 LR2-K0307 LR2-K0307 LR2-K0308 LR2-K0310 LR2-K0312 LR2-K0312 LR2-K0314 LR2-K0314 LR2-K0316 LR2-D1314 LR2-D1316 LR2-D1321 LR2-D1322 LR2-D2353 Total discrimination Partial discrimination limited to 6 kA No discrimination Rating (A) 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 913 1218 1725 0.160.23 0.230.36 0.360.54 0.360.54 0.540.80 0.540.80 0.81.2 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 5.58 811.5 710 913 1218 1725 2332 NS160N/H/L STR22SE 160 NS250N/H/L STR22SE 160 250 NS400 or 630N/H/L STR23SE/53UE 400 630
Discrimination (kA)
3
3.1
Characteristics
Circuit-breaker type
GV2-ME
GV2-P
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 N 14, NF C 63-650, NF C 63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660. CSA, CEBEC, GOST, TSE, UL, BV, GL, LROS, DNV, CSA, UL, PTB, EZU, GOST, TSE, DNV, LROS, GL, PTB, EZU, SETI, RINA BV, RINA TH Basic unit: IP 20 In enclosure GV2-Mi 01: IP 41 In enclosure GV2-Mi 02: IP 55 30 gn - 11 ms TH Basic unit: IP 20 30 gn - 11 ms
Product approvals
Protective treatment Degree of protection conforming to IEC/EN 60529 Shock resistance conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Vibration resistance conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Ambient air temperature - storage - operation Temperature compensation Flame resistance conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-1 Maximum operating altitude Operating positions in relation to normal vertical mounting position
3
3.1
5 gn (5 to 150 Hz)
5 gn (5 to 150 Hz)
C C C C
- 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 in open air - 20+ 60 in free air 960 - 20+ 40 in enclosure
- 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 In open air - 20+ 60 960
2000
2000
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
GV2-ME Cabling Number of conductors and c.s.a. Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Suitable for isolation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 7-1-6 Tightening torque Resistance to mechanical impact N.m J mm2 mm2 mm
2
GV2-MEii3 Minimum 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 Maximum 2x6 2x4 Minimum 2 x 1 (1) Maximum 2x6 Minimum 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1
Maximum 2x6 2x6 2x4 Yes
2 x 1.5 (1) 2 x 6 2x4 Yes
1.7 0.5 Enclosed: 6
1.7 0.5
Sensitivity to phase failure

2
Yes, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2
(1) For c.s.a. of 1 to 1.5 mm , use cable end reducer LA9-D99.
GV2-ME
GV2-P
Technical characteristics
Utilisation category conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 A AC-3 A AC-3
Rated operational voltage (Ue) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2
690
690
3
3.1
690 600
690 600
conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, UL 508 V
Rated operational frequency conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Total power dissipated per pole
Hz
50/60
50/60
kV W
6 2.5
6 2.5
Mechanical durability (C.O.: Closing, Opening) Electrical durability for AC-3 duty 440 V In/2 Duty class (maximum operating rate) Rated duty conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Maximum conventional rated thermal current (Ith) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1
C.O.
100,000
100,000
C.O.
100,000
100,000
C.O./h 25
25
Uninterrupted duty A 0.16...32
Uninterrupted duty 0.16...32
Characteristics
Magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2-LE and GV2-L
GV2-LE
GV2-L
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals pending Protective treatment
Shock resistance to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Vibration resistance to IEC/EN 60068-2-6
IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-2, NF C 63-650, NF C 63-120, NF C 79-130, VDE 0113, VDE 0660 BV, GL, LROS, DNV, TSE, UL, CSA TH 30 gn 5 gn (5 to 150 Hz) C C - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 2000 BV, GL, LROS, DNV, EZU, GOST, TSE, UL, CSA TH 30 gn 5 gn (5 to 150 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 2000
Ambient air temperature - storage - operation
3
3.1
90 90 90
Flame resistance to IEC/EN 60695-2-1 C
Cabling Number of conductors and c.s.a. Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Suitability for isolation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 7-1-6 Tightening torque Resistance to mechanical impact Utilisation category conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Rated operational voltage (Ue) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Rated operational frequency conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) to IEC/EN 60947-2 Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical durability (C.O.: closing, opening) Electrical durability for AC-3 duty Duty class (maximum operating rate) Rated duty to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 V V Hz kV W C.O. C.O. N.m J mm2 mm2 mm2
Max 2x6 2x6 2x4 Yes 1.7 0.5 A AC-3 690 690 50/60 6 1.8 100,000 100,000
Min 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1
Max 2x6 2x6 2x4 Yes 1.7 0.5 A AC-3 690 690 50/60 6 1.8 100,000 100,000 40 Continuous duty
90
Min 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1
C.O./h 40 Continuous duty
Characteristics
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2 Electric trips
Trip type
GV-AU
GV-AX (1)
GV-AS
Characteristics of electric trips

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 V 690 500 690
conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, V UL 508 Operational voltage conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
600
600
0.851.1 Un
0.71.1 Un
3
3.1
Drop-out voltage
0.70.35 Un
0.750.2 Un
Inrush consumption
a c
VA W
12 8
14 10.5
Sealed consumption
a c
VA W
3.5 1.1
5 1.6
Operating time conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
ms
From the moment the voltage reaches its operational value until opening of the circuit-breaker. 1015
On-load factor
100 %
Cabling Number of conductors Solid cable mm2
1 or 2 12.5
Flexible cable without cable end
mm2
0.752.5
Flexible cable with cable end
mm2
0.751.5
Tightening torque
N.m
1.4 max
Mechanical durability (C.O.: Closing-Opening)
C.O.
100,000
(1) Wiring scheme of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2-ME only, see page 3/49.
Characteristics
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2 Auxiliary contacts
Contact type Rated insulation voltage (Ui) (associated insulation coordination) to IEC/EN 60947-1 to CSA C22-2 n 14 and UL 508 Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 to CSA C22-2 n 14 and UL 508 Mechanical durability Operational power and current to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, a.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power, normal conditions Occasional breaking and making capacities, abnormal conditions Rated operational current (Ie) Operational power and current to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, d.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power, normal conditions Occasional breaking and making capacities, abnormal conditions Rated operational current (Ie) Low level switching contact reliability Minimum operational conditions d.c. operation Short-circuit protection Cabling, screw clamp terminals Number of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque V mA V W W A V VA VA A
Instantaneous auxiliary GV-AN, GV-AD V V A A C.O. 690 600 6 5 100,000 AC-15/100,000 C.O. 48 300 3000 6 110 127 500 7000 4.5 230 240 720 380 415 850 440 650 500 500 690 400
Fault signalling GV-AD, GV-AM11 (1) 690 300 2.5 1 1000 AC-14/1000 C.O. 24 36 220 1.5 48 48 300 1 110 127 72 450 0.5 230 240 72 450 0.3
Instantaneous auxilairy GV-AE 250 (690 in relation to main circuit) 300 2.5 1 100,000 AC-15/100,000 C.O. 24 48 480 2 48 60 600 1.25 110 127 120 230 240 120
3
3.1
13,000 15,000 13,000 12,000 9000
1270 2400 1 0.5
3.3
2.2
1.5
0.6
DC-13/100,000 C.O. 24 140 240 6 48 240 360 5 60 180 240 3 110 140 210 1.3
240 (2)
DC-13/1000 C.O. 24 24 100 1 48 15 50 0.3 60 9 50 0.15
DC-13/100,000 C.O. 24 24 100 1 48 15 50 0.3 60 9 50 0.15
120 180 0.5
GV-AE: Number of failures for for n million operating cycles (17 V-5 mA): = 10-6 17 5 By GB2-CBpp circuit-breaker (rating according to operational current for Ue 415 V) or by gG fuse 10 A max 1 12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 1.4 max GV-AN only 0.752.5 0 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 1.4 max 0.752.5 1 Contact open N/O N/O N/O N/C N/O N/C N/O N/O N/O N/C N/O Operation of fault signalling contacts GV-AM11 Change of state following tripping on short-circuit. GV-AD10pp and GV-AD01pp Change of state following tripping on short-circuit, overload or undervoltage. Contact closed 0.751.5 GB2-CB06 or gG fuse 10 A max
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Cabling, spring terminal connections Flexible cable without cable end mm2
Contact operation, instantaneous auxiliary contacts
Power pole GV-AN20 GV-AN11
GV-AE1
GV-AE20 GV-AE11 GV-ADpp10
GV-ADpp01 N/C (1) For application example of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact, see page 3/49. (2) Add an RC circuit type LA4-D to the load terminals, see page 2/87.
Characteristics
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2 Auxiliary contacts
Characteristics of 3-pole busbars GV2-Gppp

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) Permissible peak current (I peak) Permissible thermal limit (I2t)
To IEC/EN 60947-1
V A
690 63
To IEC/EN 60439-1
kA
11
kA2s
104
3
3.1
Degree of protection
To IEC/EN 60529
IP 20
Characteristics of terminal blocks GV2-G05 and GV1-G09

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) Degree of protection Cabling
To IEC/EN 60947-1
V A
690 63
To IEC/EN 60947-5-1
To IEC/EN 60529 Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m N.m
IP 20 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 10 conductors 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 2.5 to 10 conductors 1 x 1.5 to 16 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 4 conductors 2.2 1.7
Tightening torque
Connector Screw clamp
Characteristics of current limiters (GV2-ME and GV2-P)

Type Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) Operating threshold Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
To IEC/EN 60947-1 To IEC/EN 60947-1
GV1-L3 V A 690 63
LA9-LB920 690 63
rms current
1500 (non adjustable threshold) 1 conductor 1.525 1.525 1.516 2.2 2 conductors 1.510 2.510 1.5 4
1000 (non adjustable threshold) 1 conductor 1.525 1.525 1.516 2 conductors 1.510 1.510 1.5 4
References
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV2-ME
GV2-ME with pushbutton control and screw clamp terminals (1)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V P Icu Ics P Icu Ics (2) (2) kW kA kW kA GV2-ME g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g Setting range of thermal trips (3) A 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 11.6 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 2.54 46.3 610 610 914 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 1.5 2.4 5 8 8 13 22.5 22.5 22.5 33.5 51 51 78 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 416
GV2-ME01 GV2-ME02 GV2-ME03 GV2-ME04 GV2-ME04 GV2-ME05 GV2-ME06 GV2-ME06 GV2-ME06 GV2-ME07 GV2-ME08 GV2-ME08 GV2-ME10 GV2-ME14 GV2-ME14 GV2-ME16 GV2-ME16 GV2-ME20 GV2-ME21 GV2-ME22 (4) GV2-ME32
Reference
Weight
690 V P Icu Ics (2) kW kA g g g g 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
kg 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260
0.06 g 0.09 g 0.12 g 0.18 g 0.25 g 0.37 g 0.55 g
0.37 g
3
3.1
0.55 g
0.37 g 0.55 g 0.75 g 1.1 g 1.5 g 2.2 g 3 4
0.75 g 1.1 g 1.5 3 2.2 3 3 3 3
0.75 g 1.1 g 1.5 g 2.2 g 3 4 g g
50 100 4
10 100 5.5 3
5.5 10 100 7.5 3 7.5 6 9 11 15 6 4 4 75 75 75 75 75 9 11 15 3 3 3
5.5 15 50
7.5 15 50 9 11 15 15 40 15 40 10 50
18.5 3 22 3
18.5 4
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2-ME with built-in auxiliary contact block

With instantaneous auxiliary contact block (composition, see page 3/33): - GV-AE1, add sufx AE1TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2-ME01AE1TQ. - GV-AE11, add sufx AE11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2-ME01AE11TQ. - GV-AN11, add sufx AN11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2-ME01AN11TQ. These circuit-breakers with built-in contact block are sold in lots of 20 units in a single pack. (1) For bulk packs of GV2-ME, call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608. (2) As % of Icu. (3) For use of GV2-ME in an enclosure, see pages 3/38 and 3/39. (4) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2-MC or MP, please call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608. g > 100 kA.
References
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV2-P
GV2-P with rotary knob and screw clamp terminals

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V P Icu Ics P Icu Ics (1) (1) kW kA kW kA g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g Setting range of thermal trips (2) A 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 11.6 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 2.54 46.3 610 610 914 914 1318 1723 2025 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 1.5 2.4 5 8 8 13 22.5 22.5 22.5 33.5 51 51 78 138 138 170 170 223 327 327
GV2-P01 GV2-P02 GV2-P03 GV2-P04 GV2-P04 GV2-P05 GV2-P06 GV2-P06 GV2-P06 GV2-P07 GV2-P08 GV2-P08 GV2-P10 GV2-P14 GV2-P14 GV2-P16 GV2-P16 GV2-P20 GV2-P21 GV2-P22 GV2-P32
Reference
Weight
690 V P Icu Ics (1) kW kA g g g g 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
kg 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350
0.06 g GV2-P 0.09 g 0.12 g
0.37 g
3 3
3.1
0.18 g 0.25 g 0.37 g 0.55 g
0.55 g
0.37 g 0.55 g 0.75 g 1.1 g 1.5 g 2.2 g 3 4 g
0.75 g 1.1 g 1.5 8 2.2 8 3 4 8 6
0.75 g 1.1 g 1.5 g 2.2 g 3 4 g g
50 100 5.5 6
5.5 50 100 7.5 6 7.5 42 75 9 11 15 9 11 15 6 6 4
5.5 g
7.5 50 50 9 11 50 50 50 50
10 75 10 75 10 75
18.5 4
15 50 50 18.5 10 75 22 4 100 2432 416 (1) As % of Icu. (2) For use of GV2-P in an enclosure, see pages 3/38 and 3/39. g > 100 kA.
Characteristics: pages 3/5 to 3/7 & 3/25 to 3/30 3/32
References
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2-ME with spring terminal connections (1)

Pushbutton control Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V P Icu Ics (2) P Icu kW kA kW kA GV2-MEpp3 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 11 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 15 15 15 15 15 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50 50 40 40 40 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g g g g g g g 50 10 10 6 6 4 4 Setting range of thermal trips Ics (2) A g g g g g g g 100 100 100 75 75 75 75 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 A 1.5 2.4 5 8 13 22.5
GV2-ME013 GV2-ME023 GV2-ME033 GV2-ME043 GV2-ME053 GV2-ME063
Magnetic tripping current Id 20 %
Reference
Weight
kg 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280
3
3.1
1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025
33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327
GV2-ME073 GV2-ME083 GV2-ME103 GV2-ME143 GV2-ME163 GV2-ME203 GV2-ME213 GV2-ME223
0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.260 0.260
Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Mounting Front LH side Max. number 1 2 Type of contacts N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O + N/C N/O + N/O
Sold in lots of 10 10 1 1
Unit reference
GV-AE113 GV-AE203 GV-AN113 GV-AN203
Weight kg 0.030 0.030 0.060 0.060
Accessory
Description Application
Sold in lots of
Unit reference
Weight kg
LA9-D99
Cable end For connection of 20 LA9-D99 reducer (3) conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2 (1) For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2 the use of a cable end reducer LA9-D99 is recommended. (2) As % of Icu. g > 100 kA (3) 2 supplied with each circuit-breaker as standard.
GV2-AK00
GV1-L3
3
3.1
GV2-ME
GV-AX
GV-AD GV-AM11
GV-AU
GV2-P
GV-AM11
GV-AS
GV2-L
GV-AE11, AE20
GV-AN GV-AN GV-AE1 GV2-LE GV-AE1
3/34
References
Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV2 with screw clamp terminals Accessories
Contact blocks with screw clamp terminals

Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Mounting Front (1) Side (LH) Fault signalling contact + instantaneous auxiliary contact Short-circuit signalling contact Side (3) (LH) Maximum Type of contacts number 1 2 1 N/O or N/C (2) N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O (fault) N/C (fault) + N/O + N/C + N/O + N/C
Sold in lots of 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Unit reference
GV-AE1 GV-AE11 GV-AE20 GV-AN11 GV-AN20 GV-AD1010 GV-AD1001 GV-AD0110 GV-AD0101 GV-AM11
Weight kg 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.050 0.050 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.045
Side (LH)
C/O common point
Electric trips with screw clamp terminals

Mounting Voltage Reference Weight kg
3
3.1
GV-Ap025 GV-Ap026 GV-Ap055 GV-Ap056 GV-Ap107 GV-Ap107 GV-Ap115 GV-Ap116 GV-Ap125 GV-Ap115 GV-Ap207 GV-Ap207 GV-Ap225 GV-Ap226 GV-Ap385 GV-Ap386 GV-Ap415 GV-Ap416 GV-Ap385 GV-Ap415 GV-Ap505 GV-Ap505
Undervoltage or shunt trips (4) Side (1 block on RH side of circuit-breaker) 50 Hz 60 Hz 48 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 100 V 50 Hz 100110 V 60 Hz 110115 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 120127 V 50 Hz 127 V 60 Hz 200 V 50 Hz 200 V220 V 60 Hz 220 V240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 380 V400 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 415 V440 V 50 Hz 415 V 60 Hz 440 V 60 Hz 480 V 60 Hz 500 V 50 Hz 600 V 60 Hz Undervoltage trip, INRS (can only be mounted on GV2-ME) Safety device for dangerous machines, conforming to INRS and VDE 0113 Side (1 block on RH side of circuit-breaker GV2-ME) 110115 V 127 V 220240 V 380400 V 415440 V 440 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 24 V 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105
GV-AX115 GV-AX116 GV-AX115 GV-AX225 GV-AX226 GV-AX385 GV-AX386 GV-AX415 GV-AX385
0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110
Add-on contact blocks with screw clamp terminals

Description Visible isolation block (5) Limiters Mounting Front (1) Maximum number 1 Reference
GV2-AK00 GV1-L3
Weight kg 0.150 0.130
At top 1 (GV2-ME and GV2-P)
LA9-LB920
LA9-LB920 0.320 Independent 1 (1) Mounting of a GV-AE contact block or a GV2-AK00 visible isolation block on GV2-P and GV2-L. (2) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted. (3) The GV-AD is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker. (4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV-AU025. To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV-AS025. (5) Visible isolation of the 3 poles upstream of circuit-breaker GV2-P and GV2-L.
GV2-G454
GV2-G254
LAD-31
GV1-G09
GV2-G454
LAD-31
GV2-G254
3
GV1-G10
3.1
GV2-G05
LA9-E07 GV2-AF01 GV2-AF3 GV2-AF4
GK2-AF01 GV2-GA01
GV2-AF02 GV1-G02
GV2-AP0 2
. TRIP
T RESE
GV2-V03
3/36
References
Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV2 with screw clamp terminals Accessories
Accessories
Description Adapter plate Application
Sold in lots of
Unit reference
GV2-AF02
Weight kg 0.021
For mounting a GV2-ME 10 or GV2-LE by screw xing 10 For mounting a GV2-ME or GV2-P and contactor LC1-D09 to D38 with front faces aligned
10 10 10 10
LAD-31 (supports GV2 only) 0.040 LAD-311(supports GV2 & contactor) GV1-F03 GV2-AF01 GV2-AF3 GV2-AF4
Height compensation plate 7.5 mm Combination block Between GV2 and contactor LC1-K or LP1-K Between GV2 and contactor LC1-D09D38 Between GV2 mounted on LAD-31 and contactor LC1-D09D38 With 3-pole connection for mounting a GV2 and an LC1-D09 to D25 contactor Application 2 tap-offs 3 tap-offs 4 tap-offs 5 tap-offs Application For unused busbar outlets Connection from the top Can be tted with current limiter GV1-L3 (GV2-ME and GV2-P) For mounting in modular panels
0.003 0.020 0.016 0.016
3
3.1
Motor starter adapter plate Description Sets of 3-pole 63 A busbars
GK2-AF01 Reference GV2-G245 GV2-G254 GV2-G272 GV2-G345 GV2-G354 GV2-G445 GV2-G454 GV2-G472 GV2-G554 Unit reference GV1-G10 GV1-G09 GV2-G05 LA9-E07 GV1-G02
0.120 Weight kg 0.036 0.038 0.042 0.058 0.060 0.077 0.085 0.094 0.100 Weight kg 0.005 0.040 0.115 0.005 0.013
Pitch mm 45 54 72 45 54 45 54 72 54 Sold in lots of

5 1 1 10 10
Description Protective end cover (1) Terminal blocks for supply to one or more GV2-G busbar sets Cover for terminal block
Flexible 3-pole connection Centre distance between for connecting a GV2 mounting rails: 100120 mm to an LC1-D09D25 contactor Set of connections upstream/downstream Clip-in marker holders (supplied with each circuit-breaker) For connecting GV2-ME to a printed circuit board For GV2-P, GV2-L, GV2-LE and GV2-RT (8 x 22 mm)
10 100
GV2-GA01 LA9-D92 (1)
0.045 0.001
Padlockable external operator

Description For GV2-P and GV2-L (150 to 290 mm) For GV2-LE Padlocking in On and Off position Black handle, blue legend plate, IP 54 Padlocking in Off position Red handle, yellow legend plate, IP 54 Padlocking in On and Off position Black handle, blue legend plate, IP 54 Reference
GV2-AP01 GV2-AP02 GV2-AP03
Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.280
Padlocking device
For all GV2 devices For use with up to 6 padlocks (not supplied), 6 mm shank max. (1) Check with requirements of local Isolation standards before use.
GV2-V03
0.130
3
3.1
GV2-V01 GV2-MC
GV2-K04
GV2-MP
GV2-K011
GV2-E01
GV2-CP
GV2-SN
3/38
References
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV2-ME and accessories, assembled by user
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2-ME

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/31 and 3/33. The motor starter comprising an enclosed motor circuit-breaker GV2-ME conforms to IEC/EN 60947-4-1. GV2Ithe (A) ME01 ME02 ME03 ME04 ME05 ME06 ME07 ME08 ME10 ME14 ME16 ME20 ME21 ME22 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 9 13 17 21 23
Enclosures for thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2-ME

Type Degree of protection Possible attachments on side of GV2-ME Left Right 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference Weight kg
GV2-MC01 GV2-MC02 or GV2-MCK04 (1) GV2-MC03 GV2-MP01 GV2-MP03 GV2-MP02 GV2-MP04
Surface mounting Double, insulated with protective conductor. Sealable cover Flush, mounting with protective conductor
IP 41 IP 55 IP 55 for temperature < + 5 C
0.290 0.300 0.420 0.300 0.115 0.115 0.130 0.130
3
3.1
IP 41 (front face) 1 IP 41 (reduced ush mounting) IP 55 (front face) 1 IP 55 (reduced ush mounting)
Front plate
For direct control, through a panel of a chassis-mounted GV2-ME IP 55
GV2-CP21
0.800
Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)

Description Padlocking device (2) for GV2-ME operator (padlocking is only possible in O position) Mushroom head Stop pushbutton 40 mm, red Sealing kit Spring return (2) Latching (2) IP 55 Key release key n 455 Turn to release For enclosures and front plate IP 55 IP 55 for < + 5 C 1 to 3 padlocks 4 to 8 mm
Sold in lots of 1 Unit reference GV2-V01
Weight kg 0.075
1 1 1 1 10 10 100
GV2-K011 GV2-K021 GV2-K031 GV2-K04 (3) GV2-E01 GV2-E02 AB1-VV635UBL AB1-AC6BL Unit reference
0.052 0.160 0.115 0.120 0.012 0.012 0.015 0.003 Weight kg 0.019 0.019 0.019 0.019 0.019 0,019 0,019 0,019 0.019 0.019 0.019 0.019
Neutral terminal Partition Description Neon indicator light Voltage V 110 Colour
50 Sold in lots of
Green 10 GV2-SN13 10 GV2-SN14 Red 10 GV2-SN15 Orange 10 GV2-SN17 Clear 10 GV2-SN23 220/240 Green Red 10 GV2-SN24 10 GV2-SN25 Orange 10 GV2-SN27 Clear 10 GV2-SN33 380/440 Green 10 GV2-SN34 Red 10 GV2-SN35 Orange 10 GV2-SN37 Clear (1) The GV2-MCK04 enclosure has a GV2-K04 mushroom head Stop pushbutton tted as standard. (2) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. For use with GV2-Mp01. (3) Padlockable in Off position using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.
3/39
References
Magnetic circuit-breakers GV2-L with screw clamp terminals

Rotary handle Standard power ratings Magnetic of 3-phase motors protection 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 rating 400/415 V 500 V 690 V P Icu Ics P Icu Ics P Icu Ics (1) (1) (1) kW kA kW kA kW kA A 0.09 g 0.12 g GV2-L 0.18 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 0.4 0.63 0.63 1 1 1 1 Tripping current Id 20 % A 5 8 8 13 13 13 13 LRD-03 LRD-04 LRD-04 LRD-05 LRD-05 LRD-06 LRD-05 LRD-06 g g g g g 1.5 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1.6 22.5 33.5 33.5 51 4 51 78 138 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 416 LRD-06 LRD-07 LRD-08 LRD-08 LRD-08 LRD-10 LRD-12 LRD-14 LRD-14 LRD-16 LRD-16 LRD-21 LRD-22 LRD-22 LRD-32
GV2-L03 GV2-L04 GV2-L04 GV2-L05 GV2-L05 GV2-L05 GV2-L05 GV2-L06 GV2-L06 GV2-L07 GV2-L08 GV2-L08 GV2-L08 GV2-L10 GV2-L14 GV2-L14 GV2-L14 GV2-L16 GV2-L16 GV2-L20 GV2-L22 GV2-L22 GV2-L32
Use in Reference association with thermal overload relay
Weight
kg 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330
0.37 g
3
3.1
0.55 g
0.25 g
0.75 g
0.37 g 0.55 g
0.37 g 0.55 0.75 g 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 g g g g
0.75 g 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 g g g g g 50 50 50 50
100 2.5 100 2.5
100 6.3 100 10 10
10 100 5.5 10 100 7.5 9 11 15
100 10 100 14 100 14 100 18 100 25 25
50 7.5 50 9 50 11 50 15
10 75 10 75 10 75 10 75
18.5 4 22 4
15 50 50 18.5 10 75 (1) As % of Icu. g > 100 kA.
100 32
Characteristics: pages
3/5 to 3/7 & 3/25 to 3/30
Dimensions:
pages 3/43 to 3/48
Schemes:
pages 3/49 to 3/51
3/40
References
Magnetic circuit-breakers GV2-LE with screw clamp terminals

Rocker lever Standard power ratings Magnetic of 3-phase motors protection 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 rating 400/415 V 500 V 690 V P Icu Ics P Icu Ics P Icu Ics (1) (1) (1) kW kA kW kA kW kA A 0.06 g 0.09 g GV2-LE 0.12 g 0.18 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 0.4 0.4 0.63 0.63 1 1 1 1 1.6 1.6 Tripping current Id 20 % A 5 5 8 8 13 13 13 13 22.5 22.5 33.5 33.5 51 51 78 138 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 416 LR2-K0302 GV2-LE03 LR2-K0304 GV2-LE03 LR2-K0304 GV2-LE04 LR2-K0305 GV2-LE04 LR2-K0305 GV2-LE05 LR2-K0306 GV2-LE05 LR2-K0306 GV2-LE05 LR2-K0306 GV2-LE05 LR2-K0307 GV2-LE06 LR2-K0307 GV2-LE06 LR2-K0308 GV2-LE07 LR2-K0308 GV2-LE08 LR2-K0310 GV2-LE08 LR2-K0312 GV2-LE08 LR2-K0312 GV2-LE10 LR2-K0314 GV2-LE14 LR2-K0316 GV2-LE14 LRD-14 LRD-16
GV2-LE14 GV2-LE16
Use in Reference association with thermal overload relay
Weight
kg 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330
0.37 g
3
3.1
0.55 g
0.25 g
0.75 g 1.1 1.5 3 g 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
0.37 g 0.55 g
0.37 g 0.55 g 0.75 g 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 g g g
0.75 g 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 g g g g g 15 15 15 15
75 2.5 2.5
75 4 4
50 100 4 10 100 5.5 10 100 6 6 4 4 75 75 75 75 7.5 9 11 15
75 6.3 75 10 10
75 10 75 14 75 14 75 18 75 25 25
50 7.5 50 9 40 11 40 15
LR2-K0321 GV2-LE16 LRD-21 LRD-22 LRD-22 LRD-32

GV2-LE20 GV2-LE22 GV2-LE22 GV2-LE32
18.5 3
15 10 50 18.5 4 75 22 3 75 32 (1) As % of Icu. TeSys protection components g > 100 kA.
3/5 to 3/7 & 3/25 to 3/30
Dimensions:
pages 3/43 to 3/48
Schemes:
pages 3/49 to 3/51
3/41
References
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers type GV2-RT (1)
For motors with high current peak on starting

Control by rocker lever Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220 400 230 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW 0.06 GV2-RT 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 4 5.5 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 11 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 Setting range of thermal trips A 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 8 13 22 33 51 78 138 200 280 400 400
GV2-RT03 GV2-RT04 GV2-RT05 GV2-RT06 GV2-RT07 GV2-RT08 GV2-RT10 GV2-RT14 GV2-RT16 GV2-RT20 GV2-RT21
Reference
Weight
kg 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350
3
3.1
For primaries of 3-phase transformers

Control by rocker lever Standard power ratings 230 400 240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 12.5 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 12.5 10 Setting range of thermal trips A 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 8 13 22 33 51 78 138 200 280 400 Reference Weight kg
GV2-RT03 GV2-RT04 GV2-RT05 GV2-RT06 GV2-RT07 GV2-RT08 GV2-RT10 GV2-RT14 GV2-RT16 GV2-RT20
0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350
Accessory (2)
Description Padlockable external operator (IP 54), black handle, blue legend plate Reference
GV2-AP03
Weight kg 0.280
(1) Characteristics of GV2-RT identical to those of GV2-ME except for tripping current (id). (2) Other accessories such as mounting, cabling and marking accessories are identical to those used for GV2-ME motor circuit-breakers, see page 3/39.
3/5 to 3/7 & 3/25 to 3/30
Dimensions:
pages 3/43 to 3/48
Schemes:
pages 3/49 to 3/51
3/42
GV2-ME
X1
GV-AX
GV-AD, AM, AN, AU, AS, AX Block GV-AD, AM, AN Block GV-AU, AS, AX
GV-AE
15 10
46 15,7 11 67,2
44,5
45
16
9,3
9,3 81(1)
18
X1
GV2-MEpp GV2-MEpp3
b 89 101
3
GV-AD, AM, AN, AU, AS Block GV-AD, AM, AN GV2-AK00
(1) Maximum X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue 690 V GV2-P
3.1
14 98
X1
Block GV-AU, AS
= 32 9,3 9,3 81(1) 18 44,5
89
45 44,5
15
82
(1) Maximum X2 = 40 mm X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V Mounting GV2-ME On 35 mm 6 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2-AF02 On pre-slotted mounting plate c = 78.5 on AM1-DP200 (35 x 7.5) AM1-PA c = 86 on AM1-DE200, ED200 (35 x 15) AF1-EA4 4,2
=
X2
26
50
61
On mounting rail DZ5-MB201

GV2-AF02 DZ5-MB201 DZ5-ME8
50/60
50/60
50
15 35
80
35
35
Mounting GV2-P On mounting rail AM1-DE200, On panel ED200 (35 x 15)

AF1-EA4
Plate GK2-AF01
35
55
45
84
84
44,5
45
106
13,5
13,5
24
9,5
35
54
3/5 to 3/7 & 3/25 to 3/30
References:
pages 3/31 to 3/42
Schemes:
pages 3/49 to 3/51
1055
44,5
135
3/43
60
Dimensions, mounting (continued)
GV2-AF01 Combination GV2-ME + K contactor
GV2-AF3 Combination GV2-ME + model d contactor
Combination GV2-P + model d contactor

d d1
152
3
3.1
79
45
c1 c
45
c1 c
45
GV2-ME + b c1 c
LC1-D09D18 176.4 88.65 94.15
LC1-D25 and D32 186.8 94.95 100.45
GV2-P + b c1 c d1 d
LC1-D09D18 177.4 88.6 94.1 91 96.8
LC1-D25 & D32 187.8 94.95 100.45 91 96.8
GV2-AF4 + LAD-31 Combination GV2-ME + model d contactor
GV2-ME + GV1-L3 (current limiter) Combination GV2-P + model d contactor
40 X1
89
X1
77
c1 c d1 d
44,5
45
c1 c
45
X1 = 10 mm for Ue = 230 V or 30 mm for 230 V < Ue 690 V 7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1-F03
GV2-ME + b c1 c d1 d
LC2-D09D18 188.6 92.7 98.2 98.3 103.8
LC2-D25 and D32 199 99 104.5 98.3 103.8
GV2-P + b c1 c
LC2-D09D18 169.1 116.8 122.3
LC2-D25 and D32 199.5 116.8 122.3
13
35
Mounting of external operator GV2-AP01 or GV2-AP02 for GV2-P Door drilling
39 =
= = 54
45
65
1,5...5 53 135284 5,2 = =
3/5 to 3/7 & 3/25 to 3/30
References:
pages 3/31 to 3/42
Schemes:
pages 3/49 to 3/51
3/44
54
129
Front plate GV2-CP21 For GV2-ME

11,5 21
1...4 12 76 93 7,5
2 x 3,3 17
118
133
62
3
3.1
(1) 2x5,3x6,3
=
Surface mounting enclosure GV2-MC0i For GV2-ME
147
84
93
(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable glands or n 16 conduit Flush mounting enclosure GV2-MP0i (bracket cut-out) For GV2-ME GV2-MP0i GV2-MP01, MP02 GV2-MP03, MP04
a
127
140
9,5 117
6,5
=
1...6 12 a1 = 93,5 106,5 = 71 93
130
=
GV2MP01, MP02 MP03, MP04
a 71 71
a1 86
133
GV2-L
GV-AD, AM, AN, AU, AS Block GV-AD, AM, AN Block GV-AU, AS

=
GV2-AK00
14 98 32
89
X1
45 44,5
X2
26 15
50 82
= 9,3
61
9,3 81 (1)
18
44,5
3
3.1
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V. X2 = 40 mm. Mounting of GV2-L On mounting rail AM1-DE200, On panel AM1-ED200 (35 x 15)
(1) Maximum.
Adaptor plate GK2-AF01 On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA AF1-EA4

55
35
44,5
135
45 35
84
84
106
44,5
13,5
45
13,5
24
9,5
54
7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1-F03

39
13
35
GV2-LE
GV-AD, AM, AN, AU, AS Block GV-AD, AM, AN Block GV-AU, AS

=
GV-AE
X1
15 10
89
45
X1
7,5 12,5
16
44 66
44,5
9,3
9,3 81 (1)
18
(1) Maximum. X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue 690 V. Mounting of GV2-LE On 35 mm 7 rail On panel with adaptor plate GV2-AF02

AF1-EA4
On mounting rails DZ5-MB201

GV2-AF02
4,2 44,5
DZ5-MB201 DZ5-ME8
50/60
50/60
50 15 35
44,5
84,5
35
35
c = 80 on AM1-DP200 (35 x 7.5) c = 88 on AM1-DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)
60
Mounting of external operator GV2-AP01 or GV2-AP02 for GV2-L
65
1,5...5 53 135284 6 5,2 = =
Mounting of external operator GV2-AP03 for GV2-LE
12,3
3
65 13
3.1
1,5...5 53 133282 6
= =
Door cut-out
4x3,5 43
= = 54 =
54
Dimensions, mounting (continued)
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2-ME, GV2-P, GV2-L, GV2-LE, GV2-RT
Sets of busbars GV2-G445, GV2-G454, GV2-G472, with terminal block GV2-G05

a l
3 18
63
GV2-G445 (4 x 45 mm) GV2-G454 (4 x 54 mm) GV2-G472 (4 x 72 mm) No. of tap-offs GV2-G445 GV2-G454 GV2-G472
l 179 206 260 a 5 224 260 332
p 45 54 72 6 269 314 404 7 314 368 476 8 359 422 548
45
Sets of busbars GV2-Gppp with terminal block GV1-G09

GV1-G09
Sets of busbars GV2-G245, GV2-G254, GV2-G272

l
3
3.1
30
GV2-G245 (2 x 45 mm) GV2-G254 (2 x 54 mm) GV2-G272 (2 x 72 mm) Set of busbars GV2-G554

260
l 89 98 116
Sets of busbars GV2-G345 and G354

l
GV2-G345 (3 x 45 mm) GV2-G354 (3 x 54 mm) Dimensions of GV2-RT

X1
l 134 152
Mounting of external operator GV2-AP03

12,3
89
12,5
66
X1
7,5
16
44
44,5
45
65
1,5...5 53 133282 6
= =
X1: Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue < 690 V Mounting of GV2-RT on 35 mm 7 rail c = 80 on AM1-DP200 (35 x 7.5) c = 88 on AM1-DE200, ED200 (35 x 15) On panel with adapter plate GV2-AF02 On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA On mounting rails DZ5-MB
GV2-AF02
13
4,2
44,5
AF1-EA4
DZ5-MB201 DZ5-ME8
50/60
50/60
50 15 35
44,5
35
84,5
35
60
Schemes
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2-ME, GV2-P and GV2-RT
GV2-MEpp and GV2-RT

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
GV2-Ppp
1/L1 3/L2 4/T2 5/L3 6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Current limiter GV1-L3
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts GV-AE1

or
2/T1
GV-AE11
GV-AE20
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
13
13
13
11
14
22
14
14
12
24
23
3
3.1
Side mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts GV-AD0110 GV-AD0101
GV-AD1010
21
GV-AD1001
95
95
53
51
97
53
97 98
96
96
54
52
98
54
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts GV-AN11

(61) 31 43 (73)
GV-AN20
(63) 33 43 (73)
Short-circuit signalling contacts GV-AM11

08 06
(62) 32
44 (74)
(64) 34
44 (74)
Voltage trips GV-AUppp
GV-ASppp
GV-AXppp
D1 D2
D1
D2
C2
C1
E1
Use of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact

GV-AM11 GV-AD10pp
Connection of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2-ME only
10 Agl max
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
D1
Trip signalling
N/C or N/O Start-Stop contact
D2
Short-circuit signalling
E2
05
E2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
E1
52
51
Schemes
GV2-Lpp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
GV2-LEpp
1/L1 3/L2 4/T2 5/L3 6/T3
6/T3
2/T1
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts GV-AE1 GV-AE11
or
4/T2
2/T1
GV-AE20
3
3.1
11
13
13
21
13 14
12
14
14
22
Side mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts GV-AD0110 GV-AD0101
GV-AD1010
24
23
GV-AD1001
95
53
95
51
97
53
97 98
96
54
96
52
98
54
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts GV-AN11

(61) 31 43 (73)
GV-AN20
(63) 33 43 (73)
Short-circuit signalling contacts GV-AM11

08 06
(62) 32
44 (74)
(64) 34
44 (74)
Voltage trips GV-AUppp
GV-ASppp
D1
D2
C2
C1
05
52
51
Schemes
for special applications
Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuit-breakers types GV2-ME, GV2-P, GV2-L, GV2-LE, GV2-RT
Single-phase or d.c. motor GV2-ME, GV2-P

L N
Star-delta starter GV2-L, GV2-LE + separate overload

L1 L2 L3
Star-delta starter GV2-ME, GV2-P

L1 L2 3 L3
-F1
-F1
-F1
>
2 4
>
6
>
2
>
4
>
6
>
2
>
4
>
6 5
>
-KM2
2 4 6
-KM3
2 4 6
-KM1
2 4 6
-KM2
-KM3
-KM1
W1
M
W2 U2 V2
-F2
2 4 6
M
W2 U2 V2
W1
U1
U1
V1
V1
3
3.1
Single-phase transformer GV2-RT

N L
Three phase transformer GV2-RT

L1 L2 L3
-F1
-F1
>
2 4
>
6
>
2
>
4
>
6
>
Characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1
Approvals
CSA, UL, LROS
Protective treatment Degree of protection conforming to IEC/EN 60529 Basic unit In enclosure
TC IP 20 GV3-CE01: IP 55 22 gn - 20 ms 2.5 gn (025 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 960 3000 0.5 Yes, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2
Shock resistance to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Vibration resistance to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Ambient air temperature Storage C Operation Open mtd. C In enclosure C
Temperature compensation to IEC/EN 60947-4-1
Open mtd. C In enclosure C
3.2
Flame resistance to IEC/EN 60695-2-1 C Maximum operating altitude Resistance to mechanical impact Sensitivity to phase failure m J
Circuit-breaker type Utilisation category, 60947-2 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Rated operational voltage (Ue) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) to IEC/EN 60947-2 to CSA C22-2 n 14, UL 508 GV3-ME06ME25 A AC-3 V V V
600 600 600 (B600)
GV3-ME40ME63
GV3-ME80
Rated operational frequency conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Hz Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 kV Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical durability (C.O.: closing, opening) Electrical durability for AC-3 duty 440 V In/2 440 V In W C.O. C.O. C.O.
50/60 6 3 100,000 100,000 6 50,000 50,000 25 4063 8 30,000 30,000 25 80
Duty class (maximum operating rate)
C.O./h 25 1.625
Maximum conventional rated thermal A current (Ith) to IEC/EN 60947-4-1
Rated duty to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Continuous duty (1) For operation up to 70 C, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Schemes: page 3/62
Characteristics
Breaking capacity of GV3-ME

Circuit-breaker type GV3ME06 and ME07 A 1.6 and 2.5 ME08 ME10 ME14 ME20 ME25 ME40 ME63 ME80
Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1) Associated fuses (if required) if Isc > breaking capacity Icu 230/240 V aM gG 400/415 V aM gG 440 V aM gG 500 V aM gG 690 V aM gG
10
16
25
40
63
80
kA
100 100
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 4 100
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 4 100
100 100 100 100 25 100 8 100 4 100
100 100 100 50 25 60 8 100 4 100
100 100 100 50 25 60 8 100 4 100
100 100 35 50 25 60 8 75 4 75
100 100 35 50 25 60 8 75 4 75
100 100 15 50 10 60 4 100 2 100
kA
100 100
kA
100 100
3.2
kA
100 100
kA
100 100
A A A A A A A A A A
g g g g g g g g g g
g g g g g g g g 40 50
g g g g g g g g 50 63
g g g g 125 160 80 100 80 100
g g g g 160 200 100 125 100 125
g g g g 200 250 125 160 125 160
g g 250 315 250 315 160 200 160 200
g g 315 400 315 400 200 250 200 250
g g 315 400 315 400 200 250 200 250
g Fuses not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc. (1) As % of Icu.
Curves

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves

Average operating time at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current.
Time (s) 10 000
3
1000
3.2
100
1
10
2 4
0,1
0,01
0,001 1 10 100 X setting current (Ir)
1 2 3 4
3 poles from cold state, 1.616 A rating 3 poles from hot state , 1.616 A rating 3 poles from cold state, 2580 A rating 3 poles from hot state, 2580 A rating
Schemes: page 3/62
Curves


3-phase 400/415 V. Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
1
= 0.2 5
3
2
3 =
3 4
0.
0.
10
= 0. 7
5 6 7
3.2
0.
8
9 = 0.
10
11
0,1 0,1
10
15
1 2 3 4 5 6
Maximum peak current 5680 A 4063 A 2540 A 1625 A 1016 A
7 8 9 10 11
610 A 46 A 2.54 A 1.62.5 A 11.6 A
Curves (continued)


Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of l2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s) 100
3
1 2 3 4 5
3.2
10
0,1 0,1
10
15
1 2 3 4 5
5680 A 4063 A 2540 A 1625 A 1016 A
6 7 8 9
610 A 46 A 2.54 A 1.62.5 A
Schemes: page 3/62
Technical characteristics (continued)

Tripping on phase failure Cable protection against thermal stress in the event of short-circuit Conforming to IEC 292-1 7-5-3-2-2 PVC insulated copper cables Yes GV3ME06 to ME08 Ir Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 C at Isc max 1 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 A mm2 mm2 mm
2
ME10
ME14 ME20
ME25
ME40
ME63
ME80
1.64 6
10
16
25
40
63
80
i i
i i i
i i i
i i i
i i i
i i i
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
3.2
protected not protected
25
Voltage trip characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14. UL 508 Pick-up voltage Drop-out voltage Inrush consumption Sealed consumption Operating time (1) On-load factor Cabling Number of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end mm2 mm2 mm2 1 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 ms V V 690 600 (B600) c 0.81.1 Un 0.70.35 Un 12 VA. 7 W 7 VA. 2.5 W GV3-B: 10. GV3-D: 15 100 %
(1) From the disappearance of Ue at the trip terminals to opening of the GV3.
Characteristics
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV3-ME Auxiliary contacts
Contact type Rated insulation voltage (Ui) to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 to CSA C22-2 n 14, UL 508 Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 to CSA C22-2 n14, UL 508
Instantaneous auxiliary GV3-A01 to A07 V V 690 600 (B600)
Fault signalling GV3-A08 and A09 690 600 (B600)
A A
6 5 (B600)
6 5 (B600) 1000
Mechanical durability Operational power and current conforming to IEC 337-1 a.c. operation
C.O. 100,000
V Operational power Occasional breaking and making capacities Operational current (Ie) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 337-1 d.c. operation Operational power Occasional breaking and making capacities Operational current (Ie) Short-circuit protection conforming to IEC 337-1 Contact operation VA VA A
48
110 127
220 240
380 415
440
500
690 400
48
110 127
220 240
380 415
440
500 450
690 200
AC-11/100 000 C.O. (Closing-Opening) 350 500 800 850 700 700 4000 6
AC-11/1000 C.O. (Closing-Opening) 240 460 800 850 450
3.2
12,000 20,000 20,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 2400
8000 12,000 15,000 12,000 12,000 8000 3.6 3.5 2.2 1 1 0.3
4.5
3.5
2.2
1.5
1.5
0.6
V W W A
24
48
60
110
220
24
48
60
110
220
DC-11/100 000 C.O. (Closing-Opening) 180 240 180 140 120 240 6 360 5 240 3 210 1.3 180 0.5
DC-11/1000 C.O. (Closing-Opening) 120 120 90 70 60 180 5 180 2.5 135 1.5 105 0.7 90 0.3
By GB2-CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max
By GB2-CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max GV3-A08 and A09 change state following tripping on short-circuit or overload
0 Power poles: N/C N/O N/O N/O N/C N/O N/O N/O N/O N/O N/O N/O
GV3-A01, A07 GV3-A02 GV3-A03 GV3-A05 GV3-A06
Contact: Open Closed
Type of contacts Cabling Number of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end
Instantaneous auxiliary GV3-A01 to A07 1 mm2 12.5 mm2 0.752.5 mm2 0.752.5 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5
Fault signalling GV3-A08 and A09 1 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5
Schemes: page 3/62
References
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV3-ME with screw clamp terminals

Pushbutton control Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V 660/690 V P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) P Icu kW kA kW kA kW kA 0.37 100 0.55 100 100 100 0.37 100 0.55 100 0.75 100 100 100 100 0.75 100 1.1 100 Setting range of thermal trips Ics (1) A 100 100 11.6
GV3-ME06
Reference
Weight
kg 0.600
GV3-ME20
0.75 100
100
1.1
100
100
1.5
100
100
1.62.5
GV3-ME07
0.600
1.1 1.5
100 100
100 100
1.5 2.2
100 100
100 100
2.2 3
4 4
100 100
2.54
GV3-ME08
0.600
3.2
2.2 100 100 3 100 100 4 4 100 46
GV3-ME10
0.600
3 4
100 100
100 100
4 5.5
8 8
100 100
5.5 7.5
4 4
100 100
610
GV3-ME14
0.600
7.5
100
50
100
9 11
4 4
100 100
1016
GV3-ME20
0.600
9 11
100 100
50 50
11 15
8 8
100 100
15 4 18.5 4
100 100
1625
GV3-ME25
0.600
15 35 18.5 35
50 50
18.5 8 22 8
75 75
22 30
4 4
75 75
2540
GV3-ME40 (2)
0.700
22 30
35 35
50 50
30 37
8 8
75 75
37 45
4 4
75 75
4063
GV3-ME63 (2)
0.700
37
15
50
45
100
55
100
5680
GV3-ME80 (2)
0.700
(1) As % of Icu. (2) Recommended for use in association with a contactor.
References
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV3-ME Accessories
For thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV3-ME

Description Voltage trips (1) Characteristics Undervoltage trips 110, 120, 127 V 50 Hz 120, 127 V 60 Hz 220, 240 V 50 Hz 240, 277 V 60 Hz 380, 415 V 50 Hz 480 V 60 Hz Shunt trips 110, 120, 127 V 50 Hz 120, 127 V 60 Hz 220, 240 V 50 Hz 240, 277 V 60 Hz 380, 415 V 50 Hz 480 V 60 Hz Normal early break type contacts N/C + N/O N/O + N/O N/C + N/O + N/O N/O + N/O + N/O N/O+N/O + 2 spare volt free terminals N/C+N/O + 2 spare volt free terminals Fault signalling contacts (1) Padlocking device for Start button GV3-CE01 N/C N/O Sold in Unit lots of reference 1 1 1 1 1 1 GV3-B11 GV3-B22 GV3-B38 GV3-D11 GV3-D22 GV3-D38 Weight kg 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 Weight kg 0.060 0.060 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.030 0.030 0.010
GV3-Bii
3
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (1 per breaker)
Sold in Unit lots of reference 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 GV3-A01 GV3-A02 GV3-A03 GV3-A05 GV3-A06 GV3-A07 GV3-A08 GV3-A09 GV1-V02
GV1-A01
3.2
Metal enclosure
Application For MCB up to 30 A with or without accessories Type Surface mounting Degree of protection of enclosure IP 55 Reference GV3-CE01 Weight kg 2.000
Enclosure accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description Sealing membrane (2) For < 5 C (silicone) Sold in Reference lots of 10 1 1 Key release (key n 455) 1 Turn to release 1 GV1-EA02 GV1-V01 GV1-K01 GV1-K02 GV1-K03 Weight kg 0.012 0.044 0.052 0.095 0.052 0.020
GV1-V01
IP 55 padlocking device for operators (when padlocked, the motor circuit is automatically in the Open (OFF) position) Stop pushbutton 40 mm, red mushroom head (supplied with IP 55 sealing kit) Spring return Latching
Sealing screw for enclosure cover 1 DE1-DS4091 (1) 1 voltage trip OR 1 fault signalling contact to be fitted inside the motor circuit breaker. (2) Spare part. GV1-K01 Other versions Voltage trips from 24 to 690 V 50 or 60 Hz. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Schemes: page 3/62
Motor circuit-breaker GV3-ME
Mounting on rail AM1-DE200 or AM1-ED201
17,3 4,5
X1
20
2x4 (1)
100110
120
70
X1
22
75 113
5,5
21,2 61,2
45
70,4
122,5
X1 = Electrical clearance (breaking at Isc max) Mounting on panel
40 mm for Ue < 500 V 50 mm for Ue = 690 V
(1) Auxiliary contact blocks GV1-A01 to A07 on pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA
3.2
AF1-EA4
2x4
100110
113
20 20 21,2 61,2
113
20
Surface mounting enclosure GV3-CE01
(1)
312
195
4x7,7
(2)
150 154,4
105 181
312
(1) 1 x 21 mm and 1 x 37.5 blanking plugs for cable entries (2) 1 x 21 mm and 2 x 37.5 blanking plugs for cable entries
100110
Schemes
Motor circuit-breakers GV3-MEi
1/L1
3/L2 4/T2
Auxiliary contact blocks GV3-A01 GV3-A02

13 21
13 23
2/T1
6/T3
5/L3
GV3-A03
13 23 31
GV3-A05
13 23 33
GV3-A06
13 23 33
GV3-A07
23 24 13 31 32
14
24
14
22
14
24
32
14
24
34
34
14
3.2
Fault signalling contacts GV3-A08 GV3-A09
95
24
96
Voltage trips GV3-B GV3-D

D1
D2
C2
C1
98
97
14
Characteristics
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV7-R
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Degree of protection conforming to IEC/EN 60529 Ambient air temperature storage operation Temperature compensation Maximum operating altitude Operating position IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, NF C 63-650, 63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660 DNV, UL TC IP 405 with terminal shields
C C C
m
- 55+ 95 - 25+ 70 - 25+ 55 (For use up to 70 C, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608) 2000
90
90
90
90
Suitability for isolation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 7-1-6 Vibration resistance Sensitivity to phase failure
Yes 2.5 gn at 25 Hz Yes, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2
3.3
Cabling characteristics
Connection to bars, cables with lugs or bare cables
e
Circuit-breaker type Pitch without spreaders with spreaders Bars or cables with lugs mm mm e mm L mm d mm Screws Tightening torque Bare cables (copper or aluminium) with connectors c.s.a. Tightening torque N.m h mm mm2 N.m
GV7-Ri20GV7-Ri100 35 45 6 25 10 M6 10 20 1.595 15
GV7-Ri150 35 45 6 25 10 M8 15 20 1.595 15
GV7-Ri220 35 45 6 25 10 M8 15 20 1.5185 15
Circuit-breaker type GV7RE20RE100 Utilisation category conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Rated operational voltage (Ue) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 V V Hz kV A AC-3 690 750 50/60 8 RS20RS100 RE150 A AC-3 690 750 50/60 8 RS150 RE220 A AC-3 690 750 50/60 8 RS220
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Rated operational frequency (1) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close, Open)
W C.O.
5 50,000
8.7 40,000
14.5 20,000
3.3
Electrical durability 440 V In/2 440 V In Rated duty conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Type C.O. C.O. 50,000 30,000 Continuous duty GV7RE20RE100 Rating Breaking capacity conforming to 230/240 V IEC/EN 60947-2 Icu Ics % (2) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (2) 440 V Icu Ics % (2) 500 V Icu Ics % (2) 690 V Icu Ics % (2) kA kA kA kA A kA RS20RS100 RE150 90150 85 100 35 100 35 100 30 100 8 100 RS150 90150 100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100 RE220 132220 85 100 35 100 35 100 30 100 8 100 RS220 132220 100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100 40,000 20,000 Continuous duty 20,000 10,000 Continuous duty
2540 to 60100 85 100 25 100 25 100 18 100 8 100 100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100
(1) GV7-R circuit breakers are not recommended for use with variable speed controllers or soft start units. (2) as % of Icu
Schemes: page 3/81
Curves
Current limiting curves

The current limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves which give, as a function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flow if no protection devices were installed): - the actual peak current (limited), - the thermal stress (in A2s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a conductor with a resistance of 1. Example: the real value of a 70 kA prospective short-circuit current limited by a GV7-RS220 is 20 kA peak, see page 3/67.
Permissible thermal stresses for cables (A2s) S (mm2) PVC 1.5 Cu 2.97x104 Al PRC 2.5 8.26x104 1.39x105 4 2.12x105 5.41x105 2.92x105 7.52x105 6 4.76x105 1.39x106 6.56x105 1.93x106 10 1.32x106 3.38x106 1.82x106 4.70x106 16 3.4x106 6.64x106 4.69x106 9.23x106 25 8.26x106 1.35x107 1.39x107 1.88x107 35 1.62x107 2.23x107 50 3.31x107 4.56x107
Cu 4.10x104 Al
Example 1: for a GV7-RS220, the peak value is limited to 20 kA for a prospective Isc of 40 kA. Example 2: for a GV7-RS220, and with a prospective Isc of 40 kA, an I2t of 7x105 A2s is obtained, which requires the use of a PVC insulated copper cable with a c.s.a. of 10 mm2.
3.3
Curves

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV7-R

Average operating time at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current
Time (s) 10 000
5000
2000 1000 500
200 100 50
3.3
20 10 5
1
2
2
1 0,5
3
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,02 0,01 0,005
0,002 0,001 1 1,12 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100

x setting current (Ir)
1 Curve from cold state 2 Curve from hot state 3 1214 Ir In the event of total phase failure, tripping occurs after 4 s 20 %
Schemes: page 3/81
Curves (continued)


3-phase 400/415 V Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) For GV7-RE only
100 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
1 2 3
10 8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10
3.3
1 2 3
20 30 40 50 60 70 100
Prospective Isc (kA)
GV7-RE220 GV7-RE150 GV7-RE100
For GV7-RS only

100 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
1 2 3
10 8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10
1 2 3
20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
GV7-RS220 GV7-RS150 GV7-RS100
Curves (continued)


3-phase 400/415 V Thermal limit Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) For GV7-RE only
Sum of I2dt (A2s)
107
5x106 3x106
2x106
106
1
5x10
5
2 3
3x10
2x105
105
3.3
5x104 3x104 2x104 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
1 2 3
GV7-RE220 GV7-RE150 GV7-RE100
For GV7-RS only

Sum of I2dt (A2s)
107
5x106 3x106 2x106
106
1
5x105 3x10
5
2 3
2x105
105
5x104 3x10
4
1 2 3
2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
GV7-RS220 GV7-RS150 GV7-RS100
2x104
Schemes: page 3/81
Curves (continued)


3-phase 690 V Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) For GV7-RE only
40
30
3
20
1 2
10
8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)
3.3
1 2
GV7-RE220 GV7-RE150 and GV7-RE100
For GV7-RS only

40
30
20
1 2
10
8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)
1 2
GV7-RS220 GV7-RS150 and GV7-RS100
Curves (continued)


3-phase 690 V Thermal limit Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) For GV7-RE only
Sum of I2dt (A2s) 6 3x10
2x10
3
10
6
5x105
1 2
3x105
3.3
2x105
1 2
105 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)
GV7-RE220 GV7-RE150 and GV7-RS100
For GV7-RS only

Sum of I2dt (A2s)
3x10
2x106
106
5x105
1 2
3x105
2x105
1 2
105 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)
GV7-RS220 GV7-RS150 and GV7-RS100
Schemes: page 3/81
Characteristics
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV7-R Electric releases
Type
GV7-AU
GV7-AS
GV7-AD
Characteristics of electric releases

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Operational voltage conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Drop-out voltage V 690 690 690
0.851.1 Un
0.71.1 Un
0.851.1 Un
0.350.7 Ue
0.20.75 Ue
Inrush consumption
VA
< 10
< 10
<5
<5
Sealed consumption
VA
<5
<5
<5
<5
3.3
Operating time conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Pulse duration ms < 50 < 50
ms
50
Rated operational current
On-load factor
100 %
100 %
Cabling Solid cable
mm2 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1 conductor 1.2 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1 conductor 1.2
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Mechanical durability (C.O.: Closing-Opening) mm2 N.m C.O.
50 % of the mechanical durability of the circuit-breaker
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV7-R Auxiliary contacts
Type
GV7-AE11
GV7-AB11

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) (associated insulation coordination) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Mechanical durability (C.O.: Closing-Opening) Operational current conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 a.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) V V 690 690
A C.O.
6 50,000
6 50,000
AC-12 or AC-15. 50,000 C.O. 24 48 110 230/ 240 6 4 380/ 415 6 3 440 690
AC-12 or AC-15. 50,000 C.O. 24 48 110 230/ 240 5 3 380/ 415 5 2.5 440 690
Rated operational current (Ie) AC-12 A AC-15 A Operational current conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 d.c. operation
6 6
6 6
6 5
6 3
6 0.1
5 5
5 5
5 4
5 2.5
5 0.1
DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O. V 24 2.5 1 17 5 48 2.5 0.2 110 0.8 0.5 250 0.3 0.03
DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O. 24 2 0.5 12 5 48 2 0.1 110 0.5 0.25 250
3.3
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational current (Ie) DC-12 A DC-14 A Minimum operational conditions d.c. operation V mA Short-circuit protection
By GB2-CBpp circuit-breaker (rating according to operational current for Ue 415 V) or gG fuse, 10 A max.
Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end
mm2 mm2 mm2
1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor
1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor
Schemes: page 3/81
References
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV7-R with screw clamp terminals

Control by rocker lever Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V 660/690 V P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) P Icu kW kA kW kA kW kA 7.5 9 GV7-RE 7.5 9 9 11 9 11 70 70 25 25 70 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 9 11 11 15 11 15 50 50 18 18 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 11 15 10 10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 1220
GV7-RS20
Setting range of thermal trips Ics (1) A 100 100 1220
Reference
Weight
kg
GV7-RE20
25 25
100 100
9 11
18 18
100 100
11 15
8 8
2.010
2.010
3
1525
GV7-RE25
15 8 18.5 8 15 10 18.5 10 22 8
2.010
1525
GV7-RS25
2.010
18.5 25
18.5 18 22 18 18.5 50
2540
GV7-RE40
2.010
18.5 70 GV7-RS 22 25
100
22
10
100
2540
GV7-RS40
2.010
3.3
100 30 18 100 30 8 100 3050
GV7-RE50
2.015
22
70
100
30
50
100
30
10
100
3050
GV7-RS50
2.015
37
25
100
45 55 45 55
18 18 50 50 18
100 100 100 100 100
55
100
4880
GV7-RE80
2.040
37
70
100
55
10
100
4880
GV7-RS80
2.040
45
25
100
75
100
60100
GV7-RE100
2.040
45
70
100
50
100
75
10
100
60100
GV7-RS100
2.040
55 75 55 75 90 110 90 110
35 35 70 70 35 35 70 70
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
75 90 75 90 110 132 160 110 132 160
30 30 50 50 30 30 30 50 50 50
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
90 110 90 110 160 200 160 200
8 8 10 10 8 8 10 10
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
90150
GV7-RE150
2.020
90150
GV7-RS150
2.020
132220
GV7-RE220
2.350
132220
GV7-RS220
2.350
(1) As % of Icu.
3 2 1
GV7-AE11, AB11
3.3
GV7-RE, RS
GV7-AU, AS
3/74
References
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV7-R with screw clamp terminals Accessories
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks

They allow remote indication of the circuit-breaker contact states. They can be used for signalling, electrical locking, relaying, etc. Two versions are available: standard and low level. They include a terminal block and the auxiliary circuits leave the circuit-breaker through a hole provided for this purpose. They perform the following functions, depending on where they are located in the circuit-breaker: Location 1 and/or 4 2 Function C/O contact Trip indication Application Indicates the position of the circuit-breaker poles Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an overload, a short-circuit, a differential faul or the operation of a voltage trip (undervoltage or shunt trip or of the push to trip test button. It resets when the circuit-break is reset. Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an overload, a short-circuit or a differential fault. It resets when the circuit-breaker is reset.
Reference GV7-AE11 GV7-AB11 Weight kg
3 Type Standard Low level
Electrical fault indication
0.015 0.015
Fault discrimination devices

They make it possible to: - either differentiate a thermal fault from a magnetic fault, - or open the contactor only in the event of a thermal fault. Voltage a 24...48 and c 2472 V z 110240 V Reference
GV7-AD111 (1) GV7-AD112 (1) Weight kg
3.3
0.100 0.100
Electric trips
These allow the circuit-breaker to be tripped via an electrical control signal. p Undervoltage trip GV7-AU - Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage drops below the tripping threshold, which is between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage. - Circuit-breaker closing is only possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage. Circuit-breaker tripping by a GV7-AU trip meets the requirements of IEC/EN 60947-2. p Shunt trip GV7-AS Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 times the rated voltage. p Operation (GV7-AU or GV7-AS) - When the circuit-breaker has been tripped by a GV7-AU or AS, it must be reset either locally or by remote control. (For remote control, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). - Tripping has priority over manual closing: if a tripping instruction is present, manual action does not result in closing, even temporarily, of the contacts. - Durability: 50 % of the mechanical life of the circuit-breaker. Type Undervoltage trip Voltage 48 V, 50/60 Hz 110130 V, 50/60 Hz 200240 V, 50/60 Hz 380440 V, 50/60 Hz 525 V, 50 Hz
Reference GV7-AU055 (1) GV7-AU107 (1) GV7-AU207 (1) GV7-AU387 (1) GV7-AU525 (1) GV7-AS055 (1) GV7-AS107 (1) GV7-AS207 (1) GV7-AS387 (1) GV7-AS525 (1) Weight kg
0.105 0.110 0.110 0.105 0.100 0.105 0.110 0.110 0.105 0.100
Shunt trip
48 V, 50/60 Hz 110130 V, 50/60 Hz 200240 V, 50/60 Hz 380440 V, 50/60 Hz 525 V, 50 Hz (1) For mounting of a GV7-AD or a GV7-AU or AS.
ON
ON
OFF
GV7AP04
O
OFF
ON
GV7AP01, AP02
GV7RE, RS GV7AP03
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
GV7AP05
3.3
GV7AC04
GV7AC01
GV7V01
GV7AC021
GV7RE, RS
GV7AC03
GV7AC01
3/76
References
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV7-R with screw clamp terminals Accessories
Cabling accessories
Description Application For contactor
Sold in lots of 3 3 1 1 2
Unit reference
GV7-AC021 GV7-AC022 GV7-AC03 GV7-AC01 GV7-AC04
Weight kg 0.300 0.350 0.180 0.125 0.075
Clip-on connectors for GV7-R 3-pole spreader (1) Terminal shields IP 405 (1) Phase barriers Insulating screens
Up to 150 A, 1.595 mm2 Up to 220 A, 1.5185 mm2 To increase the pitch to 45 mm Supplied with the sealing accessory Safety accessories used when tting of shields is impossible Ensure insulation between the connections and the backplate
2 GV7-AC05
0.075
Kit for combination Allowing link between the with contactor circuit-breaker and the (2) contactor. The cover provides protection against direct nger contact.
LC1-F185 1 LC1-F225 1 and F265 LC1-D115 1 and D150
GV7-AC06 GV7-AC07 GV7-AC08
0.550 0.550 0.550
Direct rotary handle

Replaces the circuit-breaker front cover; secured by screws. It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). A conversion accessory allows the direct rotary handle to be mounted on the enclosure door. In this case, the door cannot be opened if the circuit-breaker is in the tripped position. Circuit-breaker closing is inhibited if the enclosure door is open Description Type Degree of Reference Weight protection kg Direct rotary handle Conversion accessory (3) Black handle, black legend plate IP 40 Red handle, yellow legend plate IP 40 For mounting direct rotary handle on enclosure door IP 43
GV7-AP03 GV7-AP04 GV7-AP05
3.3
0.205 0.205 0.100
Extended rotary handle

Allows a circuit-breaker installed in the back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. It comprises: - a unit which screws onto the front cover of the circuit-breaker, - an assembly (handle and front plate) to be tted on the enclosure door, - an extension shaft which must be adjusted (distance between the mounting surface and the door: 185 mm minimum, 600 mm maximum). It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). This prevents the enclosure door from being opened. Description Type Degree of Reference Weight protection kg Extended rotary handle Black handle, black legend plate IP 55 Red handle, yellow legend plate IP 55
GV7-AP01 GV7-AP02
0.775 0.775
Locking device
Allows circuit-breakers not fitted with a rotary handle to be locked in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Description Application Reference Weight kg
GV7-V01 0.100 For circuit-breaker not tted with a rotary handle (1) Terminal shields cannot be used together with spreaders. (2) The kit comprises links, a protective shield and a depth adjustable metal bracket for the breaker. (3) This conversion accessory makes it impossible to open the door if the device is closed and prevents the device from being closed if the door is open.
Locking device
Dimensions
Motor circuit-breakers GV7-R
Motor circuit-breakers with terminal shields or phase barriers GV7-R + GV7-AC01 or AC04 (2) (3) 35 = = = =
161
125
= 321 = 357
161 =
86 111 (1)
105
81
81
(2) Phase barriers: GV7-AC04 (3) Terminal shields: GV7-AC01
(1) 126 for GV7-Ri220
Safety clearance x2
3.3
x1 x1
Painted or insulated metal plate, insulation or insulated bar x1 0 x2 30
Bare metal U 440 V 5 35 plate 440 V < U < 600 V 10 35 U 600 V 20 35 Minimum distance between 2 circuit-breakers mounted side by side = 0
Combination of GV7-R and LC1-F with kit GV7-AC0i

c a
x2
GV7-R + LC1-F185 + GV7-AC06 GV7-R + LC1-F225 + GV7-AC07 GV7-R + LC1-F265 + GV7-AC07
a 119 131 130
b 338 358 364
c 188 188 215
Characteristics: page 3/63 to 3/72 3/78
Schemes: page 3/81
Mounting
On panel
On two DZ5-MB201 mounting rails
2x6
=
DZ5-ME5
135
35
35
35
125
15
35
Flush mounting 1 circuit-breaker GV7-R n circuit-breakers GV7-R side by side
125
47
76
108
= = 108
29
88
== 29
83
= 108
3.3
Combination of GV7-R and LC1-F with kit GV7-AC0i
7x10
GV7-R + LC1-F185 + GV7-AC06 GV7-R + LC1-F225 + GV7-AC07 GV7-R + LC1-F265 + GV7-AC07
E 48 57 60
G 85 85 85
H 120 120 120
Characteristics: page 3/63 to 3/72
Spreaders GV7-AC03
114 45 45
Cabling Smooth terminals 10,5 Connectors
Z
19
30
41
70
70
GV7-Ri40Ri150 GV7-Ri220
a 19.5 21.5
Direct rotary handle GV7-AP03, GV7-AP04
Flush mounting
45 73
DD
28
3.3
121 155
55 91
36
89
= 97
Direct rotary handle GV7-AP03 or GV7-AP04 with conversion accessory GV7-AP05
Front face cutout
Enclosure viewed from top
e = 1 to 3 max Extended rotary handle GV7-AP01, GV7-AP02
Door cutouts require a minimum distance between the centre of the circuit-breaker and the door hinge point 100 + (h x 5)
l: 185 min, 600 max The shaft of the extended rotary handle GV7-AP01 or GV7-AP02 must be cut to length: l 126 mm.
Characteristics: page 3/63 to 3/72 3/80
Schemes: page 3/81
29
60
47 76
60 I
Schemes
Motor circuit-breakers GV7-R

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Add-on auxiliary contacts according see pages 3/74 and 3/75 GV7-AE11, GV7-AB11 Location 1 Location 2 C/O contact Trip indication
14 12
to their location Location 3 Electrical fault indication

84 82
Location 4 C/O contact
94
92
24 21
11
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A self-adhesive label, supplied with the contact, can be affixed to the front face of the circuit-breaker to allow personalised marking according to the function of the contact or contacts
91
81
22
Electric releases GV7-AUiii

D1
3
GV7-ASiii
C1
GV7-AD111, AD112
97
50 ms
D4
C2
98
3.3
Recommended application schemes GV7-AD111, AD112 Fault signalling
Contactor opening on overload
97
KA1
98
14
98
13
50 ms
97
50 ms
Reset
23
Reset
24
KA1
A1 22
KA1
Overload fault
KA1
A2 (2)
(1)
A1
KM1
A2
Associated components KA1: CA2-KN or CAD-N
Associated components KA1: CAD-N + LA6-DK10 RHK KM1: LC1-D or LC1-F
(1) = E1 (2) = E2 (1) = B1 (2) = B2
Characteristics: page 3/63 to 3/72
Dimensions: page 3/78 to 3/80 3/81
21
Presentation, selection
Circuit-breakers
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers type GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment control circuits
Presentation
GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers protect and isolate the control circuits of industrial equipment with contactor coils, transformers. They protect and isolate single-phase auxiliary circuits such as solenoid valves, electro-brakes, battery chargers, supplied from the control circuit voltage. GB2-CB, GB2-CD, GB2-DB 12 ratings are available, from 0.5 to 20 A, in single-pole (GB2-CB), single-pole + neutral (GB2-CD) and 2-pole (GB2-DB) versions. All versions have a magnetic tripping threshold set at between 12 and 16 In to withstand the current peaks generated by many industrial components. GB2-CS 2 ratings are available, 0.5 and 1 A, in single-pole version. The magnetic tripping threshold is set between 5 and 7 In. Functions, installation Clip-on xing onto all types of 35 mm 5 rails, on 4 rails and on Telequick mounting plates. Upstream and downstream marking by means of AB1 clip-in markers. Clear indication of I and O positions on the operator. Tamper-proof device which requires no special maintenance (xed magnetic and thermal tripping thresholds).
Selection for the protection of circuits supplied by transformers

Single-phase transformers. Magnetising peak: 20 In. Operating of magnetic trips: 13 In. Power Primary (1) VA 220/240 V 380/415 V 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 GB2-DB05 GB2-DB05 GB2-DB06 GB2-DB07 GB2-DB07 GB2-DB08 GB2-DB10 GB2-DB14 GB2-DB20 GB2-DB21 GB2-DB22 GB2-DB22 GB2-DB05 GB2-DB05 GB2-DB05 GB2-DB06 GB2-DB06 GB2-DB07 GB2-DB08 GB2-DB09 GB2-DB14 GB2-DB14 GB2-DB20 GB2-DB20 GB2-DB21
3.4
Secondary 24 V GB2-CD07 GB2-CD08 GB2-CD10 GB2-CD14 GB2-CD16 GB2-CD22
48 V GB2-CD06 GB2-CD07 GB2-CD07 GB2-CD09 GB2-CD12 GB2-CD14 GB2-CD21
110 V GB2-CD05 GB2-CD06 GB2-CD06 GB2-CD07 GB2-CD08 GB2-CD09 GB2-CD12 GB2-CD16 GB2-CD22
220 V GB2-CD05 GB2-CD05 GB2-CD05 GB2-CD06 GB2-CD07 GB2-CD07 GB2-CD08 GB2-CD10 GB2-CD14 GB2-CD16 GB2-CD20 GB2-CD21 GB2-CD22
5000 GB2-DB22 (1) If the breaking capacity of the GB2 is insufcient, use a GV2-RT with 2 poles connected in series, see page 3/42.
Schemes: page 3/87
Characteristics
Circuit-breakers
GB2-CB
GB2-CD
GB2-DB
GB2-CS
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-2 ASE, CSA, NEMKO, OVE, UL Conforming to IEC/EN 60529 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Storage Operation Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-1 In relation to normal vertical mounting position C C C m ASE, NEMKO
Protective treatment Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Ambient air temperature around the device Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating position
TC IP 20 22 gn for 20 ms 5 gn (5110 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 3000
3 3
GB2-CB.CD, CS Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm2 mm2 N.m Minimum c.s.a. 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.75 1.2
GB2-DB Maximum c.s.a. 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5
Utilisation category Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational frequency Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical and electrical durability Operational current correction coefcient (a or c) Tripping threshold Tripping curves Average operating time at 20 C without prior current flow (cold state) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 To CSA C22-2 n 14 and UL 1077 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 V V Hz kV W C.O. C A 415 (1) 277 50/60 4 2 8000 - 20 - 10 1.2 1.15 1216 In GB2-CS
120 60 20 10 5 2 1 20 10 5 2 1 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8 1,5 10 100 x In
3.4 3.4
A 250 50/60 4 2 8000 A 415 277 50/60 4 2 8000 A 415 (1) 50/60 4 1.9 8000 + 50 + 60 0.85 0.80 57 In
C.O.: Close - Open According to the ambient temperature Correction coefcient Of the magnetic trips (1) One GB2 on each live conductor. GB2-CB, GB2-CD, GB2-DB
120 60 20 10 5 2 1 20 10 5 2 1 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8 1,5 10 100 x In
0 + 10 + 20 + 30 + 40 1.1 1.05 1 0.95 0.90 1216 In 1216 In
Minutes
Seconds
Presentation, selection: page 3/82
Milliseconds
Milliseconds
Seconds
Minutes
Circuit-breakers
Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V Icu
GB2A kA
CB05 0.5 50 100 kA 50 25 kA 50 25 A A A A A A g g g g g g CD05 A 0.5 50 100 kA 50 25 A A A A g g g g DB05 A 0.5 50 100 kA 50 25 kA 50 25 A A A A A g g g g g
CB06 1 50 50 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g CD06 1 50 50 50 25 g g g g DB06 1 50 50 50 25 50 25 g g g g g
CB07 2 15 50 15 25 15 25 20 25 16 25 16 25 CD07 2 15 50 15 25 20 25 16 25 DB07 2 15 50 15 25 15 25 20 25 16 25 16
CB08 3 10 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 CD08 3 10 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 DB08 3 10 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20
CB09 4 6 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 CD09 4 6 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 DB09 4 6 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20
CB10 5 3 75 2 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 CD10 5 3 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 DB10 5 3 75 2 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 32 40
CB12 6 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 CD12 6 3 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 DB12 6 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 32 40
CB14 8 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 CD14 8 3 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 DB14 8 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50
CB16 10 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 CD16 10 2 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 DB16 10 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50
CB20 12 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 CD20 12 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 DB20 12 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63
CB21 16 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 CD21 16 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 DB21 16 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 1.5 63 80 50 63 50 63
CB22 20 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 CD22 20 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 DB22 20 2 75 1.5 75 75 75 63 80 50 63 50 63
Ics % (1) 230/ 240 V 400/ 415 V Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1)
Associated fuses, 110 V if required if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to 230/ 240V IEC/EN 60947-2 400/ 415 V Type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V
aM gG aM gG aM gG GB2-
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
3.4
230/ 240 V
Icu Ics % (1)
Associated fuses, 110 V if required if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to 230/ 240V IEC/EN 60947-2 Type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V
aM gG aM gG GB2-
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
230/ 240 V 400/ 415 V
Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1)
Associated fuses, 110 V if required if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to 230/ 240V IEC/EN 60947-2 400/ 415 V
aM gG aM gG aM gG
A g g 25 32 32 (1) As % of Icu. g Fuse not required. Breaking capacity Icu > Isc.
Presentation, selection: page 3/82 3/84
Schemes: page 3/87
Characteristics
Circuit-breakers
Circuit-breaker type Breaking capacity (Icu) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 c Operational current DC-12 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 c DC-13
GB2-
pp05 kA kA A A A A 1.5 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
pp06 1.5 1 1 1 1 1
pp07 1.5 1 2 2 2 2
pp08 1.5 1 3 3 3 3
pp09 1.5 1 4 4 4 4
pp10 1.5 1 5 5 5 5
pp12 1.5 1 6 6 6 6 CS05
pp14 1.5 1 8 8 8 8
pp16 1.5 10 10 10
pp20 1.5 12 12 12 CS06 1 50 100 50 25 50 25 1.5 1 1 1 1 1
pp21 1.5 16 16 16
pp22 1.5 20 20 20
24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V
Type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz
GB2-
A 110 V 230/240 V 400/415 V (2) Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) 24 V 48 V DC-12 DC-13 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V kA kA kA kA kA A A A A V m m m m m m V m m m m m m V m m m m m m
0.5 50 100 50 25 50 25 1.5 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 31 39 52 78 130 200 110 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 230 365 460 610 910 1520 2400 230 230 290 390 580 970 1500 230 46 60 80 120 190 310
Breaking capacity (Icu) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2, c Operational current conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, c
Maximum permissible line length for star-delta starting (length of cable containing 2 or more conductors)
With contactors LCp-D09 to D18
Operational voltage C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2
48 6 8 10 15 26 41 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
110 85 110 145 220 360 580 110 56 70 95 140 230 375 110 13 17 22 34 56 90
230 230 290 380 570 950 1500 230 230 290 380 570 950 1500 230 100 130 170 250 420 680
3.4
Operational voltage C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2
Operational voltage C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2
4 mm2 (1) As % of Icu. (2) With one GB2-CS on each live conductor. (3) Use relays.
References
Circuit-breakers
Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 12 to 16 In

Single-pole Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 Single-pole + neutral Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 2-pole Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 52 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 52 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A
Sold in lots of 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Sold in lots of 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Sold in lots of 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Unit reference
Weight kg
GB2-CBpp
GB2-CB05 GB2-CB06 GB2-CB07 GB2-CB08 GB2-CB09 GB2-CB10 GB2-CB12 GB2-CB14 GB2-CB16 GB2-CB20 GB2-CB21 GB2-CB22 Unit reference
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 Weight kg
3.4
GB2-CDpp
GB2-CD05 GB2-CD06 GB2-CD07 GB2-CD08 GB2-CD09 GB2-CD10 GB2-CD12 GB2-CD14 GB2-CD16 GB2-CD20 GB2-CD21 GB2-CD22 Unit reference
0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 Weight kg
GB2-DBpp
0.5 6.6 1 14 2 26 3 40 4 50 5 66 6 83 8 108 10 138 12 165 16 220 20 270 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1.
GB2-DB05 GB2-DB06 GB2-DB07 GB2-DB08 GB2-DB09 GB2-DB10 GB2-DB12 GB2-DB14 GB2-DB16 GB2-DB20 GB2-DB21 GB2-DB22
0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115
Presentation, selection: page 3/82 3/86
Schemes: page 3/87
References, dimensions, schemes
Circuit-breakers
Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 5 to 7 In

Single-pole Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 3.3
Sold in lots of 6 6
Unit reference
Weight kg
GB2-CS05 GB2-CS06
0.055 0.055
1 6 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1.
Accessories for circuit-breakers GB2-CB, DB and CS

Description GB2-CSpp Busbar set for supply to 10 GB2-DB or 20 GB2-CB or GB2-CS with 2 connectors Supply connector
Sold in lots of 1
Unit reference
GB2-G210
Weight kg 0.100
10
GB2-G01
0.013
Dimensions
GB2-CBpp, GB2-CDpp, GB2-CSpp
82 82 75 79 67
15
74
3.4
GB2-DBpp
85 85 78 82 70
30
Marking: up to twelve AB1-R clip-in markers.
Schemes
GB2-CBpp GB2-CDpp
3/L2 (13)
GB2-DBpp
1/L1 3/L2
74
GB2-CSpp
1/L1
4/T2 (14)
1/L1
2/T1
2/T1
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
1/L1
Motor
starters
Motor
4/0
starters
Chapter 4
Motor starters
4.1
Open mounted starter components 4/2 to 4/15
4.2
GV2 combination starters 4/16 to 4/25
4.3
LEp-GB enclosed starters and enclosed contactors 4/26 to 4/31
4/1
Presentation
TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
Current 7
This method of starting is applicable to motors on which all 6 stator terminals are accessible and whose delta connection voltage corresponds to the mains voltage and frequency. Star-delta starting should be used for motors starting on no-load or having a low load torque and gradual build-up: - the starting torque in star connection is reduced to one third of the direct starting torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated torque; - the starting current in star connection is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated current. The transition from star to delta connection must occur when the machine has run up to speed. A too rapid build-up in load torque would cause the stabilised run-up speed to be too low and would therefore eliminate any advantage in this method of starting: this is the case with certain machines whose load torque depends on the machine speed (a characteristic of centrifugal machines, for example).
0,75 1 Speed
1
4
2
1
4
4.1
0,25
0,50
1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection
All star-delta starters are supplied with a special LAD-S2 or LA2-KT2p time delay relay which imposes a delay on the delta contactor during the transition period in order to allow the star contactor sufficient breaking time.
Torque 2,5
1
1,5
(1)
1
2
0,5
3
0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75
1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection 3 Machine resistive torque
1 Speed
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques. Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a proportion of the rated torque).
4/2
References

Star-delta starters for motor control 5.5 to 132 kW (1), pre-assembled
a
Weight
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage delta connection 220/ 380/ 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW kW
Auxiliary contacts available on each contactor line delta star KM2 KM3 KM1
Star delta mechanical interlock
kg
Plate mounted
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds. 4 5.5 LC3-D32App 11 15 18.5 30 37 63 75 7.5 11 18.5 25 37 55 75 110 132 7.5 11 22 30 37 59 75 110 132 7.5 11 22 30 37 59 75 110 147 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 1 1 1 1 1 With With With With With
LC3-D09App LC3-D12App (5) LC3-D18App (6) LC3-D32App LC3-D40ppA64 LC3-D50ppA64 LC3-D80ppA64 LC3-D115ppA64 (4) LC3-D150ppA64 (4)
1.530 1.530 1.730 2.030 4.500 4.500 5.400 12.100 12.100
4
4.1
(3) With (3) With (3) With 1 (3) With
Rail mounted (35 mm 7 rail)

Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds. 3 4 5.5 7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 7.5 1 1 With With
LC3-K06pp LC3-K09pp
0.740 0.740
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds. 4 5.5 11 15 7.5 11 18.5 25 7.5 11 22 30 7.5 11 22 30 (3) (3) (3) (3) 1 1 1 1 With With With With
LC3-D090App LC3-D120App LC3-D180App LC3-D320App
1.530 1.530 1.730 2.030
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of an overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current (see pages 2/112 and 2/113). (2) Control circuit voltages Volts a 50/60 Hz 24 36 42 48 110 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 Star-delta starters LC3-K06 and K09 Code B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 V7 N7 R7 Star-delta starters LC3-D09A...D150, LC3-D090AD320A Code B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 For other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD-N can also be tted, see page 2/85. (4) These starters consist of contactors LC1-D115 or D150 with lugs. (5) Line contactor (KM2) LC1-D18. (6) Line contactor (KM2) LC1-D25.
1b 1c
KM2
4
KM2
KM2
1d
4.1
1b
1c
1a
NB. For starter without mechanical interlock, see note (2) on next page.
4/4
References
TeSys open mounted starters and equipment

Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1), with mechanical interlock (2), for customer assembly (on plate or on mounting rail) (3)
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds Standard power ratings Contactors (basic references to be completed of squirrel cage motors (4) with code indicating the voltage) (5) Mains voltage-delta 220/ 380/ star 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V line delta kW kW kW kW KM2 KM3 KM1 4 5.5 11 15 18.5 30 37 63 7.5 11 18.5 25 37 55 75 110 7.5 11 22 30 37 59 75 110 132 7.5 11 22 30 37 59 75 110 147
LC1-D09pp LC1-D18pp LC1-D25pp LC1-D32pp LC1-D40pp LC1-D50pp LC1-D80pp LC1-D1156pp LC1-D1506pp Illustration item no. 1a LC1-D09pp LC1-D12pp LC1-D25pp LC1-D32pp LC1-D40pp LC1-D50pp LC1-D80pp LC1-D1156pp LC1-D1506pp For use on (6) D09D18 LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D18pp LC1-D40pp LC1-D40pp LC1-D80pp LC1-D1156pp LC1-D1156pp Reference LAD-91217 LAD-93217 LA9-D5018 LA9-D8018
Separate parts (see below)
Component types D09 D18 D25 D32 D40 D50 D80 D115 (6) D150 (6) Weight kg 0.180 0.310 0.480 0.680
75 132 Separate parts Description
4
4.1
Mounting kit comprising: - 1 time delay contact block LAD-S2 (D09D80) (3) (7) - power circuit connections (D09D80) - screws and clamps for xing contactors to the plate (D40D80) - terminal block (D09D32) - mechanical interlock
D25....D32
1b 1c 1d
D40 and D50 D80
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the rated motor current, see pages 2/112 and 2/113. (2) For starters without mechanical interlock, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (3) For mounting, assembly and cabling: refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment. (4) See comments on page 4/92. (5) See page 2/76. (6) For D115 and D150 components, see illustration and separate parts on pages 4/6 and 4/7. (7) When using d.c. coils, use an electronic Zelio timer relay such as: RE7YA12BU or RE7YR12BU.
11
10
12 3 5
4
4.1
(1) NOTE:
Contactors to be used have lug terminals, not clamp type illustrated
4/6
TeSys open mounted starters and equipment

Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1) for customer assembly (on plate or on mounting rail) (2)
Separate parts (continued)

Description Time delay auxiliary contact blocks or electronic timer Sealing kit for time delay auxiliary contact blocks Illustration For item no. use on 1 D115, D150 No. 1a
Sold in lots of 1
Unit reference LAD-S2 (2)
Weight kg 0.060
D115, D150
LA9-D901
0.005
3 Thermal magnetic circuit-breaker for control circuit (200415 V)
D115, D150
GB2-CB05
0.060
Set of 3 connectors for 4 wider terminations (optional) Set of power connections with xing accessories Mechanical interlock
5
D115, D150
LA9-FG980
0.200
D115, D150 D115
1 1 1
1
1
LA9-D15017 LA9-D11517(3) LA9-D11502
1.050
D115, D150
0.280
4
4.1
Spare volt free terminals
D115, D150
10
DZ3-HA3
0.007
10
DZ3-GA3
0.006
Lug-connector terminal block Terminal end stop
D115, D150
10
AB1-BC9535
0.236
D115, D150
100
AB1-AB8M35
0.005
Mounting rail 5 35 mm
10
D115, D150
10
AM1-ED021
0.210
Pre-slotted plate
11
D115, D150
AM3-PA65
1.950
Screw with captive washer 12
D115, D150
12
100
AF1-VA618
0.006
100
AF1-VA410
0.002
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the rated motor current, see pages 2/112 and 2/113. (2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment. (3) For use with 2 D115 and 1 D80.
4
4.1
* *
1
* See page 4/10
4/8
References
Motor starters
Star-delta starters for motor control, 63 to 375 kW, (1) for customer assembly (on chassis)
Contactors
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors (3) 220/230 V 380/400 V 415 V kW kW kW Contactors (2) line delta 440 V kW KM2 KM3 star KM1 Accessories (see below) Mechanical interlock (3)
Maximum operating rate : 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time : 20 seconds (3) 90 100 110 160 185 160 185 220 280 315 160 185 220 280 355 185 200 250 315 375 LC1-F185ii LC1-F225ii LC1-F265ii LC1-F330ii LC1-F400ii LC1-F185ii LC1-F225ii LC1-F265ii LC1-F330ii LC1-F400ii LC1-F185ii LC1-F225ii LC1-F265ii LC1-F330ii LC1-F400ii LA9-FG970 LA9-FG970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FJ970 LA9-FJ970
Accessories (4)
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks 2 N/O + 2 N/C Control relay Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Lead sealing kit Thermal magnetic circuit breaker for 5 A control circuit Sets of 3 connectors for wider terminals Sets of power connections Illustration For item no. use with 1 F185 to F400 No. 3 Sold in lots of 1 Unit reference LAD-N22 Weight kg 0.050
4
2 3 4 5 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 6 CAD-32 LAD-S2 LA9-D901 GB2-CB10 0.320 0.060
4.1
0.005 0.050
F185 F225 to F400
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
LA9-FG980 LA9-FJ980 LA9-FG600 LA9-F22500 LA9-FH600 LA9-FJ600
0.200 0.490 0.700 1.400 1.400 1.500
F185 F225 F265
F330 and F400 1
Set of 3 busbars for 8 F185 to F400 1 1 LA7-Fiii (Selected according to size thermal overload of thermal overload relay) see pages connections 2/228 and 2/229. (1) Protection must be provided by the addition of an overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate relay for setting at 0.58 the full load rated motor current, see pages 2/228 and 2/229. (2) Contactors supplied with coil. Complete the reference by adding the control circuit voltage code. Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 48 110 127 220/230 240 380/400 415 50 Hz E5 F5 G5 M5 U5 Q5 N5 60 Hz E6 F6 M6 Q6 50/60 Hz E7 F7 G7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, see pages 2/198 to 2/207. (3) If a mechanical interlock is not required, the star contactor can be reduced in rating. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (4) For longer starting times, please call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608. (5) For other accessories, see page 2/196.
15
13
11
18
16
4
4.1
17
14
* *
18 12
**
10
* See page 4/8
4/10
References
Motor starters
Star-delta starters for motor control, 63 to 375 kW, (1) for customer assembly (on chassis)
Accessories (continued from page 4/9)

Description Mechanical interlock Illustration For item no. use with 9 F115F44 No. 1 Sold in lots of 1 Unit reference Weight kg
Select the mechanical interlock from the contactor table shown on page 4/9. See note (2). DZ3-GA3 DZ3-HA3 AB1-BC9535 AB1-AB8P35 DZ3-HA3 AB1-BC15035 AB1-AB8M35 DZ3-JA3 AB1-BC24035 AB1-AB8M35 DZ3-JA3 LA9-F100 AM1-DE200 AM1-EC200 AM1-EC200 AF1-CD061 AF1-VA618 AF1-CD081 AF1-VC820 AF1-CD061 AF1-VA618 AF1-CD061 AF1-CD081 AF1-VA618 AF1-VC820 0.006 0.007 0.236 0.006 0.007 0.277 0.007 0.010 0.287 0.007 0.010 0.100 0.900 2.980 2.980 0.020 0.006 0.020 0.024 0.020 0.006 0.020 0.020 0.006 0.024
Spare volt free terminal
F185 F225F400
3 3 1 2 1
10 10 10 100 10 10 100 10 10 100 10 1 10 4 4 10 100
Neutral terminal with stop and spare volt free terminal (for control circuit)
10
F185
F225 & F265
1 2 1
F330 & F400
1 2 1
4
4.1
Reducer bracket Mounting rails (3)
11 12 13
F400 F185F400 F185F400 F185F400 F185F400
2 1 1 2 2
Uprights (3) 1/4 turn sliding nuts and bolts for mounting rail AM1-DE
14 15
1/4 turn sliding nuts and bolts for mounting rail AM1-EC
16
F185F400
10 10
1/4 turn sliding nuts and bolts for mounting equipment
17
F185F330
15
10 100
F400
10 10 100 10
4 H6 x 25 bolts with washers (1) Protection must be provided by the addition of an overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate relay for setting at 0.58 the full load rated motor current, see pages 2/228 and 2/229. (2) If the mechanical interlock is not required, the star contactor can be reduced in rating. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (3) Supplied in 2 m lengths. See page 4/14 for cutting to length.
Dimensions

Star-delta starters Plate mounted, pre-assemled LC3-K
Pre-assembled: LC3-D09AD32A For customer assembly: 3 x LC1-D with components D09 to D32
124
KM2
110
94
150 175
90 a
On starters LC3-D09A to D18A, a connection block is mounted on the upper part of contactor KM2, increasing the overall height of the product by 6.5 mm.
Pre-assembled: LC3-D40, D50 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1-D with components D40 or D50
LC3D09A D12A a 143 143 b 26.5 26.5 c with LAD-S 139 139 with LAD-S and sealing cover 143 143 Pre-assembled: LC3-D80 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1-D with components D80
110
110
KM3
KM1
D18A 165 32.5 145 149
D32A 165 32.5 145 149
4
143
100/110
= = =
4.1
45
175 (1) = 263 281 =
183 (1)
47
293 311
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover Pre-assembled: LC3-D115, D150 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1-D with components D115 or D150
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover
G a
LC3-D115 or 3 x LC1-D with components D115 LC3-D150 or 3 x LC1-D with components D150
a 450 450
b 555 555
c 205 205
G 425 425
H 526 526
Schemes: page 4/13
100/110
143
60
60
Dimensions, schemes

Star-delta starters On mounting rail AM1-DP, pre-assembled LC3-D090A to D320A

2x7
KM3 KM2 KM1
160 175
LC3b c with LAD-S with LAD-S and sealing cover Schemes LC3-K, LC3-D09A to D80 LC3-D090A to D320A
L1 L2 L3
D090A to D180A 153 139 143 LC3-K

KM3 : 5
D320 137 145 149 LC3-D

KM3/5
95
21 96
95
96
KM2 KM1 54 53
U1
W1
13
KM2
V1
14
53 13
14
Remote control
13 22
KM2
KM3
KM1
4
(13)
14
(1)
2 4 6
4.1
68
KM2 KM1 KM2 KM3
22
21
KM1
KM3
KM1
U1
W2
U2
V2
V1
W1
KM2
21 56
55 54 (14)
21
22
LC3-D115 and D150

F1 L1 L2 L3 2 4 6
U1
V1
W1
F1 21 96
153
KM2
6 2 4
KM3
6 2 4
KM1
W2 U2 V2 2 4 6
13
Remote control
l
22
95
KM1 184 154
KM2 68
14
67
U1
V1
W1
KM1
A1 162
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
55 183
KM2 161 56 153 13 KA1 A1 14 KM3 A2 A2 A1154
W2
U2
V2
KM3 A1
KM2
F2
KM1 A2
Y
KM2 A2
L
KA1
171
KM1
172
LC3-D09A to D18A mechanical interlock between KM3 and KM1 (1) Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end)
A1 16
KM3
A1 22
KM1
KM3
KM2
N KM3/1
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
KM2 : 1 (N)
A2
KM1
A1 21
W2
U2
V2
A1
A1
A1
A1
22 67
15
Dimensions
Motor starters
Star-delta starters
Chassis mounted For customer assembly : 3 x LC1-Fiii using separate components

c
G F1 F2
KM2
KM3
KM1
K3
K4
4
a
4.1
a 3 x LC1-Fiii with components F185 3 x LC1-Fiii with components F225 3 x LC1-Fiii with components F265 3 x LC1-Fiii with components F330 3 x LC1-Fiii with components F400 565 565 665 765 765
b 675 675 775 975 975
c 235 235 266 276 276
G 525 525 625 725 725
H 625 625 725 825 925
K 160 160 165 195 195
K1 110 110 110 140 140
K2 80 80 100 100 100
K3 110 110 110 110 180
K1
K2
K4 80 80 110 180 110
Schemes
Motor starters
Star-delta starters
Star-delta starters
F1 KM3:5 F1
21 96
95
L1
L2
L3
O
53
Remote control
13 22
U1
V1
W1
KM2
KM3
KM1
l
14
KM2
53 54 61
W1
W2
U1
V1
U2
V2
KM1
55 54
KM1
67 62 13
KM2
61 56
KM2
68
KA1
14
W2
U2
V2
KM3
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation. (Standard motor viewed from shaft end).
A162
A1
A1
F2 KM3:1
KM1
A2
KM2
A2
KA1
A2
KM3
A2
A1
4
4.1
Characteristics

Combination automatic motor starters
General
Combination automatic motor starters incorporate protection (thermal-magnetic circuit breaker) and switching (contactor) functions, either non-reversing (directon-line starter) or reversing (reversing starter). They conform to standard BSEN 60947-4-1. The selection criterion for motor starter component coordination gives first priority to the protection of personnel and takes into account equipment maintenance. Standard BSEN 60947 defines the permissible degree of deterioration for the equipment making up the motor starter. Type GV2-MEiiK GV2-DPiiD
Environment
Conforming to standards BSEN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1 NF C 63-110, 63-120, 63-130, 63-650, 79-130 VDE 0113, 0660 JEM 1038 Circuit breaker and contactor Standard version Storage For operation at Uc Temperature compensation Degree of protection Conforming to IEC/EN 60529 Conforming to VDE 0106 Flame resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-1 Contactor open Contactor closed Circuit breaker Vibration resistance 5150 Hz conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Contactor open Contactor closed Circuit breaker Operating position In relation to normal vertical fixing plane (fore-aft tilt) ASE, UL, CSA, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, FI TH
Product certifications Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device
C C C
- 40+ 80 -20+ 60 - 20+ 60 IP 20 Protection against direct finger contact
960 8 gn 11 gn 30 gn 2 gn 4 gn 5 gn
30
4.2
Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
30
90
90
3 0
30
90
90
Cabling Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable Tightening torque Sensitivity to phase failure Heat dissipation
Circuit breaker Contactor Circuit breaker Contactor Circuit breaker Contactor Circuit breaker Contactor To IEC/EN 60947-4-1, 7-2-1-5-2 Circuit breaker and contactor
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m N.m
Max 2x6 2x4 2x4 2 x 1.5 2x6 2x4 0.8 1.7 Yes
Min 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2x1 2 x 0.75 2x1 2x1
Max 2x6 2x6 2x4 2x4 2x6 2x6 1.85 1.7 Yes 1011
Min 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2x1 2x1 2x1 2 x 1.5
89
Schemes: page 4/25
Characteristics

Type
GV2-
MEiiK1
MEiiK2
DPiiD1
DPiiD2

Control voltage range 50 C 50/60 Hz coil a coil Consumption at 20 C and at Uc c 50/60 Hz Inrush Sealed a Inrush Sealed Operating time at 20 C and at Uc c 50/60 Hz N/O N/C a N/O N/C VA VA W W ms ms ms ms 0.81.15 Uc 0.71.3 Uc 30 4.5 1.5 1.5 515 1020 1020 1525 0.81.1 Uc 0.71.25 Uc 100 8.5 1.5 1.5 1524 519 50 15
Operational current in cat. AC-3 Rated operational current (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC/EN 60947 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947 Conforming to CSA 22-2 n 14 Rated operational frequency Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity Conforming to IEC/EN 60947 I rms I rms 220440 V 500 V 660690 V Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles In millions of operating cycles GV2Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 220/230 V 400/415 V 440 V 500 V Type Breaking capacity (Iq) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 GV2220/230 V 400/415 V 440 V 500 V (1) 130 kA with current limiter GV1-L3. kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA 50/60 Hz a Electrical durability in category AC-3 at Ie max and Ue = 415 V Type Breaking capacity (Iq) A V V V Hz A A A A 9 690 690 600 50/60 110 110 80 70 10 30 See Lii-K09 5 5 25 690 690 600 50/60 450 450 400 180 12 30 See Lii-D25 5 5
4.2
ME06Kiii ME07Kiii ME08Kiii ME10Kiii ME14Kiii 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 (1) 10 (4 kW) (1) 6 (5.5 kW) (1)
DP06Diii DP14Diii DP16Diii DP20Diii DP21Diii DP22Diii to DP10Diii 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 (1) 130 130 50 (1) 10 (1) 130 50 (1) 20 (1) 10 (1) 130 50 (1) 20 (1) 6 (1) 50 (1) 6 (1)
References

Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection, short circuit protection and pushbutton control
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: - 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2-ME, - 1 3-pole contactor, - 1 combination block GV2-AF01.
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (Iq) (1) To BSEN60947-4-1 GV2400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA ME06K1 50 50 50 ME07K1 50 50 50 ME08K1 50 50 50 ME10K1 50 50 50 ME14K1 50 15 10 (4 kW) 6 (5.5 kW) ME16K1 15 8 6
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing Standard Setting power ratings range of of 3-phase thermal motors trips 50/60 Hz in AC-3 400/ 415V 440V 500V kW kW kW A 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75 11.6 Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor Contactor circuitReference breaker to be Reference completed (3) Pre-assembled Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Weight
A 22.5 GV2-ME06 LC1-K06

GV2-ME06K1pp
kg 0.460
4.2
0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 GV2-ME06K1pp 2.2 3 4 5.5 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
1.62.5
33.5
GV2-ME07
LC1-K06
GV2-ME07K1pp
0.460
2.54
51
GV2-ME08
LC1-K06
GV2-ME08K1pp
0.460
46.3
78
GV2-ME10
LC1-K06
GV2-ME10K1pp
0.460
610
138
GV2-ME14
LC1-K09
GV2-ME14K1pp
0.460
914
170
GV2-ME16
LC1-K12
GV2-ME16K1pp
0.460
Connection block Description
Sold in lots of 10
Unit reference
GV2-AF01
Weight
kg 0.020
Block for connecting circuit-breaker to contactor
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2-ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1-L3, see page 3/35. (2) Control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 380/400 a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 c (4) BW3 (3) Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
Schemes: page 4/25
References

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: - 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2-ME, - 1 3-pole reversing contactor, - 1 combination block GV2-AF01.
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (Iq) (1) To IEC-947-4-1 GV2400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA ME06K2 50 50 50 ME07K2 50 50 50 ME08K2 50 50 50 ME10K2 50 50 50 ME14K2 50 15 10 (4 kW) 6 (5.5 kW) ME16K2 15 8 6
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing Standard Setting power ratings range of of 3-phase thermal motors trips 50/60 Hz in AC-3 400/ 415V 440V 500V kW kW kW A 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 GV2-ME06K2pp 2.2 3 4 5.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 46.3 78 GV2-ME10 LC2-K06
GV2-ME10K2pp
Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth
For customer assembly Motor Reversing circuitcontactor breaker Reference Reference to be completed (3)
Pre-assembled Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2)
Weight
4
kg
A 22.5 GV2-ME06 LC2-K06

GV2-ME06K2pp
11.6
0.460
1.62.5
33.5
GV2-ME07
LC2-K06
GV2-ME07K2pp
0.460
4.2
1.5
1.5 2.2
2.54
51
GV2-ME08
LC2-K06
GV2-ME08K2pp
0.460
0.460
610
138
GV2-ME14
LC2-K09
GV2-ME14K2pp
0.460
914
170
GV2-ME16
LC2-K12
GV2-ME16K2pp
0.460
Connection blocks Description
Sold in lots of 10
Unit reference
GV2-AF01
Weight
kg 0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2-ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1-L3, see page 3/35. (2) Control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 380/400 a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 c (4) BW3 (3) Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
References

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: - 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2-ME, - 1 3-pole contactor, - 1 combination block GV2-AF3.
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (Iq) (1) To IEC-947-4-1 GV2400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA DM102 DM114 to DM110 50 50 50 50 15 10 DM116 15 8 6 DM120 15 8 6 DM121 15 6 4 DM122 15 6 4
DM132
10 6 4
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing (3) Standard Setting Fixed power ratings range of magnetic of 3-phase thermal tripping motors trips current 50/60 Hz 13 Irth in AC-3 400/ 415V 440V 500V kW kW kW A A 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 GV2-DM102pp 9 11 15 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.55 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 3 4 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 For customer assembly Motor Contactor circuitReference breaker to be Reference completed Pre-assembled Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2)
Weight
kg GV2-ME02 GV2-ME03 GV2-ME04 GV2-ME05 GV2-ME06 GV2-ME07 GV2-ME08 GV2-ME10 GV2-ME14 GV2-ME16 GV2-ME20 GV2-ME21 GV2-ME22 GV2-ME32 Mounting of GV2 5 rail LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D12pp LC1-D18pp LC1-D25pp LC1-D25pp LC1-D32pp
Sold in lots of 10 GV2-DM102pp GV2-DM103pp GV2-DM104pp GV2-DM105pp GV2-DM106pp GV2-DM107pp GV2-DM108pp GV2-DM110pp GV2-DM114pp GV2-DM116pp GV2-DM120pp GV2-DM121pp GV2-DM122pp GV2-DM132pp
0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.601 0.606 0.646 0.646 0.651
Weight
4.2
Unit reference
GV2-AF3
kg 0.016
10 GV2-AF4 0.016 Mtg. plate LAD-31 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2-ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1-L3, see page 3/35. (2) Control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 24 220 230 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (4) BD (3) Can be combined with type 2. (4) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
Schemes: page 4/25
References

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: - 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2-ME, - 1 3-pole reversing contactor, - 1 combination block GV2-AF3.
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (Iq) (1) To IEC-947-4-1 GV2400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA DM202 DM214 to DM210 50 50 50 50 15 10 DM216 15 8 6 DM220 15 8 6 DM221 15 6 4 DM222 15 6 4 DM232 10 6 4
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing (3) Standard Setting power ratings range of of 3-phase thermal motors trips 50/60 Hz in AC-3 400/ 415V 440V 500V kW kW kW A 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 GV2-DM202pp 9 11 15 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor Reversing circuitcontactor breaker Reference Reference to be completed Pre-assembled Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2)
Weight
4
kg 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.973 0.983 1.063 1.063 1.073
Weight
A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 GV2-ME02 GV2-ME03 GV2-ME04 GV2-ME05 GV2-ME06 GV2-ME07 GV2-ME08 GV2-ME10 GV2-ME14 GV2-ME16 GV2-ME20 GV2-ME21 GV2-ME22 GV2-ME32 Mounting of GV2 5 rail LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D12pp LC2-D18pp LC2-D25pp LC2-D25pp LC2-D32pp
Sold in lots of 10 GV2-DM202pp GV2-DM203pp GV2-DM204pp GV2-DM205pp GV2-DM206pp GV2-DM207pp GV2-DM208pp GV2-DM210pp GV2-DM214pp GV2-DM216pp GV2-DM220pp GV2-DM221pp GV2-DM222pp GV2-DM232pp
4.2
Unit reference
GV2-AF3
kg 0.016
10 GV2-AF4 0.016 Mtg. plate LAD-31 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2-ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1-L3, see page 3/35. (2) Control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 24 220 230 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (4) BD (3) Can be combined with type 2. (4) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
References

Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection, short circuit protection and rotary handle
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination (1)

This pre-assembled combination comprises: - 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2-P, - 1 3-pole contactor, - 1 combination block GV2-AF3
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (Iq) (2) To IEC-947-4-1 GV2400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA DP102 DP114 to DP110 130 130 130 130 130 50 DP116 130 50 42 DP120 50 20 10 DP121 50 20 10 DP122 50 20 10 DP132 50 20 10
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing Standard Setting power ratings range of of 3-phase thermal motors 50/60 Hz trips in AC-3 400/ 415V 440V 500V kW kW kW A 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 GV2-DP102pp 9 11 15 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 GV2-P02 GV2-P03 GV2-P04 GV2-P05 GV2-P06 GV2-P07 GV2-P08 GV2-P10 GV2-P14 GV2-P16 GV2-P20 GV2-P21 GV2-P22 GV2-P32 Mounting of GV2 5 rail LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D09pp LC1-D25pp LC1-D25pp LC1-D25pp LC1-D25pp LC1-D32pp
Sold in lots of 10 GV2-DP102pp GV2-DP103pp GV2-DP104pp GV2-DP105pp GV2-DP106pp GV2-DP107pp GV2-DP108pp GV2-DP110pp GV2-DP114pp GV2-DP116pp GV2-DP120pp GV2-DP121pp GV2-DP122pp GV2-DP132pp
For customer assembly Motor Contactor circuit Reference breaker to be Reference completed
Pre-assembled Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (3)
Weight
kg 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.696 0.736 0.736 0.741 0.736 0.741 0.741 0.741
Weight kg
4.2
Connection block Description Block for connecting circuit-breaker to contactor
Unit reference
GV2-AF3
0.016
10 GV2-AF4 0.016 Mtg. plate LAD-31 (1) For details of independently certied Type 2 coordination, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (2) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2-P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1-L3, see page 3/35. (3) Control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 24 220 230 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (4) BD (4) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
Schemes: page 4/25
References

Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection, short circuit protection and rotary handle
D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415, type 2 coordination (1)

This pre-assembled combination comprises: - 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2-P, - 1 3-pole reversing contactor, - 1 combination block GV2-AF3.
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (Iq) (2) To IEC-947-4-1 GV2400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA DP202 DP214 to DP210 130 130 130 130 130 50 DP216 130 50 42 DP220 50 20 10 DP221 50 20 10 DP222 50 20 10 DP232 50 20 10
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing Standard Setting power ratings range of of 3-phase thermal motors trips 50/60 Hz in AC-3 400/ 415V 440V 500V kW kW kW A 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 GV2-DP202pp 9 11 15 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor Reversing circuitcontactor breaker Reference Reference to be completed Pre-assembled Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (3)
Weight
4
kg 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.073 1.153 1.153 1.163 1.153 1.163 1.163 1.163
Weight kg
A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 GV2-P02 GV2-P03 GV2-P04 GV2-P05 GV2-P06 GV2-P07 GV2-P08 GV2-P10 GV2-P14 GV2-P16 GV2-P20 GV2-P21 GV2-P22 GV2-P32 Mounting of GV2 5 rail LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D09pp LC2-D25pp LC2-D25pp LC2-D25pp LC2-D25pp LC2-D32pp
Sold in lots of 10 GV2-DP202pp GV2-DP203pp GV2-DP204pp GV2-DP205pp GV2-DP206pp GV2-DP207pp GV2-DP208pp GV2-DP210pp GV2-DP214pp GV2-DP216pp GV2-DP220pp GV2-DP221pp GV2-DP222pp GV2-DP232pp
4.2
Connection block Description Block for connecting circuit-breaker to contactor
Unit reference
GV2-AF3
0.016
10 GV2-AF4 0.016 Mtg. plate LAD-31 (1) For details of independently certied Type 2 coordination, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (2) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2-P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1-L3, see page 3/35. (3) Control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 24 220 230 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (4) BD (4) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.

GV2-MEppKppp On mounting rail AM1-DE200
GV2-MEppK1pp
GV2-MEppK2pp
11
66 87
152
45
90
GV2-DMppppp On mounting rail AM1-DE200
With adapter plate LAD-31
GV2-DM1pppp
152
GV2-DM2pppp
c1 c c1 c d1 d
45
90
4.2
GV2b c c1 DMp02pp to DMp20pp 176.4 94.1 88.6 DMp21pp to DMp32pp 186.8 100.4 94.9 GV2b c c1 d d1
DMp02pp to DMp20pp 188.6 98.2 92.7 103.8 98.3
DMp21pp to DMp32pp 199 104.5 99 103.8 98.3 GV2-DP1pppp GV2-DP2pppp
GV2-DPppppp On mounting rail AM1-DE200
With adapter plate LAD-31
c1 c d1 d
c1 c
45
90
GV2b c c1 d d1
DPp02pp to DPp08pp 177.4 94.1 88.6 96.8 91
DPp10pp to DPp32pp 187.8 100.4 94.9 96.8 91
GV2b c c1
DPp02pp to DPp08pp 169.1 122.3 116.8
DPp10pp to DPp32pp 199.5 122.3 116.8
A2 A2 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 14 13/NO 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1 A1 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 14 13/NO 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1
A1
KM1
GV2-MEppK1pp
GV2-MEppK2pp
A2
A1
Schemes
Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts Control circuit a

T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 14 13/NO A1 A2 5/L3 3/L2 1/L1 A2 A1 1 L1 2/T1
1/L1
02
02
01
01
A2
A1
KM2
KM1
A2 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6

14 22
A1 1/L1 2/T1 3/L2 4/T2 5/L3 6/T3

13/NO 21/NC
A2 2 4 3 5 13/NO 21/NC L3 6/T3

5/L3
A1 L2 4/T2
3/L2
01
02
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
GV2-DM1pppp
GV2-DM2pppp
6 14 22
A2
A1
01
02
KM2 U 2 1 3 5 13/NO 21/NC A1 4 6 14 22 A2 V W A2 A1 1 3 5 L3 6/T3 13/NO 21/NC L2 4/T2 L1 2/T1

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6

14 22
A1 1/L1 2/T1 3/L2 4/T2 5/L3 6/T3

13/NO 21/NC
GV2-DP1pppp
GV2-DP2pppp
Control circuit c
KM1 2 4 6 14 22 U 2 1 3 5 13/NO 21/NC A2 A1 4 6 14 22 V W
A1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2
A1
KM2
A2
4/25
4.2
References
Enclosed motor starters

Direct-on-line starters Without thermal overload relay (1)
Direct-on-line starters
Maximum current rating category AC A
Composite steel/plastic enclosure. Ingress protection: IP 65 Control supply V Reference Weight
Maximum kW rating Utilisation category AC3 220/230 V 380/415 V kW kW
kg
Direct-on-line starters without disconnect switch 12 3 5.5 240 50/60 Hz LE1-GBKO55U7 1.340
415 50/60 Hz LE1-GBKO55U7 25 5.5 11 240 50/60 Hz
LE1-GBKO55N7
1.340
LE1-GBTO11U7
1.340
4
Direct-on-line starters with reset button only 12 3 5.5
415 50/60 Hz
LE1-GBTO11N7
1.340
240 50/60 Hz
LE1-GBKO55U7A05
1.330
415 50/60 Hz
LE1-GBKO55N7A05
1.330
4.3
25 LE1-GBKO55U7A05 415 50/60 Hz LE1-GBTO11N7A05 1.330 5.5 11 240 50/60 Hz LE1-GBTO11U7A05 1.330
Direct-on-line starters with disconnect switch 12 3 5.5 240 50/60 Hz LE1-GBKS55U7 2.620
415 50/60 Hz LE1-GBKS55U7 25 5.5 11 240 50/60 Hz
LE1-GBKS55N7
2.620
LE1-GBTS11U7
2.620
415 50/60 Hz (1) Select thermal overload relay separately. See pages 2/46 and 2/112.
LE1-GBTS11N7
2.620
References

Direct-on-line reversing starters Without thermal overload relay (1)
Direct-on-line reversing starters

Maximum current rating category AC A Maximum kW rating Utilisation category AC3 220/230 V 380/415 V kW kW
kg
Direct-on-line reversing starters without disconnect switch 12 3 5.5 240 50/60 Hz LE2-GBKO55U7 2.620
LE2-GBKO55U7
415 50/60 Hz
LE2-GBKO55N7
2.620
25
5.5
11
240 50/60 Hz
LE2-GBTO11U7
2.620
4
LE2-GBTO11N7 2.620
415 50/60 Hz
Direct-on-line reversing starters with disconnect switch 12 3 5.5 240 50/60 Hz LE2-GBKS55U7 3.820
4.3
LE2-GBKS55U7
415 50/60 Hz
LE2-GBKS55N7
3.820
25
5.5
11
240 50/60 Hz
LE2-GBTS11U7
3.820
415 50/60 Hz
LE2-GBTS11N7
3.820
(1) Select thermal overload relay separately. See pages 2/46 and 2/112.
References

Star-delta starters Without thermal overload relay (1) With mechanical/electrical interlock
Automatic star-delta starters

Maximum kW rating Utilisation category AC3 380 V 415 V kW kW
Composite steel/plastic enclosure. Ingress protection: IP 65 Control supply Reference Weight
440 V kW
kg
Automatic (2) star-delta starters without disconnect switch 11 LE3-GBTO11U7 415 50/60 Hz LE3-GBTO11N7 3.820 11 11 240 50/60 Hz LE3-GBTO11U7 3.820
18.5
22
22
240 50/60 Hz
LE3-GBTO22U7
3.820
4
11 11 11
415 50/60 Hz
LE3-GBTO22N7
3.820
Automatic (2) star-delta starters with disconnect switch 240 50/60 Hz LE3-GBTS11U7 3.820
415 50/60 Hz
LE3-GBTS11N7
3.820
4.3
LE3-GBTS11U7 18.5 22 22 240 50/60 Hz LE3-GBTS22U7 3.820
415 50/60 Hz
LE3-GBTS22N7
3.820
Automatic (2) star-delta starters without disconnect switch Sheet steel enclosure. Ingress protection: IP 55 25 30 30 240 50/60 Hz 415 50/60 Hz 37 37 37 240 50/60 Hz 415 50/60 Hz 55 59 59 240 50/60 Hz 415 50/60 Hz 75 LE3-D405U7A06A64 75 75 240 50/60 Hz LE3-D325U7A06A64 LE3-D325N7A06A64 LE3-D405U7A06A64 LE3-D405N7A06A64 LE3-D505U7A06A64 LE3-D505N7A06A64 LE3-D805U7A06A64 5.160 5.160 8.160 8.160 8.160 8.160 14.000
415 50/60 Hz LE3-D805N7A06A64 14.000 (1) Select thermal overload relay separately. See page 2/112. Overload relay should be selected for setting at 0.58 x Motor full load current. (2) The star-delta timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at the moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.
References
Enclosed heating and lighting contactors

Enclosed contactors Without thermal overload relay Without pushbutton controls
Heating and lighting contactors

Maximum continuously rated operational current A Poles
kg
Heating and lighting contactors 25 3 + Neutral 240 50/60 Hz LE1-GBTHL25U7 1.340
415 50/60 Hz LE1-GBTHL25U7
LE1-GBTHL25N7
1.340
32
3 + Neutral
240 50/60 Hz
LE1-GBTHL32U7
1.340
4
415 50/60 Hz LE1-GBTHL32N7 1.340
50
3 + Neutral
240 50/60 Hz
LE1-GBTHL50U7
2.620
4.3
415 50/60 Hz LE1-GBTHL50N7 2.620
80
3 + Neutral
240 50/60 Hz
LE1-GBTHL80U7
2.620
415 50/60 Hz
LE1-GBTHL80N7
2.620
Accessories
Description Pushbutton blanking plate Sold in lots of 2 Reference LE1-BL1 Weight kg 0.002
Disconnect switch blanking plate
LE1-BL2
0.002
Dimensions
Direct-on-line starters without disconnect switch LE1-GBiOiii7 (A05)

119.00 79.50
212.00
165.00 207.70
119.00 114.00 32 32
35
139.50 156.5 150.56
32
124
3 x 20 mm ISO conduit entries top and bottom.
Direct-on-line starters with disconnect switch LE1-GBiSiii7 Reversing D.O.L. starters without disconnect switch LE2-GBiOiii7
4
209.70 159.00
219.00
174.00 214.70
209.70 204 55 55 46
163.70 174.70 206.90
47
4.3
214.00
2 x 20 mm and 1 x 25 mm ISO conduit entries top and bottom.
Reversing D.O.L. starters with disconnect switch LE2-GBiSiii7 Star-delta starters without disconnect switch LE3-GBTOiii7
299.00 252.00
225.00
174.00 220.70
304.00
163.70 174.70 206.90
299.00 294.00 90 46 47 90
2 x 25 mm and 1 x 20 mm ISO conduit entries top and bottom.
Dimensions
Star-delta starters without disconnect switch, 30 - 75 kW LE3-D325iiiA06A64
LE3-D405iiiA06A64, D505iiiA06A64
LE3-D805iiA06A64
325
=
Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands (gland size in mm, P = Plastic) Type of At At enclosure top bottom LE3-D325 1 21 P 1 21 P, 2 13 P and 2 16 P LE3-D405 1 29 P 1 29 P, 2 13 P and 2 21 P LE3-D505 1 36 P 1 36 P, 2 13 P and 2 29 P LE3-D805 1 36 P 2 13 P and 3 36 P
400(4)
457,5
350
4xM8x25
=
202 218
350 400 457,5
325
4.3
Switching
and fused protection devices
Switching
and
5/0
fused protection devices
Chapter 5
Switching and fused protection devices 5.1
Vario switch disconnectors Mini-Vario open to 20 A and enclosed to 16 A Vario open to 145 A and enclosed to 175 A Vario in stainless steel enclosure to 63 A 5/2 to 5/25
5.2
LK3 switch disconnectors Open type to 1250 A 5/26 to 5/35
5.3
GS1 fuse combination switches Open type to 1250 A 5/36 to 5/45
5.4
Fuse carriers and fuses DF6/GK1 fuse carriers DF2 fuses 5/46 to 5/51
5/1
Characteristics
Switch disconnectors
Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors
Switch type
VN-12 VZN-12
V02 VZ-02
VN-20 VZN-20
V01 VZ-01
V0 VZ-0
VVD-0 VVE-0
V1 VZ-1
VVD-1 VVE-1
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Degree of protection with protection shroud Ambient air temperature Flame resistance Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Vibration resistance 10150 Hz conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 C IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3 UL, CSA, GL TC IP 20 conforming to IEC/EN 60529 - 20+ 50 960 C conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-1 15 gn 30 gn 15 gn 30 gn
5 gn
1 gn
1 gn
1 gn
Electrical characteristics, a.c. operation

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated impact withstand voltage (Uimp) V kV A 690 6 12 690 8 690 6 20 690 8 690 8 25 690 8 690 8 32 690 8
5
5.1
Conventional thermal currents in free air (Ith) and rated uninterrupted (lu) Conventional thermal current in enclosure (Ithe) Rated operational power and current AC-21A/22A 230690 V AC-23A 230 V 240 V 400 V 415 V 500 V 690 V Rated operational power AC-3 230/240 V 400/415 V 500 V 690 V Intermittent duty class Characteristics in normal operating conditions Rated making capacity AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) Rated breaking capacity AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) Short-circuit characteristics Permissible rms short time rating (Icw)
10
16
20
25
A A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW kW kW kW kW
12 10.6/3 10.6/3 8.1/4 8.1/4 8.9/5.5 8.6/7.5 1.5 3 4 4 30 1.5 3 4 5.5
20 14/4 14/4 11/5.5 11/5.5 11.9/7.5 12.3/11 3 4 5.5 5.5 30 3 4 5.5 7.5
25 19.7/5.5 19.9/5.5 14.5/7.5 14/7.5 16.7/11 17.5/15 4 5.5 7.5 11 30
32 19.7/5.5 18.9/5.5 21.8/11 21/11 16.7/11 17.5/15 4 7.5 7.5 11 30
A/400 V A/400 V
120 120
200 200
250 200
320 250
A/400 V/1s 140 0.5 6 12
300 1 10
140 0.5 6 20
300 1 10
300 1 10 25
384 1 10 35
Rated making capacity under kA/400 V short-circuit conditions (Icm) I peak Rated conditional shortcircuit current (I rms) with aM/gG fuses kA/400 V A
V2 VZ-2
VVD-2 VVE-2
V3 VZ-3
VVD-3 VVE-3
V4 VZ-4
VVD-4 VVE-4
V5
V6
VZ7 VZ2-0
VZN-05 VZN-06
IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3 UL, CSA, GL TC IP 20 conforming to IEC/EN 60529 - 20+ 50 960 C 30 gn
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
1 gn
690 8 40
690 8 63
690 8 80
690 8 125
690 8 175
690 8 12
690 6 6
5
5.1
32
50
63
100
140
10
Ie/AC-15 40 25.8/7.5 24.8/7.5 29/15 28/15 28.5/18.5 17.5/15 5.5 11 15 11 30 63 50.3/15 48.2/15 41.5/22 40/22 44/30 25/22 11 18.5 22 18.5 30 80 61.2/18.5 58.5/18.5 57/30 55/30 54/37 33/30 15 22 30 18.5 30 125 71.9/22 68/22 68.5/37 66/37 64.5/45 42/37 22 30 37 30 30 160 96.6/30 92.7/30 83/45 80/45 79/55 49/45 30 37 45 37 30 6A 6A 4A 4A 2A 1A
Ie/AC-15 6A 6A 4A 4A 2A 1A
400 320
630 500
800 640
1250 1000
1750 1400
480 1 10 50
756 2.1 10 63
960 2.1 10 80
1500 2.8 10 125
2100 2.8 10 200
1 16
1 1.6
5/3
Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors
Switch type
VN-12 VZN-12
V02 VZ-02
VN-20 VZN-20
V01 VZ-01
V0 VZ-0
VVD-0 VVE-0
V1 VZ-1
VVD-1 VVE-1
Electrical characteristics, d.c. operation

Rated operational current DC-1 (L/R = 1ms) 24 V 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 48 V 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 1.5 8 12 1.5 7 10 0.6 3 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 10 12 12 1.5 3 12 0.4 1.4 1 0.3 0.4 1.2 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 2 10 20 2 8 14 0.7 4 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 14 20 20 2 4 20 0.5 1.5 2 0.4 0.6 2.4 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 9 12 25 2.5 10 16 0.8 6 12 25 25 25 25 25 25 16 25 25 2.5 5 25 0.5 1.5 3 0.5 0.8 1.6 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 10 16 32 3 12 20 1 8 16 32 32 32 32 32 32 20 32 32 3 6 32 0.8 2 4 0.8 1 2
60 V
110 V
220 V
250 V
5
5.1
Rated operational current DC-2 to DC-5 24 V 1 contact 2 contacts (L/R = 1ms) 3 contacts 48 V 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts
60 V
110 V
220 V
250 V
Other characteristics
Mechanical durability Electrical durability in cat. AC-21 Electrical durability in cat. DC-1 to 5 Suitable for isolation Cabling Flexible cable + cable end mm2 Solid cable Tightening torque mm2 N.m Millions of op. cycles Millions of op. cycles Operating cycles 0.05 0.05 30 000 Yes 4 4 0.7 6 10 2.1 0.1 0.1 0.05 0.05 30 000 Yes 4 4 0.7 6 10 2.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 30 000 Yes 6 10 2.1 0.1 0.1 30 000 Yes 6 10 2.1
V2 VZ-2
VVD-2 VVE-2
V3 VZ-3
VVD-3 VVE-3
V4 VZ-4
VVD-4 VVE-4
V5
V6
VZ7 VZ2-0
VZN-05 VZN-06
40 40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 12 20 40 4 14 25 2 12 20 40 40 40 40 40 40 25 40 40 5 8 40 1 3 7 1 2 6
63 63 63 63 63 63 40 63 63 20 63 63 6 25 30 4 20 30 63 63 63 63 63 63 40 63 63 6 10 50 1.5 4 10 1.2 3 8
80 80 80 80 80 80 50 80 80 25 80 80 8 30 40 5 25 40 80 80 80 80 80 80 50 80 80 8 20 63 2 6 15 1.5 6 10
125 125 125 125 125 125 60 125 125 30 125 125 12 40 80 6 30 50 125 125 125 125 125 125 60 125 125 10 22 70 2.2 7 16 1.6 7 12
175 175 175 175 175 175 70 175 175 12 175 175 15 50 100 10 40 61 175 175 175 175 175 175 70 175 175 12 24 80 2.4 8 13 1.8 8 14
8 (Ie/DC-11) 8 (Ie/DC-11) 4 (Ie/DC-11) 2 (Ie/DC-11) 1 (Ie/DC-11) 0.8 (Ie/DC-11)
5
5.1
0.1 0.1 30 000 Yes 6 10 2.1
0.03 0.03 30 000 Yes 16 25 4
0.03 0.03 30 000 Yes 16 25 4
0.03 0.03 30 000 Yes 70 95 22.6
0.03 0.03 30 000 Yes 70 95 22.6
0.1 0.1 (AC-15) 30 000 (DC-11) 2 x 0.751.5 2 x 12.5 0.7
0.05 0.05
5/5
References
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors Complete units
- 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 and 20 A - Marking on operator - Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied) - Degree of protection IP 65
Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors for door mounting

Operator Handle Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Ith Front plate mm Yellow 60 x 60 Fixing mm 22.5 A 12
VCDN-12
Reference
Weight kg 0.177
VCDN-20
20
VCDN-20
0.177
5
5.1
Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors for rear mounting and through door operation (1)
Operator Handle Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Ith Front plate mm Yellow 60 x 60 Fixing mm 22.5 A 12
VCCDN-12
Reference
Weight kg 0.334
20 VCCDN-20
VCCDN-20
0.334
Main switch disconnectors for door mounting

Operator Handle Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Ith Front plate mm Black 60 x 60 Fixing mm 22.5 A 12
VBDN-12
Reference
Weight kg 0.177
VBDN-20
20
VBDN-20
0.177
(1) Switches supplied with operator assembly KCD-1PZ, shaft extension VZN-17, door interlock plate KZ 32 and incoming terminal shroud (see page 5/9).
References
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors Component parts - Switch bodies, add-on modules
Switch bodies
Description 3-pole switch disconnector body Rating A 12 Reference
VN-12
Weight kg 0.110
20
VN-20
0.110
VN-20
Add-on modules
Description Main pole modules Rating A 12
Reference VZN-12
Weight kg 0.020
20
VZN-20
0.020
VZN-11
Neutral pole module with early make and late break contacts Earthing module
12 and 20
VZN-11
0.020
12 and 20
VZN-14
0.016
Auxiliary contact block modules
1 N/O late make contact 1 N/C early break contact
VZN-05
0.020
5
5.1
VZN-14
VZN-06
0.020
Input terminal protection shrouds
For add-on Main and Neutral pole modules or auxiliary contact block modules (single-pole shroud) For switch bodies (3-pole switch shroud)
VZN-26
0.004
VZN-08
0.007
VZN-05
Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body

VZN-12 or VZN-20
+ +
VZN-12 or VZN-20 or VZN-11 or VZN-05 or VZN-06

+
VZN-26
or
VN-12
or
VN-20
VZN-14
VZN-05 or VZN-06 VZN-08
KCC-1YZ
VZN-14
VN-12,VN-20
VZN-17,VZN-30
KCD-1PZ
5
5.1
KZ-32,KZ-83
KAD-1PZ
5/8
References
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors Operators and accessories
- Degree of protection IP 65 - Marking on operator - Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied) - Operator xing by 1 22.5 hole; for other operators see pages 5/10 and 5/11. - For other accessories and empty enclosures, see pages 5/13, 5/17 and 5/18.
Operators for main and emergency stop switch disconnectors

Handle Red, padlockable with 1 padlock ( 4 to 6) Front plate mm Yellow 45 x 45 Reference
KCC-1YZ
Weight kg 0.050
Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
Yellow 60 x 60
KCD-1PZ
0.084
Operators for main switch disconnectors

Handle Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Front plate mm Black 60 x 60 Reference
KAD-1PZ
Weight kg 0.084
5
5.1
Components for through-door operation

For switch mounted at the back of an enclosure, in addition to a direct operator Description Front Distance Sold Unit in reference plate enc. back/ lots of door mm mm Shaft extension 300330
1 VZN-17
Weight kg 0.100
400430
VZN-30
0.130
Door interlock plate
45 x 45 or 60 x 60
KZ-32
0.170
Plate for door mounting without interlock
45 x 45 or 60 x 60
KZ-83
0.205
References
VARIO switch disconnectors Complete open type assemblies
- 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A - Marking on operator - Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied) - Operator degree of protection IP 65
Main and emergency stop switch disconnector kit for door mounting
Handle VCF-0 Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks Front plate mm Yellow 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 4 screws 12 20 25 32 40 Reference VCD-02 VCD-01 VCD-0 VCD-1 VCD-2 VCF-02 VCF-01 VCF-0 VCF-1 VCF-2 VCF-3 VCF-4 VCF-5 VCF-6 Weight kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560 1.200 1.200
5
5.1
VCF-5 Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks Yellow 90 x 90 4 screws
63 80 125 175
Main and emergency stop switch disconnector kit for rear mounting and through door operation (1)
Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks Yellow 60 x 60 22.5 12 20 25 32 40 4 screws 12 20 25 32 40 63 VCCD-02 VCCD-01 VCCD-0 VCCD-1 VCCD-2 VCCF-02 VCCF-01 VCCF-0 VCCF-1 VCCF-2 VCCF-3 VCCF-4 VCCF-5 VCCF-6 0.365 0.365 0.365 0.365 0.365 0.355 0.355 0.355 0.355 0.355 0.665 0.665 1.390 1.390
VCCF-0 Red, extended, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks Yellow 90 x 90 4 screws
80 125 175
(1) Supplied with handle assembly, shaft extension VZN-17, door interlock plate KZ-32 or KZ-74, and incoming terminal shroud VZ8, VZ9 or VZ 10.
References
VARIO switch disconnectors Complete open type assemblies
- 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A - Marking on operator - Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied) - Operator degree of protection IP 65
Main switch disconnector kit for door mounting

Handle VBD-0 Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks Front plate mm Black 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 4 screws 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 Black, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks VBF-4 Black 90 x 90 4 screws 125 175 Reference VBD-02 VBD-01 VBD-0 VBD-1 VBD-2 VBF-02 VBF-01 VBF-0 VBF-1 VBF-2 VBF-3 VBF-4 VBF-5 VBF-6 Weight kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560 1.200 1.200
5
5.1
Main and emergency stop switch disconnector kit

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards Handle Front plate Rating mm A Red, padlockable with 1 padlock Yellow 45 x 45 25 32 40 63 80 Reference VVE-0 VVE-1 VVE-2 VVE-3 VVE-4 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.530 0.530
Main switch disconnector kit

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards Handle Front plate Rating mm A Black, not padlockable Black 45 x 45 25 32 40 VVE-1 63 80 Reference VVD-0 VVD-1 VVD-2 VVD-3 VVD-4 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560
Dimensions, schemes: 5/20 to 5/25 5/11
References
Enclosed switch disconnectors

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors, pre-assembled
Enclosed switch disconnectors - IP 65

3-pole switch disconnectors, 10 to 140 A, rotary operator, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 and IEC/EN 60204. Padlockable handle (padlocks not included). IP 65 degree of protection enclosure, lead sealable and lockable. Lockable cover in position I (ON) up to 63 A rating. Marking on front plate
VCF-0GE
3-pole main and emergency stop switch disconnectors (1) Operator Ithe Power IncorpHandle Front plate AC-23 orated Dimensions at 400 V switch body mm A kW Red Yellow Padlockable, 60 x 60 up to 3 locks ( 4 to 8 shank) 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 Red cross Yellow type 90 x 90 Padlockable, up to 3 locks ( 4 to 8 shank) 100 140 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6
Possible attachments (2) 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1
Reference
Weight
kg VCF-02GE VCF-01GE VCF-0GE VCF-1GE VCF-2GE VCF-3GE VCF-4GE VCF-5GE VCF-6GE 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.930 0.930 2.190 2.190
5
VCF-3GE
3-pole main stop switch disconnectors (1)
5.1
Black Black Padlockable, 60 x 60 up to 3 locks ( 4 to 8 shank)
10 16 20 25 32 50 63
4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45
V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6
2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
VBF-02GE VBF-01GE VBF-0GE VBF-1GE VBF-2GE VBF-3GE VBF-4GE VBF-5GE VBF-6GE
0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.930 0.930 2.190 2.190
VBF-0GE
Black cross Black type 90 x 90 Padlockable, up to 3 locks ( 4 to 8 shank)
100 140
Enclosed switch disconnectors - IP 55

- 3-pole switch disconnectors, 10 to 32 A, rotary operator, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1. - Degree of protection IP 55. 3-pole main and emergency stop switch disconnectors (1) Red Yellow Padlockable, 60 x 60 either by 1 lock ( 8 shank) or by 3 locks ( 6 shank) VCFN-12GE 10 16 20 25 4 5.5 7.5 11 VN-12 VN-20 V0 V1 2 2 0 0 VCFN-12GE (2) VCFN-20GE (2) VCFN-25GE VCFN-32GE 0.422 0.422 0.512 0.512
32 15 V2 0 VCFN-40GE 0.512 (1) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. (2) For VCF and VBF attachments, see page 5/14. For VCFN attachments, see page 5/7.
Schemes: page 5/25
References

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors: - pre-assembled in stainless steel enclosures, - operator in enclosure without switch body, for customer assembly
Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors in stainless steel enclosure

Ithe A 16 25 32 Rated power AC-23/400 V kW 5.5 11 15 Number of poles 3 (1) 3 (1) 3 (1) 6 (2) 63 30 3 (1) 6 (2) Reference
Weight
kg VCF-01SS3 VCF-1SS3 VCF-2SS3 VCF-2SS6 VCF-4SS3 VCF-4SS6 1.100 1.100 1.200 1.220 1.400 1.450
VCF-1SS3
Empty enclosures with operator for customer assembly

IP 65 enclosure with red padlockable handle operator and yellow front plate For mounting Main/Emergency stop switch disconnector For switch Ithe Possible Reference body attachments (3) A VN-12, VN-20 V02V2 V02V2 V3 and V4 VBFX-GE2 4 IP 65 enclosure with black padlockable handle and black front plate For mounting Main switch disconnector For switch Ithe Possible body attachments (3) A VN-12, VN-20 V02V2 V02V2 V3 and V4 1032 1032 5063 2 4 3 4 VCFX-GDXE 0.660 1032 1032 5063 2 4 3 VCFX-GE1 VCFX-GE4 VCFX-GE2
Weight
kg 0.340 0.660 0.660
5
5.1
Reference
Weight
kg VBFX-GE1 VBFX-GE4 VBFX-GE2 VBFX-GDXE 0.340 0.660 0.660 0.660
(1) A 4th pole, neutral pole or auxiliary contact may be added. See page 5/14. (2) Includes 1 N/O + 1 N/C auxiliary contact. (3) See pages 5/7 and 5/14. Select switch body and attachments separately.
References
VARIO switch disconnector bodies, add-on modules and auxiliary contacts
Switch disconnector bodies

Description 3-pole body (1) Rating A Ith 12 20 25 32 V0 40 63 80 125 175 Reference V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.500 0.500 0.900 0.900
Add-on modules (see next page for options)

Main pole module 12 20 V5 25 32 40 63 80 VZ-02 VZ-01 VZ-0 VZ-1 VZ-2 VZ-3 VZ-4 VZ-11 VZ-12 VZ-13 VZ-14 VZ-15 VZ-16 VZ-7 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.050 0.100 0.250 0.050 0.100 0.250 0.050
5
5.1
VZ-0 VZ-11 Neutral pole module with early make and late break contacts (1)
12 to 40 63 and 80 125 and 175
Earthing module
12 to 40 63 and 80 125 and 175
Auxiliary contact block module with 2 auxiliary contacts
N/O + N/C (2)
VZ-15
VZ-20
N/O + N/O VZ-20 0.050 Note: the add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main poles. Maximum of 3 main poles per switch body. (1) Protection shrouds are available if required. (2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts.
References
VARIO switch disconnector bodies, add-on modules and auxiliary contacts
Add-on modules options

1 add-on module on each side of the switch body.
VZ-7 or VZ-20 or VZ-11 or VZ-12 or VZ-14 or VZ-15 or VZ-0i/VZ-0 to VZ-4
V0i
VZ-7 or VZ-20 or
VZ-7 or VZ-20 or VZ-13 or VZ-16
VZ-7 or
V5
+ +
V0 to V4
VZ-11 or VZ-12 or
VZ-20 or
or
+ +
VZ-14 or VZ-15 or
VZ-13 or
V6
+ +
VZ-0i/VZ-0 to VZ-4
VZ-16
2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body. VZ-0i VZ-0 VZ-1 VZ-2 VZ-3 VZ-4 VZ-0i VZ-0 VZ-1 VZ-2 VZ-3 VZ-4 V0i V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 VZ-0i VZ-0 VZ-1 VZ-2 VZ-3 VZ-4
+ + + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + + + + +
VZ-7 VZ-7 VZ-7 VZ-7 VZ-7 VZ-7
or or or or or or
VZ-20 VZ-20 VZ-20 VZ-20 VZ-20 VZ-20
or or or or or or
VZ-11 VZ-11 VZ-11 VZ-11 VZ-12 VZ-12
or or or or or or
VZ-14 VZ-14 VZ-14 VZ-14 VZ-15 VZ-15
5
5.1
VN-12,VN-20 V02V2
KAi-1BZ KCi-1LZ KCi-1YZ

VZN-17,VZN-30
KZ-32,KZ-83 KDi-1PZ
V3,V4
KBi-1PZ
KAi-1PZ KCi-1PZ
VZ-18,VZ-31
KAF-2PZ KCF-2PZ
5
KZ-74,KZ-81
5.1
V5,V6
KBF-2PZ
VZ-18,VZ-31
KDF-2PZ
KZ-74,KZ-81
KBF-3PZ
KDF-3PZ
KAF-3PZ
KCF-3PZ
Non-padlockable handle assemblies (shown in light grey) are available upon request. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
5/16
References
Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors Operators, handles and front plates
- Marking on operator - Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied) - Degree of protection IP 65
Handles and front plates for main and emergency stop switch disconnectors (2)
For switch body VN-12, VN-20 V02V2 Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 45 x 45 Fixing kg 22.5 KCC-1YZ 0.050 Weight
Red, padlockable with 1 padlock
4 screws
KCE-1YZ
0.040
Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks
Yellow 60 x 60
22.5
KCD-1PZ
0.082
4 screws
KCF-1PZ
0.075
V3 and V4
Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks Red, long, padlockable, with up to 3 padlocks
Yellow 60 x 60
4 screws
KCF-2PZ
0.070
5
5.1
V5 and V6
Yellow 90 x 90
4 screws
KCF-3PZ (1)
0.160
Handles and front plates for main switch disconnectors (2)

For switch body VN-12, VN-20 V02V2 Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Black 60 x 60 Fixing kg 22.5 KAD-1PZ 0.082 Weight
Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks
4 screws
KAF-1PZ
0.075
V3 and V4 V5 and V6
Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks
Black 60 x 60
4 screws
KAF-2PZ
0.070
Black, long, Black 4 screws KAF-3PZ (1) 0.160 padlockable 90 x 90 with up to 3 padlocks (1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adaptor plate KZ-106 must be ordered separately (see page 5/18). (2) For non-padlockable handle assemblies please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
References
Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors Accessories
Components for through door operation

For rear mounted switch disconnectors with door operating handle Description For Distance Sold in use with backplate-door lots of mm Shaft extensions VZ-18 V02V2 V3 and V4 V5 and V6 Door interlock plates KZ-32 Description VN-12, VN-20 V02V2 V3V6 For use on VN-12, VN-20 V02V2 V3 and V4 V3V6 KZ-81 Adaptor plate for switch disconnectors V3 and V4 300330 400430 300320 400420 330350 430450 Front plate dimensions mm 45 x 45 or 60 x 60 60 x 60 90 x 90 90 x 90 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 Sold in lots of 2 2 2 5 VZ-17 VZ-30 VZ-18 VZ-31 VZ-18 VZ-31 KZ-32 KZ-74 Unit reference KZ-83 KZ-81 KZ-81 KZ-106 0.075 0.125 0.170 0.215 0.170 0.215 0.177 0.020 Weight kg 0.205 0.010 0.010 0.075 VN-12, VN-20 V02V2 300330 400430 1 1 Unit reference VZN-17 (1) VZN-30 (1) Weight kg 0.100 0.130
Plates for door mounting of handles with 4 screw fixing Non-interlocking
5
5.1
Accessories for operators

Description For use on Front plate Front plate dimensions mm 45 x 45 60 x 60 90 x 90 Legend holder without legend plate Front plate 45 x 45 60 x 60 90 x 90 Silver coloured blank legend plates for engraving by customer Sealing kit (IP 65) KZ-14 KZ-16 KZ-101 VN-12, VN-20 V02V2 V3 and V4 V3V6 Tightening tool Z01 For operators with 22.5 fixing 45 x 45 60 x 60 60 x 60 90 x 90 Sold in lots of 5 5 5 20 10 5 20 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 Unit reference KZ-13 KZ-15 KZ-103 KZ-14 KZ-16 KZ-101 KZ-76 KZ-77 KZ-100 KZ-65 KZ-66 KZ-62 KZ-67 Z01 Weight kg 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.020 0.010 0.005 0.037 0.033 0.033 0.064 0.050
Legend holder with silver coloured blank legend plate KZ-15
KZ-67
References
VARIO switch disconnectors Accessories
Terminal protection shrouds

Description 3-pole shroud (For switch bodies) For use on V02V2 Reference VZ-8 Weight kg 0.015
VZ-8
V3 and V4
VZ-9
0.020
V5 and V6
VZ-10
0.060
Single-pole shroud (For add-on pole modules)
VZ-02VZ-2, VZ-11, VZ-14
VZ-26
0.005
VZ-26 VZ-3, VZ-4, VZ-12, VZ-15 VZ-27 0.007
5
VZ-13, VZ-16 VZ-28 0.020
5.1
Auxiliary contact shroud (for contact blocks with 2 auxiliary contacts) VZ-29 0.005
Dimensions
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 and 20 A
Switch disconnectors Switch bodies VN-12, VN-20
Add-on modules VZN-12, VZN-20
VZN-11, VZN-14 VZN-05, VZN-06
46,5
45,5
39 62 48 56
12
39
12
Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door VN-12, VN-20 4 screw xing
Single hole xing
1,5...6
1,5...6
5
5.1
44
62,5
44
74,5
45 x 45 front plate
60 x 60 front plate
13
3 12,7
36
36
48
48
22,5
Schemes: page 5/21
45,5
Dimensions, schemes
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 and 20 A
Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure with shaft extension VZN-17 or VZN-30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail) VN12, VN20 4 screw xing Single hole xing
1,5...6
1,5...6
Shaft extension VN-12, VN-20 VZN-17 VZN-30
Distance (e) enclosure back/door mm 300330 400430
Schemes Switch body VN-12, VN-20
Main pole module VZN-12, VZN-20
Neutral pole module VZN-11
Auxiliary contact blocks VZN-05
VZN-06
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
5
5.1
13
14
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
22
21
Dimensions
VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A
Switch disconnectors Switch bodies V0p, V0 to V2

60 55
V3 to V6
H c G a
=
74
V3, V4 V5, V6 Add-on modules VZ-02 to VZ-4 VZ-11 to VZ-16 VZ-7, VZ-20
a 60 90
b 83 125
c 65 90
G 48 68
b
H 48 68
5.5 5.5
48,5
20
5
5.1
VZ-02 and VZ-01, VZ-0 to VZ-2, VZ-11, VZ-14 VZ-3, VZ-4, VZ-12, VZ-15 VZ-13, VZ-16
a 15 20 30
b 83 125 125
c 65 90 63 V0p, V0 to V2 Single hole xing
Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door V0p, V0 to V4 4 screw xing
1,5...6
1,5...6
1,5...6
Single hole xing V0p, V0 to V2

12,7 3
65
4 screw xing 45 x 45 front plate V0p, V0 to V2
4 screw xing 60 x 60 front plate V0p, V0 to V4
36
22,5 44 c 37 c 44 72
36
48
V0p, V0 to V2 V3, V4
c 60 65 V5 and V6
1,5...6
4 screw xing 90 x 90 front plate
94
68
65
90
Schemes: page 5/23
68
48
Dimensions, schemes
VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A
Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure V0p, V0 to V2 with shaft extension V3 to V4 with shaft extension VZ-17 or VZ-30 VZ-18 or VZ-31 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail possible for V0p to V2)
1,5...6 1,5...6
V5 and V6 with shaft extension VZ-18 or VZ-31
1,5...6
60
94
30
Shaft extension V02 and V01 V0 to V2 V3 and V4 VZ-17 VZ-30 VZ-18 VZ-31
Distance (e) enc.back/door mm 300330 400430 300320 400420
Shaft extension V5 and V6 VZ-18 VZ-31
Distance (e) enc.back/door mm 330350 430450
2 x 4.2 2 x 4.2 2x5 2x5
15 15 20 20
Switch disconnectors for modular distribution boards VVp-0 to VVp-2
VVp-3 and VVp-4
100
45 74
5,5 68 106
45 110
5,5 72
60
45 83
5
5.1
Schemes Switch body V02 and V01 V0 to V6
Main pole module VZ-02 and VZ-01 VZ-0 to VZ-4
Neutral pole module VZ-11 to VZ-13
Auxiliary contact blocks VZ-7 VZ-20
13 14
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
13
21
14
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
22
24
23
Dimensions
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors
VCFN-12GE to VCFN-40GE
= 106 = 131 90
82,5
Cable glands: 2 x 16 Pg top and bottom VCF or VBF-02GE to 4GE VCFX or VBFX-GE1 to GE4
5
5.1
c c1
= a
VpF-02GE to VpF-2GE, VpFX-GE1 (1) VpF-3GE and VpF-4GE (2) VpFX-GE2 and VpFX-GE4 (2)
a 90 150 150
b 146 170 170
c 85 106 106
c1 131 152 152
H 130 164 164
(1) Cable glands 2 x 16 Pg top and bottom (2) Cable glands 2 x 16/21/29 Pg top and bottom VCF or VBF-5GE and 6GE
126 191
190 220
Schemes: page 5/25
201 280
Dimensions
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors: - stainless steel enclosures, - empty enclosures, for customer assembly
Empty enclosures VCFX or VBFX-GDXE
86 162
130 168
Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors in stainless steel enclosure VCF-01SS3, VCF-1SS3, VCF-2SS3
180 220
VCF-2SS6
128
92
173
92
On On
168
Off
180
Off
5
3 x 20 cable entries in base VCF-4SS3 3 x 20 cable entries in base VCF-4SS6
5.1
208 103
148
103
On On
Off
188
Off
2 x 25 + 1 x 20 cable entries in base Note: These dimensions do not show bracket fixing studs on enclosure side. An additional 12 mm width should be allowed for side bracket fixing studs. Schemes Switch disconnectors Main pole Neutral pole enclosed module module or switch bodies
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2 x 25 + 1 x 20 cable entries in base
2/T1
4/T2
Auxiliary contact blocks VZ-7 VZ-20

13 13 21 23
6/T3
VZN-05
13
VZN-06
21
14
14
22
24
14
22
200
Selection
Load break switch disconnectors type LK3, 40 - 1250 A Selection guide for 3 and 4-pole switch disconnectors
General
The LK3 range of switch disconnectors (lth: 40 A to 1250 A) is designed for use in motor or distribution control panels or as local safety switches to break stalled motor currents in emergency. The larger switch disconnectors are particularly suitable for use as bus couplers. Design The switch disconnector body is of self-extinguishing glass fibre reinforced polyester having high impact strength and tracking index. The quick make/ break contacts are of silver plated copper and designed to give high contact pressure when closed and handle interlocking with enclosure doors is simply achieved with standard shaft extensions available. All LK3 switch disconnectors are suitable for use in tropical conditions (TH finish as standard) due to the stable qualities of the polyester moulding in damp conditions and the use of zinc plated steel component parts. The state of contacts is clearly visible via an indicator incorporated in the front face of the body moulding. IEC/EN 60947-3, VDE 0660, NF C 15100/63130/20040, NBN 63408, FIB 7/75. Special versions for BV and LROS. For further information please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. 27 models of LK3 switch disconnector provide a single source for the majority of applications. 3 and 4 pole versions are available in all ratings with the 4th pole fully rated. As an alternative; a solid, fully rated, 4th pole is available for use as a neutral link in models having thermal ratings 160 A to 630 A. Motor switching (full load current) and Thermal rating 40 A 63 A 80 A 125 A 160 A 250 A 315 A 400 A 630 A 800 A 1250 A AC-23 A rating (400 V) 40 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 125 A 250 A 315 A 400 A 400 A 800 A 1000 A
Range
5
Interlocking with enclosure doors
More detailed information is given later in this publication. In addition, 1 or 2 auxiliary contact blocks may be simply added from the front, each block containing 1 N/O and 1 N/C contact. Handles may be screwed directly to operating shafts for open or interior switching, or a simple door interlock mechanism can be fitted to ensure that the switch disconnector is in the open position before the door can be opened. Four point fixing is provided for LK3 switch disconnectors. The normal position is with terminals horizontal, but it is possible to mount them with terminals vertical if the contact state indicator is positioned above the shaft in the case of 40 A, 63 A and 80 A Ith versions and below the shaft in the case of the remainder. To prevent the need for mounting brackets, shaft extensions are available for deeper enclosures. These are simply clamped to the switch disconnector shaft. Main terminals may be protected against accidental contact by the addition of a clear shroud quickly fitted from the front. The 40 A and 63 A versions have recessed clamp terminals so shrouding is not necessary. As standard, each LK3 switch disconnector kit is supplied with a red handle fitted with a clasp which can be raised and trapped with a number of padlocks in the OFF position preventing operation. Single sided handles are supplied with switch disconnectors having ratings up to 630 A and double sided handles for the remainder. The 40 A and 63 A Ith versions have recessed clamp terminals. 80 A to 1250 A versions have substantial terminal plates: bolts are provided on the 80 A, 125 A and 160 A versions and saddle clamps on the 250 A to 630 A versions. All terminals are in line and fully accessible from the front; 80 A version and above suitable for cable lug or busbar connection. To simplify ordering and stocking a single reference is used for each switch disconnector kit comprising switch disconnector body, door interlocked padlockable handle, shaft extension, terminal shroud and escutcheon plate. First and second auxiliary switches are separately listed as are alternative handles. If desired however, each component of the switch disconnector kit may be ordered separately. Versions of LK3 switch disconnectors are available which are suitable for changeover duty, ideal for duty-standby supply selection, and others for 6 or 8 pole isolation, i.e. for local isolation of star-delta motors. Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Mounting
5.2
Terminal shrouding
Operating handles
Termination
Ordering
6-pole and 8-pole changeover switch disconnectors and mechanically interlocked switch disconnectors
Selection
Selection related to ambient temperature and supply frequency
For standard applications, the switch disconnectors can be used in warm and damp conditions (Humidity: 95 % at 45 C) on either a d.c. or a.c. (50 to 100 Hz) supply. In cases where the ambient temperature or a.c. supply frequency is higher, it is necessary to apply the following correction coefficients to the nominal current: Ambient temperature Supply frequency
Select Ith
In Kt
Select Ith Kf = 0.9 Kf = 0.8 Kf = 0.7 Kf = 0.6 for for for for
In Kt 100 Hz < f 1000 Hz 1000 Hz < f 2000 Hz 2000 Hz < f 6000 Hz 6000 Hz < f 1000 Hz
Kt = 0.9 for 45 C < Q 55 C Kt = 0.8 for 55 C < Q 65 C Kt = 0.7 for 65 C < Q 75 C
Note: When enclosing the switch disconnectors ensure that the internal volume of the enclosure is 5 times that of the switch disconnectors in the case of steel enclosures and 10 times that of the switch disconnectors in the case of insulated enclosures. Specific applications Motor circuits with frequent starting Determine the corresponding Ith Starting method Id (td) In 8 (4 s) 2.5 (6 s) Number of starts per hour (n) without derating 14 95 2 Correction coefficient to apply to Ith for number of starts per hour exceeding n n 3.75 n 9.8 n 1.4
Direct up to 170 kW Star-delta
Direct 12 (10 s) (centrifugal machines)
Primaries of 3-phase distribution transformers Determine the rating of the switch disconnectors according to the making and breaking power Theoretical peak values of transformer switching currents Power (kVA) 50 100 160 250 I making = I nominal Time constant (in seconds) 15 0.11 14.5 0.15 14 0.18 13 0.21 400 12 0.25 630 11 0.29 1000 10 0.34 1250 9 0.36 1600 8.5 0.4
5.2
In and Isc 3-phase LV distribution transformers 230 V 230 V 400 V 400 V 660 V 660 V kVA In Isc In Isc In Isc A kA rms A kA rms A kA rms 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 126 157 200 250 313 400 500 625 790 3 4 5 6.2 7.7 10 12.3 15.4 19.3 72 91 115 145 180 232 290 360 456 1.8 2.3 2.9 3.6 4.5 5.5 7 9 11.2 42 52 66 84 104 134 167 208 263 1 1.3 1.7 2 2.6 3.3 4 5.2 6.5
230 V 230 V 400 V 400 V 660 V 660 V kVA In Isc In Isc In Isc A kA rms A kA rms A kA rms 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1000 1250 1575 2000 2500 24.5 31 33 36 40 580 720 910 1155 1445 1805 14 17.6 22 25 28 31.5 335 416 525 667 835 1040 8 10 12.7 14.5 16 18
Capacitive circuits Select Ith = 1.5 x In of the unit or capacitor bank In (A) of the capacitor bank related to voltage kVAR 10 20 40 400 V 15 30.5 61 500 V 12 23.2 46.5 660 V 9 18 36 50 76 58 45 60 22 67 75 115 84 100 152 115 125 190 145 150 220 170
Characteristics
Switch disconnector type
LK3-
AP
AR
AT3
AT31
Electrical characteristics
Rated thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operational voltage (Ue) 400 V AC (50/60 Hz) 500 V AC (50/60 Hz) 690 V AC (50/60 Hz) 260 V DC Utilisation category AC-22 A / AC-22 B A AC-23 A / AC-23 B A AC-22 A / AC-22 B A AC-23 A / AC-23 B A AC-21 A / AC-21 B A AC-22 A / AC-22 B A AC-23 A / AC-23 B A DC-21 A / DC-21 B A DC-22 A / DC-22 B A DC-23 A / DC-23 B A DC-21 A / DC-21 B A DC-22 A / DC-22 B A DC-23 A / DC-23 B A A V 40 690 Rated operational current (le) A / B (1) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-3 40 / 40 40 / 40 40 / 40 25 / 32 40 / 40 32 / 32 25 / 25 32 / 40 40 / 40 40 / 40 20 / 25 63 / 63 50 / 63 50 / 63 25 / 32 50 / 50 32 / 32 25 / 25 63 / 63 63 / 50 63 / 50 25 / 32 80 / 80 80 / 80 80 / 80 63 / 63 80 / 80 50 / 50 40 / 40 80 / 80 80 / 63 63 / 50 32 / 40 100 / 125 80 / 100 80 / 80 63 / 63 80 / 80 50/ 50 40 / 40 100 / 100 80 / 80 63 / 63 40 / 40 63 80 125
400 V DC
500 V DC
DC-21 A / DC-21 B A 20 / 20 25 / 25 32 / 25 40 / 40 DC-22 A / DC-22 B A DC-23 A / DC-23 B A Use 4 pole switch disconnectors - 2 poles in series. (1) A type category signifies frequent operations. B type category signifies infrequent operations. 50 C x 0.9 ; 60 C x 0.8 ; 70 C x 0.7 A kA rms 320 2.5 400 640 640
Derating factor for higher ambient temperatures Occasional breaking capacity 400 V AC-23 A Short-time rating (1 second)
5.2
Short-circuit make with fuses Dielectric strength, 50 Hz (1 minute) Electrical life (400 V, AC-23) Auxiliary contacts
kA peak 4.5 kV No. of ops. 4 1500 / 300
Common to all switch disconnectors, operating before the main poles on opening of the switch disconnectors. Rating: 5 A at 240 V a.c. Each block contains 1 N/O and 1 N/C contact which must be connected in circuits of the same polarity.
Mechanical characteristics
Operating force Mechanical life Degree of protection conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Ambient temperature range N.m No. of ops. 2 10,000 IP 55 (shaft through door)
- 20 to + 70 (see derating factors for temperatures above 40 C)
Characteristics
BC
BG
BJ
BN
BS
BV
CD
160 750
250
315 1000
400
630
800
1250
Rated operational current (le) A / B (1) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-3 160 / 160 125 / 160 125 / 125 100 / 100 160 / 160 125 / 125 63 / 80 160 / 160 160 / 160 125 / 125 160 / 160 125 / 125 125 / 125 250 / 250 250 / 250 250 / 250 200 / 250 200 / 250 125 / 160 100 / 125 250 / 250 250 / 250 200 / 200 250 / 250 200 / 200 200 / 200 315 / 315 315 / 315 315 / 315 315 / 315 315 / 315 250 / 315 160 / 200 315 / 315 315 / 315 315 / 315 315 / 315 315 / 315 315 / 315 400 / 400 400 / 400 400 / 400 315 / 315 400 / 400 250 / 315 160 / 200 400 / 400 400 / 400 400 / 400 400 / 400 400 / 400 400 / 315 630 / 630 400 / 500 500 / 500 315 / 315 500 / 500 315 / 315 160 / 200 630 / 630 500 / 500 500 / 500 500 / 500 500 / 500 500 / 500 800 / 800 800 / 800 800 / 800 630 / 800 800 / 800 500 / 630 200 / 250 800 / 800 800 / 800 800 / 800 630 / 800 800 / 630 800 / 500 630 / 630 800 / 500 800 / 400 1250 / 1250 1000 / 1000 1000 / 1250 800 / 1000 1000 / 1250 630 / 800 400 / 500 1250 / 1250 1250 / 1250 1250 / 1250 1250 / 1250 1250 / 1250 1000 / 1000 1250 / 1250 1250 /1250 1000 / 1000
125 / 125 200 / 200 315 / 315 400 / 400 500 / 500 125 / 125 200 / 200 315 / 315 315 / 400 500 / 500 125 / 125 200 / 200 315 / 250 400 / 250 500 / 600 Use 4 pole switch disconnectors - 2 poles in series. (1) A type category signifies frequent operations. B type category signifies infrequent operations. 50 C x 0.9 ; 60 C x 0.8 ; 70 C x 0.7 1000 7 12 5 1000 / 200 Common to all switch disconnectors, operating before the main poles on opening of the switch disconnectors. Rating: 5 A at 240 V a.c. Each block contains 1 N/O and 1 N/C contact which must be connected in circuits of the same polarity. 2000 9 17 2520 13 30 8 3200 3200
5
6400 26 50 8000 50 70 10 500 / 100
5.2
6.5 10,000
10
14.5 5000
37 4000
IP 55 (shaft through door) - 20 to + 70 (see derating factors for temperatures above 40 C)
References
Switch disconnector kits (1)

Marking Ingress Thermal protection rating Ith A IP 54 40 Motor switching F.L.C. rating AC-22 A (400 V) A 40 AC-23 A rating (400 V) A 40 No. of poles (S.N. = solid neutral) 3 4 63 63 50 3 4 80 80 63 3 4 125 125 125 3 4
I O
Reference
Weight kg
Non defeatable
LK31-BCii 250 250 250
5.2
630 630 500
4 LK3-CD40 14.600 (1) The kit references indicated above comprise: switch disconnector body, shaft extension (200 mm), door interlock, power terminal screen, red padlockable handle (single sided for LK3-AP/AR/AT and LK31-AT/BC/BG/BJ/BN/BS, double sided for LK3-BV/CD) and escutcheon plate (black inscription on yellow background).
Description First auxiliary contact for signalling applications 1 N/O + 1 N/C
Second auxiliary contact LK3-AP/AR/AT and LK31-AT LA8-ZATA2 0.020 for signalling applications LK31-BC/BG/BJ/BN/BS LA81-ZBPA2 0.020 1 N/O + 1 N/C LK3-BV/CD LA8-ZBPA2 0.020 Other versions Changeover and mechanically interlocked switch disconnectors. For further information please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
I O
LK3-AP30 LK3-AP40 LK3-AR30 LK3-AR40 LK3-AT30 LK3-AT40 LK31-AT30 LK31-AT40 LK31-BC30 LK31-BC40 LK31-BC50 LK31-BG30 LK31-BG40 LK31-BG50 LK31-BJ30 LK31-BJ40 LK31-BJ50 LK31-BN30 LK31-BN40 LK31-BN50 LK31-BS30 LK31-BS40 LK31-BS50 LK3-BV30 LK3-BV40 LK3-CD30
0.535 0.555 0.535 0.555 0.580 0.620 0.580 0.620 1.895 2.105 2.005 2.810 2.925 2.925 4.305 5.075 4.975 4.305 5.075 4.975 4.475 5.395 5.195 9.370 10.990 11.720
IP 65
160
160
160
3 4 3 + S.N. 3 4 3 + S.N.
Defeatable
315
315
315
3 4 3 + S.N.
400
400
400
3 4 3 + S.N. 3 4 3 + S.N.
IP 65
800
800
800
3 4
1250
1250
1000
Auxiliary contacts
For switch disconnectors type LK3-AP/AR/AT and LK31-AT LK31-BC/BG/BJ/BN/BS LK3-BV/CD Reference LA8-SATA1 LA81-SBPA1 LA8-SBPA1 Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.020
References
Load break switch disconnectors type LK3, 40 - 1250 A Selection guide for switch disconnector bodies and handles
Switch disconnector bodies

For switchdisconnector type LK3-AP30 LK3-AP40 LK3-AR30 LK3-AR40 LK3-AT30 LK3-AT40 LK31-AT30 LK31-BC3 LK31-AT40 LK31-BC30 LK31-BC40 LK31-BC50 LK31-BG30 LK31-BG40 LK31-BG50 LK31-BJ30 LK31-BJ40 LK31-BJ50 LK31-BN30 LK31-BN40 LK31-BN50 LK31-BS30 LK31-BS40 LK31-BS50 LK3-BV30 LK3-BV40 LK3-CD30 LK3-CD40 125 160 160 160 250 250 250 315 315 315 400 400 400 630 630 630 800 800 1250 1250 125 160 160 160 250 250 250 315 315 315 400 400 400 630 630 630 800 800 1250 1250 125 160 160 160 250 250 250 315 315 315 400 400 400 500 500 500 800 800 1000 1000 4 3 4 3 + S.N. 3 4 3 + S.N. 3 4 3 + S.N. 3 4 3 + S.N. 3 4 3 + S.N. 3 4 3 4 LK31-AT4 LK31-BC3 LK31-BC4 LK31-BC5 LK31-BG3 LK31-BG4 LK31-BG5 LK31-BJ3 LK31-BJ4 LK31-BJ5 LK31-BN3 LK31-BN4 LK31-BN5 LK31-BS3 LK31-BS4 LK31-BS5 LK3-BV3 LK3-BV4 LK3-CD3 LK3-CD4 0.370 1.100 1.300 1.200 2.000 2.100 2.100 3.430 4.180 4.080 3.430 4.180 4.080 3.600 4.500 4.300 8.000 9.600 10.300 13.150 Thermal rating Ith A 40 40 63 63 80 80 125 Motor switching F.L.C. rating AC-22 A (400 V) A 40 40 63 63 80 80 125 AC-23 A rating (400 V) A 40 40 50 50 63 63 125 No. of poles (S.N. = solid neutral) 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 Reference Weight kg LK3-AP3 LK3-AP4 LK3-AR3 LK3-AR4 LK3-AT3 LK3-AT4 LK31-AT3 0.300 0.320 0.300 0.320 0.330 0.370 0.330
5.2
Handles
Door interlocked handle assemblies. Padlockable Red handle Single sided IP 54 IP 65 Double sided Direct mounted handle assembly LA8-ZBPD8 Single sided Padlockable IP 65 IP 65 LK3-AP/AR/AT and LK31-AT LK31-BC/BG/BJ/BN/BS LK3-BV/CD LK31-BC/BG/BJ/BN/BS LA8-SATD6 LA81-ZBPD7 LA8-ZBPD8 LA81-ZBPD3 0.020 0.069 0.470 0.060
References
Load break switch disconnectors type LK3, 40 - 1250 A Selection guide for accessories
Door interlocks
Description Door interlocks (1) For switch disconnectors type LK3-AP/AR/AT and LK31-AT LK3-BV/CD Reference LA8-SATE LA81-ZBVE Weight kg 0.150 0.340
Shaft extensions
200 mm shaft extension LK3-AP/AR/AT and LK31-AT LK31-BC/BG/BJ/BN/BS LK3-BV/CD 320 mm shaft extension LK31-BC/BG/BJ/BN/BS LA8-SATC LA81-ZBPC1 LA8-ZBPC2 LA81-ZBPC2 0.065 0.415 0.415 0.625
Terminal screens
Terminal screens LK3-AT LK31-BC30 and LK31-AT LK31-BC40/BC50 LK31-BG30 LK31-BG40/BG50 LA8-SATB LA8-SBPB1 LA8-SBPB2 LA8-SBPB3 LA8-SBPB4 LA8-SBPB5 LA8-SBPB6 LA8-SBPB7 LA8-SBPB8 LA8-SBPB9 LA8-SBPB10 0.015 0.020 0.030 0.035 0.050 0.100 0.120 0.145 0.165 0.195 0.225
LK31-BJ30/BN30/BS30 LK31-BJ40/BJ50/BN40/BN50/ BS40/BS50 LK3-BV30 LK3-BV40 LK3-CD30
5.2 Terminal shrouds

Terminal shrouds IP 2X
LK3-CD40
LK3-AT LK31-BC30 and LK31-AT LK31-BC40/BC50 LK31-BG30 LK31-BG40/BG50 LK31-BJ30/BN30/BS30 LK31-BJ40/BJ50/BN40/BN50/ BS40/BS50
LA81-SATB LA82-SBPB1 LA82-SBPB2 LA82-SBPB3 LA82-SBPB4 LA82-SBPB5 LA82-SBPB6
0.015 0.020 0.030 0.035 0.050 0.100 0.120
Mounting accessory
Spacers LK31-BC LK8-ZBPA1 0.001 0.001
LK31-BG LK8-ZBPA2 (1) LK31-AT/BC/BG/BJ/BN/BS have the door interlock incorporated in the handle assembly.
Dimensions
Load break switch disconnectors type LK3, 40 - 1250 A Dimensions for 3 and 4-pole switch disconnectors
The 4-pole versions are illustrated: the 3-pole versions have identical dimensions but the left pole is omitted. LK3-APi and LK3-ARi
Direct operation
54
50.5
40 and 63 A - maximum cable size 16 mm 2
23
1 or 2 pre-break auxiliary contacts
LK3-ATi and LK31-ATi

106.5 fixings : 54 20 8.5 27 M6 x 16 mm 4.5 screw 32.5 27 21.5 27 31 17 14
26.5 45
External operation
Terminal screen
93
fixings : 58
5
70
123
106
91
14
21
65 NOTE : Dimensions from base of switch-disconnector to top surface of copper terminal lugs = 34 mm
Switch-disconnector base 100 1 or maximum of 295 mm with shaft extension
5.2
LK3-APi and LK3-ARi

106.5 fixings : 54 20 32.5 21.5 31
Door drilling
10
50
fixings : 58
14
21
50
70
50
4 x 4.5 31 65
22
32
22
21
65
10
4.5
Dimensions (continued)
Direct operation
= O
fixings : J N X
Y T Terminal screens Alternative terminal shrouds

L O
U = fixings : K =
90
I V P P A1 A P W
H1 F
A2
E C 20
Door drilling
External operation
Alternative terminal shrouds
4 holes 4.5 31
50
Dc
70
LK31BC30 BCi 0 BG30 BGi 0 BJ30 BJi 0 BN30 BNi 0 BS30 BSi 0 LK31BC30 BCi 0 BG30 BGi 0 BJ30 BJi 0 BN30 BNi 0 BS30 BSi 0
Rating 3 x 160 A 4 x 160 A 3 x 250 A 4 x 250 A 3 x 315 A 4 x 315 A 3 x 400 A 4 x 400 A 3 x 630 A 4 x 630 A Rating 3 x 160 A 4 x 160 A 3 x 250 A 4 x 250 A 3 x 315 A 4 x 315 A 3 x 400 A 4 x 400 A 3 x 630 A 4 x 630 A
A 175 205 185 235 230 290 230 290 230 290 M 15 15 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30
A1 140 170 180 230 230 200 230 290 230 290 N 75 75 105 105 135 135 135 135 135 135
A2 35 35 5 5 O 45 75 55 105 75 135 75 135 75 135
B 135 135 160 160 235 235 235 235 260 260 P 36 36 50 50 65 65 65 65 65 65
C 120 120 130 130 165 165 165 165 165 165 R 20 20 25 25 32 32 32 32 40 40
Dc 93-156 93-156 103-166 103-166 138-200 138-200 138-200 138-200 138-200 138-200 S 25 25 30 30 37.5 37.5 37.5 37.5 50 50
E 65 65 75 75 110 110 110 110 110 110 T 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 5 5 5 5 6 6
F 48.5 48.5 58.5 58.5 83.5 83.5 83.5 83.5 83.5 83.5 U 115 115 130 130 205 205 205 205 220 220
H 47.5 47.5 60 60 82.5 82.5 82.5 82.5 70 70 V 28 22 33 33 42.5 37.5 42.5 37.5 42.5 37.5
H1 40 40 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 W 20 20 27 27 37.5 37.5 37.5 37.5 37.5 37.5
J 120 150 160 210 210 270 210 270 210 270 X 9 9 11 11 11 11 11 11 13 13
K 65 65 80 80 140 140 140 140 140 140 Y 20.5 20.5 22.5 22.5 36 36 36 36 36.5 36.5
126.5
L 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 7 7 7 7 7 7 Z 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20
5.2
50
120
90
Dimensions
Direct operation
330
140
86
W
External operation Switch-disconnector base 212 1 or maximum of 412 mm with shaft extension
Terminal screen S Screw T
fixings : 175
28
47
220
1 or 2 pre-break auxiliary contacts
P 12.5
J fixings : G A
O 12.5
5.2
Door drilling
50
9 15
33
16 x 11
31 4 x 4.5
25
8.5
33 50
10
8.5
19
25 63
19
LK3BV30 BV40 CD30 CD40
Rating 3 x 800 A 4 x 800 A 3 x 1250 A 4 x 1250 A
A 280 360 372 492
B 320 320 330 330
C 127.5 167.5 173.5 233.5
G 255 335 347 467
17
H 60 60 65 65
J 80 80 120 120
M 70 70 65 65
O 47.5 47.5 60.5 60.5
P 47.5 47.5 46.5 46.5
R 267 267 271 271
S 50 50 63 63
90
50 U 47 47 47 47
800 A terminal lugs
1250 A terminal lugs
V 127.5 167.5 173.5 233.5
W 6 6 7 7
Characteristics
BS 88 fuse combination switches

Switch disconnector-fuses, type GS1, 32 to 1250 A for use with BS 88 fuses
Switch type
GS1-DDB
GS1-DB
GS1-GB
GS1-HB
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Switch disconnector-fuses Fuses IEC/EN 60947-3 IEC/EN 60269-1 ASEFA/LOVAG, BV, KEMA, LROS TH
Rated thermal current (Ith) Fuse size Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Dielectric strength Rated frequency Rated operational power Cat. AC-23A/AC-23B 50 Hz, 1 mm BS 88 V kV kV Hz c 400...415 V kW 500 V kW 660 V kW c 400...415 V A 500 V A 660 V A a 500 V A A A kA kA A A A 32 CD A1 800 8 6 50/60 11 13 15 32/32 32/32 32/32 20/20 32M50 32M40 80 6.5 256 320 20,000 1500/300 N.m mm2 mm N.m N.m N.m the Fuse 2 2.5/16 2 1.6 1.5 switch. 32 A1 750 8 6 50/60 15 18.5 22 32/32 32/32 32/32 32/32 (3) 32M63 32M63 80 9 256 320 10,000 1500/300 4 6/25 5.4 1.6 6 63 A2-A3 750 8 6 50/60 22 25 35 63/63 63/63 63/63 40/40 (3) 63M80 63M80 80 11 500 630 10,000 1500/300 4 10/25 5.4 3 6 80 A3 750 8 6 50/60 30 35 45 80/80 80/80 80/80 80/80 (3) 63M100 63M100 80 13 640 800 10,000 1500/300 6 10/35 6 3 6
Rated operational current (Ie)
Cat. AC-23A/AC-23B Cat. DC-23A/DC-23B
Fuse protected short-circuit withstand At 50 kA rms presumed (Ue = 415 V) Max. BS 88 fuse rating (type gG or gM) At 80 kA rms presumed (Ue = 415 V) Fuse protected short-circuit making capacity BS 88 fuse links (I rms presumed) Fuse switch cut-off current Rated breaking capacity Rated making capacity Mechanical durability Electrical durability External front operation operating torque Connections Peak I rms at 400...415 V Cat. AC-23B I rms at 400...415 V Cat. AC-23B Number of operating cycles Number of op. cycles Cat. AC/DC-23A/B
5.3
Copper cable c.s.a. min./max. Copper bars - maximum width Maximum torque settings On terminal bolt On fuse bolt On shaft securing bolt Note: Ensure that the cut-off current of the fuse link does not exceed the value given for
GS1-AM microswitch signalling contacts

Rated thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) Durability Fuse protection Cabling Category AC-15 Category DC-13 Number of operating cycles gG A A A mm 10 230 V: 6, 400/415 V: 4, 440 V: 2 48 V: 2, 110 V: 0.6, 220 V: 0.4 Mechanical: 1,000,000, electrical Cat. AC-15: 100,000 6 A max. Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
GS1-AN and GS1-ANT signalling contacts

Rated thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) A Category AC-15 A Category DC-13 A Durability Number of operating cycles Fuse protection gG Cabling Cable c.s.a. min./max. mm2 (1) Maximum fuse diameter: 31 mm. (2) With terminal shrouds or phase separators. (3) 2 poles 20 230 V: 10, 400/415 V: 8, 440 V: 8 48 V: 4, 110 V: 1.2, 220 V: 1 Mechanical: 30,000, electrical Cat. AC-15: 10,000 16 A max. Min.: 1.5, max.: 16 in series by polarity. (4) Use outer poles only.
Characteristics

Switch disconnector-fuses, type GS1, 32 to 1250 A for use with BS 88 fuses
GS1-JB
GS1-LLB
GS1-LB
GS1-MMB
GS1-NB
GS1-PPB
GS1-QQB
GS1-SB
GS1-VB
IEC/EN 60947-3 IEC/EN 60269-1 ASEFA/LOVAG, BV, KEMA, LROS TH
100 A4 (1) 750 8 6 50/60 55 65 90 100/100 100/100 100/100 (2) 100/100 (3) 100M160 (1) 100M125 (1) 80 18 800 1000 10,000 1500/300 6 25/95 20 12.75 12.75 6
160 A4 750 8 6 50/60 55 65 90 160/160 160/160 125/125 (2) 125/125 (3) 100M200 100M200 80 23 1280 1600 10,000 1000/200 6 35/95 20 12.75 12.75 6
160 B1-B2 750 8 6 50/60 55 65 90 160/160 160/160 125/125 (2) 125/125 (3) 100M200 100M200 80 23 1280 1600 10,000 1000/200 6 35/95 20 12.75 12.75 6
200 B1-B2 750 8 6 50/60 110 135 160 200/200 200/200 200/200 (2) 200/200 (3) 200M315 200M315 80 32.5 1600 2000 10,000 1000/200 8 50/95 32 25.5 12.75 6
250 B1...B3 750 8 6 50/60 110 135 160 250/250 250/250 250/250 (2) 200/200 (3) 200M315 200M315 80 32.5 2000 2500 10,000 1000/200 8 95/240 32 25.5 12.75 6
315 B1...B3 800 8 6 50/60 160 200 220 315/315 315/315 315/315 (2) 200/315 (3) 315M355 315M355 80 44 2520 3150 10,000 1000/200 8 95/240 45 25.5 12.75 6
400 B1...B4 800 8 6 50/60 200 270 295 400/400 315/315 250/315 (2) 200/315 (3) 400M450 400M450 80 44 3200 4000 10,000 1000/200 8 185/240 45 25.5 12.75 6
630 C1-C2 1000 12 8 50/60 320 355 400 630/630 500/500 315/400 (2) 400/530 (4) 630 630 80 58 5040 6300 5000 1000/200 42 2 x 150/2 x 300 63 44 25.5 3
1250 D1 1000 12 10 50/60 560 560 600 1000/1000 800/800 630/630 (2) 800/1000 (3) 1250 1250 80 109 8000 10,000 5000 500/100 42 /4 x 185 100 25.5 44 3
5.3
10 230 V: 6, 400/415 V: 4, 440 V: 2 48 V: 2, 110 V: 0.6, 220 V: 0.4 Mechanical: 1,000,000, electrical Cat. AC-15: 100,000 6 A max. Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
20 230 V: 10, 400/415 V: 8, 440 V: 8 48 V: 4, 110 V: 1.2, 220 V: 1 Mechanical: 30,000, electrical Cat. AC-15: 10,000 16 A max. Min.: 1.5, max.: 16
References

Switch disconnector-fuses, type GS1 32 to 1250 A Complete kits (1) for use with BS 88 fuses
3-pole fuse combination switch with black handle assembly

Thermal rating Ith A 32 (Compact) 32 Switching angle
I O I O
BS 88 fuse size A1
AC-22 / 23 rating (415 V) A 32 / 32
Reference
Weight kg
GS1-DDB30
1.150
A1
32 / 32
GS1-DB30
1.450
63 GS1-DDB30 80
I O I O
A2-A3
63 / 63
GS1-GB30
1.800
A2-A3
80 / 80
GS1-HB30
2.450
100
I O
A4 ( 31 mm)
100 / 100
GS1-JB30
2.450
160
I O
A4
160 / 160
GS1-LLB30
3.000
B1-B2
160 / 160
GS1-LB30
3.000
5
GS1-JB30
200
I O
B1-B2
200 / 200
GS1-MMB30
4.150
250
I O
B1...B3
250 / 250
GS1-NB30
4.150
315
I O
B1...B3
315 / 315
GS1-PPB30
5.150
400
I O
B1...B4
400 / 400
GS1-QQB30
5.150
5.3
630
I O
C1-C2
630 / 630
GS1-SB30
18.800
1250 (2) GS1-TB30
I O
D4
1250 / 1000
GS1-VB30
27.000
(1) Kit comprises: Switch fuse body, fuse shroud, bolt sets, shaft extension (200 mm for Compact 32 A, 400 A and above; 250 mm for 32 A up to 400 A) and door interlocked black padlockable handle assembly. (2) Note: Single break device. Pay attention to line/load connections.
References

Switch disconnector-fuses, type GS1 32 to 1250 A Complete kits (1) for use with BS 88 fuses
3-pole fuse combination switch with red/yellow handle assembly

Thermal rating Ith A 32 (Compact) 32 Switching angle
I O I O
BS 88 fuse size A1
AC-22 / 23 rating (415 V) A 32 / 32
Reference
Weight kg
GS1-DDB30R
1.150
A1
32 / 32
GS1-DB30R
1.450
63 GS1-DDB30R 80
I O I O
A2-A3
63 / 63
GS1-GB30R
1.800
A2-A3
80 / 80
GS1-HB30R
2.450
100
I O
A4 ( 31 mm)
100 / 100
GS1-JB30R
2.450
160
I O
A4
160 / 160
GS1-LLB30R
3.000
B1-B2
160 / 160
GS1-LB30R
3.000
200 GS1-JB30R 250
I O I O
B1-B2
200 / 200
GS1-MMB30R
4.150
B1...B3
250 / 250
GS1-NB30R
4.150
315
I O
B1...B3
315 / 315
GS1-PPB30R
5.150
400
I O
B1...B4
400 / 400
GS1-QQB30R
5.150
630
I O
5.3
C1-C2 630 / 630 GS1-SB30R 18.800
1250 (2) GS1-TB30R
I O
D4
1250 / 1000
GS1-VB30R
27.000
(1) Kit comprises: Switch fuse body, fuse shroud, bolt sets, 200 mm shaft extension (250 mm for 32 A up to 400 A) and door interlocked red/yellow padlockable handle assembly. (2) Note: Single break device. Pay attention to line/load connections.
GS1-AH110...140
GS1-AH150...160
5.3
5/40
References

Switch disconnector-fuses, type GS1 Front mounted operators, shaft extensions and accessories
External door interlocked operators

Switch rating A Colour Handle/escutcheon Reference Weight kg
Standard IP 54. External operators, padlockable, with door interlock (I-O) 32 Compact 32...80 100...400 630...1250 Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Black/Black Black/Black GS1-AH1015 GS1-AH1025 GS1-AH115 GS1-AH135 GS1-AH155 0.200 0.200 0.320 0.350 0.700
Standard IP 65. External operators, padlockable, with door interlock (I-O) 32 Compact 32...80 100...400 630...1250 Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow GS1-AH1010 GS1-AH1020 GS1-AH110 GS1-AH120 GS1-AH130 GS1-AH140 GS1-AH150 GS1-AH160 0.200 0.200 0.320 0.320 0.350 0.350 0.700 0.700
Test IP 65. External operators, padlockable, with test facility and door interlock (I-O-T) 32 Compact 32...80 100...400 Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow GS1-AHT1010 GS1-AHT1020 GS1-AHT110 GS1-AHT120 GS1-AHT130 GS1-AHT140 0.200 0.200 0.320 0.320 0.350 0.350
Shaft extensions for external operators

Switch rating A 32 Compact 32...400 630...1250 Shaft length mm 320 320 200 Max. backplate to door dimension mm 368 mm 345 mm 635 mm Reference Weight kg GS1-AE72 GS1-AE2 GS1-AE6 0.200 0.200 0.450
5.3
3-pole terminal protection shrouds for upstream or downstream connector plates (1)
Switch rating A 32...80 100...160 200...400 630...800 1250 (terminal screen) Reference Weight kg Not applicable GS1-AP33 GS1-AP43 GS1-AP63 GS1-AP83 0.100 0.250 0.400 0.300
Fully rated integrated neutral link Separately mounted (2)

Unswitched neutral link to fit around switch operation. Modular switch type. Switch Reference rating A 32...100 (Not Compact 32 A) 160 200...250 315...400 (1) 1 shroud required per side. (2) Cannot be used with U type auxiliary contacts. GS1-AU104 GS1-AU204 GS1-AU304 GS1-AU404 Weight kg 0.350 0.650 0.800 0.800
References

Switch disconnector-fuses, type GS1 Switch bodies
3-pole fuse combination switch bodies for use with BS 88 fuses

Switch rating Ith A 32 (Compact) 32 BS 88 fuse size A1 AC-22 / 23 rating (415 V) 32 / 32 Reference Weight kg GS1-DDB3 0.900
A1
32 / 32
GS1-DB3
1.200
63 GS1-GB3 80
A2-A3
63 / 63
GS1-GB3
1.400
A2-A3
80 / 80
GS1-HB3
2.000
100
A4 31 mm
100 / 100
GS1-JB3
2.000
160
B1-B2
160 / 160
GS1-LB3
2.500
200
B1-B2
200 / 200
GS1-MMB3
3.800
5
GS1-LB3
250
B1...B3
250 / 250
GS1-NB3
3.800
315
B1...B3
315 / 315
GS1-PPB3
4.800
400
B1...B4
400 / 400
GS1-QQB3
4.800
630
C1-C2
630 / 630
GS1-SB3
17.500
5.3
1250 D1 1250 / 1000 GS1-VB3 27.500
References

Switch disconnector-fuses, type GS1 Auxiliary contacts and signalling contacts
Universal auxiliary contacts (1) Current Ie = 10 A. Maximum 8 contact blocks, stacked 2 high maximum
Switch type Modular U type Switch rating A 32...400 Description Contacts Reference Weight kg U type auxiliary contact holder (1) U type N/O auxiliary contact U type N/C auxiliary contact 1 1 GS1-AD20 GS1-AM110 GS1-AM101 0.200 0.010 0.010
Side mounted auxiliary contacts Current Ie = 16 A

Standard configurable contacts (other configurations available) 1 N/O + 1 N/C (2 contacts) 2 N/O + 2 N/C (4 contacts) 32...400 (Not DDBi) 32...400 (Not DDBi) GS1-AN11 GS1-AN22 0.100 0.200
Contacts to operate in On and Test position 1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 32...400 (Not DDBi) 32...400 (Not DDBi) GS1-ANT11 GS1-ANT22 0.100 0.200
Microswitch signalling contacts Current Ie = 10 A

Type of contact 1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C Mounting Switch rating A 630...1250 630...1250 Reference Weight kg GS1-AM3 GS1-AM4 0.030 0.050
Mounts on switch Mounts onto first auxiliary
Castell K type bolt interlock (2)

Switch rating A 32...400 (3) 630...1250 Reference Weight kg GS1-AX6 GS1-AX7
5.3
(1) Cannot be used with integrated neutral. Not required for GS1-DDB3 compact design fuse combination switch. (2) Castell lock not included. (3) Cannot be used with DDB 32 A Compact unit.
Dimensions

Switch disconnector-fuses, type GS1 32 to 1250 A
Switch disconnector-fuses GS1-DDB30 Operator fixing options

96 37.5 additional holder for auxiliary contacts
49.5 105 min 130 with 1 type U aux. contact 155 with 2 type U aux. contact
12.7
3
15
fix. 79.5
98
14
63
5.2
17.5 with A type 30 with U type
88 with 1 type U aux.contact 83 with A type aux.contact 110 with 2 type U aux contact superposed
Switch disconnector-fuses GS1-ii30, GS1-iii30 (excluding GS1-DDB30R)

70 D P A M 21
Operator fixing options
36.5
6
79.2
70.5
90 P
50
o
22.2 Test position
32 - 80 A Rating 3 x 32 A 3 x 63 A 3 x 80 A Fuse size A1 A2-A3 A3 Overall A 137 152 163 dimensions B D 118 94-275 118 100-275 124.5 120 max Switch E 87 92.5 100
0
mountings K L 106 5.4 106 5.4 106 M 57.5 62.5 P 27 32
5.3
70 D P Y T L A M 21 15.5 36.5
H1
79.2
126.5
H1
F E
90 X R H P
50
o
22.2 Test position
100 - 400 A external front Fuse Rating size 3 x 100 A A4 3 x 160 A B1-B3 3 x 200-250 A B1-B2-B3 3 x 315-400 A B1-B4
operation Overall dimensions A B D 164 162 120-275 206 162 145-275 236 195 140-275 278 205 154-275
E F 106.5 44 123 44 132 65 149 65
Switch mountings H H1 K L 108 53 127 5.4 136 53 140 5.4 180 75 162 6.4 192 75 172 6.4
Connection terminals M P R T 66.5 36 20 2.5 80.5 50 20 2.5 90.5 60 32 2.5 121 66 50 3
28.5
1
K
Optional interlock fixings

50
28.5
1
50
B K
Optional interlock fixings
X 8.5 8.5 11 11
Y 19.5 19.5 19.5 20
5/44
50
90
Dimensions

Switch disconnector-fuses, type GS1 32 to 1250 A
Switch disconnector-fuses GS1-ii30

A 16 A1 J 250 76 106 330
Incoming terminal shroud Fuse cover supplied as standard
74
80
183
28.5
250
190
22.2
Optional interlock fixing

98
in
72
Pa d
43 120 120
loc
9 187
50
68
120 62 38.5 162
50
DIN Rating 3 x 630 A Fuse size
BS 630 A A 470 Overall dimensions A1 B B1 C D E H H1 345.5 300 150 348 341-440 268 235 85 Switch mountings Connection terminals H2 J J1 J2 K L M N P R S S1 T U V W X Y 85 250 76 19.5 250 9 38.5 162 80 50 50 50 7 260 45.5 45.5 13 72 BS - 3 x 630 A C1 - C2 Operator fixing options
Incoming (line) Incoming terminal shroud Fuse cover supplied as standard
5
28.5
22.2
Optional interlock fixing

98
16 x 11
Outgoing (load) Without shaft extension
96
50
Line connection: Load connection:
DIN 80 65
BS 80 80
25 == = =
BS - 1250 A Overall dimensions Rating 3 x 1250 A Fuse size D1 A 561 A1 437 B 363 C 433 D 416 to 481
Connection terminal
Switch mountings J 345
17 25
50
5.3
Characteristics
Switching and fused protection devices

Fuse carriers
Type
DF6-AB08
GK1-C
DF6-AB10
GK1-D
GK1-E
GK1-F
Environment
Conforming to standards NF C 61-201 NF C 61-201
IEC/EN 60947-3 IEC/EN 60947-3 IEC/EN 60947-3 IEC/EN 60947-3 IEC/EN 60947-3 IEC/EN 60947-3 Protective treatment TC TC TC TC TC TC
Ambient air temperature for operation with links without derating Operating position in relation to normal vertical mounting position
- 50+ 70
- 50+ 70
- 50+ 70
- 50+ 70
- 50+ 70
- 50+ 70
23
23
23
23
23
23
Fuse size Rated operational voltage with links, a.c. operation V 8.5 x 31.5 400 8.5 x 31.5 400 10 x 38 500 10 x 38 500 14 x 51 690 22 x 58 690
Maximum continuous current (for ambient temperature 40 C) (1) With links With aM cartridge fuses With gG cartridge fuses Permissible short-circuit currents (with links) Maximum peak value (dynamic stress) kA 8 8 8 8 8 8 A A A 20 10 20 20 10 20 32 25 30 32 25 30 50 50 40 125 125 100
5.4
Short-time rating (rms value cos = 0.35) Duration Cabling Maximum c.s.a. (without cable end) Number of conductors Flexible cable Solid cable Tightening torque
kA
ms
100
100
100
100
100
100
1 mm2 mm2 N.m 10 10 1.2
2 6 6
1 10 10 1.2
2 6 6
1 10 10 1.2
2 6 6
1 10 10 1.2
2 6 6
1 25 25 2
2 10 10
1 35 50 2
2 16 25
(1) For use at ambient temperature > 40 C, apply a derating coefficient equivalent to 120 - ambient temperature 80
Schemes: page 5/49
References

Fuse carriers
Fuse carriers (1)

Rated thermal current 20 A Size of cartridge fuse or link 8.5 x 31.5 Composition Sold in lots of 12 12 6 6 4 3 12 12 6 6 4 3 12 12 6 6 4 3 12 12 6 6 4 3 Unit reference DF6-AB08 DF6-N10 GK1-CC GK1-CD GK1-CF GK1-CH DF6-AB10 DF6-N10 GK1-DC GK1-DD GK1-DF GK1-DH GK1-EB GK1-EN GK1-EC GK1-ED GK1-EF GK1-EH GK1-FB GK1-FN GK1-FC GK1-FD GK1-FF GK1-FH Weight kg 0.070 0.080 0.152 0.142 0.213 0.294 0.070 0.080 0.152 0.142 0.213 0.294 0.130 0.140 0.273 0.263 0.394 0.536 0.230 0.250 0.480 0.460 0.690 0.940
DF6-N10
GK1-CF 32 A 10 x 38
1P 1N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2)
50 A
14 x 51
DF6-AB10 GK1-DF
125 A
22 x 58
Blown fuse indicators (neon)

GK1-EN GK1-EF For use on fuse carriers DF6, GK1-C, D and E Operational voltage 80400 V Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference GK1-AS Weight kg 0.003
Fuse carrier assembly strips (3)

GK1-AS Fuse carriers to be assembled Type Number DF6 2 3 GK1-APi GK1-E 4 2 3 4 GK1-F 2 3 Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Unit reference GK1-AP2 GK1-AP3 GK1-AP4 GK1-AP3 GK1-AP5 GK1-AP6 GK1-AP4 GK1-AP6 Weight kg 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.004 0.006 0.004 0.006 0.007
5.4
Detail of assembly clip mounting
4 10 GK1-AP9 (1) Each pole can be marked. A groove is provided on the control lever for this purpose. Marking by means of AR1-Mi01 markers using positioning tool AT1-PA3. (2) N: neutral pole fitted with a locked link as standard. (3) Strips are supplied with all the clips needed for assembling the fuse carriers together.
Characteristics: page 5/46

Fuse carriers
Modular fuse carriers 20 A and 32 A Mounting on rail AM1-DP200 DF6-AB DF6-N10 GK1-i C GK1-i D GK1-i F GK1-i H
36,5
38 60,5 7,5
81
17,5
2x17,5
3x17,5
4x17,5
Modular fuse carriers 50 A Mounting on rail AM1-DP200 GK1-EB GK1-EN GK1-EC GK1-ED GK1-EF GK1-EH
40,5
5
45 78,5 7,5 1,5x17,5 3x17,5 4,5x17,5 6x17,5
Modular fuse carriers 125 A Mounting on rail AM1-ED GK1-FB GK1-FN GK1-FC GK1-FF GK1-FH 4 47 44 82 15 120
5.4
95
2x17,5
4x17,5
6x17,5
8x17,5
Characteristics: page 5/46 5/48
Schemes: page 5/49
Mounting, schemes

Fuse carriers
Modular fuse carriers 125 A Mounting on pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA GK1-FB, FN AF1-EA4
GK1-FC, FD, FF, FH a AF1-EA4
100/110
50 88
26
a a1
GK1a a1
FC 35 61
100/110
FD 35 61
FF 70 96
FH 105 131
Schemes Modular fuse carriers DF6-ABi
5
DF6-N GK1-iC GK1-iD
1 2
GK1-iF
GK1-iH
GK1-iB
GK1-iN
5.4
2 4
2 4 6
Characteristics: page 5/46
References

Cartridge fuses type aM For protection of equipment with current peaks (motors etc.)
Cartridge fuses
Cartridge fuses type DF2-CAiii Cylindrical 8.5 x 31.5 Maximum rated voltage V c 400 Rating A 1 2 4 6 8 10 0.16 0.25 0.50 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 0.25 0.50 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 4 6 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 DF2-BA0100 DF2-BA0200 DF2-BA0400 DF2-BA0600 DF2-BA0800 DF2-BA1000 DF2-CA001 DF2-CA002 DF2-CA005 DF2-CA01 DF2-CA02 DF2-CA04 DF2-CA06 DF2-CA08 DF2-CA10 DF2-CA12 DF2-CA16 DF2-CA20 DF2-CA25 DF2-EA002 DF2-EA005 DF2-EA01 DF2-EA02 DF2-EA04 DF2-EA06 DF2-EA08 DF2-EA10 DF2-EA12 DF2-EA16 DF2-EA20 DF2-EA25 DF2-EA32 DF2-EA40 DF2-EA50 DF2-FA04 DF2-FA06 DF2-FA08 DF2-FA10 DF2-FA16 DF2-FA20 DF2-FA25 DF2-FA32 DF2-FA40 DF2-FA50 DF2-FA63 DF2-FA80 DF2-FA100 DF2-FA125 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Cylindrical 10 x 38
c 500
DF2-EAiii Cylindrical 14 x 51
c 400 c 500
c 400 Cylindrical 22 x 58 DF2-FAii c 690
5.4
c 500
c 400
Solid disconnection links

Link type Cylindrical 10 x 38 tube Cylindrical 14 x 51 tube Cylindrical 22 x 58 tube Rating A 25 Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference DK1-CB92 Weight kg 0.010
50
10
DK1-EB92
0.020
125
10
DK1-FA92
0.020
5/50
References

Cartridge fuses type gG For protection of circuits without high current peaks (distribution loads)
Cartridge fuses
Cartridge fuses type DF2-CNii Cylindrical 8.5 x 31.5 Maximum rated voltage V c 400 Rating A 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 10 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 DF2-BN0100 DF2-BN0200 DF2-BN0400 DF2-BN0600 DF2-BN0800 DF2-BN1000 DF2-BN1200 DF2-BN1600 DF2-BN2000 DF2-CN02 DF2-CN04 DF2-CN06 DF2-CN08 DF2-CN10 DF2-CN12 DF2-CN16 DF2-CN20 DF2-CN25 DF2-CN32 DF2-EN04 DF2-EN06 DF2-EN10 DF2-EN16 DF2-EN20 DF2-EN25 DF2-EN32 DF2-EN40 DF2-FN10 DF2-FN20 DF2-FN25 DF2-FN32 DF2-FN40 DF2-FN50 DF2-FN63 DF2-FN80 DF2-FN100 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Cylindrical 10 x 38 DF2-ENii
c 500
c 400 Cylindrical 14 x 51 c 500
DF2-FNii Cylindrical 22 x 58 c 690
c 500
Solid disconnection links

Link type Cylindrical 10 x 38 tube Cylindrical 14 x 51 tube Cylindrical 22 x 58 tube Rating A 25 Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference DK1-CB92 Weight kg 0.010
5.4
50
10
DK1-EB92
0.020
125
10
DK1-FA92
0.020
5/51
Control
Relays
Control
6/0
Relays
Chapter 6
Control relays
6.1
SK mini control relays 6/2 to 6/7
6.2
K control relays 6/8 to 6/15
6.3
TeSys Model d control relays 6/16 to 6/25
6/1
Characteristics
Control relays
Mini-control relays types CAp-SK and CA2-SKE
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating position To IEC/EN 60068 (DIN 50015) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Without derating Vertical axis C C m Horizontal axis To IEC/EN 60947, VDE 0110 group C, CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508 V 690 IEC/EN 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660 UL, CSA TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct nger contact - 50+ 70 - 20+ 50 2000
Without derating min mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 0.8 Up to 4 contacts max 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end
6
6.1
Tightening torque Terminal referencing
Pozidrive n 1 head To standards EN 50005 and EN 50011

Type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( 50 C) single voltage coil Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc For operation For drop-out Inrush Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil energisation and: - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and: - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour 50/60 Hz coil Standard c coil W ms ms ms ms V CA2-SK a 24400 0.851.1 Uc 0.20 Uc 16 VA 4.2 VA 1.4 816 714 68 810 1200 10 23 VA 4.9 VA 1.5 CA2-SKE CA3-SK c 1272 0.851.1 Uc 0.10 Uc 2.2 W 2.2 W 2.2 1018 812 46 68 1200 10
Schemes: page 6/7
Control relays
Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-control relays and instantaneous contact blocks

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to V 690 690
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947, V VDE 0110 group C, CSA C 22-2 n 14
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency of operational current Short-circuit protection Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC/EN 60947
A Hz
10 Up to 400 10 d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid up to 1200 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230
To IEC/EN 60947 and VDE 0660, gl fuse A
a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current (cos 0.4). V VA VA VA VA 24 48 17 7 1000 48 96 34 14 2050 110/ 127 240 86 36 5000 220/ 230 440 158 66 10000 380/ 400 800 288 120 14000 440 880 317 132 13000
6
6.1
References
Control relays
Mini-control relays types CA2-SK and CA3-SK Mini-control relay type CA2-SKE with alternating contacts
Mini-control relays
- Width of control relays 27 mm. - Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail. - Screw clamp terminals. Control circuit supply Auxiliary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (1)
Weight
kg CA2-SK20 a.c. supply 2

CA2-SK20pp
0.132
CA2-SK11pp
0.132
d.c. supply
CA3-SK20pp
0.132
CA3-SK11pp
0.132
Mini-control relay CA2-SKE with alternating contacts
6
6.1
This mini-control relay with alternating contacts, see function diagram page 6/7, makes it possible to automatically split the operating time between 2 circuits of a redundant system. By regularly energising the safety circuits, this device makes it possible to ensure that they are operating correctly. Width of mini-control relay 45 mm. Fixing by 4 screws Screw clamp terminals. Cannot be tted with front mounted auxiliary contact block. Cannot be tted with coil suppressor module. Auxiliary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (1)
Weight
Control circuit supply
kg a.c. 2
CA2-SKE20pp
0.175
CA2-SKE20
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608).
Mini-control relays CA2-SK Volts a 24 50/60 Hz Code B7 Mini-control relays CA3-SK Volts c Code 12 JD
48 E7
110 F7
120 G7
220 M7
230 P7
240 U7
380 Q7
400 V7
24 BD
36 CD
48 ED
72 SD
Schemes: page 6/7
References
Control relays
Mini-control relays types CA2-SK and CA3-SK Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor module

Clip-on front mounting For Maximum use on number control of blocks relays per contactor Composition Reference
Weight
kg CA2-SK20 LA1-SK11 1 2
LA1-SK20
0.022
LA1-SK02
0.022
LA1-SK11
0.022
Suppressor module
Clip-on fixing and electrical connection on right-hand side, without use of tools For Type For Sold Unit use on voltages in reference lots of control relays CA2-SK and CA3-SK Varistor (1) a and c 24 V48 V
10 LA4-SKE1E Weight
kg 0.003
LA4-SKp1p
6
a and c 110 V250 V
10 LA4-SKE1U
0.003
6.1
Diode (2) c 24 V250 V
10 LA4-SKC1U
0.003
Control relays
Dimensions Mini-control relays CA2-SK and CA3-SK

5 55,5 27 84,5 55,5 27
56
LA4-SK
3,5
LA1-SK (1)
3,5
(1) Only on CA2-SK20 . Mounting mini-control relays CA2-SK and CA3-SK On mounting rail AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200 (7 35 mm)
55,5
27
6
6.1
Dimensions CA2-SKE Mounting On panel
56
56
On mounting rail AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200 (7 35 mm)
68
45
68
45
48-50
58
34-35
Schemes: page 6/7
58
Schemes
Control relays
Schemes CA2-SK20, CA3-SK20 2 N/O
CA2-SK11, CA3-SK11 1 N/O + 1 N/C
13/NO 14 A2 14 24 42 41/NC
13/NO
23/NO
A1
A2
A1
A2
14
CA2-SKE 2 N/O
24
CA2-SKE Function diagram

A1 Energised De-energised 13 Close Open 23 Close Open
13/NO
A2
A1
14
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts 2 N/O 2 N/C LA1-SK20 LA1-SK02

31/NC 33/NO 43/NO 41/NC
24
23/NO
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-SK11

33/NO
32
34
44
42
34
22
21/NO
6
6.1
Characteristics
Control relays
K mini-control relays
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Vertical axis Operating position
1 80
IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660 UL, CSA, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO Horizontal axis
Without derating Connection Screw clamp connections Spring terminal connections Faston connectors Solder pins for printed circuit board Tightening torque Terminal referencing Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Vibration resistance 5...300 Hz Flame resistance Shock resistance (half sine wave, 11 ms) Safe circuit separation
Without derating
Possible positions for CA2-K only, with derating, call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm Min Max 1 x 1.5 2x4 1 x 0.75 2x4 1 x 0.34 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 0.75 1 x 1.5 1 x 0.75 1 x 1.5 2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35 4 mm x 35 microns N.m 0.81.3 Up to 8 contacts TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct nger contact (devices with screw clamp terminals or pins for printed circuit board) C C m - 50...+ 80 - 25...+ 50 2000 2 gn 4 gn Self-extinguishing material V1 Conforming to requirement 2 10 gn 15 gn VLSV (Very Low Safety Voltage), up to 400 V Max to IEC/EN 60947 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Clip With locating device between power circuit and control circuit Philips head n 2 and 6 Conforming to standards EN 50005 and EN 50011 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 (DIN 50016) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Without derating Control relay open Control relay closed Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to NF F 16-101 and 16-102 Control relay open Control relay closed Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC/EN 60536
Control circuit characteristics 6.2

Type of control relay Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( 50 C) single-voltage coil Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles Maximum operating rate Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil energisation and - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts For operation For drop-out 50/60 Hz coil Standard c coil Wide range, low consumption c coil In operating cycles per hour Inrush Sealed W ms ms ms ms ms V CA2-K a 12...690 0.8...1.15 Uc 0.2 Uc 10 10,000 30 VA 4.5 VA 1.3 5...15 10...20 10...20 15...25 2 CA3-K c 12...250 0.8...1.15 Uc 0.1 Uc 20 10,000 3W 3W 3 25...35 30...40 10 15 2 CA4-K c 12...120 0.7...1.3 Uc 0.1 Uc 30 6000 1.8 W 1.8 W 1.8 25...35 30...40 10...20 15...25 2
Maximum immunity to micro breaks
Schemes: page 6/15
Characteristics
Control relays
Contact characteristics of mini-control relays and instantaneous contact blocks

Number of contacts On CAp-K On LA1-K Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 group C Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 Conventional thermal current (Ith) Operational current frequency Minimum switching capacity U min (DIN 19 240) I min Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Overload current For ambient temperature 50 C V V V V A Hz V mA 4 2 or 4 for CA2-K and CA3-K: 2 for CA4-K 690 690 750 600 10 Up to 400 17 5 10 110 80 90 110 > 10 0.5 (see schemes, page 6/15) d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid up to 1200 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230 600 50 25 6 200
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 & VDE 0660, gG fuse A Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Permissible for I rms 1s 500 ms 100 ms A A A A M CAp-K and LA1-K: linked contacts as per INRS, BIA and CNA specications mm
Insulation resistance Make before break distance Operational power of contacts Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times breaking current (cos 0.4). V VA VA VA VA 24 48 17 7 1000 48 96 34 14 2050 110/ 127 240 86 36 5000 220/ 230 440 158 66 10,000 380/ 400 800 288 120 14,000 440 880 317 132 13,000 600/ 690 1200 500 200 9000
Time constant in ms
1 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: Power broken in VA - maximum of 50 operating cycles 16 000 at 10 s intervals (breaking current = making current 10 000 x cos 0.7). 2 Electrical durability of contacts for: - 1 million operating cycles (2a), - 3 million operating cycles (2b), - 10 million operating cycles (2c). 3 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: - maximum of 20 operating cycles at 10 s intervals with current passing for 0.5 s per operating cycle. 4 Thermal limit.
8000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 800 600 500 400 300 200 100 80 60 40 24 48 110 120 220 380 500 440 690 V
Power broken in W
6.2
1000 700 500
3
300 200 100 80 60 50 40 30 20
250
200 140 100
2a 2b
2a
50
2c 2b 2c
20 12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V 10 8 6
References
Control relays
K mini-control relays For control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
a or c
Mini-control relays for a.c. control circuit

- Mounted on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. Control circuit
Auxiliary contacts
Weignt
Consumption CA2-KN40pp Screw clamp connections 4.5 VA 4 3 2 1 2

CA2-KN40pp CA2-KN31pp CA2-KN22pp
kg
0.180 0.180 0.180
Spring terminal connections 4.5 VA 4 3 2 1 2

0.180 0.180 0.180
Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 4.5 VA CA2-KN403pp Solder pins for printed circuit boards 4.5 VA 4 3 2 1 2
4 3 2
1 2
0.180 0.180 0.180
0.210 0.210 0.210
Mini-control relays for d.c. control circuit

- Mounted on 35 mm 7 rails or 4 screw connections. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position.
6
CA3-KN407pp
Screw clamp connections 3W 4 3 2 1 2

0.225 0.225 0.225
Spring terminal connections 3W 4 3 2 1 2

6.2
Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 3W
0.225 0.225 0.225
4 3 2
1 2
0.225 0.225 0.225
Solder pins for printed circuit boards 4 CA3-KN405pp 0.255 CA3-KN315pp 0.255 3 1 CA3-KN225pp 0.255 2 2 (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Control relays CA2-K (0.8...1.15 Uc) (0.85...1.1 Uc) Volts a 12 20 24(2) 36 42 48 110 115 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/ 50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690 Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 Control relays CA3-K (0.8...1.15 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24(2) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 200 220 230 240 250 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD LD MD MPD MUD UD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3. 3W (2) When connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the coil of the control relay, select a 20 V coil (a control voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
Schemes: page 6/15
References
Control relays
K mini-control relays For control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
a or c
Low consumption mini-control relays (a.c. control circuit)

- Mounted on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw xing. - Screws in open ready-to-tighten position. Control circuit Auxililary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (1) Weight
CA4-KN40ppp
Consumption Screw clamp connections 1.8 W 4 3 2 1 2

kg
0.235 0.235 0.235
Spring terminal connections 1.8 W 4 3 2 1 2

0.235 0.235 0.235
Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8 1.8 W 4 3 2 1 2

0.235 0.235 0.235
Solder pins for printed circuit boards 4 CA4-KN405pp 0.265 CA4-KN315pp 0.265 3 1 CA4-KN225pp 0.265 2 2 (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). 1.8 W Control relays CA4-K (Wide range coil: 0.7...1.3 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 48 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 72 SW3 110 FW3 120 GW3
6.2
References
Control relays
K mini-control relays Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per control relay Type of connection Composition Reference Weight
LA1-KN20 Screw clamp 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4

LA1-KN20 LA1-KN02 LA1-KN11 LA1-KN40 (1) LA1-KN31 (1) LA1-KN22 (1) LA1-KN13 (1) LA1-KN04 (1) LA1-KN203 LA1-KN023 LA1-KN113 LA1-KN403 (1) LA1-KN313 (1) LA1-KN223 (1) LA1-KN133 (1) LA1-KN043 (1) LA1-KN207 LA1-KN027 LA1-KN117 LA1-KN407 (1) LA1-KN317 (1) LA1-KN227 (1) LA1-KN137 (1) LA1-KN047 (1)
kg 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Spring terminal
LA1-KN40
Faston connectors 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
Electronic time delay contact blocks
6
LA2-KT2p
Relay output with common point changeover contact, a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum Control voltage: 0.85...1.1 Uc Maximum switching capacity: 250 VA or 150 W Operating temperature: - 10...+ 60 C Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period, 0.5 s after the time delay period
Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per control relay Voltage Type Timing range
Composition
Reference
Weight
6.2
V a or c 24...48 On-delay
s 1...30 1
LA2-KT2E
kg 0.040
a 110...240
On-delay
1...30
LA2-KT2U
0.040
For other electronic timers type RE7, see pages 6/26 to 6/34. (1) Block of 4 contacts for use only on CA2-K and CA3-K
Characteristics: page 6/9 6/12
Schemes: page 6/15
References
Control relays
K mini-control relays Suppressor modules Mounting and marking accessories
Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator

Mounting and connection Clips onto front of relay with locating device. No tools required for connection. Type For voltages
Sold in lots of 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Unit reference
LA4-KE1B LA4-KE1E LA4-KE1FC LA4-KE1UG LA4-KC1B LA4-KC1E LA4-KA1U
Weight kg 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Varistor (1)
a and c 12...24 V a and c 32...48 V a and c 50...129 V a and c 130...250 V
LA4-Kppp
Diode + Zener diode (2)
c 12...24 V c 32...48 V
RC (3)
a 220...250 V
Description Application
Sold in lots of
Unit reference
LA9-D973 DX1-AP25
Weight kg 0.025 0.065
Mounting plates
On 1 4 rail On 2 4 rails
Clip-on xing 110/120 mm xing centres
1 10
Marking accessories
Description LA9-D973 Marker holder Clip-on xing on front face Application
Sold in lots of 100
Unit reference
LA9-D90
Weight kg 0.001
Clip-in markers
4 maximum per relay
Strips of 10 identical numbers 0 to 9
25
AB1-Rp (4)
0.002
6.2
Strips of 10 identical capital letters A to Z
25
AB1-Gp (4)
0.002
(1) Protection by limitation of the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight time delay on drop-out (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillation frequency. Polarised component. Slight time delay on drop-out (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (3) Protection by limitation of the transient voltage to 3 Uc max and limitation of the oscillation frequency. Slight time delay on drop-out (1.2 to 2 times the normal time). (4) Complete the reference by replacing the p with the required character.
Control relays
Mini-control relays CA2-K, CA3-K, CA4-K On panel

LA1-K =

8,65 = = = A1
58
58
50 45
50
35
57
35 45
A2
Contactor pins 1.55 On mounting rail AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200 (7 35 mm)
58
57
45
On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates LA9-D973
DX1-AP25
DZ5-ME5 5
120
57
21
35 45
57
57
27
45
6.2
Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2-KT
Suppressor modules LA4-K
27
25
38
38
22
On mini-control relay
LA2-KT
On mini-control relay
LA4-K
58
38
57
22
57
Schemes: page 6/15
58
110
50
53
Schemes
Control relays
Mini-control relays CA2-K, CA3-K, CA4-K 4 N/O

13/NO 23/NO 33/NO 43/NO
With integral suppression device CA4-K
13/NO
33/NO
43/NO
13/NO
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
14
22
34
44
A1
14
22
32
14
24
34
44
44
43/NO
21/NC
21/NC
31/NC
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks LA1-K for CA2-K, CA3-K, CA4-K 2 N/O LA1-KN20 LA1-KN207
53/NO 63/NO
for CA2-K, CA3-K 1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN11 LA1-KN117

53/NO 61/NC

51/NC 61/NC
4 N/O LA1-KN40 LA1-KN407

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
A2
+A1
3 N/O + 1 N/C
2 N/O + 2 N/C
3 N/O + 1 N/C LA1-KN31 LA1-KN317

53/NO 73/NO 83/NO 61/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C LA1-KN22 LA1-KN227

53/NO 83/NO 84 61/NC 62 71/NC 72
52
62
62
54
74
54
64
62
84
54
54
64
74
1 N/O + 3 N/C LA1-KN13 LA1-KN137

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
84

51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
52
62
72
54
62
72
Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2-KT for CA2-K, CA3-K, CA4-K 1 C/O LA2-KT2
Suppressor modules LA4-KC LA4-KE
82
82
54
6
+ _
A1
16
A2
15
18
6.2
Characteristics
TeSys control relays

Model d control relays
Type
CAD a
CAD c
CAD low consumption
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Overvoltage category III and degree of pollution 3 Conforming to UL, CSA Rated impulse withsand voltage (Uimp) Separation of electrical circuits Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to IEC 68 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage C Conforming to IEC/EN 60947 To IEC 536 and VDE 0106 V 690 690 690
V kV
600 6
600 6
600 6
Reinforced insulation up to 400 V N-F C 63-140, VDE 0660, IEC/EN 60947-5-15 UL, CSA
TH
Front face protected against direct nger contact IP 2X - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70 3000 - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70 3000
Protection against direct nger contact - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70 3000
Operation, conforming to IEC 255 C (0.81.1 UC) For operation at Uc Maximum operating altitude Without derating Without derating, in the following positions C m
Operating positions
30
180
180
30
90
90
1 80
0
Shock resistance (1) half sine wave for 11 ms
Control relay open Control relay closed
10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm2 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 1.7
10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 1.7
10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 1.7
6.3
Vibration resistance (1) 5300 Hz Connection to screw clamp terminals
Control relay open Control relay closed Flexible conductor without cable end Flexible conductor with cable end Solid conductor without cable end Tightening torque
1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors
Connection to spring terminals
1 or 2 exible or solid conductors 12.5 12.5 12.5 without cable end (1) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state, with coil supplied at Uc.
Schemes: page 6/25
Characteristics

Type
CAD a
CAD c
CAD low consumption

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits Operation V 12690 12440 c 572
With coil type:
50/60 Hz
0.81.1 Uc at 50 Hz 0.851.1 Uc at 60 Hz
0.71.25 Uc
0.71.25 Uc
standard, wide range Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50/60 Hz (to 50 Hz) VA
0.30.6 Uc Inrush: 70 Hold-in: 8 With standard coil W
0.10.25 Uc Inrush or hold-in: 5.4
0.10.25 Uc Inrush or hold-in: 2.4
Operating time (at rated control circuit voltage and at 20 C)
Between coil energisation and - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts
ms ms
419 1222
3545 5055
4555 6070
ms ms
412 617
614 20
1015 25
Short duration supply failures
Maximum duration without affecting hold-in of the device In operating cycles per second
ms
Maximum operating rate
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles
With coil type:
50/60 Hz (at 50 Hz) standard c wide range
30
30
30
6.3
Time constant L/R
ms
28
40
Characteristics

Characteristics of instantaneous contacts incorporated in the control relay

Number of contacts Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Rated conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency of operational current Minimum switching capacity U min I min Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short time rating Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 I rms Permissible for 1 s 500 ms 100 ms A A A A M Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Phillips n2 and 6 ms N.m For ambient temperature 40 C V V V A Hz V mA 5 690 690 600 10 25400 17 5 gG fuse: 10 A a: 140, c: 250 100 120 140 > 10 1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation) 1.2 Linked contacts in association with auxiliary contacts LAD-N According to draft standard IEC/EN 60947-4-5 The 3 N/O contacts and the 2 N/C contacts of CAD-N32 are linked mechanically by one mobile contact holder.
Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Tightening torque Non-overlap distance
Linked contacts
6.3
Schemes: page 6/25
Characteristics

Rated operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1)

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical durability (up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making power (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4). V VA VA VA 24 60 16 4 48 120 32 8 115 280 80 20 230 560 160 40 400 960 280 70 440 1050 300 80 600 1440 420 100

1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 4 5 6 7
Current broken in A
8 10 9
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the power. V W W W 24 120 70 25 48 90 50 18 125 75 38 14 250 68 33 12 440 61 28 10

1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V
24 V 48 V 125 V
6.3
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
440 V
0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 4 5 6 7
Current broken in A
8 10 9
LAD-N
LAD-N, LAD-C LAD-8N
LA1-DX, DZ
LA1-DY
LAD-T, LAD-S LAD-R
6.3
LA6-DK or LAD-6K
See page opposite for mounting possibilities according to contactor type and rating
6/20
References

Model d control relays and add-on blocks Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption
Control relays for connection by screw clamp terminals

Contact type Number of contacts Composition Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (1)
Weight
kg Instantaneous 5 5 3 CAD-50pp 2
CAD-50pp (2) CAD-32pp (2)
0.580 0.580
Control relays for connection by spring terminals

Instantaneous 5 5 3 2
CAD-503pp CAD-323pp
0.580 0.580
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals

Number of contacts CAD-32pp For use in normal operation environments 2 1 1 1 1 1 on LH side 1 on LH side 1 on LH side 1 1 2 2 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 1 2
LAD-N11 (2) LAD-8N11 (5) LAD-N20 (2) LAD-8N20 (5) LAD-N02 (2) LAD-8N02 (5) LAD-N22 (2) LAD-N13 LAD-N40 (2) LAD-N04 (2) LAD-N31 LAD-C22 (2) Maximum number per relay Clip-on mounting front side
Composition
Reference
Weight
kg
4 (4)
CAD-503pp
4 (4) 1 Including 1 N/O and 1 N/C make before break.
0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050
With dust and damp protected contacts, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments Number Maximum number Composition Reference of per relay (1) contacts Front mounting protected (3) 2 4 (4) 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
LA1-DX20 LA1-DX02 LA1-DY20 LA1-DZ40 LA1-DZ31
Weight
kg 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.050 0.050
CAD-323pp
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

This type of connection is not possible for contact blocks LAD-8 and blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the digit 3 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD-N11 becomes LAD-N113. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). a.c. supply Volts a 50/60 Hz 24 B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 115 FE7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 125 GD 380 Q7 220 MD 400 V7 250 UD 415 N7 440 RD 440 R7
6.3
d.c. supply (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) Volts c 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 U 0.7 to 1.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD
Low consumption (coils with integral suppression device tted as standard) Volts c 5 24 48 72 Code AL BL EL SL (2) For purchase in bulk packs, see page 1/53. (3) Product tted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals. (4) Blocks with 4 auxiliary contacts cannot be used on low consumption control relays. (5) Cannot be tted on d.c. or low consumption control relays.
References

Model d control relays Add-on blocks
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals
Number and type of contacts 1 N/C and 1 N/O Maximum number per relay Front mounting 1 Time delay Type On-delay Reference Range kg 0.13 s (1) 0.130 s 10180 s 130 s (2) Off-delay LAD-T 0.130 s (Sealing cover: see page 2/91) (Electronic timers: see page 2/89) 10180 s
LAD-R2 (3) LAD-R4 (3) LAD-T0 (3) LAD-T2 (3) LAD-T4 (3) LAD-S2 LAD-R0 (3) Weight
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
0.13 s (1)
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals


Unlatching control Maximum number per relay Front mounting Manual or electric 1 Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control voltage (5)
LAD-6K10p Weight
kg 0.070
Coil suppressor modules

These modules clip onto the side of the control relay and the electrical connection is instantly made. Fitting of an input module is still possible.
LA6-DK
RC circuits (Resistor-Capacitor) p Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. p Voltage limited to 3 Uc maximum and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz maximum. p Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time). For mounting Operational Reference on voltage CAD a a 2448 V a 110240 V
LAD-4RCE LAD-4RCU
Weight kg
0.012 0.012
Varistors (peak limiting) p Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage value to 2 Uc maximum. p Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. p Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). LAD-4 CAD a a 2448 V a 50127 V a 110250 V Bidirectional peak limiting diode
LAD-4VE LAD-4VG LAD-4VU
6.3
0.012 0.012 0.012
p Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage value to 2 Uc maximum. p Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
LAD-4TB 0.012 a 24 V LAD-4TS 0.012 a 72 V (1) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. (2) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact. (3) For purchase in bulk packs, see page 1/53. (4) Power should not be simultaneously applied or maintained to the mechanical latching block and the CAD. The duration of the control signal to the mechanical latching block and the CAD should be 100 ms for AC control and 250ms for DC control. (5) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts a and c 24 32/36 42/48 60/72 100 110/127 220/240 256/277 380/415 Code B C E EN K F M U Q
CAD a
Schemes: page 6/25
References

Model d control relays Accessories and spare parts

Description For marking Sheet of 64 blank legends, self-adhesive, 8 x 33 Sheet of 112 blank legends, self-adhesive, 8 x 12 Strips of blank, self-adhesive legends for printing by plotter (4 sets of 5 strips) SIS Label label creation software for legends LAD-21 and 22 For protection Sealable cover Safety cover preventing access to the moving contact carrier LA9-D901 LAD-T, LAD-R CAD
1 1 LA9-D901 LAD-9ET1
For mounting on
Sold in lots of
Unit reference
Weight kg
CAD, LAD (4 contacts), LA6-DK LAD (2 contacts), LAD-T All products
10 10 35
LAD-21 LAD-22 LAD-24
0.020 0.020 0.200
Multi-language (EN, FR, GE)
XBY-2U
0.060
0.005 0.004
Spare parts: coils a

Specifications p Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 70 VA at 50 Hz, - sealed (cos = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 8 VA at 60 Hz. p Operating range ( < 60 C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc Control circuit Average voltage resistance Uc at 20 C 10 % V V
LAD-9ET1
Reference (1) 50/60 Hz
Weight
kg 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
LXD-1
LXD-1J7 12 6.3 0.26 LXD-1Z7 21 (2) 5.6 0.24 LXD-1B7 24 6.19 0.26 LXD-1C7 32 12.3 0.48 LXD-1CC7 36 LXD-1D7 42 19.15 0.77 LXD-1E7 48 25 1 LXD-1EE7 60 LXD-1K7 100 LXD-1F7 110 130 5.5 LXD-1FE7 115 LXD-1G7 120 159 6.7 LXD-1FC7 127 192.5 7.5 LXD-1L7 200 LXD-1LL7 208 417 16 LXD-1M7 (3) 220/230 539 22 LXD-1P7 230 595 21 LXD-1U7 (4) 230/240 645 25 LXD-1W7 277 781 30 LXD-1Q7 380/400 1580 60 LXD-1V7 400 1810 64 LXD-1N7 415 1938 74 LXD-1R7 440 2242 79 LXD-1T7 480 2300 85 LXD-1X7 600 3600 135 LXD-1Y7 690 5600 190 (1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code. (2) Voltage for special coils tted in contactors with serial timer module, with 24 V supply. (3) This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz. (4) This coil can be used on 230/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz.
6.3

Model d control relays and add-on blocks
CAD a
CAD c or LC (low consumption)
c c1 c2 c3
12,5 (LAD-8)
45 c1 c2 c3
45
CADb c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD-N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6-DK10 c3 with LAD-T, R, S with LAD-T, R, S and sealing cover CAD Panel mounted
32 50 77 84 86 117 129 137 141
323 503 99 84 86 117 129 137 141
CADb c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD-N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6-DK10 c3 with LAD-T, R, S with LAD-T, R, S and sealing cover Mounted on rail AM1-DP200 or DE200
32 50 77 93 95 126 138 146 150
323 503 99 93 95 126 138 146 150
(1)
=
60/70
= = 78
c with cover
CAD a 86
CAD c or BC 95
35
45
c (AM1-DP200) (1) c (AM1-DE200) (1) (1) With cover
CAD a 88 96
CAD c or LC 97 105
(1) 2 elongated holes 4.5 x 9 CAD Mounted on plate AM1-P
AF1-EA4
6.3
c
35
c with cover
CAD a 86
CAD c or LC 95
60/70
Schemes: page 6/25
Schemes

Module d control relays and add-on blocks
Control relays instantaneous 5 N/O CAD-50

13/NO 23/NO 33/NO 43/NO 03/NO
3 N/O + 2 N/C CAD-32

13/NO 43/NO 44 03/NO 04 21/NC 22 31/NC 32
A1
A2
A1
A2
14
24
34
44
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-N11 LAD-8N11 (1)

53/NO 61/NC 153/NO (184) 161/NC (172)
04
14
2 N/O LAD-N20
53/NO 63/NO
LAD-8N20 (1)
153/NO (184) 163/NC (174)
2 N/C LAD-8N02
151/NC (182) 161/NC (172)
LAD-N02
51/NC 52 61/NC 62
54
62
54
64
154 (183)
162 (171)
154 (183)
164 (173)
152 (181)
53/NO
(1) The gures in brackets are for the device mounted on the RH side of the contactor.. 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD-N22
53/NO 83/NO 61/NC 71/NC
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD-N13

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
4 N/O LAD-N40
53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
4 N/C LAD-N04
71/NC 51/NC 61/NC 81/NC
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-N31

73/NO 74 83/NO 84 61/NC 62
54
62
72
84
62
72
82
54
64
74
54
84
72
52
With dust and damp protected contacts 2 N/O + 2 N/C including 2 N/O protected 2 N/C protected 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LAD-C22 LA1-DX20 LA1-DX02
53/NO 87/NO 61/NC 75/NC 53/NO 63/NO
51/NC 61/NC
2 N/O protected (2) LA1-DY20

53/NO 63/NO
62
82
54
2 N/O protected + 2 N/O non protected LA1-DZ40

53/NO 83/NO 63/NO 73/NO
162 (171)
2 N/O protected + 1 N/O + 1 N/C non protected LA1-DZ31

53/NO 73/NO 61/NC 83/NO
54
62
76
88
64
74
62
52
54
64
62
54
84
54
74
54
(2) Device fitted with 4 screening continuity terminals. Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Mechanical latch blocks On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD-T LAD-S LAD-R LA6-DK10
67/NO 55/NC 67/NO 55/NC 57/NO 65/NC
64
84
6.3
E2
A1
56
68
56
68
58
66
A2
E1
Modular contactors
and relays
Modular contactors
7/0
and
relays
Chapter 7
Modular contactors and relays
7.1
GC modular contactors 7/2 to 7/13
7.2
GF impulse relays 7/14 to 7/19
7/1
Presentation and standards
Modular components
Standard contactors, type GC
Presentation
Designed for use in modular panels and enclosures. These contactors feature: p Easy installation - quick clip-on xing onto 35 mm omega rail, - easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals. p Compact size All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in multiples of 17.5 mm (width of one module : 17.5 mm). GC-25pp p User safety - use of materials conforming to strictest re safety standards, - live parts protected against direct nger contact, - completely safe operation, - state indication on front face.
Standards
The GC range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the requirements of new international standard IEC/EN 61095. This standard is specic to: Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar use. It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the safety of equipment and persons in premises and areas accessible to the public. Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC Applications Modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase or 4-phase resistive loads up to 100 A. Power switching The GC range of contactors has multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specic supply is required: - lighting, - heating, - ventilation, - motorised shutters or gates.
7
7.1
Setting-up precautions
Modular components
Setting-up precautions
The contactor supply must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block (GAP-21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals 250 V (ref. 1). When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side, a GAC-5 ventilation 1/2 module must be tted every 2 contactors (ref. 2). It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to separate them from electromechanical units by a space equal to one module (ref. 3) or by 2 ventilation modules GAC-5.
Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the enclosure is > 40 C Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 40 C 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 50 C 14 A 22 A 36 A 57 A 87 A 60 C (1) 13 A 20 A 32 A 50 A 80 A
100 A 100 A (1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be tted
7
7.1
Contactor selection
for lighting circuits
Modular components
Modular contactors
Lighting (Maximum number of lamps depending on the power of each unit)

Presentation of installations according to type of supply: Single-phase circuit, 230 V
L1 N
3-phase circuit, 230 V

L1 L2 L3 230V
230V
3-phase circuit, 400 V (with neutral)

L1 230V L2 L3 N
230V 230V
230V
The maximum number of lamps which can be operated per phase is equal to the number of lamps in the single phase 230 V table divided by 3.
The maximum number of lamps which can be operated per phase is equal to the total number of lamps in the singlephase 230 V table.
Contactor rating indicated below for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole) Fluorescent lamps with starter Single tting P (W) IB (A) C (F) Maximum number of lamps Twin tting P (W) Non corrected 20 40 50 80 110 1.2 7 10 20 32 With parallel correction 20 40 58 80 110 Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
0.39 0.43 22 30 70 100 20 28 60 90
0.70 0.80 13 17 35 56 10 15 30 48
0.19 0.29 0.46 0.57 0.79 5 15 20 40 60 5 15 20 40 60 7 10 15 30 43 7 10 15 30 43 16 5 7 14 20
Non corrected
2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140
With series correction 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140 0.26 3.5 30 46 80 123 0.48 4.5 17 25 43 67 0.78 7 10 16 27 42 0.96 9 9 13 22 34 1.3 18 6 10 16 25
7
7.1
IB (A) C (F) Maximum number of lamps
0.44 20 30 50 75
0.82 11 16 26 42
1.34 7 10 16 25
1.64 5 8 13 21
2.2 4 6 10 16
High pressure mercury vapour lamps Non corrected P (W) IB (A) C (F) Maximum number of lamps 50 0.6 80 0.8 125 250 400 700 With parallel correction 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000 1.5 18 4 6 11 17 2.4 25 3 4 8 12 4 40 2 2 5 7 5.7 60 1 3 5
1.15 2.15 3.25 5.4
0.35 0.50 0.7 7 8 10 9 10 20 30
15 10 8 4 2 1 10 9 20 15 10 6 4 2 15 13 34 27 20 10 6 4 28 25 53 40 28 15 10 6 43 38 IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated operational voltage. C : unit capacitance for each lamp. IB and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers
230V
Contactor selection
Modular components
Modular contactors
Lighting (maximum number of lamps depending on the power of each unit)

Contactor rating indicated below for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole). Low pressure sodium vapour lamps P (W) IB (A) C (F) Maximum number of lamps Non corrected 18 35 55 0.35 1.4 1.4 18 34 57 91 4 9 14 24 5 9 14 24 90 2.1 3 6 9 19 135 3.1 2 4 6 10 180 3.1 2 4 6 10 With parallel correction 18 35 55 90 135 180 0.35 0.6 0.6 0.9 0.9 0.9 5 20 20 26 45 40 14 21 40 60 3 5 10 15 3 5 10 15 2 4 8 11 1 2 4 6 1 2 5 7 Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
High pressure sodium vapour lamps P (W) IB (A) C (F) Maximum number of lamps Non corrected 70 150 250 1 1.8 3 8 12 20 32 4 7 13 18 2 4 8 11 400 4.4 1 3 5 8 1000 10.3 1 2 3 With parallel correction 70 150 250 400 1000 0.6 0.7 1.5 2.5 6 12 20 32 45 100 6 9 18 25 6 9 18 25 2 3 6 9 2 4 8 12 1 2 4 6
Metal iodine or halogen vapour lamps P (W) IB (A) C (F) Maximum number of lamps Non corrected 35 70 150 0.3 0.5 1 27 40 68 106 16 24 42 64 8 12 20 32 250 1.5 5 8 14 21 400 2.5 3 5 8 13 1000 6 1 2 4 5 With parallel correction 39 70 150 250 400 1000 2000 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2.5 6 5.5 6 12 20 32 45 85 60 12 18 31 50 6 9 16 25 4 6 10 15 3 4 7 10 2 3 5 7 1 3 4 1 2 3 5
Incandescent and halogen lamps P (W) IB (A) Maximum number of lamps 60 75 0.26 0.32 30 45 85 125 25 38 70 100 100 150 0.44 0.65 19 28 50 73 12 18 35 50 200 0.87 10 14 26 37 300 1.30 7 10 18 25 500 1000 2.17 4.4 4 6 10 15 2 3 6 8
7
7.1
Halogen lamps used with transformer P (W) IB (A) Maximum number of lamps 60 80 0.26 0.35 105 150 0.45 0.65
9 8 6 4 14 12 9 6 27 23 18 13 40 35 27 19 IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated operational voltage. C : unit capacitance for each lamp. IB and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers.
Contactor selection
for heating circuits
Modular components
Modular contactors
Heating (AC-7a)
Single-phase, 2-pole switching
3-phase switching
U U
Heating by resistive elements or by infra-red radiators, convectors or radiators, heating ducts, industrial furnaces. The current peak between the hot and cold states must not exceed 2 to 3 In at the moment of switch-on. Contactor selection according to power and required electrical life Maximum power (kW) 150 x 103 200 x 103 500 x 103 Electrical durability 100 x 103 in operating cycles Single-phase switching 230 V (2-pole) 3.5 5.4 8.6 13.6 3 4.6 7.4 11.6 18.4 9 14 22 35 55.2 2.2 3.5 5.6 8.8 14 6.5 10 17 26.5 42 1 1.6 2.6 4 6.4 3.2 5 7.5 12 19.2
106 0.8 1.2 1.9 3 4.8 2.2 3.5 6 9 14.4
Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 100 A 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 100 A
7
7.1
3-phase switching 400 V (3-pole)
21.6 10 16 26 41 64.8
Contactor selection
for motor control
Modular components
Modular contactors
Motor control (AC-7b)

Single-phase circuit, 230 V
U
L1
M
L2
3-phase circuit, 400 V
U
L1
V
L2 L3
Contactor selection according to maximum power in kW 230 V single-phase 400 V 3-phase motor capacitor motor (2-pole) 0.55 1.1 2.2 4 2.2 4 7.5 11
Contactor rating (Ith) 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
7
7.1
Characteristics
Modular components
Contactor type
GC16
GC25
GC40
GC63
GC100
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Approvals Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 10 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Flame resistance Conforming to VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Operation Without derating Without derating Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed C C m Conforming to IEC/EN 61095 Conforming to VDE 0110 V V kV 500 500 4 in enclosure IEC/EN 61095, VDE 0660 and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 for aux. contacts NF- USE, VDE, CEBEC, VE Protection against direct nger contact (IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure) TC - 40+ 70 - 5+ 50 (0.851.1 Uc) 3000 30 in relation to normal vertical mounting position 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 3 gn Conforming to IEC/EN 61095
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits In AC-7a (heating) In AC-7b (motor control) Up to Of the operational current 50 C A A V Hz A 2, 3 or 4 16 5 25 8.5 40 15 63 25 100
250 two-pole contactors, 415 three and four-pole contactors 400 16 40 128 40 16 5000 9000 2.5 0.65 6 4 6 1.5 6 4 1.4 25 68 200 62 25 10000 14000 2.5 1.6 6 4 6 1.5 6 4 1.4 40 120 320 100 40 16000 17500 2 3.2 25 16 16 4 25 6 3.5 63 200 504 157 63 18000 20000 2 8 25 16 16 4 25 6 3.5 100 800 250 100 1 10 35 35 35 10 5
7
7.1
Conventional thermal current (lth)
Rated making and breaking capacity Conforming to IEC/EN 61095 (AC-7b) A I rms 400 V 3-phase Permissible short time rating with no current ow for the previous 15 minutes and with 40 C Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit breaker U 440 V For 10 s For 30 s gl fuse Circuit-breaker I2t (at 3 kA rms prospective) At lth and 50 Hz For the above operational currents 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors Power circuit connections 230 V 400 V A A A A2s A2s m W mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Average impedance per pole Power dissipated per pole Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque
Characteristics
Modular components
Contactor type
GC16, GC25 single or 2-pole
GC16, GC25 3 or 4-pole GC40, GC63 2-pole
GC40, GC63 3 or 4-pole GC100 2-pole
GC100 4-pole

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( 50 C) 50 Hz coils 50 or 60 Hz V 12240, for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Operational Drop out
0.851.1 Uc 0.20.75 Uc
Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz
Inrush Sealed
VA VA W ms ms
15 3.8 1.3 1030 1025 106 300
34 4.6 1.6
53 6.5 2.1
106 13 4.2
Maximum heat dissipation Operating times
50/60 Hz Closing C Opening O
Mechanical durability Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature 50 C Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end
In operating cycles In operating cycles per hour
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.4
Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque
1 or 2 conductors
Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 Conventional thermal current (Ith) Mechanical durability Maximum cabling c.s.a. Tightening torque For ambient 50 C Operating cycles Flexible or solid conductor mm2 N.m V V V A 250 500 500 5 106 2.5 1.4
7
7.1
References
Modular components
Maximum current rating category AC-7a A 16
Number of poles
Number of 17.5 mm modules
Sold in lots of
GC-1610pp GC-1620pp GC-1630pp GC-1640pp GC-1611pp GC-1622pp GC-2510pp GC-2520pp GC-2530pp GC-2540pp GC-2511pp GC-2522pp GC-2502pp GC-2504pp GC-4020pp GC-4030pp GC-4040pp GC-4011pp GC-4022pp GC-4002pp GC-4004pp GC-6320pp GC-6330pp GC-6340pp GC-6311pp GC-6322pp GC-6302pp GC-6304pp GC-10020pp
Weight
kg 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 1 2 2 4 1 2 2 4 1 2 2 4 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
12 12 6 6 12 6 12 12 6 6 12 6 12 6 6 4 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 4 6 4 6 4 4
0.110 0.110 0.230 0.230 0.110 0.230 0.110 0.110 0.230 0.230 0.110 0.230 0.110 0.230 0.230 0.350 0.390 0.230 0.390 0.230 0.390 0.340 0.390 0.390 0.340 0.390 0.340 0.390 0.680
GC-2520 25
2 1 2 3 4 1 2 40 2 3 4 1 2 63 2 3 4 1
GC-4040
7
7.1
2 GC-10020 100 2
4 6 2 GC-10040pp 0.780 (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608). Volts 50 Hz 60 Hz 12 J5 J6 24 B5 B6 48 E5 E6 110 F5 F6 220/240 M5 M6
References
Modular components

Number of contacts Number of poles Reference
Weight
kg 2 1 1
GAC-0521
0.016
GAC-05pp
GAC-0531
0.016
GAC-0511
0.016
Accessories
Description For use on contactor Number of modules 1 Operational voltage in V 1248
Sold in lots of 1
Unit reference
GAP-21
Weight
kg 0.090
GAP-2p
Coil suppression block comprising 2 RC circuits
48127
GAP-22
0.090
220240
GAP-23
0.090
Ventilation 1/2 module clips onto 5 rail Cover plates
1/2
10
GAC-5
0.015
GAC-5
GA1-Cp
1/2
10
GA1-C7
0.001
7
7.1
10
GA1-C6
0.001
GW-254
Sealable terminal covers (1 top part + 1 bottom part)
16 or 25 A 3 or 4 contacts 40 or 63 A 2 contacts
GW-254
0.040
GW-632
0.040
40 or 63 A 3 or 4 contacts
GW-634
0.050
GW-63p
7/11
Dimensions
Modular components
Contactors Common side view
GC-1610, 1611, 1620 GC-2502, 2510, 2511, 2520 1 module
GC-1622, 1630, 1640 GC-2504, 2522, 2530, 2540 2 modules
44,4
81
43,7 60 65
17,5
35
GC-4002, 4011, 4020 GC-6302, 6311, 6320 2 modules
GC-4004, 4022, 4030, 4040 GC-6304, 6322, 6330, 6340 3 modules
44,4
81
43,7 60 65
35
52,5
GC-10020 3 modules
GC-10040 6 modules
7
44,4
7.1
43,7 60 65 54 108
81
Dimensions, schemes: page 7/13
Dimensions, schemes
Modular components
Dimensions Auxiliary contacts GAC-0511, 0531 and 0521
Coil suppression blocks GAP-21, 22 and 23
44,4
43,7 60 65
8,75 12,75
43,7 60 65
17,5
Clip-on ventilation module GAC-5
Cover plates GA1-C6
GA1-C7
44
44,4
81
81
65 67
54
11,5
18
11,5
Schemes Contactors GC-pp10

A1 1
GC-pp20
A1 1 3
GC-pp30
A1 1 3 5
GC-pp40
A1 1 3 5 6 R5 7 R7 8
A2
A2
GC-pp11
R1 A1 1
A2
GC-pp22
R1 R3 A1 1 3
GC-pp02
R1 R3 A1
A2
GC-pp04
R1 A1 R3
54
7
7.1
R2
R2
R4
R6
R2
R4
R2
Auxiliary contacts GAC-0521

13/NO 21/NC
GAC-0531
13/NO 23/NO
GAC-0511
13/NO
14
22
14
24
14/NO
12
R4
A2
A2
R8
A2
A2
Selection
Modular components
Impulse relays, type GF16
Presentation
GF impulse relays are designed for use in modular enclosures. They feature: p Easy xing - quick clip-on xing and locking on 35 mm omega rail, - easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive pozidrive screw terminals. p Compact size Units have a common depth of 60 mm and width of 18 mm. p User safety - live parts protected against accidental nger contact, - completely safe operation, - state indication on front face.
Standards
The GF range of modular impulse relays takes into account the requirements of international Standard IEC 669-2. This standard is specic to impulse relays. Conformity to this standard makes it possible to obtain quality labels such as NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc, without any additional tests.
Function Modular impulse relays are designed for opening and closing of circuits which are remotely controlled by impulses. The position is mechanically maintained. These impulse relays are used in lighting circuits when there are more than two switching points. Power switching The GF range of impulse relays can be used in a wide variety of applications, in large buildings, farms, commercial premises, hospitals and private residences, in fact wherever there is a specic lighting installation.
7.2
Selection
Modular components
Lighting
Fluorescent lamps with starter Single tting Power in Watts Number of lamps Twin tting Power in Watts Number of lamps Incandescent lamps Filament lamps Power in Watts Number of lamps Halogen lamps Power in Watts Number of lamps 300 5 500 3 1000 1 1500 1 40 40 60 25 75 20 100 16 200 8 Non corrected 18 70 36 35 58 21 With parallel correction 18 50 36 25 58 16
With series correction 2 x 18 56 2 x 36 28 2 x 58 17
Very low voltage halogen lamps Power in Watts Number of lamps 20 70 50 28 75 19 100 4
Low pressure sodium vapour lamps Non corrected Power in Watts Number of lamps 55 24 90 15 135 10 180 7
High pressure sodium vapour lamps Non corrected Power in Watts Number of lamps 250 5 400 3 1000 1
7.2
Heating
Single-phase 230 V, 2-pole Power in kW 3.6
Characteristics
Modular components
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 and 60947-5-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Approvals Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 10 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Conforming to VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Operation Without derating Without derating Impulse relay open Impulse relay closed Impulse relay open Impulse relay closed C C m V V kV 400 400 4 in enclosure IEC/EN 60669-1 and 60669-2, NF C 61-112 NF-USE, CEBEC, ASE, KEMA, N, S, D, FI VDE pending Protection against direct nger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure TC - 40+ 80 - 20+ 50 2000 90 in relation to normal vertical mounting position Please call 0870 608 8 608 Please call 0870 608 8 608 4 gn 4 gn
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue 250 V) Rated operational voltage Conventional thermal current (lth) Short time rating provided there has been no current ow for the previous 15 minutes with 40 C Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit breaker Average impedance per pole 50 C For 1 s For 10 s For 30 s gl fuse Circuit-breaker I2t (at 3 kA rms prospective) At lth and 50 Hz In AC-7a (heating) A V A A A A A A2s m W 1 or 2 16 250 16 320 96 48 16 5000 4 1 Min 1 conductor 2 conductors Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors Solid cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors Tightening torque Power circuit connections mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.4 Max 6 4 6 4 6 4
7.2
Power dissipated per pole Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible cable without cable end
Characteristics
Modular components

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( < 50 C) Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Operating time Operating threshold, dual frequency 50/60 Hz Inrush at 50 Hz Closing C Opening O Minimum pulse time Mechanical durability Electrical durability In operating cycles In operating cycles AC-21 AC-22 Operating cycles per hour V V VA ms ms ms 12240 V, for other voltages, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608. 0.851.1 Uc 19 70 70 70 106
200,000 100,000 900
Maximum operating rate Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.4
Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque
1 or 2 conductors
7.2
References
Modular components
Function Opening and closing of circuits which are remotely switched by pulse and mechanically maintained. These impulse relays are used in lighting circuits when there are more than two switching points. Maximum current rating category AC-1 A 16 1 No. of poles Coil voltages a 50/60 Hz c
Sold in lots of
Unit reference
Weight
V 12 24 48 110
V 6 12 24 48 110 6 12 24 48 110 6 12 24 48 110

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
kg GF-1610J7 GF-1610B7 GF-1610E7 GF-1610F7 GF-1610M7 GF-1610U7 GF-1620J7 GF-1620B7 GF-1620E7 GF-1620F7 GF-1620M7 GF-1620U7 GF-1611J7 GF-1611B7 GF-1611E7 GF-1611F7 GF-1611M7 GF-1611U7 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110
GF-1610 220 230/240 2 12 24 48 110 220 230/240 1 1 12 24 48 110 220 230/240
7.2
Dimensions, schemes
Modular components
Dimensions GF-1610, GF-1611, GF-1620
81
44 60 64 5,5
18
Schemes GF-1610
A1 1
GF-1611
A1 R1 1
45
GF-1620
A1 1 2 3 4
A2
R2
A2
A2
7.2
Product reference index

and authorised distributors

and
8/0
authorised distributors
Chapter 8
Product reference index Telemecanique authorised distributors
8/1
Reference
Description Accessories for K contactors Clip-in markers for K control relays Marking accessories for LT3 thermistor units Marking accessories for LT6 protection relays Accessories for circuit breakers GV2-M Accessories for circuit breakers GV2-M Connection cables for TeSys model U 1/4 turn sliding clip nuts for contactors LC1-B Fixing screw for contactors LC1-B Notched mounting rails for contactors LC1-B Tego Power Tego Power for Quickfit terminals ASi comms module for TeSys model U ASi diagnostics cable K control relays, a.c. Mini-control relays, a.c. Control relays with alternating contacts K control relays, d.c. Mini-control relays, d.c. K low consumption control relays Control relays, a.c, d.c, low consumption d.c. Magnetic latching contactors Magnetic latching contactors
Page 2/39 6/13 2/257 2/243 3/39 3/39 2/143 2/264 2/264 2/264 2/307 2/305 2/144 2/145 6/10 6/4 6/4 6/10 6/4 6/11 6/21 2/282 2/282
A
AB1
Reference GS1 GS1-A GV1 GV1-F GV1-G GV1-L GV1-V GV2 GV2-A
AB1-AC AB1-VV ABF AF1-CD AF1-VC AM1-EC APP-1 APP-2 ASI L ASI T
C
CA2-KN CA2-SK CA2-SKE CA3-KN CA3-SK CA4-KN CAD CR1-B CR1-F GV2-AF GV2-AK GV2-AP GV2-CP GV2-E GV2-G
D
DA1-T DA1-TT DE1-DS DF2-BA DF2-BN DF2-CA DF2-CN DF2-EA DF2-EN DF2-FA DF2-FN DF6 DK1-CB DK1-EB DK1-FA DR2-SC DR5-TE DV1-R DZ3 PTC thermistor probes 2/257 PTC thermistor probes for LT6 protection relays 2/243 Accessories for enclosures for MCBs GV3-M 3/60 Cylindrical cartridge fuses type aM 8.5 x 31.5 5/50 Cylindrical cartridge fuses type gG 8.5 x 31.5 5/51 Cylindrical cartridge fuses type aM 10 x 38 5/50 Cylindrical cartridge fuses type gG 10 x 38 5/51 Cylindrical cartridge fuses type aM 14 x 51 5/50 Cylindrical cartridge fuses type gG 14 x 51 5/51 Cylindrical cartridge fuses type aM 22 x 58 5/50 Cylindrical cartridge fuses type gG 22 x 58 5/51 Fuse carriers, 20 or 32 A 5/47 Solid disconnection links, cylindrical 10 x 38 tube 5/50 & 5/51 Solid disconnection links, cylindrical 14 x 51 tube 5/50 & 5/51 Solid disconnection links, cylindrical 22 x 58 tube 5/50 & 5/51 Additional resistors for coils for contactors CR1-B 2/289 Economy resistors for contactors LC1-B 2/268 to 2/271 Rectifiers for coils for contactors CR1-B 2/289 Rectifiers for contactors LC1-B 2/268 to 2/271 Accessories for contactors CR1-B 2/291 Control circuit voltage take-off for contactors LC1-F 2/194 Accessories and parts for contactors CR1-B Accessories and spare parts for contactors LC1-B Accessories for magnetic latching contactors Cover plates for GC modular contactors Auxiliary contacts for GC modular contactors Ventilation 1/2 module for GC modular contactors Suppressor modules for GC modular contactors Single-pole thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for protection of industrial equipment control circuits Single-pole + neutral thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for protection of industrial equipment control circuits Single-pole thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for protection of industrial equipment control circuits 2-pole thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for protection of industrial equipment control circuits Accessories for circuit breakers GB2 Modular contactors, standard Modular impulse relays Fuse carriers Accessories for fuse carriers Motor starter adaptor plates for GV2-L or GV2-LE Motor starter adaptor plates for GV2-M or GV2-P 2/291 2/264 2/283 7/11 7/11 7/11 7/11 3/86 3/86 GV2-K GV2-L GV2-LE GV2-M
GV2-ME GV2-P GV2-RT GV2-S GV2-V GV3 GV3-A GV3-CE GV3-ME GV7-A GV7-AC GV7-AD GV7-AP GV7-RE, GV7-V GW
E
ET1-KB EZ2-LB
G
GA1-C GAC-05 GAC-5 GAP-2 GB2-CB GB2-CD GB2-CS GB2-DB GB2-G GC GF-16 GK1 GK1-A GK2-AF
Description Page Switch-disconnector-fuse bodies for use with BS fuses 5/42 Switch-disconnector-fuse kits for use with BS fuses 5/38, 5/39 Auxiliary contacts for GS1 switch-disconnector fuses 5/43 Accessories for enclosures for MCBs GV3-M 3/60 Accessories for circuit breakers GV2-L or GV2-LE 3/37 Accessories for circuit breakers GV2-M or GV2-P 3/37 Accessories for circuit breakers GV2 3/37 Current limiter for circuit breakers GV2-M or GV2-P 3/35 Padlocking device for motor circuit breakers GV3-M 3/60 Accessories for circuit breakers GV2 3/37 Accessories for combination motor starters 4/18 to 4/23 Accessories for circuit breakers GV2-M or GV2-P 3/37 Auxiliary contacts for circuit breakers GV2-M or GV2-P 3/37 Auxiliary contacts for combination motor starters GV2-M 4/18 Auxiliary contacts for combination motor starters GV2-P 4/22 Contacts for circuit breakers GV2-L or GV2-LE 3/41 Electric trips for circuit breakers GV2-L or GV2-LE 3/41 Electric trips for circuit breakers GV2-M or GV2-P 3/33 Adaptor plates for circuit breakers GV2-LE 3/37 Visible isolation blocks for circuit breakers GV2-L 3/35 Visible isolation blocks for circuit breakers GV2-P 3/35 Padlockable external operators for GV2-L or GV2-LE 3/37 Padlockable external operators for GV2-P 3/37 Padlockable external operators for GV2-RT 3/42 Front plates for circuit breakers GV2-M 3/39 Accessories for enclosures for mcb's GV2-M 3/39 Accessories for circuit breakers GV2-M or GV2-P 3/37 Sets of busbars for circuit breakers GV2-L or GV2-LE 3/37 Pre-wired power connection busbar up to 63A for TeSys model U 2/133 Accessories for enclosures for MBCs GV2-M 3/39 Magnetic motor circuit breakers 3/40 Motor protection circuit breakers combined with LC1-D contactors and LR2-D thermal overload relays 3/49 Magnetic motor circuit breakers 3/41 Combination automatic motor starters 4/18 to 4/21 Enclosures for circuit breakers GV2-M 3/39 Motor circuit breakers combined with K contactors 4/16 Motor circuit breakers combined with LC1-D contactors 3/47 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers 3/31 and 3/33 Combination automatic motor starters 4/22 to 4/23 Motor circuit breakers combined with LC1-D contactors 3/48 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers 3/32 Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers, control by rocker lever 3/42 Accessories for enclosures for MCBs GV2-M 3/39 Accessories for circuit breakers GV2-M or GV2-P 3/39 Electric trips for motor circuit breakers GV3-M 3/60 Auxiliary contacts for motor circuit breakers GV3-M 3/60 Enclosures for motor circuit breakers GV3-M 3/60 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers 3/59 Auxiliary contacts for motor circuit breakers GV7-R 3/75 Electric trips for motor circuit breakers GV7-R 3/75 Accessories for contactors LC1-D and LP1-D 2/90 Accessories for motor circuit breakers GV7-R 3/77 Magnetic fault indication devices for mcb's GV7-R 3/75 Rotary handles for motor circuit breakers GV7-R 3/77 RS Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers 3/73 Locking device for motor circuit breakers GV7-R 3/77 Sealable terminal covers for GC modular contactors 7/11 Handles and front plates for main switch disconnectors Operators for main switch disconnectors with 60x60 front plate Handles and front plates for main switch disconnectors Handles and front plates for main and emergency stop switch disconnectors Operators for main switch disconnectors with 45x45 front plate Handles and front plates for main and emergency stop switch disconnectors Handles and front plates for main and emergency stop switch disconnectors Handles and front plates for main and emergency stop switch disconnectors Operators for main and emergency stop switch disconnectors with 60x60 front plate Vario accessories 5/9 5/17 5/17 5/9 5/17 5/17 5/17 5/9 5/17 5/18
K
KAD KAD-1PZ KAF KCC KCC-1YZ
3/87 KCE 3/86 3/87 7/10 7/18 5/47 5/47 3/37 3/37 KCF KCD KCD-1PZ KZ-
8/2
Reference
Description
Page
L
LAD Accessories for contactors LC1 and LC2 2/82, 2/83, 2/85 Auxiliary contacts for contactors LC1-D and LP1-D 2/85 Auxiliary contacts for contactors LC1-F 2/193 Auxiliary contacts for control relays 6/21 Auxiliary contacts for magnetic latching contactors 2/283 Cabling and marking accessories for LC1-D 2/91 Quickfit power connections 2/305 Suppression modules 2/87 Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for LC1-D 2/86 Mechanical latch block for contactors LC1 -D09...D38 2/86 Accessories for thermal overload relays LR9-D 2/115 Auxiliary contacts for contactors LC1-D 2/85 Auxiliary contacts for K contactors 2/37 Auxiliary contacts for K control relays 6/12 Auxiliary contacts for K low consumption contactors 2/56 Add-on blocks for mini-contactors LC1-SK and LP1-SK 2/6 Auxiliary contacts for mini-contactors LC1-SK and LP1-SK 2/7 Auxiliary contacts for mini-control relays CA2-SK 6/5 Auxiliary contacts for K contactors 2/37 Auxiliary contacts for K control relays 6/12 Auxiliary contacts for K low consumption contactors 2/56 Auxiliary contacts for contactors LC1-F 2/193 Suppressor modules for contactors LC1-D and LC1-DT 2/87 Suppressor modules for control relays 6/22 Interface modules for contactors LC1-D and LC1-DT 2/89 Interface modules for contactors LC1-D and LC1-DT 2/89 Auto-Man-Stop modules for contactors LP4-D or LP5-D 2/89 Electronic serial timer modules for contactors LC1-D and LC1-DT 2/89 Interface modules for contactors LC1-D and LC1-DT 2/89 Suppressor modules for K control relays 6/13 Suppressor modules for mini-control relays CA2 or CA3-SK 6/5 Suppressor modules for mini-contactors LC1 or LP1-SK 2/7 Suppressor modules for mini-contactors LC1-SKGC 2/15 Accessories for contactors LC1-D 2/91 Accessories for contactors CR1-F 2/290 Spare parts for contactors LC1-F 2/197 Mechanical latch blocks for contactors LC1-D40 and above 2/86 Mechanical latch blocks for control relays 6/22 Accessories for thermal overload relays LR9-D 2/115 Accessories for thermal overload relays LR9-F 2/230 to 2/231 Accessories for thermal overload relays LR9-F 2/230 Power terminal protection shrouds for thermal overload relays LR9-F 2/231 Accessories for K thermal overload relays 2/46 Auxiliary contacts for contactors LC1-D and LP1-D 2/79 Auxiliary contacts for control relays 6/21 First auxiliary contact for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/30 Terminal screens for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/32 Shaft extensions for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/32 Handles for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/31 Door interlocks for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/32 First auxiliary contact for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/30 Terminal screens for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/32 Second auxiliary contact for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/30 Second auxiliary contact for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/30 Shaft extensions for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/32 Handles for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/31 Terminal shrouds, IP 2X, for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/32 First auxiliary contact for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/30 Terminal shrouds, IP 2X, for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/32 Second auxiliary contact for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/30 Shaft extensions for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/32 Handles for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/31 Door interlocks for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/32 Accessories for circuit breakers GV2-L or GV2-LE 3/37 Accessories for circuit breakers GV2-P or GV2-RT 3/37 Accessories for magnetic latching contactors 2/283 Suppressor modules for contactors LC1-F 2/194 Bar support bracket for contactors LC1-B 2/264 Accessories for circuit breakers GV2-M 3/33 Accessories for contactors LC1-D 2/90 Accessories for contactors LC1-D 2/91 Accessories for control relays 6/23
Reference LA9-D (cont.)
LA9-E LA9-F
LAD-6 LAD-7 LA1-DX LA1-KN LA1-SK LA2-KT LA3-D LA4-D LA4-DF LA4-DL LA4-DM LA4-DT LA4-DW LA4-K LA4-SK LA4-SK LA5-D LA5-F LA6-DK LA7-D LA7-F LA7-K LA8-D LA8-SATA LA8-SATB LA8-SATC LA8-SATD LA8-SATE LA8-SBPA LA8-SBPB LA8-ZATA LA8-ZBPA LA8-ZBPC LA8-ZBPD LA81-SATB LA81-SBPA LA82-SBPB LA81-ZBPA LA81-ZBPC LA81-ZBPD LA81-ZBVE LA9
LA9-K LA9-P LAZ-R9
LC1-B LC1-D
LC1-Di K LC1-F LC1-K LC1-SK LC1-SKGC LC2-D LC2-DT LC2-F LC2-K LC3-D LC3-K LC7-K
LC8-K
LA9-B LA9-D
LE1-GBTHL LE1-GBTO LE1-GBDTS LE1-GBKO LE1-GBKS LE2-GBTO LE2-GBTS LE2-GBKO LE2-GBKS LE3-GBTO LE3-GBTS LK3 LK31 LK8-ZBPA
Description Page Accessories for K contactors 2/39 Accessories for K control relays 6/13 Accessories for thermal overload relays LR9-F 2/231 Parts for assembly of star-delta starters,7.5-132kW 4/5 & 4/7 Sets of power connections for reversing contactors LC2-D 2/82 & 2/83 Accessories for K contactors 2/39 Accessories for K low consumption contactors 2/57 Accessories for contactors LC1-F 2/194 & 2/195 Accessories for thermal overload relays LR9-F 2/231 Power terminal protection shrouds for contactors LC1-F 2/194 Power terminal protection shrouds for reversing contactors LC2-F 2/186 & 2/187 Mechanical interlocks for reversing contactors 2/189 Mechanical interlocks for reversing contactors 2/191 Mechanical interlocks for reversing contactors CR1-F 2/285 Sets of power connections for reversing contactors CR1-F 2/285 Sets of power connections for reversing contactors LC2-F 2/189 Sets of power connections for reversing contactors LC2-F 2/191 Accessories for K contactors 2/39 Accessories for K low consumption contactors 2/57 Configuration software for protection relays LT6 2/242 Add-on blocks for delayed capacitive opening devices 2/209 Delayed capacitive opening devices 2/208 Delayed capacitive opening devices 2/208 for contactors LC1-F & 2/209 Contactors, 750 to 1800 A in category AC-3 2/262 Contactors, 800 to 2750 A in category AC-1 2/263 Contactors, 9 to 150 A in category AC-3, a.c., d.c. 2/74 Contactors, 25 to 200 A in category AC-1, a.c., d.c. 2/76 & 2/77 Parts for assembly of star-delta starters, 4 to 75 kW 4/5 Contactors for switching 3-phase capacitor banks 2/92 Contactors, 275 to 1600 A in category AC-1, a.c. or d.c. 2/184 K contactors, 6 to 12 A, AC-3, a.c., general purpose 2/22 to 2/24 K contactors, 20 A, AC-1. a.c., general purpose 2/26 Mini-contactors, 6 A in AC-3 or 12 A in AC-1, a.c. 2/6 Mini-contactors for use in modular distribution boards 2/14 Reversing contactors, 20 to 200 A, category AC-1, a.c. 2/80 Reversing contactors, 9 to 150 A 2/78 in category AC-3, a.c., d.c. & 2/79 Changeover contactor pairs, 20 to 200 A, AC-1, a.c., d.c. 2/80 Reversing contactors, 185 - 265 A in category AC-3 2/186 Reversing contactors, 275 to 350 A in category AC-1 2/187 K reversing contactors, 6 and 9 A, a.c., general purpose 2/28 K reversing contactors, 20 A, AC-1, a.c., general purpose 2/33 Star-delta starters without isolating device 4/3 Star-delta starters without isolating device 4/3 K contactors, 6 to 12 A in category AC-3, a.c. for sensitive environments 2/24 K contactors, 20 A in category AC-1. a.c., for sensitive environments 2/26 K reversing contactors, 6 to 12 A, a.c., for sensitive environments 2/30 K reversing contactors, 20 A in category AC-1, a.c. for sensitive environments 2/34 Heating and lighting contactors 4/29 D.O.L. starters without disconnect switch 4/26 D.O.L. starters with disconnect switch 4/26 D.O.L. starters without disconnect switch 4/26 D.O.L. starters with disconnect switch 4/26 Reversing D.O.L. starters without disconnect switch 4/27 Reversing D.O.L. starters with disconnect switch 4/27 Reversing D.O.L. starters without disconnect switch 4/27 Reversing D.O.L. starters with disconnect switch 4/27 Automatic star-delta starters without disconnect switch 4/28 Automatic star-delta starters with disconnect switch 4/28 Switch-disconnector bodies for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/31 Switch-disconnector kits for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/30 Switch-disconnector bodies for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/31 Switch-disconnector kits for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/30 Spacers for switch-disconnectors LK3 5/32
8/3
Reference
Description
Page
Reference
Description
Page
L (cont.)
LP1-K LP1-SK LP2-K LP4-K LP5-K LRD LR2-D LR2-K LR9-D LR9-F K contactors, 6 to 12 A in category AC-3, d.c. 2/25 K contactors, 20 A in category AC-1. d.c. 2/27 Mini-contactors, 12 A in category AC-1, d.c. 2/6 K reversing contactors, 6 to 12 A, d.c. 2/28 K reversing contactors, 20 A in category AC-1, d.c. 2/35 K contactors, 20 A, AC-1, low consumption 2/53 K contactors, 6,9,12 A in category AC-3, low consumption 2/52 K reversing contactors, 6 to 12 A, AC-3, low consumption 2/54 K reversing contactors, 20 A, AC-1, low consumption 2/55 Thermal overload relays for LC1-D contactors 2/112 Thermal overload relays for independent mounting 2/113 K thermal overload relays 2/46 Electronic overload relays for LC1-D115 and 150 2/113 Thermal overload relays, class 10 or 20, adjustable from 30 to 630 A 2/228 Thermal overload relays, class 10 or 20,with alarm adjustable from 30 to 630 A 2/229 Overcurrent protection relay 0.3 - 38A 2/124 Thermistor protection units 2/256 Overcurrent protection relay 0.3 - 38A 2/124 3-pole multifunction protection relays 2/242 Pre-assembled power bases for reversing starters 2/131 Power base for reversing DOL starter for customer assembly 2/131 Power base for reversing DOL starter for customer assembly 2/131 Door interlock mechanism 2/133 Terminal block for TeSys model U 2/130, 2/132, 2/143 Terminal block for TeSys model U 2/145, 2/147 Accessories for TeSys model U 2/132 User manual for TeSys model U 2/136, 2/145, 2/147 Splitter box for 8 TeSys model U 2/143 Modbus hub for 8 slaves for TeSys model U 2/147 Accessories for TeSys model U 2/131, 2/143, 2/145, 2/147 Connection cable for LU9 G 2/143 Accessories for TeSys model U 2/133 Accessories for TeSys model U 2/132 Accessories for TeSys model U 2/133 Power base 12A and 32A 2/130 Standard control unit for TeSys model U 2/135 Advanced control for TeSys model U 2/135 Control unit for TeSys model U controller 2/141 Multi function control unit for TeSys model U 2/135 Parallel wiring model for TeSys model U 2/142 Function module for TeSys model U 2/137 Accessories for TeSys model U 2/132 Communication gateways for TeSys model U 2/149 Modbus comms module for TeSys model U 2/146 Current controller 30 - 800A for TeSys model U 2/141 TeSys model U controller base 2/141 Coils for LC1-D and LC1-DT contactors 2/101 Coils for contactors CR1-F 2/286 Coils for contactors CR1-F 2/287 Coils, a.c., for contactors LC1-D40 to D95 2/103 & 2/104 Coils, d.c., for contactors LC1-D115 and D150 2/104 & 2/105 Coils, d.c., for contactors LP1-D40 to D80 2/105 Coils, d.c., wide range, for contactors LC1-D40 to D65 and LP1-D80 2/107 Coils, d.c., for contactors LC1-F115 and F150 2/204 Coils, d.c., for contactors LC1-F185 and F225 2/204 Coils, d.c., for contactors LC1-F265 and F330 2/204 Coils, d.c., for contactor LC1-F400 2/204 Coils, d.c., for contactor LC1-F500 2/205 Coils, d.c., for contactor LC1-F630 2/205 Coils, d.c., for contactor LC1-F780 2/205 Coils, d.c., for LC1F800 2/205 Coils, a.c., for contactors LC1-F115 and F150 2/202 Coils, a.c., for contactors LC1-F185 and F225 2/202 Coils, a.c., for contactors LC1-F265 and F330 2/202 Coils, a.c., for contactor LC1-F400 2/203 Coils, d.c., for contactor LC1-F400 2/206 Coils, a.c., for contactor LC1-F500 2/203 Coils, d.c., for contactor LC1-F500 2/206 Coils, a.c., for contactor LC1-F630 2/203 Coils, d.c., for contactor LC1-F630 2/206
P
PA1 PN1-FB PR4-FB PV1-FA Accessories and spare parts for contactors LC1-B Accessories for contactors CR1-B Accessories for contactors CR1B Accessories for contactors CR1-B Coil cut-out contacts for coils for contactors CR1-B Accessories for contactors CR1-B Accessories for thermistor protection units LT3 Connection cables for TeSys model U Fipio SUB-D connectors 2/264 2/291 2/291 2/291 2/289 2/291 2/257 2/143 2/149
R
RHZ-66
T
TSX C TSX F
V
V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 VBD VBDN-12 VBDN-20 VBF VBFX VCCD VCCDN-12 VCCDN-20 VCCF VCD VCDN-12 VCDN-20 VCF VCFVCFN-12 VCFN-20 VCFN-25 VCFN-32 VCFN-40 VCFX VN-12 VN-20 VVD VVE VW3A 81 VW3A 83 VZSwitch bodies for VARIO 3-pole switch disconnectors, 12 to 25 A 5/14 Switch bodies for VARIO 3-pole switch disconnectors, 32 A 5/14 Switch bodies for VARIO 3-pole switch disconnectors, 40 A 5/14 Switch bodies for VARIO 3-pole switch disconnectors, 63 A 5/14 Switch bodies for VARIO 3-pole switch disconnectors, 80 A 5/14 Switch bodies for VARIO 3-pole switch disconnectors, 125 A 5/14 Switch bodies for VARIO 3-pole switch disconnectors, 175 A 5/14 Main switch disconnector kits for door mounting 5/11 Main switch disconnector kits, 12 A, for door mounting 5/6 Main switch disconnector kits, 20 A, for door mounting 5/6 Main switch disconnector kits for door mounting 5/11 Enclosed 3-pole main switch disconnectors 5/12 Enclosures with black operating handle for Mini-VARIO and VARIO main switch disconnectors 5/13 Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting at rear of an enclosure 5/10 Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors, 12 A, for mounting at rear of an enclosure 5/6 Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors, 20 A, for mounting at rear of an enclosure 5/6 Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting at rear of an enclosure 5/10 Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors for door mounting 5/10 Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors, 12 A, for door mounting 5/6 Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors, 20 A, for door mounting 5/6 Main and emergency stop switch disconnectors for door mounting 5/10 Enclosed 3-pole main and emergency stop switch disconnectors 5/12 Enclosed, 10 A, main and emergency stop switch disconnectors 5/12 Enclosed, 16 A, main and emergency stop switch disconnectors 5/12 Enclosed, 20 A, main and emergency stop switch disconnectors 5/12 Enclosed, 25 A, main and emergency stop switch disconnectors 5/12 Enclosed, 16 A, main and emergency stop switch disconnectors 5/12 Enclosures with red operating handle for Mini-VARIO and VARIO main and emergency stop switch disconnectors 5/13 Switch bodies for 3-pole switch disconnector, 12 A 5/7 Switch bodies for 3-pole switch disconnector, 20 A 5/7 Main switch disconnector kits 5/11 Main and emergency stop switch disconnector kits 5/11 Powersuite software for TeSys model U 2/139 Serial bus connection cables for TeSys model U 2/147, 2/149 Add-on modules for VARIO switch disconnectors 5/14 Terminal protection shrouds for VARIO switch disconnectors 5/19
LR97D LT3-S LT47 LT6-P LU2 B LU2 M LU6 M LU9 A LU9 B LU9 C LU9 CD1 LU9 G LU9 GC LU9 M LU9 R LU9 S LUA 1 LUA L LUB LUC A LUC B/C/D LUC BT/DT/MT LUC M LUF C LUF D/V/W LUF N LUF P LUL C LUT C LUT M LXD LX0-F LX1-D LX4-D
8
LX4-FF LX4-FG LX4-FH LX4-FJ LX4-FK LX4-FL LX4-FX LX4-F8 LX9-FF LX9-FG LX9-FH LX9-FJ LX9-FJ LX9-FK LX9-FK LX9-FL LX9-FL
8/4
Reference
Description
Page
Reference
Description
Page
(cont.) VZNVZN-0 VZN-11 VZN-12 VZN-14 VZN-20
Input terminal protection shrouds Shaft extensions for switch disconnectors Add-on auxiliary contact block module Neutral pole modules, 12 and 20 A Main pole module, 12 A Add-on earthing modules, 12 and 20 A Main pole module, 20 A Coils for contactors CR1-B Coils for contactors LC1-B Magelis operator terminal and cable for TeSys model U Serial bus tap-off for ASi interface ASi accessories Accessories for thermal overload relays LR9-F Coil cut-out contacts for coils for contactors CR1-B Consumption reduction contacts for contactors LC1-B Auxiliary contact blocks for contactors LC1-B Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1-F Profibus SUB-D connectors
5/7 5/18 5/7 5/7 5/7 5/7 5/7 2/288 2/268 to 2/271
W
WB1-KB
X
XBT XZCG XZMC/G 2/136 2/145 2/145 2/230 2/289 2/268 to 2/271 2/264 2/291 2/149
Z
ZA2-B ZC4-GM
490
8/5
Authorised Distributors
Telemecanique in the UK
Town/City Aberdeen
Andover
Ashford
Banbury
Bangor
Barnstaple
Barrow in Furness
Basildon
Belfast
Birmingham
Blackburn
Blackpool
Bradford
Bridgend
Bridgwater
Bristol
Broxburn
8
Burnley Canterbury
Cardiff
Carlisle
Carmarthen
Distributor William Wilson & Co Ltd Hareness Road, Altens Industrial Estate, Aberdeen, Aberdeenshire AB12 3QA William Wilson & Co Ltd Unit 4, Miller Street, Aberdeen, Aberdeenshire AB11 5AN Edmundson Electrical Ltd Unit 1, Pelican Court, 83 New Street, Andover, Hampshire SP10 1DR Rexel Senate 15-16 Mace Industrial Estate, Mace Lane, Ashford, Kent TN24 8EP GAP - Edmundson Unit A Thorpe Mead, Overthorpe Industrial Estate, Banbury, Oxfordshire OX16 8RZ Lockwell Lectrics Ltd The Warehouse, Strand Street, Bangor, Gwynedd LL59 1DH Devondale Electrical Distributors Ltd Unit 10, Oakwood Close, Roundwell Industrial Estate, Barnstaple, Devon EX31 3NJ Edmundson Electrical Ltd 2A Ashburner Way, Walney Road, Barrow in Furness, Cumbria LA14 5UZ WF Electrical Ltd Unit 20 Repton Court, Repton Close, Burntmills, Basildon, Essex SS13 1LR AJ Hurst Ltd Unit 2 Duncrue Crescent, Duncrue Road, Belfast, County Antrim BT9 9BP Hagemeyer Industrial 91 Chester Street, Aston, Birmingham, West Midlands B6 4AE Wilts Wholesale Electrical Co Ltd Units 1-2, Lichfield Road, Aston, Birmingham, West Midlands B6 5TP WF Wades Ltd Fort Street Industrial Estate, Pickup Street, Blackburn, Lancashire BB1 5DW Express Electrical Distributors Ltd 121 Mowbray Drive, Blackpool, Lancashire FY3 7UN Sunbridge Electrical Wholesalers Ltd Duncan Street, Bradford, West Yorkshire BD5 0EQ Total Electrical Distributors Ltd Coegant Close, Brackla Industrial Estate, Bridgend, Mid Glamorgan CF31 2XG Rexel Senate Salmon Parade, Bridgwater, Somerset TA6 5JX H.T.E. Controls Ltd Unit 4 Cala Trading Estate, Ashton Vale Road, Bristol, Avon BS3 2HA Ross Industrial Controls Unit 6, Westerton Road, East Mains Industrial Estate, Broxburn, West Lothian EH52 5AU Power Saver Electrical Unit 1, Burnham Park Trading Estate, Burnham Gate, Burnley BB11 4AJ WF Electrical Ltd (t/a Parker Industrial) Unit 3, Marsh Wood Close, Sturry Road, Canterbury, Kent CT1 1DX AN Supplies Ltd Unit 103, Portmanmoor Road Industrial Estate, East Moors, South Glamorgan CF24 5HB Newey & Eyre Ltd Unit 2A, Magellan Court, Beignon Close, Ocean Park, Cardiff, South Glamorgan CF24 5PB Park Gate & Co Ltd 87 Kingstown Broadway, Kingstown Industrial Estate, Carlisle, Cumbria CA3 0HA Harries Automation Systems House, Unit 8, Trutre Industrial Estate, Llanelli SA14 9UU
Telephone 01224 877522
Fax 01224 879650
e-mail altenselectrical@williamwilson.co.uk
01224 571666
01224 584347
01264 364644
01264 364644
andover.401@eel.co.uk
01233 631976
01233 632121
01295 273340
01295 250487
banbury.248@eel.co.uk
01248 352229
01248 355188
andy@lockwells.fsnet.co.uk
01271 376222
01271 346882
ianbrooke@devondale.net
01229 820117
01229 831576
barrow.131@eel.co.uk
01268 532558
01268 532559
sa038@wfelec.com
02890 770037
02890 777995
sales@ajhurst.com
0121 503 4646
0121 503 4647
0121 328 7070
0121 328 0234
01254 581696
01254 671747
andrewj@wfwades.com
01253 307207
01253 307202
blackpool@express-electrical.co.uk
01274 735329
01274 737539
sunbrd@rexelsenate.co.uk
01656 645333
01656 650518
john.parry@totalelectrical.co.uk
01278 458276
01278 458308
0117 966 5925
0117 966 1940
gary.mitchell@hte.co.uk
01506 858833
01506 855257
01282 448888
01282 448877
01227 452111
01227 464711
02920 483131
02920 482700
02920 495831
02920 471109
01228 552000
01228 552001
electrics@park-gate.co.uk
01544 777460
01544 777490
8/6
Town/City Cheltenham
Chesterfield
Coventry
Crewe
Dartford
Deeside
Derby
Doncaster
Dudley
East Kilbride
Exeter
Gillingham
Guernsey
Halifax
Hereford
Hull
Huntington
Ipswich
Jersey
Kilmarnock
Lancing
Distributor Rifina Co Ltd Unit 7, Alstone Lane Industrial Estate, Cheltenham, Gloucestershire GL51 8HF Eyre & Elliston Ltd Unit 9 & 10 Carrwood Road, Chesterfield Industrial Estate, Sheepbridge, Chesterfield, Derbyshire S41 9QB ETS - GAP Energy House, Falkland Close, Charter Avenue Industrial Estate, Coventry, West Midlands CV4 8AU City Electrical Factors Ltd Unit 2, Valleybrook Business Park, Chapel Street, Off Mill Street, Crewe Cheshire CW2 7DT Kent Electrical Distribution Unit 19 Acorn Industrial Park, Crayford Road, Dartford, Kent DA1 4AL Sunbridge Electrical Wholesalers Ltd Unit 22, Drome Road, Zone 1 Deeside Industrial Park, Deeside, Clwyd CH5 2NY Newey & Eyre Ltd Wetherby Road, Osmaston Park Industrial Estate, Ascot Drive, Derby, Derbyshire DE24 8JP Edmundson Electrical Ltd 1 Potteric Carr Industrial Estate, Potteric Carr Road, Doncaster, South Yorkshire DN4 5NP Worcester Electrical Distributors Unit 18 Enterprise Trading Estate, Pedmore Road, Brierley Hill, Dudley, West Midlands DY5 1TX H.T.E. Controls Ltd 4 Bessemer Drive, Kelvin Industrial Estate, East Kilbride, Lanarkshire G75 0QX Harding Walsall Electrical Grace Road, Marsh Barton Trading Estate, Exeter, Devon EX2 8PU WF Electrical Ltd 6 Chieftain Close, Gillingham Business Park, Gillingham, Kent ME8 0PP Electrical Supplies & Machinery Ltd Lowlands Road, Lowlands Road Industrial Estate, St Sampson, Guernsey, Channel Isles GY3 5XF Edmundson Electrical Ltd 15 Lister Lane, Halifax, West Yorkshire HX1 5AS Worcester Electrical Distributors Unit 12, Grandstand Business Centre, Faraday Road, Hereford, Worcestershire HR4 9NS Burnand XH Components Ltd 42 Havelock Street, Hull, Yorkshire HU3 4JH Hunts Electrical Unit 2, Clifton Road, Huntington, Cambridgeshire PE29 7EJ Control Gear Distributors Ltd 3 Farthing Road, Ipswich, Suffolk IP1 5AP Hagemeyer Industrial Farthing Road, Ipswich, Suffolk IP1 5BL Electrical Supplies & Machinery Ltd Route De St Aubin, St Helier, Jersey, Channel Isles JE2 3LN Riverbank Electrical Ltd 12f Lawson Street, Kilmarnock, Ayrshire KA1 3JP Electrical Trade Supply Unit 4 Marlborough Road, Churchill Industrial Estate, Lancing, Sussex BN15 8TR
Fax
e-mail bil@rifina.com
01246 452284
01246 450332
chesterfield@eyreandelliston.co.uk
024 7646 8259
024 7669 4090
01270 214106
01270 212247
01322 523222
01322 524442
kent.elect@dial.pipex.com
01244 280507
01244 280503
sundee@rexelsenate.co.uk
01332 341831
01332 366610
harjdosanjh@hagemeyer.co.uk
01302 320241
01302 340471
01384 70500
01384 78979
bhill@worcesterelectrical.co.uk
01355 238641
01355 231335
01392 273106
01392 422659
exeter.380@eel.co.uk
01634 373881
01634 379049
01481 246969
01481 246325
01422 359428
01422 330291
halifax.139@eel.co.uk
01432 265500
01432 268866
hereford@worcesterelectrical.co.uk
01482 219596
01482 320435
hull@bxh.co.uk
01480 411655
01480 411654
sales@hes1.co.uk
01473 741404
01473 240904
sbiggs@controlgear.co.uk
01473 748431
01473 240936
01534 875621
01534 733515
01563 537617
01563 571947
01563 537617
01563 571947
8/7
(continued)
Town/City Langley Mill
Leatherhead
Leeds
Leicester
Lincoln
London
Maidstone
Maldon
Malton
Milton Keynes
Newcastle Upon Tyne
Newport
Northampton
Norwich
Nottingham
Peterborough
Plymouth
Poole
Portsmouth
Distributor PCS - Edmundson Unit 1, Cromford Road Industrial Estate, Langley Mill, Nottinghamshire NG16 4FL QED Industrial Controls Ltd Premier House, Randalls Road, Leatherhead, Surrey KT22 7LB Parker Industrial (WF) Unit C, Latchmore Industrial Park, Off Lowfields Road, Leeds, West Yorkshire LS12 6DN BPX Electro Mechanical Co Ltd Ross Walk, Leicester, Leicestershire LE4 5HA Edmundson Electrical Ltd Sunningdale Trading Estate, Dixon Close, Lincoln, Lincolnshire LN6 7UB A&A Electrical 234-362 Maybank Road, South Woodford, London E18 1ET Rexel Senate Unit 3 Farleigh Hill Trading Estate, Torvil, Maidstone, Kent ME15 6RQ Tech Electrical Wholesale Plc Wycke Hill Business Park, Wycke Hill, Maldon, Essex CM9 6WH EGS - Eyre & Elliston Unit 28, Seph Way, York Road Industrial Estate, Malton, North Yorkshire YO17 6YF Hagemeyer Industrial (Barrons) Unit 26 Clarke Road, Mount Farm Industrial Estate, Bletchley, Milton Keynes, Buckinghamshire MK1 1LG Meldrum Electrical Distributors Ltd Blaydon Bank Works, Blaydon on Tyne, Newcastle Upon Tyne, Tyne and Wear NE21 4AU Newey & Eyre Ltd Unit 2B Metro Riverside Park, Gateshead, Newcastle Upon Tyne, Tyne & Wear NE11 9DJ Total Electrical Distributors Ltd The Coachworks, Crawford Street, Newport, Gwent NP9 7AY BPX Electro Mechanical Co Ltd Units 25 & 26, Ross Road Business Centre, Weedon Road, Northampton, Northamptonshire NN5 5AX Walsall Electrical Distributors Unit 3, Marriott Close, City Trade Estate, Norwich, Norfolk NR2 4UX WF Electrical Ltd 2 Whiffler Road, Norwich, Norfolk NR3 2BE BPX Electro Mechanical Co Ltd 386 Haydon Road, Nottingham, Nottinghamshire NG5 1EA Rexel Senate Units 12-13 Castle Park, Queens Drive, Nottingham, Nottinghamshire NG2 1AH Hedley & Ellis Ltd Newark Road, Peterborough, Cambridgeshire PE1 5XW Newey & Eyre Ltd Padholme Road, Peterborough, Cambridgeshire PE1 5UA Western Electrical Wholesale Plymouth Trade Park, Macadam Road, Plymouth, Devon PL4 0RW Newey & Eyre Unit 13 Newtown Industrial Estate, Albion Close, Parkstone, Poole, Dorset BH12 3LL R&M Electrical Group Ltd Building 2-017 PP128, HM Naval Base, Portsmouth, Hampshire PO1 3NJ WF Electrical Ltd Unit 16, The Admiral Park, Williams Road, Portsmouth, Hampshire PO3 5NJ
Fax 01773 531006
e-mail
01372 378666
01372 379667
sales@qedindustrial.co.uk
0113 2523823
0113 2380381
0116 299 9100
0116 299 9100
bpx@bpx.co.uk
01522 522301
01522 533292
lincol.018@eel.co.uk
0208 559 7000
0208 559 7007
01622 691250
01622 692283
01621 850115
01621 855805
info@tech-electrical.co.uk
01653 695170
01653 696489
01908 633200
01908 377986
sales@barrongroup.com
0191 414 5657
0191 499 0153
0191 495 1000
0191 495 1001
01633 214348
01633 254328
steve.harris@totalelectrical.co.uk
01604 759906
01604 759916
bpxnorthants@bpx.co.uk
01603 626242
01603 761420
norwich.344@eel.co.uk
01603 788000
01603 787506
0115 9704531
0115 9422240
0115 9860111
0115 9862841
nottingham@rexelsenate.co.uk
01733 551681
01733 557592
sales@hedleyandellis.com
01733 563261
01733 310764
dave.mackey@hagemeyer.co.uk
01752 268411
01752 600074
sales@western-electrical.co.uk
01202 722299
01202 716161
02392 455500
02392 455045
023 9266 6656
023 9266 0146
bmaw@wfelec.com
8/8
Town/City Preston
Radcliffe
Redditch
Ringwood
Rochdale
Runcorn
Salford
Scunthorpe
Sheffield
Shenley
Southampton
St Albans
Stafford
Stockport
Stockton-on-Tees
Stoke on Trent
Swansea
Swindon
Tamworth
Telford
Distributor Rexel Senate Unit A, Guild Trading Estate, Ribbleton Lane, Preston, Lancashire PR1 5DP JK Electrical Co Ltd Unit 6 Dale Industrial Estate, Dale Street, Radcliffe, Manchester M26 1AD WF Electrical Ltd 84 Heming Road, Washford Industrial Estate, Redditch, Worcestershire B98 0EA R&M Electrical Group Ltd Unit 7, Endeavour Park, Crow Arch Lane, Ringwood, Hampshire BH24 1SF William Wilson & Co Ltd Unit 2-3, Lincoln Close Industrial Estate, Lincoln Close, Rochdale, Lancashire OL11 1NR Newey & Eyre Ltd 19-20 Pimlico Road, Expressway Industrial Estate, Picow Farm Road, Runcorn, Cheshire WA7 4VS Western Automation / ETS Ltd Unit 1, Boston Court, Kansas Avenue, Salford, Manchester M5 2GN Burnand XH Components Ltd 1-2 Bedford Park, Banbury Road, Midland Road Industrial Estate, Scunthorpe, Lincolnshire DN16 1UL Burnand XH Components Ltd Roman Ridge Road, Sheffield, Yorkshire S9 1GA Robert Neill & Co Ltd Unit 1A, Clay Street, Sheffield, Yorkshire S9 2PF Park Electrical Services Ltd 3 Hertford House, Farm Close, Shenley, Hertfordshire WD7 9AB R&M Electrical Group Ltd Units 10-11, Central Trading Estate, Marine Parade, Southampton, Hampshire SO14 5JP Walsall Electrical Distributors Unit 39, City Industrial Park, Southern Road, Southampton, Hampshire SO15 1HG Russells Supplies Ltd 12 North Orbital Commercial Park, St Albans, Hertfordshire AL1 1XB TLA Distributors Unit 4, Brindley Close, Tollgate Industrial Estate, Stafford, Staffordshire ST16 3SU TN Robinson Ltd Daw Bank, Stockport, Cheshire SK3 0EH Bennett & Fountain Group Unit 3 Wellington Court, Concorde Way, Stockton-on-Tees, Cleveland TS18 3TA Teeside Industrial Controls Ltd Portrack Grange Road, Stockton-on-Tees, Cleveland TS18 2PF WF Electrical Ltd 2 Packhorse Lane, Westport Road, Burslem, Stoke on Trent, Staffordshire ST6 4BA Total Electrical Distributors Ltd Unit 2 Abergelly Road, Swansea Industrial Estate, Fforestfach, Swansea, West Glamorgan SA5 4DY Wilts Wholesale Electrical Co Ltd Unit 2, Newcombe Drive, Hawkesworth Trading Estate, Swindon, Wiltshire SN2 1DZ Newey & Eyre Ltd Kepler, Lichfield Road Industrial Estate, Tamworth, Staffordshire B79 7XE Edmundson Electrical Ltd Stafford Park 12, Telford, Shropshire TF3 3BJ
Fax 01772 651226
e-mail
0161 7249715
0161 7259280
01527 510100
01527 510405
trevor.docaston@hagemeyer.co.uk
01425 471261
01425 471012
01706 521212
01706 653443
01928 578141
01928 577748
dave.engleburt@hagemeyer.co.uk
0161 8770910
0161 8770915
etswa.sales@o2.co.uk
01724 282322
01724 282056
scunthorpe@bxh.co.uk
0114 2449988
0114 2561739
sheffield@bxh.co.uk
0114 2561666
0114 2561600
robertneill@eel.co.uk
01923 853434
01923 289888
02380 231800
02380 231818
kdaglish@rm-electrical.co.uk
02380 637033
02380 221806
01727 850517
01727 846662
01785 245355
01785 245322
0161 4809141
0161 4773074
stockport@tn.co.uk
01642 618811
01642 618123
stockton-on-tees.538@eel.co.uk
01642 672685
01642 673996
enquiries@ticdirect.com
01782 838463
01782 811420
01792 580266
01792 561358
sales@totalelectrical.co.uk
01793 514300
01793 514303
01827 57571
01827 52571
steve.smith5@hagemeyer.co.uk
01952 291000
01952 292211
telford.044@eel.co.uk
8/9
(continued)
Town/City Tewkesbury
Trowbridge
Truro
Walsall
Warrington
West Bromwich
West Drayton
Witham
Worcester
Distributor Lockwell Lectrics Ltd Unit G1 & G3, Northway Trading Estate, Tewkesbury, Gloucestershire GL20 8JH Wilts Wholesale Electrical Co Ltd Kennet Way, Canal Road Industrial Estate, Trowbridge, Wiltshire BA14 8BN Western Electrical Wholesale Unit 7, Threemilestone Industrial Estate, Truro, Cornwall TR4 9LD H.T.E. - GAP Unit 1, Bentley Green, Bentley Road North, Walsall, West Midlands WS2 0WB H.T.E. Controls Ltd Unit 8, Bishops Court, Calver Road, Winwick Quay, Warrington, Cheshire WA2 8QY Edmundson Electrical Ltd Doranda Way, West Bromwich, West Midlands B71 4LB Edmundson Electrical Ltd Unit 1, Skyport Drive, Harmondsworth, West Drayton UB7 0LB Western Automation Colemans Bridge, Witham, Essex CM8 3HP Worcester Electrical Distributors Ltd Unit F7 & 8, Blackpole Trading Estate East, Worcester, Worcestershire WR3 8SG
Fax 01684 274084
e-mail
01225 777300
01225 777001
wilts@trowbridge.co.uk
01872 223939
01872 223170
nigel.hall@western-electrical.co.uk
01922 618816
01922 618817
01925 231133
01925 240457
nigel.bithell@hte.co.uk
0121 5536070
0121 5533021
020 8607 5840
020 8607 5841
01376 511808
01376 500862
01905 755110
01905 755449
sales@worcesterelectrical.co.uk
8/10
Notes
Notes
Nationwide support on one number call the Customer Information Centre on
0870 608 8 608

Fax 0870 608 8 606
Schneider Electrics local support
Schneider Electric is committed to supporting its customers at every stage of a project. Our 180 sales engineers, the largest dedicated sales force in the UK electrical industry, operate from 4 customer support centres. Our sales engineers are skilled at assessing individual requirements and combined with the expert support of our product specialists, will develop the most effective and economical answer taking relevant regulations and standards fully into account. To access the expertise of the Schneider Electric group, please call 0870 608 8 608. Each customer support centre includes facilities for demonstrations and training, and presentation rooms fully equipped with audio visual and video, providing excellent meeting facilities.
Merlin Gerin is a world leader in the manufacture and supply of high, medium and low voltage products for the distribution, protection, control and management of electrical systems and is focused on the needs of both the commercial and industrial sectors. The newly launched VDI Network Solutions offer provides flexible, configurable ethernet systems for all communication needs.
Square D is a total quality organisation and its business is to put electricity to work productively and effectively, protecting people, buildings and equipment. Its low voltage electrical distribution equipment, systems and services are used extensively in residential and commercial applications.
Telemecanique is a UK market leader and world expert in automation and control. It provides complete solutions, with its range of components, Modicon range of high technology programmable controllers (PLCs), multiple fieldbus and ethernet communication networks, HMI, motion control systems, variable speed drives and communications software. In addition, it offers power distribution through prefabricated busbar trunking.
Local customer support centres

Scotland Schneider Electric Ltd Unit 18 Claremont Centre 112a Cornwall Street South Kinning Park Glasgow G41 1AA South West Schneider Electric Ltd PO Box 41 Langley Road Chippenham Wiltshire SN15 1JJ North West Schneider Electric Ltd First Floor Market House Church Street Wilmslow Cheshire SK9 1AY
Product showrooms
Industrial systems and solutions showroom Schneider Electric Ltd, University of Warwick Science Park, Sir William Lyons Road, Coventry CV4 7EZ Building systems and solutions showroom Schneider Electric Ltd, Stafford Park 5, Telford, Shropshire TF3 3BL Energy and Infrastructure systems and solutions showroom Schneider Electric Ltd, 123 Jack Lane, Hunslet, Leeds LS10 1BS
member of .co.uk

www.schneider.co.uk
ICC 1740.V3 JUN 2006

Telemecanique Power Control &amp; Protection Components Technical

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Telemecanique Power Control &amp; Protection Components Technical

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power control and protection components technical catalogue

Power control and protection components technical catalogue

Chapter 4: Motor starters

Chapter 5: Switching and fused protection devices

Chapter 6: Control relays

Chapter 7: Modular contactors and relays

Chapter 8: Product reference index and Telemecanique authorised distributors

Technical and application guidance

Definitions and comments Protective treatment and degrees of protection

1/2 and 1/3 1/4 to 1/7

Standards and approvals

1/8 and 1/9

Duty conditions, voltage and full load currents

Contactor utilisation categories

AC1 contactor selection guide

1/14 and 1/15

AC3 contactor selection guide

AC2 and AC4 contactor selection guide

DC1 to DC5 contactor selection guide

Selection of contactors for rotor circuits of slip-ring motors

1/28 and 1/29

Contactors for lighting circuits

Contactors for heating circuits

1/34 and 1/35

Contactors for transformer primary switching

Contactors for capacitor switching

Motor starter co-ordination tables

Long distance remote control

1/52 and 1/53

Definitions and comments

Technical and application guidance

Ambient air temperature

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Definitions and comments

Technical and application guidance

Contactor utilisation categories conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1

Technical and application guidance

All climates treatment TC

Technical and application guidance

TH treatment for hot and humid environments

Protective treatment selection guide

No dripping water or condensation Presence of dripping water or condensation

Frequent switching off for periods of more than 1 day Continuous

No Yes Unnecessary Unnecessary

Temperate Equatorial Unimportant Unimportant Temperate Equatorial Temperate Equatorial Unimportant

Outdoors (sheltered) Exposed outdoors or near the sea

Frequent switching off for periods of more than 1 day

Special precautions for electronic equipment

Technical and application guidance

Non-protected Protected against vertical dripping water, (condensation).

Protected against dripping water at an angle of up to 15.

Protected against powerful jets of water and waves.

Degrees of protection against mechanical impact

2 characteristic numerals: corresponding to a value of impact energy.

With the back of the hand.

0.15 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.7

Product standards and approvals

Technical and application guidance

Product standards and approvals

Technical and application guidance

Marine classification authorities

Standard motor duty conditions

Technical and application guidance

Technical and application guidance

Telemecanique Power Control & Protection Components Technical

Telemecanique Power Control & Protection Components Technical